nae m3 Rt At

ware
re

at oO ae
fe BAD Fe,
G SPAT ¥
aati tok Degen te Seta!
; ~ , ~ BAN 2 Aah Oe
Pe 3 Z , 7 ‘ x0 ae a ee
ee Oe ae * ae > Penk A
* ORO dh Fat Bd eT ~ PRG - “pte Og : .
a RP SE SR AAR F
Me ORHAN Ed GE Om Peek : :
eer te ae
Rwarhe
%

an te
BS Srew
FOS ee PP

4.0.4.7
ee
wane ee c
a
Vingh At ta Soette
Ces ad
n Pi Oe! Fe on

Lae Sow OB ey
ip FD Ben
ee Fett fo a Bal Pe Foot te

SoA ete

ee ie
2 > oe
ot dK

whew ns eee

HANDBOUND
AT THE

e

UNIVERSITY OF
TORONTO PRESS

——

ive a mi
i o 4 i:
aie

if . or in

7
it
cer

ree ad ia j

eaala ea hifi

Ase To AS -_ Pie

~™ 3
(2 ) J ar, - _ 6 ¢ 7 lal’
i aay) 7 = . or Typ ‘ore
Ws oe. - .
e" a a : ; b ;
Vas
on
os pay
¥ os a
pee ihe
o> >
y

; en
00". 40 ae
ta, el ae 7

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY,

INCLUDING

ZOOLOGY, BOTANY, ann GEOLOGY.

(BEING A CONTINUATION OF TILE ‘ANNALS’ COMBINED. WITIL LOUDON AND
CHARLESWORTH’S ‘ MAGAZINE OF NATURAL IIISTORY.’)

CONDUCTED BY

ALBERT C. L. G. GUNTHER, M.A., M.D., Ph.D., F.R.S.,
WILLIAM CARRUTHERS, F.R.S., F.L.S., F.G.S.,

AND

WILLIAM FRANCIS, sun., F.L.S.

eee

VOL. III.—SEVENTH SERIES. y

rao a
ge

LONDON:
PRINTED AND PUBLISHED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS.

SOLD BY SIMPKIN, MARSHALL, HAMILTON, KENT, AND CO., LD.;
WHITTAKER AND CO.: BAILLIERE, PARIS:
MACLACHLAN AND STEWART, EDINBURGH :
HODGES, FIGGIS, AND CO., DUBLIN: AND ASHER, BERLIN.

1899.

“Omnes res create sunt divine sapientix et potenti: testes, divitiw felicitatis
human :—ex harum usu Jonitas Creatoris; ex pulchritudine sapientia Domini ;
ex cconomid in conservatione, proportione, renovatione, potentia majestatis
elucet. Earum itaque indagatio ab hominibus sibi relictis semper zstimata ;
i veré eruditis et sapientibus semper exculta; malé doctis et barbaris semper
inimieca fuit.”’—Lrixyaxus.

“Quel que soit le principe de la vie animale, il ne faut qu’ouvrir les yeux pour
voir qu'elle est le chef-d’ceuvre de la Toute-puissance, et le but auquel se rappor-

tent toutes ses opérations.’—Bruckner, Théorie du Systéme Animal, Leyden,
1767.

Sep est adie) eo) eee ay eee ners viveD pO WEES
Obey our summons; from their deepest dells
The Dryads come, and throw their garlands wild
And odorous branches at our feet; the Nymphs
That press with nimble step the mountain-thyme
And purple heath-flower come not empty-handed,
But scatter round ten thousand forms minute
Of velvet moss or lichen, torn from rock
Or rifted oak or cavern deep: the Naiads too
Quit their loved native stream, from whose smooth face
They crop the lily, and each sedge and rush
That drinks the rippling tide: the frozen poles,
Where peril waits the bold adventurer’s tread,
The burning sands of Borneo and Cayenne,
All, all to us unlock their secret stores
And pay their cheerful tribute.

J. Taytor, Norwich, 1818,

AULERE FLAMMAM,.

CONTENTS OF VOL, III.

[SEVENTH SERIES. ]

NUMBER XIII.

T. Natural History Notes from H.M. Royal Indian Marine Survey
Ship ‘ Investigator, ‘Commander T. H. Heming, R.N., cou:manding,

—Series IIL, ‘No. 2. An Account of the Deep-sea Crustacea dredg d
during the Surveyiny-season of 1897-98. By A. Atcock, Major,
Indian Medical Service, Superintendent of the Indian Museum,
aud A. R. S. Anprrson, Captain, Indian Medical Service, Surgeon-
MeenUrAlish Orble OUEVE Yr varie sie sce asi sated ss Ache oe mgloe cake oes

II. On the British Pandalide. By W.T.Cauman, B.Sc., Uni-
wersity- Collece Wundee. a(Platées DaLV.) soc .0 tue eee oes ne ates

II. On some small Mammals from the Distiict of Cuzco, Peru.
By OLD PEO RNONARUS War atas 5 5 cuciste emissions a coartte Te cecsiee luohTo

IV. On a new Species of Marmosa. By OLpFIELD THOMAS ..

VY. Description of a new Scale-Insect of the Genus Walkeriana.
Pye Htc HS. (Plate: Vis). successes dere ssara ise eagenctels eye) s

VI. Note on the Genus Grammatodon, Meek and Hayden. By
PTO MOS INU SING Ry cen pore aye S Schad coded sryelaciaeis « s\ourleaGhe Sheep s

VII. Foraminifera from the ‘ Cambridge Greensand.” By

RIMM ORCC Ke CHAPMAN, CAC Ses eSte sees ace tr tis cee aimee
VIII. The Land Isopoda of Madeira. By Canon A. M. Norman,
hs, C2 iD SP RS uke. (ciate Wl figs. [ayn oo e 56
IX. British Land Isopoda. By Canon A. M. Norman, M.A.,
DO a) BES. ccc, Cblato Wil, fies O-12.) oe wae steels
X. A Second Recent Shell of Helia Lowet, Férussac. By Canon
iA i NORMAN. EA, D:Ods, iD. BORIS. Qe oo. cemenna~ ce ss

XI. On Two undescribed Cicadis from the Transvaal. By W. L.
ESS SAAR ck. se, Cee ep Re eae EOI RE LE WRT Se RS
XII. The Genus Pecilotheria: its Habits, History, and Species.

By hk. I. Pocock, of the British Museum of Natural [Listory.
(v late V Ie ) shenls 6/026 wp lalleSmenedn (ets) 70 ei) fs isle) dies (v3 'e) oye cial s\(eiip! o/s sere ai(eiaeney We

Page

45

47

48

66

79

8]

iv CONTENTS.

Page
XIII. Notes on the Family Hetrod‘de, with a List of the deseribed
Species. By W. F. Kirsy, F.LS., F. ES., Ke, Rr eee 97
XIV. New Ppetice) of Oriental Lepidoptera. By Colonel C.
Mwinnos, M.A, FLAS. |. co.cc oi 5 hn 2 ote 102
XV. On the Localization of the Regenerative Surfaces in the
Phasmide. By EpMOND BORDAGE .........--+sseeccsecccees 117

Note on Pap‘lio glycerion, Gray, by F. A. Heron, Assistant, British ,
Museum (Natural History) .......¢.0000s.fans seems eerran 119

NUMBER XIV.

XVI. On the Origin of the Fauna of Celebes. By Professor
Per Mlax WiREEE? FES oso orn et vr eee afk v's" an bon! ieee tea 121

XVII. A Re-examination of Hutton’s Types of New Zealand
Earthworms. By W. Braxtanp Benuam, D.Sc., M.A., Professor

of Biology, University of Otago, Dunedin, New Zealand ......... 136
XVIII. Notes on the Family Hetrodide, with a List of the

described Species. By W. F. Kirsy, F.LS., F.ES., &. ........ 14)
XIX. Hippolyte fascigera, Gosse, and H. gracilis (Heller). By

ArrHED QO. WALEER. J. os. 0..a2s Ge pemer ces eee eens eee 147

XX. On Siriella armata (M.-Edw.) and the reputed Occurrence of
S. frontalis (M.-Edw.) in British Seas. By E. W. L. Hour and
WT) BEADMONE” fo52 5.) od Semmes sale een ee eet eee 151

XXI. On newsmall Mammals from South America. By OLDFIELD
A OMAB 5. Ura Gein mteld wee ire ote Ox stoke ape walneal eee 152

XXII. ee ae of some new Species of Napeogenes. By
Di DMG ODMAN; FID 05. pis s\e\siecnlaeivinieie eae Aan ni ge 155

XXIII. On the probabie Mode of Formation of the Fusion
between the Femur and Trochanter in Arthropods. By Enmonp
IBORDAGE. .<.sGw chiee Su 22 hav Chae Ab walee bine oe eins BEL ee eee 158

XXIV. EAP ae Species of Forficularia. By Matcorm
Buz, F.ES.,

XXV. Notes on Central-American Coccide, with Descriptions of
Three new Species. By T. D, A. CocKERELE ..........00--0005 167

XXVI. Notes on the Tentacles of Nautilus pompilius. By Law-
RENCE B.GRIPFIN . 0, a... sc facets « moins Acs ans oe ae 179

XXVII. Description of a new Species of Gerridide. By Dr. G.
HorvaAtTu

XXVIII. On some South-African Insects. By W. L. Distanr.. 178

XXIX. On a Specimen of Lepidopus atlay, ticus, Goode & Bean,
from’ Madeira. By G. A. BovLENGER,- ERS)»: eee eene eee 180

CONTENTS.

XXX. On the Preliminary Stages and Mode of Escape of the
Imago in the Dipterous Genus Xylomyia, Rond. (Subula, Mg. et
auct.), with especial refereuce to Xylomyia maculata, F.; and on
the Systematic Position of the Genus. By E. E. AvsrEn, Zoolo-
mica) Department, British Museum 2... 0.26. s se ce cc canesnanece

New Books:—The Study of Man. By Atrrep C. Happon.—
Catalogus Mamn:alium, tam viventium quam fossilium. By

BL Vrouessant. Parte LV¥oand VY... 60.3). ene ses 190—
Proceedings of the Geological Society ........ Sort ea tc “scicgtari

NUMBER XV.

XXXI. Note on the* Sexual Characters of Ligia oceanica. By
CuarLes Cuitton, M.A., D.Sc., M.B., C.M., F.L.S., Research
Fellow, Edinburgh University. (Plate VIII.) .................-

XXNII. A Revision of the Pierine Genus Huphina, with Notes
cn the Seasonal Phases and Descriptions of new Species. By
fRerron G Borer, ProDsE:S., FZS., Wes i wes ese ee es we

XXXIII. List of Fishes collected during the Peary Auxiliary
Expedition, 1894. By Orro Hormevisz, of the Zoological Insti-

BALE PH SS WCUETI. Us AME stoliens a. a.otehe cat cis why aeouineatt a Ae Senate: vars ete 2

XXXIV. Note on the Water-Voles of Bosnia, Asia Minor, and
Western Persia. By G. E. H. Barretr-HAMILTON ............

XXXY. Note on the Sicilian Dormice of the Genera Eliomys

and Gls, By G. E. H. BARRETT-HAMILTON ,........0.0-0+0- :

XXXVI. Descriptions of some new Species of Heterocera from
Tropical America, Africa, and the Eastern Islands. By Hrrpert

RR Pe Bi EES Nek tie st Salo ane sheer oraca! oa eke < RMAs state 2s

XXXVII. On the true Podocerus and some new Genera of
Amphipods. By the Rev. Toomas R. R. Stepsine, M.A., F.RS.,
De AS eg RS aa Sk es ee cin aa aa a ee ee ee re ee

XXXVIII. Description of a new Osphromenoid Fish from the

Cer yi As bOULENGIR, HORS! |..aciarpeteys + ot ee aisiateiet inlets « y

XXXIX. Description of Two new Butterflies collected by Major
FE. M. Woodward in Nandi, Equatorial Africa. By Eminy Mary
eal ar ae re Say inten oe Mea te Sepsis Sie wise a Seam

XL. On some Tertiary Foraminifera from DBorreo collected by
Professor Molengraaff and the late Mr. A. H. Everett, and their
Comparison with similar Forms from Sumatra. By R. ButLen

Newron, I'.G.S., and Richarp Hotuanp. (Plates IX. & X.).... :

XLI. The Outcome cf a South-Sea Voyage. By L. A. Borra-

193

201

245,

ToL oat SNR ee eh Se cg i on Aa neon ns Ra cece arar eT ae eee 26

sal CONTENTS.

Page

New Book :—Catalogue of the Lepidoptera Phaleene in the British
Museum. Volume I. By Sir Gkoree Hampson, Bart. ...... 268
Proceedings of the Geological Society ...........0. cece ee eee e ees 270

Lichtenstein’s ‘ Catalogus rerum naturalium,’ by C. Davies Sherborn. 272

NUMBER XVI.

XLII. Descriptions of new Batrachians in the Collection of the
British Museum (Natural History). By G. A. BouLenerr, F.R.S.
PPistes Rl; & XL) Ss sa ayhe wees ean wae GEE Te wok eee ea 273

XLII. Natural History Notes from H.M. Royal Indian Marine
Survey Ship ‘ Investigator,’ Commander T’. H. Heming, R.N., com-
munding.—Neries III., No.2. An Account of the Deep-sea Crustacea
dredved during the Surveying-season of 1897-98. By A. ALcocK,
Major, Indian Medical Service, Superintendent of the Indian
Museum, and A, R. 8S. AnpERSON, Captain, Indian Medical Service,

Surgeon-Naturalist to the Survey. ........scscecveeeueseneese .. 278
XLIV. Descriptions of some new Species of Heterocera from

Tropical America. By HErBert Druck, F.LS. &e. ............ 298
XLV. Foraminifera from the “Cambridge Greensand.” By

Freprrick CHAPMAN, AL. RORALS: oF A oie 6, eo cae a 302
XLVI. British ee ee Chelifera. By the Rev. Canon A, M.

NopmanyaA., DC. LGD., VRS. 6 soe pee See eee 317
XLVII. Note on the Harvest-Mice of the Palearctic Region. By

a. i BAR Rees Hi AML TON . 7 vcs. sas pote 2a 5 berets eee ot]
XLVIII. On the South-Pacific Fishes of the Genus Callanthias.

By GA. DOU LENG WE Bet Ss cade o's she ae a ot 546
XLIX. A new Stridulating Theraphosid Spider from South

exmorica... oy R.,.T, POGOGE. ij... <5 s1s.b)s.08 asain ens eee BAT

Proceedings of the Geological Society ..........5...000.+ eeeees 349

S.E. Union of Scientitie Societies; Revision of Amphipeda, by the
Rev. Thomas R. R. Stebbing, M.A., F.R.S.; Date of Charles
d’Orbigny’s ‘ Dictionnaire Universel d'Histoire Naturelle,’ 1839-
1849, by C. Davies Sherborn and T,S. Palmer ........ 349 —350

NUMBER XVII.

L. On the Cretaceous Fish Plethodus. By A. Smita Woop-
ward, I’.L.S., of the British Museum (Natural History). (Plates
PTL On Vie lit gb y pies be aie ain wali tienes ee + «bo A een ante 353

LI. On a Collection of Odonata (Dragonflies) from Panama. By
Wi Poiiiney, (Plate Vi). chee sds cr , 362

CONTENTS. Vil

Page
LIT. Descriptions of Two new Moths collected by Dr, Christy on
the Upper Niger. By Emtry Mary SHARPE ...........00sc008 571

LIII. A Revision of the Dismorphina of the New World, with
Descriptions of new Species. By Arruur G. Butter, Ph.D.,
21S LUM ES 8 A Se A) AA aS Pn 373

LIV. Podocerus and Jassa of Leach. By ALFRED O. WALKER.. 394

LV. Notes on the Faculty of Changing Colour in Reptiles, By
Peete GME scot Rat. SNK meets Gin eR W aes caihs Lhe e de 396

LVI. The Poisonous Snakes of British Guiana. By J. J.Queucu,
eee MONG Aye NU Mietsee x orate aime t't ace toate seskctoraya vite ies setae terore ss 402

LVII. Diagnoses of new Species of Land-Shells from the Islands
of Flores, Sumbawa, and Sumba. By Epgar A. SMITH.......... 409

LVIII. Descriptions of some new Species of Scorpions. By R. I.
ares Peete Bare aia NN a a ander z fa iP ero ne stern ae ols 411

New Book:—The Resources of the Sea; as shown in Scientific
Experiments to test the effects of Trawling and of the closure
of certain Areas off the Scottish Shores. By W. C. M‘Inrosu,
M.D., LL.D., F.R.S., &e., Professor of Natural History in the
University of St. Andrews, Director of the Museum and of the
Sieieuy Misti IA OPAhON yg, 2725. o>. 2 alors. <n bi es miss) Diels, iss he ela 420

Proceedings of the Geological Society .........0.seeee000. 425—427

A Note on the Date of the Parts of ‘Humboldt and Bonpland’s
Voyage: Observations de Zoologie,’ by C. Davies Sherborn.... 428

NUMBER XVIII.

LIX. On some new or little-known Goniafites from the Carbon-
iferous Limestone of Ireland. By G. C. Crick, F.G.S., of the
Beaist Museum! (Watural Pistory). ........:. + mccaatn wecpe =. 222 oe 429

LX. Note on the Occurrence of Cythertdea castanea, G. 8. Brady,
in a Surface-deposit in the Vicinity of Buenos Ayres, South America.

Bye PEOMAS SCOTUS PL oP late AVL.) ei wis jere aisiejais sin sa sled alors @ 454
LXI. Embryology of Ophiocoma echinata, Agassiz. (Preliminary

steam Exp Mes MPA WAS! 2 ach sii vin, s, esi ty Mack oye: oan) evoke las ete 456
LXII. Some apparently undescribed Insects from the Transvaal.

oP oe ville. hy Sao a ng a ane eee ar LHe ae Sea 461

LXIII. Descriptions of some new Species of Heterocera from
Tropical America, Africa, India, and the Eastern Islands. By _
ee RRS FEES Tr BEL UIC? mee UCT 2 oon ie vin n wide ie stein wi a0) ae bee 8 cae 465

LXIV. Notes on a Collection of Gryllide, Stenopelmatide,
Gryllacride, and Hetrodide formed by Mr. W. L. Distant in the
Transvaal and other South- and East-African Localities. By W. F.
UL AS PG) De a ae 475

Viil CONTENTS.

Page
LXV. On one little-known and one hitherto unknown Species of
Saurocephalus. By O..P. HAY... ..0scccscvdeennvecnsseercvase 480

LXVI. Note on Scapanorhynchus, a Cretaceous Shark “igs
surviving in Japanese Seas. By A. Smita Woopwarp, FL

LXVII. Note on some Cretaceous Clupeoid Fishes with Pecti-
nated Scales (Ctenothrissa and Pseudoberyx). By A. Smrra Woop-
PR LT bon cass 3 1p ANd nae Bae ME MOR phn AG eae A hp aoe 489

LXVIII. Four new Bees of the Genus Perdita collected by
Dr. L. O. Howard in Mexico. By T. D, A, CockErELL, New

Mexico Agricultural Collego ........sscccanevcncsnracesenees 492
Proceedings of the Geological Society ....... cee cece eeu eeeeees 495
Index 7) ae DSS Bee eorereeee 26.4 2.4 4.50) 4:2 2D SO DB B/C &-210 49 B.S i dee ye ee . 496

PLATES IN VOL. III.

Prats J,
Il.
TT,
IV.
V. Walkeriana Andree.
VI. Land Isopoda.
VII. Species of Peecilotheria.
VIII. Ligia oceanica.
ee Tertiary Foraminifera from Borneo.
RI,
XII.
ae a Species of Plethodus.

British Pandalidex.

New Batrachians.

ae Odonata from Panama,
XVI. Cytheridea castanea.

THE ANNALS

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY,

(SEVENTH SERIES.]

Cate do scosceeece per litora spargite muscum,
Naiades, et circiim vitreos considite fontes:
Pollice virgineo teneros hic carpite flores:
Floribus et pictum, diye, replete canistrum.
At vos, o Nymphe Craterides, ite sub undas ;
Ite, recurvato variata corallia trunco
Vellite muscosis e rupibus, et mihi conchas
Ferte, Dez pelagi, et pingui conchylia succo.”’
N. Parthenii Giannettasi, Ecl. 1.

No. 13. JANUARY 1899.

I.—Natural History Notes from H.M. Royal Indian Marine
Survey Ship ‘ Investigator, Commander T. H. Heming,
R.N., commanding.—Series III., No. 2. An Account of
the Deep-sea Crustacea dredged during the Surveying-season
of 1897-98. By A. Atcock, Major, Indian Medical
Service, Superintendent of the Indian Museum, and
A. R. 8. AnpersoN, Captain, Indian Medical Service,
Surgeon-Naturalist to the Survey.

DEEP-SEA Crustacea dredged by the ‘Investigator,’ to the
number of about 190 species, have already been described in
the following papers :—

J. Woop-Mason.—J. A. 8S. B. vol. lvi. pt. 2, 1887,
pp. 206-207, pl. i., and p. 376; Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.,
Feb. 1891, pp. 187-202; March 1891, pp. 258-272; Oct.
1891, pp. 269-286 ; Nov. 1891, pp. 853-362; April 1892,
pp- 265-275, pls. xiv., xv.; May 1892, pp. 858-370; Feb.
1893, pp. 161-172, pls. x., x1.

G. M. Gites.—J. A. 8. B. vol. Ivii. pt. 2, 1888, pp. 220-
231, pls. vi., vill., 1x.

W. We ttNerR.—SB. Ges. naturf. Freunde, Berlin, 1894,
pp- 80-87.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iii. 1

2. Major A. Alcock and Capt. A. R. S. Anderson on

A. Aucock.—Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., March 1894,
pp. 225-245 ; April 1894, pp. 321-334; May 1894, pp. 400-
411; J. A. S. B. vols. Ixiv., Ixv., and Ixvii. pt. 2, 1895,
1896, 1898.

A. Atcock and A. R. S. ANpErson.—J. A. 8. B. vol. Ixiii.
pt. 2, 1894, pp. 141-185, pl. ix.

A. R. S. Anperson.—J. A. S. B. vol. Ixv. pt. 2, 1896,
pp. 88-106,

J. R. Henperson.—J. A. S. B. vol. Ixv. pt. 2, 1896,
pp- 516-536.

Many of the species described in these papers have been
figured in thirty-five plates of “ Illustrations of the Zoology
of the ‘ Investigator,’ ”’ published in the years 1892-1893.

In the present paper we offer a list of 92 species of deep-
sea Crustacea obtained by the ‘Investigator’ between the
months of October 1897 and April 1898. Of these species
31 appear to be new to science and 12 more new to the
Indian record. This brings the number of species of Crus-
tacea known to inhabit the depths of the Indian seas to
something over 230.

Among the more interesting of our new finds are :—

(1) Pentacheles sculptus, a species that also inhabits the
depths off the Atlantic coast of the United States; (2) a
species of Richardina (a genus allied to Stenopus) differing
very little from the type of the ‘ Travailleur’ expedition ;
(3) a true Pylocheles, so much like the Caribbean species
described by M. A. Milne-Edwards, that we at first thought
it to be the same; (4) a Munidopsis that is quite certainly
the same as the ‘ Travailleur’ Galathodes rosaceus figured by
M. A. Milne-Edwards; (5) a Homola having the same
‘“‘ macrurous ”’ carapace as the Mediterranean //. Cuviert and
very closely related to that species; (() a curious primitive
Dromioid having the same branchial formula as the Caribbean
Hlomolodromia of A. Milne-Edwards (not the Homalodromia
of Miers), and seeming, in fact, to differ from the Caribbean
form only in having orbits like those of Dromia; (7) a species
of the Corystoid genus Trachycarcinus—a genus only known
hitherto from off the Pacific coast of Central America; (8) two
species of the Lithodoid genus Paralomis ; (9) a Pinnoteres
inhabiting a species of Lima dredged in 430 fathoms.

Of all the dredging-stations of this season the most prolific
was one a few miles to the south-west of Wadge Bank, the
exact position being 7° 17! 30" N., 76° 54! 30" E., the depth
430 fathoms, and thecorrected bottom-temperature 38° Fahr.”’
—though we suspect there is some mistake about the tempe-
rature, and that 38° is a clerical error for 45°. A preliminary

|

Indian Deep-sea Crustacea. 3

sounding brought up “ grey mud,” but the dredge soon fouled
coral and was brought up full of masses of Caryophyllia
paradoxus, sp. n., Desmophyllum vitreum, sp. n., Lophohelia
tnvestigatoris, sp. n., and Solenosmilia Jeffreyi, sp. n.
Captain Anderson estimates that there was about half a ton
of it—living and dead.

More than 30 species of Crustacea were obtained from
this haul, including two of Parapagurus and one of Pagu-
rodes, two of Paralomis, five of Munidopsis, one of Ptycho-
gaster and two of Uroptychus, two Homoloids and one
Dromioid, and a Trachycarcinus. And of the species of
Munidopsis one was represented by 237 specimens and
another by 52.

One event of this season appears to show that deep-sea
dredging may be a matter of mere chance. In December
1890 the ship dredged in 188-220 fathoms off the Cinque
Islands (11° 31! 40" N., 92° 46’ 40” EH.) and made perhaps
the best haul of her record, getting her trawl-bag more than
half full of solid specimens, of which a multitude of 29 species
of Fishes and 23 species of Crustacea formed only a portion.
In April 1898 exactly the same spot was dredged—bearings
being carefully taken—and although no accident occurred,
the results were extremely poor.

In the following list the new species are noted, and the
species that are new to the Indian record are marked with
an asterisk. All the new species have been figured, and the
figures will be published either in the issue of the “‘ [llustra-
tions of the Zoology of the ‘ Investigator’ ” for 1899 or in a
Report that one of us has now in the press on the deep-sea
Brachyura collected by the ‘ Investigator.’

For the determination of the Macrura the second-named
of the joint authors is chiefly responsible, for those of the
Brachyura and Anomura the first-named is chiefly responsible.

ScHIzopopa,
Gnathophausia zoga, Suhm, G. O. Sars. 430 fath.

DECAPODA.

Peneus rectacutus, Spence Bate. 370-419 fath.
Parapeneus investigatoris, sp. n. 133-419 fath.
Metapeneus philippinensis, Sp. Bate. 185 fath.
Haliporus taprobanensis, sp. n. 550 fath.
Aristeus semidentatus, Sp. Bate. 360-480 fath.
coruscans, Wood-Mason. 824 fath.
crassipes, WWood-Mason. 360-606 fath.
Aristzopsis Edwardsiana (Johnson). 480 fath.

4. Major A. Alcock and Capt. A. R. S. Anderson on

Benthesicymus investigatoris, sp.n. 370-640 fath.
Sergestes robustus, S. 1, Smith. 370-419 fath.
rubro-guttatus, Wood-Mason. 498 fath.
Crangon andamanensis, Wood-Mason. 186 fath.
Pontocaris media, sp. nu. 55 fath.
Glyphocrangon incestigatoris, Wood-Mason. 360 fath.
—— Gilesii, Wood-Mason. 370-419 fath.
unguiculata, Wood-Mason, 824 fath.
Alpheus Shearmii, sp.n. 480 fath.
* Heterocarpus levigatus, Spence Bate. 430 fath.
gibbosus, Spence Bate. 185-419 fath.
Plesionika bifurca, Alcock and Anderson, 370-419 fath.
affinis, sp.n. 172-308 fath.
Pandalus ? martius, A. M.-Edw. 194-430 fath.
P ensis, A. M.-Edw. 185 fath.
Alcocki, Anderson. 360 fath.
*Chlorotocus ? gracilipes, A. M.-Edw. 186 fath.
Acanthephyra sanguinea, Wood-Mason. 194-640 fath.
exima, 8.1. Smith. 498 fath.
Hoplophorus gracilirostris, A. M.-Edw. 185-419 fath.
Palemonella laccadivensis, Alcock and Anderson, 4380 fath.
Nematocarcinus tenuipes, Sp. Bate. 836 fath.
Pasiphea unispinosa, Wood-Mason. 860 fath.
Eryonicus indicus, sp.n. 824 fath.
* Pentacheles sculptus, S. I. Smith. 824-836 fath.
phosphorus, Alcock. 870-419 fath.
Nephrops andamanica, Wood-Mason. 185 fath,
Nephropsis Stewarti, Wood-Mason. 185-360 fath.
atlantica, Norman. 498 fath.
Callianassa lignicola, sp.n. 185 fath.
Calastacus felix, sp.u. 430 fath.
Teonaxius kermadect, Spence Bate. 360-4380 fath.
(?) Richardina spongicola, sp.n. 498 fath.
Pylocheles Miersi, sp.n. 185 fath.
Parapagurus pilosimanus, 8. 1. Smith. 824-836 fath.
affinis, Henderson, 480 fath.
Andersoni, Henderson. 480 fath.
* Pagurodes limatulus, Henderson. 480 fath.
Paguristes puniceus, Henderson, 870-419 fath.
Paralomis investigatoris, sp.n, 480 fath.
indica, sp. n, 480 fath.
Munida militaris, Hend., var. andamanica, Aleock. 185-419 fath.
squamosa, Hend., var. proliva, Aleock. 185-194 fath.
—— microps, Alcock. 640 fath.
comorina, sp. n. 430 fath.
Munidopsis stylirostris, Wood-Mason. 824-8386 fath.
dasypus, Alcock, 498 fath.
Hemingi, sp.n. 430 fath.
iridis, sp.n. 480 fath,
— Goodrigii, sp. n. 480 fath.
*—— P rosacea, A. M.-Edw. 480 fath.
—— trifida, Henderson. 498 fath.
Moresbyi, sp. n, 480 fath.
Ptychogaster investigatoris, sp. n. 405 fath.
Hendersoni, sp.n. 430 fath.
* Uroptychus australis, Henderson, var.? 459 fath.

*.

*.

Indian Deep-sea Crustacea. 5

Uroptychus bacillimanus, sp. n. 486 fath.

fusimanus, sp.n. 430 fath.

cavirostris, sp.n. 75-60 fath.

Homola profundorum, sp. n. 430 fath.

megalops, Alcock, 370-419 fath.
Paromolopsis Boast, Wood-Mason. 480-498 fath.
Hypsophrys longipes, sp.n. 480 fath.
Arachnodromia Baffini, gen. et sp. n. 480 fath.

*Ethusa gracilipes, Miers. 836 fath.

indica, Alcock. 360 fath.

Lyreidus Channert, Wood-Mason. 360 fath.
Physacheus ctenurus, Alcock. 1865 fath.
Echinoplax pungens, Wood-Mason. 186 fath.

*Cyrtomaia Suhmi, Miers. 430 fath.
Platymaia Wyville-Thomsont, Miers. 185 fath.
Scyramathia Rivers-Andersont, Aleock. 480 fath.
Trachycarcinus glaucus, sp.n. 430 fath.
Sphenomerides trapezxioides, Wood-Mason. 90 fath.
Benthochascon Heming?, gen. et sp.n. 185 fath.
Carcinoplax longipes, Wood-Mason. 480 fath.
Psopheticus stridulans, Wood-Mason. 185-419 fath.
Pilumnoplax Sinclairt, sp.n. 480 fath.
Camatopsis rubida, gen. et sp. n. 194 fath.
Ptenoplax notopus, Alcock and Anderson. 185 fath.
Pinnoteres abyssicola, sp. u. 430 fath.

STOMATOPODA.

*Squilla leptosquilla, Brooks, 185-419 fath.

AMPHIPODA.

*Cystisoma spinosum (Fabr.). 172-498 fath.

BRACHYURA.

Family Homolide.

Homo.a, Leach.
Homola profundorum, sp. n.

Carapace very decidedly macruriform, deep, ovoid-trian-
gular, broadest abaft the middle of the branchial region,
tapering to an acutely spiniform rostrum, of which the length
is about a third that of the rest of the carapace. Diverging
from either side of the base of the rostrum is a spine of
similar form and size. The only other elevations on the
carapace are a hepatic spine just behind the hollow for the
retracted eye, an antennal spine just outside the antennal
base, and a blunt denticle near the middle of the ill-defined
lateral border.

6 Major A. Alcock and Capt. A. R. 8. Anderson on

The gastric region is well delimited and the linea anomu-
rica is broad, conspicuous, and dorsal. ;

The stout cylindrical terminal joint of the eye-stalks is
longer than the slender basal joint; the eyes are of good size,
well pigmented, and hemispherical.

The chelipeds are slender, but are stouter than the legs ;
the arm has the outer lower border spinate and, on the upper
border, a few spinules and a strong terminal spine; both the
inner and the outer angles of the wrist are armed with a.
strong spine, the fingers are much shorter than the hand and
have the cutting-edge entire.

The legs are slender and subcylindrical, the second and
third pair (which are slightly longer than the first) are at
least three times the length of the carapace. In the first
three pair there are a few distant spines and a strong terminal
spine on the anterior border of the merus, a few articulating
spinules at the far end of the posterior border of the propo-
dite, and a comb of articulating spines along the posterior
border of the dactylus, the last joint being but half the length
of the last but one. The dorsal fourth pair of legs are far
slenderer than the others and do not reach the end of the
merus of the preceding pair; their propodite is triangular,
owing to the expansion of its posterior border, and opposes a
sharply serrated edge to the less strongly toothed posterior
border of the short dactylus, the parts being cheliform rather
than subcheliform.

The body and appendages are coated with very short
distant bristles, which do not conceal the surface ; there are
some longer and thicker bristles along the edges of the
chelipeds and a very few scattered hairs along the edges of
the legs.

Three young females from off the Travancore coast,
430 fathoms.

‘The carapace of these is about 13 millim. long and about
9 millim. in greatest breadth.

This species is most closely related to LZomola Cuviert,
Risso, and belongs therefore to the late Professor Wood-
Masou’s genus Paromola.

Hyrsopurys, Wood-Mason.
Iypsophrys longipes, sp. n.
Rostrum deeply bifid. Linea anomurica distinct.
Four large spines on the anterior border of the carapace,

namely, two close together at the base of the rostrum, one at
either orbital angle.

Indian Deep-sea Crustacea. e

Lateral borders of dorsum of carapace well defined, spinu-
late ; the ridge on the side-wall of the carapace that defines
the branchial regions anteriorly is also spinulate. A row of
spines on the hepatic region, the largest of which is on the
lateral border of the carapace and has a spine dorsad of it.

Gastric region obscurely subdivided; each lateral sub-
region is armed with five or six large spines, while on the
median region there is a central spine, sometimes followed by
arow of spinules. Subhepatic and suborbital region with
numerous large spines, one of which is “ antennal.”

Eyes well pigmented. Antennary flagella more than twice
the length of the carapace.

Rows of spinules on the exposed surface of the ischium,
merus, and exognath of the external maxillipeds, and a row
on the basal joint of the antennules.

Chelipeds slender, reaching not far beyond the end of the
carpus of the first pair of legs; the arm and wrist not stouter
than the meropodites of the first three pair of legs; spinate
and spinulate as in the preceding species; fingers as long as
the hand.

The second and third pair of legs, which are slightly
longer than the first and three times as long as the fourth,
are four times the length of the carapace. In the first three
pair of legs the merus is compressed and has its anterior
border spinate and its posterior borders spinulate ; the poste-
rior border of the propodite carries a few distant articulating
spinelets, and the dactylus (which is about two thirds the
length of the preceding joint) has a close comb of articulating
spines along its posterior border.

The fourth (dorsal) pair, which are extremely slender,
have the posterior border of the merus strongly spinate ; the
propodite is several times larger than the minute dactylus.

The terminal joint of the male abdomen ends acutely,

Hairs and bristles are sparsely present, just as in the
preceding species.

The carapace of a large egg-laden female is 38 millim.
long and 30 millim. broad.

Eleven specimens, representing adults and young of both
sexes, were lately dredged off the coast of ‘Travancore at
430 fathoms.

Family Dromide.
Arachnodromia Baffint, gen. (?) et sp. n.

Branchie 20 on either side, as in Homolodromia.
Carapace elongate-oblong, but somewhat broader behind

8 Major A. Alcock and Capt. A. R. S. Anderson on

than in front, deep, inflated, tomentose, unarmed except for a
few sharp granules anteriorly and laterally; two creases
break either lateral border, the posterior one being continued
to the cardiac region as the cervical groove.

Front prominent, horizontal, bifid from its base.

Antennule and eye retractile into an orbit almost like that
of Dromia. Eye-stalks long and slender, not completely
filling their part of the orbit; eyes small, but well-formed
and well-pigmented. Antennal flagella longer than the
carapace.

Palate well delimited from the epistome; the ridges
defining the expiratory canals very distinct ; external maxilli-
peds distinctly opercular, but with a pediform cast.

Chelipeds equal, slender, though considerably stouter than
the legs, about 12 times the length of the carapace, unarmed
except for a few sharpish granules, visible only when the
dense tomentum is removed; the fingers well calcified,
hollowed en cuiliére, the tip of the dactylus fitting into a
notch in the tip of the thumb.

Legs cylindrical, smooth beneath a thick tomentum. The
first two pair are more than twice the length of the carapace ;
their dactyli are stout, are about 3 the length of the preceding
joint, and are sharply spinate along the posterior edge up toa
terminal claw. The last two pair are about the same length
as the carapace, are subdorsal in position, and end in a small
claw-like dactylus that shuts down on a circlet of spines at
the end of the preceding joint.

The sternal grooves of the female end, without tubercles,
at the level of the openings of the oviducts.

The abdomen of both sexes consists of seven separate
segments; the pleure of the third to the sixth somites are
remarkably large and independent, and the last abdominal
tergum is nearly as long as the preceding five combined.

‘wo males and a female from off the Travancore coast,
430 fathoms.

This species at first sight might be taken for the Homolo-
dromia paradcxa of A. Milne-Edwards, in which, however,
it is stated that there are no orbits and that the antennules are
not retractile.

Family Corystide.
TRACHYCARCINUS, Faxon.
Trachycarcinus glaucus, sp. n.

Carapace irregularly pentagonal, its surface coated with

Indian Deep-sea Crustacea. 9

short, stiff, club-shaped hairs; the regions well-defined,
rather tumid, much subdivided into tumid lobules, of which
the convexities are capped by clusters of large conical granules,
and the general surface also is studded, especially in the
young, with similar granules.

Front narrow, horizontal, prominent, deeply cleft into three
prongs of nearly equal size.

Antero-lateral borders half as long again as the postero-
lateral, armed with three stout pinnulate spines, not including
the outer orbital angle ; postero-lateral borders entire, poste-
rior border finely beaded.

Upper orbital wall deeply cleft into three pinnulate teeth,
lower orbital border deeply concave, its inner angle strongly
spiniform. ye-stalks slender, rather long; the eyes, which
are more ventral than terminal, are dull and faintly pigmented
(as in many species of Munidopsis), and are non-faceted.

Antennary flagella short, extremely slender, not hairy.

Chelipeds remarkably unequal in the male, equal in the
female.

The smaller cheliped of the male and both chelipeds of the
female are about as long as the carapace and are coated almost
to the finger-tips with stiff club-shaped hairs, which are short
except along the upper border of the wrist and hand and of
the basal part of the finger, where they are long; beneath
the hairs are some scattered granules, and along the upper
border of the arm, wrist, and hand are some denticles; the
inner angle of the wrist is strongly spiniform, and the far end
of the upper border of the hand is dentiform.

The larger cheliped of the male is about twice the length
of the carapace, about half its length being formed by the
hand and fingers; the greatest breadth of the hand is about
half the length of the carapace. It is almost smooth, the
upper border of the arm and hand and the inner border and
upper and outer surfaces of the wrist alone being furnished
with denticles and hairs; the inner angle of the wrist is spini-
form.

The legs are covered with short, stiff, club-shaped hairs,
which are rather more thick-set on the anterior borders and
on the dactyli than elsewhere. The second and third pair,
which are rather longer than the first and last pair, are some-
what less than 13 times the length of the carapace. All the
dactyli end in a little claw.

The abdomen of the male consists of seven distinct seg-
ments, but the third, fourth, and fifth move together.

In life the animal is covered with a coat of mud held
together by the hairs above described, the only bare parts

10 Major A. Alcock and Capt. A. R. S. Anderson on

being the hand and fingers and part of the arm of the larger
cheliped of the male.

The colours in life are described by Dr. A. R. Anderson as
“white, with a bluish tinge, eyes with a slight reddish
opalescence.”? In spirit the bluish tinge is fainter, the eyes
are a pale milky yellow-ochre, and the large hand is ivory-
white.

The dimensions of the largest male are as follows :—

millim.
Length of carapace ......6 cece eee e eee e eve ee en ennes 185
Breadth of carapace ........cccseeer ees ceeereeeucees 14:5

Combined length of hand and fingers along lower border.. 14°75
Combined length of basal joints, arm, and wrist along
0) Se) 0) i cc i 15

Fifteen specimens were dredged off the Travancore coast
at a depth of 430 fathoms. The bottom consisted chiefly of
coral (living and dead).

Several of the specimens were egg-laden females. The
eggs are comparatively few in number and are large, their
diameter being about 1°3 millim.

This species is very like Trachycarcinus corallinus, Faxon,
which was dredged by the ‘ Albatross’ off Panama and the
Pacific coast of Mexico at depths of 546-695 fathoms. It
differs from that species in the following particulars :—

The carapace is more granular and its lobules are capped
by blunt conical spinules, not smooth tubercles, and its poste-
rior border is finely and irregularly beaded, not dentate.

The front is deeply cut into three spines or prongs of
almost equal size, not into three teeth of which the middle
one is larger than the others.

The eyes, though very pale, are distinctly pigmented, not
devoid of pigment.

The inner angle of the wrist of the smaller cheliped is
very strongly spiniform, not unarmed.

As Mr. Faxon says, 7rachycarcinus is very closely related
to Trichopeltarium ; in fact, the relation is so close as to make
the separation of the two forms almost doubtful.

Family Portunide.

Benthochascon Hemingt, gen. et sp. n.

Closely related to Bathynectes.
Carapace subquadrilateral, its length about % its breadth,

Indian Deep-sea Crustacea. 11

depressed, the regions faintly indicated by slight inequalities
of level, its surface very finely granular.

The front, which is about a fourth the greatest breadth of
the carapace, forms a thin laminar three-lobed projection.
The antero-latera] borders, which are hardly arched and are
not much more than half the length of the postero-lateral, are
thin and are cut into four procurved teeth, of which the fore-
most is the orbital angle and the largest and the hindmost is
spine-like and the longest. Postero-lateral borders slightly
convergent ; posterior border concave.

Eye-stalks short and thick, eyes large; orbits deep, two
obsolescent sutures in the roof, a shallow notch in the outer
wall, the inner angle of the floor almost as prominent as the
outer frontal lobes.

Antennules folding transversely, their fossee widely open
to their respective orbits. The antennz lie loosely in the
orbital hiatus ; the basal joint is short, slender, and movable,
the second joint just reaches the turned-down edge of the
front ; the flagellum is considerably longer than the orbit.

Epistome well delimited from the palate. Though the
expiratory channels are well-defined grooves there are no
distinct palate-crests. The external maxillipeds fall far short
of the anterior margin of the buccal cavern, leaving the
expiratory canals permanently open.

Chelipeds massive, somewhat unequal, about two thirds as
long again as the carapace, smooth; the hand, of which
about half is formed by the fingers, forms rather more than
half their entire length; the inner angle of the wrist is a
large acute spine, and there is a spinule on the upper edge of
the hand just behind the finger-joint.

Legs smooth; a notch and spiniform tooth at the far end
of the upper border of all the meropodites. The first three
pair are nearly twice the length of the carapace ; the last pair
are not much longer than the chelipeds and have the carpus
shortened and the next two joints paddle-like and plumed.

Andaman Sea, 185 fathoms.

Family Carcinoplacide.
PILUMNOPLAX, Stimpson.
Pilumnoplax Sinclairi, sp. n.

Carapace subquadrilateral, much depressed, a little more
than three quarters as broad as long, very finely frosted,
perfectly bare, the regions fairly indicated.

Front horizontal, slightly prominent, square cut, grooved

12 Major A. Alcock and Capt. A. R. S. Anderson on

but not distinctly notched in the middle, more than a third
the ereatest breadth of the carapace ; its free edge is turned
vertically downwards to form a narrow concave facet with
raised margins.

The antero-lateral borders are not much more than half
the length of the postero-lateral ; they are thin and shar
and are cut into three teeth, of which the first is broad an
somewhat emarginate, and the other two are acute. On the
postero-lateral borders, just behind the junction with the
antero-lateral, is a denticle.

The eyes are small but well-formed, and are freely movable.
The orbits conceal the retracted eyes to dorsal view; their
upper margin is fissured near the middle and the lower
margin is slightly excavated just below the outer angle; the
inner angle of the lower margin is not prominent, though
dentiform.

The antennules fold transversely and their fossa are
freely open to their respective orbits.

The basal antennal joint is short and slender; the next
joint reaches the front; the flagellum, which arises in the
orbital hiatus, is about twice the length of the orbit.

The outer maxillipeds completely close the buccal cavern.

The chelipeds in the female (male unknown) are unequal,
the large one being not quite twice as long as the carapace ;
their surface, under the lens, is finely frosted; the inner
angle of the wrist is strongly pronounced and is capped by a
pair of acute teeth.

Legs moderately stout, unarmed, smooth, almost hairless ;
the third pair, which are somewhat the longest, are about
two and a half times the length of the carapace. The
dactyli are compressed-styliform.

Colours in spirit French-grey, fingers much darker grey.

A single female specimen, from off the Travancore coast,
430 fathoms, has the carapace 13 millim. long and 16 millim.
broad.

This species is closely related to Ptlumnoplax heterochir
(Studer), Miers, but is distinguished from it by the entire
and more prominent front, by the absence of transverse
markings on the carapace, by the longer legs, and by the
smoothness of the chelipeds and legs.

From Pilumnoplax abyssicola, Miers, which it also closely
resembles, it is distinguished by the smooth carapace (to the
naked eye), by the turned-down milled edge of the front, by
the spinule on the postero-lateral border, by the fissured
upper margin of the orbit, and by the double spine of the
inner angle of the wrist.

Indian Deep-sea Crustacea. 13

Family Rhizopida.
Camatopsis rubida, gen. et sp. n.

Nearest related to Xenophthalmodes.

Body and appendages covered with velvet.

Carapace deep, rudely semicircular, hardly broader than
long, strongly convex fore-and-aft and declivous anteriorly,
nearly flat from side to side; its only markings are two
longitudinal grooves defining the epibranchial regions.

Front much less than a fourth the greatest breadth of the
carapace, obscurely bilobed.

Orbits large, deep, the upper margin entire and cut in the
anterior border of the carapace, the excision, however, being
exactly compensated by the convex bulging of the anterior
(true inner) borders of the eye-stalks; these are almost
immovably fixed in the orbits. The eyes are reduced to a
speck of pigment placed on the ventral surface of the tip of
their stalks.

Antennule-fosse widely open to their respective orbits,
small and entirely filled by the basal antennule-joint to the
complete exclusion of the large flagellum.

The small basal antenna-joint is wedged in between and
beneath the eye-stalk and antennule, the second joint hardly
reaches the front, the flagellum is considerably longer than
the orbit.

The epistome is of good width. The buccal cavern is
squarish and is almost entirely closed by the external maxil-
lipeds. These have the merus as long as and markedly
broader than the ischium, owing to the semilunar expansion
of the outer border of the merus ; the palp is jointed to the
antero-internal angle of the merus. ‘The efferent branchial
canals cause an angular bulging in the pterygostomian regions.

The chelipeds are unequal in the male, the longer one
being about 1? times the length of the carapace; they are
unarmed and have their movements of abduction and exten-
sion somewhat cramped ; the arm is short and trigonal, the
wrist rather long and crooked ; in the larger hand the fingers
meet only at tip.

The last pair of legs are subdorsal and have the terminal
joints strongly ciliated and the dactylus slightly compressed.
The other legs have trigonal and elegantly plumose dactyli.

The abdomen of the male does not nearly fill the space
between the last pair of legs ; it is four-jointed.

Between the fourth and fifth segments of the sternum in
the male a long narrow plate is intercalated.

‘Three males from the Andaman Sea, 194 fathoms.

14 Major A. Alcock and Capt. A. R. S. Anderson on

Family Pinnoterida.

PINNOTERES, Latreille.

Pinnoteres abyssicola, sp. n., 2.

Carapace as long as broad, circular, smooth ; front rather
prominent, about one fifth the greatest breadth of the cara-
pace. The whole of the eyes and eye-stalks and almost the
whole of the orbit are visible in a dorsal view. The eyes
are well developed, but very pale. The dactylus of the
external maxillipeds is styliform and is inserted at the end of
the preceding joint. The lower border of the thumb is fringed
with fine hairs. ‘lhe legs are slender; the second and third
pair are both about 14 times as long as the carapace, and
have the dactylus slightly longer than it is in the other two

air.
: A single female with eggs and with a carapace about
8 millim. in diameter was taken from a living individual of
a large species of lamellibranch of the genus Lima, dredged
off the coast of Travancore at a depth of 430 fathoms.

It is interesting to notice that this species is quite like any
other Pinnoteres, and has apparently undergone no modifica-
tion by exposure to bathybial conditions.

ANOMURA.
Family Paguride.
PyYLOcHELES, Milne-Edwards.

Pylocheles Mierst, sp. n.

This specics so closely resembles Pylocheles Agassizii,
characterized by M. A. Milne-Edwards in Bull. Mus. Comp.
Zool. vol. viii., 1880, and fully described and figured in
Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. vol. xxxiii., 183, that trom an
examination of a single specimen we believed it to be the
very same species.

However, ten specimens, dredged in the Andaman Sea at
185 fathoms, and including adults of both sexes, agree in
exhibiting certain differences from the West-Indian species.
‘These differences are as follows :—

(1) The grooves of the carapace are without hairs and the
arched line that bounds the gastric region anteriorly is very
faint.

(2) The front border of the carapace is simply sinuous,

Indian Deep-sea Crustacea. 15

the teeth that oceur in P. Agassizit being here rounded off
instead of acute.

(3) The ophthalmic scales seem to be even less con-
spicuous, and the eyes seem to be even more reniform.

(4) The antennal spine and acicle are less sharply serrated.

(5) The high serrated carpal crest that overhangs the
base of the hand is cut into two unequal lobes; the anterior
surface of the hand, when denuded of its mat of hairs and
bristles, is pitted rather than granular, and the edges of the
hand are rather less acutely serrate.

(6) The first two pair of legs when fully extended reach
beyond the tips of the fingers.

(7) Lhe first abdominal tergum, in the male only, is rather
more exposed ; all the abdominal terga are almost hairless ;
and the posterior edge of the sixth tergum is excised.

In all other respects this species agrees exactly with the
description and figures of P. Agassiziz in the Memoir cited.
Its habits, however, seem to be somewhat different, for
whereas P. Agassiziz was found burrowing in hard sand and
in sponge, all our ten specimens were tightly impacted in the
natural hollows of decaying driftwood that had sunk to the
bottom —e. g. sticks of mangrove and bamboo.

Colours in life: upper surface of carapace and legs orange,
lower surface white, eyes brown, eggs bright yellow. Spirit-
specimens are cream-colour, with a metallic iridescence on
the gastric region and on most of the abdominal terga.

Off east coast of North Andaman Island, 185 fathoms.

[I regret that in my list of Crustacea common to the
“continental slopes’ of the Kast and West Indian regions,
published in Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 7, vol. i1., August
1898, pp. 140-141, this species appears as Pylocheles
Agassizii.—A. A.]

Family Lithodida.
PARALOMIS, White, Bouvier.

Paralomis indica, :p.n.

This is closely related to P. verrucosa (Dana), with a
‘Challenger’ duplicate of which species from Magellan
Straits it has beencompared. It differs chiefly from P. verru-
cosa in the following respects :—

‘The antero-lateral and lateral borders of the carapace are
more irregularly and much more acutely spiny.

16 Major A. Alcock and Capt. A. R. S. Anderson on

The abdomen, behind the second segment, has its dorsal
surface somewhat creased, but not tuberculous.

The eyes are relatively much larger.

The movable antennal acicle has only two spines, one of
which is small, on its outer border; the antennary flagella
are nearly as long as the carapace.

The chelipeds and legs are relatively longer and slenderer ;
the wrist is longer and its inner angle does not form a
foliaceous lobe.

Carapace piriform, convex, very slightly longer than broad;
gastric, cardiac, and branchial regions well defined, the gastric
and branchial tumid and prominent, the cardiac, though
convex, a good deal sunken. ‘The surface of the carapace, as
of the second abdominal segment, is studded with vesiculous,
pustulous, and conical tubercles of various sizes.

Rostrum very distinctly and evenly trifid and having a
denticle on either side near the base.

Lateral margins of carapace, from the spiniform orbital
angle to the posterior border, armed with spines of various
sizes ; posterior border armed with conical tubercles of uniform
size.

Eye-stalks with a few denticles dorsally. Antennulary
peduncles smooth. Antennal peduncle with the first two
joints spiniform at the outer angle, the flagellum about as
long as the carapace.

The movable antennal acicle, which reaches slightly beyond
the end of the antennal peduncle, ends very acutely; its
outer edge bears a spinule and a large spine, its inner edge
bears three small spines.

Chelipeds and legs spiny, especially on the dorsal surfaces.
The right cheliped is distinetly stouter, and the right legs are
distinctly longer, than the left. The legs, which are nearly a
dactylus longer than the chelipeds and rather less massive
than the left cheliped, are about 1§ times the length of the
carapace.

The second abdominal segment consists of a single plate
dorsally, which is dimpled on either side of the middle line.

The abdomen of the male has a slight twist to the right
and is nearly symmetrically constituted; in the female,
although it is unsymmetrical, it is not much more twisted.

Four specimens, the largest of which has the carapace
39°5 millim. long and 37 millim. broad, were taken off the
‘Travancore coast at 430 fathoms.

‘ Volnnre in spirit pale milky orange-pink, eyes intensely
ack,

Indian Deep-sea Crustacea. 17

Paralomis investigatoris, sp. n.

This appears to be most nearly related to the Paralomis
aspera of Faxon, from off the Pacific coast of Panama.

Carapace piriform, convex, slightly longer than broad ;
gastric, cardiac, and branchial regions well defined, tumid ;
the entire surface of the carapace, as of the second abdominal
segment, is closely covered with equal-sized papilliform
pet each of which is encircled by a crown of small stiff
1airs,

Rostrum very distinctly and evenly trifid, the middle spine
with a few minute denticles at the proximal end of its ventral
border ; its sides and dorsal surface are spinate.

Lateral margins of carapace, from the spiniform orbital
angle to the middle of the branchial regions, armed with
sharp curved spines.

Eye-stalks dorsally spinulose. Antennulary peduncle
smooth. Antennal peduncle with the first two joints spini-
form at the outer angle and the third joint spinitorm at the
inner angle, the flagellum longer than the carapace.

The movable antennal acicle reaches nearly to the end of
the peduncle and ends very acutely ; its outer edge bears
at least three large spines and its inner edge three small
spines.

Chelipeds and legs thickly spiny, especially on the dorsal
surfaces. The right cheliped is very slightly stouter than
the left, which is not stouter than the legs; but the right
legs are not longer than the left. The legs all end in a little
black claw and are hardly half a dactylus longer than the
chelipeds; they are about 13 times the length of the
carapace.

The second abdominal segment bears a single dorsal plate,
which is rather deeply dimpled on either side of the middle
line.

The abdomen of the male is quite straight and practically
symmetrical ; in the female it is not quite symmetrical and
is slightly twisted to the right.

Four specimens, the largest of which has the carapace
33 millim. long and 29-5 millim. broad, from off the Travan-
core coast, 430 fathoms.

Colours in spirit orange, eyes intensely black.

These are the first representatives of the genus Paralomis
ever taken in Indian seas. A closely allied form—Lithodes
Agassizii—was, however, taken in 1896 close to the spot
where these two species of Paralomis were dredged last year.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iii. 2

18 Major A. Alcock and Capt. A. R. 5. Anderson on

Family Galatheida.
Munipa, Leach.
Munida comorina, sp. 0.

Seems hardly to differ from the Caribbean Munida caribea,
A. M.-Edw. (which Faxon says is the same as JM. trasa,
A. M.-Edw.), having, like it, a long denticulated rostrum, no _
cardiac spine, and a smooth abdomen.

Dorsal surface of carapace transversely striated and bearing
eight spinules, namely a pair behind each supraocular spine,
one on either side behind and external to the first pair, and
one on either side just beyond the bifurcation of the cervical
groove; but all these spines need careful looking for with a
lens.

Rostrum well over half the length of the rest of the cara-
pace and about three times as long as the supraocular spines
(and, like them, acicular), finely and obscurely denticulated
in its distal half.

Abdomen perfectly smooth.

The two spines on the dilated portion of the antennular
peduncle are long and slender. Kye-stalks barrel-shaped,
eyes not reniform.

Chelipeds slender, twice the length of the fully extended
body and rostrum and twice the length of the longest legs ;
distant spines along the inner aspects of the arm and wrist,
and distant spinules along the inner border of the hand;
fingers straight, but in some males the immobile finger is
excavated and slightly bent at base for the reception of one
or two enlarged teeth of the dactylus.

The fully extended body is only 15 millim. long.

Thirty specimens, from off the Travancore coast, 430 fath.

Munipoprsis, Whiteaves.

Munidopsis trifida, Henderson.

Memidanne trifida, Wenderson, ‘ Challenger’ Anomura, p. 156, pl. xvi.
gf. 4.

We have already reported this species, which was originally
discovered by the ‘ Challenger’ in the fjords of western Pata-
gonia, as also occurring in Indian seas ; and Capt. Anderson
has again this year dredged two fine specimens in the Andaman
Sea at 498 fathoms.

One of these (an egg-laden female) agrees in every parti-
cular with Henderson’s description and figure; the other,

Indian Deep-sea Crustacea, 19

which is a large male, has the hands enlarged and the immo-
bile finger so bent and hollowed in its basal half that the
movable finger meets it only near the tip, the movable finger
being furnished with a serrated tubercle that occupies, without
filling, the hollow of its fellow.

Munidopsis ? rosacea, A. Milne-Edwards.

Galathodes rosaceus, A. Milne-Edwards, Recueil de Figures de Crus-
tacés, pl. xiii. fig. 1.

Two hundred and thirty-seven specimens from off the
Travancore coast, 430 fathoms, are almost certainly identical
with the ‘ Travailleur’ species.

Our young female specimens, the size of the female figured
by Milne-Edwards (which is stated to be enlarged three
times), agree exactly with that figure; but in our adults the
chelipeds are modified in a way that is not quite alike in any
two out of over a hundred specimens.

In adults one or, more usually, both of the chelipeds are
much, but very variably, thickened, especially in respect of
the hand. Further, in certain adult males of no pre-eminent
size the immobile finger of one or, more usually, both hands
is bent and hollowed in its basal half, so that the fingers
meet only near the tip, as in the adult male of the preceding
species.

If this species be not the Mundidopsis (Galathodes) rosacea
of Milne-Edwards, at any rate it, like that species, has Muni-
dopsis (Galathodes) tridentata, Ksmark, for its nearest
relative.

Munidopsis Hemingi, sp. n.

Near MM. ornata, Faxon.

Carapace convex, broader behind than in front, covered
with squamiform tubercles in no very conspicuous transverse
arrangement, the regions well defined; a pair of tubercles on
the anterior part of the gastric region are acute.

Rostrum short, simple, triangular, carinate; anterior
border of carapace with a blunt tooth, antero-lateral border
cut into three teeth, posterior border unarmed.

Abdomen unarmed, smooth, the second and third terga
transversely bicarinate.

Eyes slightly movable, a tiny papilliform spinule at their
inner angle.

Inner border of merus of external maxillipeds armed with

two large spines.

Chelipeds in the female (male unknown) equal, as long as
2%

20 Major A. Alcock and Capt. A. R. S. Anderson on

the extended body without the telson and longer than the
Jegs by their finger-length ; their dorsal surfaces are covered
with squamiform markings, the only spine is a small one
near the distal end of the inner border of the wrist; the
fingers are as long as the palm.

The first three pairs of legs have the dorsal surfaces of the
meropodites and next two joints covered with squamiform
markings; the dactyli are about half the length of their
propodites.

T'wo specimens—the largest a female 25 millim. long—
from off the Travancore coast, 430 fathoms.

The eggs are of enormous size, being nearly 2 millim. in
major diameter after contraction in spirit.

‘The difference between Munitdopsis Hemingi and M. ornata,
Faxon, is very slight; in the latter species the edges of the
rostrum are serrate and the chelipeds and legs are armed
with some spines.

Munidopsis tridis, sp. n.

Extremely closely related to M. margarita, Faxon.

Carapace subquadrilateral, convex, its regions well de-
limited and tumid, its surface armed with numerous acute
subsquamiform tubercles and symmetrically disposed spines,
of which a pair on the anterior part of the gastric region and
one in the middle of the cardiac region are slightly enlarged.

Rostrum short, simple, triangular, carinate, its edges indis-
tinctly serrulate in their distal half; anterior border of cara-
pace armed with an acute spine at the outer angle of the
orbital notch; lateral borders armed with four acute spines,
posterior border with several spines ; a row of spinules above
the postero-lateral border.

Second, third, and fourth abdominal terga transversely
bicarinate, the first four or five carine bearing symmetrically
disposed spines; the corresponding pleure are unicarinate,
the anterior of them (second) having a single upstanding
spine.

Eyes almost immovable ; an inconspicuous spinule at their
inner angle. .

Three spines, two of which are large, on the inner border
of the merus of the external maxillipeds.

Chelipeds markedly unequal in the male, very rarely
slightly unequal in the female; in both sexes the dorsal
surfaces of the arm and wrist are spiny, a few of the spines
along the inner edge being enlarged, and the inner edge of
the palm is spinulous.

In the adult male both chelipeds are vastly stouter than

Indian Deep-sea Crustacea, 21

the legs: the larger is about half as long again as the fully
extended body and from a dactylus to half a dactylus longer
than its fellow, and has the hand enlarged and the immovable
finger so arched that the fingers meet only at tip; the
smaller cheliped is very variable, sometimes it is hardly
different from its fellow, but usually it is more slender,
especially in respect of the hand, and usually the fingers meet
throughout the greater part of their extent.

In the female the chelipeds are stouter, but not vastly
stouter, than the legs, and are about as long as the fully
extended body, and the fingers are nearly straight.

The legs are about as long as the body in its natural pose
(with the abdomen bent) and are scabrous; the anterior
border of the merus and carpus is spiny, the dactylus is
nearly half the length of its propodite and has its posterior
border almost imperceptibly serrulate.

The sternum and neighbouring joints of the legs are
beautifully iridescent, as also sometimes is the dorsal surface
of the bent-up portion of the abdomen.

Fifty-two specimens from off the Travancore coast,
430 fathoms.

An adult male has the body 26°5 millim. in extreme
length and the larger cheliped 38 millim. long. An egg-
laden female is 21 millim. long and its chelipeds measure the
same.

Munidopsis Goodrigii, sp. n.

Differs from all known Indian species in having the eyes
absolutely immovable, yet furnished with neither spine nor
spinule. Its nearest relative is, perhaps, the Philippine
species MM. Millert, Henderson.

Carapace subquadrangular, convex, slightly broader behind
than in front, its regions well delimited, its posterior half
deeply sculptured transversely.

Gastric region with some not very conspicuous squamiform
sculpture and with a pair of large spines situated anteriorly ;
a spine on either side of, and a pair of spinules in the middle
of, the anterior cardiac region.

Rostrum short, simple, rather slender, smooth. A large
acute spine on the anterior margin of the carapace; lateral
borders with two large spines and a spinule, posterior border
smooth.

Abdomen smooth, the second tergum transversely bicari-
nate, the third transversely grooved.

Eyes quite immovable, without spine or spinule. ‘Two

22 Major A. Alcock and Capt. A. R. S. Anderson on

large spines on the inner edge of the merus of the external
maxillipeds.

Chelipeds in the female (male unknown) slender, unequal,
the larger one slightly longer, the smaller one very slightly
shorter, than the fully extended body ; two rows of spines on
the arm, both series continued, but much less conspicuously,
along the wrist, but not along the hand; the fingers meet
throughout their length.

Legs long, the first three pairs being scarcely shorter than
the fully extended body: their merus has a few spinules at
the proximal end of its anterior border, and both its borders
terminate acutely; their carpus is carinate and ends in a
spine; their dactylus is more than half the length of the pro-
podite and has its posterior border spinulate.

A single female from off the Travancore coast, 430 fathoms.

The length of the carapace is 21-5 millim., of the larger
cheliped 24 millim., of the smaller cheliped 21 millim.

Munidopsis Moresbyi, sp. n.

Carapace convex, broader behind than in front, covered as
far as the tip of the rostrum with transverse, squamiform,
ciliated sculpture, spineless, the regions inconspicuous.

Rostrum of moderate length, simple, triangular, dorsally
carinate. A blunt tooth on the anterior border of the cara-
pace; lateral borders cut into two blunt lobes exclusive of
the subacute antero-lateral angle, but these lobes may be
almost indistinguishable ; posterior border smooth.

Abdomen unarmed, the second to the fifth terga trans-
versely grooved ; the fifth and sixth terga, the telson and the
outer half of the blades of the swimmeret, and the margins of
the pleure with a fine, rather irregular, squamiform sculp-
turing.

Eyes freely movable, spineless, more or less retractile
beneath the rostrum.

Two very inconspicuous teeth on the inner edge of the
merus of the external maxillipeds.

Chelipeds and legs covered with ciliated squamiform
sculpturing, unarmed,

Chelipeds moderately stout, equal in both sexes, as long as
the body in its natural pose (with the abdomen flexed), not
half a dactylus longer than the legs; palm and fingers as
long as the three preceding joints combined, the fingers
slightly longer than the palm.

The dactyli of the legs are about half the length of the
propodites and have the posterior border serrated.

Indian Deep-sea Crustacea. 23

A male and a female from off the Travancore coast,
450 fathoms.

In the male the carapace is 38 millim. long and the
chelipeds 27 millim.

Colour in life pink.

This species is not very closely related to any of those
with which we are acquainted. In the system of MM. Milne-
Edwards and Bouvier (Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool. sér. 8, vol. xvi.
1894) it would be placed alongside JZ. ornata, Faxon, but it
is very different from that species. It well illustrates the
difficulties that attend the splitting-up of Munzdopsis into
subordinate genera, for it might almost equally well be placed
with Hlasmonotus or with Orophorhynchus, although it is
unlike the typical species of those genera.

PrycHoGaAsTer, A. Milne-Edwards.
[ Ptychogaster, sp.

A single very small specimen from off the Maldives,
459 fathoms, is so closely similar to P. Milne-Edwardsi,
Henderson, from off the Patagonian coast, that we do not feel
justified in giving it a distinctive name, but await further
material. |

Ptychogaster Hendersont, sp. n.

Carapace (including rostrum) equal in length to the first
six fully extended abdominal terga, covered with spinules and
spines, in which a definite serial arrangement of the larger
spines 1s hardly manifest.

All the abdominal terga (telson excepted) and pleure bear
spines: the first tergum has a transverse spiny carina con-
tinuous with a similar carina on the anterior edge of the
second pleurz ; the second has two such carine; the third
has a longitudinal row of spines at the junction with either
pleura; the fourth and fifth have two transverse series of
spines, besides an occasional spine on their posterior edge ;
the sixth has numerous spines, including three conspicuous
transverse series.

First segment of the telson not much more than half the
length of, and slightly broader than, the second.

External maxillipeds unarmed, except for the fine teeth
along the inner edge of the ischium, hairy along inner edge,
especially at distal end.

Chelipeds and legs long, slender, and spiny; in the female
(male unknown) the chelipeds are more than 2? times the

24 Major A. Alcock and Capt. A. R. S. Anderson on

length of the fully extended body and nearly half as long
again as the legs; the first two pair of legs are nearly of one
length, but the third pair are the longest by nearly a dactylus,
owing to the elongation of their propodite, which is nearly
five times as long as the dactylus.

A female from off the Travancore coast, 420 fathoms, is
30 millim. in extreme length when fully extended, and has
chelipeds 86 millim, long and third pair of legs 55 millim,
long.

Colour salmon-pink, eyes deeply pigmented.

Ptychogaster investigators, sp. n.

Carapace short, its length (including the rostrum, which is
slightly more than a fourth the total length of the carapace)
is only equal to that of the first five and a half fully extended
abdominal terga; its surface is everywhere studded with
spinules and spines, the largest of which show a tolerably
plain arrangement in four longitudinal series,

The only abdominal tergum (besides the telson) that is
quite free from spines is the third: the first tergum has a
transverse spiny carina continuous with a similar carina on
the edge of either pleura of the second segment; the second
has a transverse raised row of four large spines, besides
several teeth; both the fourth and fifth are separated from
their pleure on either side by a longitudinal row of two or
three spines or serrations; the sixth is covered with retrorse
spinules and spines, including three conspicuous transverse
series, of which the last far overhang the telson.

The first segment of the telson is hardly perceptibly longer,
and slightly narrower, than the second; the surface of both
bears some inconspicuous capillary spinelets or bristles.

‘The pleure of the third and fourth abdominal somites are
devoid of spines.

The external maxillipeds are unarmed, except for the ischial
serrations, and are very hairy in their distal half.

Chelipeds and legs long, slender, and spiny ; the chelipeds
in the female (male unknown) are about 2? times the length
of the fully extended body and half as long again as the
legs ; the racquet-like form of the hand, due to the bowing
of the basal half of the fingers, is more than ordinarily con-
spicuous,

Of the first three pair of legs the first is slightly the longest
and the second slightly the shortest; the dactyli of all are
hardly more than a quarter the length of the propodites.

A female from the Andaman Sea, 405 fathoms, is

Indian Deep-sea Crustacea. 25

55 millim. in length when fully extended, and has chelipeds
132 millim. and first legs 91 millim. long.
The eyes are large and rather pale.

Uroptycuus, Henderson.
Uroptychus, sp.
A large egg-laden female, the body of which when fully
extended measures 36°5 millim., can only be distinguished
from the Australasian U. australis, Henderson, by having the

under and inner surfaces of the arm and wrist studded with
vesiculous granules. It is probably a variety of UJ. australis.

Uroptychus bacillimanus, Sp. n.

Nearest to U. gracilimanus, Henderson, from which it
seems to differ only in having the carapace pitted and the
posterior border of the propodites of the legs unarmed, and to
the Atlantic U. rubrovittatus, A. M.-Edw., from which it
differs in having slender chelipeds and also the posterior
border of the propodites of the legs unarmed.

Carapace unarmed, except for a tiny spinule at either
antero-lateral angle and another at the outer angle of either
orbital notch ; its surface covered with a fine squamiform
pitting, its lateral borders with a regular squamiform crenu-
lation.

Rostrum triangular, simple, acute, more than a third of its
length projecting beyond the eyes.

Abdomen smooth; the third to sixth pleure rounded.

Eyes small, their major diameter less than a fifth the
length of the rostrum, brown in colour.

Antennal acicle acutely triangular, reaching about two
thirds the distance along the terminal joint of the antennal
peduncle.

Chelipeds in both sexes about twice the length of the fully
extended body, very slender in the male, still more slender in
the female, perfectly smooth, but bearing (as do also the legs)
some curiously long and delicate silky hairs; the hand is
longer and slightly broader than the wrist, the fingers are
considerably less than half the length of the palm.

Legs slender, less than half the length of the chelipeds; a
few spinules on the posterior border of the dactyli, but only a
single one (situated terminally) on the posterior border of the
propodites.

A young male and female from off the Travancore coast,
430 fathoms, and an egg-laden female from off Ceylon,

26 On Indian Deep-sea Crustacea.

320 fathoms. The last when fully extended measures
29 millim. from tip of rostrum to end of telson.

This species is readily distinguished from Uroptychus
nitidus, of which undoubted specimens have been dredged by
the ‘Investigator,’ in the form of the chelipeds, the smaller
eyes, and the pitted carapace.

Uroptychus fusimanus, sp. n.

Dorsal surface of carapace studded with numerous spines
in more or less distinct rows, the well-defined cariniform
lateral borders acutely spinate. Abdomen perfectly smooth.

Carapace (without rostrum) slightly longer than broad ;
cervical suture very well defined ; rostrum acutely triangular,
simple, the frontal margin on either side of it deeply concave
for the eye.

Antennal acicle large, reaching as far as the tip of the
peduncle.

Chelipeds in both sexes equal, about 13 times the length
of the fully extended body, much stouter and rather more
than one third of their extent longer than the legs, sub-
cylindrical as far as the compressed and broadened hands ;
along the upper and inner surfaces of the arm and wrist are
longitudinal rows of spines, those in at least two rows being
conspicuously enlarged and sharply raised; hands smooth,
broadened, the edges of the palm almost cristiform.

First three pair of legs slender, smooth, the meropodites
somewhat dilated, the third pair about a dactylus shorter than
the other two; the dactyli are less than a third the length of
their propodites, and they alone have the posterior border
finely toothed in the distal two thirds,

Seven specimens (one an egg-laden female), from off the
Travancore coast, 430 fathoms.

The fully extended body of the largest female measures
31 millim. and the chelipeds 53 millim.; that of the largest
male measures 27 millim. and the chelipeds 42 millim.

Uroptychus cavirostris, sp. 0.

Dorsal surface of carapace perfectly smooth; two sharp
spines (including the one at the antero-lateral angle) on either
lateral border. Abdomen perfectly smooth.

Carapace (without rostrum) longer than broad; cervical
groove not well defined, branchial regions well detined by
swelling. Rostrum simple, acute, broadly triangular, dorsally
concave. A minute spinule at the outer angle of the orbit.

On the British Pandalide. 27

Antennal acicle not reaching to the tip of the peduncle. Eyes
nearly reaching tip of rostrum.

Chelipeds in the female (male unknown) not much less
than twice the length of the fully extended body, much
stouter than, and more than twice as long as, the legs;
smooth, except for a hook-like spine on the ischium, a few
squamiform granules on the under surface of the base of the
merus, and a few inconspicuous denticles on the terminal
borders of the merus and carpus; they gradually broaden to
the palm, which is the broadest joint and is more than twice
the length of the fingers; the tips of the fingers are hidden
by some very long silky hairs.

The first three pair of legs are short, slender, and smooth,
except for strong serrations on the posterior border of the
curved dactylus and of the propodite. The third pair are
very slightly the longest.

A single egg-laden female from off the east coast of North
Andaman Island, 75-60 fathoms.

The length of the fully extended body is 17 millim., of
the chelipeds 32 millim., of the longest (third) pair of legs
13°5 millim.

Il.—On the British Pandalide. By W. T. CALMAn,
B.Sc., University College, Dundee.

[Plates I.-IV.]

In a paper ‘On Deep-sea Crustacea from the South-west of
Ireland” * I lately recorded the occurrence for the first time
in British waters of two species of Pandalus, referred to the
P. propinquus and P. leptorhynchus of G. O. Sars, in addition
to the two already known to occur in our seas—P. Montagut,
Leach, and P. brevirostris, Rathke. In the present paper
brief descriptions and figures are given of the more important
diagnostic characters of these four species, some of which
characters have not hitherto been pointed out.

In his account of the Crustacea dredged by the ‘ Caudan’
in the Bay of Biscay M. Maurice Caullery has recently
described T a species of Pandalus differing from all the
members of the family hitherto described in possessing on

* Trans. Roy. Irish Acad. xxxi. pt. 1, 1896; see p. 6.

+ “ Résultats Scient. de la Campagne du ‘ Caudan’ dans le Golfe de
Gascogne, 1895: Crustacés Schizopodes et Décapodes,” par M. Caullery,
‘ Annales de l'Université de Lyon,’ 1896, pp. 377-381.

28 Mr. W. T. Calman on

the first pair of pereopods a very minute chela in place of
the styliform termination usually ascribed to this appendage.
In calling attention to this character M. Caullery says :—
“ En comparant a la fig. 12 certains dessins des auteurs, on
se demande si cette pince n’a pas échappé quelquefois aux
observateurs dans d’autres formes, et il serait désirable puisque
maintenant son existence est reconnue dans un cas, de la
rechercher dans les autres Pandalide.’’ So far as concerns
the British species, at any rate, I am able to confirm this -
suggestion of M. Caullery. A microscopic but perfectly
formed chela is found on the first pereopods of all of them,
including the familiar type of the genus, P. Montagui
(Pl. I. fig. 1,e), which for more than three quarters of a
century has been described as having the first legs ‘ simple.”
Even under the microscope the chelate termination may
easily escape notice, on account of the brush of sete among
which it is partly hidden. Closer examination, however,
reveals the minute dactylus, separated from the propodus by
a distinct articulation and, as it is easy to convince oneself by
touching with a needle, freely movable. 1 am unable to say
whether muscles for opening and shutting the chela are
present. Both the fingers are slightly curved, and a tuft of
long curved sete springs from the inner margin of each.
The fingers are from one-twelfth to one-tenth of the whole
length of the propodus in adult specimens of P. Montagut,
and proportionately a little longer in young individuals. No
differences worthy of note are observable in the other British
species.

Further research is required to show whether the subgenus
Dichelopandalus which M. Caullery has based upon this
character may not be co-extensive with the genus Pandalus
itself. The collection of Crustacea in the Museum of
University College, Dundee, contains only three species of the
genus, in addition to those already named ; but all of them,
viz. P. borealis, Kréy., P. leptocerus, 5. Sm., and P. Dane,
Stps., agree in this respect with the type species. As regards
the other genera of the family, M. Caullery has shown (Z. ¢.
p- 379) that no chela is formed in Plestonika martia, A. M.-E.,
though a minute dactylus appears to be present. I find, on
the other hand, that the first pereeopod of fleterocarpus gib-
bosus, Sp. Bate, carries a chela similar to that of Pandalus,
I have below given reasons for believing that M. Caullery’s
Dichelopandalus Bonniert is identical with the P. lepto-
rhynchus of Sars and that the former specific name must be
retained for it.

As regards the generic position of the forms here discussed,

the British Pandalidex. 29

P. propinguus and P. Bonniert agree with P. Montagui in
the essential characters of the genus Pandalus as defined by
Spence Bate *. That author, indeed, includes amongst these
characters the absence of an exopod from the third maxilliped ;
but as he proceeds to describe this appendage as ‘ carrying a
small thread-like ecphysis’ or exopod in P. falcipes +, it is
plain that little importance can be attached to this point.
The branchial formula given by Spence Bate for this genus
is in error in attributing only one arthrobranchia to the third
maxilliped. In our species the formula agrees with that
given by Smith f and by Boas§, in which two arthrobranchiz
correspond to that appendage.

The fourth British species—P. brevirostris of Rathke—has
been referred by Spence Bate || to his genus Nothocaris, with
which it agrees in the possession of fixed “ teeth” as well as
articulated “ spines ” in the dorsal armature of the carapace and
rostrum. It differs from that genus, however, in the fact
that the teeth are confined to the rostrum and do not extend
to the dorsal crest, which is furnished with spinules only,
while the ‘stylocerite” or basal scale of the antennule is
rounded as in Pandalus {], not produced and pointed as in
Nothocaris. I find, moreover, that the branchial system of
this species differs from that of Nothocaris, and, indeed, of all
the Pandalide described by Spence Bate, in the absence of
arthrobranchie from all the pereeopods.

While certain of the existing genera of Pandalide appear
to be by no means satisfactorily defined and a revision of the
whole group is much required, the very aberrant branchial
formula of P. brevirostris may perhaps be held to justify the
creation of a new genus, for which I propose the name
Pandalina, for the reception of that species,

Genus PANDALUS, Leach.

Carapace without lateral crests. Dorsal crest and upper
edge of rostrum armed with movable spinules only. Basal

* Chall. Rep. Macrura, pp. 625 and 665,

t+ Op. cit. p. 669.

¢ Buil. Mus. Comp. Zool. x. 1882-83, p. 66.

§ “Decap. Slegtskabsforhold,” Vidensk. Selsk. Skr. (6) Natury. og
Math. Afd. i. 2, p. 162.

|| Chall. Rep. Macrura, p. 653.

4] In Spence Bate’s definition of the genus Pandalus the “stylocerite ”
is said to be rounded and “ but half the length of the joint which carries
it.” Nevertheless he figures this structure in his P. magnoculus (op. cit.
pl. exv. fig. 1 6) as pointed and about two thirds the length of the joint
from which it springs.

30 Mr. W. T. Calman on

lobe of antennules broad and rounded. Posterior lobe of
scaphognathite acutely pointed (Pl. IL. fig. 1,¢). Second
pair of pereeopods unequal, the carpus of the longer multi-
articulate. Branchial formula :—

|
_Mxpd.*| Mxpd.* | Per." | Pers | Per.? | Per.* | Per.° |

Pleurobranchie. . . | Sys ] 1 1 1 1
Arthrobranchize is 2 i if 1 1

Podobranchiew ..| 1+ep.| ep. ep. ep. | ep. ep.

Type species Pandalus Montagut, Leach.

Pandalus Montagui, Leach. (Pls. I-IV. fig. 1.)

Pandalus Montagui, Leach, Edinburgh Encyclopedia, vii. p. 452
1814).

nee annulicornis, Leach, Malacostraca Podophth. Britanniz, pl. xl.
(1815); Kréyer, Voyages en Scandinavie, Crustacés, Atlas, pl. vi.
fig. 3, a-c (1846); Bell, Hist. Brit. Stalk-eyed Crustacea, p. 297
1855).

Pandalc Montagui, White, Cat. Brit. Crust. Brit. Mus. p. 41 (1850).

Description.—The length of the rostrum (PI. I. fig. 1, a)
referred to that of the carapace as unity varies in our specimens
from 1:2 to 15%. It is curved strongly upwards, rather
deep, and bifid at the tip. The number of spines on its
upper edge, including those on the dorsal crest of the carapace,
is ten or eleven (in one specimen twelve) ; of these four are
placed on the carapace behind the orbital notch, or in some
cases the fifth spine is just over the posterior margin of the
notch. In only one case out of about twenty examined were
there only three spines behind the orbit. Below, the edge of
the rostrum is cut into 5 or 6 strong teeth.

The flagella of the antennules are approximately equal in
length to the carapace and reach to the tip of the rostrum or
only a little way beyond. The basal lobe is fringed with
sete on its anterior edge.

The antennal scale (Pl. II. fig. 1,6) has its outer edge
straight or slightly convex, terminating in a spine which
projects beyond the rounded tip of the scale. The width at
the tip is more than one third of the greatest width at about
one quarter the length from the base. It is to be noted that

* The length of the carapace is taken from the posterior edge in the

mid-dorsal line to the back of the orbital notch, while the rostrum is
measured forward from the last-named point.

the British Pandalide. Bal

in some very small individuals of this species (about 25 millim.
long) the outer edge of the antennal scale was found to be
slightly concave, as in the adult P. propinquus.

The third maxillipeds (Pl. If. fig. 1,d2) have no exopod
and the terminal joint is about 14 the length of the preceding.

Of the second perwopods (PI. III. fig. 1, £) that on the right
side reaches a little beyond the tip of the antennal scale when
extended forwards. ‘The carpus is divided into about 20
segments by annulations which are most distinct distally.
The merus shows abort four indistinct annulations at its
distal end. On the /eft side the second leg extends beyond
the tip of the rostrum for about 4 to 4 the length of the
carpus.

‘The remaining pereopods are rather stout and have the
dactyl, especially in the last pair (Pl. LV. fig. 1,9), short
and thick. The third legs reach a little beyond the tip of
the antennal scale, while the last pair hardly reach beyond
the middle of the scale when extended forwards.

In the first pleopods of the male the endopod (Pl. IV.
fig. 1,h) is produced distally and internally into a process
tapering to a point and armed on its inner edge with a group
of retinacula. Externally at the base of this process the outer
border of the endopodite forms a rounded shoulder or external
lobe, which in this species is not further produced. The
internal margin of the endopod is armed in its distal part with
a number of stout spines. While the form of appendage just
described, which agrees with the figure given by Kroyer (¢. c.
fig. 3, d), appears to be the typical one for this species, I have
met with three specimens (collected together in one locality,
Easthaven) in which the shape of the endopod is different
(Pl. LV. fig. 1,/'). The inner process is club-shaped, narrow
at the base and swollen at the tip, and it projects somewhat
inwards from the inner edge of the endopod. The outer lobe
is narrower and more prominent than in the typical form,
though still much shorter than the internal process, and the
spines on the inner edge of the endopodite are very short.
Both the inner and outer borders of the endopod are more
convex, or, in other words, the endopod as a whole is ovate
or lanceolate rather than oblong. ‘The specimens showing
this form of appendage are of different sizes and appear to
present no specific differences from typical specimens of
P. Montagui. It is possible that the characters mentioned
may be due to immaturity, but unfortunately the material at
my disposal is not sufficient to elucidate this point. I have
also examined a specimen, apparently full-grown, in which
the first pleopod on the right side had the endopod of the

32 Mr. W. T. Calman on

form characteristic of the female, while that on the left side_
resembled the second form of the male appendage described
above, save that the internal process was rather small and
irregularly formed. The specimen in other respects was well
developed, and no trace could be detected of Bopyrid or other
parasites. In the second pleopods of the male the appendix
masculina is about half the length of the appendix interna.

The te/son bears on its upper surface five or six pairs of
spinules in front of the large spines at the corners of the
truncated tip.

Size-—Our largest specimen is about 95 millim. in length
from the tip of the rostrum to the end of the telson.

Occurrence.—This species appears to be common all round
our coast. It frequently occurs in tide-pools, and we have
specimens from 30-70 fathoms in Loch Fyne. Records of
its occurrence at greater depths in British waters are open to
suspicion of possible confusion with one or other of the two
species next to be described.

Pandalus propinquus, G. O. Sars. (Pls. I-IV. fig. 2.)

Pandalus propinguus, G. O. Sars, “Nye Dybvandscrustaceer fra
Lofoten,” Vidensk. Selsk. Forh. Christiania, 1869, p. 148; id.
“‘Underségelser over Hardangerfjordens Fauna,’ Vidensk. Selsk.
Forh. Christiania, 1871, p. 259; S. J. Smith, Proc. Nat. Mus. Wash-
ington, iii. p. 437 (1881); id. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, x.
be 58 (1882-83); G. O. Sars, “ Oversigt af Norges Crustaceer,”

idensk. Selsk. Forh. Christiania, 1882, no. 18, p.47; A. Milne-
Edwards, Recueil de Figures de Crustacés nouveaux ou peu connus
(1883).

The rostrum (PI. I. fig. 2, a) is similar to that of P. Mon-
taguz and of about the same relative length, but rather
deeper and more strongly curved upwards. Above there are
8-9 spines, of which three are on the carapace. ‘The lower
edge of the rostrum is cut into 5-7 teeth, which are in some
specimens much more slender and turned forwards than in
P. Montague.

The flagella of the antennules reach well beyond the tip of
the rostrum, the internal flagella being in the specimens
examined from once and a half to twice the length of the
carapace. The basal lobe is free from sete on its anterior
edge.
The shape of the antennal scale (Pl. II. fig. 2,5) is very
characteristic, being much narrowed anteriorly, where the
width is only about one fourth of the greatest width of the
scale a little above the base. ‘The tip is transversely trun-
cated or slopes a little backwards from the prominent tooth on

the British Pandalide. 33

- its outer side. The external edge is distinctly concave, the
whole scale curving slightly outwards from the base.

The third mawillipeds agree closely with those of P. Mon-
tagui.

The second percwopod on the right side (Pl. III. fig. 2, 7)
is shorter and stouter than the corresponding appendage of
P. Montagu, only reaching to or falling a little short of the
tip of the antennal scale. The carpus is divided by four
articulations into five segments, of which the first occupies
about one half the length of the carpus, while the next three
are subequal and together equal the length of the fifth seg-
ment. ‘The chelais much stronger than in P. Montagut. On
the /eft side the second leg is shorter than is usual in P. Mon-
tagut, just reaching to the tip of the rostrum.

The remaining thoracic legs, on the other hand, are longer
and more slender than in P. Montaguz, those of the third
pair reaching considerably, and those of the last pair a little,
beyond the tip of the antennal scale. The dactyl is a little
longer and more slender than in the type species (PI. IV.
fig. 2,9).

In the first pleopods of the male the endopod (Pl. IV.
fig. 2, h) differs trom that of P. Montagu? in having the pointed
inner process very short, while the rounded outer lobe is more
prominent than in that species, so that both reach about the
same level. In the second pleopods of the male the appendix
masculina slightly exceeds the appendix interna in length.

The telson bears on its upper surface five pairs of spinules
in all the specimens examined.

The three British specimens of this form which I have seen
agree in all essential points with Sars’ original description
and with a very fine female specimen from Norway presented
to the Museum of University College by Prof. Sars. Two
specimens from the American coast presented by the Smith-
sonian Institution differ in the larger number of teeth on the
rostrum, + in the one case and > in the other; both, how-
ever, have, as usual, three spines on the carapace. The
American specimen figured by A. Milne-Hdwards (/. ¢.) has
; rostral teeth, and of these four are on the carapace, as is
usual in P. Montagui. Smith (/.c. 1881) records an ab-
normal specimen in which the usual characters and proportions
of the right and left chelipeds were reversed *.

* Smith also found an example of the same abnormality in P. lepto-
cerus. Boas (‘ Decapodernes Slegtskabsforhold,’ 1880, p. 35 (57)) states
that in P, borealis the longer chela is sometimes the right, sometimes the
left.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iii. 3

34 Mr. W. T. Calman on

Size—Our largest specimen is about 73 millim. total
length. Sars (7. c. 1871) states that full-grown individuals
may exceed 100 millim., and the specimen sent us by him is
nearly of that length. Smith records a specimen over
110 millim. in length.

Occurrence.—I have seen only three specimens from British
localities—a male and a female from Lower Loch Fyne, depth
not recorded, and a female from 40 fathoms in Loch Long.
Hitherto the species has only been recorded from Norwegian
and New England waters, at depths of 80-300 fathoms in the
former (Sars) and 116-524 fathoms in the latter (Smith).

Pandalus Bonniert, Caullery. (Pls. I-IV. fig. 3.)
Pandalus leptorhynchus, G. O. Sars, “ Oversigt af Norges Crustaceer,”
Vidensk. Selsk. Forh. Christiania, 1882, no. 18, p. 47, pl. 1. figs. 8-10.
Pandalus (Dichelopandalus) Bonniert, Caullery, Res. Scient. d. 1. Cam-
agne du ‘Caudan,’ Crustacés Schizopodes et Décapodes, Ann.
ay. Lyon, 1896, p. 379, pl. xv. figs. 7-15.
Non Pandalus leptorhynchus, Kinahan, Nat. Hist. Rev. vy. 1858, Proce.
Soc. p. 40.

Non Pandalus leptorhynchus, Stimpson, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila-
delphia, 1860, p. 38.

The rostrum (Pl. I. fig. 8,a) is more slender and, as a
rule, more nearly horizontal than in P. Montagut, curving
downwards a little way from the base and then rising gently
towards the tip, which is very little above the produced
dorsal line of the carapace. In a few specimens, however,
the upward curvature is much more strongly marked. The
number of spines above varies from 8 to 11, the most common
number being 9, and of these three are behind the orbit in all
the specimens examined. The number of teeth on the lower
edge varies from 6 to 8.

The inner flagella of the antennules measure from about
once and a half to twice the length of the carapace and extend
far beyond the tip of the rostrum. The basal lobe is without
setee on its anterior edge.

The scale of the antenna (PI. 11. fig. 8,6) is similar in
shape to that of P. Montaguz, but the terminal spine is less
prominent, not projecting beyond the tip of the scale.

The third mazilliped (PI. II. fig. 8, d) carries an exo-
pod reaching to about one third of the length of the ischial
joint. In other respects the appendage agrees closely with
that of P. Montagut.

The second perwopod (PI. III. fig. 3,f£) on the right side
resembles that of P. propinquus. As in that species, the

a ee ee ee ee ee ee

the British Pandalide. 35

carpus is divided into five segments *. When extended
forwards the limb reaches a little beyond the middle of the
antennal scale. On the /e/t side the second leg reaches to, or
only a little beyond, the tip of the rostrum. ‘The remaining
legs just reach to, or fall a little short of, the tip of the an-
tennal scale. They are much more slender than in either of
the species above described, and the very long and slender
dactylus affords a conspicuous character by which the species
may be readily recognized (Pl. IV. fig. 3, 9).

In the jirst pleopods of the male the endopod (PI. IV.
fig. 38, h) has almost exactly the same form as the corresponding
appendage of P. propinquus, the outer lobe being rounded
and equalling, or even slightly surpassing, the internal process
in length. In the second pleopods of the male the appendia
masculina is slightly longer than the appendix interna.

The telson has in most cases seven pairs of spines on its
upper surface, but in one or two cases a larger number (8-9)
is present, not always symmetrically placed.

Prof. Sars’ short description of the specimens referred by
him (with an expression of doubt) to the P. leptorhynchus of
Kinahan and the figures which he gives of the rostrum and
the second pair of legs show close agreement with the
specimens before me. No mention is made of the presence of
an exopod on the third maxillipeds ; butin reply to an inquiry
on this point, Prof. Sars very courteously informed me that
a re-examination of his specimens showed them to be possessed
of this appendage, so that little doubt can remain as to the
identity of the species. On the other hand, I do not think
that Sars’ hesitating reference of this form to the P. lepto-
rhynchus of Kinahan can be sustained. Kinahan describes
his species as having the rostrum shorter than in P. Mon-
tagut, “ rounded instead of compressed at the sides, wanting
the membranous dilatation on the under edge outside of the
eye.” There are five spines on the carapace, separated by an
interval from the six spines on the rostrum, which is armed
below with four “very minute” teeth. ‘The figures given
are somewhat crude and certainly do not suggest any close
resemblance to the present species. The presence of five

* In one specimen (out of eleven examined) the carpus shows in-
distinct annulations on the proximal side of the four normal articulations,
and traces of annulations are discernible even on the merus. The whole
limb is rather longer and more slender than usual. 38. J. Smith has
recorded a similar variation in his P. leptocerus (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus.
iii. p. 438, 1881). Out of several hundred specimens examined by him
only six were abnormal in the segmentation of the carpus, and of these
one had “ the right carpus multiarticulate throughout and composed of
about eighteen segments, nearly as in P, Montagut.” as

36 Mr. W. T. Calman on

spines on the carapace is a character not found in any of our
specimens, while the small size (about 19 millim.) and littoral
habitat (‘in a small sand-pool in the Zostera-bank at
Sandycove, Kingston”) help to strengthen the probability
that Kinahan had before him only a young and possibly some-
what aberrant specimen of P. Montagu *.

The species described by Caullery (7. ¢.) as Pandalus
(Dichelopandalus) Bonniert appears to differ in no essential
point from the present form. By the great kindness of
M. Caullery I have been permitted to examine two of the
type specimens. Both unfortunately were very imperfect
(as were all the specimens obtained), but, so far as could be
seen, presented no differences from our specimens save in their
smaller size. As Caullery’s figures show, they agree in the
characteristic points of the exopod on the third maxillipeds,
the long and slender dactyli of the ambulatory legs, and the
presence of only three spinules on the carapace behind the
rostrum. From the description we also gather that the carpus
of the second leg is five-jointed. Since I believe that
Kinahan’s name cannot properly be applied to the present
species, that used by Caullery will take its place; and as his
subgenus Dichelopandalus may be left in abeyance till it is
shown not to be synonymous with the genus itself, the name
for the species defined above will be Pandalus Bonniert,
Caullery.

Size.—The total length of our largest specimen is about
110 millim.

Occurrence.—A bout a dozen specimens are in our collection
from various localities in Loch Fyne and Loch Long from
depths of 40-105 fathoms. The only other locality within
the British area from which it has yet been recorded 1s off the
south-west coast of Ireland, 214 fathoms (Calman, Trans.
Roy. Irish Acad. xxxi. pt. 1, 1896, p. 6). I have also
examined specimens taken in 120 fathoms off Rockall (tom.
cit. p. 77). Prof. Sars records it from Norway at depths
of 60-150 fathoms, and the ‘Caudan’ dredged it in the
Bay of Biscay at from 180 to 1200 metres. It is probable
that this species as well as P. propinquus has been frequently
confounded with the common P, Montagut. Prof. Henderson,
in his “ Decapod and Schizopod Crustacea of the Firth of
Clyde” (‘Trans. Nat. Hist. Soc. Glasgow, 1886, p. 36, sep.

copy), says of P. annulicornis (= Montagut), “ Many examples

* The name Jeptorhynchus was afterwards independently used by
Stimpson for an Australian species of Pandalus very different from an
of ny forms here discussed (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1860,
p 38).

the British Pandalides. 37

from deep water, especially those taken in Loch Fyne, have
the beautiful red tinge so characteristic of deep-sea Crustacea,”
and he gives the size of large specimens as 44 inches. It is
not unlikely that these large red-coloured specimens from
deep water belonged to the present species. One of our
specimens, after several years’ preservation in glycerine, still
shows traces of a brilliant red coloration, especially on the
anterior part of the carapace and on the legs.

The P. leptocerus of Smith (Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. iii.
p- 437, 1880; Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. x. p. 58, 1882-83 ;
A. Milne-Edwards, ‘ Recueil de Fig. de Crustacés nouveaux
ou peu connus,’ 1883) is very closely related to the present
species, from which, however, it is at once distinguished by
the minutely scabrous surface of the body. The Pandalus
Jalcipes of Spence Bate (Rep. Chall. Macrura, p. 698, pl. exv.

fig. 2) is, perhaps, identical with Smith’s species.

Genus PANDALINA, nov.

Carapace without lateral crests. Upper edge of rostrum
armed with fixed teeth as well as movable spinules. Basal
lobe of antennules broad and rounded. Scaphognathite
with posterior lobe truncated (Pl. IL. fig. 4, ec). Second pair
of pereopods unequal, carpus of the longer multiarticulate.
Branchial formula :—

Per.! | Per.? | Per.? | Per.’ Per.°

Mxpd.? | Mxpd.?

Pleurobranchie. . rs Me 1 il

Arthrobranchize ds 2

Podobranchize ..|1+ep.| ep. ep. ep. ep. ep.

Type species Pandalina brevirostris (Rathke).

Pandalina brevirostris (Rathke), (Pls. I-IV. fig. 4.)
Pandalus brevirostris, Rathke, Beitr. z. Fauna Norwegens, Acta Ac,
Leop. xx. p. 17 (1843).
Hippolyte Thompsoni, Bell, Hist. British Stalk-eyed Crustacea, p, 290.
Pandalus Jeffreysi, Spence Bate, Nat. Hist. Rev. vi. 1859, Proc. Soc.

. 100.
Paidalus Thompsoni, Norman, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (3) viii. 1861,
p. 279, pl. xiv. figs. 3-9. : )
Pandalus Rathkii, Heller, Sitzungsber. d. Wien. Akad. Wiss, xlvi,
1863, p. 441, pl. iii. fig. 31.

38 Mr. W. T. Calman on

Pandalus brevirostris, Heller, Crust. siidl. Europa, 1863, p. 247, pl. viii.
fig. 9; A. Milne-Edwards, Recueil de Fig. de Crustacés nouveaux
ou peu connus (1885) *.

Rostrum (Pl. I. fig. 4, a) about half the length of the
carapace, straight, pointed at the tip. Above there are 7 or 8
spines (the latter number is more common), of which 4 or 5
are on the carapace. Two (or rarely three) of the most ante-
rior are not separated from the rostrum by articulation.
Below, the rostrum bears 2, 3, or rarely 4 minute teeth.

The flagella of the antennules are much longer in the male
than in the female. In an ovigerous female with the carapace
4 millim. long the flagella were about 2°5 millim. in length.
In a male with a carapace of 5 millim. the flagella were
nearly 10 millim. The basal lobe has its anterior margin
free from sete.

The antennal scale (PI. II. fig. 4,5) is comparatively short
and broad and only a little narrowed towards the tip.

The third maziillipeds (Pl. II. fig. 4,d) are slender and

the terminal joint is twice the length of the preceding. The.

exopod is wanting.

The second pereopod (P\. III. fig. 4,/) on the right side
is rather short and stout, reaching beyond the middle of the
antennal scale. he carpus is divided into four joints by
three articulations, of which the proximal is situated beyond
the middle of the joint. The chela is more than half the
length of the whole carpus. The left leg of the second pair
reaches beyond the tip of the antennal scale, and the carpus
and merus are divided by numerous annulations as in the
other species. ‘The third pair reach beyond the tip of the
antennal scale, while the last pair fall a little short of it.

In the first pleopod of the male the endopod (Pl. IV.
fig. 4,) is rather triangular in shape, the internal process
forming the apex, from which the outer edge curves gradually
to the base, with only an indication of the outer lobe so well
marked in the other species. The appendage resembles that
of the female so much in general shape that it is difficult at
first sight to distinguish the sexes by this character. In the
second pleopods of the male the appendix masculina is a little
shorter than the appendix interna.

‘There are about 8 pairs of spinules on the telson.

Size.—Length of our largest specimen about 25 millim,

* J have not seen this figure, the plate containing it being absent from

the copy of this very rare work presented to our Museum by Prof. Milne-
Edwards,

P
————————oo eee

the British Pandalide. 39

Occurrence.—This species, which ranges from Norway to
the Adriatic, appears to occur all round our coasts. It is
commoner on the west coast (Clyde, 5-40 fathoms: Hender-
son), but it also occurs on the east coast (Firth of Forth, rare:
T. Scott; Firth of Tay, 1 sp.: W. 7. C.). Norman records
it as very abundant in Shetland (‘ Last Rep. Dredging,
Shetland,” Rep. Brit. Assoc. 1868, p. 265), and it extends to
the south of England (Plymouth).

The following table will serve for the ready determination
of the four British species of Pandalidee :—

I. Rostrum longer than carapace, armed above
with spinules only.
1. Third maxilliped without exopod.,

a. Carpus of second pereeopod on right side
with many (20) annulations. Antennal
scale not much narrowed in front, outer
BOP SiRAe Mba corsets tin scnseyeuteo 0215 © Pandalus Montagu,

b. Carpus of second perzopod on right side [ Leach.
with 4 annulations. Antennal scale
very narrow in front, outer edge concave. Pandalus propinquus,

2. Third maxilliped with exopod. Carpus of [G. O. Sars.
second pereopod, right side, with 4 annu-
LD IOT Sy Sa Gory Geach cratic Beiose Co Geo G GS Oee: Pandalus Bonnieri,
II. Rostrum half the length of carapace, armed {Caullery.

above with spines and teeth. Third maxilli-

ped without exopod. Carpus of second

perzeopod, right side, with 3 annulations.... Pandalina brevirostris
[(Rathke)

EXPLANATION OF PLATES I-IV.

Fig. 1. Pandalus Montagui, Leach.
Fig. 2. Pandalus propinquus, G. O. Sars.
Fig. 3. Pandalus Bonnieri, Caullery.
Fig. 4. Pandalina brevirostris (Rathke),

Reference letters:—a. Carapace with rostrum. 6, Antennal scale.
c. Second maxilla. d. Third maxilliped. e. Tip of first perseopod,
showing chela. 7. Second persopod of right side. g. Last perseopod.
h. Endopod of first pleopod of male. '. Second form of same described
in P. Montagu.

Note.—To facilitate comparison, the figures of the same part in the
different species have been drawn approximately of the same size, It
will, of course, be understood from the dimensions recorded in the text
that the actual sizes may be very different.

40 Mr. O. Thomas on some small

III.—On some small Mammals from the District of Cuzco,
Peru. By OupFrieLtp THOMAS.

Tue British Museum has received a small collection of
mammals obtained in the district of Cuzco by Herr Otto
Garlepp, brother of the Herr Gustav Garlepp to whom
science is indebted for the discovery of the remarkable
mammals from Sahama, Bolivia, described in the ‘ Annals’
for April 1898 *.

In the present series there are examples of Cebus albifrons,
Lagothrix Humboldti, a species of Myotis, Sturnira lilium,
Putorius macrurus, Dasyprocta isthmica, Rhipidomys leuco-
dactylus, Oryzomys Stolzmannt, Akodon caliginosus, and of the
four following new forms :—

Sciurus estuans cuscinus, subsp. n.

Allied to the form of the S. @stuans group described by
Gray as “ Macroxus trroratus” + from specimens brought by
Bartlett from the Ucayali River, probably from near Sara-
yacu. Similar in size, dorsal coloration, and other characters
to that animal, but distinguished by its much brighter and
more sharply defined under surface, which is a bright yellowish
buff throughout, except on the chin and throat, which are
whitish. ‘lhe extreme bases of the belly-hairs are slaty, but
this does not show on the surface. Feet becoming more
yellowish terminally, the digits, both anterior and posterior,
deep orange-yellow. Yellowish ear-patches well-marked.
Tail-hairs orange or ringed orange and black for their basal
halves, their tips dull orange with a subterminal band of black.

Skull as in S. ¢rroratus, but with much shorter nasals,
which are very considerably surpassed posteriorly by the
premaxillary processes. One upper premolar.

Dimensions of the type (an adult male, in skin) :—

Head and body (c.) 205 millim.; tail (c.) 180; hind foot
8. u.t (wet) 46; ear (wet) 20.

Skull: basilar length 36:1; greatest breadth 28-4; nasals,
length (diagonally) 12°2; palate length from henselion 19°6 ;
diastema 11°6; length of upper tooth-series 7:3.

Hab, Ocabamba, Cuzco.

Type B.M. no. 98, 11. 6. 8. Collected by Herr Otto
Garlepp, Nov. 1, 1897.

* Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (7) i. p. 277 (1898).
+ Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (3) xx. p. 481 (1867).
} s. u.=sine ungue.

Mammals from the District of Cuzco, Peru. 41

Two precisely similar specimens of this squirrel are in
Mr. Garlepp’s collection. ‘They may be readily distinguished
from the co-types of S. irroratus by their yellow digits and
other characters above described. They have a considerable
resemblance to the Nicaraguan Scturus Richmond, Nelson *,
which is evidently a member of the same group, but has a
browner and less olivaceous general colour, darker belly and
feet, and much longer and more posteriorly extended nasals.

S. irroratus has been amalgamated by Alston and others
with S. @stwans; but in the present state of our knowledge I
do not venture to express an opinion as to its proper status.

Nectomys Garleppit, sp. n.

Similar in most respects to JV. apicalis, Pet., but with
decidedly shorter feet and broader skull.

General colour about the same glossy greyish-brown found
in N. apicalis and grandis, rather darker than in NV. palmipes.
Sides more grizzled fulvous; belly greyish white, broadly
washed with dull buffy, not sharply defined laterally ; throat
and anal region dull whitish. Anterior part of outer surface
of ear black. Upper surface of hands and feet thinly haired,
brownish white; soles with 5 pads only. Hairs of tail black
above and on the sides, as are most of the proximal ones
below, but terminally they are mostly whitish.

Skull broadly and heavily built, although not so much so
as in N. saturatus; nasals elongate, produced into a long
median point posteriorly ; supraorbital ridges widely diver-
gent, their parietal portions markedly convex outwards.

Dimensions of the type (in skin) :—

Head and body 205 millim.; tail 200; hind foot s. u.
(wet) 45; ear (wet) 20.

Skull: basilar length (c.) 36; occipito-nasal length 45;
greatest breadth 23°7 ; nasals 18°85; interorbital breadth
78; greatest separation of temporal ridges on brain-case 16 ;
palate length from henselion 21'5; diastema 13; palatal
foramina 7°2 x 3:1; length of upper molar series 6°9.

Hab. Ocabamba, Cuzco.

Type B.M. no. 98. 11. 6. 21. Collected by Herr Otto
Garlepp. Seven specimens examined.

This Nectomys is no doubt closely allied to the Guayaquil
N. apicalis, but as the largest of seven specimens has a hind
foot only 45 millim. in length, while in apicalis Peters’s type
has the same measurement 51 millim., and in two examples
from N. Peru collected by Dr. Stolzmann it is 50 and

* P. Biol. Soc. Wash. xii. p. 146 (1898).

42 Mr. O. Thomas on some small

52 millim. respectively, the Cuzcan form is evidently distinct
enough to deserve a name. Its skull also shows various
differences, among which may be specially noted the greater
spread of its temporal ridges.

Marmosa rapposa, sp. n.

Allied to /. cinerea, Temm., but with no long fur on the
base of the tail, with very long body-fur, and with deep yellow
cheeks and throat.

Size about as in JZ, cinerea. Fur long, soft and fluffy,
the hairs of the back about 16 millim. in length. General
colour above buffy grey, the crown of the head similar to the
back ; centre of face yellowish, passing into the grey on the
forehead. Orbital rings deep black, not very broad; a spot
at base of whiskers also black, separated from the orbital
rings by a narrower yellow line. Cheeks below orbital rings
and lips deep orange-yellow, the hairs yellow to their bases ;
region between eye and ear and round the bases of the latter
also yellow, but the hairs greyish proximally, Ears with a
well-marked anterior basal projection. Chin deep unmixed
yellow, like the cheeks. Chest, belly, and inner sides of
limbs buffy yellow, darker on the chest, paler on the belly,
the hairs slaty basally except just along the middle line of the
belly. Mammary region reddish brown. Line of demarca-
tion on sides quite indistinct, the buffy of the back passing
gradually into the yellow of the belly. Outer sides of
limbs like back, inner sides like belly ; metacarpals brown
above, anterior digits and whole upper surface of hind feet
dull whitish. Tail practically naked from its base, the body-
fur not extending on to its proximal portion; in colour, as
usual, it is black proximally and white terminally, the two
colours passing quite gradually into one another.

Skull in size, proportions, and the development and position
of the postorbital processes very similar to Central-American
examples of MW. cinerea, therefore very different to the narrow-
waisted skull of JZ. regina. Posterior part of nasals well
expanded. Postorbital processes triangular, but little ante-
rior to the broad and rounded brain-case. Middle and
posterior premolars approximately equal in size.

Dimensions of the type (an old female) :—

Head and body (in skin) 195 millim.; tail (dried, with
vertebrae present) 223; hind foot s. u. (wet) 27°5; ear
(wet) 25.

Skull: basal length 43:2, greatest breadth 25°3; nasals,
least breadth 3°2, greatest breadth 6°5; interorbital breadth 9 ;

Mammals from the District of Cuzco, Peru. 43

tipto tip of interorbital processes 11 ; intertemporal breadth7°6;
palate length from gnathion 26; palate breadth 14:6; com-
bined length of ms. 7°6.

Hab. Vilcanota River, just north of Cuzco, alt. 1500 m.

Type B.M. no. 98. 11. 1. 18. Collected by Otto Garlepp,
December 1897.

“Native name Rapposa.” (The same word, but spelt
“Rapozo,” is also given by Mr. Hopke for J. phea.)

This Marmosa is distinguishable from M. cinerea by the
non-extension of the body-fur on to the tail and by its deep
yellow cheeks and throat. In four young specimens sent
with the adult female, and no doubt her young, the orange
marking round the mouth is equally conspicuous. “Déidelphys
noctivaga,”’ Tschudi *, agrees with it in some particulars, but
the red sides described and figured in that animal readily
separate the two, and perhaps indicate that Tschudi’s species
is a member of the rufous group allied to M. murina.

Marmosa quichua, sp. n.

Allied to M. marica, Thos., but rather larger, as large as
the smaller forms of the MW. murina group. ‘Tail white
terminally, as in M/. cinerea.

General colour above dull fawn, not very dissimilar to that
of M. marica, but rather darker and less wavy. Fur of back
about 8 millim. in length. Black orbital rings of medium
development. Lower cheeks, chin, and centre of chest buffy
yellowish. Belly buffy fawn, passing gradually into the
colour of the back, the hairs slaty at their bases. Upper-
sides of hands and feet whitish. ‘l'ail with its basal half inch
furry like the body, the remainder naked, black for its basal,
white for its distal half.

Skull larger than in M7. marica ; muzzle narrow ; zygomata
widely expanded, at least for their posterior halves, but ante-
riorly, for their orbital portions, their profile viewed from
above is concave, very much as in M/. dryas. Nasals but
little expanded posteriorly. Supraorbital rims well defined,
beaded, evenly divergent, but not angularly expanded. Last
upper premolar slightly smaller than the middle one. Lower
canine about equal to the middle premolar, twice as high as
the subequal incisors and anterior premolars.

Dimensions (approximate) of the typical skin :—

Head and body 116 millim.; tail 142; hind foot s. u. (wet)
17; ear (wet) 19.

* ‘Fauna Peruana, Mamm. p. 148, pl. viii. (1845).

di On a new Species of Marmosa.

Skull: basal length 27:5; orbito-nasal length 31;
greatest breadth 17°5; nasals 13°6 x 3°8; interorbital breadth
5*2; palate length from gnathion 16:5; palate breadth 9°6.
Combined length of ms. 5:5.

Hab. Ocabamba, Cuzco.

Type B.M. no. 98. 11.6.18. Collected by Herr Otto
Garlepp, October 2, 1897.

This species may be readily distinguished from its allies
by its marked cranial characters and its white-tipped tail, a
peculiarity found in the MM. cinerea group, but not in any of
the smaller members of the genus.

1V.—On a new Species of Marmosa.
By OLDFIELD THOMAS.

In working out Herr Otto Garlepp’s two species of Marmosa
the following proves also to need description :—

Marmosa phea, sp. n.

A Marmosa allied to M. cinerea, but very much smaller.

Size about two thirds that of J. cinerea. Fur soft and
woolly, about 11 millim. long on the back. General colour
above buffy greyish brown, browner than in the grey
M. cinerea; sides with a tinge of isabelline. Middle line of
face greyish white. Orbital markings black, not sharply
defined, extending forwards without interruption to the roots
of the whiskers. Cheeks, chin, and chest dull buffy yellowish,
much duller than in J/. rapposa; belly buffy yellow, not
sharply defined, the hairs slaty basally. Kars with a basal
projection. Limbs coloured externally like back, internally
like belly. Carpus, metacarpus, and tarsus brown; fingers,
metatarsals, and toes whitish, Tail furry like the body for
its proximal three quarters of an inch, then finely scaled,
naked, brown basally, white terminally, the two colours
mottled at their junction.

Skull with but very slightly developed supraorbital ridges
and processes, less than in any other member of this group.
Nasals well broadened, the portion behind the broadening
longer than usual. Brain-case smooth and rounded, the
temporal ridges scarcely perceptible. Middle and posterior
premolars subequal.

Dimensions of the type (an adult female in skin) :—

Head and body (c.) 132 millim.; tail (c.) 179; hind foot
s. u. (wet) 21; ear (wet) 20.

Se er’ © ee ee ee.

On a new Scale-Insect of the Genus Walkeriana. 45

Skull: length from front of interparietal to tip of nasals 34;
greatest breadth 20°3; nasals, length 16°7, least breadth 3,
greatest breadth 5; interorbital breadth 7 ; tip to tip of post-
orbital processes 7°38; intertemporal breadth 7:2; palate
breadth 12; combined lengths of ms.1-3 7:2.

Hab. San Pablo, S.W. Colombia, alt. 1500 m.

Type B.M. no. 98. 9. 5. 2. Collected by Gustav Hopke,
March 29, 1897.

The only species with which MZ. phea could be confused is
Tomes’s Didelphys Waterhouset, and that is distinctly stated
both by collector and describer to have a complete pouch, and
the figure of its skull shows that it has well-marked triangular
postorbital processes.

Herr Hopke obtained two quite similar examples of
M. phea (both females), one of them with four young attached
to its mamme.

V.—Description of a new Scale-Insect of the Genus
Walkeriana. By E. EK. Green, F.E.S.

[Plate V.]

THE specimens referred to in this paper were received some
time ago at the British Museum, and as the species appeared
to be new, I asked Mr. Green to furnish me with a description
of it. This he has kindly done, and I have now much
pleasure in submitting it for publication —Cuas, O. WATER-
HOUSE.

Walkeriana Andrew, sp.n. (Pl. V.)

Adult (?) female (fig. 1) oval, convex above, with the median
dorsal area slightly depressed. The whole body closely
covered with granular waxy matter. Complete marginal and
a dorso-lateral series of stout, bluntly tapering, dense waxy
processes, those on the anterior third of the body directed
forwards, the others backwards. Of these processes there
are 27 in the marginal series (13 on each side and 1 from the
posterior extremity) and 13 or 14 on each side in the dorso-
lateral series. From between the marginal processes and
from their truncate ends spring delicate silky filaments.
Colour of denuded body of dried insect dark reddish brown,
but this is entirely concealed above by the close covering of
fulvous-white waxy matter, and below it is obscured by a
thinner covering of whitish powder, Antenne 8-jointed,

46 Ona new Scale-Insect of the Genus Walkeriana.

eighth longest, as long as second and third together; com-
mencing with the longest, the antennal formula will be :—
8, 3, 2, 1, (4, 5, 6), 7; each joint with a ring of stout hairs
near the distal edge, except the eighth, which has similar
hairs scattered irregularly over its surface and two very much
longer ones on one side (fig. 3). Eye (fig. 7) prominent,
conical. Legs stout, with scattered hairs and spines; a very
long hair on trochanter. Foot (fig. 6) with stout curved
claw ; digitules four, simple tapering bristles. Tibia a little
shorter than femur; tarsus less than half length of tibia,
Rostral apparatus situated between first and second pairs of
legs. Skin on under surface with numerous stout hairs,
which are longest and whip-like on the space between an-
tenne and rostrum. Each hair has a small transparent
collar round its base and is mounted on a prominent tubercle
(fig. 4, &). Skin on dorsal surface thickly studded with
tubular spines, stout hairs, and glandular pores of several
forms (figs. 4,5). The tubular spines are especially massed
on definite tracts corresponding with the dorsal and marginal
processes (fig. 2). The basal third or fourth of each spine is
rather abruptly widened ; the distal part slightly curved and
tapering to a blunt point (fig. 4, a). Each spiniferous tract
has a well-defined border, marked by a line of small pores
with prominent thickened rims and _ cross-shaped orifices
(fig. 5, a) ; and the marginal tracts enclose central spaces
bearing a few whip-like collared hairs (fig. 4, 6) and
specialized glandular pores with very prominent rims, each
with a broad duct leading down into the body for a short
distance, their orifices oblong and transversely constricted
(fig. 4,c). Scattered over the dorsal surface are other glan-
dular pores having prominent rounded rims, with depressed
centre and circular orifice (fig. 5, 6). Anal aperture sur-
rounded by a dense cluster of stout tapering hairs converging
to the centre.

The largest of the specimens under examination measures,
exclusive of waxy appendages, 8x 5 millim.

Cast skins of the younger stages show a double median
dorsal series of incurved waxy processes. The marginal
processes are longer and more tapering than in the adult.

It is possible that the specimens under examination are
immature. There is no sign of an ovisac, nor were any
embryos observed in the bodies of the insects. The small
number of antennal joints also is unusual for an adult
Monophlebid.

Habitat on bark of unidentified tree, Congo, Africa, Col-

On the Genus Grammatodon. 47

lected by the late Mr. G. L. E. Andres, to whom the species
has been dedicated.

Signoret founds his Monophlebid genus Walkertana upon
asingle species from Ceylon, W. floriger of Walker. He
has made the generic description so minute and close, including
even colour and relative lengths of antennal and crural joints
&e., that it is really more suitable for specific use, and would
exclude anything but the typical species. I think it advisable
to widen the generic characters, to admit what are evidently
specifically allied insects. I have at least four other species
from Ceylon that I propose to place in this genus.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE V.

Fig. 1. Female insect, dorsal view, showing waxy processes as in life.

Fig. 2. Ditto after maceration, showing spiniferous tracts.

Fig. 3. Antenna.

Fig. 4. Part of one of the marginal spiniferous tracts, showing (a) tubular
spines, (0) collared hair, (c) glandular pores.

Fig. 5. Part of skin, showing (a) glandular pores from border of spini-
ferous tract, (b) larger pores with circular orifices,

Fig. 6. Foot.

Fig. 7. Eye.

VI.—Note on the Genus Grammatodon, Meek and Hayden.
By H. Woops, M.A.

THE genus Grammatodon was founded by Meek and Hayden
on a species of “Arca” from the Jurassic of the Black Hills.
The name, with a reference to the type species, was published
in 1860, but no diagnosis of the genus was given until 1864.
The type species is Arca (Cucullaa) inornata, Meck and
Hayden, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad. 1858, p. 51.

In their description the authors state that Grammatodon is
closely allied to Macrodon, Lycett. The type of the latter
genus (Cucullwa hirsonensis, VArchiac) differs from most of
the other species in having the umbones placed very ante-
riorly. After comparing Grammatodon with a number of
species of Macrodon, I am unable to detect any differences
which could be regarded as of generic importance, and I
consider that the two forms are identical.

It was pointed out by Meek and Hayden that the name
Macrodon had been previously used by Miiller (1842) fora
genus of fishes (Characinidz), and they proposed to substitute
for it Parallelodon; this name has been adopted by some

48 Mr. F. Chapman on Foraminifera
authors (de Koninck, 1883; Whidborne, 1892; Hind, 1897)

for the Paleozoic species. For the Triassic and Jurassic forms,
however, most authors have continued to use Macrodon; on
account of this, Beushausen (1895), instead of accepting
Parallelodon, changed Macrodon to Macrodus, in which he
has been followed by Térnquist (1896). But the rules of ¢
priority will not allow us to accept Macrodus. :
If the view that Grammatodon is synonymous with t
Macrodon, Lycett (non Miiller), be accepted, then I think it
is clear that the former name must be used, since it is earlier
than either Parallelodon or Macrodus.
The references to the original descriptions of the genera
above mentioned are :—

a ee ee ee

Macrodon.—Lycett, in Murchison’s Geol. Cheltenham, ed. 2,
by Buckman and Strickland (1845), p. 98, pl. v. fig. 5.
Emended, Morris and Lycett, Mollusca Gt. Ool. (Pal.
Soc. Mon.) pt. ii. (1853) p. 48, pl. v. fig. 1. Non
Macrodon, J. Miiller, Archiv fiir Anat. Physiol. &e.
Berlin (1842), p. 808.
Grammatodon.— Meek and Hayden, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci.
Philad. 1860, p. 419 (name only and type species) ;
“ Paleontology of the Upper Missouri,” Smithsonian
Contrib. to Knowledge, vol. xiv. no. 172 (1864), p. 89,
pl. ni) fig.9:
Parallelodon.—Meek and Hayden, Proc. Chicago Acad. Sci. |
vol, 1. 1866, p. 17 Wis eas |
Macrodus.—L. Beushausen, *f Die Lamellibr. des rheinisch.
Devon,” Abhandl. d. kén. Preuss. geol. Landesanst.

N. F. Heft xvii. (1895), p. 36 (nom. mut.).

Woodwardian Museum,
Cambridge.

VII.—Foraminifera from. the “ Cambridge Greensand.”
By FREDERICK CHAPMAN, A.L.S., F.R.M.S.

Part I.
In a former paper* I have dealt with the Ostracoda of the
Cambridge Greensand.
The present account of the Foraminifera from the Cam-
bridge Greensand is the result of an examination of some

* See this Magazine for October 1898, pp. 831-346,

Srom the ** Cambridge Greensand.” 49

material from Swaffham, Cambridgeshire, kindly supplied
me, as in the former instance, by Mr. H. Woods, of Cam-
bridge.

From this present account we are enabled to judge some-
what of the richness of the foraminiferal fauna of this
deposit, since it brings the total number of forms found to
about 140.

Our previous knowledge of this group of fossils from the
Cambridge Greensand has been derived chiefly from the list
given by G. R. Vine *, who enumerates 31 forms from the
“ Greensand and Chalk-marl of Cambridge (Phosphate beds).”
Some of the names there given have since been referred to
other genera, owing to further studies of the Cretaceous
Foraminifera ; but the species will be noticed in this present
paper, in the majority of cases, under their several specific
names.

The Foraminifera of the Cambridge Greensand show in
many cases, especially amongst the larger species, as Cristel-
laria gaultina, Vaginulina truncata, a marked abrasion of
their tests. These specimens have therefore either been
derived from an older deposit, or they have been subjected to
the action of currents for a considerable time before they were
covered by the deposit in which they are now found. I am,
however, strongly inclined to believe that a large proportion
of the microzoic fauna has been derived from the upper beds
of the Gault. Other forms there are in the Cambridge Green-
sand, minute and well-preserved; these may or may not
represent a fauna contemporaneous with the formation of the
bed. It is quite possible that even the perfect and minute
forms were in some cases floated off and transferred to the
later deposit. The facies from this bed is remarkably like
that of the Greensand seam in the Gault—zone xii.—at
Folkestone.

In the following account of the Foraminifera synonymy is
avoided as far as possible for the sake of brevity; and since
more copious references will, in the majority of cases, be found
in my papers on Gault Foraminifera from Folkestone Tf, the
secondary references given here will mainly be from those
pages. Only in cases where necessary, as in the non-occur-
rence of the species at Folkestone, is a fuller synonymy
sometimes given.

* Proc. Yorkshire Geol. and Polytech. Soc. 1889, vol. xi. pp. 273, 274.
+ See Journ. R. Micr. Soc., October 1891-February 1898 (10 parts).

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iii, a

50 Mr. F. Chapman on Foraminifera

Order FORAMINIFERA.
Family Miliolide.
Subfamily Mrcrozrvivz.
SprroLocuina, d’Orbigny [1826].
Spiroloculina nitida, VOrbigny.

Spiroloculina nitida, @'Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci, Nat. vol. vii. p. 298.
no. 4 (Soldani, 1795, Testaceographia, vol. i. pt. 3, p. 229, pl. elv.
figs. /, mm?) ; Chapman, 1898, Journ. R. Mier. Soc. pp. 10, rl,
pl. ii. fig. 3.

A somewhat fragmentary specimen, similar in form to that
from the Gault, was found at Swaffham.

Spiroloculina tenuis (Czjzek).
Quinqueloculina tenuis, Czjzek, 1847, Haidinger’s Naturw. Abhandl.
vol, ii. p. 149, pl. xiii. figs. 31-34.
Spiroloculina tenuis (Czjzek), Burrows, Sherborn, and Bailey, 1890,
Journ. R. Micr. Soe. p. 551, pl. viii. fig. 2.

This species is one of the few which have not been noticed
in my Gault washings from Folkestone; but it has been
recorded from the Red Chalk of Speeton by Burrows, Sher-
born, and Bailey.

One specimen was found at Swaffham.

MinioiinaA, Williamson [1858].
Miliolina venusta (Karrer).
Quinqueloculina venusta, Karrer, 1868, Sitzungsb. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
vol. lvii. p. 147, pl. ii. fig. 6.
Mitiolina venusta (Karrer), Chapman, 1891, Journ. R, Mier. Soc. p, 573,
pl. ix. figs. 5a & 4, 6.

This is a neat little form approaching J/. tricar‘nata, but
with the angles of the preceding series of chambers projecting
beyond and through the facesof the last-formed and enveloping
series. It is a familiar species in Gault washings from the
upper half of the formation.

M. venusta is common in the Cambridge Greensand of
Swaffham.

Miliolina tricarinata (d’Orbigny).
Triloculina tricarinata, d’Orbigny, 1826, Ann, Sci. Nat. vol. vii. p. 299.
no. 7; Modéle, no, 94.

Miliolina tricarinata (VOrb.), Chapman, 1891, Journ, R. Mier. Soe.
p- 574, pl. ix. figs. 9a & 4,

from the “ Cambridge Greensand.” 51

“Triloculine near T. tricarinata, d’Orb.,” were recorded
by G. R. Vine from the Cambridge Greensand, and are
probably referable both to the above species and to JL, venusta.

One typical specimen only of J. tricarinata was found at
Swaffham.

Miliolina Ferussactt (d’Orbigny).
Quinqueloculina Ferussacti, d’Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat. vol. vii.
p. 301. no. 18; Modeéle, no. 32. A
Miliolina Ferussacti (V’Orb.), Chapman, 1891, Journ. R. Micr. Soe.
p. 974, pl. ix. fig, 8,
The specimens from Cretaceous deposits show a tendency
to become complanate and Spiroloculine.
M. Herussacii is fairly common at Swaffham.

Family Lituolide.
Subfamily Lrrvoriwz,

[ Chambered forms. |

ReopHAX, Montfort [1808].

Reophax fustformis (Williamson).

Proteonina fusiformis, Williamson, 1858, Recent Foram. Gt. Britain,
ok The. 1
Baphice Fusiformis (Williamson), Chapman, 1892, Journ. R. Micr. Soe.
p- 320, pl. v. fig. 3.

Several specimens, agreeing in their general contour with

Williamson’s species, were found at Swaffham.

Reophax scorpiurus, Montfort.
Reophax scorpiurus, Montfort, 1808, Conchyl. Systéme, vol. i. p. 380,
83° genre ; Chapman, 1892, Journ. R, Micr. Soc. pp. 320, 321, pl. v.
figs. 4 & 5.

This form is fairly frequent at Swaffham.

Reophax folkestoniensis, Chapman.
Reophax folkestoniensis, Chapman, 1892, Journ. R. Micr. Soe. p. 321,
pl. v. figs. 6a & 6.
It is noteworthy that this species was first described from
-the Gault of Folkestone from zone x. only.
R. folkestoniensis occurs with some frequency in the
washings from Swatfham.
4%

52 Mr, F, Chapman on Foraminifera

HAPLOPHRAGMIUM, Reuss [1860].

Haplophragmium glomeratum, Brady. }
Lituola glomerata, Brady, 1878, Ann, & Mag. Nat, Hist. ser. 5, vol. i. .
p- 453, pl. xx. figs. 1 a-e. :
Haplophragmium glomeratum, Brady, 1881, Rep. Chall. vol. ix. p. 309, f
pl. xxxiv. figs. 15-18; Chapman, 1892, Journ. R. Mier. Soc. p. 321,
pl. v. fig. 8.

A few specimens of this form were found at Swaffham.

Haplophragmium agglutinans (d’Orbigny).
Spirolina agglutinans, VOrbigny, 1846, Foram. Foss. Vienne, p. 187,
pl. vii. figs. 10-12.
Haplophragmium agglutinans (d’Orb.), Chapman, 1892, Journ. R, Micr.
Soe. p. 324, pl. v. fig. 14.
Two specimens, with somewhat coarsely textured tests,
were found in the Cambridge Greensand of Swaffham.

Haplophragmium microspirale, sp.n. (Figs. 1a & 6.)

Test commencing with a small simple coil, afterwards
becoming curvilinear and swollen towards the oral end.
Aperture ?subcrescentic. ‘Texture coarsely arenaceous, with
the exception of the commencement, which is composed of

Fig. 1,

Haplophragmium microspirale, sp. n.
a, side view ; b, edge view. X 22.

finer arenaceous material. Colour white, from the calcareous
particles of which the test is chiefly composed, but relieved
here and there with dark green glauconite granules. Length
about 1°7 millim. ; breadth *82 millim.; thickness *6 millim.
This form approaches £. cassis (Parker) * in general out-
* Lituola cassis, Parker, 1870 (in Dawson’s paper), Canad. Nat. n. s.,

vol. v. p. 177, p. 180, fig. 8. Haplophragmium cassis (Parker), Brady,
1884, Rep. Chall. vol. ix. p, 804, pl. xxxiii, figs. 17-19.

from the “ Cambridge Greensand.” 53

line, but is more irregular in contour and composed of very
coarse material compared with the latter. The septation also
is much less distinct in H. microspirale, and the chambers
(as far as can be seen) not nearly so numerous.

Hi. microspirale is represented by three specimens from the
Cambridge Greensand of Swaffham, Cambridgeshire.

Haplophragmium pseudospirale (Williamson).

Proteonina pseudospiralis, Williamson, 1858, Recent Foram. Gt. Britain,
p. 2, pl. i. figs. 2 & 3.
Haplophragmium pseudospirale, Siddall, 1879, Catal. Brit. Rec. Foram.
p- 4; Brady, 1884, Rep. Chall. vol. ix. p. 302, pl. xxxiii. figs. 1-4.
This species is generally larger than /. equale (Rémer)
and essentially differs in the compressed form of the com-
mencement.
Several specimens were found in the washings from
Swaffham. The species is one of those which were not
noticed in the Gault of Folkestone.

Haplophragmium globigeriniforme (Parker and Jones).

Iituola nautiloidea, var. globigeriniformis, Parker and Jones, 1865,
Phil. Trans. vol. cly. p. 407, pl. xv. figs. 46 & 47.
Haplophragmium globigeriniforme (P. & J.), Chapman, 1892, Journ,
R. Micr. Soe. p, 324, pl. v. fig. 16,
Several specimens of the above species were found at
Swaffham ; in some cases the tests were attached to extra-
neous objects. ‘The species was also recorded by G. R. Vine

from Cambridge.

PLaAcopsILinA, d’Orbigny [1850].

ae Aen
Placopsilina cenomana, d’Orbigny.

Placopsilina cenomana, @Orbigny, 1850, Prodrome Paléont. vol. ii.

p. 185. no. 758.
Lituola cenomana (d’Orb.), Perner, 1892, “ Ueber die Foram. des Bohm.

Cenomans,” in Paleont. Bohemiz, no. i. p. 52, pl. ii. figs. 1-6, pl. iv.
fig. 15.

Placopsilina cenomana, d’Orb., Chapman, 1892, Journ. R. Micr. Soe.
pp. 324 & 325, pl. vi. fig. 4,

P. cenomana is rather frequent in the washings from
Swaffham, and it is generally found attached to the coarser
glauconite fragments found therein. Perner gives some
excellent figures of this interesting form, which he found in
the Cenomanian of Bohemia.

Od Mr. F. Chapman on Foraminifera

Placopsilina vesicularis, Brady.

Placopsilina vesicularis, Brady, 1879, Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci. vol. xix.
n.s. p. 51, pl. v. fig. 2; Chapman, 1892, Journ. R. Mier. Soc. p. 325,
pl. vi. fig. 5.

This rudimentary form was formerly recorded as a fossil
from the Gault of Folkestone only. Several examples were
found in the Cambridge Greensand of Swaffham, attached to
fragments of glauconite.

[Labyrinthic forms. |
Hapvosticue, Reuss [1861].

Haplostiche Sher borniana, Chapman.
Haplostiche Sherborniana, Chapman, 1892, Journ. R, Mier. Soc. p. 325,
pl. vi. figs. 6-8.
This species was originally described from zone xii. of the

Gault of Folkestone.
Several specimens were found at Swaffham.

LiruvoLa, Lamarck [1804].

Lituola placentula, sp.n. (Figs. 2a & d.)

Test complanate, fairly thin in proportion to its width,
composed of coarse arenaceous material. The surface of the
test usually bears some slight indication of a spiral plan of
growth and a shallow umbilical depression. In section the
test has no definite chambered structure, but is perforated

Lituola placentula, sp. n.
a, side view; b, edge view. X 22.

irregularly, as is usual in the forms with labyrinthic tests.
Any regularity which might exist is obscured by the coarse-
ness of the material used in the construction of the test. In

from the Cambridge Greensand.” 55

general appearance this form at first sight resembles Haplo-
phragmium acutidorsatum, but it has no chambered structure
within the test. Average breadth 1°3 millim.; thickness
*55 millim.

Concerning the arenaceous forms with a spiral commence-
ment of Cretaceous age, it may be noticed that the majority
of the earlier-described forms were referred to the genus
Lituola. Since the restriction of this genus to labyrinthic
forms, the Cretaceous species in most cases now find a place
in the genus Haplophragmium, in which the chambers are
distinct and simple as distinguished from those with irregular
chamberlets or labyrinthula. The labyrinthic forms are more
rudimentary from a morphological standpoint, for they indicate
that the protoplasmic body gathered up the sand-grains as
interstitial particles during the movement and extension of
the rhizopod, just as, on the other hand, Astrorhiza and
other allied forms in the simplest manner encrust the whole
of the dactyloid mass with sand-grains, leaving only the ends
free for the protrusion of the pseudopodia,

As in the fossil Haplostiche, Lituola appears to have the
organic interspaces filled with secondary calcite.

L. placentula occurs with frequency in the Cambridge
Greensand of Swaffham.

Subfamily Trocwauurvin#.
Ammopiscus, Reuss [1861].

Ammodiscus tenuis, Brady.

Ammodiscus tenuis, Brady, 1881, Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci. vol. xxi. n. s.
p. 51; Chapman, 1892, Journ. R. Micr. Soe. p. 326, pl, vi. fig. 12.

Two well-grown specimens of this species were obtained
from Swaffham.

Family Textulariide.

Subfamily Texroraruv2z.
TEXTULARIA, Defrance [1824].

Textularia minuta, Berthelin.

Tevtularia minuta (=T. pygmea, Reuss), Berthelin, 1880, Mém, Soc.
géol. France, sér. 3, vol. i, no. 5, p. 26; Chapman, 1892, Journ, R.
Micr. Soc. pp. 327, 328, pl. vi. fig. 15.

This species also occurs in the Gault and Red Chalk. One

specimen from Swaffham.

56 Mr. F. Chapman on Foraminifera

Textularia gramen, VOrbigny.

Textularia gramen, VOrbigny, 1846, Foram, Foss. Vienne, p. 248,
pl. xv. figs. 4-6; Chapman, 1892, Journ. R. Micr. Soc. p. 328, pl. vi.
figs. 17a & b.

Also occurring in the Gault and Red Chalk, this species is

frequent in the washings of Cambridge Greensand from
Swattham.

Textularia sagittula, Defrance.

Textularia sagittula, Defrance, 1824, Dict. Sci. Nat. vol. xxxii. p. 177,
vol. lili. p. 8344; Atlas, Conch. pl. xiii. fig.5; Chapman, 1892, Journ.
R. Micr. Soc. p. 328, pl. vi. fig. 16.

One specimen was found at Swaffham.

Texiularia turris, d’Orbigny.

Textularia turris, d’Orbigny, 1840, Mém. Soe. géol. France, vol. iv.
p- 46, pl. iv. figs. 27, 28; Chapman, 1892, Journ. R. Mier. Soc.
pp. 3828, 329, pl. vi. fig, 19.
A well-distributed Cretaceous foraminiferon. It has been
previously recorded from Cambridge by G. R. Vine.

T. turris is frequent in the material from Swaffham.

Textularia prelonga, Reuss.

Textularia prelonga, Reuss, 1845, Verstein. bohm. Kreidef. pt. 1. p. 89,
pl. xii. fig. 14; Chapman, 1892, Journ. R. Mier. Soe. p. 329, pl. vi.
fig. 23.

Three specimens were found at Swaffham.

Textularia complanata (Reuss).

Proroporus complanatus, Reuss, 1860, Sitzungsber. d. k. Ak. Wiss.
Wien, vol. xl. p. 231, pl. xii. figs. 5a & b.

Textularia complanata (Reuss), Chapman, 1898, Journ, R. Micr. Soe.
p. 13, pl. il. fig. 7.

One well-grown individual from Swaffham.

Textularia hybrida, sp.n. (Fig. 3.)

Test biserial, rapidly increasing in width towards the aboral
end; sagittate in outline; compressed and of equal thickness
throughout. Length ‘8 millim.; greatest width *4 millim.

This form is probably allied to the Proroporus complanatus

from the “ Cambridge Greensand.” 57

of Reuss, and it forms an interesting link between that species
and 7. sagittula.

Fig. 3.

Textularia hybrida, sp.n, X 30,

One specimen from the Cambridge Greensand of Swaffham.

VERNEUILINA, @’Orbigny [1840].

Verneuilina pygmea (Egger).

Bulimina pygmea, Egger, 1857, Neues Jahrb. fiir Min. &c. p. 284,
pl. xii. figs. 10, 11.

Verneuilina pygmea (Egger), Parker and Jones, 1863, Ann. & Mag.
Nat. Hist. ser. 3, vol. xi. pp. 92, 98; Brady, Rep. Chall. 1884,
vol. ix. p. 385, pl. xlvii. figs. 4-7.

Bulimina polystropha, Reuss, Berthelin, 1880, Mém. Soc. géol. France,
sér. 3, vol. i. no. 5, p. 30, pl. ii. figs. 3a,b; Chapman, 1892, Journ.
R. Micr. Soc. pp. 756, 757, pl. xii. fig. 11.

Terneuilina pygmea (Egger), id, 1898, ibid. p. 48.

This species is very common in the Upper Gault of Folke-
stone, and the specimens from that formation are very small,
with a distinctly hyaline test. It was erroneously referred
to Bulimina polystropha, having regard to the form and not
the texture of the shell.

One specimen of V. pygmea was found in the Cambridge
Greensand at Swaffham.

TrITAXIA, Reuss [1860].

Tritaxia tricarinata, Reuss.

Teatularia tricarinata, Reuss, 1845, Verstein. bohm. Kreidef. pt. i.
p- 89, pl. vill. fig. 60.

Tritaxia tricarinata, Reuss, 1860, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
vol. xl. p. 228, pl. xiii. figs. 1,2; Chapman, 1892, Journ. R. Mier.
Soe. pp. 749, 750, pl. xi. figs. 1 a & 5.

This species is very common in the Cambridge Greensand
at Swaffham. In the larger-grown tests the white arenaceous
surface is prettily relieved by some pale green glauconite
granules.

58 Mr. F. Chapman on Foraminifera

Tritaxia pyr amidata, Reuss.

Tritaxia pyramidata, Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak, Wiss. Wien,
vol. xlvi. % 32, pl. i. figs. 9a-c; Chapman, 1892, Journ. R. Mier.
Soc. p. 750, pl. x. figs. 2a & 6,

This form in the South of England is chiefly confined to
the Upper Gault and Chalk-marl. It has also been found in
the Gault of France and Germany.

At Swaffham this species is somewhat frequent.

Sprropiecta, Ehrenberg [1844].

Spiroplecta annectens (Parker and Jones). (Fig. 4.)
- Textularia annectens, Parker and Jones, 1863, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.
ser. 3, vol. xi. p. 92, woodcut, fig. 1.
Spiroplecta annectens (P. & J.), Chapman, 1892, Journ. R. Micr. Soc.
pp. 750, 751, pl. xi. figs. 3a & 6.

Four specimens of this interesting foraminiferon were
found in the Cambridge Greensand of Swafflam, two of

Fig. 4.

Spiroplecta annectens (P. & J.). Specimen with uniserial
outgrowth, X 30.

which (see fig. 4) show the trimorphous development of the
test, being at first spiral, then biserial, and finally uniserial.

GaupryIna, d’Orbigny [1840].

Gaudryina filiformis, Berthelin.
Gaudryina filiformis, Berthelin, 1880, Mém. Soe. géol. France, sér. 3,
vol. 1. no. 5, p. 25, pl. i. fig. 8; Chapman, 1892, Journ. R, Mier. Soe.
p. 752, pl. xi. fig. 7.

This species is well developed and frequent at Swaffham,

from the “ Cambridge Greensand.” 59

Gaudryina pupoides, d’Orbigny.
Gaudryina pupoides, VOrbigny, 1840, Mém. Soe. géol. France, vol. iv.
p. 44, pl. iv. figs. 22-24; Chapman, 1892, Journ. R. Mier. Soe. p. 752,
pl. xi. figs. 8a & 5.
Very common at Swaffham. This species is, generally
speaking, commonest in the Upper Gault and the Chalk-
marl. It has also been recorded by Vine from Cambridge.

Gaudryina rugosa, dV Orbigny.
Gaudryina rugosa, VOrbigny, 1840, Mém. Soc. géol. France, vol. iv.
p. 44, pl. iv. figs. 20, 21; Chapman, 1892, Journ. R. Micr. Soc.
pp. 752, 753, pl. xi. figs. 9a & b.

One specimen from Swaffham.

Gaudryina oxycona, Reuss.

Gaudryina oxycona, Reuss, 1860, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
vol. xl. p. 229, pl. xii. figs. 3a-c; Chapman, 1892, Journ. R. Micr.
Soe. p. 753, pl. xii. figs. la & 0.

This species is separated from Tew tularia turris by having

a triserial commencement, but in other respects it is nearly
similar.

Very common at Swaffham.

Gaudryina baccata, Schwager.
Gaudryina baccata, Schwager, 1866, Novara-Exped. geol. Theil, vol. ii.

p- 200, pl. iv. fig. 12.

A somewhat aberrant form, apparently linking G. pupoides
with G. dispansa. G. baccata has not hitherto been recorded
from Cretaceous beds, but is known as a Tertiary fossil, and
is also found in modern deposits.

One specimen from Swaffham.

Gaudryina dispansa, Chapman.

Gaudryina dispansa, Chapman, 1892, Journ. R. Micr. Soc. p. 753,
pl. xi. figs. 10 a & 6.

This species was found at Folkestone in the junction-bed
of the Gault and also in two of the succeeding zones.
T'wo specimens were found at Swaffham.

Subfamily Borrurwiw 2.
BuLimina, d’Orbigny [1826].

Bulimina Orbignyi, Reuss.

Bulimina Orbignyi, Reuss, 1845, Verstein. bohm. Kreidef. pt. i. p. 38,
pl. xiii. fig. 74; Chapman, 1892, Journ, R. Mier. Soc. p. 754, pl. xii.
fig. 2.

60 Mr. F. Chapman on Foraminifera

Occasional specimens are met with in the Cambridge
Greensand of Swaffham.

Bulimina obliqua, VOrb.
Bulimina obliqua, VOrb. 1840, Mém. Soc. eh France, vol. iv. p. 40,
pl. iv. figs. 7,8; Chapman, 1892, Journ. R. Mier. Soc. pp. 754, 755,
pl. xii. fig. 3.
Two specimens from Swaffham. B. obliqua has also been
recorded from Cambridge by G. R. Vine.

Bulimina Presli, Reuss.

Bulimina Presli, Reuss, 1845, Verstein. béhm. Kreidef. pt. i. p. 38,
pl. xiii, fig. 72.

Bulimina inflata, Perner, 1892, Palewont. Bohemie, no. 1, p. 55, pl. iil.
figs. 4 a—c.

Bulimina Presli, Reuss, Chapman, 1892, Journ, R. Mier. Soc. p. 755,
pl. xii. fig. 4.

To this species Perner’s B. inflata evidently belongs, and

which was obtained from the Cenomanian of Bohemia.
Very common at Swaffham.

Bulimina Presli, Reuss, var. sabulosa, Chapman.

Bulimina Presli, Reuss, var. sabulosa, Chapman, 1892, Journ. R. Micr.
Soe. p. 755, pl. xii. fig. 5.
This variety was found only in zones xii. and xiii, of the
Folkestone Gault.
Very common at Swaffham.

Bulimina Murchisoniana, d’Orbigny.

Bulimina Murchisoniana, dVOrbigny, 1840, Mém. Soc. géol. France,
vol. iv. p. 41, pl. iv. figs. 15,16; Chapman, 1892, Journ, R. Mier.
Soe. p. 755, pl. xii. tig. 6.

Bulimina brevicona, Perner, 1892, Palzeont. Bohemiz, no, 1, p. 54,
pl. iv. figs. la, 6.

Several well-developed specimens with quite smooth-
surfaced tests (finely arenaceous) were found in the Cam-
bridge Greensand of Swaffham. This species was also found
at Cambridge by G. R. Vine. It occurs in the Cenomanian of
Bohemia, where it was described as B. brevicona.

Bulimina obtusa, d’Orbigny.

Bulimina obtusa, dVOrbigny, 1840, Mém. Soe. géol. France, vol, iv,
p- 39, pl. iv. figs. 5, 6; Chapman, 1892, Journ, R. Mier. Soc. pp. 755,
756, pl. xii. figs. 7a & 3.

from the “ Cambridge Greensand.” 61

A few specimens were found at Swaffham. It also
occurred in G. R. Vine’s washings from Cambridge.

Bulimina brevis, d’Orbigny.

Bulimina brevis, VOrbigny, 1840, Mém. Soe. géol. France, vol. iv. p. 41,

a iv. lS 14; Chapman, 1892, Journ. R. Micr. Soc. p. 756,
pl. xii. fig. 8.

A fairly common species at Swaffham.

Bulimina affinis, dV’ Orbigny.
Bulimina affinis, VOrbigny, 1839, Foram. Cuba, p. 109, pl. ii. figs. 25,
26; Chapman, 1892, Journ. R. Micr. Soe. p. 756, pl. xii. figs. 10 a
& b.
This form appears, from the series obtained, to graduate by
the elongation of the test into B. Orbigny?.
Common at Swaffham.

PLEUROSTOMELLA, Reuss [1860].

Pleurostomella obtusa, Berthelin.

Pleurostomella obtusa, Berthelin, 1880, Mém. Soe. géol. France, sér. 3,
vol. i. no. 5, p. 29, pl. i. figs. 9a & b; Chapman, 1892, Journ. R.
Micr. Soe. p. 757, pl. xii. figs. 13a & b,

This species is well developed and very common in the

Cambridge Greensand of Swaffham.

Pleurostomella alternans, Schwager.

Pleurostomella alternans, Schwager, 1866, Novara-Exped. geol. Theil,
vol. il. p. 238, pl. vi. figs. 79, 80; Chapman, 1892, Journ. R. Micr.
Soe. p. 758, pl. xii. figs. l4a & 8.

By the fact of the association of the preceding form with
P. alternans, and also that the former has a megalospheric
commencement succeeded by few chambers, whilst the latter
is microspheric with numerous chambers, one is disposed to
think that we have in these two so-called species the two
generations of a single species.

P. alternans is frequent at Swaffham.

Family Lagenide.
Subfamily Lagevrvz.
LaGENA, Walker and Boys [1784].

Lagena apiculata, Reuss.

Lagena apiculata, Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
vol, xlvi. p. 319, pl. i. figs. 4-8, 10, 11; Burrows, Sherborn, and

62 Mr. F, Chapman on Foraminifera
Bailey, 1890, Journ. R. Micr. Soc. p. 555, pl. ix. figs. 6, 7, 9-11;
Chapman, 1893, ibid. p. 581, pl. viii. figs. 2a & band 3a & 6.
This species is common at Swaffham.

Lagena levis (Montagu).

Vermiculum leve, Montagu, 1803, Test. Brit. p. 524.
Lagena levis (Montagu), Burrows, Sherborn, and Bailey, 1890, Journ.
R. Micr. Soe. p. 555, pl. ix. fig. 3; Chapman, 1893, ibid. pp. 581, 582,
pl. viii. fig. 5.
One specimen only from the Cambridge Greensand of
Swaffham.

Lagena gracillima (Seguenza).

Amphorina gracillima, Seguenza, 1862, Foram. Monotal. Mess. p. 51,
pl. i. fig. 37.

Lagena gracillima (Seguenza), Chapman, 1893, Journ, R. Mier. Soc.
p- 582, pl. viii. fig. 6.

One specimen from Swaffham.

Subfamily Noposariuw2.

Noposaria, Lamarck [1816].

GLANDULINA plea ,
Subgeneray paxratin A, : } @Orbigny [1826].

Nodosaria (Glandulina) humilis, Rimer.

Nodosaria humilis, Romer, 1841, Verstein. norddeutsch, Kreide, p. 95,
pl. xv. fig. 6; Chapman, 1898, Journ, R. Mier. Soe. p. 585, pl. viii.
fig. 18.

Two specimens from Swaffham.

Nodosaria (Glandulina) mutabilis, Reuss.

Glandulina mutabilis, Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
* yol. xlvi. pp. 58, 91, pl. v. figs. 7, 8, 10.
Nodosaria (Glandulina) mutabilis, Reuss, Chapman, 1893, Journ, R,
Micr. Soc. p. 585, pl. viii. figs, 19, 20.

Four specimens were found at Swaffham.

Nodosaria (Glandulina) cylindracea, Reuss.

Nodosaria (Glandulina) cylindracea, Reuss, 1845, Verstein. béhm.
Kreidef. pt. i. p. 25, pl. xiii. figs. 1,2; Chapman, 1893, Journ. R.
Micr. Soc. pp. 585, 586, pl. viii. fig. 21.

One specimen from Swaffham.

From the “ Cambridge Greensand.” 63

Nodosaria (Dentalina) expansa, Reuss.
Dentalina expansa, Reuss, 1860, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
vol. xl. p. 188, pl. iii. fig. 4.
Nodosaria (Dentalina) expansa, Reuss, Chapman, 1893, Journ. R. Mier.
Soc. p. 586, pl. viii. fig, 24,

The specimens from the Cambridge Greensand are frag-
ments, and, in fact, no perfect specimen of this form has ever
been recorded, owing, no doubt, to the slight surface-attach-
ment between each segment.

‘T'wo specimens from Swaffham.

Nodosaria (Dentalina) farcimen, Reuss (Soldani).

Dentalina farcimen, Reuss, 1861, Bullet. de Acad. roy. Belg. sér. 2,
vol. xv. p. 146, pl. i. fig. 18.

Nodosaria (Dentalina) farcimen, Soldanisp., Chapman, 1893, Journ, R.
Micr. Soc. p. 587, pl. viii. fig. 25.

This species is undoubtedly the commonest Nodosarian
form in the Cambridge Greensand. In the Gault of Folke-
stone N. farcimen was found only in the upper part.

Common in the Cambridge Greensand of Swaffham.

Nodosaria (Dentalina) soluta, Reuss.

Dentalina soluta, Reuss, 1851, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol. Gesellsch,
vol. iii. p. 60, pl. ili. figs. 4a & 6.

Nodosaria (Dentalina) soluta, Reuss, Chapman, 1893, Journ. R. Mier.
Soe. p. 587, pl. vill. fig. 26.

One imperfect specimen from Swaffham.

Nodosaria (Dentalina) gracilis, dOrbigny.

Dentalina gracilis, d’Orbigny, 1840, Mém. Soc. géol. France, vol. iv.
p. 14, pl. i. fig 5.

Nodosaria (Dentalina) gracilis, VOrbigny, Chapman, 1898, Journ. R.
Micr. Soc. pp. 587, 588, pl. viii. fig. 29.

One specimen from Swaffham.

Nodosaria (Dentalina) Lornetana, d’Orbigny.

Dentalina Lorneiana, d’Orbigny, 1840, Mém. Soe. géol. France, vol. iv.
p. 14, pl. i. figs. 8, 9.

Nodosaria (Dentalina) Lorneiana, VOrbigny, Chapman, 1893, Journ.
R. Micr. Soc. p. 588, pl. viii. figs. 80, 31.

Two specimens of this form occurred at Swaffham.

Nodosaria (Dentalina) pauperata, VOrbigny.

Dentalina pauperata, VOrbigny, 1846, Foram, Foss, Vienne, p. 46,
pl. i. figs. 57, 58.

64 Mr. F. Chapman on Foraminifera
Nodosaria (Dentalina) pauperata, dOrbigny, Chapman, 1893, Journ.
R. Micr. Soe. p. 588, pl. viii. fig. 32.

One well-grown individual was found in the Cambridge
Greensand at Swaffham.

Nodosaria (Dentalina) consobrina, dOrbigny.

Dentalina consobrina, d’Orbigny, 1846, Foram. Foss. Vienne, p. 46,
pl. ii. figs. 1-3.

Nodosaria (Dentalina) consobrina, @Orbigny, Chapman, 1893, Journ,
R. Mier. Soc. p. 588, pl. viii. fig. 33.

Rare at Swaffham.

Nodosaria (Dentalina) legumen, Reuss.

Nodosaria (Dentalina) legumen, Reuss, 1845, Verstein. béhm. Kreidef.
pt. i, p. 28, pl. xiii. figs. 23, 24; Chapman, 1893, Journ. R. Mier.
Soe. p. 589, pl. vill. fig. 37.

The Cambridge-Greensand specimens are rather small,
but they are not uncommon at Swaffham.

Nodosaria ( Dentalina) Roemeri, Neugeboren,

Dentalina Roemeri, Neugeboren, 1856, Denkschr. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
vol. xii. p. 82, pl. ii. figs. 18-17.

Nodosaria (Dentalina) Roemeri, Neugeboren, Chapman, 1893, Journ.
R. Micr. Soc. pp. 589, 590, pl. vili. fig. 38.

Good typical specimens are frequent at Swaffham.

Nodosaria (Dentalina) communis, @’Orbigny.
Nodosaria (Dentalina) communis, VOrbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat.
vol. vii. p. 254, no. 85; Chapman, 1893, Journ. R. Micr. Soc. p. 590,
plax digi.
This species was recorded by Vine from Cambridge. It is
not a common form at Swaffham.

Nodosaria (Dentalina) mucronata, Neugeboren.
Dentalina mucronata, Neugeboren, 1856, Denkschr. d. k. Ak. Wiss.
Wien, vol. xii. p. 88, pl. iii. figs. 8-11.
Nodosaria (Dentalina) mucronata, Neugeboren, Chapman, 1893, Journ.
R. Micr. Soc. p. 590, pl. ix. fig. 2.

One specimen only was found at Swaffham.

Nodosaria (Dentalina) raristriata, Chapman.

Nodosaria (Dentalina) raristriata, Chapman, 1893, Journ, R. Micr.
Soc. p. 591, pl. ix. fig. 4.

A single specimen was found at Swaffham,

from the “ Cambridge Greensand.” 65

Nodosaria perpusilla, Chapman.

Nodosaria perpusilla, Chapman, 1893, Journ. R. Micr. Soe. p. 591,
pl. ix. fig. 6.

Two specimens were found at Swaffham.

Nodosaria tubifera, Reuss.

Nodosaria tubifera, Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsh. d. k. Ak, Wiss, Wien,
vol. xlvi. p. 37, pl. ii. fig. 4.

Nodosaria (Dentatina) tubifera, Reuss, Chapman, 1893, Journ. R. Micr.
Soe. p. 592, pl. ix. fig. 11.

One specimen occurred at Swaffham.

Nodosaria Zippet, Reuss.

Nodosaria Zippei, Reuss, 1845, Verstein. bohm. Kreidef. pt. i. p. 25,
pl. viii. figs. 1-3.

Nodosaria (Dentalina) Zippei, Reuss, Chapman, 1893, Journ. R. Micr.
Soe. p. 593, pl. ix. fig. 12.

Two rather small specimens were found at Swaffham.

Nodosaria paupercula, Reuss.
(Fig. 5, abnormal specimen.)
Nodosaria paupercula, Reuss, Verstein. béhm. Kreidef. pt. i. p. 26,
pl. xii. fig. 12.
Nodosaria (Dentalina) paupercula, Reuss, Chapman, 1893, Journ. R.
Micr. Soe. p. 593, pl. ix. figs. 13, 14.

One of the specimens from the Cambridge Greensand of

Nodosaria paupercula, Reuss.
Abnormal specimen, X 30.

Swaffham, consisting of three segments in a series, has a full-
sized segment fused to the side of the shell (fig. 5).
This species is here well grown and frequent.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iii. 5

66 Canon A. M. Norman on

Nodosaria Fontannes?, Berthelin.

Dentalina Fontannesi, Berthelin, 1880, Mém, Soe. géol. France, sér, 3,
vol. i. no. 5, p. 42, pl. ii. fig. 14.

Nodosaria (Dentalina) Fontannesi, Berthelin, Chapman, 1893, Journ.
R. Mier. Soe. p. 593, pl. ix. fig. 15,

Rare at Swaffham.

Nodosaria obscura, Reuss.

Nodosaria obscura, Reuss, 1845, Verstein. béhm. Kreidef. pt. i. p. 26,
pl. xiii. figs. 7-9. :
Nodosaria (Dentalina) obscura, Reuss, Chapman, 1893, Journ. R. Mier.
Soe. pp. 593, 594, pl. ix. fig. 16. (N.B.—The numbers 16 and 16 of

the preceding and this species should be transposed on pl. ix.)

T'wo exceptionally large specimens were found at Swaffham.

Nodosaria tenuicosta, Reuss.

Nodosaria tenuicosta, Reuss, 1845, Verstein. béhm. Kreidef. pt. i. p. 25,

pl. xiii. figs. 5, 6; Chapman, 1893, Journ. R. Micr. Soc. p. 594,
pl. ix. figs. 19, 20.

This species is rare at Swaffham.

Nodosaria prismatica, Reuss.

Nodosaria prismatica, Reuss, 1860, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
vol. xl. p. 180, pl. ii. fig. 2; Chapman, 1893, Journ. R. Mier. Soe.
pp. 594, 595, pl. ix. fig. 21.

Rare and small at Swaffham.

Nodosaria orthopleura, Reuss.

Nodosaria orthopleura, Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
vol. xlvi. p. 89, pl. xii. fig. 5; Chapman, 1893, Journ. R. Mier. Soe.
p. 595, pl. ix. figs. 22, 28.

Two fragments only from the Cambridge Greensand of
Swaffham,

VIII.— The Land Isopoda of Madeira.
By Canon A. M. Norman, M.A., D.C.L., LL.D., F.R.S., &e.

[Plate VI. figs. 1-4.]

DuRING a visit to Madeira last year I collected a few Crus-
tacea Isopoda Terrestria. M.A. Dollfus has kindly examined
for me some which 1 was unable to determine, and among
them he found one species which he regards as “new.” As

the Land Isopoda of Madeira. 67

this species must be described, I propose along with that
description to give a list of the other species as yet known to
inhabit Madeira.

Ligia italica, Aud. & Sav.

Among rocks about high-water mark ; common.

Armadilioniscus tuberculatus, A. Dollfus.
1889. Armadilloniscus tuberculatus, A. Dollfus, ‘ Liste supplémentaire
d’Isopodes des Agores,” Revue Biol. du France, p, 392,

Two specimens of this species recently described from
types procured by Lieut. Chaves in the Azores were found
by me among stones below high-water mark at Gorgulho,
near Funchal.

Lucastus scitus, Budde-Lund (=Porcellio scitus, Budde-

Lund).
Two specimens from Madeira are in Uljanin’s collection

(fide Budde-Lund).

Lucasius Normant, A. Dollfus, sp. n. (Pl. VI. figs. 1-4.)

This new species has been submitted to M. A. Dollfus, who
has decided that it is not described, and has sent me the
following description, together with the figures which illus-
trate it :—

“ Body oblong, not broad, moderately convex, covered
with granulations, especially on the earlier segments; dorsal
surface finely setiferous throughout. Cephalon having the
lateral frontal lobes rounded; central lobe well developed,
triangular, rounded, the summit blunt. Hpistome a little
convex, but without any true median tubercle. Eyes with
fourteen ocelli. Exterior antenne equalling the length of
half the body; the flagellum almost as long as the preceding
joint, its first articulation half as long as the terminal. Poste-
rior margin of the pereeon having a slight lateral sinuosity at
the sides. Pleon with the lateral processes well developed ;
the first pleopods in the male with the exopodite broader than
long and somewhat obtuse. Pleotelson much longer than
broad, with the sides slightly incurved and the extremity
subobtuse. Uropods having the basal joint one third shorter
than the pleotelson ; exopodite lanceolate, short ; endopodite
reaching to or very slightly extending beyond the end of the

pleotelson. oe

68 Canon A. M. Norman on

“ Colour pale, with two longitudinal brown bands passing
down the middle and two other bands on each side ; uropods
light red.

“ Length 6 millim., breadth 2°8 millim.

“The form of the pleotelson and the absence of any true
tubercle on the epistome lead us to regard this little species as
a Lucastus, notwithstanding that the relative length of the
antenne shows more approach to Porcellio (sensu stricto).
It differs from Lucanius scitus, B.-L., which is also found at
Madeira, in the longer antenne, the greater development of
the median frontal lobe, the form of the pleotelson, and the
general coloration, which is particularly characteristic.”

The locality in which this species occurred was the Ilheo
dos Embarcadouros, the islet at the eastern extremity of
Madeira. This rocky islet has a most remarkable vegetation,
being the home of a large number of pretty-flowered crassi-
folious plants. It is, moreover, the only known locality for
three interesting varieties of land-mollusea—Helix erubescens,
Lowe, var. advenoides, Paiva, Helix polymorpha, Lowe, var.
irrasa, Lowe, and the recently described Helix Watson?,
J. Y. Johnson*. This last beautifully sculptured Helia
belongs to the group which includes Helix tiarella, Webbe,
once living in most extraordinary profusion in Madeira, as
evidenced in the fossil deposit at Canigal, but now rare. It
is a question whether this and other allies should not be
united under the name //, t¢arella, for although they do not
intermingle either in locality or form, the remarkable sculp-
ture is nearly alike in all. By a parity of reasoning to that
which led Wollaston to unite a number of local forms as
varieties under the name H. polymorpha, the species to which
I refer might be aggregated under H. tiarella, I rediscovered
the shell now named H. Watsonit in an extremely limited
area of a few square yards only. Not being able to name
the form, I showed it to my friend Mr. J. Y. Johnson, the
eminent naturalist on the island. He recognized it, and
brought out from his stores two or three specimens which had
been found by Signor Moniz on the Ilheo dos Embarca-
douros many years before. Mr. Johnson told me that
Signor Moniz had no recollection of the exact spot on which
he had taken it, and although it had been subsequently
sought for by Signor Moniz and other friends of Mr. Johnson,
it had not been again found. It was my good fortune during
the two hours I spent on the islet not only to procure in
plenty the species I had gone there to seek, and which are

* “Description of Helix Watsoni, n. sp., from Madeira,” by J. Y.
Johnson, Journal of Conchology, vol. viii. 1897, p. 429.

the Land Tsopoda of Madeira. 69

in abundance, but also to meet with this little Helix and the
Lucastus which is here described. My rediscovery of the
H, tiarella ally led to its description by Mr. Johnson under
the name Helia Watsoni.

Metoponorthus seafasciatus, Budde-Lund.

I procured two specimens, which Dollfus, from their im-
perfect condition, doubtfully refers to this species, which had
been previously found in Madeira by Dr. H. Brénniche.

Porcellio maculipes, Budde-Lund.

This has been taken twice in Madeira, and is unknown
elsewhere. I did not meet with it.

Porcellio levis, Latreille.

Very abundant in the neighbourhood of Funchal, especially
in gardens and among bananas.

Porcellio dilatatus, Brandt.
Specimens are in Dollfus’s collection which were found by

Dr. Nodier.

Eluma purpurascens, Budde-Lund.

This species is remarkable on account of its simple eye-
lenses. I met with it up to heights of between 2000 and
8000 feet. Its range extends throughout the Madeiran
province, it having been found both in the Canaries and
Azores. It has also been met with in Portugal and Spain,
and at Charente, France; but of this last locality Dollfus
writes :— ot il a été certainement introduit.”

Armadillidium vulgare, Latreille.
Very abundant round Funchal.

Armadillidium tigris, Budde- Lund.

Taken by Metschnikoff in Madeira and not known else-
where (Budde-Lund).

Armadillidium granulatum, Brandt.
A specimen taken by Dr. H. Broénniche (Budde-Lunda).

70 Canon A. M. Norman on

We thus have twelve Land Isopoda as known in Madeira.
Such a list must be far from complete; and I trust that this
short notice may lead others to investigate this portion of the
Madeiran fauna. The Madeiran group is rich to a most
remarkable degree in Land Mollusca, and it may prove to be
so in Land Isopoda. With the exception of Lucastus Nor-
mant all the species I myself met with were collected close
to Funchal. The whole of the rest of Madeira remains to
be explored, and I am not aware that any carcinologist has
even so much as set foot upon the islands of the Desertas and
Porto Santo, which are so rich in Mollusca peculiar to them.

There are two remarkable features with respect to the Land
Mollusca of the Madeiran Islands—first, that, as a rule, each
form has a peculiarly restricted range in the islands, and,
secondly, that out of 176 species, as recorded by Wollaston,
only 25 occur in Europe.

The first of these features may be found to be paralleled
hereafter among the Isopoda; but as regards the second, out
of the twelve Isopoda in the preceding list, seven are Kuro-
pean and only five are not so. However, it must be remem-
bered that the species hitherto found have been mostly met
with in the immediate neighbourhood of the seaport and from
the most likely part of the island to contain introduced
species. Of the five which are not European, Armadillo-
niscus tuberculatus inhabits the Azores, while Armadillidium
tagris, Porcellio maculipes, Lucasius scitus, and Lucasius
Normani are, as far as is yet known, peculiar to Madeira,

The Land Isopoda have been more sought for in the Azores
and Canaries than in Madeira, and thus from the former
group of islands twenty species are known and from the
latter nineteen.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VI. Fras. 1-4.

Fig. 1. Lucasius Normani, A. Dollfus, sp. n. Head and first segment of
perzeon.

Fig. 2. Ditto. Head seen from below.

Fig. 3. Ditto. Fifth segment of pleon, pleotelson, and uropods.

Fig. 4. Ditto. First pleopod of the male.

{X.—Bbritish Land Isopoda.
By Canon A. M. Norman, M.A., D.C.L:, LL.D., F.R.S., &e.

(Plate VI. figs, 5-12. ]
SrncE the publication of Bate and Westwood’s ‘ History of
British Sessile-cyed Crustacea,’ 1869 *, the following papers

* Dated 1868, but the last part, which included the Land Isopoda,
was not published until 1869,

British Land Isopoda. 71

have been published in which reference is made to the Land
Tsopoda:—

(1) Strepsrne (Rev. T. R. R.).—“On a Crustacean of the
Genus Zia,” Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xi.
(1873).

(2) Norman (Rev. A. M.).—‘‘ Note on the Discovery of
Ligidium agile, Persoon, in Great Britain,” Ann. &
Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xi. (1873).

(3) Parrirr (E.).—‘“ The Fauna of Devon.— Part IX.
Sessile-eyed Crustacea,” Trans. Devon. Assoc. Sci.
Liter. & Art, 1873.

(4) Ropertson (Davip).—‘‘ Cat. Amphipoda and Isopoda of
the Firth of Clyde,” Trans. Nat. Hist. Soc. Glasgow,
vol. 11. 1888, pp. 9-99.

(5) Scorr (THomas).— The Land and Freshwater Crus-
tacea of the District around Edinburgh,” Proc. R.S. E.
vol. x1. 1890-91, p. 75.

(6) Scoarrr (R. F.).—“ The Irish Wood-lice,” Irish Natu-
ralist, vol. ii. 1894, pp. 4-7 & 25-29.

(7) Steppine (Rev. T. R. R.).—‘ Notes on Crustacea,”
Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 6, vol. xv. 1895, p. 22.

The most important publications on the Continent, as
bearing on our fauna, which have been published since Bate
and Westwood, and which should be consulted by a naturalist
taking up the study of the Land Isopoda, are :—

(8) Buppr-Lunp (G.).—‘ Crustacea Isopoda Terrestria.’
Copenhagen, 1885.

(9) Dottrus (A.).— Tableaux synoptiques de la Faune
Franeaise.-—Le Genre Armadillidium,” Feuille des
Jeunes Naturalistes, sér. 111. 1892 (separate copy).

(1U) Douurus (A.).—‘ Tableau Iconographique des Philoscia
d’Europe,” Feuille des Jeunes Naturalistes, sér. iii.
1897.

(11) Sars (G. O.).—‘ Account of the Crustacea of Norway.’
Vol. 11. Isopoda. Bergen, 1896-99.

The publications of M. A. Dollfus are very numerous; I
have referred only to those which are most likely to be useful
in determining species which may be found new to the British
fauna. Sars, in his truly beautiful and invaluable work, fully
illustrates the species of Norway, including eight species
which have not yet been met with in our islands.

My object in this short paper is to draw attention to the
Land Isopoda in the hope that naturalists may be induced to

72 Canon A. M. Norman on

look after the much neglected woodlice. Only one naturalist
in our islands has ever worked at them, and that was the late
Professor Kinahan, of Dublin, and in his case death pre-
maturely cut him off when he had only for a short time
investigated this group.

Dr. Scharff (6) has lately published a list of the Irish, and,
indeed, of all British species known to him; but Mr. Stebbing
is the only naturalist who has increased Kinahan’s record.

He has added three species; in the following notes I include
a fourth.

I only repeat here in exceptional cases localities which are
given by Kinahan or Bate and Westwood.

Ligia oceanica, Linné.

I have found this species to be generally distributed round
our coasts from Shetland to Cornwall.

Ligidium hypnorum, Cuvier.

1792. Oniscus hypnorum, Cuvier, Journ. d’Hist. nat. ii. 19, i. tt. 28. 5
(sic fide Budde-Lund),

1793. Oniscus agilis, Persoon, Panzer, German Faun. ix. 24.

1833. Ligidium Persoonii, Brandt (F. A.), Conspec. Mon. Crust.
Oniscod, p. 12, pl. iv. figs. 6, 12.

1841. Zia agilis, Koch, Deutschlands Crust. Heft xxxi. pls. xxii., xxiii.

1858. Ligidum Personii, Lereboullet, Mém. Crust. Cloport. de Stras-
bourg, p. 14, pl. i. fig. 1, pl. i1. figs. 20-31.

1859. Ligidium Personi, Kinahan, “ Analysis of certain Genera of
Terrest. Isop.,” Nat. Hist. Review, vol. iv. p. 275, pl. xxi. fig. 14,
pl. xxii. fig. 9.

1873. Zia Saundersit, Stebbing, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xi.

. 286.

1873. Ligidium agile, Norman, ibid. p. 419,

1885. Ligidium hypnorum, Budde-Lund, (8) p. 254.

1898. Ligidium hypnorum, G. O. Sars, (11) p. 158, pl. Ixxi.

Ligidium wust be sought forin damp places. Rev. T. R. R.
Stebbing has found it near Copthorn Common, Surrey.

Genus HAPLOPHTHALMUS, Schobl, 1861.
Haplophthalmus danicus, Budde-Lund.

1871. Haplophthalmus elegans, Budde-Lund, Danmarks isopode Lands-
seeeetie Naturhist. Tidssk. 3 Reekke, vol. vii. p. 228 (not HZ. elegans,
Schobl).

1879, Haplophthalmus danicus, Budde-Lund, Prospect. generum specie-
rumque Crust. Isop. terrest. p. 9.

1881. Haplophthalmus Meng, Weber, Einige neue Isopoden Nieder-
landschen Fauna, Tijdschr. d. Ned. Dierk. Vereen. vol. v. p. 192,
pl. v. figs. 7-9 (not Ltea Mengii, Zaddach).

1885, Haplophthalmus danicus, Budde-Lund, (8) p. 250,

1898. LLaplophthalmus danicus, G, O. Sars, (11) p. 168, pl. Ixxiv. fig. 2,

British Land Isopoda. 73

I have found this pretty little species in my garden here
(the Red House, Berkhamsted, Herts). It occurs in com-
pany with Trichoniscus roseus in a cool greenhouse. ‘The
genus is allied to Trichoniscus. ‘The species may be recog-
nized by its simple eyes and the longitudinal series of tubercles
which pass down the body.

Other specimens in my collection are from Denmark
(Copenhagen Mus.). It has also been found in Norway,
Holland, and France.

A near ally, H. Mengit, Zaddach, which is known to have
a wider distribution, may be found in Great Britain. It is
distinguished from its ally by having six longitudinal finely
crenulated ribs passing down the body, instead of the rows of
tubercles, and by the peculiarity of having two very prominent
ribs on the back of the third segment of the pleon.

These species are admirably figured in Sars’s beautiful
work now in course of publication—a work which no carci-
nologist studying the Isopoda can do without.

Trichoniscus pusillus, Brandt.

Philourgria celer and P. riparia of Kinahan are synonyms.
This little species appears to be widely distributed in our
islands. My specimens are from the counties of Durham,
Northumberland, and Herts, and from Connemara, Ireland.
I also have it from Denmark (Copenhagen Mus.). Mr. T.
Scott (5) finds it about Edinburgh. Exeter (Parfitt) ; Cum-
brae, Scotland (D. Robertson).

Trichoniscus vividus, Koch.

This is Philourgria vivida, B. & W. Taken by Kinahan
under stones and moss on hills at Portland, co. Waterford.
I am not aware that it has since been found in our islands.

Trichoniscus roseus, Koch.

This is the PAzlourgria rosea of Kinahan. I have found
it near Torquay and in my garden here. Mr. 'T. Scott
records it from ‘l’'arbert on Loch Fyne, and Dr. Scharff has
taken it at Dublin and received it from Ballyfinder, co. Down.
Oniscus asellus, Linné.

This is also O. fossor, B. & W. It is found everywhere.

Philoscia muscorum, Scopoli.

Widely distributed.

74 Canon A. M. Norman on

Philoscia Couchii, Kinahan.

1885, Ligidium Couchii, Budde-Lund, (8) p. 257.

1885. Philoscia longicornis, Budde-Lunde, (8) p. 221.

1897. Philoscia Couchii, Dollfus, (10) p. 5 (separate copy), pl. i.

fig. 1 a-c.

This species would seem to be entirely confined to the
immediate neighbourhood of the sea. Salcombe, Devon
(A. M. N.) ; Meadfoot, Torquay (Stebbing).

Its distribution has been found to be very extensive,
ranging southwards along the continent of Europe, in the
Mediterranean both on northern and southern coasts, in the
Black Sea at Sebastopol, in the Azores and Canaries.

Platyarthrus Hoffmannseggti, Brandt.

Salcombe, Devon; Cheddar Cliffs, Somerset ; garden, Red
House, Berkhamsted, Herts (A. M. N.) ; Ide, near Exeter
(Parfitt) ; Torquay (Stebbing). Leixlip, co. Dublin, Lismore,
co. Waterford, and Glengarriff, co. Cork (Scharf’). Banff,
Scotland (Thomas Edward, see 5).

Metoponorthus pruinosus, Brandt.

Burnmoor, co. Durham; Berkhamsted, Herts (A. MZ. N.) ;
Exeter (Parfitt); Banff, Scotland (Thos. Edward).

Budde-Lund unites with it Porcellio maculicornis, Koch,
P. frontalis, Lereb., Porcellionides flavo-vittatus, Miers, and
with ? before them Porcellio truncatus, M.-Edw., P. zealand-
icus, White, P. immaculatus, Fitch, and Porcellionides Jelskit,
Miers; and to this long list of synonyms is added P. Swam-
merdamiu, Aud. & Sav. It is very widely distributed, ex-
tending to Palestine, Madagascar, Sicily, North Africa, and
the Canary Islands.

Metoponorithus cingendus, Kinahan.

This is Porcellio cingendus, Kinahan. Salcombe, Devon
(A. MW. N.). Mr. Stebbing has also found it in South
Devon. Dr. Scharff says :—“ In the mountainous districts
of Dublin, Wicklow, and Cork, and also on the coast of
Kerry, and on the Arran Islands it is common.” Dollfus
records it from France and Spain.

Porcellio scaber, Latreille.

Abundant everywhere.

British Land Isopoda, 75

Porcellio levis, Latreille.

I am not aware that this species has been taken in our
islands by anyone since Kinahan procured it in Kent and at
Dublin, and writes “common everywhere in moist places,
especially in stables and litter, among grass at bottom of
walls”; but Scharff nevertheless speaks of it asa rare species
in Ireland, only found as yet in Kinahan’s habitat.

Porcellio pictus, J. F. Brandt.

Cooper’s Hill, near Cheltenham (A. MZ. N.); near Exeter
(Parfitt). Between Leith and Portobello (7. Scott) ; Ayr-
shire (D. A. Boyd) ; Banff (7. Edward). This species may
at once be recognized by its mottled body and black head.

Porcellio dilatatus, J. F. Brandt.
Headley, Surrey, and Ventnor, Isle of Wight (Stebbing).

Cylisticus convecus, De Geer.

1778. Oniscus converus, De Geer, Mém. Ins. vol. vii. p. 553, pl. xxv.

1853. Porcellio armadilloides, Lereboullet, Mém. Crust. Cloport. de
Strasbourg, p. 65, pl. i. fig. 18, pl. iii. figs. 88-94,
1869. Porcellio armadilloides, Bate and Westwood, vol. ii. p. 485.

Portland, Dorset; Berkhamsted, Herts (A. M. WN).
Salisbury Craggs, Edinburgh; Lanarkshire; Rothesay
(7. Scott, 5). Under stones in a disused quarry at Leixlip,
co. Dublin (Scharff, 6). Kilwinning, Scotland (John Smith,
fide Robertson, 4).

Armadillidium vulgare, Latreille.

Probably occurring throughout the British Islands, but
more abundant in the south. Dr. Scharff states that it has
not yet been found in the west of Ireland.

Porcellidium nasatum, Budde-Lund. (Pl. VI. figs. 5-8.)

1885. Porcellidium nasatum, Budde-Lund, (8) p. 51.
1892, Porcellidium nasatum, Dollfus, (9) p. 10, fig. 12.
1895, Porcellidium nasatum, Stebbing, (7) p. 23.

Body shining, densely and finely punctated, smooth cen-
trally; sides with series of depressed, wavy, clongated
tubercles, more clearly seen in adult specimens, but may be

76 Canon A. M. Norman on

traced in the young *, Head with depressed region of the
prosepistome not large, but its central process greatly pro-
jecting in the form of a conspicuous quadrangular lobe, bent
upwards distally, and extending forwards far beyond the
lateral lobes. Antenne with the joints of the flagellum sub-
equal in length. Telson or pleotelson much longer than wide,
tapering with concave sides to an obtusely rounded extre-
mity. Uropods having the exopodite much longer than
broad ; endopodite slender and straight, not so long as the
exopodite. Colour grey or somewhat plum-coloured, marked
on each segment with three or five pale spots; more rarely
uniformly grey.

Length 15 millim., breadth 7 millim.

The Rev. T. R. R. Stebbing has recorded this species
from Leigh Woods, near Clifton, and Tunbridge Wells. I
myself took it at Cheddar Cliffs, Somerset. Other specimens
in my collection are from Bayonne (A. M. N. 1880), Biarritz
(A. Dollfus), Rome (Copenhagen Mus.).

Armadillidium depressum, J. F. Brandt. (PI. VI. figs. 9-12.)
1830. Armadillidium depressum, Brandt, in Brandt and Ratzeburg,
Arznei: Thiere, vol. il. p. 82, pl. xiii. figs. 4, 5, 6, C, D.
1833. Armadilhdium depressum, Brandt, Conspec. Monog. Crust.
Oniscod. p. 24.
1885. Armadillidium depressum, Budde-Lund, (8) p. 63.
1892, Armadillidium depressum, A. Dollfus, (9) p. 17, fig. 25.

1895. Armadillidium depressum, Stebbing, (7) p. 22.

Body shining, densely punctated; a series of depressed,
elongated, wavy, obliquely placed tubercles are on each side
ot the segments at some distance from the centre; these
tubercles are often obscure, and always most evident on the
earlier segments; between these rows of obscure tubercles
the centre of the segments is usually smooth, but below them
the sides bear scattered granules. Head with the depressed
region of the prosepistome extended considerably forwards in
the central portion, forming a wide and conspicuous upturned
lobe, the sides of which are oblique and form a sharp angle at
their union with the upward sweep of the lateral processes,
which do not reach nearly so far forward as the central lobe.
First segment of the pereeon expanded in front and extending
beyond the head. Flagellum of the antenne with the two
joints of equal length. Tleotelson slightly longer than wide,

* These tubercles are similar in character to those of A. depressum ;
but whereas in that species the flattened tubercles are more pronounced
than in this, especially on the first two segments, in A. nasatum they are
less pronounced, but more equal on all the more posterior segments.

British Land Isopoda. 77

the sides scarcely incurved, the extremity truncated. Uropods
having the exopodite as broad as long; the endopodite rather
shorter. Colour uniformly greyish-lead or marked with spots
or dashes of sulphur-yellow.

Length 17 millim., breadth 9 millim.

The Rev. T. R. R. Stebbing has found this species at
Shirehampton, near Bristol, and M. A. Dollfus has specimens
which were collected by Mr. Miers at Clifton.

Specimens in my collection are from Italy (Copenhagen
Mus.) and Cap d’Antibes, Riviera (A. Dol/fus).

The occurrence of this species in our islands is of much
interest, as it was before only known in the south of Europe.
A. nasatum is found in France; in that country it occurs
abundantly in dry and sandy places in the south, but
becomes scarce northwards. It has also quite recently been
met with near Hamburg by Michaelsen. There is a possi-
bility that A. depressum may have been introduced, since as
yet it has only occurred within a few miles of the seaport of
Bristol; but this cannot have been the case with A. nasatum,
for it has been found in three distant localities, and no more
unlikely place for an introduced species could be found than
tufts of vegetation growing in the chinks of the great wild
rocks which form the magnificent scenery of Cheddar Cliffs.

As my friend M. A. Dollfus’s admirable paper on the
Armadillidia of France is not easily accessible to English
students, I have ventured to reproduce here his figures illus-
trative of two of the recent additions to our fauna. Haplo-
phthalmus danicus will be tound figured in Sars’s work.

In order to show the distribution of our known species in
Northern Europe, and also to indicate others which may
possibly hereafter be added to our fauna, I give the following
‘Table of Distribution (p. 78).

In the first six columns all species are recorded which are
known in those countries ; columns seven and eight are only
given for the purpose of showing a partial extension of range
of the species in the preceding columns. The Land Isopoda
rapidly increase in numbers towards the south of Hurope.
M. A. Dollfus has recorded no less than seventy-eight species
as inhabiting France and sixty-nine as found in Spain.

All the species under Norway are fully and admirably
figured in Sars’s beautiful work already referred to, as are
also some species which he has reason to hope may yet be
found in Norway—Ligidium hypnorum, Trichoniscus roseus,
Platyarthrus Hoffmannseggii, Porcellio levis, and Arma-
dillidium opacum,

78 On British Land Isopoda,

Distribution in Northern Europe of Crustacea Isopoda Terrestria.

: a em : 7] &
di Pl eg) SIS E1 21 ¢
S/EIS/E8/S/878] 8
BO Blo | Oo. Ito lecenieees
Ai4|/a/A.|/H}/aQ1o |e
| Ligia oceanica, Zinn. ...... aie aa tech te ome |e be) eee
Ligidium hypnorum, Cuvier .......... ele oa ae x | « | «
Haplophthalmus Mengii, Zaddach...... a ae CS ae | rhe x | *
Bamicus, B-Lind £206 eur. eee + {<2 eae als
Trichoniscoides albidus, B.-Lund ...... ee a pee oe as
Trichoniscus pusillus, Brandt.......... el slice ae Po ee
EVITA DCEO awn, 556 atlersy dial eole ace Pee ee eee ae ie let ome,
POR CMe as 'a cin x his maine ete re Pag ace (oe We ue Wee ed] Paces loa on pe
pygmeeus, G. O. Sars............ Jo. |
Philoscia muscorum, Scop. ......000 608 @ low 1? elie Weel ee
GCouchit, AAnGhAN. 05, § x9 x.8'o1s snp ole * oe oe re | ee *
Oniscus asellus, Linné ......0.eeeeese- *|\e«flelelstlelelse
Platyarthrus Hoffmannseggii, Brandt ..| x | x | .. | « | « | w | | «
Metoponorthus pruinosus, Brandt ...... * * | «il. a | «| x
cingendus, Kinahan .....seeeees * PCr PR oor ree ye
Porcellio Ratzeburgi, Brandt.......... Pom) Pw fers ered ere es
Bathkel, Brandt ve. use ihicee ech = = ae wer we
Gilatatns, TRNAl teen's o's. can em te rg ee a ew ee ed ed ee
pictus, Brandt..........sesseees ee Te ae Oe aes
scaber, Linné se. ceveeceeereeare & | om [ime foge | erie et ee Tie
tbs VAS CHP PENLE is ales olieze eth fancies elt ee ery tre an eee AG pe ee |
Cylisticus convexus, Hartmann........ * | «fl « |] a«itla«tla«l «le
Armadillidium vulgare ........ eG cic | ee oe Te ae eee
HAGADUN, Fh LN yi sss slats aise Oey Pre (cone) Gee lat my tee en
—— pictum, EESTLTUAL Bi okctoyolehs ate coevccves| os | ame * es heer * * *%
pulchellum, Zencher .....+.05: Se x |x | x e |
| —— opacum, Koch .....+...+eeeseeee suey diated cell: en Hl ever Il 25 cam ean lia
—-- depressum, Brandt .......6ceeeee * ie ae iy alt Segetdh Sie
| —— sulcatum, M.-Edw....... eae eee PIP beri) RPS cas Wark pa
20 | 17 | 13 | 20 |. 11 | 17 1922 | 36

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VI. Fries. 5-12,

5. Armadillidium nasatum, Budde-Lund. Anterior margin of head.
6. Ditto. Last segment of pleon, pleotelson, and uropods.
Fig. 7. Ditto, Uropod.
8. Ditto. Endopodite of first pleopod of male.
. 9, Armadillidium depressum, Brandt. Anterior margin of head.
Fig. 10. Ditto. Last segment of pleon, pleotelson, and uropods.
Fig. 11. Ditto, Uropod.
Fig. 12. Ditto. Endopodite of first pleopod of male,

A Second Recent Shell of Helix Lowei, Férussac. 79

X.—A Second Recent Shell of Helix Lowei, Férussac.
By Canon A. M. Norman, M.A., D.C.L., LL.D., F.R.S., &e.

1881. Helix portosanctana, B. gigantea, Lowe, Cambr. Phil. Soc. Trans,
vol. iv. p. 46, pl. v. fig. 16.
1835, Heliv Lowe, Férussac, Bull. de Zool. p. 89.
ins Bae Laue Albers, Malacographia Maderensis, p. 82, pl. xvii.
os. a

1878. Helix Lowet, Wollaston, Testacea Atlantica, p. 90.

Wollaston writes :— The /7, Lowe? (the larger examples
of which measure upwards of 2 inches across the broadest
part) stands pre-eminent amongst the Madeiran Helices for
its gigantic stature.” But Wollaston need not have re-
stricted his comparison to the shells of Madeira, for the only
species in the whole Palearctic region which equal or very
slightly exceed H. Lowet in diameter are Helix Codringtoni,
Gray, and H. Pouzolzt, Mich. ; but in total bulk HZ. Schlefli,
Mouss., and H. /ucorum, Linn., are unsurpassed.

This very fine species is abundant as a fossil in the cal-
careous beds of Porto Santo. It was long regarded as
extinct ; but at length a living specimen was discovered by
Signor J. M. Moniz, a collector of Mollusca in Madeira.
Mr. J. Yate Johnson thus tells the tale:—“ One red-letter
day an active naturalist, who was in the habit of prying
into out-of-the-way corners, happened to turn over a heavy
stone in the islet of Cima, off Porto Santo. Imagine,
brother naturalists !—for you alone can—his mingled astonish-
ment and delight when he saw secreted beneath it a living
individual of Heli Lowet! ‘To compare small things with
great, it was as if a traveller in the wilds of Africa were to
discover a pterodactyle fluttering like a bat in the obscure
depths of some previously unexplored cavern. The prize was
conveyed to Funchal with the greatest care, and there it lived
for some time, anxiously tended by its discoverer. Perhaps
it was too much indulged in the good things of this world,
for its life is supposed to have been shortened by a surfeit of
cabbage (Brassica oleracea), a luxurious article of diet to
which it had never been accustomed in its frugal home on a
barren rock. It died stne prole, the last of its ancient race ;
but its shell is fondly preserved by its still disconsolate
owner” (J. Y. Johnson, ‘ Madeira, its Climate and Scenery,’
1885, p. 211).

A second example, however, is now known. In 1892
Herr Rolle, the dealer in shells at Berlin, wrote to me
offering certain shells, among them a Helix Lowet. In

80 <A Second Recent Shell of Helix Lowei, Férussac.

ordering some of these I did not include the latter, since I
had a sufficiency of the fossil specimens. ‘The shells came,
and a letter from Herr Rolle saying that he had also sent the
HH. Lowei, as he felt certain that I should like to have it.
It may be imagined that my surprise was not unlike that of
Signor Moniz when he raised the heavy stone, when, on
opening the box, there lay before me a second recent specimen
of this grand shell. Careful comparison with the fossils
showed no differences except those produced by fossilization.
The only information that Herr Rolle could give me respecting
the specimen was that it came from the collection of Baron
von Maltzan, recently deceased.

Wishing to have my own opinion ratified or otherwise by
the highest authority, I sent the shell to Rev. R. Boog Watson,
whose collection of, and knowledge with respect to, the
Mollusca of Madeira is unequalled. He pronounced it to be
a recent specimen of Helix Lowet. ‘he question then arose
whether it was Signor Moniz’s specimen which had passed
into the possession of Baron von Maltzan. A letter which
Mr. Watson wrote to Mr. J. Y. Johnson, however, elicited
the reply that the original specimen was still in the collection
of Signor Moniz, and that neither he nor Mr. Johnson had
ever heard of the capture of a second specimen. Lastly,
when I went to Madeira last year I took my specimen with
me, and Mr. Johnson entirely agreed that it was a recent shell
of J/, Lowet. When, and by whom, and in what exact
locality it was found remains a mystery.

The specimen measures 1,% inch (or 48 millim.) in dia-
meter and 1,% inch (or 30 millim.) high. The thinness of
the shell for so large a Helix is remarkable, and it is trans-
lucent in every part; the weight is only 2 scruples. ‘The
colour on the under surface is pure white, on the upper the
white is slightly tinged with brown; two very narrow rufous
bands gird the body-whorl, the one just above, the other just
below the periphery. In form and sculpture there is no
difference whatever from those of the fossil shells.

Mr. Lowe, when he first described and figured this shell,
suggested that the recent Helix portosantana, Lowe, of
Madeira, might be specifically the same species as the extinct
H. Lowet, its representative in a depauperated form. But
the shells are perfectly distinct. Helix portosantana is not
only very much smaller, the spire more depressed &c., but
there are the following marked differences in sculpture :—In
H. Lowet, both recent and fossil, the apical whorls are strongly
and markedly pitted, and the underside of the shell exhibits
not the slightest trace of punctation. These features are

On Two undescribed Cicadas From the Transvaal. 81

exactly reversed in Helix portosantana. The apical whorls
are devoid of all pitting or punctation, while the under sur-
face is punctated all over, similar punctation being present
also on the upperside of the later whorls, though not there
so conspicuously developed as on the lower surface. In other
words, Helix Lowe? has large pittings or punctures at the
apex, and nowhere else. Helix portosantana has no pittings
or punctations on the apical whorls, but has them on the later
whorls, This description relates to adult shells.

XI.—On Two undescribed Cicadas from the Transvaal.
By W. L. Distant.

Platypleura sylvia, sp. n.

Body pilose. Head and pronotum ochraceous; head with
the face and front castaneous, the carine black, on face en-
closing two ochraceous spots; a broad black fascia between
the eyes, ocelli castaneous; pronotum with the lateral angles
pale ochraceous, inwardly infuscated. Mesonotum castaneous,
with four large black obconical spots on anterior margin, the
outermost longest and curved ; a black central lanceolate spot
and a spot on each anterior branch of the cruciform elevation ;
lateral basal margin ochraceous. Abdomen above black,
posterior segmental margins castaneous. Body beneath and
legs ochraceous ; coxe and trochanters spotted with black.

Tegmina semiopaque and talc-like, slightly mottled with
fuscous, venation castaneous, whole costal area ochraceous ;
wings pale hyaline, venation castaneous, about basal half
semlopaque pale ochraceous where the venation is con-
colorous.

Opercula short, broad, considerably overlapping inwardly ;
rostrum not extending beyond posterior coxee, its apex black ;
face with an acute central sulcation ; pronotal lateral angles
broadly ampliated and subacutely angulated.

6 ¢. Long. 32-33 millim. ; exp. tegm. 90 millim.

Hab, Transvaal: Pretoria District (Pret. Mus.), Middel-
burg (Kessner), Zoutpansberg (Kessner), Lydenburg District
(Pret. Mus. and Coll. Dist.).

This species is allied to P. semiclara, Germ., from which
it differs by the much larger and more robust body, the more
angulated pronotal margins, different colour and markings,
and especially in the smaller ochraceous area of the wings.

P. sylvia seems, according to present knowledge, to be

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iii. 6

82 Mr. R. I. Pocock on the Genus Peecilotheria.

confined to the Transvaal, which is, however, decidedly
improbable. I brought home two specimens with me in 1896,
and during a visit to the Pretoria Museum last October I
was able to inspect a fair series of both sexes.

Tibicen sirius, sp. n.

Head and thorax chocolate-brown. Head with the central
area to face, anterior margin, apex of front, and area of the
ocelli black. Pronotum with two blackish, narrow, central,
contiguous fasciz, widened anteriorly and posteriorly. Meso-
notum with four obconical black spots, the central two
smallest, the lateral ones very long; central area of cruciform
elevation black. Abdomen rufous-brown, the segments more
or less transversely streaked with piceous, and with a distinct
series of linear black spots on each lateral margin. Head
beneath and sternum palely tomentose ; legs chocolate-brown,
streaked with piceous; tarsi piceous, posterior femora and
tarsi ochraceous ; opercula dull ochraceous ; abdomen beneath
rufous-brown, with a faint central, longitudinal, macular,
piceous fascia.

Tegmina and wings pale hyaline, both with a very distinct
basal ochraceous patch; venation fuscous; wings with a
small fuscous spot at apex of radial area, posterior margin of
abdominal area also very distinctly fuscous.

Long. excl. tegm., ¢, 17 millim.; exp. tegm. 47 millim.

flab, ‘Transvaal, Lydenburg District (Pret. Mus. and Coll,
Dist.).

‘This species is superficially to be recognized by the basal
ochraceous areas to the tegmina and wings. ‘The rostrum
reaches the intermediate coxw; the anterior femora are
provided with two long acute spines.

XII.—The Genus Poecilotheria: its Habits, History, and
Species. By R. I. Pocock, of the British Museum of
Natural History.

[Plate VII.]

Part 1.—Observations on the Habits and History
of the Genus.

THE genus Pecilotheria is a representative of that great and
almsot cosmopolitan group of spiders which was formerly
included under the comprehensive title Mygale—a term which
is still to he found in many recent text-books of zoology and

Paas te a,

i ee

i

Mr. R. I. Pocock on the Genus Peecilotheria. 82

also in popular works on natural history, where special refer-
ence to them is made on account of their size and alleged
propensity for killing and eating small birds. The truth on
this point appears to be as follows :—

Madame Merian, who was one of the first to make known
the existence of these large spiders, although stating that the
species she observed in Surinam feeds mostly on ants, asserted
that they also take young humming-birds from their nests
when the supply of insects runs short ; and this description is
accompanied by a coloured figure of a spider devouring one
of these birds. The accuracy of this observation was subse-
quently confirmed by Mr. Bates, who also gave an illustration
of the destruction of asmall bird by one of these great spiders.
A similar story accompanied by another figure is told in ‘ The
Illustrated Natural History’ by the late Rev. J. G. Wood.
Thus from the small substratum of fact established by Madame
Merian arose the widespread and sensational belief that the
staple article of food of these spiders consists of small birds.
As a matter of fact, there is no doubt that they feed almost
entirely upon insects; but they will certainly also kill and
devour any living animal they are powerful enough to over-
come. In support of this statement and of those made by
Madame Merian and Mr. Bates it may be added that during
his stay in Borneo Mr. A. Everett captured a specimen of
the species I have described as Phormingochilus tagrinus ina
bird’s nest, where it had killed the young bird; and that the
specimen of Pecilotheria described below as P. regalis and
figured on PJ]. VII. was, when captured, devouring a small
rat which presumably it had killed.

Apart from diet, these large spiders differ somewhat in
mode of life. Most of them live on the ground beneath
stones or in deep burrows which are excavated in the soil
and lined with a layer of silk, to prevent the infall of loose
particles of earth or sand. thers, again, are found in trees,
where they spin a light silken domicile either between forked
branches, or in the hollow trunk, or in leaves rolled up for
the purpose. The species of Pecilotheria are now known
to be tree-living forms. Colonel Yerbury, for instance, tells
me that in Ceylon he discovered P. fasciata on trunks of trees,
where they spin a light web in the angle formed by a pro-
jecting branch; and a specimen of a species closely allied to
P. regalis that was sent from the Thana district in the
Bombay Presidency by Mr. A. G. Edie fell off a tree when
it was struck with an axe; lastly, the specimens of the
three §.-Indian species recorded below were captured in the
stacks of timber cut in the forests for fuel. i

6

84 Mr. R. I. Pocock on the Genus Peecilotheria.

In addition to their great size, a feature in which they are
scarcely surpassed by any spider in any country, the species
of Pecilotheria ave remarkable for their varied colouring.
The upperside of the body and limbs is ornamented with
blotches and stripes of brown and grey ; and since it is now
known that the spiders live on trees, there can be no doubt
that this type of coloration subserves the purpose of conceal-
ment, since it must harmonize very closely with the pattern
of a tree-trunk overgrown with patches of grey lichen and
moss. But the colouring of the lower side is startlingly
different from that of the upper, and is quite unlike anything
that is to be met with in the spiders allied to Pacilotheria,
though coloration of a similar kind is known to occur in many
species of the families Lycoside, Heteropodide, &c. This
coloration in most species consists of a deep chocolate-brown
or black tint on the lower side of the thorax, abdomen, and
coxe, while the legs are nearly white or lemon-yellow,
beautifully slashed with black bands and tipped with hairy
pads of iridescent hue. It is at first sight puzzling to account
for the existence of such colours on the lower surface of a
spider, where under ordinary circumstances they cannot
possibly be seen. But it is known that when molested these
animals rear themselves on their hind legs and brandish the
fore pairs and palpi in the air, adopting, in fact, a position
in which the colours are plainly displayed to view. Some of
the other spiders mentioned above belonging, e. g., to the
Heteropodide, which, although small as compared with
Pecilotheria, ave yet of considerable dimensions, are known
actually to turn on their backs when molested. Taking
these facts into consideration, and remembering that black
and white or black and yellow stripes constitute the badge
with which Nature, for purposes of protection, has endowed
poisonous or inedible animals, so that they may be at once
recognized by their foes and let alone—remembering, too,
that these spiders possess poison-glands of large size and
are armed with irritating bristles, 1 have no hesitation in
ascribing the unusual coloration of the under surface to the
category of warning characters. ‘They also possess a method
of self-advertisement, which no doubt subserves the same
end, in the form of a stridulating-organ lodged between the
mandible and the palp, and consisting of vibratile club-shaped
rods and of bristles which set them a-sounding.

During 1898 the British Museum received from Mr. H. R. P.
Carter * representatives of three new species of Pacilotheria ;
* I gladly take this opportunity of expressing my great obligation to

aT EM ee eel

Mr. R. I. Pocock on the Genus Peecilotheria. 85

and since the British Museum has examples of all the known
species of this genus, I hasten to describe these three new
forms, together with one from Ceylon, and to give a brief
recapitulation of the history of the genus and of the habits
of the species, so that those willing to avail themselves of the
opportunity of collecting material of this group may know
where to search for specimens and may learn what has been
ascertained up to the present time of the species. It is hoped,
too, that they may be able to determine the specimens they
procure, and, particularly, may be brought to realize that
in all probability many more specific representatives of this
genus exist than have hitherto been discovered, so that the
trouble of collecting even in localities where these spiders
have already been found will be well repaid by results.

Apart from the chance that it offers of bringing new species
to light, the acquisition of fresh material will teach us a great
deal about such matters as the variations to which these
spiders are subject as they pass from the young to the adult
condition, and of the differences that obtain between the two
sexes both before and after maturity.

For example, out of the four species that are here recorded
from §S. India, we only know the two sexes in one instance,
that is to say, in the case of P. regalis. Of the others,
P. vittata is represented in the British Museum collection by
a single male, P. metallica by a single female, and P. formosa
by several females but no male. Again, the alleged Pinang
species P. striata is also only known from the female sex.
This is true as well of the Ceylon species P. ornata, although
fortunately in the case of the remaining two species from this
island, namely P. fasciata and P. subfusca, we possess
examples of both sexes. And since, owing to the great
sexual differences that spiders present, our knowledge of a
species is very incomplete until both male and female have
been captured, it is clear that much still remains to be accom-
plished in the case of more than half the species that have
been established.

Judging of the species of Paecilotheria of which the males
and females are known, it may be asserted with regard to
specimens of the former sex that they resemble the females
in the coloration of the dower surface ot the body and limbs,
but that the upper surface is much more uniformly tinted, the

Mr. Carter, who, upon learning that the National Collection was in want
of these spiders, kindly wrote to his friends in S, India and used his
influence to such good purpose that I am now able to add three fresh
species of this genus to the faunistic lists of India.

86 Mr. R. J. Pocock on the Genus Peecilotheria.

pale bands and patches being far less clearly defined. They
also resemble the females in the development of the femoral
fringes on the legs; but they differ strikingly from them in
the much smaller size of the body and the relatively much
greater length of the limbs, and also, as in the case of all
spiders, by the presence of the so-called palpal organ on the
tarsal segment of the palpus or short limbs of the first pair.
This is the intromittent organ of the male, and in Pecilo-
theria takes the form of a horny pear-shaped structure with
three sharp crests running spirally round its narrow apical
portion.

The earliest known species of the genus Pecilotheria was
described by Latreille as Mygale fasciata, and was based upon
the figure of a large spider named Avanea maxima ceilonica,
published in Seba’s ‘ Thesaurus,’ vol. i. pl. Ixvii. The true
fasciata, therefore, is a Ceylonese species.

C. Koch, who was practically the first to dismember the
old genus Mygale of Latreille and Walckenaer, in 1850 gave
to this Ceylon spider the generic name Sceurria. Uufortu-
nately this name had three years earlier been applied to a
mollusk, and since it is against the rules of zoological nomen-
clature for the same name to be used for two distinct animals,
Simon in 1885 proposed Pwecilotheria to replace Scurria of
©) Koch: * ?

Up to 1885 the genus Peeilotheria, with its supposed
single species fasctata, was considered to be peculiar to the
island of Ceylon. In that year, however, Simon recorded
the occurrence of the species from Ramnad, in the Madura
district of 8. India (Bull. Soc. Zool. France, 1885, p. 38).
Touching the accuracy of this determination, it is permissible
to have doubts; nevertheless the discovery that the genus is
not confined to Ceylon was important. No one, however,
seems to have suspected the existence of more than one species
of Pacilotheria up to 1895. Early in that year I worked
out the material of this genus contained in the British
Museum, with the result that two well-marked, sharply
defined species of the genus were found to occur in Ceylon,
another in 8. India, and a third in the island of Pinang *.
These species were briefly described in the February number
of the ‘ Annals.’ The discovery of two species in Ceylon of
course raised the whole question as to which of the two was
the genuine fasciata. ‘The two species seem to be equally
common in the island, and it was quite certain that specimens

* For correction of this locality see note on p. 96.

Mr. R. I. Pocock on the Genus Poecilotheria. 87

of both species were preserved in the various collections in
Europe and were passing under the name fasc/ata.

Reference, however, to Seba’s original figure, imperfect in
many respects though it be, shows that the pattern of the
upperside of the abdomen in the original fascéata consists of
a pale longitudinal band surrounded by a narrow dark brown
border, whence narrow stripes of the same colour run on to
the sides of the abdomen very much as is shown in the case
of P. regalis on Pl. VII. ‘This type of coloration is very
noticeable in one of the Ceylonese species, but not so in the
other. To the former therefore I restricted the name fasciata,
and described the latter as a new species subfusca. he most
striking differences between the two, however, do not consist
so much in the pattern of the abdomen and carapace, as in
that of the underside of the legs, the femoral segments of
which are beautifully banded black and yellow in /ascvata,
while in subfusca they are of a uniform chocolate-brown tint.
The other two species that were described in that paper,
namely the one from Pinang and the one from 8. India, have
the femora banded somewhat as in fascéata, and two out of
three from §. India and the one from Ceylon established in
the following pages are similarly coloured, while the fourth
more nearly approaches subfusca in having the femora
unstriped.

Part 2.—Deseriptions of the Species.

(1) Pacilotheria fasciata (Latr.). (Pl. VII. fig. 2.)

Mygale fasciata, Latreille, Nouy. Dict. @ Hist. nat. xv. p. 304 (1803) ;
also Hist. nat. Crust. et Ins. vii. p. 160 (1804), &c.; Walckenaer,
Hist. nat. des Aranéides, iv. 1, with fig. (1806) ; Hahn, Monographie
der Spinnen, pl. i. (1820); id. Die Arachniden, ii. p. 65, fig. 157
(1834) ; C. Koch, Die Arachniden, ix. p. 41, fig. 717 (1842).

Scurria fasciata, C. Koch, Uebersicht des Arachnidensyst. pt. v. p. 74

1850).

Pooilotheria fasciata, Simon, Bull. Soc. Zool. Fr. 1885, p. 38; Pocock,

Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. (6) xv. p. 171 *.

Loc. Ceylon (Trincomali, Kandy).

* In the above list no attempt has been made to give a complete
quotation of the references to this species. The works that are cited are
those that contain the original references to the name, those that contain
figures of the species to which the name “ fasciata” has been applied, and
those that contain changes in the nomenclature of the genus. Nor must
the inclusion of these references under one heading be taken as evidence
that I consider as cospecific all the spiders that have been referred to
fasciata by the various authors cited above. They may all belong to the
same species, but the published figures and descriptions are not sufficiently
accurate and detailed to carry conviction on the point.

88 Mr. R. I. Pocock on the Genus Peecilotheria.

The Museum has specimens of this species merely ticketed
“ Ceylon.” The only examples with exact localities are an
adult male and a young female from Kandy (Col. Yerbury)
and an adult male from Trincomali (P. Bassett-Smith).

For the sake of comparison I append measurements * of
an adult female and male example of this species :—

9. Total length 46; length of carapace 24, width 20;
length of first leg 77, of second 67, of third 55, of fourth 67 ;
patella and tibia of first 28, of fourth 23; protarsus of
fourth 17.

g (from Kandy). Total length 35 ; length of carapace 16:5,
width 13°8; length of first leg 66, of second 57, of third 47,
of fourth 60, of palp 31°5; tibia of fourth 13°8; protarsus of
fourth 16:5, of first 15.

(2) Pactlotheria subfusca, Poe.

Scurria fasciata, Ausserer, Verh, z.-b. Ges, Wien, 1871, p. 199, ¢ (not
fasciata, Latr., C, Koch, Xc.).

Pecilotheria subfusca, Pocock, Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. (6) xv. p. 171
(1895).

Loc. Ceylon (Peradenia, Pundaloya).

As in the case of P. fasciata the British Museum has many
specimens of this species from Ceylon, but only four of these
have a definite locality. ‘These are an adult male (type) and
female from Pundaloya (2. Z. Green) and a pair of females
from Peradenia (/7eeman coll.).

Ausserer failed to identify this species from want of material
wherewith to check the constancy of the differences between
it and P. fasciata. The latter was known to him only from
the female, and his example of this species was a male. The

colour variation between the two he regarded to be of a sexual
nature.

* In this and all cases the length of the leg is taken from the base
of the femur to the tip of the tarsal claws, and does not include the
trochanter and coxa.

The leg measurements must, however, in certain cases be used with
caution, for, as compared with the carapace, these appendages are longer
in smaller (younger) than in larger specimens; in other words, with
increase of size the carapace increases in length more rapidly than the
legs. The total length in the table of measurements includes the cara-
pace and abdomen, but not the jaws (mandibles), The length of the
abdomen, however, is of little 1mportance, since in living specimens it
varies greatly in size in accordance with the full-fed or fasting condition
of the spider, and in Museum specimens in accordance with the method
of preservation, whether in a dry state or in alcohol. Since the carapace
is not subject to these alterations, the relative size of two spiders may be
estimated by the length of this plate, which may be taken as the standard
in Arachnoid mensuration, ’

Mr. R. I. Pocock on the Genus Peecilotheria. 89

The following are the measurements in millimetres of the
adult female collected by Mr. Freeman at Peradenia, and of
the adult male obtained by Mr. Green at Pundaloya :—

?. Total length 48; length of carapace 25, width 21;
length of second leg 67, of third 58, of fourth 69; patella
and tibia of second 25, of fourth 25; protarsus of fourth 17.

3. Total length 31; length of carapace 15, width 13;
length of first leg 61, of second 56, of third 48, of fourth 60 ;
tibia of fourth 14; protarsus of fourth 16, of first 13°3.

(3) Peecilotheria vitiata, Poe.

Peecilotheria vittata, Poc, Aun, & Mag. Nat. Hist. (6) xv. p. 172
(1895).

Loe. 8. India or Ceylon (Mr. Fanshawe’s coll.).

A single male example only is known.

This specimen presents the following measurements in
millimetres :—

Total length 34; length of carapace 17, width 15-2; length
of first leg 72, of second 68, of third 57, of fourth 66; pro-
tarsus of fourth 18, of first 17-8; tibia of fourth 15.

(4) Peecilotheria striata, Poc.
Pecilotheria striata, Poe. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (6) xv. p. 172
(1895).

Loc. Pinang (fardwicke coll.).

One specimen only of this species is known. The locality
assigned to it is, perhaps, erroneous, since no spider resem-
bling a Peeilotherta has been taken in Pinang by any
collectors of recent years. Nevertheless, until this particular
species is discovered elsewhere, which up to the present time
has not taken place*, there are no conclusive reasons for
rejecting the authenticity of the label on the type specimen.

The measurements of the type specimen are as follows :—

‘Total length 45; length of carapace 25, width 21°5; length
of first leg 85, of second 72, of third 59, of fourth 74 ; patella
and tibia of first 31, of fourth 26; protarsus of fourth 19.

(5) Pecilotheria regalis, sp.n. (PI. VII. figs. 1-1 0.)

Colour.—Head-shield or carapace covered above at the
sides with grey hairs, tinged here and there with yellow, its
middle third occupied by a pair of sinuous longitudinal bands
which start on each side of the ocular tubercle and pass
backwards to the posterior margin, uniting with each other

* For correction of this statement see note on p. 96,

90 Mr. R. I. Pocock on the Genus Peecilotheria.

for a short distance midway between the ocular tubercle
and the thoracic fovea. Abdomen ornamented above with a
broad whitish-yellow band, with its sinuous lateral edges
bordered with deep blackish brown; sides of the upper
surface pale mouse-brown, and furnished with chocolate-brown
obliquely transverse stripes, which pass from the black edging
of the median band to the deep chocolate-brown colouring of
the lower surface; lower surface of abdomen and the epigastric
area in front of the generative fold deep chocolate-brown or
black, but behind the epigastric fold there is a broad trans-
verse yellowish-red band passing right across the abdomen
from side to side and embracing the posterior breathing-
organs. Mandibles dirty greyish-brown above, black below
towards the tip. Palpi greyish-white above, brownish on the
upperside of the femur and tarsus, with black lines on the
tibia and patella; lower and inner sides of femur deep
velvety black; patella white below, with a brown spot on
each side; tibia whitish below, tinted with brown in the
middle, with a large brown patch on each side. Legs brown,
variegated with grey; the extremities of the segments greyish
white, a pair of lines of white spots on the tibia; tarsi with
two pairs of reddish-brown spots—one pair at base, one at
apex ; coxe and trochanters pale above; lower and under
sides of femora, patelle, and tibiz of first and second legs
bright lemon-yellow, of third and fourth pairs bluish white ;
the femora and tibie ornamented with a broad blackish-brown
band in the distal half, but with only a very small brownish
spot or stripe at the base of the inner side; these bands are
narrower than the pale area at the base of the femora, but
thicker than that at the tip; patella also with a brown stripe
or spot at the tip, this stripe on patella of third and fourth
very narrow; base of protarsus of third and fourth bluish
rey.

A ae shorter than patella and tibia of first leg, almost
equal to those of second, exceeding those of fourth ; patella
and tibia of fourth less than of second.

Femora of palp fringed externally and internally ; femora
of first and second leg also fringed externally and internally
at the apex; the trochanters of the first and second legs also
fringed in front.

Measurements in millimetres.—Total length 53; length of
carapace 25, width 21; length of first leg 75, of second 65,
of third 55, of fourth 67; patella and tibia of first 28, of
fourth 23°5; protarsus of fourth 15°8.

Loc. Arkonam in the north Arcot District of the Madras

Mr. R. I. Pocock on the Genus Peecilotheria. 91

Presidency. Taken in timber brought from the eastern
Ghats (H. RB. P. Carter).

The type of this species is a fine adult female example
which Mr, Carter brought alive from India and deposited in
the Zoological Gardens at Regent’s Park. Unfortunately
the animal did not long survive the journey to London. I
am much indebted to Mr. Arthur Thomson, the head keeper,
for the pains he took in the preservation of the specimen and
for bringing it to the British Museum, at Mr. Carter’s
request, when it was thoroughly dried.

The species much resembles the Ceylonese P. fascvata in
the colouring of the body and limbs, but may be at once
distinguished as from all the other known species of the genus
by the presence of the broad reddish band on the lower side
of the abdomen. It further differs from jfasctata in the
breadth of the bands on the lower side of the legs and the
presence of the fringes of hairs on the femora of the palpi and
front legs. In both of these respects it approaches the Pinang
species P. striata. P. striata, however, is a longer-legged
form, having the carapace shorter than the patella and tibia
of the fourth leg &c. (Compare measurements of the types.)

The British Museum possesses a dry example of what
appears to be a male specimen of this species from Koorg
(Mr. Macgilligan’s coll.). It presents the following measure-
ments :—

Total length 32; length of carapace 17°5, width 15:5;
length of first leg 73, of second 63, of third 52:5, of fourth 65;
protarsus of first 16°3, of fourth 17:2; tibia of fourth 14°5.

We also have an immature and badly preserved female
specimen from the Nilgiri Hills (Z. W. Oates) and a very
much rubbed adult female from Dahanee in the Tana district,
North Konkan (A. G. Edie).

(6) Pecilotheria formosa, sp. n.

Colouring of the upperside of trunk and limbs much like
that of P. regalis; the brown bands on the thorax much
wider and spreading more over towards the margins; the
pale band on the upperside of the abdomen less noticeably
lobate posteriorly, with the brown band that circumscribes it
and the brown stripes that radiate from it less clearly defined ;
there is also a larger pale area at the extremities of the tibia
and protarsi of the legs, and the uppersides of the tarsi of the
legs are not distinctly spotted ; the lower sides of the legs and
palpi are strongly striped, but the tibia of the palp is entirely

92 Mr. R. I. Pocock on the Genus Peecilotheria.

brown beneath, and the legs are much more of a unitorm
dirty white, the antericr pairs being only tinted with yellow,
and the posterior pairs without the bluish tinge; the dark
stripes, too, are blacker and narrower; there is, moreover, a
largish black patch on the inner side of the anterior femora
at the base, and there is no white distal band on the lower
side of the femora of the third and fourth legs, or, at all
events, at most a very narrow one spreading down from the
dorsal side; and the bands on the patella of the third and
fourth legs are broader than in P. regalis. Finally, the
lower side of the abdomen is entirely chocolate-brown, without
a pale band.

Legs of first and second pairs shorter than in P. regalis,
the carapace being as long as the patella and tibia of the first
leg and longer than those of the second by the grey spot
on the protarsus ; patella and tibia of fourth a little longer
than of second; femora and trochanters of palpi and anterior
legs not, or at all events only very slightly, fringed.

Stridulating-organ on maxilla consisting of a short cluster
of two rows of longer and shorter clavate bristles, with usually
two or three strong black tooth-like ridges removed a little
distance from the distal end of the cluster.

Measurements in millimetres of type specimen.—Total length
54; length of carapace 26, width 21; length of first leg 69,
of second 61, of third 54, of fourth 65; patella and tibia of
first 26, of fourth 23; protarsus of fourth 16.

Loc. Kadiampatti and Mullaptiram, in the Salem District,
Sheveroy Hills (4. &. P. Carter and H. C. West). Taken
in stacks of locomotive fire-wood.

This species differs from P. regalis in the characters
pointed out in the diagnosis. It resembles P. fasciata in the
absence of the femoral fringes of hair, these being the only
species with banded legs in which these fringes are not
developed. It, however, differs entirely from P. fasetata in
the much whiter colour of the lower side of the legs, the much
greater width of the black femoral bands, and the uniform
chocolate colour of the lower side of the tibia of the palp.
It is also a much shorter-legged species than P. fasctata, a
species in which the carapace is considerably shorter than the

atella and tibia of the first leg.

That this species is not based upon females of the §.-Indian
species already described as P. vittata, which might perhaps
be suspected from the fact that the two somewhat resemble
each other in the whitish colour of the underside of the
anterior femora, is shown by the absence of the femoral
fringes, which are highly developed in P. vittata, by the pale

Mr. R. I. Pocock on the Genus Poscilotheria. 93

colour of the under surface of the tibia of the palp in P. vittata
this segment being uniformly chocolate-brown in P. for moaas
by the presence in P. formosa and the absence in P. vittata of
a dark basal patch on the inner side of the anterior femora
and by the darker colour of the underside of the femora of the
third and fourth legs in P. vittata.

(7) Pecilotheria metallica, sp.n. (Pl. VII. fig. 3.)

Colour of carapace and abdomen much as in the other
species, but dark bands on the carapace more widely separated
mesially and the pale band on the abdomen much less distinct
and traversed by a darker stripe ; upperside of legs and palpi
tolerably uniformly coloured and becoming darker towards
the extremities, showing faint metallic lustre; tarsi not
spotted above ; protarsi with a thin brown stripe ; tibia with
very indistinct lines of yellow spots; lower side of palpi
entirely deep brown, with faint metallic blue lustre; lower
side of anterior legs blackish brown, with strong metallic blue
lustre, and a large orange-yellow patch on the under and inner
sides of the base of the tibia; third and fourth legs uniformly
coloured below with a similar but smaller tibial spot and
much less metallic blue tint; lower side of abdomen uni-
formly chocolate- brown.

Carapace shorter than patella and tibia of first leg, a little
longer than those of second and fourth leg; patella and tibia
of fourth a little longer than of second.

Measurements in millimetres.—Total length 52 ; length of
carapace 23°5, width 20; length of palp 37, of first leg 65, of
second 59, of third 52, of fourth 64 (all measured from base
of femur); patella and tibia of first 25, of second 22, of
fourth 23; protarsus of fourth 15.

Loc. Near Gooty, 257 miles from Madras. A single female
specimen, taken in the engineer’s bungalow on the north-west
line of the Madras Railway, and sent to Mr. H. R. P. Carter
by Mr. H. C. West, chief engineer.

This species may be easily recognized by the uniformity
of the colouring of both the upper and under sides of the legs
and body, by the metallic lustre of the under surface of the
legs, and the single orange-yellow patch on the tibia.

(8) Pecilotheria ornata, sp. n.

Colour very like that of P. fasciata; femora of anterior legs
yellow, with a black basal internal patch as in fasctata, but
with the stripe in the distal half of the segment much
broader; femora of third and fourth legs whitish below, as in

94 Mr. R. I. Pocock on the Genus Poecilotheria.

fasciata, but with the distal black stripe very broad on the
third leg, and broader than the pale basal portion, and on the
fourth leg as broad as the basal pale portion. In fasevata the
black stripes on these femora are narrow, much narrower
than the pale basal portion.

Further differing from P. fasciata in possessing, like the
Indian species, a thick fringe of hairs along the outer side of
the femora of the first and second leg, and in a lesser degree
of the third leg. In the examples of fasciata known to me
these fringes are not present.

Measurements in millimetres.—Total length 46; length of
carapace 19, of first leg 64, of second 58, of third 49, of
fourth 61; patella and tibia of first 24, of fourth 21; pro-
tarsus of fourth 15.

Loc. Ratnapura, 8. Ceylon (Rev. J. Burrows).

The differences between this species and P. fasciata have
been sufficiently dealt with in the description. In most of
the characters in which it differs from P. fasciata it approaches
P. striata, but has the femoral stripes much narrower and
possesses a black patch on the inner side at the base of the
anterior femora, which is absent in P. striata,

Table for the Determination of the known Species of

Peecilotheria, based upon Females.

a. Femora* of legs a uniform dark colour beneath
and on inner side, not striped black and white or
black and yellow ; (anterior femora not fringed),
a, Legs and palpi conspicuously banded on their
upper sides, the lower and inner sides of the
palpus and of the first and second legs showing
a conspicuous yellow spot on the apex of the
femur, the basal half of the patella and at both
ends of the tibize, the spot on the base of the
tibia occupying barely one third of the length of
the segment; third and fourth legs similarly
banded, but with smaller spots; legs without
strong metallic blue reflections below.......... subfusca, Poe.
b', Legs and palpi scarcely noticeably banded above,
lower side of palpi uniformly dark-coloured ;
lower side of legs similarly dark-coloured, but
with a large orange-yellow spot at the base of
the tibia and extending over nearly half its
length ; legs (especially the anterior two pairs)
with strong metallic blue reflection below...... metallica, sp. 0.

* The legs of spiders consist of seven segments, named as follows from
base to apex :—coxa, trochanter, femur, patella, tibia, protarsus, tarsus,
In the palpus (the small front leg) the protarsus is absent,

Mr. R. I. Pocock on the Genus Peecilotheria. 95

b. Femora of legs whitish or yellow beneath and on
the inner side, the first and second pairs, and
usually the third and fourth also, with a con-
spicuous black stripe on the distal half beneath ;
(femora fringed or not).
a*, Lower side of abdomen with a broad reddish
transverse band behind the genital fold; (femora
of palpi and anterior legs fringed; anterior legs
lemon-yellow beneath, with broad black stripes ;
posterior legs bluish white, with broad stripes ;
no internal basal spot on anterior femora) ...... regalis, sp. n.
6°, Lower side of abdomena uniform chocolate-brown
or black, without a broad reddish band behind
the genital fold.
a*, Tibia of palpus a uniform deep chocolate-brown
beneath ; (lower side of legs whitish; the an-
terior femora with inner basal patch and broad
distal stripe; femur of third leg at most
weakly banded, of fourth not banded below:
their segments on the anterior legs without
PEPA OER Dl Sr Seite ca iss = sigue oat 6 RSS formosa, sp. ni.
b°, Tibia of palpus pale beneath, with at most traces
of black patches extending inwards from the
sides of the segments.
a‘, Femora of legs without well-developed
fringes; black stripes on the lower side of
anterior femora narrow, also very narrow on
femur of third leg, and absent on lower side
of femur of fourth (with a basal spot on
inner side of anterior femora; anterior legs
lemon-yellow, posterior bluish white)...... Ffasciata, Laty.
b'. Femora of legs with well-developed fringes ;
black stripes on lower side ef femora of all
the legs very broad as compared with
Sasciata.
a’, With a distinct black basal spot on inner
side of femora of first and second pairs;
black band on inner side of anterior femur
only about half the width of the lemon-
yellow basal portion 2.2.22... 50.0000. ornata, sp. 1.
6°. Without a distinct internal basal patch on
the anterior femora; black band on lower
side of anterior femur almost as wide as
brownish-yellow basal portion of segment. strata, Poc.

The males may be determined as follows, neglecting for
the present certain differences in the structure of the palpal
organ, which are easy to detect and figure, but difficult to
describe :—

a. Lower side of femora brown, not banded ; (femora

of palpi and of first and second legs not fringed

either externally or at the apex internally)...... .. subfusca, Poe.
6. Lower side of femora of first and second legs yellow

or white, with a conspicuous black stripe near the

distal extremity.

96 Mr. R. I. Pocock on the Genus Peecilotheria.

a‘, Femora of palpi and of first and second legs with
at most a small external fringe ; black stripe on
femora of legs narrow ; a black patch at the base
of these segments on the inner side; (anterior
femora lemon-yellow ; posterior femora chalky or
bluish white): 2%. /4Wth «8s Git poe. US. Sasciata, Latr.
b‘, Femora of palpi and anterior legs with well-
developed external fringe; bands on femora
broader; no basal internal black patch on these
segments.
a’, Abdomen uniformly brown below, as in fasciata;
femora of anterior two pairs of legs nearly
white, of third and fourth pairs uniformly
greyish brown, not distinctly banded........ vittata, Poe.
b?. Abdomen with broad transverse pale band
behind genital fold; anterior legs lemon-yellow
beneath ; posterior legs bluish white and very
distinctly banded with black ...........06+ regalis, sp. n,

Note on the Locality of Peecilotheria striata.

During the passage of this paper through the press, I have
received from the Bombay Natural History Society a speci-
men of Pecilotheria ticketed §. India, and apparently
specifically identical with the type and hitherto only known
representative of P. striata. Thus the suspicions that I have
always held that the alleged locality for this species, namely
Pinang, would prove to be more than doubtful, and that the
species itself would turn up either in India or Ceylon, are
amply confirmed. In view of this discovery, I think we may
confidently regard Pwacilotherta as peculiar to 8. India and
Ceylon, where it is now known to be represented by eight
species.

In the same consignment of spiders from Bombay is a
specimen of P. regalis from Matheran, which shows that this
species has a wide range in 8. India.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VIL.

Fig. 1. Pecilotheria regalis, sp. n., nat, size, drawn from photograph of
female example from Arkonam.

Fig. 1a. Ditto. Lower side of abdomen of same specimen, showing pale
yellowish-red band (a) behind genital fold.

Fig. 1. Ditto. Front leg from inner aspect, showing black band (a)
and fringe (2) on femur.

Fig. 2. Pecilotheria fasciata, Latr. Inner view of front leg for com-
parison with 14, showing thin stripe (a) and basal black
patch (4) on femur; also the absence of femoral fringe.

Fig. 3. Pecilotheria metallica, sp.n. Inner view of front leg, showin
uniform dark colour with exception of orange-yellow tibia
spot,

Mr. W. F. Kirby on the Family Hetrodide. 97

XIII.—Notes on the Family Hetrodide, with a List of the
described Species. By W. F. Krirpy, F.L.S., F.E.S., &e.

Tue family Hetrodide includes a number of rather large
spiny apterous Orthoptera, a synopsis of which was published
by Dr. Karsch in 1887 in the ‘ Berliner entomologische
Zeitschrift,’ vol. xxxi. Several additional species have been
described since. I have just completed the rearrangement
of the specimens in the Natural History Museum, and have
made several notes on synonymy &c., which I thought it
would be useful to publish at once, and I prefix a list of all
the species hitherto described.

With the exception of one or two species which are said
tooccur in Asia Minor, the family is wholly African, and
the species appear to be more numerous in Hastern and,
perhaps, Southern Africa than on the West Coast. The
Spanish and North-African genus Pycnogaster, Graells, is
now referred by Brunner von Wattenwyl to the family
Ephippigeride instead of to the Hetrodide.

The synonymy of the true Hetrodide is given by Karsch
in the paper just quoted, and I have therefore only given
- full references where additions or corrections were required.

Species marked f are wanting in the Museum collection ;
||, as usual, denotes a preoccupied name; * denotes type of
genus.

List of described Species of Hetrodide.
Family Hetrodide.

Subfamily Herroprvz.
HerTroDES, Fischer de Waldheim (1833).
*1, Hetrodes pupus, Linn.—Africa, Cape Verde Islands,
Asia Minor.

[Typ. fig., Reesel, Insectenbelust. ii. Heuschrecken, tab. vi. fig. 3.]
Hetrodes pupa et spinulosus, F. de W. Orth. Ross. pp. 868, 369,
pl. xxxiv. figs. 1, 2 (1846).

2. Hetrodes productus, Walker, Cat. Derm. Salt. u. p. 227.
n. 4 (1869).—Congo.

3. Hetrodes macrurus, Walker, /. c. p. 228. n. 6 (1869).—?

4, Hetrodes marginatus, Walker, /. c. p. 226. n. 3 (1869),—

Cape.
Ann. & May. N. Lhst. Ser. 7. Vol. iii. 7

98 Mr. W. F. Kirby on the Family Hetrodide.

5. Hetrodes abbreviatus, Walker, l. c. p. 227. n. 5 (1869).—
S. Africa.

+6. Hetrodes Bachmanni, Karsch.—Troe Troe, W. Cape
Colony.

+7. Hetrodes variolosus, Fieber.— ?
Hetrodes variolosus, Fieber, Lotos, iii. p. 259 (1853).

ACANTHOPLUS, Stal (1873).
§ Femora spined beneath.

*1. Acanthoplus longipes, Charpentier.—Benguela, Congo.

§§ Femora not spined ; no spines on front margin of pronotum.

2. Acanthoplus pallidus, Walker.—K. Africa.
Hetrodes pallidus, Walk. Cat. Derm. Salt. ii. p. 231. n. 20 (1869).

3. Acanthoplus discoidalis, Walker.—S. Africa.
Hetrodes discoidalis, Walk. 1. c. p. 280. n, 18 (1869).

+4. Acanthoplus Speiser’, Brancsik, Trencs. Véirm. Term.

Egylet, 1894-5, p. 258, pl. viii. fig. 9a-d (1896).—
Zambesi.

5. Acanthoplus desertorum, Kirby (vide infra). — Kalahari
Desert.

6. Acanthoplus serratus, Kirby (vide infra).—King William’s
Town, 8. Africa.

7. Acanthoplus germanus, Kirby (vide infra). — Kin
William’s Town. i z

+8. Acanthoplus stratiotes, Brancsik, l. c. p. 259, pl. viii.
fig. 10 a-d (1896).—Zambesi.

§§§ Femora not spined ; two central spines on front margin of
pronotum.

19. Acanthoplus Jalle, Griftini, Boll. Mus. Zool. Torino, xii.
no. 290, p. 3 (1897).—Zambesi.

CLOANTHELLA, Bolivar (1890).
Cloanthella, Bol. Jorn. Sci. Lisboa, (2) i. p. 226 (1890).

*11. Cloanthella clypeata, Bol, 1. e.—Braganza.

Mr, W. F. Kirby on the Family Hetrodide. 99

CosMopDERUs, Lucas (1868).

*1. Cosmoderus ertnaceus, Fairmaire.—Gaboon, Cameroons,
French Congo.

Ephippiger erinaceus, Fairmaire, Thomson, Archives Ent, ii. p. 260,
pl. ix. fig. 1 (1858).

2. Cosmoderus Kingsleye, Kirby, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.
(6) xviii. p. 260, pl. xii. fig. 7 (1896). —Ogové.

APROPHANTIA, Kirby (1896).
(Kirby, Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. (6) xviii, p. 261, note (1896).]
*1, Aprophantia maculata, Kirby, /. c. pl. xii. fig. 8 (1896).—
Cameroons.

ENYALIOPSIS, Karsch (1887).
Types EL. ephippiatus and E. Petersit.

1. Enyaliopsis ephippiatus, Gerstaecker.— Zanzibar.

Eugaster ephippiatus, Gerstaecker, Arch. f. Nat. xxxv. p. 218 (1869) ;
Von der Decken’s Reisen, iii. (2) p. 27, Taf. ii. fig. 2 (1873).

2. Enyaliopsis Petersii, Schaum.—K. Africa.

+3. Enyaliopsis Bloyeti, Lucas.—Kondoa, K. Africa.
4, Enyaliopsis Durandi, Lucas.—Zambesi.

+5. Enyaliopsts obuncus, Bolivar.—Angola.

Enyalius obuncus, Bol, Jorn. Sci. Math. Lishoa, viii. p. 119 (1881).

GYMNOPROCTUS, Karsch (1887).

+1. Gymnoproctus abortivus, Serville-—Senegal, Soudan.
Eugaster Maurelit, Lucas (sec. Karsch).

Subfamily Hveasrrrvz.

ANEPISCEPTUS, Fieber (1853).
Pornotrips, Karsch (1887),

t1. Anepisceptus horridus, Burmeister (type of both the
above generic names).—Syria, Arabia, Egypt.

|| Hetrodes spinulosus, Charpentier,
7%
(

100. =-Mr. W. F. Kirby on the Family Hetrodide.

2. Anepisceptus Serville’, Reiche and Fairmaire.—Abyssinia,
Somali.

Hetrodes Servillei, R. & F., Ferret and Galinier, Voy. Abyss. iii. p. 426,
pl. xxviii. fig. 1 (1847).
13. Anepisceptus Revoilii, Lucas.—Somali.

$4. Anepisceptus hippolyti, Kirby (vide infra).—Abyssinia.
|| Eugaster Servillet, Lucas, Ann. Soc, Ent. France, (4) ix. p. 83, pl. 111.
fies, 1-6 (1869).
5. Anepisceptus Ruspolit, Schulthess-Rechberg.—Somali.
Pornotrips Ruspolit, 8.-R. Zool. Jahrb. Syst. viii. p. 81, pl. iv. fig. 4
(1894).
6. Anepisceptus suakimensis, Kirby.—Suakim.
Eugaster suakimensis, Kirby, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (6) xvii. p, 122
(1896).
17. Anepisceptus Robecchii, Schulthess-Rechberg.—Somali.

Pornotrips Robecchii, 8.-R. Ann. Mus. Genoy. (2) xix. p. 209, pl. ii.
figs. 15, 15 a (1898).

EUGASTER, Serville (1839).

1. Eugaster spinulosus, Linné.—Morocco.
(Typ. fig. Edwards, Gleanings Nat. Hist. ii. p. 161, pl. celxxxv. figs. 3-5
(1760). ]
Eugaster spinulosus, Kirby, Ent. M. Mag. xxvii. pp. 210, 295 (1891).

2, Hugaster frater, Kirby, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (6) xvii.
p- 123 (1896).—Mombasa.

3. Eugaster Woodii, Kirby, Ent. Monthly Mag. xxvii. p. 211
(1891).—Somali.

4. Hugaster loricatus, Gerstaecker, Arch. f. Nat. xxxv. p. 213
(1869) ; Von der Decken’s Reisen, iii. (2) p. 26, pl. i.
fig. 1 (1873); Karsch, Berl. ent. Zeitsch. xxxi. p. 65
(1887), xxxil. p. 463 (1888).—Zanzibar.

5. Hugaster Powysi, Kirby, l. c. p. 294 (1891).—Moroceco.

*6. Lugaster Guyoni, Serville—Algeria.

Eugaster Guyoni, Kirby, 7. c. p. 295 (1891) ; Vosseler, Jahreshefte Ver.
Wiurttemb. xlix. p. xciii (1893) ; Finot, Ann. Soc. Ent. France, Ixy.
p. 558 (1897).

\| Lvgaster spinulosus, pt., Karsch (excl. syn.), l. c. xxxi. p. 65 (1887).

Mr. W. F. Kirby on the Family Hetrodide. 101

7. Eugaster Lucast, Kirby, /. c. p. 295 (1891).—Tunis.
Hetrodes Guyoni, var., Lucas, Bull. Soc. Ent. France, (2) ix. p. 4 (1851).
ELugaster Guyoni, Lucas, Ann. Soe. Ent. France, (4) i. p. 217 (1861);

White, Proc. Ent. Soc. Lond. 1888, p. xxv.
Eugaster Guyoni, var, Lucasi, Krauss, Jahreshefte Ver. Wiirttemb.
xlix. p. xevi (1892) ; Zool. Jahrb. Syst. ix. p. 552 (1897).
18. Eugaster tnornata, Krauss.—Oran.

Eugaster Guyoni, var. inornata, Krauss, ll. cc, (1892, 1897).
|| EZugaster Guyonti, Karsch, 1. c. xxii. p. 462 (1888).

ACANTHOPROCTUS, Karsch (1887).
Tl. Acanthoproctus (?) capreolus, Pictet, Mém. Soc. Genave,
xxx. (6) p. 69, pl. iii. figs. 33, 83 a (1889).—S. Africa.
*2. Acanthoproctus cervinus, De Haan.—Cape.
Hetrodes fortis, Walker, Cat. Derm. Salt. ii. p. 229. n. 11 (1869).

3. Acanthoproctus militaris, White, Methuen, Life in Wilder-
ness, p. 316, pl. 1. fig. 4 (1846).—S. Africa.

4, Acanthoproctus Howarthe, Kirby (vide infra). —E. Karoo,
Cape Colony ; Brak Kloof, near Grahamstown.

HEMIHETRODES, Pictet (1889).
Hemihetrodes, Pictet, Mém. Soc. Genéve, xxx. (6) p, 74 (1889).

1. Hemihetrodes vittatus, Walker.—S. Africa.
Hetrodes vittatus, Walker, Cat. Derm. Salt. ii. p. 229. n. 12 (1869),
Hemihetrodes Peringueyi, pt., Pictet, 2. ¢. pl. iii. figs. 30, 30 a (1889).

2. Hemihetrodes Peringueyt, Pictet, l. c.—S. Africa.

APHRACTIA, Kirby (vide infra).
\| Enyalius, Stal, difv. Vet.-Akad. Forh. xxxiii. (3) p. 58 (1876),
Eugaster, div. a, Stal, Rec. Orth. ii. p. 22 (1874).
1. Aphractia diademata, Stal (1858).—S. Africa.

Hetrodes crassipes, Walker, Cat. Derm. Salt. ii. p. 251. n. 19 (1869).
Acanthoproctus tbex, Pictet, Mém. Soc. Genéve, xxx. (6) p. 72, pl. iii.
figs. 31, 31 b (1889).

MapiGcAa, Kirby (1896).
Madiga, Kirby, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (6) xvii. p. 124 (1896).
|| Prionocnemis, Karsch.

102 Col. C. Swinhoe on

*1. Madiga verrucifera, Karsch.—Mombasa.

Prionocnemis verruciferus, Karsch, Berl. ent. Zeitschr. xxxi. p. 67,
Taf. ii. fig. 3 (1887) ; Ent. Nachr. xiii. p. 261 (1887).

$2. Madiga aberrans, Schulthess-Rechberg.—Somali.

Prionocnemis aberrans, S.-R. Ann. Mus. Genov. (2) xix. p. 210, pl. ii.
figs, 16, 16 a (1898).

SPALACOMIMUS, Karsch (1887).

1. Spalacomimus talpa, Gerstaecker.—Zanzibar.

Eugaster talpa, Gerst. Arch, f. Nat. xxxv. p. 214 (1869); Von der
Decken’s Reisen, iii. (2) p. 28, Taf. ii. fig. 3 (1873).

BRADYOPISTHIUS, Karsch (1887).
1. Bradyopisthius paradoxurus, Karsch.—Somali.

[To be continued. |

X1IV.—New Species of Oriental Lepidoptera.
By Colonel C. Swinuoe, M.A., F.L.S.

Fam. Nymphalide.

Subfam. Hurrarmz.

1. Caduga ethologa, nov.

3 ¢. The Perak form of C. tytia, Gray, figured by Distant
in Rhop. Malay. pl. xli. fig. 15, differs constantly from both
Indian and Chinese forms in the long series before me, not
in the division or otherwise of the large pale spot in the
anterior wings between the second and third medial nervules as
stated by Distant (p. 409), this character being inconstant in
the group, but in the difference in the form of the subapical
hyaline streaks of the fore wings, which is very characteristic
in the group—the lower streak being short and the upper
ones reduced to mere spots, whereas in tytéa the lower streak
is always long; the fore wing of this form is also much
shorter than it is in ¢ytéa, the apex less produced, and the
outer margin more abrupt.

Expanse of wings 3} inches.

Perak. Many examples.

This form is in the B. M. from Perak, unnamed.

new Species of Oriental Lepidoptera. 103

2. Penoa evalida, nov.

3 ¢. Differs from P. alcathoé, Godt., in the hind wing
having the discal streaks short, these streaks, as also the
submarginal spots, obscured, being suffused with brown; the
female differs from the male only in having the markings
more pronounced.

Expanse of wings, ¢ 4,%, 2 4% inches.

Perak. Many examples.

Not referred to by Distant in his Rhop. Malay. ; it is the
Perak form of P. alcathoé, but the markings of the hind
wings, instead of being pure white as in that species, are as
obscure as in P, Pinwill’, Butler, and P. Menetriesii, Felder.

3. Calliplea musa, nov.

3 ¢. Dark blackish brown, with very faint blue gloss on
outer portions of fore wings; spots violet, one near costa
above end of cell, one in the cell at its lower end, one below
it in interno-median area, all three in a line; in the female
there is a fourth spot in the interspace between the cell-spot
and the lower spot; there is a spot outside the cell, and
another above it, a submarginal row of seven spots with
whitish centres: hind wings paler and more brown, with the
usual grey glandular patch, extending halfway into the cell
in the male, the grey costal space limited by the subcostal
vein in the female; three submarginal spots in the upper
interspaces. Underside uniform pale brown, spots grey ;
fore wings with one near costa above end of cell, one inside
lower end of cell, one large and oval-shaped in the interspace
below, a spot in each of the two discocellular interspaces,
submarginal and marginal spots in each interspace, the latter
very small; hind wings with white dots at the base, and
small submarginal and marginal spots in each interspace.

Expanse of wings 3%; inches.

Ponkim:, @4 ges; Ler.

Allied to nothing I know of: marked like a Salpina.

Subfam. Nywpw4rry Zz.

4, Precis neglecta, nov.

3 %. Upperside dark brown tinged with pink: fore wing
with a broad pinkish-grey band across the centre of the cell
and continued to the hinder margin, a similar band across
the end of the cell; discal and submarginal broad bands of
the same colour across both wings, the discal band being
interrup ted opposite the end of the cell of the fore wings by a

104 Col. C. Swinhoe on

brown elbowed mark of the ground-colour of the wing, both
wings also with athin pinkish band close to the outer margin.
Underside with the ground-colour dull ochreous tinged with
pink; the fore wings crossed by four bands, the discal one
much indented; the hind wing with an antemedial irregular
band, a nearly straight discal brown line with a pale inner
edge; a discal row of small ocelli, with white centres and
ringed with brown, across both wings, also a submarginal
sinuous brown line in both wings.

Expanse of wings 24/5 inches.

Sandakan, Borneo. 8g g,1 ?.

Belongs to the iphita group; it is in the B. M. unnamed.

5. Athyma gynea, nov.

d. Upperside black, markings milk-white, a narrow
streak in the cell, extending slightly beyond it in a spear-
shaped end ; three subapical spots, the middle one the largest ;
a discal band, running nearly parallel with the discoidal
streak, composed of three conjoined spots merely divided by
the veins, the upper one a large oval in the first median
interspace ; a submarginal pale line whitish near the hinder
angle, ending in a prominent orange spot near the apex:
hind wings with a broad antemedial band, this and the discal
band of the fore wings being continuous and edged with
blue; a narrow discal band of pure white spots, a pale thin
submarginal band, the abdominal border pale with some
bluish-white hairs near the anal angle. Underside reddish
brown; markings as above, the subapical band of spots
continued in a curve (round the discal band) to the hinder
angle ; two whitish bands near the outer margin of fore wings,
the outer one stopping short of the apex; a single white band
near the outer margin of hind wings, both more or less
macular; abdominal border and thorax tinged with blue;
abdomen above with a bluish-white band near the base.

Expanse of wings 24%, inches.

Perak. “3 6. 6-

Nearest to A. assa, de Nicév. Journ. Bomb. N. H. Soe. 1894,
p. 42, pl. K. fig. 8, which I have from the Battak Mountains,
Sumatra: on the under side it is very similar; above it can
at once be distinguished by the prominent bright orange
apical spot.

6. Athyma socia, nov.

9. Upperside black ; markings pure white, the streak
within the cell extending from base to end, divided into three

new Species of Oriental Lepidoptera. 105

equal portions touching each other, thickens outwards and
connects with a long spear-shaped mark beyond the cell with
its point running into the lower end of a broad subapical
band formed into three nearly square spots by the veins; an
oblique discal band of three broadly oval spots in the three
lower interspaces, a small white mark near apex, two pale
lunulate lines or thin bands close to the outer margin: hind
wings with a broad inner transverse band and a discal band
of spots and a pale submarginal line as in selenophora.
Underside pale brown with a rufous tinge, the base suffused
with pale greenish scales, as is also the abdominal margin of
the hind wings; the bands all very broad and the submarginal
lines white and thick, and white spots on the margin:
abdomen with a white band.

Expanse of wings 2475 inches.

Solomon Islands. One example.

Belongs to the selenophora group, but it is quite distinct
from that species.

7. Cyrestis natta, nov.

3. Upperside with all the markings as in C. cocles, Fabr.,
but the basal half of both wings is sepia-coloured limited by
the broad transverse pure white band; on the outer side of
this band the ground-colour is also mostly sepia, the sinuous
lines on each side of the row of ocelli being pure white; on
the underside the transverse markings are sepia tinged
with red.

Expanse of wings 2,%, inches.

Khasia Hills. Numerous examples.

In the ‘ Butterflies of India,’ vol. ii. p, 254, Mr. de Nicéville
refers this insect to C. Harli, Distant, under which name it
stands in the Indian collections. Mr. de Nicéville says that
C. cocles appears to usually present three distinct forms
wherever it occurs; this is apparently a perfectly correct
statement, but it only goes to prove the fact that if such forms
are to be studied by the biologist and careful records kept of
the manner in which they either die out or gradually establish
themselves as good species, they must have names. In the
Malay Peninsula we find three forms with three names—
cocles, Fabr., formosa, Felder, and Harli, Distant. In India
similarly we have three forms, but the third Indian form,
whether it be only a form of cocles or a good species, is not
the same as the third Malayan form; it differs widely from
Earli, Distant, having much less white on it and is altogether
of a different tint of sepia: they come in large numbers
together from the Khasia Hills. I have examined many

106 Col. C. Swinhoe on

hundreds and have now 72 cocles from India and Perak,
39 natta from India, and many Zarli from Perak before me:
some of the specimens of natta are paler than others, but I do
not remember to have ever seen what might be called a real
intergrade between this form and cocles; I have, however,
never seen a female of natta, though females of cocles are not
uncommon.

Fam. Lycaenidae.
8. Tajuria teza, nov.

?. Upperside: fore wing blue, like the colour of Clarita
othona, Hew., but brighter and paler in the outer portions ;
the costal and outer margins broadly black, filling one third
of the cell; the black band very broad beyond the cell,
narrowing gradually towards the hinder angle, where it curves
a little on the hinder margin ; the blue portions irrorated with
black atoms, thickly so on the inner half of the wing: bind
wing darker blue; a blackish-brown costal border, inwardly
diffuse, and the wholesurface of the wing thickly irrorated with
black atoms, suffusing the entire wing; marginal line black,
inwardly edged with white; tails black with white tips; a
blackish spot on the anal lobe, and a black spot at the end of
the three next veins on the brown cilia. Underside bright
chrome-yellow, with a discal narrow darker line outwardly
edged with whie: fore wing closed by a similar line; the
discal line is somewhat irregular, like connected lunules,
there is also an indistinct submarginal line not white-edged :
hind wing with a similar discal band, nearly straight to the
second medial nervure, then zigzag to the abdominal margin ;
a similar submarginal line with an outward white edging ;
marginal line black ; the space between these lines and up
half the margin white with black irrorations, with a chestnut
spot in the first median interspace and a black spot in the anal
lobe ; cilia brown, edged with white.

Expanse of wings 1,3, inch.

Jaintia Hills. 2 9 9.

Above itmuch resembles the female of 7’. ¢strozdea, de Nicév.,
but below the colour is quite different ; the discal line on fore
wings is also more irregular and the chestnut spot on the
outer margin of hind wings below near the anal angle has
not a black centre as it has in ¢stroddea, and is close to the
margin well inside the submarginal line; it also much
resembles the female of Vajuria thria, de Nicév., from Sumatra
and Burma*, but differs in the blue coloration of the
upper surface and in the width and character of the black
band.

* Journ. Bomb. N. H. Soc. p Ld, pl. T. fig. 39,

new Species of Oriental Lepidoptera. 107

Fam. Papilionide.
Subfam. Prerrmz.
9. Dercas enara, nov.

3. Larger than D. brindaba, the apical black patch
running somewhat into the veins, instead of being nearly
square cut as it is in dbrindaba; the inner margin of this
patch is marked with bright orange colour, and so is the
discal band, both characters wanting in the Indian form ; no
discal spot on the fore wings.

?. Pale primrose, the apical patch more restricted, the
pointed apex sometimes merely irrorated with black; the
discal spot prominent as in the female of Wallichit.

Omei-shan, W. China. Many examples.

Mr. Leech in his ‘ Butterflies from China, Japan, and
Corea,’ p. 445, gives Doubleday’s description of the male of
Wallichit with the discal spot, but he figures (pl. xxxv. fig. 3)
the form I now call enara. Perhaps a form with the black
discal spot on the fore wing of the male does occur in China,
but I have not seen it; all those received by me have been
without it.

10. Dercas brindaba, nov.

3. Like D. Wallichit, Doubl., but without the large
blackish-brown spot in the interspace between the first and
second median nervules of the fore wings above.

Khasia Hills. Numerous examples, all males.

This insect has been placed under the name of D. urania,
Butler *, in all Indian collections; but urania is merely the
female of D. Wallichit. Ihave received D. brindaba in great
quantities from my Khasia Hill collectors during the past eight
years ; it always comes with J. Wallichit and is the commoner
of the two. Though the discal spot in Wallichit is sometimes
larger, sometimes smaller, it is never evanescent, and I
think, therefore, I am justified in saying I have never
seen an intergrade between the two; but whether it be a good
species or merely a form of Wadllichii it is very distinctive, and
for the sake of convenience should have a name. I have
never seen a female; it very probably closely resembles the
female of Wallichit, as is the case with the allied Chinese
form.

Fam. Hesperida.
11. Hasora haslia, nov.

3. Upperside black, without markings: fore wings with-
out the sex-mark. Underside dark brown, tinged with lilac,

* P, Z. 8, 1866, p. 458, pl. xxvi. fig. 5.

108 Col. C. Swinhoe on

without any gloss: fore wings with a deep black fascia in the
central portion of the wing ‘from the base to near the outer
margin, running up to near the costa before the apex: hind
wings with a very narrow pure white discal band from the
costa before the apex to the abdominal margin above the anal
angle, where it is broken ; anal angle filled up by a large
blackish patch, slightly darker than ‘the ground-colour of the
wing; cilia brown, with a basal pure white line for a short
distance before the anal angle.

?. Only differs from the male in having an ochreous sub-
apical dot and two ochreous discal spots on the fore wings
above, as in Parata chromus, Cram.; below there is an addi-
tional white spot or patch near the hinder angle of the fore
wings, in continuation of the discal white band of the hind
wings.

Expanse of wings 24% inches.

Batspane, “i ds. pee 2".

Received from my collector in Brisbane as Parata chromus,
but it is a true //asora, and not a Parata, and it is altogether
differently coloured below and is much larger than chromus.
It is unnamed in the B. M.

In vol. ix. p. 407 of the Journal of the Bombay Nat. Hist.
Soc. Mr. de Nicéville says I use Parata in a generic sense
while speaking of its subgeneric characters, which really
means that I adopt the binomial and not the trinomial
system; apart from that, it is very difficult to my mind to
determine the meaning of the words genus or subgenus. I do
but agree with Dr. P. L. Sclater, than whom there is no
higher authority, who says * :—“ Genera, as we all know, do
not exist in nature, and it is a mere matter of convenience
how large or how small we make them.’”’ How are we to
define a genus? Why should we ignore all secondary sexual
characters in forming a genus? I agree with Meyrick, who
says t:—“ There is absolutely no scientific justification for
this restriction, which would make the classification of some
groups of Lepidoptera quite impracticable ; when such struc-
tural characters are found in any instance to assist the
definition of natural genera, there is no reason in nature why
they should not be employed with perfect freedom.”

Fam. Eupterotide.
12. ELupterote crinita, nov.

3. Head, thorax, and fore wings dark olive-brown: fore
wings crossed by many indistinct dark bands, the most

* ‘This,’ 1897, p. 134.
+ ‘Handbook of British Lepidoptera,’ p. 11.

ae irl be 2a Pepe gen

new Species of Oriental Lepidoptera. 109

distinct being a broad even discal band, with indications of a
yellowish outer edging, followed by some yellow lunular
marks, but the whole wing is so thickly clothed with long
brown hairs as to make all the bands and markings very
indistinct : the hind wings are still more thickly clothed with
paler brown hairs over a yellow ground-colour, leaving an
indistinct central broad brown band visible ; a more promi-
nent discal band, corresponding to the indistinct discal band
of the fore wings, followed by a broad yellow band, which
includes a row of dark brown spots with outward spear-shaped
ends surrounded by yellow, and limiting the dark brown broad
border. Underside pale yellow-brown; both wings with a
thick central brown line, a similar discal line, black spear-
shaped spots, and a darker marginal border.

Exxpanse of wings 34 inches.

Castle Rock, Karwar, Jan. 1892. Type incoll. Davidson.

Unlike any of the different forms of Hupterote yet described.

Fam. Notodontide.
Genus CLENORA, nov.

g. Branches of the antenne long, gradually shortening to
the tips, which are simple, as in the genus Rosama, Walker:
fore wings long and narrow ; costa slightly concave before the
middle, much rounded before the apex, which is also round ;
outer margin very oblique and angled at vein 3: hind wing
with the anal angle much produced and extending almost to
the extremity of the abdomen. Fore wing with vein 2 from
middle of cell, 4 from end of cell, 3 at an equal distance
between, 5 from centre of discocellulars (which are almost
straight), 6 from upper angle of cell, 7, 8, and 9 stalked:
hind wings with veins 3 and 4 and 6 and 7 from the angles
of cell, 5 absent.

Looks superficially like a Lastocampa allied to the genus
Ticerra, Swinh., or Bhima, Moore.

13, Clenora engonata, nov.

g. Antenne, head, and collar ochreous; thorax and fore
wings dark olive-green, sparsely irrorated with minute white
scales, the veins whitish; apex, outer margin, and cilia
chestnut-red: abdomen and hind wings chestnut-red, without
markings. Underside with the pectus and legs ochreous ;
wings uniform chestnut-brown, with the apices and outer
margins ochreous.

Expanse of wings 1} inch.

Karwar; rains, 1893. ‘l'ype in coll. Davidson.

Allied to nothing | know of,

110 Col. C. Swinhoe on

14. Stauropus clothus, nov.

&. Head, thorax, and fore wings dark brown: fore wings
with some white scales on inner and upper parts, a large
white spot at end of cell, a similar white spot just beyond
and slightly lower; three indistinct, outwardly curved,
sinuous black lines—subbasal, antemedial, and postmedial—
at equal distances apart, the last going through the white
spots; a black streak on the hinder margin near the angle,
four pale yellow points on the costa near the apex, and a
submarginal row of black dots: hind wings pale brownish
grey, slightly darker towards the outer margin: abdomen
greyish brown.

Exxpanse of wings 1, inch.

Karwar, Sept. 1895. Type in coll. Davidson.

Fam. Geometride.
Subfam. W/voczromrnm.

15. Sarcinodes perakaria, nov.

?. Upperside purplish cinereous; a double reddish line
from apex of fore wings to abdominal margin of hind wings
above the middle, as in restitutarta, Walker: fore wings
with the space inside the double line saturated with dark
chocolate colour, a large whitish spot at the end of the cell ;
hind wings with a darker discal indistinct fascia. Underside
paler, suffused with brown on the outer portions ; transverse
line and discal dots as in restttutaria, but no signs of the
upper discal black patch as in that species.

Expanse of wings 2,7, inches.

Perak. One example.

No doubt a local form of S. rest’tutaria, Wlk., this female
having antennee with short uniseriate branches as in that
species ; in S. Lilacina, Moore, the antenne of the female are
quite simple, and therefore Hampson’s diagnosis (Faun. Brit.
Ind., Moths, vol. iii. p. 315), “ antenne with short uniseriate
branches to two thirds length in both sexes,” is not correct
for this genus as a whole.

Fam. Limacodide.

16. Narosa narcha, nov.

?. White, top of head, thorax, and fore wings suffused
with pale reddish fuscous: in the fore wings the suffusion
forming two indistinct bands, one from the base outwards,
and the other from costa across the apical space, leaving the

new Species of Oriental Lepidoptera. 111

apex white; a pure white spot at lower end of cell, a black
mark in the outer margin above the angle; cilia interlined
with pale fuscous: hind wings white, with some slight
suffusion in the veins; cilia pure white. Underside white
without markings.

Expanse of wings 1,), inch.

Karwar, July 1895. ‘Type in coll. Davidson.

17. Thosea jasea, nov.

9. Head, body, and fore wings pale pinkish grey-brown,
irrorated with very minute black atoms, without any mark-
ings: hind wings nearly black, without markings; cilia of
both wings of the same colour as the wings, with a pale
basal line. Underside: fore wings brownish grey, with pale
prominent veins ; hind wings whitish, being nearly completely
covered with whitish irrorations.

Expanse of wings 1 inch.

Kutyne, N. Kanara, Jan. 1896. Type in coll. Davidson.

Like 7. Cotes’, Swinh., smailer and paler, and absolutely
without any markings.

Fam. Drepanulide.

18. Kuchera dictyaria, nov.

9. Above and below pure white; wings without any
transverse markings: fore wings with the discal spot below
showing through the wing; hind wing with a large black
spot at the end of cell; both wings with a submarginal row
of prominent round black spots, and a row of indistinct black
dots between it and the margin; vertex of head _ black.
Below with a large black spot at the end of the cell in both
wings, and a row of submarginal black spots, smaller than
they are above and not so round.

Expanse of wings 24% inches.

Kangra. One example. ‘Type in coll. Davidson.

About the size of #. Pitmani, Moore, but more nearly
allied to E. substiymaria, Hiibn.; the spots at the ends of the
cells similar, but otherwise quite different.

Fam. Lymantriide.

19. Topomesa lerwa, nov.

g. Head and shaft of antenne reddish brown, branches
of antenne brownish grey; thorax and abdomen white,
faintly tinged with pinkish: wings pinkish luteous; fore

112 Col. C. Swinhoe on

wings the paler, a large brown lunular mark at the end of
cell, costal line rufous, continued over the apex and on to the
outer margin, where there is some rufous suffusion in the
excised part below the apex; hind wings without markings,
and more yellow in colour; cilia of both wings rufous. On
the underside the body is whitish ; legs rufous ; the upper and
outer portions of the fore wings and the whole of the hind
wings, with the exception of the abdominal area, are suffused
with bright rufous.

@. With the fore wings suffused with olive-brown scales,
darkest in the centre and outer margins, the outer margin
angled at vein 4, and between it and the apex there is a deep
excision ; a large brown lunular mark at the end of cell. The
underside is ochreous, the excision suffused with dark brown,
the upper portions of fore wings and outer portions of hind
wings with chestnut. The antenne are almost as deeply
pectinated as in the male; the head, thorax, and fore wings
above are coloured as in the male.

Expanse of wings 1,4; inch.

3. Castle Rock, Karwar, October 1892. 9. Karwar,

September 1895. ‘Types in coll. Davidson.

20. Cispia charma, nov.

3. Head, thorax, and abdomen orange; thorax with two
black spots in front ; antenne black, the shaft white at sides:
fore wings orange-grey ; veins pale luteous, forming a pale

S Boer ey 5 - ’
spot at the lower end of cell; four black spots at the base:
P : : ; 4?
hind wings orange, without markings; cilia pale luteous.
ape papacy 8
Underside of a uniform orange-colour, legs with black bands.

: so 4 5 9 1&5

Expanse of wings 2 inches.

Karwar; rains, 1893. ‘Type in coll. Davidson.

The hind wings are coloured as in C. venosa, W1k., and
punctifascia, Wik. ; the fore wings are greyer, the markings
altogether different, and it is a much smaller insect.

Fam. Agaristide.
21. Mimeusemia Davidsoni, nov.

g. Wings deep black: fore wings with a large pale
yellow spot at one fourth from base, filling that portion of
the cell and extending slightly below it, where it is slightly
produced outwards; a broad pale yellow discal band from
below the costa to the centre of the interno-median inter-

space, rounded at both ends and recurved opposite the lower
end of the cell, beyond this is a band of metallic blue streaks

new Species of Oriental Lepidoptera. 113

on the veins; some metallic blue scales in various parts of
the wing forming three incomplete, irregular bands—subbasal,
medial, and postmedial, the last being close along the inner
side of the discal yellow band: hind wings as dark as the
fore wings, but without any blue scales; a large central pale
yellow spot joined to a pale yellow subbasal still larger patch,
forming a broad band. Underside same as above, except that
there are no metallic scales, and there is a subcostal yellow
spot in the centre of the fore wings. Head, thorax, and
abdomen black, the last four segments of the abdomen orange
coloured.

Expanse of wings 1,%; inch.

Karwar, South Kanara. One example. ‘Type in coll.
Davidson.

Allied to M. basalis, Wik., but the fore wing has no
chestnut tinge, and the hind wing has a broad band instead
of a central spot.

Fam. Lasiocampida.

22. Lenodora fia, nov.

gd. Pale reddish brown. Head, thorax, and abdomen
covered with pale ochreous-brown hairs; anal tuft bright
ochreous. Wings very thinly clothed, semihyaline: fore wings
with the costa and hinder margin more thickly clothed with
dark red-brown; a submarginal row of indistinct blackish
spots; cilia bright red-brown: hind wings slightly more
clothed than the fore wings; cilia bright red-brown. Under-
side: body and legs ochreous, covered with ochreous hairs ;
wings more ochreous, with the margins red-brown.

Expanse of wings 14 inch.

Kashmir, May 1896. Type in coll. Davidson.

Fam. Noctuida.
Subfam. Terrrv2.

23. Acronycta tria, nov.

@. Head, thorax, and fore wings grey: fore wings with a
longitudinal black streak below the middle, from near the
base to about one third from base, where it stops and com-
mences again from about one third from outer margin to
near the margin; the wing is also crossed by an antemedial
outwardly curved blackish sinuous line, a medial, short line
from the costa toa black-ringed orbicular mark; an outwardly
curved dentate black discal line, some indistinct submarginal

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iti. 8

114 Col. C. Swinhoe on

marks, and marginal black points which run into the cilia,
which is whitish with blackish tips: hind wings greyish
white, grey on the outer margins; veins dark grey; a thin
discal transverse grey band: abdomen greyish white.
Expanse of wings 2 inches.
Kulu. One example.

Subfam. Aconrim2.

24. Cosmia ozela, nov.

6 ?. Frons white, top of head and collar chestnut-grey ;
thorax and abdomen brown, suffused with chestnut: fore wing
with the suffusion forming a dark cloud on the centre of the
hinder margin; costa with two small deep black spots, sub-
basal and antemedial, then two large deep black spots, medial
and subapical, between these two is a small whitish space;
an indistinct brown discal sinuous line, outwardly curved on
the upper part, deeply recurved to the lower end of cell, then
downwards to the hinder margin one third from the angle; a
blackish mark at the end of the cell: abdomen and hind wings
brown without markings. Underside uniform dull brown ;
a brown dot at the end of each cell and a brown discal line
across both wings.

Expanse of wings 1,3, inch.

Mhow. Type ¢ in coll. Swinhoe.

Karwar; rains, 1889. Type ? in coll. Davidson.

Subfam. Saroryrrprvs.

25. Ftisciana toda, nov.

@. Palpi and top of head pinkish grey; thorax olive-
brown; abdomen grey, with brown segmental bands: fore
wings with the inner half brown, crossed by four or five dark
brown lines; a yellow subbasal spot on the costa and another
one third from base; the discal space is variegated, the upper
part ochreous, the lower part smeared with white scales, the
outer marginal part dark brown, in the ochreous part opposite
the cell is a triangular black mark centred with ochreous,
and this space is outwardly bounded by a duplex brown line,
bent outwards round the triangular mark, a submarginal
duplex line terminating at apex in a small white patch and
a white spot in the disk; three ochreous dots on costa near
apex: hind wings brown. Underside pale brown; costa of

new Species of Oriental Lepidoptera. 115

fore wings with many whitish marks; hinder marginal parts
and inner area of hind wings whitish; fore tarsi black with
white bands.

Expanse of wings 1 inch.

Karwar, June 1895. Type in coll. Davidson.

Subfam. Carocarin2.

26. Catocala trisa, nov.

3. Palpi, head, thorax, and fore wings dark brown, thorax
with a blackish stripe on each side: fore wings with sub-
basal and antemedial, nearly erect, blackish bands, beyond
this the wing is paler except towards the margin; two sinuous
short black lines from the costa near the apex, across the
apical space, enclosing a pale brownish ochreous apical spot,
some spear-shaped black submarginal marks; cilia brown,
with a pale line at their base: abdomen and hind wings bright
ochreous yellow, a brown marginal band stopping abruptly
at vein 2 and including a yellow apical space; cilia yellow.
Underside: fore wings nearly white, hind wings yellow ; fore
wings with a short postmedial brown band, and a marginal
brown band with an ochreous apical spot; hind wings with
band as above, also with an ochreous apical spot.

Expanse of wings 1,8 inch.

Satara, 1874. Type in coll. Davidson.

Allied to C. ochretpennis, Butler, from Madagascar, but
smaller and the wings narrower.

Subfam. Focrrrrz.

27. Zethes ochrodes, nov.

g@. Pale ochreous grey, with minute brown irrorations ;
thorax marked with black lines: fore wings with subbasal,
outwardly curved, black line, another close to it nearly
straight, curved inwards near the hinder margin, the third
discal, from costa at two thirds, elbowed deeply outwards
above the middle, then oblique to hinder margin at two
thirds ; two black longitudinal lines running just below the
angle to the outer margin: hind wings with a straight medial
line, a brown spot near anal angle outside the line, the outer
portion of both wings slightly more irrorated than the inner ;
fore wing with a submarginal band of white lunules.

116 On new Species of Oriental Lepidoptera.

_Expanse of wings 14 inch.
Port Blair, Andaman Islands. ‘Two examples.
The lines are disposed much as in Zethes (Rusicada?)
basiseripta, W\k., but that insect has a black basal area.

28. Lluza noda, nov.

6. Antenne black; palpi black at sides, inner parts and
last joint ochreous; trons chestnut; thorax, abdomen, and
both wings brown; top of head black, and a black band on
thorax in front, from the costal base of one wing to the other :
fore wings with a black lunule at the end of cell and a large
black, almost quadrate, mark surrounded by a pale thin
edging before the middle, extending from the median vein to
the hinder margin: hind wings slightly paler towards the
base, without markings. Underside: wings of a uniform
pale brown, without markings; tibia with ochreous hairs,
tarsi black, anal tuft of abdomen yellow.

Expanse of wings 15% inch.

Karwar, August 1895. Type in coll. Davidson.

The tibiz are rather more hairy than usual and the palpi
rather shorter. The insect somewhat resembles Zowocampa ?
atriplaga, Walker, from Natal, but it has the venation and
other characteristics of the genus Z/uzo, Walker, the type of
which is decisa, Walker, which I have from the Jaintia Hills.

Fam. Thyridide.
29. LHypolamprus rupina, nov.

¢. Of a uniform pinkish-brown colour, with evenly
dispesed dark biown stiations on both wings throughout; an
indistinct Jarge brown spot at the end of cell of fore wings:
hind wing with the outer margin slightly excised before anal
angle. Underside: fore wings paler, discal spot as above;
hind wings whitish ; brown striations on both wings as above,

Expanse of wings 13%; inch.

Jarimpur, February 1895. ‘Type in coll. Davidson,

On the Regenerative Surfaces in the Phasmide. 117

XV.—On the Localization of the Regenerative Surfaces in
the Phasmide. By KpMOND BorpDaGeE*.

AFTER a series of experiments I have succeeded in ascer-
taining that the regeneration of limbs in Phasmids, in con-
sequence of artificial amputation, only took place when the
amputation had been performed in the region comprising the
tarsus and the lower third of the tibia + ; so that the only
possible localities for the phenomena of regeneration were the
region indicated and the surface of section corresponding to
the line of fusion between the trochanter and femur, which
was laid bare after autotomy. If there had been mutilations
in the shape of amputations performed at different levels, the
regenerative power would have manifested itself throughout
the entire length of the limb, and would certainly have
resulted in the reproduction of the whole of the missing
portion, at whatever point these amputations had taken place.

I was therefore led to seek for the reason of such special
localizations as these, and I have studied the manner in
which the principal vertebrate enemies of J/onandroptera and
Rhaphiderus attack these insects and lay hold of them.

Birds, as I have been able to assure myself, are ill adapted
to provoke autotomy or to mutilate the lower region of the
limbs. They kill the insects immediately by dealing them
repeated blows with their beaks. I have noticed this fact
especially in connexion with the common myna (Acridotheres
tristis), the great destroyer, par excellence, of grasshoppers
and Phasmids.

Lizards have yielded me more interesting results. I have
observed the mode of procedure of the ‘ bloodsucker’”’
(Calotes versicolor) in order to seize a Phasmid. ‘The Ortho-
pteron supports itself on its long bent legs, its body balanced
in the strangest manner while walking, and even during
repose, if the least breath of air makes itself felt. The abdo-
men is raised and bent back in a semicircle, an attitude which
is especially remarkable in the young larve. It most
frequently happens that the lizard, darting at the insect,
seizes it by the abdomen or by the thorax and devours it

* Translated by E. E. Austen from the ‘Comptes Rendus Hebdo-

madaires des Séances de la Société de Biologie,’ t. v. n0 28, 5aciat, 1898,

. 837-8389: from a separate impression communicate -d by the Author,
Cf. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 6, vol. xx. (1597) pp. 473, 476, and 507.
+ Vide Bull. de la Sce. entomol. de France, céance du 18 juillet, 1598,

118 On the Regenerative Surfaces in the Phasmide.

immediately. Jt is not so when the insect is a somewhat
large one and is attacked by a Calotes of small size. In most
cases the latter can only seize its prey by a limb. Then, by
little abrupt and rapid movements, performed by relaxing a
very little and then immediately tightening the grip of its
jaws, which advance, so to speak, little by little, mounting up
the limb, it finally reaches the body itself. I was never able
to discover that its teeth severed the limb. ‘They merely
plant themselves more or less deeply in the chitinous sheath.
The insect struggles and clings to the nearest objects by
means of the claws with which the tarsi are terminated.
This results in very severe strains on all the limbs, but
especially on the leg which is seized. Not infrequently when
the teeth reach the upper half or upper third* of the femur
they may produce autotomy by breaking, if they penetrate
deeply enough through the chitinous sheath. In certain cases,
after having thus abandoned a limb, the insect, if upon a
branch, allows itself to fall to the ground. In this manner
it sometimes succeeds in hiding itself in the grass and in
throwing its enemy off the scent. But in most cases it does
not act thus, and confines itself to fleeing before the lizard.
The latter speedily catches it up and renews its tactics, which
in most instances end in the death of the Orthopteron.

When—which is of somewhat rare occurrence—the Calotes
has only been able to seize the terminal extremity of the
limb, the result, thanks to the relative fragility of this region,
is the removal of a portion or of the whole of the tarsus,
either by a pretty clean cut or by being pulled off. These
mutilations must have contributed to the development of the
regenerative faculty possessed by the tarsus and the lower
third of the tibia; for the muscular fibres which move the
joints of the tarsus have their attachments precisely in this
portion of the tibia, and are subjected, beyond doubt, to strains
and lesions, constituting a mode of excitation which is suffi-
cient to explain the cases of regeneration exhibited by this
lower third of the tibia.

We must not take any account of ants, whose bites can
only provoke autotomy, and never mutilations of other kinds.
‘The action of these bites is a purely chemical one, and could
only have succeeded in manifesting itself at the outset of the
period at which the special disposition which ensures spon-
taneous amputation had been subjected, in course of time, to

* The only region at which it is possible to provoke autotomy by
cutting, pinching, or breaking.

Miscellaneous. 119

a real process of improvement and had acquired a sufficient
degree of sensitiveness. Moreover, ants only make their
appearance during the tertiary epoch.

The per fecting } process must likewise have been accelerated
by the difficulty experienced by the larva in emerging from the
egg-shell. At this time it frequently happens that the tarsus
of one of the limbs remains fixed in the hard round shell,
which is then dragged along like a ball by the insect.
Severe strains result from this every moment, when the
shell is caught in some obstacle. These strains, if not always
sufficient to produce autotomy, nevertheless pretty often
bring about the mutilation of the tarsus, which, after being
torn “off, is abandoned either in its entirety or else merely in
part, together with the egg-shell. This, then, must again
have contributed to the “development of the regenerative
faculty possessed by the tarsus and the lower third of the
tibia.

Saurians and Batrachians, represented by the Stegocephali
as early as the primary epoch, then certain small mammals
beginning with the secondary epoch, although they do not
appear to be able-to produce mutilations in the shape of
clean amputations of the femur and tibia, were nevertheless
capable of contributing to the development of the regenerative
faculty in the tarsal region, as well as to the perfecting of
autotomy. But their attacks could not have been one of the
primary causes of the appearance of the special disposition
permitting autotomy first and regeneration afterwards.

In a communication shortly to appear I propose to seek
for these primary causes,

MISCELLANEOUS.

Note on Papilio glycerion, Gray.
By F. A. Heron, Assistant, British hinge (Natural History).

In 1831 no. 1 of Gray’s ‘ Zoological Miscellany’ contained, on
page 32, the short Latin diagnosis by Geo. Robert Gray printed
below :—

“ Papilio Glycerion.—P. alis flavescentibus, fasciis nigris ; posticis
caudatis apice nigro, lunulis marginalibus ceruleis, angulo ani striga
flava. Expansio alarum 3 poll. Habitat in Nepaul.”

The original of the description is said to be in the collection of
General Hardwicke.

Twelve years later—in 1843—Boisduval (Spec. Gén. Lép. i.

120 Miscellaneous.

p. 247. n. 71) gave a full description of the upperside from a figure
on a plate in Gray’s then unpublished ‘ Lepidopterous Insects of
Nepaul in the Collection of Major-General Hardwicke.’ The plate
is quoted by Boisduval as no. 1, but was published as no. 3. Most
clear in the description is the notice of the two basal bands of the
wings :-—“ La premicre, prés de la base, se continuant sur le bord
abdominal des inférieures ; la seconde également commune, mais ne
dépassant pas la cellule discoidale des inférienres.”

These bands are quite obvious in Gray’s figures of glycerion in
‘The Lepidopterous Insects of Nepaul’ (1846).

In the interval, however, between Boisduval’s description and the
issue of Gray’s plate, Westwood (Arcana Ent. il. p. 24, t. 55. f. 3,
1843) had figured, under the name of glycerion, Gray, the underside
of a Papilio which was not the species described by Gray and Bois-
duval, though he quotes the latter’s detailed description as absolving
him from figuring the upperside.

Westwood’s specimen came from ‘ Semlah, in the East Indies,”
and he received it from Captain Parry.

Oberthiir, in 1879 (Et. d’Ent. iv. p. 115), described a Chinese
form, entirely rightly, as glycerion, var. mandarinus; and in 1886
de Nicéville (Journ. As. Soc. Beng. lv. p. 254) described, as inter-
mediate between glycerion, Gray, and trmerlanus, Ob., Papilio paphus
from Sikkim, and, for comparison, figured on pl. xi. tom. cit. the
undersides of the species he called glycerton, Gray, and paphus,
de Nicév.

Unfortunately glycerion, de Nicéville and of most authors, is
glycerion, Westwood, nec Gray, as is obvious from the mention and
figure of the median black line on the hind wings in the description
of Boisduval and the drawing of Gray ; and should further evidence
be required, Gray’s type is in the National Collection.

Papilio paphus, de Nicéville, became a synonym of P. glycerzon,
Gray, and glycerion, Westw. et auct. plur., was without a name till
Rothschild’s invaluable monograph on Eastern Papilios appeared in
Novit. Zool. vol. ii. (1895), where the author bestowed the name
caschmirensis on a subspecies, 165 (b), of what he, misled apparently
by Westwood’s error of identification, considered g/ycerion, Gray.

The subspecies 165 (a), ‘* Papilio glycerion, forma typica”’ of the
monograph, is still unnamed, and for this, the prevalent Sikkim
form, I propose the subspecific name sikkimica.

The name of species no. 165 will be then caschmirensis, Roth-
schild, with subspecies siikimica, mihi; and species no. 167 will
stand as glycerion, Gray, with mandarius, Ob., as a subspecies.

Paphus, de Nicév., being a synonym of glycerion, Gray, forma
typica, disappears altogether.

The type of the genus Pazala, Moore (1888), is Pap. glycerion,
Gray.

Ann.& Mag. Not. Hist. §.7.Vol.H. Pv.1.

ee
SP ge

le.

ae

Asa.

W.T.C.ad nat.del Vintern Bros .]

Inn. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 8.7 Vol MPLA.

= po
ST ad

W.T.C.adnat,del.

Mantern Bros . lith.

Ann.& Mag. Nat. Hist. S.7 Vel TM PULL.

W.T.C.adnat.del. Mintern Bros .lith.

Ann. & Mag . Nat. HMist.S.7.Vol. Il. PU.IV.

W.T.C.adnat.del. Mintern Bros .lith.

Ann. & Mag.Nat. Hist. S$ .7 VoU.HL PL.

E.E.Green del. REMmntern Lth. Mintern Bros .imp

Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. §.7.Vot Ill. PL VI.

10.

Dolitus del. REM lth.

Mintern Bros.imp.

- AG
2 > Nal@ies

. = «ih
te | é

Anir.& Mag. Nat. list. S. 7. Vol HL PL.VI.

THE ANNALS

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

(SEVENTH SERIES, ]

No. 14. FEBRUARY 1899.

XVI.—On the Origin of the Fauna of Celebes.
By Professor Dr. MAx WEBER.

[THE following notes* are part of an article by Dr. Max
Weber entitled ‘‘ Die Siisswasserfische des Indischen
Archipels,” which appeared in his ‘ Zoologische Ergebnisse
einer Reise in Niederlindisch Ost-Indien,’ vol. iii. 1894. In
the first and special portion of the article complete lists of the
freshwater fishes of Celebes and other islands are given,
which are not reproduced here. |

In dealing more closely with some questions of a general
character, our starting-point is the opinion so clearly expressed
by Dr. Giinther + :—“ The freshwater fishes being limited
to the river- or lake-systems which they inhabit, and being
less exposed to the disturbance affecting the terrestrial
animals, are singularly adapted for the elucidation of the
original geographical distribution of animals of the present

creation.”

* Translated by Miss Ethel S. Barton.
+ Cat. Fish. viii. p. ix.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iii. 9

124 Prof. Dr. Max Weber on the

From this Table it may be seen that east of Borneo and Java
the Mastacembelide, Silurida, Cyprinidae, Nandide, Lucio-
cephalide, and Osteoglosside are entirely wanting. In our
earlier list of freshwater fishes existing in Celebes, the Siluride
genera Plotosus and Artus were given. ‘These were never
found, however, in the interior, but only in the neighbourhood
of river-estuaries; and, what is more important, they are
equally at home in brackish water or in the sea. They do
not therefore come under consideration here, where we are
dealing exclusively with true freshwater fishes. Further, it
is also worthy of notice that along the southern chain of the
islands the transition is not so sudden as between Borneo and
Celebes. The above Table shows us that already in Java
the Luciocephalide, Nandide, and Osteoglosside are wanting,
while Bali, so far as we know at present, only possesses two
of the Cyprinide: and one of the Siluride. Were we inclined
to continue the boundary-line in the usual way between Bali
and Lombok, that boundary-line which, for freshwater fishes
also, almost completely separates Borneo from Celebes, we
should have to bear in mind our complete ignorance of the
freshwater fauna of Lombok. Supposing for the moment
that the conditions in Lombok were the same as those in the
more eastern islands—Sumbawa, Flores, &c.—this boundary-
line would have little to mark off. At the best, so far as our
present knowledge goes, there would be on the one side Bali,
with two Cyprinide and one Siluride, while on the other—
the eastern side—neither is represented. The difference, in
itself unimportant, becomes still smaller when we examine
how matters stand in Celebes as regards the Ophiocephalide
and Labyrinthici, equally characteristic of the western portion
of the Archipelago. Sumatra has nine, Borneo eleven, Java
only four species of Ophiocephalus; not one is recorded from
Bali; but Celebes, Flores, even Amboina still have Ophio-
cephalus striatus. ‘This startling fact was recognized by
Bleeker and v. Martens for Celebes and Amboina. v. Martens
believed it was possible that this fish, characteristic of the
Indian fauna, had been introduced by man; but against this
is to be placed its widespread occurrence in Celebes, even in
places where the population has not reached such an advanced
state of civilization as to allow the probability of such an
introduction. ‘This objection holds good in a still more
marked degree for Flores, where I also found this species in
a small stream unsuitable for the cultivation of fish. Besides
this, the inhabitants of Flores are of a low type and seldom
fish. Finally, as regards the Labyrinthici, of the nine (or

Origin of the Fauna of Celebes. 125

eight) species recorded from Sumatra, Borneo, and Java, Bali
possesses only two—Osphromenus trichopterus and Anabas
scandens. ‘he latter occurs on Sumbawa, Celebes, Rotti,
Sumba, and Timor *, but in such a manner as to preclude
the idea of introduction by man.

The question, therefore, as to the differences existing
between the eastern and western portions of the archipelago
as regards freshwater fishes may be answered thus :—

1. The transition from Borneo to Celebes in respect of
river-fishes is very abrupt. Out of the nine families of fresh-
water fishes characteristic of the Oriental region only three
occur in Celebes, each represented by one species, while,
according to our present knowledge, Borneo has 182 species.
The Cyprinide and freshwater Siluride, which are so well
represented in Borneo, are entirely wanting. This want is
not explained by the present hydrographical condition of
Celebes.

2. Since Siluridz (one species) and Cyprinidae (two
species) are found in Bali, and not in those islands further to
the east (which fact would argue their non-occurrence in
Lombok, hitherto unexplored ichthyologically), this would
coincide with the original Wallace line. But it must not be
forgotten that already in Java there is a decrease in fresh-
water fishes, not only with respect to the number of species
in proportion to the smaller size of Java compared with
Borneo and Sumatra, but also qualitatively, inasmuch as two
families—the Osteoglosside and Luciocephalides—are wanting
in Java. In Bali six out of the nine families given in our
tables no longer occur +.

2, WHat IS THE ORIGIN OF THE FRESHWATER F'ISH-
FAUNA IN THE EASTERN PORTION OF THE ARCHIPELAGO ?

Since we have shown that the islands to the east of the
great Sunda group are almost entirely wanting in true
freshwater fishes, the question arises, What is the origin
of the fish-fauna on these islands? An inspection of the
tables for Celebes and Amboina, although dealing with a
much richer material, gives the same result as Kd. v. Martens }

* According to Bleeker, Amboina has a peculiar form—Anuabas micro-
cephalus, Blikr.

+ Probably, however, Ophiocephalus striatus and a species of Haplo-
chilus occur in Bali.

¢ Ed. v. Martens, ‘ Preuss. Expedition nach Ost-Asien, Zoolog. Theil,
Bd. i. 1874, p. 313.

126 Prof. Dr. Max Weber on the

arrived at in his excellent explanation of the fauna of the
Indian Archipelago twenty yearsago. This author writes:—
‘“‘In Celebes begins a far greater poverty in freshwater fishes,
inasmuch as from here onwards the true freshwater species
are wanting throughout the whole eastern portion of the
Archipelago. .. . . It is therefore principally those genera
regarded above as consisting of migratory and brackish-water
fishes, such as eels, several Percoide, and some Gobioide,
which form the freshwater fauna in Celebes and the Moluccas,
several species of which appear only to have been found in
fresh water . . . . while the majority live also in the sea or
at least in brackish water. . . . ‘The very poor development
of the freshwater fauna in the eastern half of the Archipelago
arises partly from the fact that hardly anything but small
rivers or streams exist, with stony bottom and varying depth;
for Celebes, however, this explanation does not hold good,
since the lake of Tondano, for instance, contains a consider-
able mass of water, in which Cyprinide and Siluride could
feel quite at home. In the absence of these two families of
freshwater fishes, the eastern portion of the Archipelago
agrees with its eastern and southern neighbours, Australia
and the small islands of the Pacific.”

As I have said, my much richer material only confirms
this statement. ‘This may be shortly explained by the con-
ditions offered by Celebes. I select this island advisedly,
because it possesses the most favourable hydrographical con-
ditions for the cultivation of a freshwater fauna, and also
because this fauna is much richer on Celebes than on the
other islands in the eastern portion of the Archipelago.
Another point in selecting Celebes for consideration lies in
the peculiar position which it occupies in many respects, and
this accounts for the interest long shown in this island by
many investigators.

‘The Table in the original memoir shows that Celebes has at
least fifty species of fishes in true fresh water; the numerous
other species given in the same ‘Table, which up to the present
have only been recorded from the river-estuaries, are not con-
sidered here. Of these fifty species there are only twenty-five
which are not recorded also from the sea or brackish water ;
these are :—

Dules rupestris, C. V. Gobius lacrymosus, Pet.
Therapon micranthus, Bikr. Sicydium cynocephalum, C. V,
Toxotes jaculator, Pall, microcephalum, Blkr.
Gobius bicirrhosus, MZ. Web, Platyptera aspro, C. V.

— biocellatus, C. ”. Agonostoma plicatile, C. V,

—— grammepomus, Blkr,

oxyrhynchum, C. V.

Origin of the Fauna of Celebes. 127

Ophiocephalus striatus, B/. Symbranchus bengalensis, M‘Clell.
Anabas scandens, Dald. Anguilla mauritiana, Benn.
P oligolepis, Blkr. sidat, Blk.

Haplochilus celebensis, M. Web. Ophichthys Kaupi, Bly.
Hemiramphus orientalis, WZ. Web. Doryichthys caudatus, Pet.

? Notopterus kapirat, Lac. Tetrodon erythroteenia, Biker.
Monopterus javanensis, Lac.

This great poverty in the fish-fauna of fresh water in
Celebes and its marine character cannot be explained by the
present hydrographical condition of the island.

3. Has THE FISH-FAUNA OF CELEBES AN AUSTRALIAN
CHARACTER ?

In his invaluable ‘ Handbook of Ichthyology’ Giinther
divides the equatorial zone, in respect to the distribution of
freshwater fishes, into a Cyprinoid and an Acyprinoid region.
In the Acyprinoid he includes the tropical American and
tropical Pacific regions, characterizing the latter by the
presence of Dipnoi, while, in contradistinction to the Indian
region, the Cyprinidee and Labyrinthici are absent. ‘This
tropical Pacific region embraces all islands to the east of
Wallace’s line, New Guinea, Australia (with the exception of
its south-eastern portion), and all islands in the tropical Pacific
as far as the Sandwich group.” ‘The importance of Giinther’s
views on this question is so great that we will quote further
from him :—‘‘ Comparing the area of this region with that of
the others, we find it to be not only the poorest in point of
the number of its species generally, but also in that of the
possession of peculiar forms.” Then follows a short list,
after which he says, ‘‘ The paucity of freshwater fishes is due
in the first place to the arid climate and the deficiency of
water in the Australian continent, as well as to the insigni-
ficant size of the freshwater courses in the smaller islands.
Still this cannot be the only cause; the large island of
Celebes, which by its mountainous portions, as well as by its
extensive plains and lowlands, would seem to offer a favour-
able variety of conditions for the development of a freshwater
fauna, is, so far as has been ascertained, tenanted by seven
species of freshwater fishes only, namely, two Arius, two
Plotosus, one Anabas, one Ophiocephalus, and one Mono-
pterus, all of which are the commonest species of the Indian
region. .... Finding, then, that even those parts of this
region which are favourable to the development of freshwater
fishes have not produced any distinct forms, and that the few
species which inhabit them are unchanged or but slightly

128 Prof. Dr. Max Weber on the

modified Indian species, we must conclude that the whole of
this area has remained geologically isolated from the other
regions of this zone since the commencement of the existence
of Teleostei, and that, with the exception of Ceratodus and
Osteoglossum, the immigration of the other species is of very
recent date.”

To this statement we may be permitted to add the following
remarks :—Firstly, the fish-fauna of Celebes is somewhat
different from what Giinther was aware of at that time.
This has been explained at length above. Arius and Plo-
tosus are unquestionably forms which have wandered in from
the sea, and belong only to the river-estuaries.

As touching the further agreement with the fish-fauna of
Australia, I have drawn up, in answer to this question, a list
of Australian fishes. Although this may be incomplete, it
will nevertheless represent the character of this fish-fauna.
Only those genera are given here which have been recorded
trom the tropical regions of Australia :—

Pseudolates. Oligorus. Plotosus.
Lates. Ctenolates, Copidoglanis.
Psammoperca. Dules. Cnidoglanis.
Serranus. Therapon. Eumeda.
Mesoprion. Pristipoma. Arius.
Ambassis, Gerres. Haplochiton,
Pseudambassis. Toxotes. Saurida.
Edelia. Upenoides. Galaxias.
Acanthoperca. Chrysophrys. Belone.
Apogon. Lethrinus. Osteoglossum.
Eleotris. Centropogon, Engraulis.
Aristeus. Polynemus. Chatoessus.
Atherinichthys. Corvina. Brisbania.
Mugil. Caranx. Clupea.
Agonostoma. Psettes. Elops.
Myxis. Kquula. Megalops.
Cheerops. Sillago. Anguilla,
Coris. Gobius. Conger.
Pseudorhombus. Gobiodon, Mureena.
Synaptura. Periophthalmus, Ostracion.
Apogonichthys. Plagusia. Ceratodus.

Gulliveria.

From this list it may be seen that three elements go to
form this fish-fauna :—

1. Marine immigrants, which belonged originally to the
tropical Pacific, and could therefore penetrate into the rivers
of all islands and countries washed by this ocean. ‘They
show nothing characteristic of the Australian fauna. Parallel
or similar species are chiefly found in Australia and Celebes,
for example, but they also occur in the rivers of the large

Origin of the Fauna of Celebes. 129

Sunda Islands. ‘That they are, perhaps, less numerous in the
latter locality I have already tried to explain by the fact that
a given amount of water can only harbour a certain number of
fishes. The western islands possess fishes peculiar to their
rivers, and these are wanting in the eastern islands, where a
more abundant immigration is rendered possible.

2. True freshwater fishes, which also belong to the Oriental
region. We may cite Dules, Haplochiton, and, if we go
further, Toxotes, Gobius, Eleotris, Agonostoma, Anguilla.

3. True freshwater fishes, which are absent from the Indian
Archipelago, east of the ‘ Wallace line.” These are Cera-
todus, Osteoglossum, Oligorus, Galaxias.

With the exception of Osteoglossum, which occurs in Borneo
and Sumatra, it is just these fish characteristic of Australia
that are absent both east and west of the ‘‘ Wallace line.”
The similarity of the freshwater fishes of Australia and
Celebes rests therefore on the following points :—

1. The Cyprinide, Mastacembelide, Nandoide, belonging
to the Oriental region, are absent.

2. Siluride are represented only by marine immigrants.

3. Numerous marine forms inhabit the fresh water.

‘There are, however, considerable differences :—

1. Ceratodus, Osteoglossum, Oligorus, Galaxias, forms
characteristic of Australia, are absent.

2. On the other hand, Celebes has certain genera belonging
to the Indian region which are wanting in Australia—Anabas,
Ophiocephalus, Symbranchus, Monopterus.

Opposed to these positive differences there remains a simi-
larity in negative characters, which rests on an absence of a
number of Indian forms in Celebes as well as in Australia.
It may be expressed thus :—Australia and Celebes agree in
poverty of freshwater fishes; Australia has some forms
peculiar to itself which do not occur in Celebes ; on the other
hand, Celebes possesses some forms which belong to the
Indian region and do not occur in Australia. Thus the
character of the fish-fauna of Celebes is not Australian, but
Indian, and that in a high degree impoverished.

4. How CAN THE FIsH-FAUNA OF CELEBES BE EXPLAINED ?

From the foregoing statements it may be seen that the
freshwater fauna of Celebes is principally recruited by immi-
gration from the sea, and that only isolated representatives
of true freshwater fishes (Ophiocephalus striatus, Bl., Anabas
scandens, Dald., Haplochilus celebensis, M. Web., Monopterus
javanensis, Lac., Symbranchus bengalensis, M‘Clell.) are

130 Prof. Dr. Max Weber on the

found there. These belong to the Oriental region. Indi-
genous forms do not occur (for Haplochilus celebensis cannot
be considered such), nor Ceratodus and Osteoglossum, which
belong to the tropical region of Australia, the latter being
found also in the great Sunda Islands. From this we receive
the impression that the entire area of fresh water, poor in
freshwater forms, was gradually peopled from the sea,

How is this dearth to be explained, since it is not occasioned
by the present hydrographical condition of Celebes ?

Further, how is the qualitative difference in the fish-fauna
of Celebes to be explained as compared with that of the large
Sunda Islands ?

The answer to the first question would be that the present
hydrographical conditions were not necessarily those of the
past. There are geological proofs that the shape of Celebes
was formerly different from what it is to-day, and we are
indebted to A. Wichmann for this important information.
He shows that South Celebes (which is of special importance
to us, as containing the system of the Tjenrana River specially
in question) consisted in the second half of the Tertiary period
(Neogen) of a number of small separate portions, rising like
islands above the surface of the sea *. ‘In consequence of
the negative elevation, which began at the end of the Neogen
and continues to this day, the island of South Celebes was
uplifted to form a peninsula through junction with the central
mass of the island, while at the same time the surrounding
coral-islands were raised and the sandstone-beds in the east
rose from the sea as eroded surfaces ”’ f.

From a geological point of view it is also probable that
the connexion between North and South Celebes is compara-
tively recent. In a former article ¢ I pointed out the peculiar
differences in the mammalian fauna of North and South
Celebes. In South Celebes Paradoxurus Musschenbroekit,
Schl., Babirussa alfurus, Less., Cynopithecus niger, Desm.,
Sciurus murinus, Mill. & Schleg., Scturus rubriventer, Mill.
& Schleg., Setwrus lewcomus, Miill. & Schleg., Setwrus Pre-
vosti, Desm., which up to the present have only been recorded
from North Celebes, are absent. On the other hand, Ma-
cacus maurus, Cuv., Sciurus notatus, Boddaert, Scturus
Weberi, Jentink, are peculiar to South Celebes.

* A. Wichmann, “ Bericht ub. eine im Jahre 1888-89 ausgefuhrte
Reise nach d. Ind. Archipel,” Th. i. p. 74, in Tijdschr. vy. h. Nederl.
Aardrijkskdg. Genootschap, Jaargang 1890.

+ A. Wichmann, “ Die Binnenseen von Celebes,” Peterm. Mitth. 1893,
Heft. x., xi., and xii, p, 18 des sep. Abdruckes.

t Max Weber, Zoolog. Ergebnisse, Bd. i. 1890-91, pp. 103, 110, 113.

Origin of the Fauna of Celebes. 131

Here we are dealing in part with large mammals. This
difference between North and South is all the more marked
that the number of mammals of Celebes is in any case not
large. Still more marked are the differences between the
land-snails of North and South Celebes. According to the
statements of Ed. v. Martens* only sixty-four species had
been recorded up to 1891, and of these only two are common
to North and South, “namely Trochomorpha planorbis, which
is distributed over the other large islands, and Amphidromus
perversus, which occurs in Borneo; as a third there may
perhaps be reckoned Nanina limbifera, which is, of course,
characteristic of Celebes. . . .” ‘I'wenty-seven species are so
far exclusively peculiar to the northern peninsula and thirty-
one to the south-west. ‘Three species are recorded only from
the south-east peninsula and two species from both southern
peninsulas. ‘This interesting and remarkable difference in
the fauna can be explained only by a former separation of the
two regions. The junction of these regions since the Neogen
period could not have sufficed to counteract the difference
as regards the sluggish land-snails, which are not easily
transported, and this difference is still evident among active
mammals. Even among birds it is not yet eliminated. But
it can hardly hold good for the freshwater fishes, since these
are all of marine origin, and being equally distributed by the
sea can penetrate into the most different river-systems.

If now, both from zoological and geological standpoints,
important reasons exist for the acceptance of the theory that
Celebes consisted formerly of several unconnected islands ; if,
further, geology makes it probable that this was the case
during the second half of the Tertiary period; then it follows
that the present rivers are of recent date, and the small size
of the islands previously prohibited the formation of river-
systems of any considerable size. Thus we see that the
group which we now call Celebes was, in the second half of
the ‘Tertiary period, altogether unfitted for the production of
a fauna of freshwater fishes. This would seem to me to
explain the peculiarities of the fish-fauna of Celebes more
satisfactorily than the theory that Celebes was separated from
the Indian continent before it could have been peopled with
Cyprinide and Siluride, for the simple reason that these
genera had not yet appeared on the earth. This, however,
seems to be Giinther’s view, if I am not mistaken. As we
see, in his statement quoted above at length, he ends with the

* E. von Martens, “Landschnecken des Indischen Archipels,” in
Max Weber, Zoolog. Ergebnisse &c. Bd. ii. 1892, p. 259. An error has
clipped in among the numbers of the species in North and South Celebes,

132 Prof. Dr. Max Weber on the

words ‘‘we must conclude that the whole of this area (the
tropical Pacific region) has remained geologically isolated from
the other regions of this zone since the commencement of the
existence of Teleostei.” As a zoologist one will readily agree
with the view of this distinguished ichthyologist that Australia
was at one time separated from Asia, when the Teleostei first
appeared, so that only one of the oldest types—Osteoglossum
—could occur there and in the Malay Archipelago. But for
Celebes, according to the present state of our knowledge,
such an explanation no longer seems to be correct.

The separation of Celebes from the Asiatic continent can
only have taken place after the immigration of Anoa depressi-
cornis, Babirussa alfurus, Cynopithecus niger, Macacus maurus,
Paradoxurus, Sciurus, Tarsius, and other Indian forms.
Even if the preservation of single species among these (Anoa,
Babirussa, Cynopithecus, Macacus maurus) as solitary specimens
in Celebes is taken as a sign of their great age, they still
cannot be older than Siluride and Cyprinide. If, notwith-
standing, the Indian river-fishes did not take part in the
immigration of the Indian mammals, then it was probably
because the hydrographical condition did not favour such
immigration. It must also be remembered that in those early
Tertiary times Cyprinide and Siluride had not yet such a
wealth of species as has since been developed.

We grant therefore to Celebes a longer connexion with
the Asiatic continent than was allotted to Australia. The
poverty in freshwater fishes in Australia and Celebes has a
different cause. Australia was separated from the Asiatic
continent as far back as the first appearance of Teleostei ;
Celebes, on the other hand, was separated later, when
Cyprinide and Siluride had already appeared, though still
sparingly. In consequence of its splitting up into small
islands it did not, however, offer the hydrographical con-
ditions necessary for the reception and development of a fresh-
water fauna.

If my investigations have become more and more concen-
trated on Celebes, this has arisen because the fauna of Celebes
has already been so often a subject of discussion, and because
Celebes is in many respects a prototype of the other eastern
islands. ‘This does not mean that the conditions are exactly
the same for Flores, Timor, and Amboinaas for Celebes. On
the contrary, the age of these islands is entirely different, as
also their fauna; but for the fish-fauna of the above-named
islands the same conditions obtain, except that Celebes has
always the advantage of a greater area of fresh water.

As regards the fish-fauna, we came to the conclusion that

Origin of the Fauna of Celebes. 133

that of Celebes has an impoverished Indian, not an Australian,
character. This, in the main, is also to be seen throughout
the other animal groups in Celebes, where the Australian
character is very slightly perceptible.

Land-molluses are, of course, very important in questions
of zoogeography. We therefore refer to the very clear state-
ment of KE. v. Martens*, who is probably the greatest
authority on this subject. We will only quote the fol-
lowing :—“ The land-snails of Borneo and those of Celebes
are still sufficiently dissimilar, notwithstanding two species in
common, to allow of the boundary-line being drawn here;
but North Celebes is not easily separated as regards its land-
snails from the Philippines, which are, however, placed by
Wallace on the Indian side. Rather less startling is the
difference between Java on the one side and Flores and Timor
on the other; the special novelty characteristic of the Hast—
the Xesta group of Nanine—is found on the island of Bali,
which Wallace places on the Indian side. Finally, as regards
land-snails there is absolutely no unity between Celebes, the
Moluccas, Flores, Timor, New Guinea, Australia, and the
countless islands of the Pacific ; no single genus or subgenus
of land-snails is common only to these and unrepresented in
other parts of the world; even the Moluccas on the one
hand and Flores and Timor on the other are more dissimilar
than Sumatra, Borneo, and Java... . .”

If we turn to the mammals, which play a prominent part
in such questions, we find that here also the “ Australian
character” of Celebes rests only on the inaccurate knowledge
of actual conditions possessed by authors who have given
expression to the above view. The unhappy “ Wallace
line,” which Wallace himself did not retain for Celebes,
has penetrated as something fascinatingly simple into the
brains of numerous zoologists. ‘Text-books, which dismiss
zoogeography with a few words, do not allow this classical
line of demarcation to escape them. ‘Thus the “ Austra-
lian’ fauna of Celebes continues to exist in spite of various
protests T.

* FE. v. Martens, in Max Weber, Zool. Ergebnisse, Bd. ii. 1892, p. 263,

+ To name only a few writers who have expressed themselves according
to this view, we may indicate KE. Heckel, “ Zur Phylogenie d. austral.
Fauna,” in Semon, Zoolog. Forschungsreisen in Australien u. d. Malay-
ischen Archipel (Jena, 1893), We read there :— At no other point on
the earth are there found two neighbouring faunal regions in such marked
contrast as on the narrow boundary between the Indo-Malay and Austral-
Malay region. If we traverse the narrow strait at the south end of this
boundary-line—the deep Lombok Strait—we step at once out of the
present into Mesozoic times. Although the two neighbouring islands,

134 Prof. Dr. Max Weber on the

If we exclude the Chiroptera, Celebes has the fullowing

land-mammals :—

Cynopithecus niger, Desm.
Macacus maurus, F. Cuv.
Cerocebus cynomolgus, Schreb.
Tarsius fuscomanus, FYsch.
Sciurus murinus, Miill. §& Schl.
rubiventer, Miill. § Schl.

Mus Meyeri, Jent.
Faberi, Jent.
decumanus, Pall.
—— rattus, L.
celebensis, Gray.
Echiotrix leucura, Gray.

leucomus, Miill. & Schl. Paradoxurus Musschenbroekii,
—— Prevosti, Desi. Schl.

notatus, Bodd. Viverra tangalunga, Gray.
Weberi, Jent. Anoa depressicornis, Smuth.
Acanthion javanicum, F. Cuv. Sus celebensis, Miill.

Mus Beccarii, Jent. Babirussa alfurus, Less.

— Musschenbroekii, Jent. Russa russa, Miill.

xanthurus, Gray. Phalanger celebensis, Gray.
Hellwaldii, Jent. ursinus, Zemm.
callithrichus, Jent.

If we include the island of Sanghi, in very close proximity
to Celebes, as well as the Saleyer group, there are the fol-
lowing additions :—

Sciurus Rosenbergi, Jent.
Paradoxurus musanga, Gray.

Phalanger maculatus, S¢.-Hil.

Bali and Lombok, are only a few miles apart, and are subject to the same
climatic conditions, the land-fauna characteristic of each is quite different ;
and still more is this the case when we cross the Macassar Strait from
the Indian Borneo to the Australian Celebes. The decided contrast in
the birds and mammals of each is so great that it must be reckoned as
one of the most striking chorological arguments of Transfurmismus ”
(‘‘schlagendsten chorologischen Argumenten des Transformismus”’),
Heckel (‘ Schopfung der Thier,’ 1893, p. 238) is of the same opinion, and
does his utmost to make the mammal-fauna of Celebes “ and those islands
which together with it form a group” an Australian one, The stag and
the civet-cat were introduced by man into Celebes, perhaps also the pig
(Sus celebensis) ; “it may, of course, have had an opportunity of swimming
across the arms of the sea and of developing in Celebes into a peculiar
species, while the squirrels and the Tarsii have possibly also reached
Celebes on drift-wood . . . the crested baboon, the Indian hog, and the
Anoa, probably ancient forms, which Celebes obtained when it was still
connected with the Indian region, thereby offering opportunity for the
immigration of certain animals which have since died out in India.”
Thus, while some Indian mammals have been imported, and Sus cele-
bensis, six species of squirrels, and Tarsius fuscomanus have either swum or
been drifted across, and the mice (of which there are about twelve species
unconnected with Australian mice) “ are descendants of former Australian
species,” there remain three species of Phalanger, the only animals, as
the author himself confesses, peculiar to the Australian region. One asks
with astonishment why Phalangers did not come to Celebes on drift-
wood, since they are splendid climbers, can cling tightly to trees, and are
very tenacious of life. Still more astonishing is it that an author who
writes about Celebes should know so little of its fauna that he quite
forgets two apes (Cercocebus cynomolgus and Macacus maurus) and two
beasts of prey (Paradoxrurus musanga and P. Musschenbroeku). These
probably wandered over from India too when Celebes “ was united to the
Indian region.”

Origin of the Fauna of Celebes. 135

According to this, the so-called Australian element consists
of only three species, all belonging to the genus Phalanger
(Cuscus), as opposed to thirty-one non-flying land-mammals,
which unquestionably belong to the Oriental region. This
genus Phalanger, of which only five species are known, has
only one representative in Australia. The above conclusion
therefore holds good for the Celebes mammal-fauna, namely,
that it presents principally an impoverished Indian character.
This fact, and the preservation in Celebes of certain ancient
forms, indicate that the connexion with the Indian continent
was much earlier severed than was the case with the large
Sunda Islands.

But also in the southern chain of islands of the Archipelago
the conditions are other than Heckel believed when he
maintained, probably relying on Wallace, that in passing
from Bali to Lombok one steps out of an Indian fauna into
Mesozoic times. One simply enters an impoverished Indian
fauna, which impoverishment has already begun in Bali, as I
have shown above, in dealing with the fishes. Since the
land-molluses have been already mentioned, I may add some
remarks on the mammals. Some years ago Jentink * rightly
pointed out that Wallace’s statement—* Bali and Lombok
differ far more from each other in their birds and quadrupeds
than do England and Japan ”’—is entirely incorrect as regards
mammals. Hardly anything is known of either island,
except that on Lombok occur Cercocebus cynomolgus, Schreb.,
and Tarsius spectrum. In Flores, still further east, I have
proved the occurrence of Cercocebus cynomolgus, Schreb.,
Paradozxurus musanga, Hodgs., Mus decumanus, Pall., Mus
d’Armandvillei, Jent., Mus Wichmanni, Jent., Acanthion
javanicum, Cuv., Sus vitiatus, Miill., Russa russa, Miill.¢

These are exclusively Indian forms. ‘This Indian fauna is
enriched if we note that Tarsius fuscomanus, Fisch., is re-
corded from the island of Savu (between Timor and Sunda),
and a species of wild cat (Lelis megalotis, Mill.) from Timor
and Rotti. Altogether the mammal-fauna of Timor contains
only one species which is not Indian, viz. a single species of
Phalanger, all the rest belonging to the Oriental region.

The original boundary-line, as drawn by Wallace, there-
fore divides island-groups from each other, of which the
western ones (Borneo, Sunda, and Java) have received a rich
Oriental fauna, and have been able to evolve specific forms
of an Indian character. This has arisen partly from their

* Jentink, in Tijdschr. v. h. Kon. Nederl. Aardrijkskundig Genoot-
schap, 1889 (meer uitgebr. artikelen).
+ Zool. Ergebnisse, Bd. iii. 1893, p. 260 et seg.

136 Prof. W. B. Benham on

size, but principally through a prolonged connexion with the
Indian continent.

Of those islands east of the boundary-line, Celebes was
first cut off from the Indian mainland, and from that time
has so remained. Hence it retained isolated ancient forms,
which developed independently. Since it consisted from
an early date of separate small islands, the fauna remained

oor.

: As regards the southern chain of islands (Bali, Lombok,
Sumbawa, Flores, Timor, &c.), the impoverishment of the
Indian fauna begins even in Bali. A sharp boundary
between Bali and Lombok, which would have to rest on the
evidence of various groups of animals, does not exist. Mar-
supials appear first in ‘Timor, represented by one species ot
Phalanger. The above-mentioned southern chain of islands
is therefore a zoogeographical representative of an earlier
Java. To compare this chain with Celebes alone is inad-
missible on account of the difference in their ages.

East of Celebes and Flores we come for the first time into
a distinct transition region, where the Indian forms gradually
retire and the Australian increase in number the further east-
wards we go.

XVIIL—A Re-examination of Hutton’s Types of New Zealand
Earthworms. By W. BLAXLAND BenHAM, D.Sc., M.A.,
Professor of Biology, University of Otago, Dunedin, New
Zealand.

Caprain Hurron’s account of New Zealand earthworms
was written some twenty years ago*, when the study of
earthworms was only just engaging the attention of Perrier,
and at a time when even the specific characters of the common
British earthworms were absolutely neglected by English
zoologists, in spite of the careful accounts by Duges, at a
time when there was practically no literature dealing with
exotic genera except the papers which are buried in
periodicals which were to be found only in the larger
libraries ; it is not surprising, therefore, that the descriptions
should be vague, imperfect, and almost useless. Those of us
who have made a study of earthworms have long recognized
that Hutton’s genera, in which he places the species, are

* “On the New Zealand Earthwornis in the Otago Museum,” Trans.
New Zealand Institute, vol. ix, 1876, p. 350,

New Zealand Earthworms. 137

incorrect ; and since Beddard’s series of papers upon the New
Zealand worms it has become a certainty that most of Hutton’s
species belong in all probability to Acanthodrilid genera.

Consequently, soon after my arrival in Dunedin, I took the
opportunity of examining the “‘ types,” which I discovered in
a storeroom in the Otago Museum.

Hutton described six species, of which he placed four in
the genus Lumbricus and two in Megascoler. In a subse-
quent paper * he suggested that LZ. uliginosus belongs to
Acanthodrilus, and some of the species of the former genus
were probably members of the genus “Digaster,” though upon
what ground it is difficult to say. As will be seen from the
following account, Hutton has sometimes confused two or
more distinct worms under one name. [I append a list of
his species, so far as it is possible to identify them, and then
give some details as to the individuals :—

(1) Acanthodrtlus uliginosus, Hutton.
Syn. Lumbricus uliginosus, Hutton.
(2) Neodrilus monocystis, Beddard.
Syn. Lumbricus campestris, Hutton, partim.
(3) Lumbricus rubellus, Hoffmeister.
Syn. Lumbricus campestris, Hutton, partim.
(4) Allolobophora caliginosa, Savigny.
Syn. Lumbricus levis, Hutton, partin.
(5) Octochetus (?) levis, Hutton.
Syn. Lumbricus levis, Hutton, partim.
(6) Allolobophora fwtida, Savigny.
Syn. Lumbricus annulatus, Hutton.
(7) Plagiocheta sylvestris, Hutton.
Syn. Megascolex sylvestris, Hutton.

(8) Plagiocheta lineata, Hutton.

Syn. Megascolex lineatus, Hutton,

(1) Of the six ‘‘ types” I have been able to examine in
detail only tive; but 1 cannot discover the original of “ Lumb.

* “New Zealand Journal of Science,’ i, 1883, p. 585, note.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iii. 10

138 Prof. W. B. Benham on

uliginosus.” Nevertheless itis evident that it is an Acantho-
drilus, but impossible to say whether it belongs to any species
more recently and more carefully described; it seems best in
such a case to leave the matter alone, and to regard it as a
distinct species.

(2) “ZL. campestris.”’—There are three bottles so labelled,
which I will indicate by the letters a, 4, e.

(a) Contains two individuals collected in Dunedin; they are
well-preserved mature worms, which are at once recognizable
as belonging to that curious Acanthodrilid which Beddard *
termed Neodrilus, a genus which he now refuses to recognize
as distinct from Acanthodrilus+. It seems to me that the
characters of N. monocystis are every bit as distinctive and
important as those upon which he founds the genus Octo-
chetus. At any rate, Hutton’s worm is characterized by the
single spermiducal gland, the single spermatheca, and other
features, a detailed account of which was published by me in
1892+. The worm is common around Dunedin, and, as a
matter of fact, the very first earthworm I picked up in the
bush round the town was N. monocystis, from which Hutton’s
type does not differ.

As will be seen below, it is impossible to retain Hutton’s
specific name, since he has confused under it two distinct
worms.

(b) Labelled ‘* Water of Leith,” contained a single indi-
vidual and a portion of a worm, which are also Neodrilus.

(c) Labelled ‘ Wellington,” contains three individuals, all
of which agree one with another in external characters, viz.
the prostomium reaches to the first intersegmental groove,
and is traversed by an indistinct transverse furrow; the
clitellum covers the segments 27 to 32, while the twenty-sixth
exhibits some glandular modifications; the tubercula puber-
tates are on the segments 28 to 31; the first dorsal pore is
between the segments 6/7. With the exception of the last
feature, and in the fact that the worms are slightly smaller
than usual (viz. 1} to 2 inches), these specimens agree with
the descriptions of Lumbricus rubellus.

A reference to Hutton’s description shows that he had both
Neodrilus and Lumbricus before him, as he says “ Colour

* Beddard, “ Observations on the Structural Characters of certain new
or little-known Karthworms,” Proc. Roy. Soc. Edinb. 1887, vol. xiv.
p. 157.

+ ‘Monograph of the Order Oligocheta,’ 1895,

{ Benham, ‘‘ Notes on Two Acanthodriloid Earthworms from New
Zealand,” Quart. Journ, Micr. Sci. vol. xxiii. p. 289.

New Zealand Earthworms. 139

reddish [as it is in the latter] or olivaceous green” [as in the
former worm]. The position of the clitellum is said to be
“irregular, commencing on any segment from 10 to 20,”
which is inaccurate whichever worm he referred to, though
it is not so far out if Neodrilus was before him. Further,
“the male genital pores [by which he means the sperma-
thecal pores] are on the ninth segment ”’ is true for Neodrilus*,
for in this worm these pores are fairly conspicuous, which is
not the case in Lumbricus. The statement “ vulvee [7. e. the
male pores and papille] on the two last segments of the
clitellum ”’ evidently reters to Neodrilus. His accounts of
the cheete and prostomium apply equally to either worm.

His statement that ‘ the olivaceous specimens occur in the
bush”’ is perfectly correct, whereas the red (Z. rubellus) is
common in the gardens round the towns.

(3) “ Lumbricus levis.””—Of this there were two bottles :—

(a) ‘ Hampden,” contains one individual measuring 1 inch
in length, with spaced nearly equidistant chete on each
side:—If a be the most ventral cheta, a—b=c—d; while
b—c is slightly greater than a—b ; and a—a=d—d=2 a—b,

The clitellum covers segments 14 to 19. The worm is not
fully mature, and I am unable to recognize the male pores.
Internally—for I dared to open the type—I note that the
dorsal vessel is double throughout, as in some species of
Octochetus ; there is a large gizzard in the sixth segment, and
two pairs of spermathece in segments 8 and 9, each with a
single small rounded diverticulum lying in the same segment.

‘These are all the facts that I was able to be sure about,
but they are sufficient to refer the worm with the greatest
probability to the genus Qciochetus. [tis smaller than any
of Beddard’s species.

(2) Labelled “ Dunedin,” contains also a single specimen
measuring 4 inches, and is Allolobophora caliginosa, one of
the commonest introduced species about the town.

Hutton’s account of Lumbricus levis” seems to have had
reference to this individual, for he gives the length as “3 to
4 inches ; pale flesh-colour..... Sete feeble, in four rows
behind the clitellum, absent before the clitellum.”” This last
statement I cannot understand; moreover he represents them,
correctly, on the anterior segments ; yet he points out that
in this particular the worm differs from Z. communis, another

name for L, caliginosa.

* In the method of enumeration now adopted we must subtract one
from Hutton’s numbers,
10*

140 On New Zealand Earthworms.

But his account of the clitellum as “ commencing between
the fifteenth and twenty-fifth segment” is evidently due to a
comparison between the two worms, as are also the following
sentences :—‘‘ Male genital openings on the tenth to the
fifteenth segments” (¢. e. spermathece). “ Vulve on the
two last segments of the clitellum” may refer either to the
male papille of Octochetus or to the tubercula of Allolobo-
phora.

(4) “ Lumbricus annulatus.”—A bottle labelled thus con-
tains four worms collected in Dunedin. Only one is mature
and possesses a clitellum, but the three others, which are but
imperfectly preserved, agree in regard to size and position of
the dorsal pore. The worms are, indeed, nothing other than
Allolobophora fetida, as Hutton himself suspected. I must
correct his statement that the clitellum is ‘ not tuberculated
inferiorly,” for the tubercles exist as a curved indistinct ridge
on the segments usual in the species, viz. 28, 29, 30, and
extend on to 31.

(5) Megascolex sylvestris.”—A single bottle of worms
collected in Dunedin, in rotten wood in the bush, contains
two entire individuals and two portions; all are very poorly
preserved, but in sufficiently good condition to show that, as
Beddard has surmised (‘ Monograph,’ p. 522), the worm
belongs to my genus Plagiocheta.

It differs from P. punctata in the following points—and
possibly in others—though, of course, I was unable to make
a thorough examination of the specimens :—(1) It is cylin-
drical, not depressed; this may be due to its soft condition.
(2) The dorsal and ventral gaps in the chetal rings are
equal, and measure twice the normal gap between the indi-
vidual couples; whereas in P. punctata the dorsal gap is
about four times the normal. (3) The prostomium, as
Hutton figures, does not cut right through the first segment.
(4) There are apparently only three pairs of sperm-sacs, that
in the ninth segment not being visible. (5) The chete
measure 0°19 millim., the ventralmost couple, in my sections,
reaching 0°22 millim., while the smallest is 0°165 millim. (in
P. punctata they measure 0°36 millim.).

(6) “ Megascolex lineatus.””—Collected under dead leaves
at Queenstown. ‘The bottle contains one entire individual
and three broken ones ; all are so poorly preserved that they
scarcely withstood handling. The length of the entire
specimen is only 14 inch. MHutton’s drawing of the pro-

Mr. W. F. Kirby on the Family Hetrodide. 141

stomium is incorrect in representing it as much too narrow ;
it is more like that of the preceding species, but cuts through
the first segment. The chete are not in a continuous circle,
but are quite evidently arranged in couples as in Plagiocheta.
The specimen must have been more deeply pigmented than
P. sylvestris, for whilst that is now absolutely colourless, this
is faint brown.

The following points seem to differentiate it from P. punc-
tata:—(1) The dorsal gap is three times and the ventral gap
twice the length of a normal gap. (2) The spermiducal
glands open on distinct papilla, and there is no such marked
ridge round the ventral “ area” in this region as occurs in
P. punctata (this may possibly be due to imperfect preserva-
tion). (3) The spermatheca has two peculiar diverticula in
place of a single cylindrical one; of these, one is an oval
pouch, the other is a three-lobed pouch with a narrow neck ;
they both open close together into the duct of the main sac.
(4) The chetee measure 0°22 millim., and are stouter and
more strongly curved internally than in P. sylvestris.

Both these species agree with P. punctata in having 13
couples of cheetee on each side, which are inserted between
distinct and separated bundles of longitudinal muscles, of
which there are 12 on each side; these are visible in trans-
verse sections even between the chetal rings. The most
dorsal and most ventral couples of cheete are separated from
their fellows respectively by a broader bundle, which appears
to vary in size in the three species.

The nephridiopores alternate in position from segment to
segment more or less regularly, and, as in P. punctata, the
ventral pore lies between the third and fourth bundle, the
dorsal pore between the ninth and tenth bundle, counting
from below, as I have figured in pl. xv. fig. 17 (loc. cit.}.

Dunedin,
Aug. 11, 1898.

XVIII.—Notes on the Family Hetrodide, with a List of the
described Species. By W. ¥F. Kirsy, F.L5., F.E.S., &e.

{Concluded from p. 102.}

Notes on various Genera and Species of the Family Hetrodide.

Genus Herropes, Fisch.

Walker has described four species, allied to H. pupus, Linn.,
viz. HH. marginatus, productus, macrurus, and abbreviatus.

142 Mr. W. F. Kirby on the Family Hetrodide.

How far they are truly distinct cannot well be decided without
a long series of H/. pupus from various localities, showing its
extent of variation. //. marginatus is a male in which the
pronotum is greatly elevated and slightly indented on the
hind border, and the smooth portion behind and below the
hinder lateral spines is much broader than in any other
specimen. ‘The other three species (?) are females, and differ
considerably in the comparative length of the ovipositor, and
HH. abbreviatus has only three rows of spines on the abdomen.
I do not know Fieber’s H. variolosus, which is too briefly
described.

Genus ACANTHOPLUS, Stal.

The type of this genus is J/etrodes longipes, Charp.
H. pallidus and discoidalis, Walk., form a second section in
the genus, characterized by having all the femora unarmed
both above and below. JH. pallidus differs from the other
two species in having the third joint of the antenne much
longer then the second, and from A. lonyipes in having the
disk of the pronotum between the spines much more coarsely
punctured than the back and sides. A. discotdalis is from
Caffraria.

Acanthoplus desertorum, sp. n.

Long. corp. 29 millim.; pron. 10; fem. post. 18; tib.
post. 21.

Male.—Brownish yellow, paler on the face and under
surface of the legs.

Eyes prominent, reddish. Antenne reddish, except at
the base; vertex with shallow, irregular, subconfluent punc-
tures, inter-antennal tubercle almost obsolete ; a transverse
depression, slightly edged with black at the sides, above
the clypeus; mandibles tipped with black ; pronotum
thickly and closely punctured, much more coarsely in
front than on the raised portion, bordered by a yellow carina,
which is indented in the middle in front, and armed
with 3 long spines on each side, converging behind, and
behind these is a deep sulcus before the raised part of the
pronotum. On the sides the sulcus divides, passing before
and behind the first of two more long lateral spines on each
side, the second of which is placed above the first in front of
the raised hind part of the pronotum, on the back of which
are two more central spines, rather near together. Abdomen
with the segments dotted with yellow towards the sutures ;
the sides yellowish, above which is an obsolete dusky band

Mr. W. F. Kirby on the Family Hetrodide. 143

on each side. On the median line is a short sharp spine
pointing backwards at the extremity of each of the first five
segments; on the sixth this is replaced by a carina. Front
coxe strongly spined; all the femora unarmed ; all the tibie
suleated on the sides and (except the front tibia) more
strongly above; front tibiae unarmed above, but with 6 or 8
spines on each side below, the base being unarmed ; middle
tibie with 1 spine on the outer and 3 on the inner carina
above, and with 6 on each side below ; base unarmed; hind
tibie with 6 to 10 spines on each side above, those in the
outer row ceasing before the tip, and with from 6 to 8 on
each side below.

Hab. Kalahari Desert (Cunningham).

Allied to A. discotidalis, Walk.; but in discozdalis the
middle tibiee are armed above with only one or two spines on
the outer edge. A. Spetser?, Brancs., has two spines on the
middle tibiz above, but differs from both A. discoidalis and
A. desertorum in having no more than three in the outer row
in the hind tibie.

Acanthoplus serratus, sp. u.

Long. corp. (cum app.) 31 millim.; pron. 10; fem.
post. 17; tib. post. 22.

Female.—Dark brown above, inclining to reddish on the
pronotum, especially behind; vertex and pronotum rugose-
punctate, most strongly on the front of the pronotum ; inter-
antennal tubercle very short, antenne reddish beneath; face
yellowish, reddish above ; spines of pronotum nearly as in
the last species; abdomen with the first five segments spined
in the middle; under surface smooth, yellowish; anal ap-
pendages reddish; valves of the ovipositor strongly serrated
above ; legs varied with testaceous at the joints; front coxe
spined ; femora unarmed; front tibiae unarmed above and
with two rows of about seven spines beneath, not extending
to the base; middle tibize with 3 to 4 small spines above on
the outer carina only, and with 6 on each side below, the basal
third unarmed; hind tibiz) with two rows of 5d to 8 spines
above and of 6 to 9 below.

Hab. King William’s Town (Spencer).

A longer and narrower species than the last.

Acanthoplus germanus, sp. n.
Female.—Very similar to the last species in size and
general appearance. ‘The pronotum is brown, coarsely
rugose-punctate in front, and more finely behind, ‘The

144 Mr. W. F. Kirby on the Family Hetrodide.

abdomen is bronzed, carinated, with a strong median tooth
on the second segment only, but with lateral teeth also on the
second and third segments. The valves of the ovipositor are
armed with fewer and larger teeth than in the last species.
The face is yellow, the mandibles tipped with black, and
the legs are mostly testaceous, especially beneath. The
femora are unarmed, the front coxe are spined; the front
tibia are unarmed above and armed with two rows of 7 or 8
spines below, not extending to the base; the middle tibiz are
armed with 2 spines on the outer carina above and with 7
on each side below ; and the hind tibiz are armed with double
rows of about 8 spines each both above and below.

Hab. King William’s Town (Spencer).

Genus Enyatiopsis, Karsch.

This genus includes several closely-allied forms from East
Africa and Angola. . Peterstt, Schaum, and L. Durandi,
Luc., may perhaps be distinguished by the shape of the
lateral prominence at the front angles of the pronotum, which
is long and broadly bifid in EH. Petersdi, but shorter, broad
and convex, with a short tooth on each side in E£. Durand:.
But it is doubtful how far this character will remain constant
in a large series of specimens. I think 2. Bloyeti, Lucas, is
the same as £. Petersii, but am more doubtful about
E. obuncus, Bol.

Genus ANEPISCEPTUS, Fieb.

The insect which J identify with Hetrodes Serviller, Reiche
and Fairmaire, iscommon in Somaliland, and greatly resembles
Eugaster Revoilit, Lucas, except in its smaller size. . Ser-
villei, Lucas, differs entirely in the arrangement of its spines,
and I propose to rename it Anepisceptus hippolytt.

Eugaster suakimensis, Kirb., should be referred to Anepi-
sceptus.

Genus EHuUGASTER, Serville.

I cannot identify the species which Dr. Karsch briefly
describes as Hugaster spinulosus in Berl. ent. Zeitschr. xxxil.
p. 463 (1888), especially as no locality is given.

Genus ACANTHOPROCTUS, Karsch.

Hetrodes fortis, Walk., is evidently synonymous with
H. cervinus, De Haan. Of ZH. militaris, White, I have only
two damaged specimens before me, but think it will prove to

Mr. W. F. Kirby on the Family Hetrodide. 145

be distinct when a longer series of South-African Hetrodidex
is received,

Acanthoproctus Howarthe, sp. n.

Long. corp., ¢ 22 millim., @ 38 millim. (app. anal.
6 millim.).

Female.—Head testaceous ; labrum, space round the frontal
horn, and antenne (except the two basal joints) chestnut-
brown. Head above the antenne rugose, below smooth and
shining. Antenne about 53-jointed, the scape enlarged,
about as long as broad; second joint enlarged but less so,
the rest mostly longer than broad, but differing considerably,
and apparently irregularly, in their comparative lengths.
Horn stout, pointed, nearly straight, about three times as long
as the scape. Pronotum reddish brown above, testaceous on
the sides, and with all the lateral spines testaceous; strongly
rugose, with two transverse depressions behind the frontal
ridge, and another at about three quarters of its length; a
reddish longitudinal depressed line behind the frontal ridge,
with three broad pyramidal elevations rather than spines,
obtusely rounded off at the summit, on each side. Frontal
ridge with two large but obtuse teeth in the middle, and with
a trifid lateral horn, the outermost point the longest, slightly
recurved, the second short, nearly straight, and the innermost
long, projecting forwards, about as far from the second as
from the central teeth, and as they stand apart. From the
front of the central mass of the pronotum projects a large
obtuse spine on each side, and on the hinder portion of the
pronotum is a series of seven large spines at equal distances,
the front pair being the largest, and the rest diminishing.
Below the front pair is another tooth of equal length, with a
short one at its base; there is also a conspicuous spine on
the front coxe, and a smaller one, with indications of others, on
the lower lateral border of the pronotum before the front cox.
Legs testaceous, moderately long; femora unarmed, with
slight transverse ridges ; all the tibie below with three pairs
of small spines towards the extremity (including the terminal
spines) ; hind tibiz with an additional pair about the middle
of their length ; pulvilli black. Abdomen black, varied with
reddish above towards the base, and with three dorsal rows ot
strong spines, tipped with red and pointing slightly backwards
from the second to the sixth segment; on the seventh the
lateral ones are replaced by warts, as is the central one on the
eighth segment; on the second segment is an additional
small spine, below each of the lateral ones; on segments

146 Mr. W. F. Kirby on the Family Hetrodide.

2 to 6 there are three small warts between the middle and
lateral spines and a single one below each of the lateral
spines, and the space around and between the spine and
warts and the centre of the under surface of the abdomen is
finely and transversely striated. Anal appendages testaceous,
tipped with reddish ; upper ones upcurved at the extremity,
and with a large blunt subserrated pyramidal elevation nearer
the base; lower appendages straight, moderately slender,
pointed, about as long as the upper ones.

Male.—Similar but smaller ; reddish, varied with black ;
pronotum irregularly banded and marked with black in the
middle, behind the lateral projections, and on the sides; on
the abdomen there are irregular double black bands in the
middle and on each side, and there is one row of conspicuous
warts between the central and lateral spines, the others being
more slightly indicated in the female. Femora black above,
with longitudinal rows of red spots.

Collected by Miss Anna Howarth in E. Karoo, Cape
Colony, in September 1896. ‘There is another specimen in
Mr. W. L. Distant’s collection from near Grahamstown.

In A. cervinus, Burm., and A. militaris, White, the spines
round the hinder part of the pronotum are much smaller, more
numerous, and closer together.

Genus HEMIHETRODES, Pictet.

Pictet describes his HH. Peringueyi as having the abdomen
black above, or with three black bands. The latter form will
sink as a synonym of //. vittatus, Walk., but the name
JT. Peringueyt may be retained for the form with a black
abdomen, whether it ultimately proves to be a species or a
variety. Pictet’s suggestion that Hetrodes Bachmannt, Karsch,
may be a Hemthetrodes is inadmissible, for Karsch cannot
have failed to notice whether the tibial cavities were open or
rimate; and they are evidently intended to be represented as
open in his figure of H. Bachmanni.

Genus APHRACTIA, nov.
|| Enyalius, Stal, Gifv. Vet.-Akad. Forh. xxxiii. (3) p. 58 (1876).
Eugaster, div. a, Stal, Rec, Orth. ii. p. 22 (1874).

This genus, which has been fully characterized by Stal,
may be distinguished at once from Acanthoproctus and Hemi-
hetrodes by its spineless abdomen. ‘The type is LHetrodes
diadematus, Stal, of which I have no doubt that //. crassipes,
Walk., and Acanthoproctus ibex, Pict., are synonyms.

On Hippolyte fascigera and H. gracilis. 147

XIX.—Hippolyte fascigera, Gosse, and H. gracilis (Heller).
By ALFRED O. WALKER.

In September last I received from Mr. F. W. Gamble, who
is working at the physiological causes of the variability in
colour of Hippolyte varians, Leach, a specimen which he
rightly considered to be H. fasctgera, Gosse. The colour of
the specimen, when received by me in formaline, was pale
green, and, with the exception of the tufts of plumose sete on
the body, does not differ from //. vartans.

H. fascigera was described by P. H. Gosse in the Ann. &
Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, vol. xii. (1853) p. 153. He says the
tufts are “‘ very deciduous,” and, ‘‘ when wanting, the animal
may easily be mistaken for H. varians,” &c. Further, he
says that “it may be distinguished at once, while alive, by
its colour, which, though varying, does not assume any of the
phases of H. varians. It is usually pellucid white, clouded
with opake drab, and generally blotched with dark reddish
purple.” Again, he states that the relative position of the
teeth on the lower margin of the rostrum and “ the relation
of the filaments of the internal antenne to each other in
length and thickness also afford a good distinction.”

In 1882 Prof. G. O. Sars (‘ Oversigt af Norges Crustaceer,’
p- 46 [separate copy]) says that he is still doubtful of the
specific distinctness of H. (Virbius) fascigera from H. varians,
but he agrees with Gosse’s description of its colour.

Prof. W. A. Herdman, F.R.S., in an article on the pro-
tective colouring of H. varians,-in Trans. Liverpool Biol.
Soc. vol. vii. (1893) p. 77, says that “‘ specimens found on a
sandy bottom or on small gravel are mottled black, grey, and
white.”

My own experience agrees with the last writer’s, but I am
not prepared to say that these forms had not the tufts of
plumose sete, as when I took them my attention had not been
directed to H. fascigera. In looking through a number of
fH. varians in spirit from rock-pools on this coast, I had no
difficulty in finding four or five tufted specimens, but their
colour had gone. In other respects there is no difference
between them and the ordinary form.

It is well known that HH. varians is not only variable in
colour, but almost, if not quite, as variable in the dentition of
the lower edge of the rostrum. Kinahan (Nat. Hist. Review,
vol. iv. (1857) p. 518) says “a volume might be written on
the forms of the beak of this species”’; he figures six varieties

148 Mr. A. O. Walker on

on pl. x. (ix. in error). It is, however, to be noted that all
these and all the specimens I have ever seen of H. varians,
as well as Gosse’s species, have only one tooth at the base of
the rostrum, on the upper margin, and that the lower margin
in adults is more or less strongly convex.

Gosse’s distinctive characters therefore, besides the fascicles
or tufts, consist practically only of the colour, the position of
the teeth on the lower margin of the rostrum (both of which
are notoriously variable), and the relative thickness of the
antennular filaments, which is purely a matter of age and sex.

Mr. Gamble informs me that a fascigerous specimen shed
the fascicles during life, so that they do not appear to be an
integral part of the integument. And if it can be shown that
similar tufts of sete occur on at least one other species of
Hippolyte, as I propose to do, their specific value disappears.

In the ‘Journal of Marine Zoology,’ vol. ii. p. 101, the
editor, Mr. Jas. Hornell, has an interesting article on “ The
Protective Colouring of the A%sop Prawns,” in which he
mentions that HH. varians, when moved to water containing
weeds of a different colour from its original habitat, changes
its colour to that of the weeds in a single night. He goes on
to say that H. fascigera has much less power of colour
adaptability, that it “is seldom found in any number except
among tufts of coarse Corallina, with which it agrees abso-
lutely in colour,” and that its “tufts of brush-like hairs ”
harmonize with the minute tubicolous Annelids and Bryozoa
of the rock-pools it inhabits, so that ‘‘ the mimetic adaptation
is greatly accentuated.” But he adds in a footnote that it
differs from H. varians in that ‘ the only spines on the upper
edge of the rostrum are three placed at the posterior end and
really upon the carapace, while a single sharp tooth is set
close to the tip on the straight under edge.” Had Mr. Hornell
seen Gosse’s description of H. fascigera he would have recog-
nized that the rostrum there described differed entirely from
his. At my request Mr. Hornell kindly sent me a specimen
which is certainly well furnished with the tufts of sete, and
as certainly is not H. fascigera, Gosse ; itis, in fact, H. gracilis
(Heller), a species not hitherto, so far as I know, recorded
west of the Mediterranean.

According to Czerniavsky (‘Crustacea Decapoda Pontica
littoralia,’ 1884, p. 15, pl. i.) the rostrum of this species is
very variable. He figures ten or eleven forms in which the
number of teeth on the upper edge at the base of the rostrum
ranges from two to five, and those on the almost or quite
straight (sometimes slightly concave) lower edge from one to

Hippolyte fascigera and H. gracilis. 149

four. Mr. Hornell’s specimen agrees with Czerniavsky’s
figure M.

In an earlier work by the same author (‘ Materialia ad
Zoogr. Pont. comp.’ 1868) he figures still more varieties, for
drawings for which I am indebted to Dr. A. M. Norman,
F.R.S., who called my attention to the fact that in two of
them are shown tufts of plumose sete.

Fig. 1.
= x
Fig. 2.
oe
=

Fig. 1.—Hippolyte varians, Leach. (After Kinahan, Nat. Hist. Review,
vol. iv. 1857, pl. x.

Fig. 2.—Hippolyte gracilis (Heller). (After Czerniavsky, Crust. Decap.
Pontica littoralia, pl. i.)

As it appears therefore (1) that the fascicles or tufts of
sete are not confined to H. fascigera, and (2) that the other
distinctive characters relied on by Gosse are of no value, we
may safely conclude that this species should be expunged
from our lists.

There remains the interesting question as to the mode by
which the tufts are acquired for protective purposes. It is to

150 On Hippolyte fascigera and TH. gracilis.

be hoped that Mr. Gamble’s researches may throw some light
upon this point.

Nant y Glyn, Colwyn Bay,
Noy. 28, 1898.

The Owens College, Manchester,
Noy. 29, 1898.

Dear Mr. WALKER,—
I have read the MS. which you have kindly permitted

me to see. At Piel the regular habitat of fascigera is among
masses of the polyzoon Bowerbankia growing on the stems of
Flalidrys siliquosa. Adults taken from this habitat agree in
colour fairly closely with Gosse’s description, but in captivity
among green weed change in colour to a greenish or greenish-
brown tinge. Should they then, as they do sometimes, shed
their fascicles, there remains no feature by which they can be
distinguished from typical varians.

The young fascigera may inhabit the same Bowerbankia,
and are then freckled with brown and reddish spots on a trans-
parent ground. But, in addition to this variety, specimens
taken from fine plumose red weeds are lined and barred with
red. Others, again, have a densely pigmented sheath of
brown or black colour to the alimentary canal and two broad
transverse bars of the same colour. Both this and the red-
lined variety are also found in specimens of IT. varians (that
is, in specimens with no trace of plumose hairs) in the same

haul.
It would therefore appear that the colour of the young is not

distinctive.

As to the plumose hairs themselves, they are apparently
normal structures, though not always symmetrically placed in
the segments in which they occur; and if Gosse was right, as
I believe he was, in considering them deciduous structures, I
think we ought to have more evidence before considering
them to be aids in protective mimicry,

I ought to add that the subject did not occupy my attention
when working at Piel as fully as it does now, and therefore
the observations I made should be considered as preliminary
to a fuller treatment of the subject.

Iam,
Yours truly,
F. W. GAMBLE.

On Siriella armata and S. frontalis. 158

XX.—On Siriella armata (IZ-Edw.) and the reputed Occur-
rence of S. frontalis (M.-Edw.) in British Seas. By
E. W. L. Hour and W. I. Beaumont.

Striella armata (M.-Edw.).

Siriella (Cynthilia) frontalis, Norman, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1892,
x. pp. 152, 153; W. Garstang, Journ. Mar. Biol. Assoc, iii. p. 221.

Mysis producta, Gosse, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, vol. xii. p. 156.

In examining a considerable collection of Strdel/a taken at
various parts of the coast from Start Bay to Falmouth, we
have been unable to find a single male that can be referred to
S. frontalis, although that species has been recorded from
Plymouth by Norman and by Garstang, in each case from a
single specimen. 8. frontalis (Pseudosiriella frontalis, Claus,
Arbeit. Zool. Inst. Wien, v. ili. p. 6) differs from all its con-
geners in having the male organ of the pleopods simple
and leaf-like, instead of bilobate and convoluted. In other
characters S. frontalis and S. armata are extremely alike, so
that there is difficulty in distinguishing females when no
males are available, as was at first our case, from existing
descriptions. In nearly all our gatherings, however, both sexes
are present. All males have the appendages of the pleopods
bilobate and convoluted, but in males and females alike the
characters of the telson show considerable variation and
appear to us to be of doubtful value in diagnosis. The
number of terminal spinules between the large postero-lateral
pair of spines of the telson ranges from three to five, while
the spinules in the intervals between the spines on the lateral
borders of the same organ approach in many cases the
formula of S. frontalis (Norman, (oc. cit.) rather than that of
S. armata (Norman, 4th Ann. Report Fishery Board for
Scotl. p. 165). Sars has given figures * of the antennal
scales in the two species, showing a fairly obvious difference
in shape; in our specimens that appendage, while agreeing
best with S. armata, shows an undoubted approach to the
condition of S. frontalis in some cases. ‘The pereiopods are
described as more slender in S. armata than in S. frontalis.
Such a character is difficult to seize without comparison of
undoubted examples of the two species; but all our specimens
appear referable in this particular to the first-named.

We were thus irresistibly compelled to the belief that of

* G. O. Sars, ‘Middelhavets Mysider,’ pl. xxxiv. fig. 2 & pl. xxxy.
fig. 4.

152 Mr. O. Thomas on new small

the two species only S. armata was represented in our
collection, but judged it prudent to appeal for assistance to
the great experience of Dr. Norman, who requests us to state
that his Plymouth specimen, which by some unaccountable
error was recorded as S. frontalis, proves on re-examination
to be a female of S. armata. We have examined Mr. Gar-
stang’s specimen: it is a female of S. armata, showing
characters which are fully covered by the range of variation
in the examples of this species in our own collection. We
further learn from Dr. Norman that a tube of Strdel/a received
by him from this Laboratory as S. frontalis contains only
S. armata. SS. frontalis must therefore be erased for the
present from the British list, since Dr. Norman now thinks
that Gosse’s Mysis producta is in all probability S. armata.

We are requested by Dr. Norman to state that his descrip-
tion of S. frontalis was drawn up from that of Sars compared
with Adriatic specimens received from Dr. Claus. Its
validity is therefore in no way impaired by the accidental
insertion of an erroneous record of locality.

Laboratory of the
Marine Biological Association,
Plymouth.

XX1I.—On new small Mammals from South America.
By OLprieLp THOMAS.

Oryzomys beops, sp. n.

Very similar externally to O. laniger and O. niveipes, but
really allied only to the latter. Fur long, soft and woolly.
General colour dull greyish brown, darker along the middle
line of the back. Under surface silvery greyish, the hairs
dull slate for their basal two thirds; no trace of the buffy or
fulvous tone found in the other two species. Back of ears
scarcely darker than general colour. Hands whitish above ;
feet pale brown. ‘Tail rather longer than head and body,
closely scaly, nearly naked, greyish brown, rather paler
below.

Skull of the general type of that of O. nivetpes, but with
its anterior portion, from the front of the brain-case forwards,
markedly shortened and more delicate; fronto-nasal profile
quite flat, not convex; nasals short and narrow; interorbital
region narrow, concave mesially, its edges faintly marked,
neither rounded nor beaded; anterior zygoma-root narrow,

Mammals from South America. 153

without projecting plate, very much as in 0. dryas. Palatal
foramina narrow, equally contracted posteriorly and anteriorly.
pao eel of the type (an adult female, measured in
skin) :—

Head and body 118 millim.; tail 148; hind foot s. u.
(wet) 23; ear (wet) 16.

Skull: back of interparietal to tip of nasals 27; greatest
breadth 14:6; nasals 8°8x3j; interorbital breadth 3°5;
palatal foramina 5°1 x 1:9 ; upper molar series 4°7.

Hab. Pita R., above the Chillo Valley, Ecuador. Alt.
350) metres.

Type B.M. no. 98. 8.1.7. Collected May 5, 1898, and
presented by Consul L. Séderstréin.

This species is readily distinguished from O. nivetpes, its
only near ally, as also from the externally similar O. laniger,
by its abnormally diminished muzzle, which gives its skull a
quite different appearance to that of any kaown species.

Loncheres punctatus, sp. n.

Size medium. Fur spinous, the spines on the middle of
the back about 19 millim. long and 1°3 millim. broad.
General colour pale ferruginous, punctulated with white, the
head and limbs greyer. ‘The rufous of the back is due to the
hairs, which are reddish terminally, with greyer bases. Spines
of back greyish white basally, their tips either all black or
black broadly tipped with white, the white-tipped spines
being most numerous posteriorly, and prominently contrasting
with the general colour. Head, both above and laterally,
coarsely mixed black and white. Ears with a few fine
blackish hairs on their edges and a small tuft of whitish hairs
on the antitragus; an indistinct patch behind their posterior
bases white. Sides coarsely mixed whitish grey. Under
surface throughout white, with a slight tinge of buffy, the
line of demarcation well marked. Inner side of limbs white,
outer grizzled grey; metacarpals grey; metatarsals grey ex-
ternally, white internally ; digits whitish. Tail of medium
length, rather thinly haired, the scales showing through;
uniformly brown, scarcely or not lighter below.

Skull with the nasals just about equalling the premaxillary
processes behind; frontal region flattened, the supraorbital
ridges very broadly expanded ; pterygoid processes narrow,
not spatulate.

Dimensions of the type (an adult male, measured by the
collector in the flesh) :—

Head and body 236 millim.; tail 233; hind foot s. u. 34;
ear 20.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iii. 11

154 On new small Mammals from South America.

Skull: basilar length 46°3; occipito-nasal length 58°5 ;
greatest breadth 28°5; nasals 17 x 6°5; interorbital breadth
15 ; palate length from henselion 25; palatal foramina 6 x 18 ;
length of upper molar series (crowns) 12°8.

Hab, Caicara, Orinoco.

Type B.M. no. 98. 12. 1.18. Original number 11039.
Collected July 2, 1898, by Geo. K. & Stella M. Cherrie.
Three specimens obtained, two adult and one young.

This fine species may be readily distinguished from others _
by the prominent white punctulation of the posterior back,
due to the broad white tips to the spines in that region. It
may prove to be most nearly allied to L. semivillosus, Geoff.,
from Colombia, which has, however, the back “ tiqueté de
jaune ”’ and other differences.

A bad skin, which has been in the Museum since 1852, I
also refer provisionally to L. punctatus. It was said to have
come from Caracas.

Peramys brevicaudatus orinoct, subsp. n.

Much paler than in the typical form, coloured more nearly
as in P. dimidiatus. Fur short and velvety, about 5 millim.
long on the back. Upper surface from nose to rump pale
grey, near ‘‘olive-grey” or “smoke-grey” of Ridgway.
Sides of head and body ferruginous, this colour extending
from the bases of the whiskers along the sides of the head
and neck to flanks, and down to the wrists and ankles; at
the anterior base of the ear it extends further dorsally than
elsewhere, so as to form a ferruginous patch on the bead at
the back of the ear. Under surface pale buffy, not sharply
defined, the hairs dark slaty at their bases. Upper surface
of hands and feet blackish brown. Tail furry and dull
rufous for its basal half-inch above, the rest thinly haired,
blackish.

Skull apparently not distinguishable from that of P. b. typicus.

Dimensions of the type (a slightly immature male, measured
in the flesh by collector) :—

Head and body 111 millim.*; tail 75*; hind foot s. u. 18;
ear 17.

Skull: basal length 29; greatest breadth 17; nasals 14°5 x 5;
combined length of ms.1? 5:8.

Hab. Caicara, Orinoco.

Type B.M. no. 98. 12. 1. 22. Collected Aug. 10, 1898,
by Geo. K. & Stella M. Cherrie. Original number 11100.

* Judging by the skin, I should have considered the body rather

longer and the tail rather shorter than the above ; but I think it best to
accept Mr. Cherrie’s measurements as they stand.

On some new Species of Napeogenes. 155

This is so evidently a local form of the Guianan Red-sided
Opossum that, much as it differs in colour, it seems best for
the present to regard it merely as a subspecies of that
animal.

Peramys rubidus, sp. n.

Size, proportions, and cranial characters about as in
P. brevicaudatus, though the muzzle is slightly more slender.
Colour uniformly chestnut-rufous all over above and on the
sides, the head rather brighter rufous, and the posterior back
rather darker. Belly dull buffy grey, the hairs greyish
brown basally, dull buffy terminally. Outer side of limbs
and upper surface of hands and feet dull rufous. Tail also
rufous throughout.

Dimensions of the type (an adult male, measured in
skin) :—

Head and body (evidently stretched) 160 millim. ; tail 64;

nd foot s. u. (wet) 18; ear (wet) 13.

Skull: greatest breadth 19°4; nasals 18 x 5°7; interorbital
breadth 6-6; palate, length from gnathion 20, breadth 11°6 ;
combined length of ms.13 5:9. Lower jaw: back of condyle
to tip of first incisor 28.

Hab. Bahia.

Type B.M. no. 55. 11. 26. 9.

This species is founded on the skin from Bahia referred to
P. brevicaudatus in the ‘Catalogue of Marsupials,’ colour-
characters being at that date thought of less importance than
they have since proved to be.

XXII.—Deseriptions of some new Species of Napeogenes.
By F. D. Gopman, F.R.S.

Napeogenes aster, sp. n
“Vapeog , Sp. n.

N. stelle, Hew., similis, sed alis anticis costa ad basin nigra, alis
ambabus obscurioribus et punctis submarginalibus minutioribus.

Hab. Ecuador (0. T. Baron),

I have three specimens of this insect, which is very
closely allied to N. stella, as stated above. It differs in
having the outer half of both wings darker, which clearly
distinguishes it.

Li*

156 Mr. F. D. Godman on some

Napeogenes decora, sp. n.
peog ;

Alis diaphanis, anticis striga basali ferruginea, fasciis duabus (una
mediana, altera ad cellule finem), venis ad apicem, et marginibus
omnibus nigris; alis utrisque albo marginatis.

Hab. Ecuador (O. T. Baron).

Very similar to N. aster just described, but may at once be
distinguished by the much broader black margins of the
wings, in having a black stripe crossing the centre of the cell
instead of a spot, and in the ferruginous basal stripe of the
fore wing being darker. I have only a single male
example.

Napeogenes glabra, sp. n.

N. stelle similis, sed major, et alis magis diaphanis, punctis sub-
marginalibus pallide flavis; anticis margine interno nigro, posticis
fascia infra cellulam fere obsoleta, nigra.

Hab. Colombia, 8. Martin, Llanos of the Rio Meta (G@. D.
Child).

This is a considerably larger insect than N. stella, though
belonging to the same group. I have two males and a
female; all the markings of the two former are much less
distinct than those of the latter.

Napeogenes glycera, sp. n.

Ceratinie ante, Hew., quoad colores fere omnino similis, marginibus
externis nigris angustioribus; quoad neurationem alarum certe
differt: subtus, sicut in C. antea, alis posticis ad basin coste flavis.

Hab. Ecuador, Sta. Inez (A. Szmson).

A female specimen long in my collection has the coloration
of Ceratinia antea, but the neuration of N. harbona and
N. apulia, which I place in Napeogenes. It formed part of
Mr. Simson’s collection which was made in Eastern Ecuador.

Napeogenes elva, sp. n.

Alis diaphanis, venis et marginibus sordide nigris: subtus ferru-
gineis ; anticis ad apicem, posticis submarginalibus, punctis albis.

Hab. Colombia, Bogota.

I possess only a single male example of this species; it
does not appear to be very closely allied to any other member
of the genus.

new Species of Napeogenes. 157

Napeogenes glycon, sp. n.

N. cyrianasse similis, sed alis anticis longioribus, macula triangulari
nigra ad medium cellule distinguenda.

Hab. British Guiana (H. Whitely), Surinam (C. W. Ella-
combe).

Of this species 1 have two males obtained by Henry
Whitely in the interior of British Guiana and a female
caught in February 1892 at Paramaribo in Surinam by
C. W. Ellacombe.

The general likeness of the insect to N. cyrtanassa is
obvious, but in the lengthened primaries it resembles
N. adelphe, Bates. None of the other species of this group
of Napeogenes have a black spot in the cell of the primaries,
which thus becomes a diagnostic character.

.
Napeogenes otares, sp. n.

Alis fulvis ; anticis macula ovali in cellule medio et parte distali
nigris, fascia mediana obliqua et punctis duobus subapicalibus
sordide albidis; posticis macula cellulari quatuor ultra eam in
linea longitudinali et margine externo angustissime nigris: an-
tennis plerumque flavis, ad basin nigris; capite albo punctato:
prothorace et tegulis fulvis; abdomine infra sordide albido.

Hab. Peru, Chanchamayo (H. Whitely).

Allied to N. pyrrho, Druce (P. Z.S. 1876, p. 209, pl. xvii.
fig. 1), but differs in the absence of the yellow subapical band
of the primaries and in the presence of a pale transverse band
between the black apex and the fulvous base of the wings.

Of this species | have a single female specimen in rather
poor condition.

Napeogenes hygia, sp. n.

Alis anticis ad basin fulvis, fascia integra extrorsum valde sinuata
ultra cellulam a costa fere ad marginem externum extensa flava,
apice toto marginibus omnibus nigris, macula longitudinali in
cellule medio maculis duabus ad finem ejus et quarta infra eam
nigris, macula altera supra ramum medianum secundum margine
externo conjuncta quoque nigra ; posticis fulvis, margine externo
et fascia elongata mediana infra cellulam nigris: subtus ut supra,
alis punctis submarginalibus albis notatis, posticis ad basin cost
flavis: antennis uigris, ad apicem fulvis; capite albo punctato ;
tegulis et prothorace fulvis; palpis albis, extrorsum et apicibu
nigris; abdomine infra sordide flavido.

Hab. Surinam, Paramaribo, Feb. 1892 (C. W. Ellacombe).

158 M. Edmond Bordage on the Fuston between the

A distinct species, of which I have one male specimen
obtained in Surinam by Mr. C. W. Ellacombe. It has the
coloration and facies of Mechanitis polymnia, of which it is
no doubt a homeeochromatic associate.

Napeogenes eunomia, sp. n.

Alis diaphanis, venis et marginibus nigris, punctis submarginalibus
albis; posticis marginem internum versus pallide sulphureo tinctis :
subtus ut supra, sed punctis submarginalibus albis.

Hab. N. Peru (Krause).

I have a single male specimen from Bates’s collection
which has for a long time remained unnamed. In general
coloration it resembles Ceratinéa frater, but the black margins
are narrower and the venation is quite different.

Napeogenes amara, sp. 0.

Napeogenes tolosa, G. & 8. Biol. Centr.-Am., Rhop. i. p. 27, tab. iii.
fig. 4 (partim).

N. tolose similis, sed colore nigro apicali basin versus magis extenso
maculisque apicalibus flavis minoribus.

Hab. Nicaragua, Costa Rica, Chiriqui.

Since writing on JN. tolosa in the ‘ Biologia’ a large series
of this insect has been received from Guatemala and Chiriqui.
The authors pointed ont that specimens from southern
localities were darker than those from Mexico and Guatemala,
but with the material then available they hesitated to separate
them. ‘The Jarge series ] now have leads me to think the
differences are sufficiently great to warrant me in describing
the Nicaraguan and southern form as distinct, and I have
therefore named it NV. amara.

XXIUI.—On the probable Mcde of Formation of the Fusion

between the Femur and Treochanter in Arthropods. By
Epmonp BorpaGeE *.

In the present communication it is my intention to show
what in my opinion are the causes which must have brought
about the fusion of the trochanter and the femur in the
Phasmide. ‘The explanation that I am about to give may, I
* Translated by E. EK. Austen from the ‘Comptes Rendus Hebdo-
madaires des Séances de la Société de Biologie,’ t. vy. no. 28, 5 aout, 1898,
pp. 889-842 : from a separate impression communicated by the Author,

Femur and Trochanter in Arthropods. 159

think, be applied to all those Arthropods which exhibit this
fusion of the second and third joints of the thoracic limbs,
accompanied by the persistence of a groove constituting a
locus minoris resistentie, almirably adapted for ensuring the
process of autotomy.

While following attentively the phenomenon of ecdysis, I
have been struck by the violent efforts that Phasmids have
to make in order to free themselves from their old chitinous
envelope. These clumsy Orthoptera, embarrassed by their
long legs, do not always succeed in doing so—a failure which
is evidently the cause of their subsequent death. At other
times they are obliged to make a sacrifice of one or several of
their limbs; the latter, always becoming detached at the
groove which corresponds to the line of fusion of the femur
and trochanter *, remain fixed in the old envelope with which
they are shed.

I have been able to observe that out of 100 specimens of
Rhaphiderus scabrosus which were kept in captivity and
protected from all enemies, 9 had perished through being
unable to disengage themselves from their old envelope, and
that 22 had survived after having sacrificed one or several of
their legs (the 69 others accomplished all their ecdyses without
mutilations). We see, then, that 31 per cent. of the Phasmids
perished or were mutilated through the ecdyses, a figure
which I think must sometimes be exceeded. We may judge,
therefore, of what must have happened when the disposition
which ensures autotomy was non-existent or had not yet
acquired the perfection which it exhibits at the present day.

‘Lhe efforts which the insect is obliged to make in order to
disengage itself may in certain cases last for an entire day,
and are repeated eight times at least during its existence f.
The violent strains which result therefrom affect especially
the region of the trochanter and the upper extremity of the
femur. Iam led to believe that we must regard this mechan-
ical action as one of the principal causes of the fusion of the
trochanter and the femur. It is certain that this fusion has
not always existed, and that there have been among the
ancestral forms belonging to the existing Phasmids insects
in which there was a genuine articulation between these two
consecutive segments. ‘l'here has therefore taken place in

* This mutilation is evidently a form of autotomy, which in this case
we might term ea urvial (from evuvie, sloughed skin), The regeneration
which ensues always produces a tetramerous tarsus.

+ Although | have not yet had an opportunity ef noting the exact
number of the ecdyses, 1 have nevertheless been able to remark that this
number amounts at least to eight.

160 M. Edmond Bordage on the Fusion hetween the

them later on a veritable phenomenon of anchylosis, bringing
about the fusion in question. This is the hypothesis which is
adopted by certain authors * in order to explain how, in the
case of Vertebrates, articulations may become anchylosed in
consequence of severe and repeated tensions and strains f.

The violent strains to which the limbs are subjected at the
period of the ecdyses must have had an influence so much the
more marked and so much the more efficacious in that at this
moment the tissues are in an altogether peculiar condition,
and since the integumentary layer which will become the
new cuticular covering atter the shedding of the old envelope
is then still soft. The mechanical action occasioned by the
strains has easily produced the thickening, the more intense
chitinization of the arthrodial membrane, and, in consequence,
anchylosis, a condition which, remarkably enough, 1s_pre-
cisely the most favourable for securing autotomy in the line
of the groove of fusion, which constitutes a locus minoris
resistentie. ‘This condition must have been produced as
early as the primary epoch in one of the ancestors with
tetrameious tarsus of the existing Phasmids (see my
communication of June 28, 1897, to the Académie des
Sciences) f. The Stegocephali of this epoch were able to
contribute to the perfecting of the disposition ensuring the
autotomic process.

I would add that modifications in the manner of walking
must have been produced at different intervals {—modifications
which were themselves occasioned by variations in the
general form of the body during the phylogenetic development.
They have brought about displacements in the position of the
points of support more or less distant from the body, with
the object of ensuring the stability of the latter. I think that
we must again regard this as a cause of strains and tensions,
which have also contributed to the formation of the fusion
with which we are dealing. In short, the way in which this
special condition has been produced would be explained by
the principles of the science which Prof. Giard terms morpho-

* See especially Tornier, ‘ Das Entstehen der Gelenkformen,” W. Roux’s
Archiy fiir Entwickelungsmechanik, 1895.

t Iu the articulations of Arthropod limbs the arthrodial membrane is
compared to a ligament by H. Milne-Edwards. In the cases of anchylosis
among Vertebrates the ligaments of the joints are precisely the parts
which become ossified.

{ Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 6, vol. xx. (1897) pp. 507-510.

§ These modifications obliging the limbs to be flexed, to be folded
further back, or to extend themselves during locomotion, according to
circumstances.

Femur and Trochanter in Arthropods. 161

dynamics, Prof. Delage biomechanics, and W. Roux the
mechanics of development (Entwickelungsmechanik).

‘The Arthropods in the case of which we observe, either in
all the thoracic limbs or in only a single pair, the fusion of
two consecutive joints, which ensures autotomy *, appear
among those the growth of which takes place by means of
ecdyses, during which these animals often have much diffi-
culty in freeing their limbs from the old cuticular envelope,
because these members are very long, are terminated by enor-
mous pincers (lobster, crabs), or are provided with large
foliaceous adornments (leaf-insects) ¢. It is probable that in
these different cases the mechanical actions produced at the
moment of ecdysis must have contributed in a large measure
to the development of the peculiar structure in question. I
shall shortly publish a detailed study on the Arthropods in
which this is found.

In the Phasmids the phenomena of autotomy must have
already begun to appear before the complete fusion of the
femur and trochanter, the articulation corresponding to these
two joints then constituting a /ocus minoris resistentie. At
the outset many of these insects must have perished from the
results of hemorrhage. ‘Then, a perfecting process gradually
setting in and being transmitted by heredity, the number of
the survivors increased. ‘The regenerative faculty must at
first have been but slightly marked, and the first regenera-
tions must have been very imperfect. hen, as the fusion
between femur and trochanter tended to take place more and
more, there was more regularity in the sections corresponding
to the amputations, and, in consequence, more regularity in
the portion reproduced, until the moment when regeneration
was capable of furnishing a limb with a tetramerous tarsus,
the joimts of which were sharply differentiated one from
another.

I therefore beheve that this peculiar condition is to be
regarded as an example of a character acquired by use, by
functional excitation, and then transmitted by heredity, as
fast as it advanced towards pertection.

My experiments upon the regenerations following artificial
amputations lead me to suppose that an altogether special

* This does not imply that all the Arthropods in which autotomy is
found to occur must necessarily exhibit fusion between two consecutive
joints of their limbs,

+ I have recently been able to remark phenomena of autotomy in leaf-
insects which had been sent to me from the Seychelles, In these Ortho-
ptera the fusion between femur and trochanter exists.

162 Mr. M. Burr on new Species of Forficularia.

mode of selection has played a great part in the perfecting of
the regenerated limb. J have been able to remark, in fact,
that the regenerated portions were so much the more perfect
according as the amputations had been performed with greater
regularity and the hemorrhage had been less copious. When
the limb is cut off somewhat obliquely, the result is a terato-
logical regeneration with tarsal joints misshapen and but
little distinct one from another. A limb so imperfect as this
almost always becomes detached from the body at the next
ecdysis. ‘The same applies to the limbs mangled by the
teeth of the enemies of the Phasmids. Here, then, we have
a real selection effected by the ecdyses, and I propose for it
the term exuvial selection.

XXIV.—Further new Species of Forticularia.
By Matcotm Burg, F.E.S., F.Z.5.

In the following paper four new Forficularia are described,
of which three were taken in Heuador by Mr. Rosenberg and
the other in Java by Herr Friihstorfer. ‘lwo of the species
from Kcuador will later require a new genus, but the material
at hand is barely sufficient for the purpose. ‘These two are
considered by M. de Bormans, to whose examination I have
submitted all the species described, to be identical; but
several small characters, worth little in themselves, but of
cumulative value taken together, have induced me to regard
them as separate, though closely allied.

1 take this opportunity of impressing collectors abroad with
the necessity of packing earwigs with extreme special care, as
I have at least a dozen novelties in my collection that I am
unable to describe, as they are mutilated; for the slightest
accident may destroy a valuable character. Of others also I
possess only females, which it is highly undesirable to
describe without the male.

The number of undescribed earwigs still existing in collec-
tions is probably very large; M. de Bormans has informed
me that he alone has no less than sixty novelties.

I seize the occasion to express my thanks to this ento-
mologist for the assistance he has very kindly rendered me
in examining my types, communicating descriptions of sexes
which I do not possess, and for much valuable information.

I have taken the measurements as follows :—of the body,
from the mouth to the apex of the anal segment; of the

Mr. M. Burr on new Species of Forficularia. 163

forceps, from the base to the apex of the longest branch, not
including the anal segment, as is often done.

Pygidicrana (mperatrix, sp. n.

Statura maxima; caput latitudine pronotum equiparens, vel eo
latius ; pronotum ovale, antice rotundatum, postice truncatum,
angulis rotundatis; elytra Jatiora, immaculata; ale valde promi-
nentes; forceps cruribus validis, depressis, basi subcontiguis,
margine externo prope basin dente obtuso armatis, margine
interno basi crenulatis, apice decussatis, irregulariter curvatis,
crure dextro magis superne, crure sinistro minus inferne curvatis.

Colour. Mouth-parts, frons, abdomen, and forceps black,
the rest testaceous.

Head as broad as the pronotum or broader ; frons as far as
the eyes black; eyes black. Antenne fuscous, ?-segmentate.

Pronotum oval, raised in the centre, the sides and hinder
margin flat ; all angles rounded, posterior margin straight.

Elytra broad and flat, darkish near the apex, obliquely
rounded at the apex. Wings protruding well beyond the
elytra and paler in colour.

Abdomen black; anal segment large and broad, with a
median suture, very faint, the posterior border rounded,
emarginate roundly, and not deeply at each side.

Legs hairy, testaceous.

Forceps, &, stout ; black; the branches are finely crenu-
late on inner margin at the base; dilated and depressed,
straight at first; incurved at the apical third, the right
branch being more strongly curved than the left and above
it; each branch is armed with a stout conical tooth on the
outer margin near the base. @.

Longs corporis \i'5 35 65% 30 mm.
gs PEOUOL. .s Sy. SAO Sent 3)
sap CAVOLOTUMD 2S os ae x os
pe BEORCIUINE 2 oh. ss ier aia Oites

Patria. Java occidentalis; Mons Gédé at 4000’, 1896
(Lriihstorfer).

This fine species falls into the second group of the genus,
characterized by the head being as broad as the pronotum, by
the prominent wings, and by the shape of the forceps, which
is almost the same in both sexes. The general form of the
forceps recalls the shape of that organ in Psalis and Aniso-
labis. ‘The type of this group is P. Dameli, Dohrn.

164 Mr. M. Burr on new Species of Forficularia.

Opisthocesmia amazonensis, Borm., sp. 0.

*€ Voisin de O. americana, Borm. Antennes (reste 12-art.)
forme typique, mais trés allongées et gréles (plus que chez
O. americana), 9 et 10 en partie ou entitrement jaunes-
blanchatres; le reste brun. L’insecte est tout entier brun
foncé terne, sauf un petit point jaunatre a langle sutural de
Pécaille ailaire, ’extrémité apicale des tibias et le tarse tout
entier testacés. La pince est d’un brun rougeatre, luisant,
plus claire que le reste du corps. L’apex de l’abdomen est
plus étroit que chez O. americana, les pattes plus longues et

giéles. ¢.

* Longit. corp. (absque forcipe) .... 10 mm.
Wp S LOROIIG: oon cortices eee op Eee Gee

“Branches de la pince @: allongés, gréles, subdroites
légérement sinueuses, écartés 4 la base, armées au milieu de
Paréte interne d’une dent beaucoup plus longue que large et
dont la pointe est obliquement tournée vers le haut (chaque
dent touche celle de l’aréte opposée). Les branches divergent
ensuite trés peu, puis se croisent vers le 2? de leur longueur &
partir de la base.”

Opisthocosmia amazonensis, Borm., in litt.

Type in coll. de Bormans.
I have in my collection a female which M. de Bormans
assigns to this species. I add the following description :—

Gracilis, elongata; caput pronoto latius; pronotum parvum, an-
gustum; abdomen apicem versus dilatatum, apice ipso valde
attenuatum ; pedes gracillimi; forceps ¢ cruribus elongatis,
gracilibus, rectis, inermibus, apice decussatis, apicem versus
margine interno minutissime crenulatis ; caput, pedes, abdomen,
et forceps plus minus pilosa. 9.

Thome corporis’ “2.01 .0.'.1. 0 ot 14 mm.
a9 SLOLEIDIE! TA. sa bbus ac

Patria. Upper Amazons (de Bormans) ; Hecuador, Pa-
ramba, at 3500, V. ’97, in dry season (Rosenberg, in coll.
mea). (No. 1521.)

Differs from O. americana, Borm., in the longer and more
slender antennal segments, by the much narrower apex of the
abdomen, by the longer and more slender legs, and, finally,
in the shape of the forceps.

Mr. M. Burr on new Species of Forficularia. 165

Forficula ? remota, sp. n.

Corpus glabrum ; statura majore ; antenne segmentis 13, gracilibus,
elongatis ; caput pronoto latius ; pronotum angustum, margine
antico recto, margine postico subrotundato, angulis rotundatis ;
elytra basi dilatata, latiora, apice angustata, oblique truncata ;
alee valde prominentes ; tarsorum articulus secundus cordiformis,
minimus ; abdomen apice quam basi paullo latius, plicis tuberculi-
formibus segmentorum abdominalium 2 et 3 vix distinguendis ;
forceps ¢ gracilis, cruribus basi dilatatis, subcontiguis, pygidio
tantum separatis, apicem versus attenuatis, incurvis, apice attin-
gentibus, in tertia parte basali supra vel margine interno dentibus
validis binis armatis; forceps 2 gracilis, inermis, cruribus basi
contiguis, subrectis, decussatis ; pygidium quadratum, ¢ margine
postico minutissime emarginato, 2 marginibus rectis, integris.

Colour testaceous or reddish, varied with fuscous.

Head large and flat, reddish testaceous or black. yes
black. Antenne long, 13-segmentate, the segments long and
slender; segments 10-11 pale, the remainder darker.
Mouth-parts pale.

Pronotum small, considerably narrower than the head,
paler in colour, raised anteriorly, depressed posteriorly,
showing a faint median carinula; anterior margin straight,
rectangular ; posterior margin slightly rounded; the angles
rounded.

Elytra large, fuscous or testaceous, broad at the shoulders,
narrower at the apex, where they are obliquely truncate.
Wings protruding well beyond the elytra, narrow, dark
fuscous, sometimes with a large pale discoidal spot.

Legs pale testaceous; femora and tibiz with a few hairs ;
tarsi hirsute.

Abdomen reddish testaceous, slightly broader at the apex
than at the base; the tubercles of the second and third
segments very faint.

Forceps testaceous. 4 with the branches dilated at the
base, subcontiguous, only separated by the pygidium; the
basal third is dilated, armed in the centre and at the apex of
this third with a blunt tooth, sometimes directed horizontally,
sometimes perpendicularly, the basal part itself minutely
crenulate on the inner margin; from the second tooth the
branches attenuate, incurved, to meet at the apex, where they
slightly decussate. @ with branches attenuating from the
slightly dilated base, nearly straight, decussating near the
apex, concealing the pygidium.

Pygidium square; 3 with the margins faintly crenulate,

166 Mr. M. Burr on new Species of Forficularia.

the posterior margin very faintly emarginate; ¢ with
margins smooth and straight. ¢ 9.

Q.

Long. corporis ........ 14°5 mm. 16 mm.
53 promote SOOTY. a of 2 &

3) elytrordm s..2 34 Birt 5 #BU oS

2 forepis (27h WO Ponta Seas a Tat,

Patria. Ecuador, Chimbo, 1000’, VIII. 797; Cachabé, low,
15297, XAL96 (Rosenberg). Type i in coll, mea,

This earwig and the following will require a new genus
when further allied species are discovered. The slender
antennal segments, the narrow pronotum, and the broad elytra
betray affinity with Opisthocosmia, Dohrn, while the general
form of the forceps, dilated at the base and slender beyond,
with the presence of abdominal tubercles, however faint,
show intimate connexion with Forficula, L. The second
tarsal segment is distinctly cordiform, and not cylindrical,
and is very minute, being no broader than the other segments.

Forficula? divergens, sp. n.

A Forficula? remota differt :—Statura minore, abdomine cylindrico,
colore fusciori. ¢ forcipe cruribus dente singulo subperpen-
diculari armatis; 2 cruribus pygidio distincte separatis, basi
dilatatis, dehinc attenuatis, fere rectis, apice attingentibus, nec
decussatis. ¢o Q.

3. iM
Long, Corporis:s. .t. snia 9-10 mm. 8 mm
a9 (OLY LEONOIN vere cc icy che iO) pees 2°3 5,
9 oi HOTU cuetees satya 2'5-3 ,, 2 dee

Patria. Ecuador; Cachabé, low, XI., XII., 96; III., 97,
at 3500, in dry season (Losenberg). ‘Type in coll. mea.

This species differs so little from the last that it is with
hesitation that I give it specific rank ; but the general appear-
ance, with the considerably smaller size, darker and more
reddish colour, and the slightly different form of the forceps,
have led me to describe it as more than a mere variety.

Bellagio, East Grinstead,
December 29, 1898.

On Central-American Coccidee. 167

XXV.—Notes on Central- American Coccidee, with Descrip-
tions of Three new Species. By T. D. A. COCKERELL.

THE following species of Coccide from Central America have
recently come under my notice :—

CEROPLASTES, Gray.

Ceroplastes roseatus, Towns. & Ckll.

Colombia: Panama (Dolby-Tyler).
From it Mr. Dolby-Tyler bred the parasite Lecaniobius
Cockerelli, Ashm.

PARLATORIA, Sign. [not Boiss., 1842, Cruciferz].

Parlatoria proteus, var. crotonis (Ckll.), Ckll.
Colombia: Panama, on Croton (Dolby-Tyler).

AULAcasPIs, CkIl.
Aulacaspis Boisduvalit (Sign.), Ckll.

Mexico: El] Cuyo del Chico Sapote, Tabasco, June 18,
1897 (Townsend; Div. Ent. 7857 pars).

PSEUDOPARLATORIA, CkIl.

Pseudoparlatoria parlatorioides (Comst.), Ckll.

Mexico: Hermosillo, April 20, 1897, a variety with a
white scale and circumgenital glands more numerous, median
0 to 1, anterior laterals 18 to 19, post. laterals 14 (Koebele,
1719) ; Frontera, Tabasco, June 25, 1897, on nopal (Opuntia),
a variety with the scale pale greyish, exuvie light brown,
circumgenital glands 12 in anterior lateral group, 9 in poste-
rior lateral.

It may be that this species, as I understand it, includes two
or more; but I am not at present prepared to subdivide it.

Aspipiotus, Bouché.
Subg. ASPIDIOTUS, s. str. (Hvaspidiotus, Leon.).
Aspidiotus hedere (Vallot), Signoret.

Mexico: Guadalajara, on fruit of sweet lime, Dec. 12,
1897 (Townsend) ; Oaxaca, on leaves of Pinus, Aug. 20,
1897 (Koebele, 1697, pars).

168 Mr. T. D. A. Cockerell on

Subg. Drasprprorus (Berl. & Leon.), Ckll.
Aspidiotus subsimilis, sp. n.

Mexico: Cuautla, on a leafless tree, infesting the bark,
May 31, 1897 (Koebele, 1750) ; Hermosillo, on Casalpinia
Palmeri (?), April 24 (Koebele, 1713).

2? .—Scale about 14 millim. diam., circular, flat, thin, pale
grey to whitish, or tinged with brown; exuvie covered, in-

conspicuous, marked by a whitish boss. This scale is very
like that of A. perniciosus, but there is no distinct dot and

ring.
g.—Scale oval, slightly stained with blackish; exuvice
yellowish.

?.—Brownish yellow; of ordinary shape; no circum-
genital glands; only two lobes, these separated by a wide
interval, prominent, upright, shaped about as in A. perniciosus,
sometimes with a notch on the inner side; spines fairly
large, two pairs on each side, and a single one (sometimes a
pair) a considerable distance along the margin; squames
spine-like, but very minute, hardly to be seen; the usual two
marginal incisions on each side, the glandular processes of
the first long and straight, the outermost very narrow, the
inner longer (in fact, very long for a Déaspidiotus) and
thickened towards the end, so as to be inversely carrot-
shaped; anal orifice near the hind end; linear transverse
dorsal glands as in perniciosus &c.; from the bases of the
lobes extend long brownish root-like processes, as in various
other species.

The newly-hatched or embryonic larva has the caudal
lobes oblique, distinctly twice notched on the outer margin.

Aspidiotus cyanophylli, Signoret.
Mexico: Orizaba, on myrtle, July 15, 1897 (Koebele,

1705).
This species might well be the type of a new section.

Section HemiBERvEsIA, Ckll.

Aspidiotus cupress’, sp. n.
Mexico: Toluca, June 24, 1897 (Koebele, 1665). Lives
on twigs of Cupressus.
?.—Scale small, about 1 millim. diam., rather convex,
white ; exuviz subcentral to lateral, covered by a white film,
the film often rubbed off, leaving the exuvie exposed, shining

Central-American Coccide. 169

yellow, or sometimes quite coppery yellow. Young scales
round and very white.

?.—Shape ordinary ; no circumgenital glands, but
numerous dorsal tubular glands, much as in A. Osbechie ;
only two lobes, these wide apart, upright, large, rounded, the
edges obscurely crenulate ; anal orifice circular, close to the
bases of the lobes; the usual incisions (two on each side),
with thickened edges; spines very small; squames large,
narrow, but branched, extending a little beyond the lobes;
two squames between the lobes, about eleven on each side
beyond the lobe, placed close together.

Aspidiotus Crawiti, CklL

Mexico: Frontera, on fruit of some palm; scales smaller
than usual (Townsend).

Aspidiotus Greenti, Ckll.
Mexico: El Cuyo del Chico Sapote, Tabasco, June 18,

1897, on leayes of banana (Townsend); on a palm, Mexico

city, Dec. 6, 1897 (Townsend).

CHRYSOMPHALUS, Ashm.

Chrysomphalus rhizophore, sp. n.

Mexico: Tabasco, El Rio Polo, June 19, 1897, on leaves.
of mangrove (Townsend).

? Scale about 15 millim. diam., circular to oval, slightly
convex, shining sepia-brown, sometimes pale coffee-colour,
sometimes darker, or even purplish brown; exuviz black, but
covered by a dirty white film, leaving the first: skin only
visible.

9 .—Yellowish ; shape ordinary ; four groups of circum-
genital glands, anterior laterals of 7, posterior laterals 5 in a
row ; three pairs of low broad lobes, more or less inclined to
be serrate, closely resembling those of C. Bowreyi; median
lobes separated by a moderate interval, obliquely truncate,
with rounded corners; plates very inconspicuous; margin
beyond the lobes serrulate, with three or four small promin-
ences, not so large as those of Bowrey?i; beyond this serrula-
tion there is quite a large spine ; processes at the bases of the
lobes well developed, only two pairs of long ones, those of the
first and second interlobular intervals ; the usual pair at the
inner bases of the median lobes, about half as long as the
long processes ; the process mesad of the second long one

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iii. LZ

170 Mr. L. E. Griffin on the

short and small, not one third of its length; the process at
the outer base of the third lobe about as large as those at the
inner bases of the median lobes ; the usual row of glands just
beyond the second long process, but they are small, much as
in C. calurus ; anal orifice a long way from the hind end, but
still caudad of the level of the posterior circumgenital glands.

Chrysomphalus albopictus (Ckll.).

Mexico: Cuautla, on twigs of rose, May 31, 1897 (Koebele,
1769) ; Cuautla, on Myrtus (Kvebele).

Chrysomphalus agavis (Towns. & CkIl.).

Mexico: on “Tabucha,”’ May 1896 (Townsend). Div.
Ent, 7217.

Chrysomphalus dictyospermi (Morgan).

Mexico: Oaxaca, on leaves of Pinus, Aug. 20, 1897
(Koebele, 1697, pars).

Section MerLanaspis, Ckll.

Chrysomphalus nigropunctatus (Ckll.).

Mexico: Amecameca, June 6, 1897, ‘on wild tree re-
sembling tobacco ”’ (Koebele, 1740) ; Mexico city, on bark of
maple, May 22,1897 (Koebele, 1741) ; on Baccharis glutinosa
at Mixcoac, June 22, 1897 (Koebele, 1743).

Chrysomphalus Kilacinus (CkIL.).

Mexico: Nogales, on Quercus undulata, April 10, 1897
(Koebele, 1629).

XXVI.—Notes on the Tentacles of Nautilus pompilius.
By LawkENce K. GRIFFIN *.

THE following notes on the structure and homologies of the
tentacles of Nautilus describe points which have been of great
interest to me and which seem important enough to justify
publication preliminary to a complete account of the anatomy
of the Nautilus.

* From the ‘Johns Hopkins University Circulars,’ Noyember 1898,
pp: 11-12.

Tentacles of Nautilus pompilius. 171

All the tentacles of the Nautilus are built after a single
plan, and preserve the essential features of this even when
highly modified. Ordinarily the tentacle is considered to be
formed by two parts—a fleshy sheath surrounding an exten-
sile cirrus. ‘The cirrus is the essential structure and will be
spoken of as the tentacle, while the sheath seems to be merely
a fold of the skin which has been produced around the cirrus
for protective or supportive purposes. Surrounding the head
of the Nautilus are thirty-eight tentacles, to which Owen
gave the name of digital tentacles. The sheaths of these are
fused to each other, so that a complete Cephalic Sheath
(Owen), open ventrally only, is formed. These tentacles
have been described as having no regular arrangement ; but
an examination of fifty-one specimens proved that they are
arranged upon each side in a constant order. Only six
specimens showed a variation from the normal arrangement,
and this variation existed in each case upon one side only.
Whether the same tentacle always occupies the same position
or not cannot be decided till after further dissection of the
nerves going to the tentacles.

The digital tentacles present the structural plan uniformly
and simply. The surface of the tentacle is marked by a
close series of annular grooves, which are deepest upon the
inner side of the tentacle. The tentacles are frequently
flattened upon the inner side. A large nerve-trunk occupies
the centre of the tentacle; around this are the radial bundles
of longitudinal muscles. Closer examination of the nerve-
cord reveals that it is enlarged by collections of ganglion-
cells at regular intervals, each enlargement corresponding in
position to a segment of the tentacle included between two of
the annular grooves. From the ganglionic enlargements
nerves pass to the different portions of the segment, but espe-
cially to the inner side. The segmental structure of the
nerve-cord persists in cases where all traces of the external
aunulations have disappeared.

Dr. Willey, in a recent article, described the great adhesive
power of the digital tentacles. This power seemed strange
until after a closer study of the segments of the tentacles.
The groove between the segments is much deeper upon the
inner face of the tentacles than elsewhere. The inner face of
the segment is flattened. On this side, between the epi-
thelium and the longitudinal muscles, are radial transverse
muscles—the only transverse muscles in the tentacles which
we can surely identify as such.

‘Their oper:.:ion would be somewhat as follows :—when the
flat surfaces of the segments of the tentacles are applied to

12*

172 Mr. L. E. Griffin on the

any body a contraction of the radial muscles within each
segment would pull the central portion away from the opposed
surface and cause a vacuum to be formed between the segment
and the surface. The adhesive power of any one segment
must be slight; but there are from sixty to one hundred
segments in each tentacle, half of which would probably be
in a position to hold; and there are thirty-eight tentacles in
the group. Thus the combined adhesive power of all the
segments 1s very great.

It seems to me probable that we see here the beginnings of
the suckers of the Dibranchiates. As these Cephalopods
became more active and predatory the simple sucker would
naturally have been modified to form an organ better adapted
to quick and sure seizing of the prey. Yet the principle of
action is the same in the Nautilus and the Dibranchiates. It
seems probable that the projecting portion of each segment of
the tentacle formed a single sucker. Growth would cause
these to take alternating positions. Possibly from each
segment several suckers were formed by subdivision of the
adhesive surface and the development of each portion into a
sucker. ‘hese may have remained arranged in transverse
rows, as in Sepia and other forms.

This theory of the formation of the suckers of the Dibran-
chiates necessitates our regarding the arms of the Dibran-
chiates as each corresponding to a single tentacle of the
Nautilus, and not to groups of tentacles. ‘The structure,
arrangement, and relations of the arms support the first view
far more than the second. Coimparison with the processes of
change in other orders weakens the latter theory, while
strengthening the theory that a few tentacles gradually in-
creased in size while the remainder were crowded aside and
reduced.

The ocular tentacles present several differences of structure
from the digital tentacles. Their sensitiveness is much
greater. The greater depth of the annular grooves on the
inner side is immediately noticed. Willey has found that
the sides of the groove are ciliated. In some instances I find
the cilia extending over the surface between the grooves.

Of internal structure two points are especially remarkable.
One is struck by the ease with which the tips of the ocular
tentacles break off. This seems to be the result of a peculiar
arrangement. In the plane of the annular groove the ad-
joining segments are separated by what in sections appears
as a plain line along which the tissues are evidently weaker
than elsewhere. In apparently normal cases there is no
separation of the tissues, but the weak line appears sharply

Tentacles of Nautilus pompilius. 173

and distinctly. The line does not extend through the
epidermis or the nerve-cord. The lines are only found in the
upper portions of the-tentacles. It is difficult to understand
of what use this arrangement can be. The tips of the
tentacles break off with exceeding ease; but can this be in
any way advantageous to the Nautilus ?

The other point is regarding the structure of the nerve-
trunk. There is here what I have termed an accessory nerve-
trunk. 'Vhe usual nerve-trunk is present, having its layer of
ganglionic cells around its periphery and its ganglionic en-
largements in each segment of the tentacle. On the inner
side of this, through nearly the entire length of the tentacle,
runs a large nerve-trunk, composed of several bundles of
nerve-fibres. The main nerve-trunk and the accessory are
closely united, but are easily distinguished by the layer of
ganglion-cells which surrounds the main trunk. There are
very few, if any, ganglion-cells in the accessory trunk. At
the ends of the tentacle the accessory trunk gradually dis-
appears, at the upper end by giving off nerves chiefly to the
inner side of the tentacle, at the base of the tentacle by
eradual union with the main nerve-trunk.

This accessory trunk has apparently been developed in
connexion with the remarkable sensitiveness of the ocular
tentacles.

The nerves of the two ocular tentacles of each side are
branches of a nerve which comes off from the pedal ganglion
near the outer end, which also sends branches to the hood.

The hood consists of the fused and enormously enlarzed
sheaths of the dorsal digital tentacle of each side. ‘The origin
of the nerves of the ocular tentacles in the pedal ganglia, and
the fact that they form portions of nerves going to the sheaths
of digital tentacles, proves, as Dr. Willey has suggested, that
the ocular tentacles cannot be considered as other than some-
what modified (and perhaps displaced) digital tentacles, and
that they can in no wise be considered as the homologues of
the optic tentacles and rhinophores of Gastropods.

There is in the female Nautilus, ventral to the buccal mass,
a fleshy lobe, which, dividing into two near its tip, bears
upon each half ten to fourteen tentacles, and at the point of
division a rounded organ composed of a number of triangular
lamelle. This lobe (the inferior labial of Owen) is wanting
in the male Nautilus; instead is found, nearly hidden beneath
the buccal mass, a rounded organ, which is named, from its
discoverer, Van der Hoeven’s organ. I think that anatomical
evidence is strong enough to convince us that the inferior

174 Mr. L. E. Griffin on the

labial lobe and Van der Hoeven’s organ are homologous
organs.

There are about sixteen lamelle in the group in the centre
of the inferior labial lobe. The group is separated at the
median line into two halves, the lamelle of each side facing
each other. The largest lamelle are at the centre of the
group, the smallest at the exterior. The lamellae are marked
upon both surfaces by grooves parallel to their bases. A
nerve showing some traces of ganglionic enlargements runs
to the tip of each lamella. The nerves of the lamelle of
each half of the group unite. The trunk thus formed unites
with the nerves of the tentacles of the lobe of its own side and
the common trunk enters the pedal ganglion near the median
line. ‘The tentacles of each lobe are largest near the outer
end of the series. ‘They grow smaller and smaller as the
median line is approached; those nearest the median line are
frequently so small as to be scarcely visible. At this point
it is possible to find a complete series of gradations between
the lamelle of the median organ and the tentacles. The
structure of the lamelle confirms the suspicion that they are
modified tentacles. This homology has been suggested by
Van der Hoeven.

Between the bases of each two lamelle is a pit lined by
exceedingly slender epithelial cells. These cells are also from
two to three times the height of ordinary epithelial cells. The
cells bear cilia, apparently each cell bearing a single cilium ;
but the preservation of my material is not good enough for
me to make sure of this point. Fine fibres appear to run
from the bases of the cells into the tissues.

As has been said, Van der Hoeven’s organ occupies the
same place in the male that the inferior labial lobe occupies
in the female. ‘This organ is about 1 inch in length, ? inch
in breadth, and ? inch in thickness. It is enveloped by a
tunic, which, over the anterior dorsal half, is free from the
organ, thus allowing free communication between the interior
of the organ and the exterior. ‘The anterior half of the organ
is separated into halves by a narrow vertical slit which leads
into the central cavity. ‘This is a low horizontal cavity ex-
tending from side to side.

At the anterior end, on each side of the opening, are a
number of low, thick, vertical lamelle, which quickly pass
into thin, broad, shelf-like, horizontal lamelle, which extend
as far back as the posterior limit of the vertical slit-like
opening of the organ. Back of this point the organ is
glandular ; the glands completely surround the central
cavity. ‘lhe glands are typical examples of the compound-

Tentacles of Nautilus pompilius. 175

tubular type. The epithelial cells of both glands and lamella
are tall and cylindrical. The cells of the lamella are for the
most part heavily loaded with secretory products. The cells
of the glands are also loaded. Yet the lumens of the glands,
as well as the central cavity, are entirely free from secretion,
this evidently being stored in the cells till needed for some
unusual purpose.

Another kind of cell is found among the epithelial cells of
both glands and lamella. Around each epithelial cell are
several fine hair-like sensory cells. The middle of each is
swollen by the elongated oval nucleus. ‘The tip of each cell
is produced into a stiff sensory hair. The immense number
of these cells bearing hairs makes the surface appear densely
ciliated. he ordinary epithelial cells are of so much greater
bulk than the sensory cells that close examination is required
to reveal the fact that the cilia do not belong tothem. I have
seen the bases of the sensory cells continued for some distance
into the submucous tissue as fine fibres of about the same
diameter as the cell.

The nerves which innervate Van der Hoeven’s organ have
the same place of origin as those which innervate the inferior
labial lobes of the female. One nerve enters each side of
Van der Hoeven’s organ and divides into a large number of
branches. One of these runs into each lamella and several
supply the glandular portion of the organ.

The number of lamella of Van der Hoeven’s organ closely
corresponds to the number of tentacles plus lamell of the
inferior labial lobe. The innervation is the same in each,
except that the nerve seems to form all its branches at one
point in Van der Hoeven’s organ, instead of at two points as
in the labial lobe. The musculature of the one is the same
as of the other. Willey finds that the same arteries supply
both organs, and upon this fact bases the suggestion that they
may be homologous. The sensory cells of Van der Hoeven’s
organ evidently correspond to those found between the bases
of the lamellz on the labial lobe; only in the one case they
are restricted to definite areas, while in the other they are
scattered throughout the organ. In short, anatomical evidence
admits of no conclusion but that Van der Hoeven’s organ of
the male Nautilus is strictly homologous with the inferior
labial lobe of the female Nautilus.

From the fact that the glandular cells in my sections of
Van der Hoeven’s organ are nearly all heavily loaded, and
that absolutely no secretion is present in the lumens of the
glands or in the central cavity of the organ, it appears that
its glandular function may be limited to certain times and

176 On the Tentacles of Nautilus pompilius.

conditions, possibly connected with reproductive processes.
‘The sensory function is probably the same in both sexes and
continually active, though it is possible that this also may be
closely connected with reproduction.

The structure of the hectocotylus (or spadix) has recently
been admirably described by Vayssiére. Still, there are
several points which may be added to his description.

The hectocotylus is composed of a group of four tentacles.
These become highly modified. ‘The organ is usually situated
upon the left side; but in between twenty and twenty-tive
per cent. of my specimens it is upon the right side. In one
case hectocotyli are upon both sides. On the opposite side
of the animal from the hectocotylus is a similar group of
four tentacles, but unmodified.

Three of the tentacles forming the hectocotylus are closely
enveloped by a fleshy sheath, the fourth and smallest only
partly. On the external side of the sheath at the margin is a
circular glandular area. The glands are compound-tubular,
branched quite simply; they extend, in a direction perpen-
dicular to the surface, about three quarters of the distance
through the sheath. Upon examining the corresponding
portion of the sheath of the similar group of the opposite side
{ found a glandular area in the same position as that upon
the sheath of the hectocotylus. ‘The area is smaller, the
glands are less developed, yet are exactly similar in structure.
‘The presence of this gland on both groups of tentacles is
extremely interesting, as it may indicate an original hecto-
cotylization of both groups.

in the second tentacle of the hectocotylus (the tenth cirrus
of Vayssiére) is another interesting series of glands. ‘This
tentacle is annulated, the grooves being deepest upon the
upperside. Into each groove upon this side opens a row of
perfectly simple sac-like glands. ‘The openings are ex-
ceedingly small and are well hidden in the depths of the
grooves. <A single layer of columnar epithelial cells lines the
gland. ‘The cells of the neck of the gland are low, but they
rapidly increase in height as they pass into the gland, so that

the body of the gland is lined by exceedingly high cylin-
drical cells.

[The valuable material upon which these notes are based
was presented to the Department of Animal Biology of the
University of Minnesota by Mr. Louis Menage, and I am

greatly indebted to Professor Nachtrieb for placing it at my
disposal. |

On a new Species of Gerridide. 177

XXVII.—Deseription of a new Species of Gerridide.
By Dr. G. HorvAru.

Lygrotrechus Distanti, sp. n.

Supra niger, opacus, subtus dense argenteo-sericeus, subnitidus ;
yvertice macula parva transversa basali aurantiaca notato; rostro
apicem mesosterni vix attingente, toto nigro; antennis nigris,
articulo primo articulis tribus apicalibus simul sumtis vix breviore,
articulis secundo et quarto longitudine «qualibus, articulo tertio
articulo precedente fere } breviore; pronoto capite quadruplo
longiore, lineola longitudinali lobi antici marginibusque lateralibus
et postico lobi postici aurantiacis, lobo postico transversim sub-
rugoso; hemelytris rudimentariis, fortiter abbreviatis, apicem
metanoti haud ( ¢ ) vel vix (@ ) attingentibus, lanceolatis, limbo
externo basin versus nigricante; dorso abdominis linea mediana
percurrente, interdum sat obsoleta, argenteo-sericea ornato ; pro-
sterno, parte inferiore acetabulorum et fulecrorum posteriorum
apiceque imo coxarum posteriorum albido-testaceis ; pedibus
nigris, femoribus intermediis femoribus posticis longitudine sub-
eequalibus, tibiis et tarsis posticis simul sumtis tibiis intermediis
paullo longioribus, articulo primo tarsorum anticorum articulo
secundo vix breviore; spinis apicalibus segmenti sexti abdominis
gracilibus, acutissimis, nigris, nitidis.

3. Meso- et metasterno vitta mediana angusta fusca signato ; spinis
apicalibus segmenti sexti abdominis segmento genitali primo 4
brevioribus ; segmentis ventrali sexto et genitali primo postice
flavo-limbatis ; segmento ventrali sexto postice emarginato,
emarginatura medio profuude rotundato-sinuata; segmento geni-
tali primo subtus trifoveolato, foveolis duabus lateralibus mediis
et foveola antica in emarginatura mediana segmenti ventralis
sexti sita sat profundis, inter se carinula trifida discretis. Long.
113 mill.

2. Spinis apicalibus segmenti sexti abdominis segmentum genitale
primum fere dimidio superantibus; limbo postico segmenti ven-
tralis sexti segmentoque genitali primo subtus flavo-testaceis ; illo
postice rotundato-emarginato, hoc utrinque prope basin leviter
impresso. Long. 133-14 mill.

Hab. Nyasaland, Fort Johnston.

This fine species, three specimens of which Mr. W. L.
Distant has submitted to me for identification, differs from the
other species of the genus by the yellow-margined pronotum,
the orange-yellow rudimentary elytra, and the two joints of
the anterior tarsi subequal in length.

178 Mr. W. L. Distant on

XVIII.—On some South-African Insects.
By W. L. Disranr.

J HAVE received some Longicorn beetles from the Rev. H.
Junod, collected by him at Delagoa Bay, two of which
appear to be undescribed and not included in the list of the
Delagoa Longicornia recently published in these pages
(ser. 7, vol. i. p. 378).

Among some Sphingide forwarded to me from the Pre-
toria Museum I found two apparently undescribed species
from the Lydenburg District of the Transvaal, the diagnosis
of which I take this opportunity to publish.

COLEOPTERA.
LONGICORNIA.
Fam. Cerambycide.

Hercodera marginata, sp. n.

Testaceous ; head, pronotum, and femora reddish testaceous ;
eyes, antenne, bases and apices of femora, tibiz, and tarsi
black; elytra with the anterior, apical, outer, and sutural
margins and a transverse fascia beyond middle bluish black,
apical margin broadest.

Head obsoletely punctured. Pronotum at the sides and
above covered with broad, shallow, regular punctures, giving
it a reticulated appearance. LElytra very thickly and strongly
punctate, the transverse fascia widest at sutural and outer
margins.

Long. (two specimens) 9 and 12 millim.

Hab. Delagoa Bay (Junod).

This is the second species of the genus yet described. It
differs from H. fasciata, Gahan, by being less angular at
sides of pronotum and also in the elytral markings. The
punctures, as Mr. Gahan kindly informs me, are almost
exactly alike in both species.

In the smaller specimen of the two on which this descrip-
tion is based the transverse fascia to the elytra is very narrow
and somewhat indistinct.

Oxyprosopus delagoe, sp. n.

/Eruginous ; eyes, antenne, femora, and tibie black ; tarsi
pale fulvous.

some South-African Insects. 179

Head at the anterior margin concave, with a distinct
central impression. Pronotum narrowest at anterior margin,
where it is transversely striate, gradually widening posteriorly,
where it is obscurely angulated at lateral margins; base
transversely striate, remainder of disk thickly and coarsely
punctate. Elytra thickly and somewhat coarsely punctate,
each elytron with two discal, longitudinal, slightly raised
lines.

Long. 21 millim.

Hab. Delagoa Bay (Junod).

In one specimen the elytra are more or less cyaneous.

LEPIDOPTERA.
HETEROCERA.
Fam. Sphingide.
Polyptychus consanguineus, sp. n.

Body and legs fawn-coloured; head and pronotum with a
central longitudinal smoky-brown fascia.

Anterior wings fawn-coloured, crossed by two narrow
linear brown fascize—the first about one fourth from base, the
second longest and more oblique beyond cell; between these
fascie are two waved paler ones, placed somewhat close
together, and two lines, giving the appearance of a sub-
quadrate spot, at end of cell; some indistinct waved brown
markings cross apical area of wing, and two small brown
spots placed one above the other near apex of inner margin.
Posterior wings fulvous, with two transverse brown linear
markings just above inner angle at posterior margin, and with
a small spot of the same colour beneath them. Wings
beneath with two indistinct transverse fascie, one beyond
cells, the other, more waved, near outer margins.

Exp. wings 60 millim.

Hab, Transvaal, Lydenburg District.

A near and very close ally of this species is to be found in
the P. Jankowski, Oberth., described from the island of
Askold, off the north-east coast of Asia.

Polyptychus africanus, sp. n.

Body and legs fawn-coloured ; front of head, lateral and
posterior margins of pronotum dull olivaceous.

Anterior wings to end of cell and middle median nervule
saffron-coloured, beyond this pale olivaceous; two small
costal spots at base, a large longitudinal spot at base of inner

180 On Lepidopus atlanticus from Madeira.

margin, a spot crossing centre of cell, a subquadrate apical
spot, and a small one near apex of inner margin dark dull
olivaceous. Posterior wings stramineous, olivaceously tinted
towards margins, and with a curved dull olivaceous spot near
the inner angle of posterior margin. Anterior wings be-
neath with the basal area ochraceous, the apical area oliva-
ceous, spots absent; posterior wings beneath without spot ;
both wings crossed by two indistinct fascia, one beyond cell,
the other near outer margin.

Exp. wings 72 millim.

Hab. Transvaal, Lydenburg District.

In colour and markings somewhat resembling Mimas tilic,
Linn.

I have recently received from Delagoa Bay a specimen of
Panacra orpheus, Herr.-Schiff., collected there by the
Rev. H. Junod. This specimen I had previously, and with
the advantage of the assistance of Sir G. H. Hampson, com-
pared with P. vartolosa, Walk., of which specimens both
from the Andamans and India are in the British Museum.
No real difference could be discovered between my South-
African specimen and Walker’s species, and we have appa-
rently another hawk-moth common to the Ethiopian and
share, regions. ‘The synonymy should therefore stand as
follows :—

Panacra orpheus, Herr.-Schiff.

Cherocampa orpheus, Herr.-Schiaff. Aussereurop. Schmett. i. fig. 104
(1854) ; Boisd. Spec. Gén. Lép. Hét. i. p. 247 (1875).

Panacra variolosa, Walk. Cat. Lep. Het. B. M. viii. p. 156. n. 4 (1856) ;
Swinhoe, Cat. East. & Austr. Lep.-Het. p. 18. n. 50, pl.i. fig. 4
(1892).

Panacra vagans, But). Ill. Lep. Het. B. M. v. p. 4, t. [xxviii fig. 7
(1881).

Panacra natalensis, Rothsch. Novit. Zool. vol. i. p. 79, pl. v. fig. 18
(1894),

Hab. 8. Africa, N. India, Andaman Islands, Borneo.

XXIX.—On a Specimen of Lepidopus atlanticus, Goode &
Bean, from Madeira. By G. A. BOULENGER, F.R.S.

THE British Museum has received, together with other fishes
collected at Madeira by the late Mr. Axel J. Arendrup, and
presented to the ‘Trustees by his mother, a fine specimen,
1 metre 20 centim. in length, of a fish described and figured in

On the Dipterous Genus Xylomyia, Rond. 181

the ‘Oceanic Ichthyology’ (p. 205, fig. 215) under the name
of Benthodesmus atlanticus. The species was founded on
specimens obtained on the western edge of the Grand Bank
of Newfoundland, off St. Kitts, W.I., and in mid-North
Atlantic, at depths varying between 25 and 208 fathoms, and
previously referred to Lepidopus elongatus, Clarke. 1 am
now able to report its occurrence at Madeira and on the coast
of Portugal, whence it has been inadequately described and
figured by Vieira as Lepidopus argenteus, Bon. (Ann. Se.
Nat. Porto, i. 1894, p. 165, pls. ix. & x.).

Mr. Arendrup had fully realized the interest that attaches
to the Madeira specimen, which represented an unnamed
species at the time he obtained it, and he had drawn up some
notes which I here reproduce in an abridged and slightly
altered form, after verification on the original.

Depth of body 22 times in total length, length of head 63
times. Vent marking ? on the total length. Occipital crest
very feeble; eye 6 times in head, 21 in snout; lower jaw
projecting, with a fleshy appendage anteriorly ; teeth acute,
compressed, 19 in upper jaw (including 2 large anterior
fangs), 20 in lower jaw, without any larger ones. 7 branchio-
stegals. Gill-rakers few, widely separated. Dorsal with
about 156 rays, beginning halfway between eye and root of
pectoral, the longest rays not quite so long as diameter of eye.
Anal with 26 tree rays. Ventrals represented by minute
scale-like scutes. Pectoral 3 times in length of head.
Caudal small, forked. Caudal peduncle depressed, 5 times
in length of head. Uniform silvery ; margin of dorsal black
for the first 10 or 12 rays.

XXX.— On the Preliminary Stages and Mode of Escape of the
Imago in the Dipterous Genus Xylomyia, Rond. (Subula,
Mg. et auct.), with especial reference to Xylomyia macu-
lata, L. ; and on the Systematic Position of the Genus. By
E. E. Austen, Zoological Department, British Museum.

i?
PRELIMINARY STAGES AND MODE OF ESCAPE OF THE IMAGO.

THROUGH the courtesy of the Rev. H. S. Gorham the new
collection of British Diptera in the National Museum has
recently been enriched by a (¢) specimen of the rare fly
Xylomyia maculata, F., together with its puparium and the
skin of the pupa from which it was bred,

182 Mr. E. E. Austen on the

Xylomyia maculata is an extremely handsome insect, rather
more than 9 millim. (4°5 lines) in length, shining black, with
the thorax spotted and the abdomen banded with yellow, with
yellow legs, the tips of the posterior femora and tibiz broadly
banded with black, and the ends of the tarsi infuscated.
Mr. Gorham bred eleven specimens of the fly from pup
found with some forty others on June 29, 1898, in a rotten
oak-tree in the New Forest.

Mr. G. H. Verrall’s ‘ List of British Diptera’ (1888) in-
cludes three species of Xylomyia, of which two (X. varia,
Mg., and X. maculata, ¥.) are printed in italics, as requiring
confirmation, while the third (X. marginata, Mg.) appears in
ordinary type, as an authenticated member of the British
fauna. Of these three species, two (maculata and varia) are
given by Walker, in the ‘Insecta Britannica. — Diptera’
(vol. i. 1851, p. 34), under Subula*. With reference to
S. maculata Walker writes :—“ Very rare ; inhabits the New
Forest, Hampshire. In Mr. Stephens’s collection.’ While
as to varia he says :—‘ Very rare. In the British Museum.
The larva feeds on the wood of the oak.”

A (2) specimen of Xylomyia maculata (placed under
Xylophagus, and labelled “ scutellata?”’), with a puparium in
which the pupa-skin is sticking precisely as in our latest
acquisition, is still contained in the Museum in the old
Stephensian Collection of British Diptera, which also includes
a male and female of what appears to be a variety of X. varia,

* The name Subdula, as applied to a genus of Diptera, owes its origin
to a note by Meigen published in 1820 (Syst. Beschr. bek. europ. zweifl.
Insekten, ii. p. 15), in which it is stated that Megerle v. Muhlfeld forms
the genus Subiwla out of Meigen’s second division of the genus Xylo-
phagus, comprising the three species (maculatus, F., varius, Mg., and
marginatus, Mg.) mentioned above. Subula, however, is preoccupied,
having been used by Schummel in 1817 for a genus of Mollusca, and in
1861 Xylomyia was proposed in its stead by Rondani (Dipt. Ital. Prodrom,
iv. p. 11). This emendation was ignored by Schiner, both in his ‘ Fauna
Austriaca’ and ‘Catalogus Systematicus Dipterorum Europe,’ and, for
some unknown reason, modern continental dipterists, such as Brauer and
van der Wulp, still follow Schiner’s lead. Osten Sacken, who noticed
Rondani’s name in 1886 (Biol. Centr.-Am., Dipt. i. p. 23), did not adopt
it, since he was of the opinion that “a change in a name of such old
standing involves much more inconvenience than its retention.” In the
face, however, of modern ideas on the subject of priority such an objec-
tion is scarcely valid, and it is safe to say that the sooner the name
Xylomyia is definitely recognized the better. As indicated above, Ron-
dani’s designation was duly adopted by Verrall in his ‘ List’; yet van der
Wulp (‘Catalogue of the Described Diptera from South Asia’: The
Hague, Martinus Nijhoff, 1896, p. 46), while remarking that Subula is
preoccupied, is apparently ignorant of the existence of Rondani’s
Xylomyia.

Dipterous Genus Xylomyia, Rond. 183

Mg., with the abdomen, with the exception of the semilunar
depression at the base, entirely black and without the in-
cisions between the segments being “ very narrowly yellow,”
as described by Meigen*. As is unhappily the case through-
out the Stephensian Collection, these three specimens are
without locality-labels. Xylomyia maculata as a British
insect was also known to Westwood, for in the ‘ Introduction
to the Modern Classification of Insects,’ vol. ii. (1840) p. 534,
he writes :—“ The Rev. F. W. Hope has also given me
specimens of Subula maculata and its preparatory state; the
latter found by him in a dry rotten tree in the New Forest,
and from which he reared the imago. It is larger than that
of X. varia, but does not otherwise differ from it.” It will
have been noticed that all the British examples of Xylomyia
maculata hitherto recorded come from the same locality.

In Verrall’s ‘List’ the genus Xylomyta is placed with
Xylophagus, Mg., in the family Xylophagide; in Schiner’s
‘Fauna Austriaca’ the same family is made to include a
third genus, Pachystomus, Latr. (for Rhagio syrphoides, Pz.),
which is stated by Osten Sacken (Berl. ent. Z. xxvi. (1882)
p. 379) to be “nothing but a Xylophagus with broken an-
tenne.” While, however, the differences between Xylomyta
and Xylophagus are of more than generic rank even in the
perfect state tT, in the preliminary stages they are much more
marked. Whereas the larve of Xylomyia as well as of
Xylophagus live in the stumps and beneath the bark of dead

* Xylomyia varia, Mg., is a considerably smaller species than X. macu-
lata, measuring only 5°53 to 7:3 millim. (8 to 3:5 lines) in length, instead
of 9:3 millim. (4°5 lines), but the antenne are longer; the dorsum of the
thorax is without yellow markings, and the legs, except the tips of the
tarsi, are yellow. Xylomyia maryinata, Mg., is not represented in either
of our collections of British Diptera; but two (2) specimens from
Germany in our general collection of Diptera show that, while agreeing
in length with X. varza,it is a much broader and bulkier insect, and con-
sequently, as regards size, occupies an intermediate position between
X, maculata and X. varia. The antenne are shorter than in the latter
species; the thorax is without yellow markings on the dorsum and is
not shining, being finely and closely punctured and clothed with very
short yellowish hair, forming indistinct longitudinal stripes; the hind
margins of the abdominal segments from the second to the fifth are
narrowly yellow; the legs are yellow, with black cove, and the ends of
the tarsi and the tips of the hind femora infuscated; the hind femora are
distinctly swollen (which is not the case in the other two species), and
bear a row of minute black tubercles on the distal half beneath ; the vena-
tion is as in X. varia. In X. maculata the upper branch of the third
vein is distinctly more slender than the main stem, and is shorter and
flatter than in the other two species, while (as pointed out by Schiner)
the first vein that leaves the discal cell is very strongly curved.

+ Cf. O. Sacken, Berl. ent. Z. xxvi. p. 3864 (referred to by Brauer,
Denkschr. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, Bd, xlvii. p. 28, note).

184 Mr. E. E. Austen on the

trees, those of the latter alone are carnivorous and prey upon
beetle larve. The larva of Xylophagus, as described by
Brauer (Denkschr. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, Bd. xlvii. (1883)
pp. 23-24, Tat. iv. figs. 80-83—Xylophagus cinctus, F.),isa
cylindrical fleshy grub, with a parchment-like integument, a
greatly elongated head (Kveferkapsel, Brauer), and with
scutes or bands of chitin on the first ring or on the first three
postcephalie rings; the pupa is obtectate (Nymphe eine freie
Mumienpuppe, Brauer) *.

The larva of Xylomyia, on the other hand, is a very
different-looking creature, which closely resembles that of
certain well-known Stratiomyide, such as Chloromyia for-
mosa, Scop., and Actina tibialis, Mg.t The dried larva-skin
(puparium) of Xylomyia maculata, presented by Mr. Gorham,
must, as in the case of ordinary Stratiomyid larva, be pre-
cisely similar to the living larva in shape and general appear-
ance, owing to the hardness of the shell-like integument,
which is covered with closely-set ovoid scales or plates, and
does not admit of contraction. It is dark reddish brown in
colour, slightly tapering towards the extremities and oval in
transverse section ; the lateral margins of the body-segments
are expanded into tumid ridges. The head is very similar in
general appearance to that of the larve of Sargus, Chloromyta,
or Actinu. Our larva-skin is 15°5 millim. (7:5 lines) in
length and about 4°5 millim. (or just over 2 lines) in greatest
breadth ; it consists of eleven segments behind the head, and
from the fifth to the eighth (postcephalic) segments the sides
of the body are nearly parallel; the last segment, which is
somewhat truncate, bears on its hind margin a pair of tumid
lips enclosing a transverse horizontal cleft, in which open the
posterior stigmata; the anterior stigmata are found in the
usual position, one on each side of the first postcephalic (the
prothoracic) segment. Apparently, therefore, the larva is

* The larva and pupa of Xylophagus cinctus, F., were described more
than twenty years ago by the late Dr. F. Buchanan White (“ Metamor-
phoses of Xylophagus cinctus, F., and X, ater, F.,” by . Buchanan White
M.D., F.L.S., Ent. Month. Mag. vol. xiii. (1876) pp. 160-162), who found
the larvee of both our British species of Xylophagus in Braemar—those of
X. cinctus under the bark of dead fir-trees, and those of .X. ater between
the bark and wood of dead birch-stumps. The metamorphoses of
Xylophagus cinctus have also been dealt with by Perris (Ann. Soc. Ent,
Fr. sér. 4, t. x. (1870) pp. 202-205, pl. iii. figs. 70-79) in his paper on the
“Tnsectes du Pin Maritime.”

+ Chia eaeripiio of the larva of Chlorisops (Actina) tibialis, Mg., by
Adam Handlirsch (Verh. z.-b. Ges, Wien, Bd. xxxiii. (1883) pp. 243-245,
woodcuts in text); the author found the larve of this species in the
middle of August near Médling, in Lower Austria, in forest-mould, mixed
with much decaying vegetable matter.

i is

>

vo

ew

Dipterous Genus Xylomyia, Rond. 185

amphipneustic, thus agreeing with the larvee of Xylophagus,
but differing from those of Stratiomyidee. On each side,
however, of the first six abdominal segments, immediately
behind the tumid lateral ridge, and so in the angle which
each segment forms with the next, I observe a small papilla.
On examining the larva-skin with a microscope I cannot
detect an aperture in any of these papilla; but it seems in the
highest degree probable that they represent stigmata which
have disappeared, but were functional in the larva of ancestors
of the existing species of Xylomyia. At any rate, on ex-
amining them one is involuntarily reminded of the arrange-
ment of the stigmata in the larva of Actina tibialis, Mg., as
described by Handlirsch (loc. c’t. p. 243), in which it is stated
that (besides the ordinary stigmata at each end of the body)
there is a very small stigma on each side of the first six
segments of the abdomen *.

The body of the larva is nearly bare; each postcephalic
segment bears a stout recurved yellowish-brown hair on the
tumid ridge on each side, and, in the case of the first ten
segments, a transverse row consisting of six similar hairs on
the dorsal side; there is also a similar row of hairs on the
ventral side; the eleventh segment has two hairs on the upper-
side, apparently four pairs beneath, and a pair, which curve
forwards, on the posterior margin—one on each side between
the lips of the stigmatic cavity and the posterior angle.

The larva-skin (puparium) of Xylomyia maculata agrees
very closely with that of the American Subula pallipes, Lw.,
as described by C. H. Tyler Townsend (Ent. News, 1893,

. 164), except for the absence of the transverse rows of
small tubercles stated by Townsend to occur on segments 5
(fourth postcephalic) to 11. In this connexion it is inter-
esting to note that the integument of the larva of Xylomyia
varia (Xylophagus varius), Mg., as described by von Roser f,
and that of the sixth and following segments of the larva
(larva-skin) of Xylomyta marginata (Xylophagus marginatus),
Mg., as described by Wesmael f, also bear transverse rows of

* Handlirsch appears to be unaware of the existence of the lateral
papillz in the larva of Xylomyia; at any rate, he merely states (Joc. cit.
p. 245) :—“ In Subula it has not yet been determined with absolute

certainty whether the larva is likewise peripneustic, since the stigmata
on the body are not easily recognizable, owing to the scale-like structure
of the cuticle.”

+ Naturwiss. Abhandlungen, Stuttgart u. Tiibingen, Bd. ii. Heft 2
(1828), p. 188. ‘

{ Cf Ann. Soe. Ent. Fr. t. vi. (1837), Bulletin Entomologique, p. xc.
According to L. Dufour (Ann. Se. Nat., Zoologie, sér. 3, t. vii. (1847)
p. 18), in the larva (larva-skin) of X. marginata all the abdominal seg-
ments bear transverse rows of tubercles. This author writes :—“ Les

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iii. 13

186 Mr. E. E. Austen on the

tubercles. Von Roser states that the sezments have “a
transverse row of from eight to ten dirty whitish-yellow
round tubercles, each of which bears a small bristle of similar
colour. A more numerous row of smaller tubercles is more
or less distinctly visible at the base of the rings.”

The most remarkable phenomenon presented by Xylomyia,
apart from the striking resemblance of its larva to that of
certain Stratiomyide, is the way in which the imago makes
its escape from the pupa. As in ordinary Stratiomyide,
pupation takes place within the dried larva-skin (puparium),
which, owing to its hardness, doubtless affords an excellent
protection; but, instead of the fly making its escape in the
ordinary way from the anterior extremity of the puparium,
leaving the pupa-skin behind it within the latter, the pupa
itself, shortly before the imago emerges, makes its way partly
out of the puparium through a longitudinal cleft which
appears in the middle dorsal line of the second and third
thoracic and first two abdominal segments. The pupa does
not leave the puparium altogether, but its posterior extremity
remains fixed in the cleft, and in this position the semi-
transparent shining yellowish-brown pupa-skin is left sticking
after the escape of the fly, which is no doubt facilitated by
the fixation of the pupa-skin. The abdominal segments of
the pupa, from the second to the sixth*, bear a transverse
row of stiff, appressed, backwardly directed bristles, reddish
brown in colour, and arranged in groups, each group having
in the middle a bristle longer than the rest. The function of
these bristles evidently is to assist the pupa in raising itself
out of the puparium. For a more detailed account of the
pupa the reader may be referred to Townsend’s description of
the pupa of Subula pallipes, Lw. (loc. cit. p. 165).

The fixture of the pupa (and pupa-skin after the escape of
the fly) by the posterior extremity in the cleft in the pupa-

segments thoraciques sont tout & fait lisses, tandis que les suivants ont,
tout prés de leur bord antérieur, une série transversale de fort petites
aspérités sous formes de points.” The larva of Xylomyia (Subula)
citripes, Duf., as described by Dufour himself (¢bid. pp. 7-8; ef. t. vi.
pl. xvii. fig. 12), also has transverse rows of tubercles (a single row on
the three thoracic segments and a double row—one of very minute
tubercles near the anterior margin and another of larger tubercles
towards the middle—on those of the abdomen). So far as we can judge
at present, therefore, in the absence of tubercles the larva of XY. maculata
is unique.

* Townsend (loc. cit. p. 165) writes “segments 2-7 ” in the case of the
pupa of Subula pallipes, Lw.; the statement may very possibly also apply
to the pupa of X. maculata, but in the specimen before me I cannot trace
the abdominal segments back beyond the sixth, as the remainder are
hidden in the puparium.

Iipterous Genus Xylomyia, Rond. 187

rium is no mere accidental occurrence ; on the contrary, it
appears to be invariable in the genus Xylomyia. It was
recorded seventy years ago by von Roser (doc. e/t. p. 190) in
the case of Xylomyta varia (Xylophagus varius), Mg., and
one of von Roser’s specimens showing this was given by him
to Westwood, who mentions it in the ‘ Introduction’ (vol. ii.
p- 534), and illustrates it by a (very poor) figure (op. cit.
p- O31, fig. 127,14). Dufour, who bred some forty specimens
of his species Subula citripes, actually witnessed the partial
emergence of the pupa from the puparium and the subsequent
escape of the fly; he describes how the pupa works its way
out through the rent in the thoracic segments of the larva-
skin until two thirds of its length project, and states that the
“domino de la nymphe” may be found in the rent after the
imago has left it*. Lastly, Townsend writes (/oc. cit.
pp. 163, 164) of Subula pallipes, Lw.:— The pupa works
itself more than halfway out through this opening [in the
puparium], and there remains. ‘lhe fly then escapes,
leaving at least the posterior one third of the pupal skin still
enclosed within the split portion of the puparium.”

De
SysTEMATIC POSITION.

So long ago as 1882 it was shown by Osten Sacken that
Subula (Xylomyia) could not be allowed to remain in the
same family as Xy/ophagus, where most of the previous
writers had been content to leave it, but that the original
family Xylophagide must be dissolved, Subula being placed
“among the Beridina, until its relationship is cleared up.”
Osten Sacken proceeded to say :—‘ Xy/ophagus and Ceno-
myta would form the stock of the retormed family Xylo-
phagide, which must be brought in nearer connexion with
the Leptide, and not with the Notacantha” 7. Shortly betore
this Brauer had been led to a similar conclusion through
study of the larve ; he wrote {:—“ In the Xylophagide we
find two divisions, of which one (Sudula), through the larva
and its mode of pupation, reminds us of the true Stratiomyide,
while the other (Xylophagus) recalls ‘Vabanide and exhibits
a free nymph.” ‘lhe remarkable external resemblance be-
tween the larve of Xy/omyia and those of certain Stratiomyids

* Ann. Sc. Nat., Zoologie, sér. 3, t. vil. (1847) pp. 10-11, t. vi. pl. xvii.
fig. 18.

Ze C. R. Osten Sacken, “ On Professor Brauer’s Paper: Versuch einer
Characteristik der Gattungen der Notacanthen, 1882,” Berl. ent. Z.
Bd. xxvi. (1822) p. 365. ae

+t Denkschr. k. Akad, Wiss, Wien, Bd. xliv. (1882) pp. 61-62,

188 Mr. E. E. Austen on the

(such as Sargus, Chloromyia, and Actina), as well as the
agreement in the mode of pupation, has indeed attracted the
attention of most authors who have studied the life-history of
the various species. Thus, in 1828, von Roser (loc. cit.
p- 188) declared the larva of Xylophagus varius (Xylomyia
varia), Mg., to be very similar to that of Stratiomys chame-
leon, excluding the tubular tail ; Westwood writes (‘ Intro-
duction’ &e. ii. (1840) p. 535) :—“ The genus Subula, as
discovered by M. van Roser and the Rev. F. W. Hope, has a
metamorphosis exactly like Sargus, the pupa being enclosed
within the unaltered larval skin, but the transformations of
the typical Xylophagi are quite different” ; Dufour (/oc. cit.
p- 7 (1847)) states that the larva of Sargus Reaumurii, F.
(= Chrysonotus bipunctatus, Scop.), appears to belong to the
same class as that of Subula citripes, Duf.; and Perris (Ann.
Soc. Ent. Fr. sér. 4, t. x. (1870) p. 206) alludes to the close
resemblance in outward appearance between the larvee of
Subula and those of Pachygaster and Sargus. ‘The agree-
ment in general appearance and character of the integument
between larvee of Xylomyia and those of Chloromyia or Actina
must in fact strike anyone, and to attempt to argue that such
a remarkable external resemblance is due to mere conver-
gence, brought about by adaptation to a similar mode of life,
is manifestly out of the question. ‘lo refute such a sugges-
tion it is only necessary to compare a larva of Xylomyta with
that of Xylophagus or with any of the other dipterous larve
to be found in the mouldering stumps of dead trees. It is
true that the larve of Xylomyia appear to be amphipneustic,
while those of Stratiomyide in general are peripneustic; but,
according to Brauer, the number and position of the stigmata
is a very variable character, which has arisen by adaptation
in so far as these apertures are peripheral or merely polar.
Moreover, as I have shown above, the larva of Xylomyia
appears to exhibit distinct vestiges of peripheral stigmata.

With reference to the importance of insect larve as indi-
cating affinities, Brauer writes * :—“ ‘lo contemplate earlier
developmental stages of animals is, however, to cast a glance
at their pedigree, which is otherwise beyond our reach, and I
have already shown in another place (“‘ Betrachtungen tiber
die Verwandlung der Insekten im Sinne der Descendenz-
theorie.—II.,” Verh. z.-b. Ges. Wien, 1878, p. 151 et seq.)
that even such acguitred larval forms as those of the insects
are adapted for this purpose because they have become heredi-
tary.”

There is no necessity to repeat the arguments (drawn from

* Denkschr. k. Akad. Wiss. Wien, Bd. xlvii. (1883) p. 3.

Dipterous Genus Xylomyia, Rond. 189

the imagines, larva, mode of pupation, and nervous system
of the larve) used by Osten Sacken in his paper of 1882, to
which reference has already been made, to divorce Subula
from Xylophagus and substantiate its inclusion among the
Stratiomyide (Beridina), especially as the paper in question
is written in English. But it may be interesting to note that,
as pointed out by Osten Sacken himself, his conclusions (at
least so far as concerns Subula) were anticipated by Latreille
and Westwood. ‘The Jatter, in the ‘ Introduction’ &c. vol. 11.
pp. 533-534, and in the appended “ Synopsis of the Genera
of British Insects,” p. 130, makes a family Beride, to include
the genera Subula, Beris, and Actina, and another—the
Coenomyide—comprising Xylophagus and the non-British
genera Pachystomus (= Xylophagus) and Canomyia. West-
wood, however, erred in including his Coenomyide among
the Notacantha.

In 1891 Osten Sacken formally merged his Xylophagide
(i.e. Xylophagus+ Caenomyia) in the Leptide, the death-
warrant of the former family running as follows :—“ 'The very
problematic family of Xylophagide must be given up, and
its contents, temporarily at least, united with the Leptide ” *.
Prior to this (in 1886—Biol. Centr.-Am.) Osten Sacken had
placed Subula at the head of the family Stratiomyide ; and in
this connexion it may be remarked that the Beridina are
placed by Osten Sacken at the commencement of the Stratio-
myide T instead of at the end, where they (Berinz) are to be
found in Schiner’s Catalogue as well as in Verrall’s £ List,’
and in one of the recent catalogues by van der Wulpf. The
position of Xylomyia at the commencement of the Stratio-
myide instead of at the end is supported by a study of the
venation, which exhibits several noteworthy divergences from
the ordinary Stratiomyid type: it is sufficient to reier to the
shape of the discal cell, which is very different from that
which is a special characteristic of the Stratiomyide.

‘The conclusion, therefore, at which we arrive is that
Xylomyta yvepresents a primitive ancestral form of Stratio-
myid, given off from the common stem after the evolution of

* C. R. Osten Sacken, “Suggestions towards a better Grouping of
certain Families of the Order Diptera,” Ent. Month. Mag. ser. 2, vol. ii.
(1891) p. 38.

7 : eee of the Described Diptera of North America’ [2nd ed, ],

78, p. 43.

7 V. d. Wulp, ‘ Catalogue Described Dipt. S. Asia’ (1896), supra cit.
ee In the recently published ‘ Nieuwe Naamlijst van Nederlandsche

iptera, door F. M. van der Wulp en Dr. J. C. H. De Meijere.—Uitge-
geven door de Nederlandsche Entomologische Vereeniging als bijvuegsel
tot deel xli. van het Tijdschrift voor Entomologie’ (’S Gravenhage,
Martinus Nijhoff, 1898), the first genus of the Stratiomyide is Beris.

190 Bibliographical Notices.

the characteristic type of larva and mode of pupation, but
before the assumption on the part of the imago of the equally
characteristic features (venation, spurless tibiza *) exhibited
by the more specialized types of the family; so that, in the
present state of our knowledge, the only logical place for the
genus is at the beginning of the Stratiomyide f.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICES.

The Study of Man. By Atrrep C. Happon. 8yvo. Pages xxxi
and 512. With 49 Woodcuts and 8 Plates. Bliss and Co.,
London ; Putnam and Sons, New York. 1898.

Tus comprehensive work on Anthropology, descriptive and illus-
trated, is a good introduction to that science, by Professor Haddon,
D.Se. &e., and is one of the ‘ Progressive Science Series.” The
several subject-matters are treated as far as possible in a popular
manner.

* The anterior tibiee in Xylomyza are always devoid of the apical spurs,
with which the middle and posterior tibize are normally armed ; in certain
exotic species, however, there appears to be a tendency towards the dis-
appearance of the spurs on the posterior tibize also, for in a species (at

resent undetermined) from Ceylon, collected and presented by Lt.-Col.
Werbury, the spurs on the hind tibize are very small, while in Xylomyia
(Solva) hybotoides, Walk., from Gilolo, they are apparently absent
altogether.

+ Lest it should be thought that, after what had previously been
written by Osten Sacken and by Brauer, it was unnecessary to say any-
thing further as to the question of the true systematic position of the
genus Xylomyta, I may perhaps be permitted to point out that the con-
clusions of the authors in question appear to be ignored by recent writers
and catalogue-makers. Verrall, as already stated, in his ‘ List of British
Diptera’ (1888), placed Xylomyta among the Xylophagide, and his
example is followed by van der Wulp in the two recently published
catalogues of Diptera from South Asia and the Netherlands referred to
above. Lastly, Williston, in his ‘Manual of the Families and Genera of
North American Diptera’ (1896), p. 48, boldly places Xylomyta (the
extraordinary misprint Swbula Omyza, which represents the genus on the
page referred to, is noted in the “ Corrigenda #3 on p. iv, where Rondani’s
designation is substituted) among the Leptide, uniting it with the
American genera Glutops, Burgess, and Arthroceras, Williston, to form
the subfamily Arthroceratine. Unfortunately I cannot claim personal
acquaintance with either of these genera, but (as is evident from the
statements of their authors) they are so different from Xylomyza in
general habitus—not to mention the fact that in them the marginal vein
encompasses the entire border of the wing—that it is difficult to under-
stand how anyone could place Xylomyia in the same subfamily. W illiston,
however, appears to think that in AXylomyra also the marginal vein runs
right round the wing (ef. ‘ Entomologica Americana,’ vol. rt (1885-86)
p- 115), whereas as a matter of fact it stops short at the third vein, or at
any rate does not extend beyond the second vein which issues from the
discal cell. ' ne

On the whole, therefore, it seemed worth while to utilize this oppor-
tunity for once more drawing attention to the facts: that a genus should
have been assigned to three families by contemporary writers 1s scarcely
creditable to the present condition of dipterology.

Bibliographical Notices. 191

Whether dealing with civilized or with savage life, and with the
mavy representatives of various kinds and conditions of men in
different stages of culture, it is desirable to know how and why the
several people either agree or disagree one with another in their
habits of life and modes of thought. It is then possible to meet
them in their friendly advances with some satisfaction, or, if in un-
friendly aspects, without mutual harm. So in a siege, a knowledge
of the structure and bearings of a fortress enables the approach
to be made with precision and advantage.

To characterize one man in a family, or a particular family in a
tribe, or a tribe in a nation, or one nation as distinct from another,
it is necessary to have a clear knowledge of the bodily features and
the mental peculiarities of the individual and of the community,
whether limited or numerous.

The method of discriminating the individual and national cha-
racters of past and present peoples can be carried out by definitely
noting the measurements and proportions of the limbs, the shape
and size of the skull, including face, nose, and ears; also the colour
of eyes and hair. How these points can be usefully considered and
brought to bear on the determination, discrimination, and classifi-
cation of individuals and of national groups, the interesting book
before us is designed to illustrate. The several physical characters
and features alluded to above are dealt with in detail, beginning
with the importance of measurements, particularly of the head, arm,
hand, fingers, ears, and nose, in the identification of criminals.

To recognize the nature and relationship of bygone peoples—
whether prehistoric, primeval, and possibly almost primitive, such
as those who had nothing but stone for tools and weapons, or the
bronze-workers, or those who used iron—we must look for some
characters in their implements, in their skulls and other bones, and
the relics of the animals associated with them in their caves and
rock-shelters. Further, the drawings and carvings on the walls of
their cave-dwellings, and in the more elaborate tombs, give useful
indications of their doings and of others living with them as slaves
or otherwise. Their heaps of refuse, their mounds of sepulture and
perhaps of religious meaning, are also witnesses of their life and
death, their habits, intentions, and aspirations.

In the early chapters of this volume the ancient Egyptians,
Assyrians, Babylonians, and Lybians, as well as the old and the
modern Jews, the British, French, and some other European peoples,
are all shown to yield evidences of racial and other relationships
when studied as to structural details and habits of life.

Previous, however, to the monumental and documentary evidences
of Chaldsea and Egypt, many widespread peoples had left distinct
traces of their whereabouts, their doings, and their sentiments.

The systematic study of Man and Mankind, now known as the
science of Anthropology, is closely associated, on the one hand, with
Archeology, which leans on Geology for the explanation of some of
its most important problems, and, on the other hand, when directed
to the elucidation of the natural grouping, origins, and migrations
of tribes or nations, it becomes Ethnology and Ethnography, com-

192 Bibliographical Notices.

prising Sociology, Technology, Religion, Linguistics, and Folk-lore.
Physical and experimental Anthropology, or Somatology, treats of
the nature and structure of the body, anatomically and physio-
logically.

By means of Anthropology we recognize a very high antiquity of
the human race, its wide extension in early times, and the succes-
sive evolution of better types along certain lines, with varied stages
of culture, in their rise, maturation, and decadence.

Chapter V. illustrates the plan, details, and conclusions of an
ethnographic study of the inhabitants of a certain district, namely,
a part of West-Central and South-west France, comprising the
five Departments of Dordogne, Charente, Corréze, Creuse, and Haute
Vienne. ‘These notes are based on the data published by Dr. Col-
lignon in 1894 and 1895. Statistics and diagram-maps illustrate the
local distribution of special characters of the cranium, colour of hair
and eyes, and the stature.

Under the technical terms of brachycephalic and dolichocephalic
(as determined from the relative length, breadth, and height of the
skull), the inhabitants of this region are found to represent, on the
one hand, (1) short and dark, or (2) tall and fair brachycephals,
and, on the other hand, (3) fair and tall, or (4) dark dolichocephals.
Attention is drawn to the relationship of these several races and
their varieties to the ancient peoples of Europe and the Mediter-
ranean borders, and to the prehistoric folk or cave-men, of whom
there are abundant remains in Dordogne. Evidences of the per-
sistence of some of these races to the present day are traceable in
the peasantry of certain cantons.

Some generalizations respecting the succession of races as inhabi-
tants of this part of Western Europe are given in brief at pages 155-
160. Scattered examples of a type probably related to the Man of
the older stone-age have been observed. Early neolithic Man, in-
habiting some of the caves, was probably the same as those known
as the brown dolichocephals or Iberians. Short dark brachycephals
came into the French region, probably by two routes, from the East
in Neolithic times. Afterwards, as generally known, the fair
dolichocephals (** Kymri, Gauls, Cimbrians, Burgundians, Visigoths,
Franks, &c.”’) came from the north or north-east, first into the
plains of North Germany, thence to what are now the Netherlands
and Flanders. Divided by the Central Plateau of France, one
branch streamed away into Italy,and the other into Spain, and thence
to North Africa.

Under the heading of Technology or practical Ethnography,
dealing with the history of tools and other manufactured objects, the
author takes, as a familiar illustration of the gradual progress and
practical working out of ideas in adaptation to circumstances, the
history of the cart or wheeled vehicle, from its beginning as two
parallel sloping poles, without wheels or any receptacle for goods—
a condition not long since existing in Ireland and at present among
American Indians when shifting their wigwams.

There are careful notices of the persistence of special toys and

Bibliographical Notices. 193

games among children of many races, in unconscious continuation
of the early use of certain weapons and kinds of warfare, or of manual
work, of superstitions, and of gambling.

Much is collected in these chapters about the scratch-cradle and
its meanings, about kites, tops, and tug-of-war game, and especially
about the whirring, whizzing, buzzing, booming, perforated stick,
whirled violently around with a string. This (known as the “ Bull-
roarer ”) is recognized as the ancient widespread ceremonial imple-
ment, once awing the superstitious, and still important in the hands
of the conductors of the rites of Initiation in Australia. Children’s
singing-games are mainly concerned with courtship, marriage,
funeral rites, and belief in ghosts, evidently (though distantly)
representing ancient customs and lines of thought, in some cases
still surviving in full force among savages and, in feebler fashion,
among civilized communities.

Chapter XVI., pages 434-467, reprints the “ practical suggestions
for conducting ethnographical investigations in the British Islands,”
and includes at pages 467-489 “ Instructions for the Collection of
Folk-lore,” an important branch of the science.

Appendix A consists of Dr. D. G. Brinton’s comprehensive and
very useful Classification and International Nomenclature of the
Anthropological Sciences, namely :—(1) Somatology, (2) Ethnology,
(3) Ethnography, (4) Archeology, and their subdivisions. <A careful
Index completes this well-considered and welcome addition to the
library of both the experienced scientist and of the general reader
who wishes to enlarge his knowledge, feeling assured that a careful
systematic study of Mankind is a good and proper object for the
cultivated intellect of Man.

Trouessart’s Catalogue of Maminatls.

Catalogus Mammalium, tam viventium quam fossilium. By E. L.
Trovrssart. Parts 1V.and Y., containing the Orders Tillodontia,
Ungulata, Sirenia, Cetacea, Edentata, Marsupialia, and Mono-
tremata. Berlin: Friedlinder and Son, 1898.

Wires the exception of the Addenda and Index Dr. Trouessart has
now completed his stupendous task; and all naturalists owe him a
debt of gratitude, the extent of which it is almost impossible to
express in words. ‘Till he had this work to refer to, it was in many
cases a matter of extreme difficulty for the zoologist or paleontolo-
gist to discover how many species (whether valid or nominal) of a
particular group had been named; but for the future all is compa-
ratively plain sailing.

That the work has faults is, as we have pointed out in previous
notices, from the nature of the case, inevitable; but the marvel
is that these faults and omissions are so few and far between. To
have enabled him to complete his labour Dr. Trouessart must
possess patience and industry far above the average, while he has
also the technical knowledge of his subject which raises his work to

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iii. 14

194 Bibliographical Notices.

a much higher level than the efforts of the mere compiler and biblio-
graphist. In the name of our fellow students of recent and fossil
mammals, we beg to tender to the learned author our most hearty
congratulations and thanks.

As the Ungulata happen to be a group with which the reviewer
has a more extensive acquaintance than he possesses of some of the
other mammalian orders, such critical observations as seem necessary
may be restricted to that group.

One of the first points that strikes us is that the author has not
been sufficiently bold in relegating to the rank of synonyms names
which have clearly no right to stand by themselves. Secondly, it
is not quite easy to understand the method he has adopted in the
selection of the generic names he employs. Take the instance of the
true American deer, all of which are included in the genus Cariacus,
with several subgeneric divisions. Now he admits that Cariacus is
antedated by Dorcelaphus, while he further states that both are
antedated by Mazama of H. Smith; but he adds that this latter is
not the same as Mazama of Rafinesque, which is earlier than all.
And yet on page 897 the Mazama of Rafinesque is admitted as
identical with Coassus, which is itself one of the subgenera of
Cariacus. Accordingly the latter term has no sort of justification
for its retention, while if all the exclusively American groups of
deer, with the exception of the pudus, are to be included ina single
genus, that genus must, it would seem, be Mazama, if priority is to
be regarded at all.

That these American deer are best included in a single genus,
with subgeneric divisions, we quite agree, and we also hold with
the author in arranging the majority of the deer of the Old World
in the single genus Cervus, with analogous subgenera. But when
this course is adopted it appears to us clear that the oxen should be
treated in a similar manner; whereas we find the author employing
terms like Bibos and Bison in a generic instead of a subgeneric
sense.

Although, as will be evident from these remarks, we have a
preference, and that a strong one, it is, to our thinking, a matter of
small moment whether generic terms are used in a broad or a
restricted sense. Yet it is a matter of importance that some degree
of uniformity in such usage should be maintained in allied groups.
This, we submit, is not the case with Dr. Trouessart’s classification
of the Pecora.

Again, he does not maintain a uniform practice with regard to
the “ Scomber scomber” principle. While we have, for instance, on
page 829 the babirusa figuring as Babirussa babirussa, we find the
roebuck (p. 888) appearing as Capreolus caprea, in spite of the fact
that capreolvs was the Linnean specific name of the latter. Here,
again, one or the other course should be adopted and uniformly
adhered to.

All the foregoing instances refer to classificatory matters, which
are, after all, more or less dependent on individual opinion. On
page 881 we find, howeyer, the author deliberately going out of his

Geological Society. 195

way to contradict well-known authors on a matter of fact. We
refer to the inclusion of the Altai wapiti (Cervus eustephanus of
Blanford) as a synonym of the Persian red deer (C. maral). <A
greater blunder could hardly have been committed.

Neither is the work quite free from misprints, as witness ucercus
for Rucervus, on page 875.

Nevertheless, as already said, the blemishes and faults are but
few, while good work is pre-eminently conspicuous ; and we there-
fore close this brief notice with a repetition of the sense of the obliga-
tion under which Dr. Trouessart has placed all working students of
the Mammalia. RL.

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.

November 9th, 1898.—W. Whitaker, B.A., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair,

The following communication was read :—

‘On the Paleozoic Radiolarian Rocks of New South Wales.’
By Prof. T. W. Edgeworth David, B.A., F.G.S., and E. F. Pittman,
Esq., Assoc.R.S.M., Government Geologist, New South Wales.

The first evidence of the presence of radiolaria in the rocks
of New South Wales was obtained by Prof. David in 1895, as
the result of a microscopic examination of some red jaspers from
different areas. Further research by the same author was stimulated
and guided by seeing the radiolarian rocks recently discovered in
Mullion Island, Cornwall, and in the Culm-districts of Devonshire,
during a visit to England in 1896; and on his return to Sydney he
recognized the existence of a series of cherts, lydites, and siliceous
limestones containing radiolaria in four distinct areas. A brief
preliminary account of these rocks was communicated to the
Linnean Society of New South Wales, and specimens were for-
warded to Dr. G. J. Hinde for determination of the radiolaria.
Subsequently, in conjunction with Mr. Pittman, a detailed exami-
nation of the rocks in the field was carried out, and the results are
given in the present paper. In this final investigation it was
ascertained that not only in the cherts and siliceous limestones, but
also in the jointed claystones which form the prevalent sedimentary
rocks of the Tamworth district, radiolaria were distributed ingvast
numbers.

The three chief areas of radiolarian rocks in New South Wales
are JBingara, Barraba, and Tamworth, situated in the New
England District, between 180 and 270 miles north of Sydney.
Bingara, the farthest locality, is 30 miles north of Barraba; and this
latter is 60 miles north of Tamworth. The character of the rocks
in these localities tends to show that they belong to the same
series ; and in this case its extension from south to north is about
85 miles.

196 Geological Society.

The fourth area of radiolarian rocks is at the well-known Jenolan
Caves, about 67 miles due west of Sydney and about 200 miles
south-by-west of Tamworth. It is probable that the Jenolan rocks
may be on a somewhat different, perhaps lower, horizon than those
of the northern district.

At Bingara and Barraba the radiolarian rocks consist of red
jaspers and fine-grained jointed claystones, accompanied by thick
coral-limestones and numerous beds of interstratified tufaceous
materials. The radiolaria occur as casts in chalcedony in the
jaspers and claystones. The rocks dip at ahighangle. No macro-
scopic fossils are known with certainty from these districts.

In the Jenolan Cave district the radiolarian rocks consist of black
cherts and clay-shales overlying the Cave Coral Limestone, and of
greenish-grey shales underlying this rock. The series is traversed
by felsitic dykes, and the hardness of the cherts is attributed to
silica derived from the acidic dykes, rather than to that derived from
the tests of the siliceous organisms.

It is at Tamworth that the radiolarian rocks are developed on a
grand scale; their measured thickness amounts to 9267 feet, after
allowing for an immense fault, and neither upward nor downward
limit is shown. The rocks consist of jointed claystones, black
cherts, lenticular siliceous radiolarian limestones, and coral-lime-
stones. Numerous beds of submarine tuff also occur. The claystones
are largely formed of radiolaria. In certain beds of the claystones,
and in some of the tuffs as well, impressions of Leptdodendron
australe are not uncommon; and beds of radiolarian limestone
occur in close proximity to the beds with these plant-remains, and
radiolaria moreover abound even in the same rock with the Lepido-
dendron-impressions.

At the eastern end of the Tamworth section, and also near the
westerly portion, there are limestones containing corals, which
have been determined by Mr. R. Etheridge, jun. They are similar
to those of the Burdekin Limestones of Queensland which belong to
the Middle Devonian, and the radiolarian rocks are thus shown
to belong to this period.

Analyses of the radiolarian chert, cherty shale, shale, and
siliceous limestone prepared by Mr. J. C. H. Mingaye, F.C.S., are
given ; and from these it appears that, while the amount of silica in
the chert and shale ranges between 68 and 91 per cent., there is
only 18 per cent. in the siliceous limestone.

Descriptions of numerous micro-sections both of the sedimentary
and of the tufaceous rocks are appended, and in their conclusions
the Authors point to the remarkably fine-grained character of the
materials forming the base of the radiolarian cherts, jaspers, and
shales, the constituent particles not being more than 0-05-0:025
mm. (<4, to ypyy inch) indiameter. They are of opinion that the
radiolaria were deposited in clear sea-water, which, though suffi-
ciently far from land to be beyond the reach of any but the finest
sediment, was nevertheless probably not of very considerable depth.

taco

—
tae

— 7 .
ees eee Ee lat neti

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[SEVENTH SERIES. ]

No. 15. MARCH 1899.

XXXI.—Note on the Seaual Characters of Ligia oceanica. By
Cuartes Cuitton, M.A., D.Sc. M.B., C.M., F.LS.,
Research Fellow, Edinburgh University.

[Plate VIII]

WHILE investigating some Australasian species of Ligia
recently I found that in two of the species there were well-
marked differences betweer the male and the female in the
character of the anterior appendages of the perawon. It is
probable that such differences are fairly common in the
Ligiide, though in consequence of the general uniformity of
the pereonal appendages in this family, and of the fact that
they are largely concealed beneath the body and have not
been hitherto much used in specific descriptions, these differ-
ences are not very prominent and inay be readily overlooked.
For the purpose of comparison I examined specimens of
Ligia oceanica, and found that there are similar differences in
this species also, both in the anterior pereeopoda and, to a
less degree, in the antenna; and as I cannot find that anyone
has drawn special attention to these sexual differences in this

species, | now briefly describe them.
Bate and Westwood say :—“ The male is much larger than

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iii. 15

198 Dr. C. Chilton on the

the female, and is generally of a paler and less varied colour” *.
Budde-Lund gives the dimensions as “ Long. 20-28 mm.;
lat., ¢ 8-10 mm., 2 10-14 mm.; alt. 3°5-5 mm.” fT; but,
so far as I can ascertain, gives no difference beyond this one
in width, while Sars, on the other hand, speaks only of
a difference in length, saying, “ Length of adult female
20 mm., of male up to 28 mm.” ¢ Dollfus, in his paper on
the distribution of the genus Lgia, says :— Les femelles,
plus petites, sont généreusement plus nombreuses que les
males ” §.

If we turn to other species of Ligia, our recorded know-
ledge of the differences between the male and female does not
seem to be much more complete. Budde-Lund gives very
brief descriptions of the first pair of legs in the male in Ligta
occidentalis, L. cinerascens, L. exotica, L. Olfersii, and
L. dentipes, but does not state in what respect these ap-
pendages differ from those of the female; in the case of
L. exotica he mentions also that in the male the uropods are
three fourths the length of the body, but in the female
scarcely two thirds||. Dollfus has also drawn attention to
the differences between the sexes in L. ewotica as regards the
first pair of legs, and has figured the extremities of these legs
in the typical form and also in specimens from Bermuda, for
which he has established the variety hirtitarsis {].

In the nearly allied family of the Trichoniscide we find
that sexual differences have been described in Trichoniscus
roseus by Max Weber** and Sarstf among others, though, in
keeping with that fickleness which so often characterizes these
differences, here it is the seventh pair of legs, and not the
first, that is specially modified in the male.

Dollfus has described and figured a remarkable enlarge-
ment of the extremity of the first, third, and fourth legs in
Philoscia anomala, and has given references to similar modi-
fication in other species of Philoscia. In the case of P. anomala,
since the enlargement was found in some of the males only,
he thinks that it is perhaps a temporary character fully

* ¢ British Sessile-eyed Crustacea,’ ii. p. 446,

+ ‘Crustacea Isopoda Terrestria,’ p. 260.

t ‘Crustacea of Norway,’ II, Isopoda, p. 156.

§ ‘ Feuille des jeunes Naturalistes,’ sér. ili. no, 278,

|| ‘ Crustacea Isopoda Terrestria, pp. 264-268.

q| “Isopodes terrestres du ‘ Challenger, ” Société d’Etudes scientifiques
de Paris, xii.‘ année, p. 8.

** “ Anatomisches tiber Trichonisciden,” Archiy fiir mikroskop, Anat,
Bd. xix. p. 624 &e.

tt ‘ Crustacea of Norway,’ II. Isopoda, p. 163.

Sexual Characters of Ligia oceanica. 199

developed only at the pairing-season*. Later on he described
a similar modification in the first pair of legs in the male of
Philoscia variegata from Venezuela TF.

Probably similar differences will be found to exist in many
other species of Terrestrial Isopoda, and may have been re-
corded; but the above references, for some of which I have
to thank the Rev. T. R. R. Stebbing and Monsieur Adrien
Dollfus, are all that I have so far been able to find on the
subject.

In Ligta oceanica the male when fully adult is, as has been
already stated by other authors, usually larger than the
female; but though the female, when its brood-pouch is fully
distended with eggs or young, may be wider in proportion
than the male, this does not seem to be always so, for in the
case of the specimens specially examined and drawn for this
paper the male was 25 millim. long and 12 millim. wide,
while the female was 24 millim. long bué only 10 millim.
broad, though the brood-pouch was well filled with eggs.

The outer antenne show some slight differences in the two
sexes, being appreciably stouter in the male both in the peduncle
and in the flagellum. This will be seen on comparison of
figs. 1 ant and 2 ant (Pl. VIII.), which are taken trom male
and females of nearly the same size, and are magnitied to
approximately the same amount. In the female the antennze
are sometimes slightly more spiny than in the male, but [
have not been able to make out any constant differences in
the proportions of the various joints. I was in the museum
of the Dundee University College when the greater stoutness
of the antenne of the male was first noticed, and Mr. Calman
and J then went over a large number of specimens in the
collections of the museum, and found that in fully adult
specimens we could correctly separate the males and females
by the characters of the antennze alone; in smaller and
immature specimens the differences are naturally not so
marked.

When we turn to the appendages of the perzon we find
that there are slight modifications in the male in the first,
second, and third pairs. As these three pairs differ from one
another only in the fact that each is very slightly longer than
the preceding, I have drawn only the second pair (tig. 1 prp”*).

etc e..p.D.
+ Extrait des ‘Annales de la Société Entomologique de France,’
vol, xii, p. 543,
fe

200 On the Sexual Characters of Ligia oceanica.

On comparison of this with fig. 2 prp*, which represents the
same appendage in the female, it will be seen that in the male
the meros, carpus, and propodos are all produced on the inner
side into a flat plate-like expansion, with the free border
more or less convex and fringed with short sete; on the
anterior surface this expansion is on a level with the rest of
the joint, but on the posterior aspect (shown in fiz. 1 prp*)
the cylindrical portion of each joint can be seen and the plate-
like character of the expansion thus rendered more evident.
On examination with a high power each expansion shows on
its surface rows of small serrations, giving it an appearance
like that of a file; and further magnification shows that this
is due to closely-set rows of minute sete. In the female
there is no trace of these expansions, and the inner border of
the different joints, more especially of the meros and carpus,
bear numerous stiff seta, which are larger and more irregular
in size than those found in the corresponding positions in the
inale.

In order to make this short paper on the sexual characters
of Ligia oceanica somewhat more complete, I have given
figures of the first and second pleopoda of the male. These
have been already drawn and briefly described by Sars *
and as their form can be readily made out from the figures, a
detailed description is not here necessary. In the second
pleopod (Pl. VIII. fig. 1 plp*) the whole of the endopodite
appears to be modified into a two- jointed styliform organ,
moved by powerful muscles; its second joint is long and
cylindrical, and along with the external male organ proper
(which is figured in connexion with the first pleopod in
fig. 1 pip’) no doubt forms a channel for the passage of the
spermatozoa ; its extremity is roughened on the inner side from
the presence of numerous closely-sct short sete.

In both pleopods is seen a more or less oval plate, external
to the exopodite and arising apparently from the outer part of
the basal portion of the pleopod; in the case of the second
pleopod its margin is fringed with iine sete. ‘This plate has
been figured by Sars in this and in other species of the
Oniscoidea, but I cannot find any special reference to it, and
J am not quite certain as to its exact homology and signifi-
cance; it appears, however, to correspond with a similar ‘plate
found on the third, fourth, and fifth pleopoda in the species of

* “Crustacea of Norway,’ II, Isopodi, p. 155, pl. Ixx, figs. plp' ¢ and
pl’ ds.

On the Pierine Genus Huphina. 201

Phreatotcus which I have elsewhere suggested may be looked
upon as an “ epipodite ” *,

This paper was commenced in the zoological laboratory of
University College, Dundee; and [ have to record my best
thanks to Professor d’Arcy W. ‘Thompson, C.B., for kind
permission to make free use of his collections, and to
Mr. W. T. Calman for assistance in this and other matters.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VIIL.

Fig. 1 ant. Outer antenna of a male specimen of Ligia oceanica, 25 mm.
long and 12 mm. broad. x 6.

Fig. 1 prp*. Second peiveopod of the same specimen. X 9.

Fig. 2 ant. Outer antenna of a female specimen, 24 mim. long, LO mm.
broad (brood-pouch full of eggs), x 6.

Fig. 2 prp*. Second pereopod of the same specimen, xX 9.

Fig. 1 plp*. First pleopod of male, posterior aspect. x 19.

Fig. 1 pip’. Second pleopod of male, posterior aspect. x 19.

XXXIT.—A Revision of the Pierine Genus Huphina, with
Notes on the Seasonal Phases and Descriptions of new
epecress By “AnrhuR G. Burren, “Ph.D. i los.
PeAiS.5, Ke.

THE present genus is one of the most pleasing in the sub-
family Pierine. It is related to Ganoris and Pinacopteryz,
but some of the species show apparent affinity to Catophaga
(from which, however, the absence of the anal tuft in the
males would readily serve to distinguish this sex). It sepa-
rates into two well-defined groups, the first of which commences
with forms resembling Catophaga and having well-defined
seasonal phases, but terminates with forms more nearly
resembling Delias in which seasonal phases are possibly non-
existent. ‘The second group in its colouring reminds one of
Delias, Catopsilia, and Ganoris, but concludes with species
having an under-surface colouring peculiar to this genus
alone. ‘The seasonal phases when known are less pronounced
in their distinctive characters than in the earlier forms of the
first group, and vary somewhat in the subgroups having the
coloration of the genera above noted; those which remind
one of Delias seem to have no defined seasonal phases.

* See Trans. Linn. Soc., Zool. ser. 2, vol. vi. part 2, pp. 195 & 203;
and ‘ Records of the Australian Museum,’ yol, i. p. 164,

202 Dr. A. G. Butler on

Group I.
1. Huphina inopinata.

Belenois inopinata, Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xi.
p. 889 (1883).

Wet phase, Fiji. ¢ type, 9 2 (S. & G. coll.), B. M.

2. LHuphina acrisa.

Pieris acrisa, Buisduval, Bull. Soc. Ent. France, 1859, p. elvi.
Belenois terranea, Butler, Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser, 4, vol. xx.
p. 356 (1877).

Lifu, Loyalty group. Type, B. M.

H. acrisa was described from the extreme wet form of the
male, in which the under surface of the wings is white. A
second (perhaps later) wet form has the apex of the primaries
and whole ground-colour of the secondaries sulphur-yellow.
The intermediate form has the same parts sordid buff-
brownish, with the dark markings less pronounced, and,
finally, the dry form (JJ. terranea) las these parts earthy
brown. Owing to the acquisition of five examples, including
two females, in the Godman and Salvin series, we now have
all the phases; previously we only possessed males of the
extreme types—J//. acrisa and terranea.

Tachyris maculata, Grose-Smith, seems nearly allied to
this, but I have not seen the tvpe.

3. LHuphina perimale.

©. Papilio perimale, Donovan, Ins. New Holl. pl. xx. fig. 1 (1805).
6. Pieris periclea, Wallace (not Felder), Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 3, vol. iv.
p. 333 (1867).

©. Tachyris amarella, Wallace, t. c. p. 375, pl. ix. fig. 2 (1867).

3S, 2? ¥, New Caledonia (2, Wallace’s type). B.M.

‘The wet phase, with yellow under surface to secondaries,
is in the Hewitson collection; //. amarella is the female of
the intermediate phase, and typical //. perimale, with deep
earth-brown under surface to secondaries, is the dry phase.
In the females the width of the black borders above varies
seasonally, being least developed in the dry form.

4, Huphina scyllara.

Pieris scyllara, McLeay, King’s Surv. Austral., App. p. 459 (1827).
Pieris lanassa, Boisduyal, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 477 (1836).

Pieris nabis, Lucas, Rey. et Mag. de Zool. 1852, p. 326,

Tieris perithea, Felder, Reise der Noy., Lep. ii. p. 169 (1865).
Pieris periclea, elder, 1. ¢,

Pieris nevses, Wallace, Trans, Ent. Soc. ser. 8, vol. iv. p. 388, pl. vi.

fig. 8 (1867).

—_

the Pierine Genus Huphina. 203

Australia, Baudin Island, &e. Fifty-three examples,

B.M.

HT, scyllara is the extreme wet phase, with white under
surface to the secondaries; a second wet phase has these
wings pale lemon-yellow below ; a third (H. nabis) has them
bright narcissus-yellow, and a fourth (ZZ. danassa) saffron-
yellow. In Z. periclea, the intermediate phase, they are
buff-brownish, and in //, narses, the dry phase, earthy brown.
During his visits to Baudin Island Mr. J. J. Walker obtained
the whole of these variations.

5. Huphina Kiihni,
Pieris Kiihni, Rober, C. B. Iris, p. 20, pl. i. figs. 2, 3 (1885).
Island of Kabia, Celebes.
Near /. scyllara; the black border of the male narrower,
the secondaries of the female sulphur-yellow.

6. Huphina rachel.
Pieris rachel, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 469 (1836),
Wet phase, Java (8S. & G. coll.). og, B. M.

7. Huphina discolor,
Pieris discolor, Mathew, ‘Trans. Ent. Soc. 1887, p. 47.

Ugi and Ulaua, Solomon group. Types, B. M.
We received this fine species from the Godman and Salvin

collection.

8. Huphina agnata.

Pieris agnata, Grose-Smith, Ent. Month. Mag. xxv. p. 301 (1889).

Guadalecanar and Ulaua, Solomon group. B. M.

Hight examples of this species were received from the
Godman and Salvin collection; it is exactly intermediate
between /. discolor and H. Wallaceana, but differs from both
in the absence of any subapical spot on the upper surface of
the primaries.

9. Huphina Wallaceana.
Pieris Wallaceana, Felder, Reise der Noy., Lep, ii. p. 168 (1865),

204 Dr. A. G. Butler on

10. Huphina pygmea.
Pieris pitys, yar. pygme@a, Rober, Tijd. yoor Ent. xxxiv. p. 279 (1891),
Wetter and Damma Island. ¢ g¢, B. M.

In our examples the border of the secondaries is narrower
than in H. pitys. I believe this to be Herr Rober’s species.

11. Huphina perictione.
Pieris perictione, Felder, Reise der Noy., Lep. ii. p. 168 (1865).
Aru.
Appears to be one of the links between HW. Wallaceana and
fl, pitys.

12. Huphina pitys.
Pieris pitys, Godart, Ene. Méth. ix. p. 184 (1819) ; Lucas, Lep. Exot,
pl. xxix. fig. 1 (1835).
Timor, Kepang, Semao, Dili, Java. B. M.
I cannot help thinking that Herr Réber must have wrongly
identified this species, confounding examples of typical
H, pitys with his H. pygmea.

13. Huphina consanguis.
Belenois consanguis, Butler, P. Z. 8S. 1883, p. 569.
Larat, Timor Laut. Type ¢, B. M.
The broader dark brown area on the primaries, with no
subapical spot, the more chocolate borders, and more saffron

tint of the secondaries below at once distinguish this from
FI, pitys.

14. Huphina latilimbata.

Belenois latilimbata, Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xviii.
p: 247 (1876).

Port Moresby, New Guinea, and Darnley Island. Type,
B. M.

Our series consists at present of sixteen examples.

15. Huphina mentes.

Pieris mentes, Wallace, Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 3, vol. iv. p. 332 (1867),

Pieris synchroma, Rober, Tijd. Ent. xxxiv. p. 278; figured in xxxy,
(1882).

Lombock. 4, B. M.

Four examples are in the Hewitson collection.

the Pierine Genus Huphina. 205

16. Huphina Smithi?,
Belenois pallida, Smith, Noyit, Zool. i. p. 336 (1894),

Biak, New Guinea.
Allied to H, latilimbata. The name Huphina pallida is
preoccupied.

17. Huphina Dohertyana.
Belenois Dohertyana, Smith, Noyit. Zool. i. p. 337 (1394).

New Guinea.

18. Huphina affinis.
Pieris affinis, Vollenhoven, Mon. Pier. p. 40, pl. v. fig. 2 (1865).
Celebes. B. M.

19. Huphina Boisduvaliana.

Pieris Boisduvaliana, Felder, Wien. ent. Monatschr. vi. p. 287 (1862);
Reise der Nov., Lep. ii. p. 168, pl. xxiv. fig. 8 (1865),
Huphina Semperi and talbagona, Semper, Reisen im Arch. Phil. y.
pp. 237, 288, Taf. xxxvii. figs. 13-15, Taf. xxxviii. figs, 2, 3 (1890).
Wet form (=H. balbagona), § 3, 2 9, Mindanao, Luzon.
B. M.
Intermediate form (=H. Sempert), 3, 2? 2, Mindanao,
Davao, Luzon. B. M.
Dry form (=f, Boisduvaliana), 3 $, Mindoro, Manilla.
ie. Mf.

We now come to a subgroup which in colouring recalls
the genus Delias, and on that account has mostly been con-
founded with that genus, although its neuration proves it to
belong to Huphina,

20. Huphina quadricolor.

Pieris quadricolor, Salyin and Godman, P, Z, S. 1877, p. 148, pl. xxiii,
figs, 3, 4.

New Ireland, New Britain, Duke-of- York Island, and New
Pomerania. Nine examples, including type, B. M.

The correct position of this species alone was recognized ;
the others were referred to elias by various writers.

206 Dr. A. G. Butler on

21. Huphina euryxanthe.

Pieris euryxanthe, Honrath, Berl. ent. Zeitschr. xxxvi. p. 435 (1892)
Oberthur, Etudes d’Ent. xix. p. 6, pl. ii. figs. 7 & 9 (1894).

Port Moresby. ¢, B. M.

It would not surprise me to discover that this was the dry
phase of the following species.

22. Huphina abnormis.
Q. Tachyris abnormis, Wallace, Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 3, vol. iv. p. 368,
pl. vili. fig. 5 (1867).
Seven specimens. ¢ go, Port Moresby, B. M. ? type,

coll. Hewitson.

23. Huphina ladas.

Delias ladas, Grose-Smith, Novit. Zool. i. p. 585 (1894) ; Rhop. Exot,
ii., Del. pl. v. figs. 4-6 (1895).

New Guinea.
Nearest to the following, but yellow at base of secondaries
on under surface.

24. Huphina ornytion.
Pieris ornytion, Godman and Salvin, P. Z. 8. 1880, p. 6138, pl. lvi.
ig. 5.
Seven examples. ¢ ¢, 2? 9, Port Moresby (including
type). B. M.
25. Huphina Dohertyt.
Pieris Dohertyi, Oberthiir, Etudes d’Ent. xix. p. 61, pl. ii. fig. 2 (1894).
New Guinea.

I must confess that the fact of the last five species occurring
together in New Guinea, in conjunction with the fact that
similarly coloured species of the Nymphalid genus Mynes
occur there, is very suspicious. I cannot help thinking that
breeding experiments would tend greatly to reduce the
number of these “‘ species ”’ in both genera.

Group II.

26. Huphina temena,
Pieris temena, Hewitson, Exot. Butt. ii., Prer. pl. iii. fig. 19 (1861). °
Lombock. ¢ 6, ?, B.M.

the Prerine Genus Huphina. 207

27. Huphina tamar.

Pieris tamer, Wallace, Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 8, vol. iv. p. 887, pl. vi.
fig. 2 (1867).

?, Baly. Type, coll. Hewitson.

28. Huphina julia.

Huphina julia, Doherty, Journ. As. Soc. Beng. lx. 2, p. 187, pl. il.
fig. 12 (1891) ; Oberthiir, Etudes, xix. pl. iii. figs, 11 & 17 (1894).

Sumba.

29. Huphina leta.
¢o. Pieris leta, Hewitson, Exot. Butt. iii., Pier. pl. vii. figs. 45, 46
(1862); 2. Vollenhoven, Mon. Pier. p. 31, pl. iv. fig. 8 (1865).

Timor. 6 ¢,B.M. Type, coll. Hewitson.

30. Huphina pactolica.
6. Pieris pactolicus, Butler, P. Z. S. 1865, p. 455, pl. xxvi. fig. 1.
Seven examples, Borneo. Type, B. M.

31. LHuphina celebensis.

Huphina celebensis, Rothschild, Deut. ent. Zeit., Lep. v. p. 459, pl. iv.
figs. 1, 2 (1892).

Macassar, Celebes. Eight examples, B. M.

32. Huphina eperia.
Pieris eperta, Boisduval, Sp, Gén. Lép. i. p. 470 (1836).
Minahassa, Macassar, Celebes. Five examples, B. M.

In the Hewitson collection the female is regarded as that
sex of 7. timnatha.

33. Huphina timnatha.
6. Pieris timnatha, Hewitson, Exot. Butt. iii., Pier. pl. vii. figs. 47, 48
(1862).

Q. Pieris emma, Vollenhoven, Mon. Pier. p. 24, pl. iv. fig. 2 (1865).

Pieris eurygonia?, Hoptier, Stett. ent. Zeit. 1874, p. 23.

Celebes and Batchian. Five examples, B. M.

Hopfter’s type is said to have been obtained on the Togian
Islands. It is described as having seven white submarginal
spots on the primarics above and four on the secondaries ;
this is the case in some males of the present species.

208 Dr. A. G. Butler on

34. Huphina siamensis, sp. n.

Nearly related to //. lea, larger; the males with con-
siderably narrower black outer border to all the wings, the
veins on the apical third of primaries much more narrowly
black-bordered (not by any means subconfluent, as in HZ, lea) ;
the orange patch on the secondaries much larger, but less
vividly coloured: below, the black veins on the primaries are
more slender and the yellow submarginal spots are much
larger and more conspicuous, whilst the disk beyond the cell
is of a clearer paler yellow ; this is also the case in the female,
which in other respects much more closely resembles that sex
of H. lea than the males of the two species do.

Expanse of wings, ¢ 68 millim., ? 60 millim,

Siam, Chentaboon. ¢@ do, 2, B. M.

35. Huphina lea.
3. Pieris lea, Doubleday, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. xvii. p. 25 (1846).
Wet form, dd, 2 2, Moulmein, Rangoon, Perak, Singa-

pore. B. M.

Intermediate form, ¢ g, various parts of Burma, Philip-
pines. B. M.

Dry form, ¢ g, 2, various parts of Burma and Pegu.
B. M.

The type is our male from Moulmein incorrectly figured
in Doubleday’s ‘ Genera of Diurnal Lepidoptera’ under the
name of Pieris clemanthe.

36. Huphina hespera, sp. n.

Above very like /Z. lea, but the female showing scarcely
a trace of the tawny flush on the secondaries ; below, all the
dark markings are much broader and more confluent, the
apical area of the primaries being deep vinous brown,
enclosing two or three white dashes beyond the cell and an
imperfect submarginal series. In the wet phase nearly half
the secondaries is occupied by the dark brown outer border
and most of the submarginal spots are obscured ; the costal
border of the primaries and the subcostal and median veins
are much more heavily black-bordered than in the allied
species. In the dry phase the border of the secondaries is
reduced to half the width. Intermediate examples also occur
in which this border is slightly wider than in the extreme
dry types.

Expanse of wings, ¢ ¢ 60-70 millim., @ 58 millim,

Sarawak, Labuan, Singapore. B. M.

the Pierine Genus Huphina. 209

Our series consists of seventeen examples. The species
has probably stood in collections as clemanthe, which is a
Prioneris.

37. Huphina naomi.
Pieris naomi, Wallace, Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 3, vol. iv. p. 836 (1867).

36, 2, Lombock. B.M. Types, coll. Hewitson.

Var. LHuphina etrene.

Var. Huphina eirene, Doherty, Journ. As. Soc. Beng. lx. 2, p. 188
(1891).

“Sumba” (Doherty). &,Sambawa. B. M.

38. Huphina Oberthurt.
Pieris Oberthuri, Rober, Tijd. v. Ent. xxxiv. p. 277; figured in xxxv.
(1892).

“Flores” (Réber). f, Laraut. B. M.

This is very close to the preceding species, but the sub-
marginal spots on the under surface are much larger and
more continuous, the apical spots on the primaries forming a
tapering yellow patch ; the secondaries are also more golden,
with the subcostal vein and third median branch dusky.

539. Huphina ethel.
Huphina ethel, Doherty, Journ. As. Soc. Beng. lx. 2, p. 29 (1891).
Engano (Doherty).

Nearest to H. judith, but the border of the secondaries
below extending to the cell, as in the wet phase of Hl. hespera.

40, Huphina judith.
Papilio judith, Fabricius, Mant. Ins. ii. p. 22 (1787); Donovan, Ins,
Ind. pl. xxvii. fig. 2 (1800).
Papilio licea?, Fabricius, t. c. p. 20 (1787).
Thirteen examples, Java. B. M.
The type of P. “icea not being in existence, that species
can never be identified with certainty.

41. Huphina selma.

Pieris selma, ‘Weymer, Stett. ent. Zeit. xlvi. p. 269, pl. ii. fig. 5
(1885).

“ Nias”? (Weymer).
Differs from HH. judith in its much narrower border to

210 Dr. A. G. Butler on

secondaries ; if both insects occurred in the same island, they
would undoubtedly represent wet and dry phases of the same
species, but there is no evidence at present that either insect
varies seasonally.

42, Huphina aspasia,

Papilio aspasia, Stoll, Suppl. Cramer, pl. xxxiii. figs. 3, 3¢ (1790).

Pieris asterope, Godart, Ene. Méth. ix. p. 154 (1819).

Pieris jael, Wallace, Trans. Ent. Soe. ser. 3, vol. iv. p. 335 (1867).

Amboina, Ceram, Bouru, Sulu Archipelago. B. M.

H, jael from Bouru appears to have yellower secondaries
than typical H. aspasia, but our examples of the latter are
old and perhaps have deepened with age—a very common
occurrence among the Pierine.

43. Huphina olga.
Pontia olga, Eschscholtz, in Kotzeb. Reise, iil. p. 214, pl. ix. figs. 21 a, b
(1821).

Huphina imogene, Doherty, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Beng. lx. p, 188 (1892).

Batchian, Philippines, Hong-Kong. B. M.

The wet form, of which we have fourteen examples, attains
a greater size, is more heavily adorned with black veins and
borders, and is deeper in colouring than the dry form, of
which we have eighteen examples. //. ¢mogene (figured by
Hombron and Jacquinot as Hl. judith) belongs to the dry
phase. HH. olga differs from H. aspasia in the broader borders
to the secondaries.

44. Huphina olgina.
Pieris aspasia, var. olgina, Staudinger, Deut. ent. Zeit., Lep, 1889,
p. 19.

Palawan.. 6 ¢, 9, B. M.

Differs from /. o/ga in the clear butter-yellow of the sub-
apical spots of the primaries and of the secondaries on the
under surface. The female which we possess differs greatly,
the upper surface being chiefly ashy grey, with the usual pale
patches quite white,

45, Huphina hester.
2. Pieris hester, Vollenhoven, Mon. Pier. p. 24, pl. iv. fig. 1 (1865).

Mysol and Waigiou. ¢, ?, coll. Hewitson.
Allied to H, olga.

The following species, though possessing the pattern of the

the Pterine Genus Huphina. 211

preceding forms, more nearly resemble Ganoris napi and
allies in coloration.

46. Huphina phryne.
Papilio phryne, Fabricius, Syst. Ent. p. 473 (1775).
Papilio evagete, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iu. pl. eexxi. F, G (1782).
Papilio zeuxippe, Cramer, é. c. iv. pl. ceelxii. BH, F (1782).
Papilio cassida, Fabricius, Ent, Syst., Suppl. p. 427 (1798).
Huphina pallida, Swinhoe, P. Z. 8, 1885, p. 137.

India, Ceylon, and Java. B. M.

Of this species we have retained a selected series of seventy-
one examples, exhibiting a range over the greater part of
India. ‘The wettest phase is //. phryne, of which H. zeuxippe
is a slightly less strongly marked form; the two grade into
one another, so that they can only be arbitrarily separated.
The intermediate phase—H. cassida—is still less strongly
marked, and varies from brimstone to sandy buff on the
under surface of the secondaries. The extreme dry phase is
H. pallida, in which the secondaries are uniform yellowish
buff in the male, a trifle more sandy and with traces of dusky
veins in the female. We thus have a perfect transition from
the wettest to the driest form—from secondaries bright
chrome-yellow with broad blackish veins and a discal belt
of almost continuous blackish spots to those which are
uniform yellowish buff. ‘Those who oppose the publication of
the ascertained facts relating to seasonal variation attempt to
distinguish these gradations as different species, though in
many cases it is quite fortuitous whether certain specimens
shall be placed under one or the other name.

47, Huphina hira.

Pieris hira, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1865, p. 490, pl. xxxi. fig. 17.

Pieris copia, Wallace, Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 3, vol. iv. p. 340 (1867).

Appias dapha, Moore, P.Z, 8. 1878, p. 838.

Burma, Tenasserim. B. M.

We have retained twenty-seven examples. H. copia is the
wet phase and H. hira=dapha the dry ; the apical border of
the primaries varies, being sometimes streaked with grey or
whitish, but often uniformly black.

48. Huphina vaso.

Huphina vaso, Doherty, Journ. As. Soc. Beng. Ix, 2, p. 188 (1891);
Oberthiir, Etudes, xix. pl. iii, fig. 18 (1894),

Sambawa.

212 Dr. A. G. Butler on

This is a dry-season phase, differing chiefly from that of
the succeeding species in the more open veined borders to the
wings.

49, Huphina corva.
Pieris corva, Wallace, Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 3, vol. iv. p. 339 (1867).
Java, Bali, Sumatra. B. M.

‘The dry phase is usually slightly smaller than the wet and
the ground-colour of the secondaries below is sandy buff
instead of creamy white; the discal series of spots is also
reduced in size.

50. Huphina dissimilis.
Huphina dissimilis, Rothschild, Deut. ent. Zeit., Lep. v. p. 440, spl. v.
fies. 5, 6 (1892).
Celebes.
Very like the dry phase of H. corva.

51. Huphina lichenosa.
Pieris lichenosa, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1877, p. 591.
Andamans. B. M.

52. Huphina sumatrana, sp. n.

An insular representative of H. nerissa; the male of the
wet phase differs in its slightly inferior size,-the absence of
the blackish bar connecting veins 1 and 2 on the primaries ;
on the under surface the apical area of the primaries and
ground-colour of the secondaries saffron instead of primrose-
yellow, the veins gravel-brown excepting the median vein of
the primaries and the borders of the veins below it, which
are dark brown inclining to black.

Expanse of wings 61 millim.

3, Sumatra (from G. & §. coll.). B.M.

53. LHuphina nerissa.

¢. Papilio nerissa, Fabricius, Syst. Ent. p. 471 (1775).

3. Papilio amasene, Cramer, Pap. Exot. i. pl. xliv. A (1776),

©. Papilio coronis, Cramer, t. e, B, C (1776).

Nepal, Darjeeling, Tonkin, China. B. M.

Pos J 8) )

We have twenty-five selected examples of this species.
The dry phase has the under surface of the secondaries pale
creamy buff, with sandy-greyish veins and spots.

the Pierine Genus Huphina. 213

The following subgroup contains species in which the
sexes differ somewhat in the manner of Phrissura egis in
their upper-surface pattern, but on the under surface they
show a good deal of olive-green colouring in their wet and
intermediate phases. I know of no other Pierine which at
all closely resemble them.

d4. Huphina nadina.

d. Pieris nadina, Lucas, Rev. et Mag. de Zool. 1852, p. 333.
3 Q. Pieris nama, Moore, Cat. Lep. E. I. C. i. p. 76 (1857); P. Z.S.
1857, p. 102, pl. xliv. figs. 1, 2.

3. Pieris amba, Wallace, Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 3, vol. iv. p. 340 (1867).

Appias amboides, Moore, Journ. As. Soc. Beng. liii. p. 46 (1884).

Darjeeling, Silhet, Assam, Munipur, Pegu, Tenasserim,
Burma. Seventeen examples, B. M.

H, nadina was described from a male of the wet phase and
a female of Appras zelmira, H. nama from a male of the
intermediate and a female of the wet phase, H. amba and
amboides from males of the dry phase. H. amboides differs
from H. amba in the absence of the sandy-brown discal band
on the under surface of the secondaries; as it occurs in the
same localities as the typical phases of the species, it is not
likely to be more than an extreme development of the dry
form.

55. Huphina Andersoni,
Appias Andersoni, Distant, Ent. xviii. p. 146 (1885); Rhop. Mal.
pl. xxxiii. fig. 2.
Perak.

Allied to the preceding species, but the apex of the
primaries and the secondaries below rich golden yellowish.

56. Huphina andamana.
Huphina nama, var. andamana, Swinhoe, P. Z. 8. 1889, p. 398,

Andamans. ‘Twelve examples, B. M.

The intermediate phase differs from the wet in the much
browner coloration of the apex of the primaries and the
secondaries below, the spot in the centre of the latter wings
white instead of canary-yellow; in the dry phase there is
scarcely any yellow left upon the under surtace and the apex
of primaries and secondaries are paler and greyer; the outer
border of the primaries above is also slightly narrower.

57. Huphina Faweettt, sp. n.

Represents the preceding species in Sumatra: the wet
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iu. 16

214 Mr. O. Holmqvist on Fishes collected during

phase is darker olivaceous below, with a smaller and whito
spot crossed by vein 5; the intermediate phase does not,
however, differ in the same way from the corresponding phase
of H. andamana, so that I am not certain of the constancy of
this difference. On the upper surface the outer border
extends further on to the costal margin of the primaries than
in H. andamana and is considerably broader, black, and
sharply defined from veins 3 to 7 on the secondaries.
Sumatra (Fawcett and Sachs). Two males, B. M.

58. Huphina remba.

Pieris remba, Moore, Cat. Lep. E. I. C. i, p. 75 (1857).
Huphina liquida, Swinhoe, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 6, vol. v. p. 361
(1890).

Mussourie, Mahableshwar, Mysore, Canara, Ceylon. B. M.

Hi. liquida is a male of the wet phase; the type is a male
of the intermediate phase, rather browner below than
Col. Swinhoe’s type; and “ H. liguida 2?” is a male of the
dry phase, in which the apex of the primaries and the second-
aries become sandy greyish.

The preceding species lead on naturally to Udaina cynis,
in which the wet phase (U. Pryer?, Dist.) has the basal area
of the secondaries and a slender bar crossing the cell on the
under surface olivaceous. Although hitherto we have not
xeceived this phase from Malacca, we have the intermediate
phase, in which the basal area of the secondaries is grey
below, from Malacca, and we have the extreme dry phase
(U. cynis) in the Hewitson collection from Borneo. I there-
fore have not the least doubt of the specific identity of the
two forms. It is possible, as I have already suggested, that
this species may be the true Papilio monuste of Linneus ;
but, as the type is lost, this point can never be definitely
settled.

XXXIT.—List of Fishes collected during the Peary Auxiliary

Expedition, 1894. By Orro Hoimegvist, of the Zoolo-
gical Institute, Lund, Sweden.

THE Peary Auxiliary Expedition offered but few opportunities
for collecting sea-animals. Dr. A. Ohlin, the zoologist
of the expedition, mentions * only seven trawling-stations,

* “Zoological Observations during the Peary Auxiliary Expedition,

the Peary Auxiliary Expedition, 1894. 215

situated for the most part in Inglefield Gulf or in the
neighbourhood of that bay, between 77° and 78° N. lat.
Fishes were obtained in a comparatively great number of
both species and individuals in no less than four of these
localities.

The following table shows the conformation of the
localities in question, the distribution of species, and the
date of capture :—

Murchison’s Sound.—Depth 45 fathoms; bottom rocky and muddy.

July 29.
Specimens.
Reelmshamatugy 4. ssn 1044 ne clys faa th Gaee e 8 SetG, Bae
Eumicrotremus spinosus.....+....eccseceseees 1
Coy PAMIONS WIEIATAY ars rte «spe cierare cre ore teks CRcilabe |
iycodos Riitkenie ye 015. 612% dk Pee les tee 1
Gadus: saiditey,) (eras ister sisleves nico sbeagce or 1
Bive:SPOCles: yesiess « yes 42
Inglefield Gulf.—Depth 25 fathoms; bottom rocky and muddy.
August 3.
Specimens,
ph ohator ventralis facia ctel «aif ©: Ay6,opehara ale) catocetets 3
Pe Cie AES Ons is fon crags) ego thie. cnat ois x 2 cd\are os aro os 61
Centridermichthys uncinatus .............00. 6
Triglops Pingela\. .)..06)... Socogoratooogpadse 1
Humicrotremus spinOsuS ......6e. sce eeenes 20
GyMNGhisiyITi GIR hor, 5 Soe eresegecis + 5,0) Aelgievaipys wna + 7
Ta CO dos NE CORN i ote. ay crits w vtib «. » disuse oie sie-e secs il
Seven species iacohardelecte 99
Neighbourhood of Cape Faraday.—Depth 5 fathoms; bottom sandy.
August 7.
Specimens,
PISS MC AEA a ruiea te clea) a cieie © cittonencieascsre shares 3
SPH RAIL crc stelle eee eialoarotan chelate o AG Ae teak 1
CE WO) SPOCIES: ., saainearnvayeie 14

Neighbourhood of Northumberland Island.—Depth 20 fathoms ;
bottom rocky. August 13,

Specimens.
Miriplapseb THe Lins in eae aa chess oe Waheed sate 1
Icelus hamatus .......... cece cteesterssecse 2
3

1894: Preliminary Report by Axel Ohlin, eon: of the Expedition,”
in ‘ Biologisches Centralblatt,’ Bd. xv. no. 6, pp. 162-163, figs. 1 & 2, and
pp. 171-172.

16%

216 Mr. O. Holmqvist on Fishes collected during

To this list may be added two small fishes, the state of
preservation of which, however, renders them indeterminable :
one was captured with the surface-net in Inglefield Gulf,
the other was obtained in the trawl off Northumberland Island.
Both seem to belong to the same species, but are certainly
different from any other species collected during the expe-
dition.

As shown by this list, the locality marked Inglefield Gulf
has been, beyond all other places, the most fruitful in results.
Not less than seven species, represented by ninety-nine indi-
viduals, were obtained at this station. This circumstance may
depend partly on the fact that this locality has been trawled
twice, while at each of the other stations but one dredging
was performed (as communicated to me by Dr. Ohlin).

The station of Murchison’s Sound was situated “ just where
a river from a recedent glacier was flowing out into the sea,
the water being here, to a considerable distance from the
shore, very brackish” *. The occurrence in this place of
purely marine forms, such as Humicrotremus spinosus and
Lycodes Liitkenii, shows, however, that the water was of a
normal saltness at the bottom.

The material obtained by the dredge necessarily affords a
very imperfect idea of the fish-fauna, the trawl-net hardly
being able to catch other than slow-swimming bottom-
species. Apart from this circumstance, the fish-material of
the expedition may be considered very satisfactory, as is
clearly shown in comparison with former arctic expeditions.
The ‘ Dijmphna-Togt’ was among the most fruitful in
results. ‘his expedition achieved not less than 190 dredgings
in various parts of the Kara Sea, amongst which only
28 trawlings produced 170 specimens; these represented 11
species. Nares’s expedition executed a great number of
trawlings off North-western Greenland on a wide area between
78° and 83° N. lat., but obtained only 23 marine fishes, be-
longing to7 species. During the Peary Auxiliary Expedition
but a few limited dredgings were effected; yet no less than
9 (10) species of fishes were obtained, represented by 158 (160)
specimens: besides which a number of Cottid fishes were
thrown away through lack of preservative material, as I am
informed by Dr. Ohlin. Comparatively speaking, this result
is much greater than that of the ‘ Dijmphna’ Expedition—
nay, in proportion to the number of trawlings it probably is
the most considerable product that any previous arctic expe-
dition has afforded.

* Ohlin, Je. p. 171.

the Peary Auxiliary Expedition, 1894. 217

Besides the purely marine species above mentioned, 13
specimens of Gasterosteus aculeatus were caught on the beach
at Godhavn; including these, the total number of fishes
obtained by the Expedition amounts to 171 (173) specimens,
distributed among 10 (11) species.

Phobetor ventralis, Cuv. & Valence.
Cottus ventralis, Cuvier & Valenciennes, Hist. nat. des Poissons, t. iv.

p. 194.
Phohetor tricuspis, H. Kroyer, Naturhist. Tidskrift, 2den Reekke,

Iste Bind, p. 265.

Acanthocottus patris, H. R. Storer, ‘ Observations on the Fishes of
Nova Scotia and Labrador,” &e., Boston Journal of Natural History,
vol. vi. p. 250, pl. vii. fig. 2.

Gymnacanthus pistilliger, R. Collett, The Norwegian North-Atlantic
Expedition, 1876-78, Zoology, Fishes, p. 26.

This species is represented by three specimens (one male
and two females) from Inglefield Gulf, which is, so far as L
know, the point furthest north on the coast of Greenland
where this species has been observed. Nares’s Expedition
(see above) did not obtain any specimens. According to
Collett and Malmgren it is still common in the Atlantic Ocean
around Northern Spitzbergen. Amongst the specimens ob-
tained during the Expedition the largest measures 108 millim.
in length. One specimen has 12 rays in the first dorsal fin,

the usual number being 10 or 11.

Icelus hamatus, Kroyer.

Icelus hamatus, H. Kroyer, tom. cit. p. 253; A. Giinther, “ Account of
the Fishes collected by Capt. Feilden between 78° and 83° N. lat.
during the Arctic Expedition, 1875-76,” Proc. Zool. Soc. London,
1877, p. 295; R. Collett, loc. cit. p. 34, pl. i. fig. 8; Chr. Liitken,
Dijmphna-Togtets zoologisk-botaniske Udbytte, p. 128 (1887).

Dr. Ohlin’s collection contains no less than 101 specimens of
this species, which is, perhaps, the most common and widely
distributed among the arctic Cottids. The greatest number
(61) are from Inglefield Gulf; of the remainder, 38 specimens
were caught in Murchison’s Sound and 2 in the neighbour-
hood of Northumberland Island. The largest specimen (a
female 95 millim. in length) is from Inglefield Gulf; the
smallest is 80 millim. long and from the same locality.
Between these two all sizes are well represented.

The proportion of males to females is as 7 to 10.

Concerning the extension of the lateral line, Collett *
says that it is often absent posteriorly, ‘ which cannot be

© ZT.

218 Mr. O. Holmqvist on Fishes collected during

accounted for by the immaturity of the individual.” Liitken,
in the ‘ Dijmphna-Togt,’ makes nearly the same statement,
but with the modification that the lateral line ends in very
young individuals exactly above or in front of the anal fin;
in other cases variation in the extension of the lateral line
may be due to difference in locality.

An examination of the numerous specimens obtained during
the Peary Expedition plainly indicates that the extension of the
lateral line stands in an almost constant ratio to the age of the _
fish without regard to locality. In the smallest individuals—
about 30 millim. in length—it is reduced to a few slight
tubercles just in front of the anus; the lateral line is
extended more backward, with very little variation, in
proportion to the size of the fish, reaching to the caudal in
all tolerably grown individuals. Excepting in very young
individuals, the spines of the lateral line are nearly always
stronger than those of the dorsal line. The lateral line
begins with fully developed spines close to the upper
corner of the gill-opening. The tubercles of the dorsal line
appear some distance behind the commencement of the lateral
line as small points that increase in size backward, and
eventually become transformed into ordinary thorny spines.

Only one specimen (a small female from Inglefield Gulf)
has a slight and thin row of tubercles on each side at the
base of the anal; the other specimens show no trace of such
an appendage. Neither has Liitken seen these spines in any
of the sixty-six specimens of the ‘ Dijmphna-Togt.’ Their
occurrence may be considered exceptional, or, perhaps, re-
stricted to certain localities, especially, according to Collett *,
the Scandinavian coasts T.

Most of the specimens in this collection possess a row of
tubercles behind the pectorals. In the specimens where this
row is most strongly developed it runs into the lateral line
close to the points of the pectorals.

+E. c. pe 30.

+ The aly Scandinavian specimen I had an opportunity of seeing
is very young, and was dredged (July 1895) by Dr. Carl Aurivillius
from a depth of 40-70 fathoms in Koster Bay (Northern Bohuslan).
Its total length is 17 millim. No spines in the lateral line or behind
the pectorals. The spines of the dorsal line are well developed and reach
to the caudal; they originate on the skull, being throughout long and
sharp. The foremost pair of parietal tubercles slightly marked. The
upper preecpercular spine simple and bent upwards. No spines along the
base of the anal.

the Peary Auxiliary Expedition, 1894. 219

Centridermichthys uncinatus, Reinhardt.

Cottus uncinatus, T. Reinhardt, sen., Kongl. Danske Vidensk. Selsk.,
Naturvid. og Mathem. Afhandl. Deel 6, p. xlix.

Centridermichthys uncinatus, R. Collett, Norges Fiske, p. 81; id. The
Norwegian North-Atlantic Expedition, Zoology, Fishes, p. 29, pl. i.
ae Chr. Liitken, Dijmphna-Togtets zoologisk-botaniske Udbytte,
p. 124.

This species is represented by six small specimens from
Inglefield Gulf; the largest measures 61 millim. in length
and the smallest 31 millim.

Concerning its geographical distribution, Collett * states
that the species exists in a relatively southern region. In
the Arctic Ocean of Europe it is not caught further to the
north than in station 326 of the Norwegian North- Atlantic
Expedition at 75° 31’ N. lat., and Nares’s Expedition did
not obtain any specimen between 78° and 83° N. lat. The
comparatively numerous occurrence of this species in Inglefield
Gulf, between 77° and 78°, proves that it is more distributed
northwards than has hitherto been supposed, although it
perhaps ought to be looked for in those latitudes chiefly at a
lesser depth.

Triglops Pingelii, Reinhardt.

Triglops Pingelii, 'T. Reinhardt, sen., loc. cit. 7de Deel, pp. 114 & 118;
A Gunther, “ Account of the Fishes collected during the Artic Ex-
edition, 1875-76,” Proc. Zool. Soe. London, 1877, p.476; R. Collett,
he Norwegian North-Atlantic Expedition, 1876-78, Zoology, Fishes,

p. 88, pl. i. figs. 9-10.
Only two specimens were collected during the Expedition ;

both are females and are not well preserved.

Northumberland Island and Ingleneld Gulf.

Gasterosteus aculeatus, Linné.

Gasterosteus aculeatus, f. hemigymnus, R. Collett, Norges Fiske, p. 11;
id. “‘ Meddelelser om Norges Fiske i Aarene 1875-78,” Christiania
Vidensk. Selsk. Forhandlinger, 1879, no. 1, p. 1.

Thirteen small specimens were caught in “ Fjiren”’
(that part of the shore laid bare by ebb) at Godhavn ; their
size does not exceed 3 centim. Most of them belong to
Collett’s variety hemigymnus J, distinguished by the absence of
osseous plates on the tail and on the greater part of the sides
of the body, as well as by the presence of ridges on both sides

* The North-Atlantic Expedition, part iii. p. 33,
+ Norges Fiske, p. 12.

220 Mr. O. Holmqvist on Fishes collected during

of the tail. So far as I know, this form has not hitherto been
noticed from Greenland.
One specimen represents Cuvier’s var. semiloricatus.

Liparis lineatus (Lepechin).

Liparis barbatus, C, U. Ekstrém, Kong]. Vet.-Akad. Handl. for &r 1882,
p- 168, tab. v. (Stockholm).

Liparis tunicatus, T. Reinhardt, sen., Oversigt over Kong]. Danske
Vidensk. Selsk. Forh. den physiske Classe, fra den 31 Maj 1882 til
d. 31 Maj 1886, sid cxl.

Liparis arctica, Th. Gill, “ Synopsis of the Cyclopteroids of Eastern
North America,’ Proc, Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad. 1864, p. 191.

Liparis lineatus, R. Collett, The Norwegian North-Atlantic Expedition,
1876-78, Zoology, Fishes, p. 50.

Thirteen specimens of this Lzparis were collected off Cape
Faraday. The largest measures 100 millim. in length and
much resembles Collett’s variety arcticus*. This form is of
a nearly uniform greyish-brown colour, but with the ventral
side somewhat lighter, and probably represents Gill’s Liparis
arctica according to Collettt. All the other specimens are
considerably smaller—40 to 60 millim. long—and most
nearly resemble the varieties stel/atus, Malm, and subfuscus,
Collett t, though not altogether agreeing with either.

Eumicrotremus spinosus, Fabricius.

Cyclopterus spinosus, O. Fabricius, in O. F, Miiller’s Zoologiz Danicz
Prodromus, p. 1x.

Eumicrotremus spinosus, Th. Gill, tom. ez?. 1864, p. 190.

Cyclopterus spinosus, A. Giinther, tom. ett. part il. pp. 293 & 476.

Eumicrotremus spinosus, R. Collett, loc. cit. p. 47, pl. ii. fig. 18.

Twenty small specimens were obtained in Inglefield Gulf
and one in Murchison’s Sound. The largest is among the
former and measures 45 millim. in length. Most of them are
young, and the smallest is only 17 millim. long; the latter
specimen and a few others not much longer are devoid of
scales and without distinct rays in the first dorsal. Collett §
supposes this species to be a deep-sea fish, as it has not
hitherto been obtained at a less depth than 60 fathoms; but
this supposition is contradicted by its abundant occurrence
in Inglefield Gulf at a depth of only 25 fathoms and at the
mouth of a glacial river.

* “Om Norges Fiske i Aarene 1875-78,” Christiania Vidensk. Selsk.
Forhandl. 1879, no. 1, p. 44.

+ ‘The Norwegian North-Atlantic Expedition,’ p. 50.

t “Om Norges Fiske,” &e. p, 42.

§ L.c, p. 49.

the Peary Auxiliary Expedition, 1894. 221

Gadus saida (Lepechin).

Gadus Fabricti, A. Giinther, tom. cit. part ii. pp. 294 & 476.

Gadus saida, Chr. Liitken, Dijmphna-Togtet, p. 127.

A small specimen was caught off Cape Faraday, and a
young Gadus obtained in Murchison’s Sound belongs, in all
probability, to the same species, though, owing to its being
in a mutilated condition, it has not been possible to determine
this with certainty.

Gymnelis viridis (Fabricius).

Gymnelis viridis, A. Giinther, tom. cit. part il. p. 294; R. Collett, The
Norwegian North-Atlantic Expedition, 1876-78, Zoology, Fishes;
Chr. Litken, Dijmphna-Togtets zoologisk-botaniske Udbytte.

One specimen was collected in Murchison’s Sound, and
seven were caught in Inglefield Gulf; the largest was ob-
tained in the latter locality and measures 123 millim. in
length. ‘The principal colour of this specimen when preserved
in alcohol is grey ; the sides of the body are marked along their
whole length by regularly arranged patches, almost square and
lightly marbled. our individuals are of a nearly uniform
grey ; three others have a number of whitish circular spots,
closely placed and generally distinctly limited. As is well
known, the variability of this species is very great. With
regard to the colour, Kréyer has* recorded not less than
thirty-three varieties, and several others might be added.

Lycodes Liitkenwi, Collett.

Lycodes reticulatus, Collett (nec Reinh.), Forhandl. i. Vidensk. Selsk.
i Christiania, 1878, no. 14, p. 59.

Lycodes Liitkenit, Collett, The Norwegian North-Atlantic Expedition,
1876-78, Zoology, Fishes, p. 103, pl. iii. fig. 25; Chr. Liitken,
Dijmphna-Togtets zoologisk-botaniske Udbytte, p. 128, pl. xvi.
figs. 1-6.

A young Lycodes was obtained in Murchison’s Sound ;
another somewhat larger specimen was captured in Inglefield
Gulf.

With regard to the immature Lycodids, our knowledge
is still very imperfect, especially as to their systematic rela-
tions. It might therefore appear rather premature to identify
the specimens in question with Lycodes Liitkenit, Collett, the
more so as this cannot with absolute certainty be considered a
species distinct from L. reticulatus, Reinh. As to the propor-
tions of the head and the pectorals, as well as their colour,

* Naturhist. Tidskrift 3dje Rekke, lste Bind (Copenhagen).

222 On Fishes collected during the Peary Expedition.

however, both specimens closely correspond with some young
Lycodids from the Kara Sea that Liitken has * identified
with L. Liitkenii. Thus it seems safe to consider them to
belong to the same species.

Below are some measurements &e. of my specimens :—

Specimen from Specimen from
Murchison’s Sound. Inglefield Gulf.
Number of rays in the
pectoral. 2 6.sGiens 18 18
Width of the pectoral equals the height of the equals the height of the
body-+the dorsal. body+the dorsal.
Length of the pectoral 6 mm. 8 mm.
Length of the tailt.. 24 mm. 36 mm.

Height of the head equals the greatest a little less than the
height of the body ie ee height of the
ody f.
Length of the head .. 10°5 mm. 14 mm.
Total length ........ 44 mm. 56 mm.

As will appear by this list, the length of the head is
about one fourth of the total length, and the length of the
pectorals is about one seventh of the total length; in both
specimens the tail was a little more than half of the total
length.

Liitken mentions the length of the head in the specimens
from the Kara Sea as about one fourth, and that of the pec-
torals little less than one seventh, of the total length. ‘The
tail, measured from the anus to the end of the caudal, is in
the same individuals very little more than half the length of
the body, although with a slight variation. According to
Liitken, the proportion of the tail affords a characteristic
difference between L. Liitkendd and L. reticulatus, Reinh.
In Collett’s type specimens, however, the tail is compara-
tively longer than in the specimens from the Kara Sea, at least
if we judge by the figures. In the Lycodes from Inglefield
Gulf the tail is a little longer than it is depicted in Collett’s
figures; but, considering the usual variability of the tail in
long-tailed fishes, the peculiarity just referred to cannot prevent
us from identifying that specimen also with L. Liitkenti. For
the same reason the length of the tail cannot be considered a
valid characteristic. ‘The exceptional size of the pectorals,
which in more mature specimens are broader than the body is
high, is, without doubt, the safest criterion (Collett’s type

= lee:
+ Measured from the anus to the point of the caudal.
} Without the dorsal.

On the Water-Voles of Bosnia &c. 223

specimens). In Collett’s specimens the pectorals have 23
rays; in Liitken’s they have 16-18, in rare cases 19 rays.
The variation is accounted for by Liitken as dependent on
difference of age. As I have already stated, my specimens
have 18 rays, although they are very young. In both
specimens the width of the head is greater than that of
the body and equal to the length of the pectorals. The
eyes are situated much nearer the snout than the neck. The
ventrals lie exactly on the line that is supposed to connect
the gill-openings at their base. Both individuals are devoid
of scales. The mucous membrane of the mouth is white.

The smaller specimen (from Murchison’s Sound) is nearly
identical with Liitken’s fig. 5 in the ‘ Dijmphna-Togt’ with
regard to both shape and colour. In both specimens the
sides of the body and the dorsal are marked with irregular
square spots with blackish margins. These spots are smaller
and more numerous in the smaller specimen, which is much
paler both in prevailing colour and marks.

Lund, Sweden,
May 1895.

XXX1V.—Note on the Water-Voles of Bosnia, Asta Minor,
and Western Persia. By G. E. H. BArrert-HAmILton,

In looking over the specimens of Water-Voles preserved in the
British Museum collection I find examples of two forms from
Bosnia and Asia Minor which I am unable to associate with
any of the known subspecies found in Western Europe, and
one of which at least seems to me to have been hitherto un-
described.

The Water-Voles of Western Europe, as is well known,
have been the subject of a good deal ot species-making, and
our knowledge of the synonymy and relations of the various
local races or subspecies is at present in a rather confused
condition. My friend Mr. Gerrit 8. Miller, Junior, Assistant
Curator of Mammals at Washington, whose masterly paper
“On the Genera and Subgenera of Voles and Lemmings ” *
has already cleared away so many difficulties, has, in addition,
imposed upon himself the task of unravelling the tangle which
surrounds the subgenus Arvicola, Lacépéde, to which the
Water-Voles belong. As I do not wish to anticipate anything

# U.S. Department Agriculture (Div. of Orn. & Mamm.): North-
American Fauna, no. 12 (July 25, 1806).

224 Mr. G. E. H. Barrett-Hamilton on the

which he may have to say, I merely give a description of the
subspecies, leaving their relationships to be more exactly
determined by Mr. Miller.

The specimens from Van, Asia Minor, were presented
to the British Museum by Major W. H. Williams, R.A.
They formed part of a valuable collection of mammals
which has yielded two new species in Ellobius lutescens
and Alactaga Williamst, both of which were described
by Mr. Oldfield ‘Thomas in the ‘Annals’ for Sept. 1897,
ser. 6, vol. xx. pp. 308-310. They belong to a large
form allied to M. Musignani, de Selys, of South Europe,
but readily distinguishable by the greater thickness of the
fur, the colour of which on the upperside is yellowish
brown rather plentifully sprinkled with black-tipped hairs,
especially on the dorsal line and upper surface of the head.
The upperside of the animal has thus a very peculiar grizzled
appearance, which I have not observed in any other sub-
species. ‘The underside is whiter than in any other Water-
Vole with which I am acquainted, Scandinavian, British, and
Spanish specimens being very rufous underneath. Of the
two males at my disposal, the larger and adult has the under-
side quite white, contrasting by a clearly marked line of
demarcation with the yellowish-brown colour of the flanks ;
the smaller and younger specimen has the central portion of
the belly slightly washed with yellow. In both the white
colour is continued in a modified and less pure form to the
upper lips, and also extends higher up on each side of the
neck than in other Water-Voles. The tail is slightly bi-
coloured.

The dimensions are given below. I find no distinctive
characters in the skull; the nasals are distinctly compressed
posteriorly, but I am not sure if that character will hold
good for a series of specimens.

It seems best to identify the Kurdistan Voles (at least
provisionally) with the form which de Filippi found very
commonly in Western Persia and to which he gave the name
of persicus (Viag. Persia, 1865). His description is not at
all full, and consists mainly in the statement (on page 196)
that /. persicus is markedly lighter on the underside than are
the Water-Voles of Europe and (on page 344) that it may
be distinguished from the ordinary race of Kurope “ per il
colore che passa al fulvo sui fianchi, ed al bianco nelle parti
inferiori. 1 caraterri osteologici sono assolutamente i medi-
simi.” Yet since, so far as it goes, this description agrees
with the specimens collected by Major Williams, I preter to

Water-Voles of Bosnia, Asia Minor, &c. 225

make use of de Filippi’s name rather than to add another to
a genus already overburdened.

The British Museum possesses the skull of a Water- Vole
from the Altai Mountains, which, in the absence of a skin, I
am obliged to associate provisionally with this subspecies.

For the Water-Vole of Bosnia I propose the name

Microtus Musignani illyricus, subsp. n.

A large Water-Vole intermediate between the subspecies
M. persicus, de Fil., and M. Musignani, de Selys, of Spain, and
in that the upperside lacks the almost rufous-brown tint of the
ordinary Spanish specimens and is grizzly yellowish brown,
not, however, so marked as in M. persicus. The thickness of
the coat also agrees with that of Spanish specimens, and not
with that of W/. persicus. The dirty white colour of the under-
side is indistinctly marked off from the yellowish-brown
flanks, is not washed with yellow, and does not extend to the
upper lips or high up on the sides of the neck.

The type (no. 94. 1. 5. 1 of the British Museum collection)
is from Bosnia, and was collected by Dr. Floericke. I believe
it represents a subspecies occurring in the ‘Turkish peninsula
and which is intermediate between M/. Musignani of Spain
and Italy and J. persicus of Asia Minor.

The following are the dimensions of the specimens in
millimetres :—

Head Greatest
and Hind length of
body. Tail. foot. Ear. skull.

M. persicus. Brit. Mus. Coll.
no. 97. 6.4.10. Adult male
from Van, Asia Minor (dug
out of a hole by a stream,
11 Oo at) ee ee 195 126 29 16 42
M. persicus. Brit. Mus. Coll.
no. 97.6. 4.9. Young male
from Van, Asia Minor (dug
out of a hole by a stream,
CE gs 7G Se a 153 104° «31 16 38
M. illyricus. Brit. Mus. Coll.
no. 94. 1. 5. 1. Bosnia.
(Measured in dried skin.) .. 190 100 30 s about 40
(damaged )

226 Mr. G. E. H. Barrett-Hamilton on the Sicilian

XXXV.—WNote on the Sicilian Dormice of the Genera Eliomys
and Glis. By G. E. H. BArretrr-HAMILTON.

I HAVE recently had the pleasure of examining a small collec-
tion of Sicilian mammals presented to the British Museum
by Mr. J. 1.8. Whitaker. The collection includes specimens of
Pachyura etrusca (Savi), Mus rattus alecandrinus, Is. Geoff.,
Mus musculus spicilegus, Chyzer, a Muscardinus, and of
Microtus subterraneus nebrodensis, Mina-Palumbo, the latter
subspecies very doubtfully distinct from the form found on
the Italian mainland.

In the present paper, however, I wish to call attention to
the Sicilian Lliomys and Gis, which are of great interest and
show marked differences from the corresponding forms found
in Continental Europe.

The following is a description of the Eliomys :—

Eliomys pallidus, sp. n.

Size similar to that of . quercinus (Linn.), but general
appearance markedly different, the upper surface being light
powdery-looking grey, with only a faint trace of the rich
rufous brown of . querctnus on the back. The black
markings of £. quercinus are in E. pallidus everywhere less
intense and distinct, and, as a natural consequence of the
general coloration, the grey of the upper merges with the
white of the under surface rather gradually, and the very
clear line of demarcation of, as well as the intermediate
black zone sometimes present in, #. quercinus is absent.

The following are the dimensions (in millim.) of two
specimens, together with those of two of #. quercinus for
comparison :—

- Head and Hind
body. Tail. foot. Ear.
E. pallidus (type). Brit. Mus.

Coll. no. 98. 10.6.6. o,

Sicily, August 21, 1898.... 147 108 29 24
E. pallidus. Brit. Mus. Coll.

no, 98. 10.6.7. 9, Sicily,

Anoust'18, 1898... sce ves 124 106 28 23
EF. quercinus. Brit. Mus, Coll.

no. 95.4.6.1. Spalato, Dal-

matia, Jan. 26,1895 ...... 145 105 25
E, quercinus. do, Seville,

Spain, May 13, 1895 (the late

Lord Lilford) ........0+4 150 98 26

I regret that I am unable to give any cranial dimensions
for E. pallidus; the length of the upper molar crowns of
a series of LH. guercinus from Dalmatia and Seville is from 6

to 6°50 millim.

Dormice of the Genera Eliomys and Glis. 227

The type of Z. pallidus is no. 98. 10. 6. 6 of the British
Museum Collection.

Of £. quercinus the British Museum possesses specimens
from France, Mirren (Switzerland), Bavaria, Thiiringen
(Tyrol, Austria), Dalmatia, North-west and South Spain, and
Portugal ; but a specimen from Tunis appears to be referable
to H. melanurus, Wagner.

Specimens from Tangier, Morocco, agree in size with
E. mumbyanus (Pomel), first described from Algeria, and I
therefore provisionally refer them to that species, although
the skins at present at my disposal are too old and faded to
enable me to gain a clear idea of their original colour. ‘This
would appear, however, to be a slightly paler animal than
E. quercinus, although not nearly so pale as £. pallidus.
The difference in size between the two species will be appre-
ciated by a glance at the series of cranial measurements (in
millim.) given below. The skull of EH. quercinus is very
much larger than that of Z. mumbyanus, and, in addition, the
brain-case is flatter, the nasal region broader and more solid,
and the nasals themselves more compressed posteriorly.

E. mumbyanus *.

Length of Length of Length of
upper lower Greatest nasals (along
molar molar _—_ length of central
crowns, crowns. skull, line).

pigters, T8090 cis <= soos 5 5 (Damaged.) 10

B.M. Coll. no. 55.12.24.367.
piloroeed. ICY. of )n5 fe. 5 5 = 10
B. M. Coil. no. 48. 2.16.3.
GEANSION io .5.cciseers vais 9) 33 10

E. quercinus.
B. M. Coll. no. 95. 3, 5, 41.

(evil) 1G eos... 6 6 41:50 16
B. M. Coll. no. 95. 3. 3. 19.
‘(s7\ 611 CS nae ane 6 6 40°25 15°60

The only external measurements of EH. mumbyanus which
I am able to give are (in millim.) :—

Head and Hind
body. Tail. foot. Ear.
B. M. Coll. no. 98. 2. 16. 3 (in
BICHON. 500 wacclta see eee. © 100 (Damaged.) 21 17
A dried skin from Tangier ...... 109 79 23 16

* There is also in the British Museum Collection a skull (no. 94. 3. 12. 2)
of E. mumbyanus presented by Dr. V. L. Seoane and labelled as from
Cabanas, North-west Spain, but I fear there must be some mistake about
this locality.

228 Mr. H. Druce on some

The following is the description of the Sicilian Glis :—

Glis insularis, sp. n.

In the dark colour of the body agrees with G. dtalvcus, and
is thus distinguishable at a glance from G. glis. The tail is,
however, far less bushy and not quite so dark as in the former
species, and the size of the animal is much smaller.

The dimensions of two specimens are as follows :—

=
. we ~ a ~ 2o
og 2 Oo 2 a F
op aA ss a>
> Se pa a &
= i) Sh goles korres
fo) i ~ nm
5 bs a3 42 2425
rg = eS bs tog 8
a = : 3)
oO _ 8 b= | ag AamOo
is a “3 a 3) ® 3)
oo) en) Be x4 = -

Brit. Mus. Coll. no.)

3, Monte Ase, L100. 180 28 1.7 8 Gana)
- 5] ¢ be
near Palermo, Aug. foe 12619 16 11 (no. 5)

0d COB side acs }

The type is no. 98. 10. 6. 4.

The Sicilian Gi’s thus appears to be a small local develop-
ment of the large dark Italian species which I have recently
described*. The skulls are unfortunately damaged, so that I
am unable to give the total lengths, but they are markedly
smaller and weaker than those of G. ¢talicus, in which the
cranial measurements corresponding to those given above
have an average of (in a series of five specimens) 7'12, 8:3,
14°6 millim. <A series of measurements of both Gls glis and
G. ttalicus will be found in the Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. for
November 1898, pp. 425, 426.

I am a little doubtful as to whether the Sicilian Gis
should take specific or subspecific rank. It seems to be
obviously an insular development of G. ¢talicus; but, on the
other hand, there are probably no intermediate and inter-
grading specimens between the two.

~I
~
Oo
@

XXX VI.—Descriptions of some new Species of Heterocera from
Tropical America, Africa, and the Eastern Islands. By
HERBERT Druce, F.L.S. &e.

Fam. Syntomida.

Phenicoprocta cubana, sp. n.

Male.—Head and thorax black, spotted with metallic blue
dots; antenne black; collar and tegula bright orange;
* G. ttalicus.

new Species of Heterocera. 229

abdomen bright orange above from the base to beyond the
middle, the sides, anal segments, and underside bright
carmine, the segments edged with metallic blue; fore cox
white in front. Primaries hyaline, the veins, costal, inner,
and outer margins edged with black, irrorated with metallic
blue scales, the apex broadly black: secondaries hyaline,
edged with black from the apex to the anal angle, the inner
margin bright carmine.
Expanse 1,4) inch.

Hab. Cuba, San Cristobal (Mus. Druce).

Chrostosoma maratha, sp. n.

Female.—Head, thorax, abdomen, antennex, and legs black ;
tegule edged with red. Primaries smoky hyaline, crossed
beyond the middle from the costal margin to the anal angle
by a wide semihyaline white band: secondaries hyaline,
clouded with black at the apex and along the inner margin.

Expanse 1 inch.

Ilab. Keuador, Sarayacu (Buckley, Mus. Druce).

Cosmosoma entella, sp. 0.

Male.—Head and collar metallic blue; antenne black; the
tegule, thorax, and abdomen bright red; the three anal seg-
ments of the abdomen black; a row of metallic blue spots
extends down the middle and a similar row on each side; the
underside of the abdomen black, the second and third segments
broadly white. Primaries hyaline, the base red; costal
margin, apex, outer and inner margins black; the veins
black : secondaries hyaline, edged with black from the apex
to the anal angle.

Expanse 1? inch.

Hab. Ecuador, Balsapamba (Mus. Druce).

Cosmosoma thia, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, and thorax black; tegule yellow ;
a small metallic blue spot at the base of the thorax; the first
segment of the abdomen black, spotted with yellow on each
side, the second, third, and fourth yellow, the anal segments
metallic blue. Primaries hyaline, the costal and inner margins
yellowish near the base, the veins brownish black, the apex
and outer margin broadly black: secondaries hyaline, edged
with black.

Expanse 1} inch.

Hab. Keuador, Chiquinda (Buckley, Mus. Druce).
Ann. & Mag. N, List. Ser. 7. Vol. iii. 17

230 Mr. H. Druce on some

Pseudomya trabea, sp. n.

Male.— Head, antennx, thorax, abdomen, and legs black ;
the back of the head, sides of thorax, and base of the abdomen
red; the first segment of the abdomen yellowish white.
Primaries and secondaries smoky hyaline, darkest at the apex
and round the outer margin.

Expanse 1 inch,

Hab. British Guiana (Whitely); Ecuador, Sarayacu
(Buckley, Mus. Druce).

Holophea melita, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, tegule, thorax, and abdomen dark
blackish brown; a small crimson spot on the base of the
thorax ; the anal segments and sides of the abdomen bright
metallic blue-green; the underside brownish white; legs
brown. Primaries and secondaries uniformly dark brown.

Expanse 1 inch.

Hab. Ecuador, Chiquinda (Buckley, Mus. Druce).

Euchromia Doherty?, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, and abdomen black, the
sides and underside of the abdomen banded with bright red ;
legs black. Primaries black, with a metallic blue streak at
the end of the cell; a small hyaline spot close to the two
about the middle, and three beyond the cell near the apex :
secondaries black, the base and a large spot beyond the middle
hyaline.— Female very similar to the male, but with the first
segment of the abdomen red.

Expanse 1? inch.

Hab. Buru (Doherty, Mus. Druce).

Androcharta giganteum, sp. n.

Male and female allied to A. meones, but nearly twice the
size; the secondaries of the male silky white, without the
black margin, also much longer and much more pointed ; the
abdomen of each sex without the band of red spots down the
middle as in A. meones.

fab. Rio Napo (Mus. Druce).

Napata atalanta, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, and abdomen black ; front
of the head white; the anal segments of the abdomen banded

new Species of Heterocera. 231

with white. Primaries brownish black, semihyaline from
the base to about the middle; a small metallic blue dot close
to the base: secondaries black.

Expanse | inch.

Hab. Amazons (Leech, Mus. Druce).

Aclytia pydna, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, tegule, and thorax dark brown,
front of head and coxee white; a yellow spot on each side of
the head; abdomen above bright metallic blue, the sides dark
brown, the underside white; legs dark brown. Primaries
dark brown, the veins near the base yellowish; a bright
yellow band crosses the wing beyond the middle from the
costal almost to the inner margin: secondaries black, with a
hyaline streak from the base almost to the outer margin.

Expanse 14 inch.

Hab. Ecuador, Sarayacu (Buckley, Mus. Druce).

Eucereon mizar, sp. ni.

Female.—Uead, collar, and tegule brownish white; an-
tenne black; thorax and abdomen dark brown, the two anal
segments orange: the underside banded with white. Pri-
maries greyish white, shaded with brown, the veins all dark
brown: secondaries dark brown, palest at the base.

Expanse 1} inch.

Hab, Ecuador, Sarayacu (Buckley, Mus. Druce).

Fam. Zygenide.
Procris (?) chalestra, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, abdomen, and legs bluish
black. Primaries semihyaline black, darkest at the base:
secondaries hyaline, broadly black at the apex and round the
outer margin.

Expanse 1 inch.

Hab. Costa Rica (Van Patten, Mus. Druce).

Zygena murena, sp. n.

Female.—Head, antenne, and thorax black; collar and
tegule pale yellow; abdomen bright red above the anal
segment: underside and legs black. Primaries black; a
large pale yellow spot close to the base, a round yellow
spot in the form of a triangle about the middle of the wing, and
an elongated yellow spot on the outer margin: secondaries

Lie

232 Mr. H. Druce on some

bright red, bordered with black at the apex and partly round
the outer margin.

Expanse 1} inch.

Hab. South Africa, Potchefstroom (Mus. Druce).

This species is allied to Z. cashmirensis, Koll., from which
it is at once distinguished by the red abdomen and entire
absence of the black band on the secondaries,

Zygena myodes, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, abdomen, and legs blue-
black ; tegule black, spotted with yellow at the base. Pri-
maries blue-black, the base, a band crossing the middle, a
round spot at the end of the cell, and an elongated spot on the
outer margin all chrome-yellow: secondaries chrome-yellow,
edged with blue-black.

Expanse 1 inch.

Hab. South Africa, Graham’s Town (Mus. Druce).

A female of this species is in the National Collection ; it
is very similar to the male, but rather larger.

FHarrisina tersa, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenner, thorax, abdomen, and legs black.
Primaries and secondaries uniformly semihyaline black, the
veins slightly more black at the base of the wings.

Expanse | inch.

Hab. Mexico, Orizaba (Boucard, Mus. Druce).

Fam. Arctiade.
Belemnia obscura, sp. n.

Male.—Primaries deep black, slightly bronze-green at the
base ; a fine reddish line beyond the cell, not extending to
either margin: secondaries deep black. ‘The head, antenna,
and thorax black ; the abdomen deep metallic blue, underside
of the abdomen red.

Exxpanse 1# inch.

Hab. Colombia, Bolivia (Mus. Druce).

Esthema eulalia, sp. n.

Primaries black, the apex edged with white; a curved
white hyaline band, crossed by the black veins, beyond the
middle of the wing, but not reaching either margin; the
fringe black, excepting at the apex: secondaries black,
shaded with dark blue along the inner margin from the base

new Species of L[leterocera. 233

to the anal angle ; a band of white streaks partly crosses the
wing beyond the middle nearest the apex; the fringe white.
The head, antenne, and thorax black; the abdomen bluish
black above, the underside grey ; legs greyish black.

lixpanse 24 inches.

Hab. Upper Amazons (Mus. Druce).

This species is allied to Lsthema confluens, Felder.

Esthema crocata, sp. n.

Primaries deep black, crossed by two white hyaline bands,
the first about the middle, extending from the costal margin
to the anal angle, the second close to the apex, both bands
crossed by the black veins; a small white dot close to the
base and one on the costal margin between the two white
bands; the inner margin from the base to nearly the anal
angle greyish blue; the fringe black: secondaries hyaline
white, the veins bluish black; the costal margin, apex, and
outer margin edged with black; the fringe black. The head,
antennee, and thorax black, the collar spotted with white, the
abdomen bluish grey, the underside greyish white.

Expanse 24 inches.

Hab. Upper Amazons, Ecuador, Sarayacu (Jus. Druce).

A small species allied to Esthema bicolor, Cr.

Pericopis capella, sp. n.

Female.—Head and thorax brownish black, the front of the
head and tegule spotted with yellow; antenne and coxe
yellow ; legs brown ; abdomen pale brown, with three narrow
black lines extending from the base to the anal segments, the
sides and underside banded with yellow. Primaries brownish
black, paler at the base, crossed from the costal margin by
two bands, the first pale brown, the second brownish white ;
the veins black: secondaries yellow, broadly bordered with
black trom the apex to the anal angle; a marginal row of
white spots extends from the apex to the anal angle: under-
side very similar to the upperside, but with the base of both
wings red.

Expanse 3 inches.

Hab. Brazil (Mus. Druce).

Phegoptera sebrus, sp. n.
Male.—Uead, antenne, collar, tegule, and thorax chrome-
yellow ; two small black dots behind the head and one on
each of the tegule; palpi yellow, with black tips; abdomen

234 Mr. H. Drnce on some

pale brownish yellow, with black spots on each side near the
anus ; legs yellow. Primaries chrome-yellow, crossed beyond
the middle by a narrow brown line, beyond which the wing
is irrorated with brown scales; a brownish-yellow band
crosses the wing from the costal to the inner margin: second-
aries semihyaline yellowish white, darkest at the apex and
anal angle.

Expanse 23 inches.

Hab. Bolivia (Mus. Druce).

A specimen of this species is in the National Collection
from Peru.

Areas cana, sp. n.

Male.—Head bright red, antenne black ; collar white, edged
with red, with two black dots in front; tegule and sides of
thorax white ; a black spot at the base and one on the middle
of the tegule; the middle of the thorax black; abdomen
bright red, with a row of central black dots: underside
orange. Primaries pinkish white, the veins black ; the inner
margin and two oblique narrow bands crossing the wing
black : secondaries bright red, slightly shaded with yellow
round the outer margin; three black spots close to the anal
angle.

Expanse 33 inches.

Hab. Sumatra (Bock, Mus. Druce).

Allied to Areas galactia, but very distinct.

Spilarctia Meekt, sp. n.

Female.—The upperside of the head and collar yellow;
the front of the head, the antenne, tegule, and thorax black ;
two black spots on the collar; the tegule edged with yellow ;
abdomen above red, with a row of black spots extending from
the base to the anus: the underside black. Primaries
reddish orange, the cvstal and inner margin yellow; a black
spot at the base of the wing, two beyond; a curved black
band at the end of the cell, in the middle of which is a small
yellowish-white spot ; a number of small black spots along
the inner and outer margins, extending almost to the anal
angle; a long wide black streak extends from the apex
almost to the end of the cell; in some specimens the veins of
the wing are yellow: secondaries bright red, with a black
band at the end of the cell, and a submarginal row of rather
large black spots extending from the apex to the anal angle,
the outer margin edged with black at the apex.

Expanse 24 inches.

Hab. 'Trobriand Island, Kiriwini (Meek, Mus. Druce).

new Species of [Heterocera. 235

Euerythra apiola, sp. n.

Male.— Head, collar, and thorax brownish white ; antennz
brownish white; abdomen yellow, with three rows of black
dots from the base to the anus; the anus, underside, and legs
brownish white. Primaries white, crossed by fine brown
lines at the base and apex; a wide, central, brown pale band
crosses the wing from the costal to the inner margin, where it
extends from the anal angle almost to the base: secondaries
creamy white, with a wide submarginal brownish band from
the apex to the anal angle; the fringe white——Female very
similar to the male, but slightly larger.

Expanse, ¢ 14, ¢ 2 inches.

Hab. 8.E. Brazil, St. Catharina (Mus. Druce).

Fam. Lithosiide.
Exotrocha tricolor, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, and abdomen black ; the
collar, tegule, and the underside of the abdomen bright red ;
legs black. Primaries red, shading to yellow at the base and
along the inner margin ; the costal margin, apex, outer margin,
and half of inner margin edged with black : secondaries yellow,
broadly bordered with black from the apex to the anal angle.
— Female similar to the male, but larger.

Expanse, ¢ 14, 2 12 inch.

Hab. Dinner Island (H. O. Forbes); Trobriand Island,
Kiriwini (Meck) : Mus. Druce.

Exotrocha tegyra, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, abdomen, and legs black ;
collar, tegulee, and the underside of the abdomen red. Pri-
maries bright red; the costal margin, apex, outer margin,
and half of inner margin broadly bordered with black, which
extends from the inner margin across the wing almost to the
costal margin: secondaries black, the basal half chrome-
yellow.—Female similar to the male.

Expanse, ¢ 15%, 2 12 inch.

Hab. Ferguson Island (Meek, Mus. Druce).

Fam. Lasiocampide.

Ormiscodes (?) betifica, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antennx, thorax, and legs reddish brown, the
collar and tegulz greyish white. Primaries white, the veins
red, edged on both sides with brown; a black mark at the

236 On some new Species of Heterocera.

end of the cell: secondaries white, the marginal end of the
veins red, edged with brown; a round black spot at the end
of the cell; the fringe of both wings reddish brown. Under- |
side white, the primaries shaded with red along the costal |
margin, the black spots as above.

Expanse 2 inches. |

Hab. Paraguay (Mus. Druce).

Leiosoma hezia, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, collar, and tegule brown; abdomen
reddish brown. Primaries pale brown, thickly irrorated with
darker brown scales, crossed from the costal to the imner
margin by four fine brown lines—the first near the base
edged with white on the inner side, the second curved just
beyond the cell, the third beyond edged with white on the
outer side, the fourth submarginal, zigzag, extending from the
apex to the anal angle: secondaries reddish brown, the costal
margin pale greyish brown, the apex and two lines partly
crossing the wing brown.

Expanse 13 inch.

Hab. Peru (Mus. Druce).

Leiosoma (?) uzita, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, collar, tegule, thorax, and abdo-
men pale fawn-colour. Primaries pale fawn-colour, shaded
with brown near the apex and partly along the costal
margin ; five fine brown zigzag lines cross the wing from the
costal to the inner margin: secondaries reddish fawn-colour,
crossed about the middle by two fine brown lines, the outer
margin shaded with darker brown,

Expanse 3 inches.

Hab. Ecuador, Sarayacu (Buckley, Mus. Druce).

Fam. Noctuidae.
Perigea multipunctata, sp. n.

Male.—Head and palpi pinkish brown; the antenna,
thorax, and abdomen brown ; the underside of the abdomen
sordid white. Primaries pinkish white, the outer and inner-
margin and a band crossing the wing near the apex dark
brown; the light-coloured part of the wing crossed by a
number of pale brown lines: secondaries brownish white,
shaded with darker brown at the apex and round the outer
margin.

Expanse 13 inch.

Hab. West Atrica, Mongo-ma Lobak, East Africa ; Dar-es-
Salaam (Mus. Druce).

Rey. T. R. R. Stebbing on the true Podocerus. 237

XXXVII.—On the true Podocerus and some new Genera of

Amphipods. By the Rev. Tuomas R. R. Sressine,
M-A;, F.BS., EL8., F.Z.S8.

In the family Podoceride it may well be supposed that the
genus Podocerus ought to maintain the position which it has
so long held unquestioned. ‘To rebut this presumption it is
necessary to weigh carefully the words used by Leach when
instituting in 1814 (or 1813) the two genera lodocerus and
Jassa. In his well-known article ‘‘ Crustaceology”’ he
combines these two in the second section of the family, his
account commencing thus :—

“ Superior antenne shorter than the under ones; the
last joint scarcely articulated.

“Genus XI. Popocerus. Eyes hemispherical and some-
what prominent; four anterior feet didactyle, anterior pair
smallest with an elongate-subovate hand; second pair with
an ovate hand, and the internal side nearly strait.

“Sp. 1. Variegatus. Body, legs, and antenne beautifully
variegated with red.

* Podocerus vartegatus, Leach’s MSS.

“Inhabits the rocky shores of Devon, walking about on
fuci and corallines with its antenne as well as legs.

“Genus XII. Jassa. Eyes not prominent; four anterior
feet didactyle with ovate hands; the anterior pair smallest ;
the hand of the second pair with the internal edge furnished
with teeth.”

Then follows the account of Jassa pulchella, with two
varieties, from Devonshire, and of Jassa pelagica “from the
Bell Rock in the German Sea,” and a note that “Cancer
Gammarus falcatus of Montagu, Lin. Trans. vol. ix. tab. 5.
fig. 2. seems referable to this genus.”

From 18380 to the present time we have all with one
consent accepted the view that Leach did not know’ what he
was talking about, and most of us have believed that his two
genera were one and the same. Some authors have held
that all the three species above mentioned were simply
synonyms of Montagu’s falcatus. The real fact is that they
may without impropriety be taken as representatives of three

238 Rev, T. R. R. Stebbing on the true Podocerus

distinct genera, not one of them with any certainty falling
as a synonym to Montagu’s species.

The description of Podocerus variegatus above quoted from
Leach is far from suiting the account which Milne-Edwards
appends to the name in his ‘ Histoire naturelle des Crus-
tacés,’ vol. ui. p. 63. He omits all mention of the hemi-
spherical eyes, states that the second pair of hands have no
teeth on the lower margin, and assigns a pretty strong median
tooth to the hind margin of the last segment of the pereon
and the first of the pleon. ‘There is in truth only one
Amphipod known as inhabiting the rocky shores of Devon
which reasonably answers to the various characters indicated
by Leach. This is the species described and figured by
Bate and Westwood (‘ British Sessile-eyed Crustacea,’ vol. 1.
p-481) as Cyrtophium Darwintt. It has the proper colouring
and habits; the eyes tally with the description, and the
gnathopods have a sufficient correspondence. It is true that
the ovate hand of the second gnathopod in the male has two
processes on the internal side, but these are so concealed
among the long fringing sete that the general effect is that
of a straight lower, inner, or hind margin. The under an-
tenn are conspicuously longer than the upper, and it is
interesting to notice that “the last joint”—the flagellum—
which Leach describes as “scarcely articulated,” is shown in
Bate and Westwood’s figure of it as a single piece, though in
the text they explain that it “ consists of one very long and
one or two minute terminal articuli.”’” In regard to this
species Bate and Westwood make, without seeing the bearing
of it, the important observation that “‘ some specimens (mixed
with those of the genus Podocerus) have long existed un-
recognized in the collection of the British Museum, procured
by Dr. Leach probably from the south coast of Devon.”

In the ‘ Régne Animal de Cuvier,’ published after Cuvier’s
death, without dates, and variously cited as 3° édit., édit,
illustrée, or edit. Crochard, Milne-dwards gives a represen-
tation of Podocerus variegatus (pl. Ixi. fig. 4), purporting to
be drawn from Leach’s type in the British Museum. When
one considers that the drawing must have been made some
sixty years ago from a dried specimen more than twent
years old, minute accuracy is little to be expected. The
two dorsal teeth, which Milne-Hdwards, as above mentioned,
describes in his later work, are doubtless due to an optical
illusion with which every student of Amphipoda must now
be familiar. In the so-called Cyrtophium Darwinti the
imbrication of the segments which gives rise to the illusion is

and some new Genera of Amphipods. 239

very strongly marked. In the text of the ‘ Régne Animal,’
p- 179, Milne-Edwards, copying Latreille, 1829, characterizes
the species simply by three words— A yeux saillans.” As
it happens they suffice, since the figure supplies a second
striking feature in the greatly elongated terminal joint of the
peduncle of the lower antenne.

Cyrtophium Darwinti, on Spence Bate’s own showing,
ought to have been referred to Dana’s other genus Plato-
phium. Now, therefore, its identification with Podocerus
variegatus, Leach, entails the cancelling of Platophium, the
various species of which must be transferred to the far earlier
Podocerus. ‘The list, in my opinion, comprises the following
ten species :—andamanensis (Giles); brasiliensis (Dana) ;
chelonie, Stebbing ; chelonophilus (Chevrenx & de Guerne) ;
eristatus (G. M. Thomson); Dane, Stebbing; Darwinit
(Bate) ; inconspicuus, Stebbing; levis (Haswell) ; lobatus
(Haswell).

If this view of Podocerus be accepted, as I think it must,
the obvious and necessary consequence is that Jassa will be
upheld as a distinct genus, with the species pulchella, Leach,
for its type. Whether the specific name pulchella should be
retained is a separate question. Leach, as already noticed,
instituted a second species of Jassa under the name pelagica,
and suggested that Montagu’s Gammarus faleatus might also
belong to the genus. What Leach could not determine, later
authors with more or less confidence, and with unanimity less
rather than more, have settled for him. In the ‘Régne
Animal,’ pl. Ixi. fig. 2, Milne-Edwards claims to give a
representation of lLeach’s Jassa pelagica, and in fies
undoubtedly does represent Leach’s Jassa pulchella. But in
the text he refers both fig. 2 and fig. 8 to Jassa pulcheila.
‘Then, in the ‘ Hist. nat. des Crustacés,’ 1840, he describes
the species Cerapus pelagicus, with Cancer falcatus, Mon-
tagu, and Jassa pelagica, Leach, in the synonymy, thus
acknowledging but disregarding the priority of fa/eatus. In
this Guérin-Méneville had set the example in the ‘ Icono-
graphie du Régne Animal’ by roughly copying Montagu’s
figure of Gammarus faleatus, and, without the least apolog
or explanation, calling it Jassa pelagica, Leach. As Lord
Nelson was fond of saying, ‘Such things are.” Subse-
quently the claims of falcatus were vindicated with so much
vellemence that by some authors Leach’s three species, varze-
gatus, pulchellus, and pelagicus, have all been reduced to
synonyms of it. But he must be a bold naturalist who will
affirm that he knows for certain what Montagu’s species

240 = Rey. T. R. R. Stebbing on the true Podocerus

really is. The finger of the second gnathopods, figured with
a strong tooth on the inner margin, and thus corresponding to
the description “ fangs falciform, with one tooth,” will not
suit any of the synonyms. Moreover, Montagu says :—
“This curious and rare species inhabits the deep, amongst
Sertularia, and Alga, and has only been taken by dredging
at Tor-cross.”” No one in South Devon needs to go dredging
for Leach’s pulchellus. It is a common shore species. ‘The
possibility that falcatus is identical with Herdmani, Walker,
and odontonyx, Sars (see A. O. Walker, Ann. & Mag. Nat.
Hist. ser. 6, vol. xv. p. 472), is weakened by the fact that the
specimens described by the later authors have a length less
than half that recorded by Montagu, so that his species really
remains, as it was left by Leach, indeterminate.

It has long been recognized, apparently on Norman’s
initiative, that the form which Spence Bate had named Podo-
cerus pelagicus (Leach) was the female to the male form
pulchellus. But by acute and diligent scrutiny of the
specimens in the British Museum Mr. A. O. Walker has
discovered that Leach’s species Jassa pelagica corresponds
not with Bates’s female of pulchellus, but with Rathke’s
Podocerus capillatus. Around this latter form a curious
mystification has gathered. In 1859 Bruzelius referred it to
the genus Jassa of Leach, while to Podocerus he assigned two
species, one of which belongs to Ischyrocerus of Kroyer and
the other is a synonym of Jassa pulchella. ‘Twelve years
Jater Boeck erroneously identified Rathke’s capillatus with
Podocerus variegatus, Leach, but, instead of calling it by that
name, he described it as Janassa vartegata, at the same time
making Leach’s pulchella and pelagica the synonyms of a
species which he called Podocerus falcatus, Montagu. He
regarded Jassa of Leach as a synonym of Podocerus, and
Jassa of Bruzelius as preoccupied by Miinster in 1859 for the
generic name of a fish, on these grounds introducing the name
Janassa, the very one which was, in fact, as Mr. Smith
Woodward tells me, preoccupied by Miinster in 1832 for a
well-known extinct fish. or this genus, therefore, the name
Parajassa is now proposed, to comprise the two species
pelagica (Leach) and tristanensis, Stebbing.

For the species Podocerus cumbrensis, Stebbing & Robert-
son, a new genus—WMicrojassa—is proposed. It nearly
resembles Jassa, but has the side-plates of the second to the
fourth pairs much deeper than the rest, and the large fourth
pair conspicuously emarginate behind for the small fifth ; the
second antenne are but little stronger than the first, the outer

uli sntitdiahinten Sten te

and some new Genera of Amphipods. 241

plates of the maxillipeds are but scantily armed, and, as in
Ischyrocerus, the first and second gnathopods of the female
are but little unequal, though in the male the second are
much larger than the first and differ in shape as well as size
from those of the female.

To the family Dulichiide I add the genus Lezpsuropus.
This is like Cyrtophium, Dana, except that the fifth segment
of the pleon, though present, is devoid of appendages.

The name, signifying an omission of a uropod, refers to
the important generic character. The genus contains at
present only the Australian species described by Professor
Haswell as Cyrtophium parasiticum.

In the Corophiide a new genus is required for the New
Zealand species described by Mr. G. M. Thomson as Coro-
phium excavatum. ‘The definition is as follows :—

Body compressed, side-plates continuous. First antenne
slender; flagellum consisting of several joints, without
accessory flagellum. Second antenne robust; flagellum
slight, of more than three joints. Mandibular palp three-
jointed. First gnathopods as in Corophium. Second
gnathopods nearly as in Corophium, but having the long
process of the fourth joint fringed on its front or inner margin,
while the fifth is fringed on its hind margin, the two joints
therefore, though fitting together, having no look of coales-
cence ; the sixth joint with a small palm. Third peraopods
the shortest, setose, strongly spined on the sixth joint.
Fourth and fifth pereeopods successively much longer, second
joint of the third to the fifth pairs widely expanded. First
uropods, and still more the second, stout, strongly spined ;
third pair small, outer ramus nearly as long as the peduncle,
inner oval, minute. ‘Telson short, entire.

For the species described by Professor Della Valle as
Siphonacetes typicus, Kroyer, 1 propose the name S. Della-
vallei,

As personally I am strongly opposed to preliminary notices
and duplicate publication in natural history, it should be
explained that these notes are not a freewill offering on my
part. They are submitted in compliance with the rules that
govern contributors to ‘Das ‘Tierreich.’ In the general
revision of the Amphipoda readjustments of classification,
appearing in their proper sequence, can be explained with
more brevity and understood with more ease than when they
have to be presented in isolation and detachment.

242. Ona new Osphromenoid Fish from the Congo.

XXXVIII.— Description of a new Osphromenoid Fish from
the Congo. By G. A. BouLeNGeER, F.R.S.

Anabas (Ctenopoma) fasciolata.

No palatine teeth. Depth of body 24 to 24 in total length,
length of head 3} to 34 times. Snout obtuse, a little shorter
than the diameter of the eye, which is 4 times in length of
head ; interorbital space a little broader than diameter of eye ;
maxillary extending hardly to below anterior border of eye ;
3 or 4 spines above and 1 or 2 below opercular notch ; sub-
opercle entire or indistinctly serrated ; four series of ctenoid
scales between the orbit and the angle of the preopercle.
Dorsal XVI 8-9; last spine longest, half length of head;
middle soft ray produced in a filament. Anal X 9-11. Dorsal
and anal fins very narrowly separated from the caudal, which
isrounded. Pectoral as long as head. Ventral produced into
a filament, reaching fifth or sixth anal spine. Scales very

finely striated, 27-28 3; lat. 1. =”. Pale brown, with 6 or 7
wavy darker vertical bars broader than the spaces between
them; dorsal and anal fins edged with blackish ; ventrals
blackish.

Total length 70 millim.

Three specimens from Monsembé, Upper Congo.

Presented to the British Museum by the Rev. J. H. Weeks.

The discovery of this new species, together with that of
A. nigropannosa at the same locality, raises to four the
number of species known from the Congo. Ctenopoma nigro-
pannosum was described by Reichenow in 1875 (Sitzb. Ges.
nat. Fr. Berl. p. 147) from specimens from the Loango Coast
and the Gaboon; Giinther, in 1896 (Ann. & Mag. Nat.
Hist. [6] xvi. p. 269), overlooking Reichenow’s description,
renamed it C. gabonense. ‘The four Congo species may be
easily recognized by means of the following key :—

I, Caudal peduncle short but very distinct, the space
between the anal and caudal fins equalling at
least the diameter of the eye; subopercle
strongly serrated.

Dorsal with 19 or 20 spines; ventral not reaching
anal; maxillary extending to below centre of eye .. A. nigropannosa,
Dorsal with 17 spines ; ventral extending far be- [ Reichen.
yond origin of anal; maxillary extending to below
anterior fourth Of CYO . 6 0icsascccsseceverbaeeeys is CONGUE, lem,

On Two new Butterflies from Equatorial Africa. 243

II. No distinct caudal peduncle, the dorsal and anal
fins nearly reaching the caudal; subopercle
entire or indistinctly serrated ; dorsal with 16
or 17 spines,

Ventral reaching far beyond origin of anal; length

of head much less than depth of body, 3} to 3} in

total length ; maxillary hardly extending to below

DEMERIHOLUOROL OYE M651) iis ui dstcahl sy bickle wa are A, fasciolata, Blygy.
Ventral extending to origin of anal; length of

head equal to depth of body, 24 to 22 in total

length ; maxillary extending to below anterior fifth

SPaMberIOr tHITd Of CYG .../.. venus sees een neces A, Weeksti, Bler.

Anabas (Ctenopoma) Petherict, Gthr., does not occur in the
rivers flowing into the Atlantic. Specimens from the Gaboon
have recently been referred to it by Giinther; but I find on
careful examination that they really belong to 4.(C.) Kings-
leye, Gthr., which differs from the White Nile species in the
absence of spines on the scales behind the eye. The depth
of the body is 24 to 23 in the total length (22 to 3 in
A. Petherict), and the anal spines number more frequently
9 than 10.

Ct. microlepidotum, Gthr., is identical with Sandelia
Bainsii, Casteln. I have not yet been able to ascertain
which specific name has priority.

The genera Ctenopoma, Spirobranchus, and Sandelia
cannot be upheld. ‘The types of all three have the air-
bladder bifid behind and prolonged into the caudal region, as
in Anabas, and the palatine teeth may be absent in specimens
otherwise referable to Ctenopoma.

XXXIX.—Description of Two new Butterflies collected by
Major E. M. Woodward in Nandi, Equatorial Africa.
By Emity Mary SHARPE,

Family Nymphalide.
Neptis Woodwardi, sp. n.
Allied to N. incongrua, Butler (P. Z. 8. 1896, p. 112,
pl. vi. fig. 2), from Nyasaland.
This species differs from the allied form-in the absence of

light spots on the inner margin of the primaries, and no
spots are visible at the end of the discoidal cell, so that the

244. On Two new Butterflies from Equatorial Africa.

whole of the basal half of the wing is uniform brown. The
band on the secondaries which crosses the centre of the wing
from the costa to the inner margin is ochraceous and
slightly broader than in N. ¢ncongrua, which has this band
white.

Underside. General colour pale brown, the nervules and a
patch near the discoidal cell of the primaries darker brown.
Secondaries pale brown, the nervules and hind marginal
border slightly darker, with a very distinct and dark brown
patch well pronounced towards the apex. ‘The light markings
on the upperside of both wings are very distinctly reproduced
below.

Expanse 2°1 inches.

Hab. Nandi, Uganda Protectorate, 13th March, 1898
(Z. M. W.).

Family Acreide.

Planema nandensis, sp. n.

Allied to P. flava, Dewitz, but altogether smaller, The
blackish band on the primaries which crosses from the dis-
coidal cell unites with the hind margin, and is distinctly
narrower than in P. flava, as are also the brown apical and
hind marginal borders. Secondaries entirely ochre-yellow,
the brownish hind margin being very much narrower as
compared with that of the allied form.

Underside. The dark brown borders of the upper surface
are reproduced on the underside by a mere representation of
dusky brown, but the cross-band on the primaries at the end
of the discoidal cell is equally strongly marked as on the
upper surface, though there is no connexion with the hind
marginal border. ‘lhe secondaries have a cluster of nine
minute spots near the base, the central area of the wings
being ochre-yellow, with the nervules and marginal border
dusky brown.

Expanse 1:7 inch,

Hab. Nandi, Uganda Protectorate, 16th March, 1898
Cayo Bale

This species is doubtless nearly allied to Acrea disjuncta of
Mr. Grose-Smith (Nov. Zool. v. p. 851, 1898), but there are
many points of difference, which will be readily seen on com-
paring his description with the one given above.

mae

—_s

-

a

On some Tertiary Foraminifera from Borneo. 245

XL.—On some Tertiary Foraminifera from Borneo collected
by Professor Molengraaff and the late Mr. A. H. Everett,
and their Comparison with similar Forms from Sumatra.
By R. Butien Newron, F.G.S., and Rrcuarp Hounanp.

[Plates IX. & X.]

CONTENTS.

INTRODUCTION.

(1) Previous Work on the Tertiary Foraminifera of Borneo.
(2) The late Mr. A. H. Everett’s Specimens.

(3) Professor Molengraaff’s Specimens.

(4) Age of the Specimens.

DESCRIPTION OF THE FoRAMINIFERA.

(A) Nummulites :
(1 & 2) Nummulites javanus, Verbeek. Forms B and A.
(3) Djokdjokarte, Martin.
(B) Orbitoides:
(4) Ortitotdes (Lepidocyclina) Verbeeki, sp. n.
(5) —— ( ) sumatrensis, Brady.
(6) (Discocyclina) stellata, WV Archiac.
(7) Other Orbitoides.
(C) Linderina :
(8) Linderina, sp. indet.
(D) Cycloclypeus:
(9) Cycloclypeus ?, sp. indet.
(E) Other Foraminifera :
(10) Mhiolina, Spiroloculina?, Planispirina, &e.

INTRODUCTION.

(1) Previous Work on the Tertiary Foraminifera of Borneo.
—The presence of a Nummulitic formation in Borneo appears
to have been first recognized by Dr. Schwaner in 1844 during
his explorations in the southern part of the country (Riam
Kiwa district), although the fact was not published until
1857 *, several years atter his death.

C. de Groot ¢ next refers to the same rocks as containing

* Anon., “De Steenkolen in het rijk van Bandjermassin,” Tijdsch.
Nederl.-Indié, 1857, vol. 11. pp. 129-156 (from papers left by Dr. Schwaner,
written about 1844).

t “Zuid- en Oosterafdeeling van Borneo,” Nat. Tijdsch. Nederl.-Indié,
1857, vol. xiv. pp. 40-49.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iii. iS

246 Messrs. R. B. Newton and R. Holland on some

Nummulites ; but it was reserved for P. van Dijk * in 1858
to first determine the forms and to identify them as of
“ Suessonien ”’ age, the species being as follows :—Nummu-
lina depressa, Orb., N. lenticularis, Bronn, N. mamilla,
Héninghaus, and NV. polygyrata, Deshayes.

A further reference to these Nummulites was made by
C. de Groot ¢ in a letter to Sir Roderick Murchison during
1863, a list of species being given which corresponded
exactly with van Dijk’s of 1858.

To Dr. R. D. M. Verbeek { we are, however, indebted for .
the earliest published figures and descriptions of Bornean
Foraminifera, issued in 1871. His specimens were obtained,
also from the southern part of the island, at Riam Kiwa,
Pengaron, &c., and were determined as Nummulites pengaron-
ensis (sp. n.), N. sub-Brongniarti (sp. n.), N. biaritzensis,
Archiac, and JN. striata, Orb., var. f (var. nov.), Orbitoides
discus, Riitimeyer, O. Pratt’, Michelin, O. papyracea, Or-
bigny, O. Fortist, Archiac, &c., all of which were referred to
the Hocene period.

In 1878 Dr. K. von Fritsch § made a further study of a
similar series of forms from Southern Borneo, and described
them as occurring in the Orbitoidenschichten division of the
Eocene beds, under the following names :—Nummulites sub-
Brongniartt, Verbeek, Orbitoides papyracea, Boubée, VU. ephip-
pium?, Schloth., O. omphalus, sp. n.?, and O. decipiens,
sp. n.?

In 1882 Prof. K. Martin |] identified Orbitotdes dispansa
and Nummulina in the Teweh district and near Martapura
(S. Borneo) as of probably Eocene age; but such forms as
Cycloclypeus, Rotalia, Globigerina, Orbitoides, Textularia,
and Amphistegina, which came from Tungang, on the River
Barito, of South Borneo, he regarded as Miocene. Dr. T.
Posewitz §] next referred to the Foraminifera found near

* “Over der Waarde van eenige Nederlansch-Indische Kolensoorten,”
Nat. Tijdsch. Nederl.-Indié, 1858, vol. xv. pp. 189-158.

+ “Notes on the Mineralogy and Geology of Borneo and the adjacent
Islands,’ Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. 1863, vol. xix. p. 515.

¢~ “ Die Nummuliten des Borneo-Kalksteines,” IN ties Jahrbuch, 1871,
pp. 1-14, pls. iii. ; “ De Nummulieten uit den Eoceenen Kalksteen van
Borneo,” Jaarb. Mijn. Ned. O.-Indié, 1874, vol. ii. pp. 183-161, plate
(=reprint of the 1871 paper).

§ “ Einige Eociine Foraminiferen von Borneo,” Paleontographica, 1878,
Suppl. vol. ii. pp. 169-143, pls. xviii., xix.

| ‘Neue Fundpunkte von Tertiar-Gesteinen im Indischen Archipel ;
nach Sammlungen von Horner, Korthals, Macklot, Miiller fund Rein-
wardt,” Samml. geol. Reichs-Museums Leiden, 1882, pp. 182-147.

q| “ Geologische Notizen aus Central-Borneo (Das Tertiare Hiigelland
bei Teweh),” Nat, Tijdsch. Nederl.-Indié, 1884, vol. xliii. pp. 169-175.

Tertiary Foraminifera from Borneo, 247

Teweh (Central Borneo) as being similar to those described by
Verbeek from the Pengaron district.

Mr. A. V. Jennings *, in 1888, contributed an interesting
account of the Orbitoides composing the Silungen and Batu
Gading limestones of Northern Borneo, from material sup-
plied him by Mr. H. T. Burls, F.G.S., identifying the

following forms :—

Orbitoides (Discocyclina) papyracea, Boubée.
( ) applanata, Giimbel.

— ( ) ephippium ;
Racy mt J. de C. Sowerby.
—— (Asterocyclina) stellata, Giimbel.

The author particularly notes the absence of Nummulites
in these limestones, and regards the species enumerated as
indicative of a later date than Eocene.

A valuable report was issued by Dr. M. von Hantken f in
1889 on an examination of some rocks from Batu-Bangka,
South Borneo, in which the following specimens, referred to
an Upper Eocene age, were identitied :—

Orbitoides dispansa, Sby., O. papyracea, Boubée, Hetero-
stegina (like) reticu/ata, Riitimeyer, Nummulites (rare), Ro-
talia, Globigerina, Bolivina, Pulvinulina, Clavulina cylin-
drica, Hantken,=C. rudislosta, sp. n., Gaudryina Reusst,
Hantken, Chilostomella cylindroides, Reuss, Marginulina
subbullata, Hantken, Cassidulina globosa, Hantken, Globige-
rina bulloides, Orb., G. triloba, Reuss, Pseudotruncatulina
Dutemplei, Orb., P. propinqua, Reuss, Plecanium, &e.

Dr. J. W. Retgers {, in 1895, records the occurrence of
Foraminifera (Nummulites and Orbitotdes) in different lime-
stones obtained from localities on the east coast of Borneo,
but without reference to their geological age.

(2) The late Mr. A. H. Everett’s Specimens.—The late
Mr. A. H. Everett §, a few years since, presented to the

* “Note on the Orbitoidal Limestone of North Borneo,” Geological
Magazine, 1888, pp. 530-582, pl. xiv.

+ Included in Dr. T. Posewitz’s ‘ Borneo,’ 1889, pp. 383, 384 (published
in Berlin) ; see also English translation of this work by F. H. Hatch,
1892, p. 401.

} “ Mikroskopische Beschrijving van Gesteenten afkomstig van de
Oostkust van Borneo,” Jaarb. Mijn. Nederl. Oost-Indié, 1895, vol. xxiv.
pp. 78-98.

§ Mr. Everett died in London on the 18th of June, 1898, after spendin
the greater part of his life in Borneo. He was a clever naturalist and
collector, having identified himself with the avifauna of the country
besides becoming an authority on its geology in connexion with mineral

18*

248 Messrs. R. B. Newton and R. Holland on some

British Museum a series of limestone specimens which he
collected in various parts of Borneo during a long residence
in that island, with a request that the organisms contained in
them might be examined, so that a satisfactory conclusion
might be arrived at respecting their probable geological age.
It was found on examination that these specimens were
divisible into two distinct groups—one Mesozoic, the other
Tertiary. The former series, already referred to by one of
us* in a published communication, included limestones
obtained from localities in the western end of the Sarawak -
province on or near the river of the same name, which were
largely composed of coral, bryozoan and sponge structures,
and regarded as belonging to the Middle Oolite division of
the Jurassic system.

The Tertiary limestones, containing the Foraminifera now
about to be described, were collected in two widely distant
regions of Borneo, some being found in the Malinam River
(a tributary of the River Baram), which flows between the
limestone-mountains of Molu and Barib, near the boundary of
the Brunei and Sarawak divisions of the country; whilst the
remainder were obtained from Gomanton Hill, in the Kina-
batangan district, north-east of the island, a locality much
celebrated for some rich guano-deposits which are worked
there.

From their occurrence in a river-bed the Malinam-River
limestones are naturally rounded and waterworn; when cut
and polished, or if their external surfaces are merely wetted,
they are found to contain numerous Foraminifera, as well as
calcareous alge: (Lithothamnium) &c.

In these limestones we have determined the following
specimens :—

Nummulites javanus, Verbeek. Forms A and B;
Orbitoides (Lepidocyclina) Verbeeki, sp. un. ;

( ) sumatrensis, Brady ;

— (Discocyclina) stellata, Archiac ;

and other Discocyclines, Cycloclypeus, and many Milioline
and Rotaline forms.

distribution and the origin of the limestone-caves. On these subjects he
contributed several papers to the scientific journals. His loss will be
greatly felt by all those interested in the natural history of Borneo.

* R. B. Newton, “On a Jurassic Lamellibranch and some other asso-
ciated Fossils from the Sarawak River Limestones of Borneo ; with a
Sketch of the Mesozoic Fauna of that Island,” Geol. Mag. 1897, pp. 407—
415.

Tertiary Foraminifera from Borneo. 249

The Gomanton-Hill rock is a cream-coloured limestone,
much less crystalline than that from the Malinam River, and
containing a small percentage of phosphate (information
kindly given us by Mr. G. T. Prior, of the British Museum).
So far as our examination has gone, we have observed no
Nummulites in this limestone, its structure yielding Orbitoides
(Lepidocyclina) sumatrensis, Brady, Linderina, sp., together
with numerous forms of Miliolines and Rotalines.

(3) Professor Molengraaff’s Specitmens.—Professor Molen-
graafl’s specimens were obtained during his expedition to
Central Borneo in the years 1893 and 1894, of which a
geographical notice * and a preliminary geological report T
have already been published.

In his account of the fossils, however, Dr. Krause excludes
all consideration of the Radiolaria and Nummulites, specially
stating that the former were under description by Dr. G. J.
Hinde and the latter by Professor Schlumberger (see p. 170
of Krause’s paper).

When Professor Molengraaff visited the British Museum in
the spring of 1897 he requested one of the present writers to
undertake an examination of his Bornean Foraminifera, men-
tioning at the time that they had been placed before Professor
Schlumberger, of Paris, who had been obliged to return them
unidentified on account of their very imperfect preservation,
The specimens and microscopical preparations were therefore
duly forwarded to the British Museum from the Laboratory of
Mineralogy at Amsterdam f, an examination of which proved
the presence of Nummulites Djokdjokarte, K. Martin, a species
common to the Oligocene rocks of Sumatra and Java,
occurring in boulder no. 985 ; Discocyclina, a subgenus of
Orbitoides ; and possibly Amphistegina.

The Molengraaff material is in the form of boulders mostly
composed of a coarse quartz conglomerate, although the largest
(nos. 984 and 986, in two pieces) is of somewhat different
structure, being more of the nature of a grey felspathic grit,
with intercalated lustrous black patches of a carbonaceous
substance. ‘Throughout this mass foraminiferal remains are

* G. A. F, Molengraatt, “Die Niederlandische Expedition nach Zentral-
Borneo in den Jahren 1893 u. 1894,” Petermann’s ‘ Mittheilungen,’ 1895,
vol. xli. p. 201.

+ P. G. Krause, “Ueber Tertiiire, Cretaceische und iltere Ablager-
ungen aus West-Borneo,” Samml. geol. Reichs-Mus, Leiden, 1897, vol. v.
ser. 1, p. 169.

t This was effected through the kindness of Mrs. Molengraaff, her
husband having started for Pretoria to take up his new position of State-
Geologist to the South African Republic.

250 Messrs. R. B. Newton and R. Holland on some

fairly abundant, being rather more easily discernible near the
outer surface, where they occur as reddish-brown casts, con-
siderably decomposed. ‘Two microscopical sections have been
made from boulder no. 984, which is a matrix of black colour
and crowded with Nummulites. None of the other boulders
having been fractured, we are unable to say anything
respecting their internal characters.

All the boulders were obtained from the river-beds of
Embalau, Tekelan, and Sajang, offshoots of the great Kapuas
River in its uppermost regions, being numbered as follows
under a group termed Series I. :—

No. 982. River Telelan.

983. River Embalau (right bank), } kilom. below R. Sajang.
984. River Embalau.
984.

oe Ramer feiclan

987.

The distinguishing numbers on the microscopical sections
are :—

V. 1648 & VY. 1650, made from Boulder no. 984.
V. 1644, V. 1645, V. 1646, and V. 1647, made from Boulder no. 986.

(4) Age of the Specimens.—In determining the geological
horizons of the specimens described in this paper we have
been mainly guided by the carefully worked out results of the
Javan Foraminifera as set forth in Verbeek and Fennema’s
important monograph entitled ‘Description géologique de
Java et Madoura.’ The authors mentioned have limited
Orbitoides to two subgenera instead of five as originally
proposed by Giimbel, viz. Discocyclina and Lepidocyclina,
characteristic of different parts of the Tertiary system. As we
show later on, Messrs. Verbeek and Fennema hold that
Discocyclina, having simple rectangular chambers in the
median plane, as found in the Indian Archipelago, belongs
entirely to Kocene and Oligocene rocks; whereas Lepido-
cyclina, with rounded chambers, never occurs in this area in
older deposits than Miocene, and apparently becomes extinct
during Pliocene times. Similarly with regard to the Nummu-
lites we can recognize an Kocene and Oligocene age respec-
tively for Nummulites javanus and N. Djokdjokarte, species
found both in Borneo and Java.

The foregoing considerations would lead us to conclude
that the Malinam-River pebbles may be referred to two
periods—(1) an LKocene, determined by the presence of

Tertiary Foraminifera from Borneo. 251

Nummulites gavanus and Orbitoides (Discocyclina) stellata ;
and (2) a Miocene or Pliocene, characterized by Orbitoides
(Lepidocyclina) Verbeek and O. (L.) sumatrensis.

Again, the Gomanton-Hill limestone would appear to
represent a Miocene or Pliocene age, on account of its struc-
ture exhibiting forms of Orbitoides (Lepiducyclina) suma-
trensts ; and, lastly, the ‘‘ Molengraaff ” boulders from West-
central Borneo, in which we have identified Nummulites
Djokdjokarte and Orbitoides (Discocyclina), may be regarded
as belonging to the Oligocene formation.

Tertiary Foraminifera are widely distributed over the
islands of the Indo-Pacific area; and although our knowledge
is more complete concerning those forms found in Sumatra,
Java, and Borneo, we are not without evidence of their
occurrence in Timor *, Celebes *, the Philippines +, and east-
wards to New Guinea $. Moreover at Christmas Island, some
200 miles south of Java, Mr. C. W. Andrews § has recently
discovered limestones containing Orbitoides and other Forami-
nifera underlying a comparatively recent coral-formation.
‘These limestones, when properly investigated, will add a new
interest to the geology of this region.

Before concluding this introductory portion of our work,
some acknowledgments are due to those friends who have
assisted us in the preparation of this paper. To Mr. H. W.
Burrows we are greatly indebted for the careful micro-
photographs he bas produced of our slides, the negatives of
which he has generously allowed us to use for our illustrations
on the present occasion ; we have also to thank Mr. Burrows
for his otherwise kindly help and interest shown us during
our examination of the Bornean rocks, We wish to tender
our thanks to Dr. Harmer for the loan of that portion of
Brady’s type material from Sumatra which is preserved in the
University Museum of Zoology at Cambridge, the remainder
being in the British Museum at South Kensington. Our

* K. Martin, “ Palzontologische Ergebnisse von Tiefbohrungen auf
Java, nebst allgemeineren Studien uber das Tertiér von Java, Timor,
und einiger anderer Inseln,” Samml. geol. Reichs-Mus. Leiden, 1887,
vol. iii. no. 15, p. 310 (Timor), p. 862 (Celebes).

+ F. von Richthofen, ‘“‘ Ueber das Vorkommen von Nummulitenforma-
tion auf Japan und den Philippinen,” Zeitschr. deutsch. geol. Ges. 1862,
vol. xiv. p. 357.

¢ K. Martin, “Eine Tertiairformation yon Neu-Guinea und benach-
barten Inseln,” Samml. fgeol. Reichs-Mus. Leiden, 1881, vol. i. no. 2,
bi diate
§ Information contained in an Address read before the Royal Geogra-
hical Society, November 28th, 1898, and published in ‘The Geographical
Saarial for January 1899; see also Geol. Mag. 1899, January, no. 415,
p- 25.

252 Messrs. R. B. Newton and R. Holland on some

thanks are also due to Professor Molengraaff for granting us
the privilege of studying his interesting specimens from West-
central Borneo. Finally we may state that our studies of
the “ Everett” limestones have been greatly facilitated by
the excellent microscopic sections prepared for us_ by
Mr. Richard Hall, the assistant-formatore of the British
Museum at South Kensington.

DESCRIPTION OF THE FORAMINIFERA.

(A) NuMMULITES.

1. Nummulites javanus, Verbeck, form B.
(Pl. IX. figs. 1,°2, 3.)

Nummiulites javanus, vars. A (soloensis), B, C, D, Verbeek, ‘ Voor-
loopig Bericht over Nummulieten, Orbitoiden en Alveolinen van
Java &e.,” Nat. Tijdschr. v. Nederl.-Indié, 1891, vol. li. pp. 105, 106,
figs. 1, 2,3; R. D. M. Verbeek and R. Fennema, Desc. géol. Java
et Madoura, 1896, vol. i. pl. ili. figs. 45-57, pl. iv. figs. 68-68, pl. v.
figs. 69-73, and pl. vii. fig. 94, vol. ii. p. 1148 e¢ seg.

Shell lenticular; edge somewhat obtuse; one surface more
convex than the other; sometimes the shell in vertical section
appears plano-convex or even concavo-convex ; the majority
of the vertical sections show a slight sigmoidal curvature ;
surface probably smooth, but none of our specimens have
been obtained free from the matrix. The “columns,” however,
do not pass up through the vertical section sufficiently strongly
to produce tubercles upon the surface, though there might be
slight external markings. The “ filets cloisonnaires,” or
alar prolongations of the septa, are subreticulate, and are well
shown in horizontal section in Pl. IX. fig. 3. This figure is
strictly comparable with figs. 67 and 68 in plate iv. of Ver-
beek’s work mentioned above ; and it will be seen from our
figure that “les piliers sont grenus en coupe,” as Verbeek
describes them in his Javan specimens.

‘The mean dimensions of the Bornean specimens are
20 millim. in diameter by 4 millim. in thickness; but in all,
or nearly all these specimens, the actual size must have been
somewhat greater, because the external surface of the shells
has suffered more or less corrosion in the process of fossiliza-
tion. ‘There are about 26 turns of the spiral in a radius of
10°5 millim. and 16 chambers in } turn at a radius of 5 millim.
The coiling is, however, irregular. The chambers differ con-
siderably in size even in the same convolution, though not to
the extent apparently shown in Pl. IX. fig. 2. That figure
is deceptive, as all thin sections of Nummulites cut on the

Tertiary Foraminifera from Borneo. 253

horizontal plane must be, because no strictly horizontal plane
will exactly pass through the middle of every chamber in the
median section. The central chamber is invisible.

These large Nummulites are undoubtedly identical with
one or other of the four varieties of N. javanus described by
Dr. Verbeek, and the species is closely related to the well-
known N, levigata of Europe. Dr. Verbeek may be cited in
support of this view as to the affinities of the species. He
describes as N. levigata one of his Javan Nummulites, and
goes on to say (op. edt. p. 1152) :—“ La seule différence entre
cette espéce et la N. laevigata d’Europe (notamment telle que
Carpenter la décrit et la représente dans le Quart. Journ. of
the Geol. Soc. vol. vi. 1850, pl. iii. fig. 2, car la description
et les figures de cette espéce par d’Archiac ne sont pas toujours
exactes), c’est aspect plus ponctué de la surface et le nombre
un peu plus considérable des tours de spire pour une méme
rayon... . Notre espéce a aussi beaucoup d’analogie avec
le N. javanus var. 6, tant pour le nombre des tours de spire
que pour celui des loges, de sorte gw’dl faut peut-étre la con-
sidérer comme une 5* variété de notre N. javanus & cloisons
moins arquées et & piliers plus épais.”

The figure by Carpenter to which Dr. Verbeek refers above
is that of a N. /evigata from the Bracklesham Beds in Sussex,
which differs very considerably from the typical N. levigata
of the Paris Basin and Belgium —differs, in fact, as widely as
other Nummulites which have been ranked as_ separate
species. NV. javanus departs from the typical NW. levigata in
a somewhat opposite direction, but hardly perhaps more
widely. That the Bornean specimens are very close allies
of N. levigata is further shown by their association with a
form having a large initial chamber and bearing a strong
resemblance to N. Lamarcki, the European companion of
N. levigata.

This association of Nummulites, first indicated by
Messrs. Parker and Jones (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 3,
vol. viii. 1861, p. 233), is a very well-known phenomenon.
Every student of these fascinating organisms is aware that
Nummulites almost always, if not invariably, occur in pairs
of so-called “ species.” One of the members of the couple is
generally larger than its fellow, and has always a very minute
or even invisible initial chamber, while the other member,
which never attains a large size, is distinguished by the
possession of a comparatively large initial chamber. Hach
member of such a couple has been looked upon as a distinct
species, and has been named accordingly. The propriety of
the distinction has been questioned by several authors, but

254 Messrs. R. B. Newton and R. Holland on some

the general view of writers on Nummulites has been that ex-
pressed by the diverse nomenclature. Of late years, however,
considerable attention has been given to the study of the
initial and immediately succeeding chambers of the shells of
the Foraminifera, and notably by MM. Schlumberger,
Munier-Chalmas, and Van den Broeck. Mr. J.J. Lister, too,
has closely studied the life-history of Polystomella, a genus
nearly allied to Nummulites. ‘The result of the researches of
these and other observers * is to show that many species of
Foraminifera are dimorphic, and it seems to be probable, in
the light of Mr. Lister’s observations, that the coupled forms
of Nummulites represent alternate generations of one species.
In any case it seems to be desirable that the nomenclature
should express relationship between the companion forms,
and it appears that there is more advantage, in the present
state of our knowledge, in considering paired forms as
varieties of one species than as specifically distinct. We
therefore, following the rule of M. Schlumberger as regards
other Foraminifera, designate this large form with minute
initial chamber NV. javanus, form B, and the smaller com-
panion with large initial chamber JV. gavanus, form A.

2. Nummulites javanus, Verbeek, form A.
(Pl. IX. figs. 4 & 5.)

Nummulites baguelensis, Verbeek (pars), Nat. Tijdsch. Nederl.-Indié,
1891, vol. li. p. 107; Description géologique de Java et Madoura,
1896, vol. i. pl. iii. fig. 75, pl. vi. figs. 81-85, vol. ii. p. 1148,

Shell lenticular; regularly swollen at the centre; edge
obtuse; surface probably smooth; ‘ filets cloisonnaires ”
subreticulate. The mean dimensions of our specimens are
3°2 millim. in width by 1°8 millim. in thickness, but these
measurements are probably rather less than the actual for
the reason given in the description of the form B. The
number of convolutions is usually 4 or 5. We have not
found in our preparations any good horizontal sections, but
we have enough to show that the size and irregular shape of
the initial chamber, the generally semilunar shape of the first
succeeding chamber, the dimensions of the chambers in the
spire, and the closing-in of the later convolutions constitute a

* Bull. Soe. Géol. France, sér. 3, vol. viii. 1880, p. 300; Comptes
Rendus, vol. xevi. 1883, pp. 862-866 and pp. 1598-1601 ; Ann. & Mag,
Nat. Hist. ser. 3, vol. xi. 1883, pp. 340, 341 ; Bull. des Séances de la Soe,
roy. Malacol. de Belgique, 1893, tom. xxviii. ; Phil. Trans. vol. 186, 1895,

p. 401-453; Proc. Camb. Philosophical Soc. 1897, vol. ix. part 5,
p. 286-240. See also T. R. Jones, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1894, ser. 6,
vol. xiv. pp. 401-407.

Tertiary Foraminifera from Borneo. 255

strong resemblance to the characters of NV. Lamarcki, the
European companion of N. levigata. N. javanus, form A,
differs from N. Lamarck? chiefly in its fewer convolutions
and its rather more robust habit of growth.

Here and there in the same slides with N. javanus, form A,
we have met with vertical sections of rather smaller Nummu-
lites less robustly built than their companions and with the
initial chambers measuring ‘12 millim. in width. We are
inclined to think that these Nummulites are variants of
N. javanus, form A, corresponding to the variety of N. La-
marckt figured by d’Archiac and Haime in pl. iv. fig. 16 of
their monograph.

Occurrence. N. javanus (both forms) occurs in our material
only in two pebbles from the bed of the River Malinam. In
one pebble particularly it occurs in great profusion.

3. Nummulites Djokdjokarte, K. Martin (sp.).

Nummulites Lamarcki, R. D. M. Verbeek, “ Tertiarformation von
Sumatra,” Paleontographica, 1880, Suppl. 3, Lief. 8, Theil 1, p. 23
(non Archiac and Haime).

Nummulina Djokdjokarte, K. Martin, “ Tertiar-Verstemerungen vom
dstlichen Java,’ Samml. geol. Reichs-Mus. Leiden, 1881, no. 2,
p- 110, pl. v. figs. 9-11.

Nummulites Jogjakerte, R. D. M. Verbeek, “ Voorloopig Bericht over
Nummulieten, Orbitoiden en Alveolinen van Java, &e.,’ Nat.
pa ecbe. v. Nederl.-Indié, 1891, vol. li. pp. 116, 117, figs. 1-3 on
plate.

Nummulites Joguiakarte, R. D. M. Verbeek and R. Fennema, Descrip-
tion géologique Java et Madoura, 1896, vol. i. pl. viii. figs. 114-119,
vol, 1. p. 1162.

To this species we refer certain specimens which occur in
the material collected by Prof. Molengraaff. ‘This material, as

Nummulites Djokdjokarte, K. Martin (sp.).
(Magnified 12 times.)

already stated, consists of small boulders and a few micro-
scopic sections cut from two of them. On chipping one of

256 Messrs. R. B. Newton and R. Holland on some

the boulders (no. 984) specimens of N. Djokdjokarte in a
very decayed condition are here and there met with. The
specimen figured measured 8°5 millim. in width and the
central chamber measured *28 millim. The number of convo-
lutions was 4 or 44, and the number of chambers in the spire
was about 64. The thickness of the specimen (judging from
the cast in the matrix) appears to have been from 1 to 2 millim.

Prof. Molengraaft’s slides contain various more or less
obscure sections of Nummulites. Some of them are possibly
referable to this species, others possibly belong to an alter-
nate form of the same or to distinct species; but they do not
happen to be cut so as to enable us to determine their characters.
One of these indeterminate sections is shown in PI. IX. fig. 6.

Occurrence. Prof. Molengraaft’s material was obtained from
the beds of the Rivers Embalau and Tekelan.

(B) ORrBITOIDES.

In the Appendix to the valuable work on the Geology of
Java and Madoura already referred to Dr. Verbeek gives a
very interesting chapter on the Orbitoides met with. He
reviews much of the work of other writers upon the genus,
and expresses himself in favour of reducing Giimbel’s * five
subgenera to two—that is to say, he would unite Discocyclina,
Rhipidocyclina, Aktinocyclina, and Asterocyclina under the
subgenus Discocyclina, comprising all Orbitoides having
rectangular chambers in the median plane ; and for the second
subgenus he would retain Giimbel’s Lepidocyclina, comprising
the Orbitoides with rounded chambers in the median plane.
We quite agree in this arrangement. It appears to us that
the division into subgenera on the basis of the characters of
the chambers of the median plane is likely to give satisfactory
results, while divisions based on the external form or orna-
mentation of the shells, such as “ Rhipidocyclina,” ‘ Aktino-
cyclina,” and “ Asterocyclina,” must lead to confusion. We
say this particularly because in the study of our Bornean
material we have come across fragments which, while they
are not sufficiently perfect for description, give us good ground
for expecting that specimens will presently be met with
having the external form of Giimbel’s Asterocyclina, for
instance, coupled with the lozenge-shaped or spatuliform
median chambers which are characteristic of Lepidocyclina.

We think it not improbable that the O. (Asterocyclina)
stellata figured by Vaughan Jennings in his paper on the

* “ Beitrage zur Foraminiferen-Fauna der nordalpinen Eocangebilde,”
Abbandl. k. Bayer. Akad, Wiss. Classe ii. Band x. (1868).

Tertiary Foraminifera from Borneo. 257

Orbitoidal Limestone of North Borneo (Geol. Mag. dee. iii.
vol. v. 1888, pl. xiv. fig. 7) may belong to the Lepidocycline
rather than the Discocycline group.

Dr. Verbeek ventures to put forth an important generaliza-
tion based on his study of the Orbitoides of Java and the
neighbouring lands. He writes:—‘ Dans toutes les couches,
caractérisées comme éocénes par la présence de nummulites
et d’alvéolines, il existe de nombreuses discocyclines (y compris
des rhipido-, des actino- et des astéro-cyclines), mais pas une
seule ]épidocycline. Par contre, dans les milliers de plaques
microscopiques de roches de Java et de Sumatra, qui d’aprés
leurs mollusques doivent appartenir au terrain tertiaire supé-
rteur, je n’ai rencontré que des lépidocyclines et jamais je n’y
ai observé une seule discocycline.” (Op. cit. p. 1164.)

So far as our observations go they tend to confirm this
generalization of Dr. Verbeek. In the sections cut from the
pebbles taken from the bed of the River Malinam we find
associated with Nummulites a few vertical sections of
Orbitoides. We have not been able to discover in our slides
any sections showing the chambers of the median plane, but
the general appearance of the sections leads us to look upon
the Orbitoides as Discocyclines rather than Lepidocyclines.
On the other hand, in our sections containing undoubted
Lepidocyclines we find-no trace of Discocyclines, and Nummu-
lites are altogether absent, though we have met with one or
two rather obscure sections of Amphistegina.

4, Orbitoides (Lepidocyclina) Verbeekz, sp. n.
(PIV TX. figse7=lly PioX: figs 1.)
Orbitoides papyracea, Brady, Geol. Mag. 1875, pl. xiv. fig. 1, p. 535
(non Boubée).
Lepidocyclina species g and k, Verbeek and Fennema, Descr. géol. de
Java et Madoura, 1896, vol. i. pl. xi. figs. 178-175, 177-180, vol. ii.
p. 1178.

In the volume of the ‘ Geological Magazine’ referred to
above the late Dr. Brady described and figured certain
Orbitoides and other Foraminifera from Sumatra. The
specimens were supplied by Dr. Verbeek, and they are now
preserved partly in the British Museum (Nat. Hist.) and
partly in the University Museum of Zoology at Cambridge.
Certain of the Orbitoides were referred by Dr. Brady to
O. papyracea, Boubée, and were so figured in the plate xiv.
illustrating his paper. O. papyracea, Boubée, however,
belongs to Giimbel’s subgenus Discocyclina, having the
chambers of the median plane rectangular; but Brady’s
Sumatran specimens have the chambers of the median plane

258 Messrs. R. B. Newton and R. Holland on some

“en losange,” as Dr. Verbeek has already pointed out merely
from an examination of fig. le in Brady’s plate; and they
are therefore properly to be referred to the subgenus ‘ Lepido-
cyclina,” which is characterized by the possession of non-
rectangular chambers in the median plane.

In order to clear up as far as may be the proper relation-
ships of Brady’s species we have carefully examined the
numerous free specimens, now in the British Museum, which
Dr. Brady had before him when writing his paper; and by
the kindness of Dr. Harmer, of the University Museum of
Zoology at Cambridge, we have been enabled thoroughly to
examine the actual figured and other prepared specimens
used by Brady to illustrate his paper.

We have no hesitation in saying that Brady’s Sumatran
specimens are identical with a species which occurs frequently
in our slides cut from one of the pebbles taken from the bed
of the River Malinam; and we agree with Dr. Verbeek that
they are identical also with the species g and & figured in
plate xi. of his work already several times referred to.

So far as we can see the specimens fall under no species
already described—and here we are in agreement with
Dr. Verbeek—and we therefore describe it as a new species
under the designation Orbitoides (Lepidocyclina) Verbeekt.
As the Sumatran specimens which we have been able to
study are perfect, numerous, and quite free from matrix, we
have preferred to figure for the most part preparations of
those rather than our Bornean sections. Fig. 9 of Pl. [X.,
however, is from one of our slides.

Characters. The species is dimorphic—that is to say, some
individuals have the initial chamber large, while in others it
is very small, practically invisible. They are distinguished
here as form A and form B respectively.

Form A.—Shell discoidal, regularly swollen at the centre ;
surface smooth and devoid of ornament; edge very slightly
thickened and rounded ; initial chamber large and apparently
always succeeded by a chamber still larger and partly em-
bracing the first; chambers of the median plane lozenge-
shaped, the chamber-walls being slightly curved ; chambers
above and below the median plane irregular in shape, but
somewhat regularly disposed. Hxternal dimensions of shell
5 to 6 millim. in width by 1°5 to 2 millim. in thickness ;
inside dimensions of the two central chambers taken together
about ‘5 millim. in width by *25 millim. in depth ; chambers
of median plane very minute; long axis of lozenge about
‘09 millim.

The external appearance of a typical specimen is well

Tertiary Foraminifera from Borneo. 259

shown in fig. 1 of Pl. X. Fig. 7 of Pl. IX. shows the
vertical section and fig. 8 the chambers of the median plane;
while a horizontal section cutting the chambers above the
median plane is given in fig. 10.

Form B.—Shell discoidal, regularly swollen at the centre ;
surface smooth and devoid of ornament; edge thin and more
extended than in form A; initial chamber invisible ; some
specimens appear to show a spiral arrangement of the first
few chambers; chambers of the median plane lozenge-shaped
and similar in appearance and dimensions to the corresponding
chambers of form A ; chambers above and below the median
plane also similar to those of form A. Hxternal dimensions of
the shell 10 to 12 millim. in width by about 2 millim. in
thickness ; some individuals may considerably exceed in size
the width here given, because the thin edge of the specimens
we have examined is generally more or less broken. ‘he
chambers of the median plane of form B are shown in PI. IX.
ne. 11,

Occurrence. ‘The specimens of O. (Lepitdocyclina) Ver-
beekt in the British Museum and in the University Museum
of Zoology at Cambridge were collected by Dr. Verbeek in
Sumatra. Dr. Verbeek’s species “ g ” came from the “ Marne
pres d’Hilihoia, ile de Nias, céte occidentale de Sumatra” ;
the species “‘k ” was obtained from the “ Calcaire de Boukit
Ngareh ou Pouangang, 4 Batouméndioulour, hauts plateaux
de Padang, céte occidentale de Sumatra.” Our Bornean
specimens are from pebbles found in the bed of the River
Malinam.

5. Orbitoides (Lepidocyclina) sumatrensis, Brady.
(Pl. X. figs. 7-12.)
Orbitoides sumatrensis, Brady, Geol. Mag. 1875, p. 536, pl. xiv. fig. 3;
. and Jaarb, Mijn. Ned. Ooste-Indié, 1878, vol. vii. pt. 2, pl. ii. fig. 8,
p. 165.

This species was first described by Brady in the paper on
the Sumatran Foraminifera published in the Geol. Mag. as
above. We reproduce here the material part of Brady’s
note :—“ There are still some two or three little fossils
pertaining to the genus Orbztoides. ‘They are subglobular or
only slightly compressed, 3 millim. in diameter and about
2°5 millim. in thickness. ‘The exterior is rough and granular.
Laid horizontally, there is an irregular partial extension of
the periphery, which seems to suggest an abortive disc. It
is within the bounds of possibility that these specimens may
be the central thick portions of some form like the more
umbonate varieties of O. dispansa, but the interior structure

260 Messrs. R. B. Newton and R. Holland on some

does not lend itself to this supposition. The general arrange-
ment of the chamberlets is shown in fig. 3c, which is drawn
from a horizontal section near, but not at, the median plane.
A transverse section shows the median disc, which does not
appear to be quite uniformly central in its position, exceed-
ingly thin in the middle, thickening rapidly towards the
circumference, rounded at the margin, and having somewhat
the contour in section of an hourglass drawn out a little at
the ends. The primordial chamber, as far as can be made
out, is very small.’

In our Pl. X. figs. 7 and 8 we figure again the specimens
illustrated by Brady in the ‘ Geological Magazine.’ Brady’s
figures were drawn by A. Hollick, ours are from photographs
of the actual specimens, and simply demonstrate the accuracy
of the original drawings. In fig. 10 we give Brady’s prepara-
tion (not before figured) on which he appears to have based
his description of the transverse section of the shell. It is
clear that this figure does not represent a vertical section, but
one taken at a considerable angle with the vertical.

An example of O. sumatrensis in the British Museum
(Nat. Hist.) collection has been ground down in order to
discover the true characters of the chambers of the median
plane (Pl. X. fig. 9). In thus operating upon this specimen
we were able to note the appearance of the horizontal sections
at various stages and also sections at slight angles with the
horizontal. We have thus been enabled to recognize that
numerous orbitoid sections in our slides cut from the lime-
stone of Gomanton Hill and from one of the pebbles from
the bed of the River Malinam are to be properly referred to
this species; and we venture to give the characters of the
species as follows :—

Characters. Shell subglobular ; about 3 millim. in width
by 1:5 to 2°5 millim. in thickness; exterior rough and
granular; median edge produced to form a narrow keel ;
median chambers variable in size and shape, but always
rounded or ‘‘spatuliform.” Chambers above and below the
median plane have the shape of shallow cylinders and are
remarkably constant in size and regular in arrangement ;
chamber-walls finely perforate. The initial chamber of the
British Museum specimen was “megalospheric” (about
‘5 millim. in diameter); the Cambridge specimen (Pl. X.
fig. 10) is possibly, as Brady supposed, ‘“ microspheric.”
If so, we have both form A and form B of the species.

The general external appearance of the shell is shown in

Pl. X. fig. 7, photographed from Brady’s figured specimen.

Tertiary Foraminifera from Borneo. 261

Fig. 8 is photographed from Brady’s horizontal section cut
“near, but not at, the median plane.” It and fig. 10 show
well the cylindrical shape of the chamberlets and the perforate
chamber-wails. Fig. 6 shows the shape of the chambers of
the median plane, and figs. 1 and 3 (from our Bornean
material) give vertical sections of the shell.

Occurrence. Brady’s specimens were collected by Dr. Ver-
beek from the marl-rock of Nias Island, west coast of Sumatra,
Our specimens are from the Gomanton-Hill limestone and
from pebbles taken from the bed of the River Malinam.

6. Orbitoides (Discocyclina) stellata (d’Archiae),
(PI. 'X. fig. 2.)

Calearina? stellata, VArchiac, “ Dese. Foss. Couches Nummulines en-
virons Bayonne,” Mém. Soc. Géol. France, 1846, sér. 2, vol. ii. pt. 1,
pl. vii. fig. 1, p. 199.

Orbitoides ( Asterocyclina) stellata, Giimbel, “ Beitr. Foram. nordalpinen
Kociingebilde,”? Abhandl. k. Bayer. Akad. Wiss, 1868, Classe ii,
Band x. p. 713, pl. ii. fig. 115, pl. iv. figs. 4-7.

To this species probably belongs the specimen figured in
Pl. X. fig. 2. We have some hesitation in naming the
specimen at all, and do so only because of its association in
our slides with Nummulites javanus and because we find that,
so far as our study of the Sumatran and Bornean material
goes, Dr. Verbeek’s generalization as to the non-occurrence of
Lepidocycline Orbitoides in association with Nummulites
appears to hold good.

Occurrence. In a pebble from the bed of the River
Malinam.

7. Other Orbitoides,
(Pl. X. figs, 3 & 4.)

In our slides cut from pebbles of the River Malinam in
which Nummulites occur there are a considerable number of
sections (more or less vertical) of Orbitoides. They probably
belong to the subgenus Discocyclina, and possibly include
O. (Discocyclina) papyracea, Boubée, and O. (Discocyclina)
dispansa, Sowerby. One of the vertical sections we figure in
Pl. X. fig. 3.

In the material collected by Prof. Molengraaff one section,
probably of a Discocycline, has been met with; this we
figure in Pl. X. fig. 4.

Ann. & Mag. N, Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. tii. 19

262 Messrs. R. B. Newton and R. Holland on some

(C) Lixperina*.
8. Linderina, sp. indet. (PI. X. fig. 6.)

In our slides cut from the Gomanton-Hill limestone nume-
rous sections of specimens of this interesting genus occur,
but there are not a sufficient number of good sections to
enable us to refer them specifically.

The characters of the genus, as given by M. Schlum-
berger, are as follows :—

** Plasmostracum discoidal surépaissi au centre, composé
d’un seul rang de nombreuses petites loges disposées circu-
lairement autour d’une loge centrale et dans un méme plan.
Les parois de chaque série de loges se prolongent vers le
milieu au-dessus des loges déja formées. Cette enveloppe
calcaire est traversée par de fortes perforations qui pénétrent
directement jusqu’aux loges internes.”

One species only is known, namely ZL. brugest, Schlum-
berger, which comes from the Upper Eocene of Bruges

(Gironde).

(D) CycLocLyPEvs.

9. Cycloclypeus?, sp. indet. (PI. X. fig. 5.)

The remarkable specimen figured as above is probably to
be referred to this genus. It occurs in one of the pebbles
from the bed of the River Malinam associated with Nummu-
lites javanus, forms A and B. The actual shell was probably
at least twice the width of the fragment preserved, and pre-
sumably had the shape of a thin disk with a central swelling
and two or more concentric thickened bands. The published
figure which appears to have the closest resemblance to it is
that of Cycloclypeus annulatus, Martin (Tertiirsch. Java,
1879-80, p. 157, pl. xxviii. fig. 1).

(E) OTHER FORAMINIFERA.

10. Miliolina, Spiroloculina?, Planispirina, &c.

Our slides cut from the pebbles of the Malinam River and
from the Gomanton-Hill limestone contain numberless sections
of other Foraminifera belonging to the genera Miliolina,

* C. Schlumberger, “ Note sur les Genres Triliina et Linderina,” Bull.
Soe. Géol. France, 1893, sér. 3, vol. xxi. pl. iii. figs. 7-9, p. 120,

Tertiary Foraminifera from Borneo. 263

Sptroloculina ?, Planispirina, and to the subfamily Rotaline ;
but we have not thought it worth while to attempt to refer
such to particular “species,” since we have nothing but
sections cut in more or less indeterminate directions.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
PuatE IX.
Nummulites javanus, Verbeek. Form B.

Fig. 1. Vertical section, x 3. (B. M.)
Fig. 2. Horizontal section, x 10. (B. M.)
Fig. 3. “ Filets cloisonnaires,’ x 10. (B. M.)

Nummulites javanus. Form A,

Fig. 4. Vertical section, x 15. (B. M.)
Fig. 5, Ditto, x 10. (B. M.)

Nummulites, sp. indet.
Fig. 6. Vertical section, x 12. (M.)

Orlitocdes (Lepidocyclina) Verbeeki, sp.n. Form A.

Fig. 7. Vertical section, x 13. (C.)

Fry. 8. Horizontal section on median plane, X 20. (B. M.}
fig. 9. Ditto, x 30. (B. M.)

fig. 10. Horizental section above median plane, x 13. (C.}

Orliteides (Lepidocyelina) Verbeeki. Form B.
Fig. 11. Horizontal section on median plane, X 25. (B. M.}

Poate X.
Orbitcides (Lepidocyclina) Verbecki. Ferm A,
Fig. 1. Exterior, X 9. (C.)
Orbitoides (Discocyclina) stellata, @ Archiac.
Fig. 2. Section approximately herizontal and above median plane
x 20. (B. M.) j
Orbitoides (Discocyclina), spp, indet.
Fig. 3. Vertical section, x 12. (B.M.)
Fig. 4. Ditto, X 26. (M.)
Cycloclypeus ?, sp. indet,
Fig. 5. Section, x 11. (B. M.)
Linderina, sp. indet,
Fig. 6, Vertical section, x 30. (B. M.)

264 Mr. L. A. Borradaile-—The Outcome

Orbitoides (Lepidocyclina) sumatrensis, Brady.
Fig. 7. Exterior, X 9. (C.)
Fig. 8. Horizontal section above median plane, x 30. (C.)
Fig. 9. Chambers of median plane, x 60, (B. M.)
Fig. 10. Oblique section, X 35. (C.)
‘tg. 11. Vertical section, x 16, (B. M.)
Fig. 12. Ditto, x 25. (B. M.)

Note.—The capital letters within brackets have the following significa-
tion :—
B. M.=British Museum collection.
M.=Professor Molengraatf!’s collection.
C.=Cambridge Museum of Zoology collection.

XLI.—The Outcome of a South-Sea Voyage *.
By L. A. BoRRADAILE.

Dr. AktTHUR WILLEY was engaged on a voyage of research
in the South Seas from 1895 to 1897. Since his return his
valuable material has been in the hands of specialists, and
the results of their labours are to be embodied in a work at
present appearing in parts from the Cambridge University
Press. The first two of these parts are now before us.

It is quite clear that, however valuable be the papers by
other contributors, the explorer’s own communications will
form the prominent feature of the series.

This is amply evident in the first number, in which by far
the most important article is the opening one by Dr. Willey
on a new species and subgenus of Peripatus from New
Britain. In aecordance with the territorial nomenclature
adopted for many species of the genus, the new form is to be
called Peripatus (Paraperipatus) nove-britannie. ‘The male
of this creature has 22 pairs of legs and the female, which is
larger and more numerous, has 24. There are three spinous
pads on each leg, and the generative opening is placed imme-
diately behind the last pair. Receptacula seminis are present
in the female, but there are no receptacula ovorum. The
eggs are small and without yolk. The accessory glands of
the male open to the exterior through a median bulbus imme-
diately above the anus. The ductus ejaculatorius is median
and short, and spermatophores are not formed.

* ‘Zoological Results, based on material from New Britain, New
Guinea, Loyalty Islands, and elsewhere, collected during the Years 1895,
1896, and 1897.’ By Arthur Willey, D.Sc. Lond., Hon, M.A. Cantab.,
Balfour Student of the University of Cambridge. Parts land Ul. Cam-
bridge: at the University Press, 1898.

of a South-Sea Voyage. 265

Of the several interesting points arising in the course of
the anatomical description the first occurs in the paragraphs
on the female generative organs. The ovarial wall is thin
and differs in structure from that of the oviduct, showing in
this point a resemblance to the Cape and Australasian species
and differing from the Neotropical. ‘The eggs are follicular.
Immediately on leaving the ovary the oviduct is of a structure
different from that which it assumes during the rest of its
length, and this first portion of the oviduct is called by
Dr. Willey the “ infundibulum,” and likened to the funnel of
anephridium., ‘The ovary itself is compared with the end-
sac. Unfortunately there are no observations on the develop-
ment of these organs.

The male generative organs, however, present features of
even greater interest than the female. The vasa deferentia
are symmetrical and pass to the exterior by a median ductus
ejaculatorius which is hardly larger than the vagina of the
female. This arrangement is precisely that supposed by
Moseley to have been the original condition of the parts in
question. The arrangement of the accessory glands is
different from that presented by either of the other sub-
genera—in fact, each section of the genus has these organs in
a condition quite different from that found in any of the
others. Dr. Willey suggests that they are capable of throwing
light on the Malpighian tubules of insects.

But the crowning peculiarity of the New-Britain Peripatus
lies in the structure of itsembryos. Of these a fairly complete
series was available for examination, owing to the fact that
each fertilized female contains a number of young of various
ages. In the following short account of their development it
will be best to use the author’s own words where this is
possible. In the early stages “ the embryonic area proper is
confined to a thickened tract at the posterior-ventral side of a
large oval vesicle. ‘The rest of the wall of the vesicle is
composed of embryonic ectoderm and endoderm, which take
no immediate part in the formation of the embryo. Physio-
logically it corresponds exactly with the peripheral epiblast
and hypoblast of a mammalian blastodermic vesicle. As in
the latter, it is the ectoderm which is chiefly concerned in the
absorption of nutriment for the use of the embryo, as evidenced
by the vacuolar character of the cells.” In a later stage the
vesicle comes to project behind as well as in front of the
embryo.

By the appearance of a deepening transverse groove in the
embryonic area the embryo proper becomes U-shaped. In
the course of subsequent growth it becomes spirally coiled.

266 Mr. L. A. Borradaile— The Outcome

“The anterior region of the embryo is practically a punctum
fixum, and the contortion of the embryo in a later stage is
almost entirely due to the growth which is taking place at
the primitive streak ”’—the latter being at the hind end.

The endoderm has a chequered history. In one of the
earlier stages “ many endoderm-cells forsake their epithelial
position and become converted into wandering trophocytes.”
Subsequently the endoderm reconstitutes itself and forms “a
fairly compact epithelial layer containing numerous eosino-
phile granules of varying sizes.” Later on still this endoderm
again breaks up. ‘‘In young individuals the brightly
staining globules have entirely disappeared. The endoderm
does not form an epithelial layer, but consists of cells lying
loosely and freely in the gastral cavity, like the trophocytes
in the embryo.” A reconstitution of the endoderm after
this second histolysis has not been observed. It is suggested
that histolysis of the endoderm is a periodically recurring
phenomenon in Peripatus.

As to the general bearings of this history, the resemblance
of the embryo in the earlier stages to that of an insect before
the infolding, and of the trophic vesicle, “‘ when the embryo is
flexed and the trophic organ covers its ventral surface as with
a cap,” to the amnion of an insect is duly pointed out in the
present paper, and has since been the subject of an article in
the ‘ Quarterly Journal of Microscopical Science.’ But there
is another resemblance, even more interesting if less obvious
than that just referred to, on which Dr. Willey is at present
silent.

‘The discovery of a new method of development in Peripatus
naturally suggests speculation as to whether the embryo is in
any way comparable with the trochosphere larva of Annelids,
Now the embryo in question is a vesicular creature, with a
greatly swollen preoral region, a ventral mouth-site, and two
ventro-lateral bands of mesoderm (hindward these two bands
become one), starting at the hind end in the neighbourhood
of the future anus, and thence proliferating. The adult form
is reached by the elongation of the hinder part of the body
concurrently with the formation of new segments at the hind
end and the reduction of the antero-dorsal vesicular region.
In all these points our embryo resembles a_trochosphere.
The absence of the ciliated rings would, of course, be expected
in view of the loss of the free life. No serious difficulty is
presented by the absence of a blastoccel, this condition being
already known in various Polycheetes (Psygmobranchus &c.)
and in the Karthworms. ‘The embryos of the latter group,
under the influence of altered conditions of nutrition, show a

of a South-Sea Voyage. 267

curious analogy with that of our Peripatus, although the
nutritive conditions in the present case have been altered in a
somewhat different direction, and the ectoderm is required to
be absorptive, and not merely retaining as in the earthworms.
Indeed, it seems scarcely extravagant to hope that renewed
investigation may reveal traces of some structure comparable
to the trochosphere head-kidney. Further details will in any
case be awaited with interest.

So much for the resemblance of the new Pertpatus embryo
to the trochosphere. It must at the same time be confessed
that the presence of a primitive streak points to the proba-
bility that the original free larva of Pertpatus, postulated by
Kennel and Willey, was not in all respects a typical trocho-
sphere. But it seems not unlikely that this very feature may
lead to the most valuable results when the whole question is
fully discussed.

The other articles in Part I. are:—one by Dr. Paul
Mayer on a new Caprellid, to which he has given the name
of Metaprotella sandalensis, and which is interesting on
account of its habitat, Caprellids being rare in the tropics;
one by Mr. G. A. Boulenger on the rare sea-snake Aipysurus
annulatus (Krefft) ; two by Mr. R. I. Pocock on the Arach-
nids and Myriapods respectively; and one by Dr. David
Sharp on the Phasmide, with notes on the eggs. The intro-
duction to the latter article contains some very interesting
remarks on the eggs of Phasmide and other subjects relating
to the same family.

With the exception of a valuable little paper by Mr. J.
Stanley Gardiner on the postembryonic development of the
Fungid coral Cycloseris, which he finds to closely resemble
that of Fungia, the whole of the second part is given up to
systematic accounts of the collections of various groups of
animals, It includes a paper on the Milleporide by Pro-
fessor Hickson, containing some interesting remarks on
retractile nematocysts in that group; and reports on the
Holothurians by Mr. F. P. Bedford, on the other Kchino-
derms by Prof. Jeffrey Bell, on Sipunculids by Mr. A. E.
Shipley, on Solitary Corals by Mr. J. Stanley Gardiner, on
Earthworms by Mr. F. Ei. Beddard, and on Gorgonacea by
Miss I. L. Hiles.

For the rest, the style in which this publication is produced
is above praise. The type is large and clear, and set in fair
wide margins; the plates are excellent, and accompanied,
where this is needed, by full and clear explanations. A good
setting for good work.

268 Bibliographical Notice.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICE.

Catalogue of the Lepidoptera Phalene in the British Museum.
Volume I. (pp. xxi & 559) and Plates (i.—xvil.). Catalogue of
the Syntomidse in the Collection of the British Museum. By
Sir Gzorce F. Hampson, Bart. London; printed by order of
the Trustees. 1898. 8vo.

Tue Trustees of the British Museum are to be congratulated on
their boldness in resolving to attempt a monumental work in ento- ~
mology, on the Moths of the world—a group which, though very
incompletely known or collected at present, probably numbers at
least five or six times as many species as the whole of the Birds,
the Museum Catalogue of which has just been completed in twenty-
seven thick octavo volumes, exclusive of Supplement and Index.
The Bird Catalogue is the work of eleven different authors, and
the effort to describe a far larger group may well be beyond the
powers of one entomologist ; but Sir George Hampson is a young
and energetic man, and, what is of even far greater importance, it
is evident that he has very wisely been given a perfectly free hand,
and every encouragement by the authorities of the Museum. Con-
sequently he commences his arduous task under the most favourable
auspices, and great things may be expected of him.

The plan of the work is similar in the main to the author’s useful
‘ Moths of India,’ from which many of the illustrations, especially
those in the Introduction, are copied; but in one respect we notice
a change for the better. The author is well known to be what is
called, in entomological slang, “a lumper”; and in some cases
many nominal species are sunk under one. In the present work an
attempt has been made to show which names are regarded as abso-
lute synonyms, and which represent actual variations of greater or
less importance ; and although we think this should have been done
more fully, yet this feature marks a decided improvement on the
‘Moths of India,’ in which very few indications of this kind were
given.

The Introduction to the present work commences with general
information respecting Lepidoptera; and it is very convenient in a
work of this kind to have careful diagrams of such features as wing-
neuration always available for ready reference. We should almost
be inclined to recommend that such diagrams should be reproduced
in each volume.

Then follow remarks on the phylogeny of Lepidoptera, illustrated
by tables, but expressed, as is frequently the case with writers who
attempt to trace out schemes of evolution, which must, after all, bo
largely tentative and conjectural, in rather too dogmatic a manner
for our taste.

In Geographical Distribution the author admits four principal
zones, viz. :—Northern Temperate, the Tropical Zone of the Old
World, the Neotropical, and, finally, the Australian Region,

Bibliographical Notice. 269

A brief sketch is then given of the general scheme of the work,
followed by a key to the families of Lepidoptera, of which the
author now admits 52, 7 of which include butterflies; and these,
though placed at the head of the table, are numbered from 33 to 39,
their place being thus indicated between the Castniade and the
Euschemonide, an arrangement which will probably not be accepted
by all entomologists. As the plan of the work is to begin with the
most highly organized families and to work downwards, the present
volume is devoted to the Syntomide, which the author now places
as Fam. 1. This group was formerly regarded as a section of the
Zygenide, between the true Zygenide and the Arctiade, which
here form Fam. 2; but the Zygenide are now removed to a great
distance, standing as Fam. 41. Then follow general observations
on the Syntomide, a key to the genera, and a table showing their
comparative affinities, and then the author plunges in medias res.

Before speaking of the work itself we may mention that it is
introduced by a conventional preface by Sir William Flower, followed
by a Systematic Index, the value of which would, however, we think,
have been much increased for purposes of ready reference if the
names of the authors had been appended to the species and genera,
an improvement which we hope to see adopted in future volumes.
There is also a general Alphabetical Index at the end of the book.

1184 species are described in the present volume, including many
which are not in the British Museum, but of which authentic
specimens have been examined by the author. It has wisely been
decided, however, that no new species are to be described in the
work, except those of which the British Museum actually possesses
the types.

The descriptions are short, but will probably be sufficient for the
identification of the species, especially as a large number are figured.
We may, however, express a hope that too great uniformity ot plan
may not lead to too mechanical a method of work—an error into
which all naturalists are liable to fall when they are required to
describe a Jarge number of species.

As the identification of species is one of the principal objects in a
work of this description, it would be unfair to expect that much
space could be given to metamorphoses or other detailed information.
What a fairly complete account of individual species would really
imply, entomologists will soon have an opportunity of learning from
Mr. Tutt’s forthcoming work on the british Zygaenide—though
even Mr. Tutt, so far as we know, deals chiefly, if not exclusively,
only with synonymy, external characters and variation, range, habits,
localities, metamorphoses, and food. A series of volumes would be
required to contain all the attainable information relating to almost
any single species of animal or plant, as every naturalist must be
well aware.

The determination of species is much facilitated in the present
work by elaborate tables, which are specially useful in the case of
the larger genera, and by the numerous illustrations. Each genus,

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser.'7. Vol, iii. | 20

270 Geological Society.

and each of the more important sections of a genus at least, are
illustrated in the text, while all species that have not been satis-
factorily figured elsewhere, are, as far as possible, to be represented
on the coloured plates. These are issued and sold separately—a
great advantage for working entomologists, who frequently require
more than one copy of a work of this description ; and it would be
too much to expect them to buy a duplicate set of coloured plates
too. We regret that both the plain aud coloured figures represent
one side of the insect only; but this inartistic method was abso-
lutely unavoidable without a very large (and, for scientific purposes,
unnecessary) additional outlay of both space and money.

We hope Sir George Hampson may live to bring out many
more volumes similar to the book now before us.

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.

November 9th, 1898.—W. Whitaker, B.A., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.

The following communication was read :—

‘On the Radiolaria in the Devonian Rocks of New South Wales.’
By G. J. Hinde, Ph.D., F.R.S., F.G.S.

Hand-specimens of the various radiolarian rocks discovered by
Messrs. David and Pittman in New South Wales were forwarded
to the Author, and from them numerous microscopic sections were
prepared. In the chert and jasper rocks of the Jenolan, Bingara,
and Tamworth districts, the radiolaria were for the most part in
the condition of casts filled with chalcedonic silica and without
structure, so that their generic characters could not be determined.
Also in the claystones, the radiolaria were but poorly shown in
sections, though the structure could be seen in specimens weathered
out naturally on the surface of the rock. But in the siliceous
limestones and in the volcanic tuffs the radiolaria were embedded in,
and infiltrated with calcite, and by careful etching of thin sections
of the rock, the lime was eliminated and the organisms were shown
very distinctly. The rock then appeared as a confused mass of
entire and fragmentary radiolaria and minute debris of their spines
and latticed tests. The silica of these forms is for the most part
still in its colloid condition ; in some, however, it has been replaced
by a dark mineral.

Fifty-four species belonging to 29 genera have been determined
and figured ; all the species and four genera are regarded as new;
excepting a few primitive types of Nassellaria, the forms belong to
the Spumellaria. The large majority may be included in the

Geological Society. 271

Spheroidea and Prunoidea with medullary tests and radial spines.
They do not show any near relationship to the radiolaria described
from Devonian rocks in Europe, but in some features they resemble
the radiolarian faunas of Ordovician age in the South of Scotland,
Cornwall, and Cabriéres, Languedoc.

No other fossils beyond a few simple sponge-spicules and, on two
or three horizons, some fragmentary impressions of Lepidodendron
australe, have been found in association with the radiolaria.

These New South Wales radiolarian deposits are by far the most
extensive of any hitherto known, and they are remarkable not only
for their great thickness but also for the manner in which the
radiolaria are preserved in the limestones, tuffs, and claystones.

November 23rd, 1898.—W. Whitaker, B.A., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.

The following communication was read :—

‘On the Remains of Amia from Oligocene Strata in the Isle
of Wight.’ By E. T. Newton, Esq., F.R.S., F.G.S.

The specimens described in this communication were found by
Mr. Clement Reid in the Bembridge Marls of Hamstead, and by
Mr. Colenutt in the Bembridge Beds and in the Osborne Series of
King’s Quay, near Ryde. After a reference to species described in
America and referred to the genera Amia, Protaumia, Hypamia, and
Pappichthys, the Author proceeds to the description of the specimens
in question, referring them all to the genus Amia. The specimens
inclnde the following bones :—vertebrie, maxille with the supple-
mentary bones, premaxillex, bones of the skull, dentary bones,
a parasphenoid, a clavicle, scales, and teeth. ‘They are referred
to two new species of the genus Amia. The paper concludes with
a table of all the species hitherto recorded from America and
Europe.

December 21st, 1898.—W. Whitaker, B.A., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.

The following communication was read :—

‘On a Megalosauroid Jaw from Rhetic Beds near Bridgend,
Glamorganshire. By E. T. Newton, Esq., F.R.S., F.G.S. (Com-
municated by permission of the Director-General of H.M. Geological
Survey.)

The specimen which forms the subject of the present communi-
cation was obtained by Mr. John David of Porthcawl, from a mason,
and it has been presented to the Museum of Practical Geology. It
was derived trom beds low down in-the Rheetice Series, which may
eventually have to be included in the upper part of the Keuper.
The lamellibranchs on the same slab appear to be Pullastra arenicola

272 Miscellaneous. -

and possibly Myophoria. The specimen has been compared with
reptilian jaws in the British Museum: it consists of a mould
of the dentary bone with several teeth in place. The impression
of the whole of the inner surface, and of the anterior half of the
outer surface, is preserved. The front half of the inner surface
of the jaw is like that of Megalosaurus, except in size. Many
of the teeth are seen in various stages of projection from their
sockets, and the points of two successional teeth may also be seen,
and thus the mode of succession of the teeth may be clearly under-
stood. The specimen does not admit of exact comparison with
Megalosaurus, and it is named as a new species of Zanclodon— .
a genus in which the Author is also inclined to place some forms
described under the names of Paleosaurus, Cladyodon, Avalonia,
and Picrodon.

MISCELLANEOUS.
Lichtenstein’s ‘ Catalogus rerum naturalium,
To the Editors of the ‘Annals and Magazine of Natural History.’

GenriemEen,—Lichtenstein’s ‘ Catalogus,’ 1793-96 (3 parts), is so
rare that only two copies are known to exist, one in the British
Museum and one in the University of Kiel. Mr. DuCane Godman
reprinted part 1 (Mammalia and Birds) for the Willughby Society
in 1882, but he did not then know the name of the owner of the
collection catalogued. In working through the Banksian Tracts I
have come across ‘ Catalogus Musei Zoologici ditissimi Hamburgi, d.
16 Majus, 1797, Sectio Tertia continens Insecta.’ The close simi-
larity of the title and of the printing of the tract, and the fact that
the specific names were familiar, recalled to my memory the ‘ Cata-
logus rerum.’ On comparing the two I found them identical,
except that in the 1797 tract many species that appeared in the
‘Catalogus rerum’ were missing. The 1797 tract was therefore
obviously by Lichtenstein, and a reference to Hagen (Bibl. Entom.
1862, p. 477) showed that he had seen part 3 of the ‘ Catalogus
rerum,’ but catalogued it under its subtitle, and so lost its identity.
Furthermore, Hagen notes that it was a catalogue of the “ Museum
Holthuisen” (cf. Engelmann, Bibl. Hist. Nat. 1846, p. 488). It
therefore appears that the 1797 Catalogue was a reprint of the
‘Catalogus rerum’ with the “sold” items struck out, and that the
original sale of the Museum Holthuisen being in part a failure, the
collection was again put up for sale in the following year.

C. Davies Suprpory
(‘ Index animalium ’).

Anw. & Mag. Nat. List. §.7 Vol, IN. PLVIN

Mintern Bros. imp,

_ = =

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[SEVENTH SERIES. ]

No. 16. APRIL 1899.

XLIl.—Deseriptions of new Batrachians in the Collection
of the British Museum (Natural History). By G. A.
BouLeNnGer, F.R.S.

[Plates XI. & XII.]

Rana larutensis. (Pl. XI. figs. 1, 1a.)

Vomerine teeth in two very small groups just behind the
level of the choane. Head as long as broad; snout shorter than
the diameter of the orbit, rounded or subacuminate, projecting ;
canthus rostralis sharp ; loreal region concave ; nostril equally
distant from the eye and the tip of the snout; interorbital
space narrower than the upper eyelid; eye large; tympanum
distinct, one third the diameter of the eye. Fingers moderate,
the ends dilated into large disks, which are larger than the
tympanum ; first finger shorter than second, third as long as
the distance between the anterior border of the eye and the
tympanum. ‘Toes very broadly webbed, the web involving
part of the terminal disks, which are smaller than those of
the fingers; subarticular tubercles feeble; a small, feebly
prominent, oval inner metatarsal tubercle. The tibio-tarsal
articulation reaches beyond the tip of the snout; tibia three
fifths to two thirds the length of head and body. Skin
smooth or faintly granular ; a feeble interrupted dorso-lateral
glandular fold. Dark olive above, with irregular darker

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iii. 21

276 Mr. G. A. Boulenger on new Batrachians.

Bufo gracilipes. (Pl. XII. fig. 2.)

Crown without bony ridges. Snout obtusely pointed,
truncate; interorbital space broader than the upper eyelid ;
tympanum very distinct, two thirds the diameter of the eye.
Fingers slender, first extending considerably beyond second ;
toes slender, with a mere rudiment of web; subarticular
tubercles single ; metatarsal tubercles small, feebly prominent ;
no tarsal fold. The tibio-tarsal articulation reaches the
tympanum, the tarso-metatarsal the tip of the snout. Skin
rough with small conical warts; parotoids very small, flat,

very indistinct. Dark brown above, marbled with reddish,
whitish beneath.

From snout to vent 37 millim.
A single specimen from the Benito River, French.

Collected by Mr. G. L. Bates.

Hyla picturata. (Pl. XII. figs. 3, 3a.)

Tongue circular, entire, nearly entirely adherent. _Vome-
rine teeth in two strong angular series, forming a J/7™\ be-
tween the very large choane. Head large, much depressed,
a little broader than long; snout as long as the diameter of
the orbit, rounded, slightly prominent at the end; canthus
rostralis indistinct ; loreal region very oblique, slightly con-
eave; nostril near the tip of the snout; interorbital space as
broad as the upper eyelid; tympanum distinct, not quite half
the diameter of the eye. Limbs slender. Outer fingers one-
third webbed; disks as large as the tympanum; no distinct
rudiment of pollex. Toes three-fourths webbed. The tibio-
tarsal articulation reaches a little beyond the tip of the snout ;
tibia three fifths the length of the head and body. Skin
smooth ; belly and lower surface of thighs feebly granulate ;
no dermal appendages. Violet above, with cream-coloured
spots edged with purplish red ; these spots arranged in groups
with great symmetry, one on the head and nape, another in
front of the sacrum, and a third on the coccygeal region; a
white transverse band, interrupted in the middle, between
the eyes; lores and temples whitish, with reddish markings ;
limbs creamy white above, with violet cross-bars alternating
with narrower purplish-red ones; humerus and concealed
surfaces of the hind limbs colourless ; lower parts white.

From snout to vent 59 millim.

A single female specimen from Paramba, N.W. Ecuador.
Nearest allied to £7. crepitans, Wied.

Mr. G. A. Boulenger on new Batrachians. 277

Hyla ocellifera. (Pl. XII. fig. 4.)

Tongue circular, entire, slightly free behind. Vomerine
teeth in two round groups close together between the choane.
Head much depressed, broader than long; snout rounded,
shorter than the diameter of the orbit ; canthus rostralis in-
distinct ; loreal region very oblique, slightly concave ; nostril
nearer the tip of the snout than the eye; eye very large and
prominent ; upper eyelid rather narrow, narrower than the
interorbital space ; tympanum distinct, hardly one third the
diameter of the eye. Outer fingers broadly webbed, the web
reaching the penultimate joint of the third finger and the disk
of the fourth; toes nearly entirely webbed; disks a little
larger than the tympanum. ‘The tibio-tarsal articulation
reaches the tip of the snout; tibia half the length of head
and body. Skin smooth, areolate on the belly and under the
thighs. Bluish grey above, dotted with black; one or two
small white black-edged ocelli on each scapular region; thigh
colourless, except a very narrow streak of bluish grey along
its upper surface; arms, hands, and feet colourless; lower
parts white.

From snout to vent 28 millim.

A single specimen from Paramba, N.W. Ecuador.

Apparently nearest allied to H. sordida, Ptrs.

I avail myself of this opportunity to change the name
Hyla microcephala, Blgr. (P. Z. 8. 1898, p. 481) nec Cope
(Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc. xxiii. 1886, p. 281), to H. Under-
woodi,

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
PLate XI.

Fig. 1. Rana larutensis, p. 273.

Fig. 1a. Ditto, Open mouth.

Fig. 2. Rappia phantastica, p. 274.

Fig. 3. Phyllobates Pratti, p. 274.

Fig. 4. Dendrobates opisthomelas, p. 275.

PLATE XII.

Fig. 1. Microhyla leucostigma, p. 275.
tg. 2. Bufo gracilipes, p. 276.

Fig. 3. Hyla picturata, p. 276.

Fig. 3a, Ditto. Open mouth.

Fig. 4, Hyla ocellifera, p. 277.

278 Major A. Alcock and Capt. A. R. 8. Anderson on

XLIII.—Natural History Notes fron H.M. Royal Indian
Marine Survey Ship ‘Investigator, Commander T. H.
Heming, R.N., commanding. — Series III., No. 2. An
Account of the Deep-sea Crustacea dredged during the Sur-
veying-season of 1897-98. By A. Atcock, Major, Indian
Medical Service, Superintendent of the Indian Museum, and
A. R. S. Anperson, Captain, Indian Medical Service,
Surgeon-Naturalist to the Survey.

[Continued from p. 27.]

MACRURA.
Family Peneide.
Penzus, Fabr.
Peneus rectacutus, Sp. Bate.
Peneus rectacutus, Sp. Bate, ‘Challenger’ Macrura, p, 266, pl. xxvi
fie, 2 (exc. 22).
Metapeneus rectacutus, Wood-Mason & Alcock, Ann. & Mag. Nat.
Hist., Oct. 1891, pp. 274, 275.

Spence Bate suggests that Penaeus serratus and Peneus
rectacutus may prove to be the same species. ‘The former, of
which there are two ‘ Challenger’ specimens from Fiji in the
Indian Museum, possesses no epipodite on the twelfth seg-
ment, while the latter has one.

In the males of this species the outer branch of the an-
tennulary flagellum is about twice the length of the inner
and has a very stout base suddenly narrowing and tapering
into along filamentous extremity ; from about the middle of
the lower and inner side of this thickened base a small sharp
conical tooth, as in Metapenwus coniger, projects ; the inner
branch is horizontally flattened in the proximal quarter of its
length, and here forms a rigid semicircular loop downwards
below the outer branch, as in Peneus serratus; on again
reaching the level of the outer branch it gives off a small
flattened hooked process articulating with the conical tooth on
the outer branch, and becoming twisted on itself, and so
vertically flattened lies alongside and in close apposition to
the outer branch. ‘Towards its extremity the inner branch
becomes thin and filiform like the outer.

The absence of a rudimentary anterior arthrobranchia from
the thirteenth segment seems to exclude this species from
W ood-Mason’s genus JJetapeneus.

4 g,3 ?, from Station 235, 370-419 fathoms.

Indian Deep-sea Crustacea. 279

PARAPENZUS, 8. J. Smith.

Parapeneus investigatoris, sp. n.

Allied to Parapeneus fissurus, Sp. Bate, having the same
branchial formula as we described for that species in Journ.
Asiat. Soc. Bengal, vol. lxiii. pt. ii. 1894, p. 144 (from which,
by a copyist’s error, the epipodite on appendage 8 was
omitted) ; the same longitudinal and vertical fissures in the
carapace ; asimilar dorsal carina, bearing asingle sharp tooth
on the gastric region, and produced into a rostrum ciliated
inferiorly, furnished with six teeth superiorly; a similar
compressed abdomen, with the carina of the fourth, fifth, and
sixth segments ending in a small tooth covering a small
V-shaped notch in the posterior dorsal margin of the fourth
and fifth segments; and a very similar telson and swimmeret.

It can at once be distinguished from Parapencus fissurus,
of which there are two ‘ Challenger’ specimens from Zebu in
the Indian Museum, by the presence of a well-marked sharp
branchiostegal tooth placed slightly behind the anterior
margin of the carapace, and not on it as in Spence Bate’s
species. It further differs in the length of the rostrum,
which reaches only just beyond the end of the first joint of
the antennulary peduncle instead of beyond the end of the
second joint; in the rostrum sloping gently upwards in its
proximal, gently downwards in its distal half; in the relative
shortness of the carapace, which, exclusive of the rostrum, is
only very little more than 4 the length of the abdomen
instead of nearly 4 the length; in the great relative length of
the sixth abdominal segment, which is 24 times the length of
the fifth segment instead of about 1? times its length; in the
third abdominal segment being non-carinate; in the inner
plate of the swimmeret extending for about 4 its length
beyond the extremity of the telson; in the inner branch of
the antennulary flagellum being slightly the longer, nearly as
long as the carapace exclusive of the rostrum, and gradually
expanding at its base, while the outer branch expands
suddenly into a base considerably thicker than that of the
inner branch; in the “ thelycum ” being of a different struc-
ture ; and in never appearing to grow to the same size as
Peneus fissurus,

5 ¢,2 ¢, from Station 233, 185 fathoms.

3 2,6 dg, from Station 235, 870-419 fathoms.

2 2,1 6, from Station 166, 133 fathoms.

280 Major A. Alcock and Capt. A. R. S. Anderson on

HALiporus, Spence Bate.

Haliporus taprobanensis, sp. n.

This species appears to be nearly allied to Haliporus thetis,
Faxon. The carapace is leathery, with deep cervical and
longitudinal grooves. The dorsal carina is thrice interrupted
in its course—by the cervical groove, by a broad shallow
groove about midway between the cervical groove and the
posterior margin of the carapace, and again close to the hinder
margin of the carapace. Here the carina ends as a small
tubercle separated from the posterior margin by the dorsal
extremity of the longitudinal groove; in front of the cervical
groove the carina is very prominent, armed with four teeth,
and produced into a short slightly upraised rostrum, fringed
below with long hairs. The rostrum, which appears to have
been broken and imperfectly repaired, reaches just beyond
the end of the cornea, ends in a sharp straight point, and is
armed above with two small teeth near its base ; succeeding
these is a pair of minute teeth at the same level, one on each
side of the rostrum, and beyond these a couple of sinuosities.

The first antennal tooth is separated from the tooth behind
it by a groove runnirg obliquely downwards and backwards
from the level of the eye-stalk. On the posterior margin of
the cervical groove is a well-marked sharp tooth, continued
posteriorly into an elevated rounded ridge, running backwards
parallel to and at a little distance from the longitudinal
groove. ‘The branchiostegal tooth, situated at the lower end
of the frontal margin, is not so minute as in /alporus thetis,
and is continued backwards as an elevated ridge to the
posterior margin of the carapace.

The abdomen is compressed and throughout carinate
dorsally. he first, second, and third segments are marked
by a deep transverse groove separating an anterior smooth
articular from a posterior part of each segment. In the first
segment the articular portion is nearly as long as the part
behind the groove, the posterior half alone of which is
elevated into a carina. In the second and third segments the
articular portion forms only about 4 of the total length of the
segment, and the entire part behind the groove is carinate.
The fourth, fifth, and sixth segments are carinate throughout
their entire length. ‘The carina is grooved in its centre and
produced into a small sharp tooth at the posterior extremities
of the fourth, fifth, and sixth segments; the posterior dorsal
central margin of the second, third, fourth, and fifth segments
is slightly notched V-wise. The transverse grooves on the

Indian Deep-sea Crustacea. 281

first to third abdominal segments are continued down on the
pleure of these segments; furthest down and most marked
on the first, the shortest distance and least marked on the
third. The first to fifth segments are also furrowed by a
transverse groove in their posterior quarter running nearly
parallel to the hinder edge of each tergum, but bending
obliquely forward and downward on reaching the pleure,
where they fade away betore attaining the margin. ‘The
fifth and sixth segments have an elevated horizontal ridge at
the union of the pleure and terga, and the sixth possesses in
addition an elevated ridge passing obliquely upwards and
backwards from its articulation with the fifth segment to its
posterior margin. ‘The sixth segment is very slightly longer
than the fifth. The telson lacks its extremity ; dorsally it is
widely grooved and on each side of the groove is an elevated
ridge ending posteriorly in a short sharp spine. From these
ridges the sides slope down obliquely, bear three minute
spinules on either side, and have their lower margins fringed
with hair.

The swimmeret is similar to that of Haliporus thetis, only
differing in the sculpturing.

The appendages appear to be very like those of Haliporus
thetis.

The branchial formula is :—

Pleuro- Arthro- Podo-

branchia. branchia. branchia.
dl Coca ape Ke 1 (rudimentary) Ep.
IVS oo cuareectors Pa 2 (ant. small) 1+ Ep.
1D GR Sae ares 1 2, r+ Ep.
Dit ah ad ae ] 2 r+Ep.
Ie SSS 1 2 Ep.
RTE, Ewe eae ack: 1 2 Ep.
SXOMM cars ches are 1 2 Ep.

2.4) EF ies 1 0

6 13 1+2r+7 Ep.

There is not even a microscopic trace of any podobranch on
the epipodites of the second and third pairs of legs, while
that of the first pair is present on one side only.

The exopodites of all the ambulatory legs are small but
plainly visible.

The points in which this species differs from Haliporus
thetis are:—the larger branchiostegal spine situated at the
lower end of the frontal margin, and not some distance back
on the inferior margin; the absence of the two bifurcations of
the carina on the carapace, the dorsal carina of the first abdo-

282 Major A. Alcock and Capt. A. R.S. Anderson on
minal segment only occupying about } the dorsal length of
the segment ; the absence of the longitudinal furrows on the
sides of the abdominal segments; the shortness of the sixth
segment; and a different branchial formula.

One specimen (¢), measuring 160 millim. from tip of
rostrum to end of broken telson, was caught at Station 219,
550 fathoms.

BENTHESICYMUS, Spence Bate.

Benthesicymus investigatoris, sp. n.

This species is very closely allied to Benthesicymus Bartletti,
S. I. Smith, agreeing with it except in the following points:—
the dactylus of the external maxilliped is truncated, but
terminates in a pair of small curved spines apparently func-
tioning as pincers; the fourth abdominal segment is carinated
in its posterior three quarters; and the long slender spine is
absent from the fifth abdominal tergum.

Station 222, 400-200 fathoms, 2 g,1 ¢.

Station 228, 640 fathoms, 1 ?.

Station 234, 498 fathoms, 1 g,1 ¢.

Station 235, 370-419 fathoms, 1 ¢.

Family Crangonide.
PonTOcARIS, Spence Bate.

Pontocaris media, sp. n.

The only points in which this species disagrees with the
description and figures of Spence Bate’s Pontocaris pennata
(‘Challenger ’ Crustacea Macrura, p. 499, pl. xci.) are the
following :—

1) ‘Yhe rostrum is pointed, not bifid at tip.

(2) The infero-lateral carina on either side is bluntly and
evenly serrated, not smooth.

(3) The eyes are very much smaller, the orbital notch is
more pronounced, and the tooth at its outer angle much
larger—the condition of parts being like that of Pontocaris
propensalata (Spence Bate, op. cit. p. 496, pl. xe. fig. 2).

(4) The wing-like processes of the antero-lateral angles of
the carapace are not quite so oblique.

(5) As in P. propensalata, the fifth, sixth, and seventh
thoracic sterna are longitudinally carinated.

(6) The antennal scale is short and subcircular, somewhat
as in P. propensalata.

Indian Deep-sea Crustacea. 283

From P. propensalata it differs in having seven carine on
the carapace instead of five, and in the far more elaborate
sculpture of the abdominal terga, as well as in the greater
obliquity of the antero-lateral angles of the carapace.

Four specimens from the Andamans, 55 fathoms.

Family Alpheide.,
ALPHEUS, Fabr.

Alpheus Shearmii, sp. n.

This species in the frontal region of its carapace resembles
Alpheus tridentatus, Dana, while the hand of its right chela
resembles that of Alpheus gracilipes, Stimpson.

The integument is thin and sabmembranous.

The carapace is perfectly smooth, rounded and non-carinate
superiorly ; the rostral and supraocular teeth are subequal
and very short; the eyes are somewhat deficient in pigment
and so small that they cause no projection upwards of the
carapace.

Near each postero-lateral angle of the telson is a couple of
small spines and on each side of the dorsal surface of the
telson is a similar couple of spines.

The telson and plates of the swimmeret are fringed with
long hair.

Of the antennulary base the first joint is slightly longer
than the second and the latter about twice the length of the
third. ‘The antennulary acicle is flat and tapers quickly from
its base to a slender sharp needle-like point reaching about
one third the way along the second joint.

The antennal scale is wide, thin and convexly curved in
its anterior and inner margins, thickened and slightly con-
cave as to its outer margin, which terminates ina short sharp
tooth.

The right great chela, the only one present, is twisted so
that the finger and thumb lie horizontally. ‘The lower and
inner margin of the hand is quite smooth and continuous with
the thumb, the outer and upper margin presents a V-shaped
notch close to the articulation of the hand and finger.
Running from end to end of the upper surface of the hand,
close to its outer margin, is a groove with a well-marked
rounded crest on its inner side. The distal end of the crest
ends on a level with the notch on the upper margin in a some-
what prominent smoothly rounded eminence.

The opposable edge of the thumb is slightly curved and

284 Major A. Alcock and Capt. A. R. 8S. Anderson on

armed with two small teeth near the joint, while the corre-
sponding edge of the finger is nearly straight and armed with
a single tooth near the joint. The large plug-like tooth
usually present on the fingers of shallow-water forms is
wholly absent.

Station 232, 430 fathoms, one specimen.

Family Pandalide.
PANDALUS, Leach.
Pandalus ? ensis, A. Milne-Edwards.

Pandalus ? ensis, A, Milne-Edwards, Rec. Fig. Crust.

With some doubt we identify with this species three
specimens—one perfect with the exception of the fourth and
fifth pairs of legs, which are absent, the other two con-
siderably broken, trawled at Station 233,185 fathoms. They
only differ from the figure in possessing three instead of two
teeth on the dorsal margin of the rostrum. ‘The position of
these three teeth differs in the three specimens, although
occupying much the same space as the two teeth of the type.
In all other respects our specimens appear to be the same as
the type.

Cu ororocus, A. Milne-Edwards.

Chlorotocus gracilipes, A. Milne-Edwards,

var. andam aNnensis, nov.

Three specimens were obtained at Station 233, 185 fathoms,
and differ from the figure of the species in the Ree. Fig. Crust.
in the following points:—the rostrum, in our one unbroken
specimen, is armed with four teeth only on its lower margin ;
there is a small sharp ocular spine; the dorsal carina behind
the orbital margin bears five teeth in two, four teeth in one
specimen ; the postero-inferior angle of the fifth abdominal
pleura is pointed and sharp, not rounded; the sixth abdo-
minal pleura is produced postero-inferiorly into a small sharp
tooth, not rounded; the telson bears at its extremity, in
addition to the sharp central tooth, a pair of lateral movable
spines, and between these and the central tooth bunches of
long stiff hairs.

Indian Deep-sea Crustacea. 285

Hererocarpus, A. Milne-Edwards.

Heterocarpus levigatus, Spence Bate.
Heterocarpus levigatus, Spence Bate, ‘Challenger’ Macrura, p. 636,
pl. exu. fig. 5.

In one specimen, 178 millim. long from tip of rostrum to
end of telson, the dorsal crest is armed with four large teeth,
while in seven other specimens there are five teeth on the
erest. The under margin of the rostrum is armed with eleven
to thirteen teeth. (In Spence Bate’s type the rostrum was
broken.) In the smaller specimen the rostrum is bent up at
an acute angle and the dorsal spines are relatively longer
than in the larger specimens.

Station 232, 430 fathoms, eight specimens.

New to the Indian fauna.

PLESIONIKA, Spence Bate.
Plesionika affinis, sp. n.

Closely allied to Plestonika uniproducta and Plesionika
wnidens.

Carapace smooth, dorsally carinate in rather more than its
anterior half, armed behind the level of the orbit with three
procumbent teeth on the carina, which is produced into a
slender rostrum rather longer than the dorsal length of the
carapace. At first the rostrum curves quickly downwards to
the level of the antennules, on reaching which it continues
with a slight downward tendency to its tapering extremity.
On its dorsal margin above the eye are three procumbent
teeth, the most anterior at the level of the cornea, and close
to the tip is a minute spinule; on the anterior fourth of its
lower margin are some six minute procumbent spinules.

The anterior margin of the carapace is similar in form to
that of Plestonika uniproducta, and, like it, armed with well-
developed teeth corresponding to the antennules and the
fronto-lateral angle.

The third abdominal segment in its posterior dorsal quarter
is surmounted by an upstanding carina produced posteriorly
into a sharp well-marked tooth overhanging the fourth
segment. The rest of the abdominal segments are smooth.
The sixth segment is rather more than twice the length of
the fifth segment.

The second joint of the antennal base is armed with a long
F tae
sharp tooth like that of Plesiontka uniproducta (vide ‘Chal-
lenger’ Macrura, pl. cxill. fig. 1c).

‘Two specimens, 36 millim. from tip of rostrum to end of
telson, were obtained at Station 2386, 172-303 fathoms.

286 Major A. Alcock and Capt. A. R. S. Anderson on

Family Pasipheide.
PasipHaA, Savigny, Edw.

Pasiphea unispinosa, Wood-Mason.

Pasiphea unispinosa, Wood-Mason, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Flist., Feb.
1893, pp. 163, 164; Illustrations Zoology ‘ Investigator,’ Crustacea,
pt. i. 1894, pl. iii. fig. 7, 2.

Pasipheia cristata americana, Faxon, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. vol. xxiv.
p. 208, Aug. 1893.

Pasipheia americana, Faxon, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. vol. xviii.
pp. 173-175, pl. xlv. figs. 1-1 e (1895).

Our specimens, both the types and that taken this season,
agree in all particulars with Faxon’s lucid, concise, and very
careful description of Pasipheta americana,

One large female, 116 millim. from anterior end of carapace
to end of telson, the terminal few millim. of which are
wanting, was taken at Station 229, 360 fathoms.

Family Homaride.
NepuHropsis, Wood- Mason.

Nephropsis Stewarti, Wood-Mason.

Nephropsis Stewartt, Wood-Mason, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, vol. xlii.
pt. ii. 1873, p. 39, pl. iv., and Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (4) xii. 1873,
p- 59; A. Milne-Edwards, Ann. Sci. Nat. Zool. (5) xix. pl. xx.
figs. 1-3; Alcock & Anderson, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, vol. Lxiii,
pt. ii. 1894, p. 161; Anderson, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, vol. lxv.
pt. ii. 1896, p. 96; Ill. Zool. ‘Investigator, Crustacea, pt. iv.
pl. xxvii. figs. 1, 1 a (1896).

In this species, as in Nephropsis atlantica, the lateral
rostral spines are variable in position. In one of the males
captured this year, instead of being as usual in the posterior,
the spines are situated in the anterior half of the rostrum,
which is short, slightly curved, and very similar to the

rostrum of Nephropsis Carpenter’. In consequence of the’

shortness of the rostrum the antennulary peduncles equal it
in length.

Two males, one from Station 229, 360 fathoms, the other
from Station 233, 185 fathoms.

Colours in life: upper surface of abdomen very pale orange,
extreme outer border of terga bright red, pleure white ; inner
leaf of swimmeret bright red, outer leaf white, bordered by
pale orange; upper surface of posterior ? of carapace orange,
suddenly changing to bright red in the anterior } and rostrum ;
sides of carapace white; the two small dorsal tubercles
and the faint ridge joining them white; antennular base

Indian Deep-sea Crustacea. 287

white, flagella bright red ; antennal base and proximal half of
flagellum white, distal half of flagellum pale orange; large
cheliped white, except finger and thumb, which are pale
orange, extreme tips of finger and thumb white; hands and
fingers of second, third, and fourth pairs of walking-legs
bright red, remainder of legs white ; lower surface of thorax
and abdomen white.

Family Callianassida.
CALASTACUS, Faxon.
Calastacus felix, sp. n.

This species differs from Calastacus stilirostris and CO. inves-
tigatoris in the following particulars :—the carapace is covered
with a scanty growth of short, stiff, yellowish, forwardly
directed hairs, springing either singly or in groups of two
or three from the bottom of small pits in the surface of
the test, these hairs being both longer and stouter on the
gastric region than elsewhere. The lateral margins of the
rostrum, like those of Calastacus ‘nvestigatoris, extend back-
wards a short distance on either side of the carapace as
outstanding ridges, each bearing a couple of spines, the ante-
rior pair of which is much larger than the posterior. A dorsal
carina extends from the base of the rostrum to the posterior
margin of the carapace, where it ends on a small lobe pro-
jecting into the gap left between the backwardly projecting
pleuree of the carapace. ‘The tubercle at the posterior
termination of the carina of C. ¢nvestigatoris is only repre-
sented in this species by a small irregularity of the carina.
Occupying the anterior 3 of the gastric region is a line of
small, sharp, forwardly projecting teeth arranged in the form
of a horseshoe, with its free ends turned backwards. The
rostrum bears on each side a pair of asymmetrically arranged
teeth.

A small, somewhat irregular, but pigmented cornea is
present.

Of the great cheliped the wrist, near its junction with the
hand, is considerably wider than the wrist-hand joint, espe-
cially on its lower margin, which projects as a blunt tooth.
In the other two species the carpo-propodal joint is as wide
as the widest part of the carpus.

Near the centre of the cutting-edge of the immobile finger
is a large tooth. The carpus, propodus, and dactylus are
covered with long, coarse, but somewhat sparse hair like that
on the carapace.

The second pair of walking-legs is absent.

288 Major A. Alcock and Capt. A. R.S. Anderson on

On the hands and fingers of the third and fourth pairs are
small corneous prickles, arranged either singly or in trans-
verse rows of two or three.

The abdominal segments are dorsally carinate, the carina
being most prominent on the anterior three segments,
gradually widening and becoming less and less marked on
the fourth, fifth, and sixth segments.

The telson ends in a rounded central lobe, running down
to which is a dorsal central groove. On the lateral margins
of the telson are a few small teeth and near the proximal end
one considerably larger than the others.

A median longitudinal ridge divides the inner plate of the
swimmeret into two nearly equal parts and terminates distally
in a small sharp tooth. <A similar ridge divides the outer
plate of the swimmeret into two subequal parts; the movable
segment is very small, its inner end just passing beyond the
central ridge, and the margin of the suture is armed with
a few small acute teeth, as also is the distal half of the outer
border of the plate with five similar small teeth.

In Calastacus investigatoris and felix both male and female
external genital orifices are present, as in /Parastacus,
described by Dr. Emar Liénnberg in ‘ Zool. Anzeiger’ of
June 2, 1898. On this point Faxon is silent in his descrip-
tion of Calastacus stilirostris.

CALLIANASSA, Leach, A. Milne-Edwards.

Callianassa lignicola, sp. 0.

This is asmall species, the carapace measuring 3°3 millim.,
the abdomen 11°5 millim.

The form of the carapace resembles that of Callianassa
pachydactyla, similar longitudinal and oblique grooves being
present in both species. Anteriorly it is produced into an
acute small rostrum.

The abdominal segments are all smooth. The first is
considerably narrower in front than behind; the second,
which also increases in width posteriorly, is by far the longest
of all the segments and almost twice the length of the first.
The telson is well developed, diminishing in width poste-
riorly, and on its dorsal surface is a broad median furrow
expanding posteriorly to the full width of the telson ; the end
is square, with the corners rounded off. ‘he outer plate of
the swimmeret is about 4 longer than the inner plate and
armed on its outer straight margin with a small tooth. The
pleure of all the abdominal segments are very short, smooth,
and gently rounded at their margins,

Indian Deep-sea Crustacea. 289

The eye-stalk is triangular in section; its inner margin is
prolonged into a short acute spine beyond the level of the
cornea, and on its outer side is the small, circular, darkly
pigmented cornea.

The peduncle of the first antenne is about 4 the length of
the carapace and terminates in two flattened flagella. The
peduncle of the second antenne is rather longer than that of
the first and ends in a tapering slender flagellum about 14
times the length of the carapace.

The second and third joints of the external maxilliped are
expanded to form an irregular oblong cover. On the upper-
side of the second joint is a prominent pectinate ridge.

The right is over twice the bulk, although not much
longer than the left great cheliped. The lower margin of
the ischium is armed with five small, subequal, acute, saw-
like teeth; the proximal end of the lower margin of the
merus bears one somewhat larger tooth, and the distal three
joints, except for a small tooth on the cutting-edge of the
thumb, are smooth and unarmed. ‘The second, third, and
fourth pairs of legs are of the usual type; the fifth terminates
in a mass of hair obscuring the small subchelate finger.

The appendages of the first two abdominal segments are
small and slender, the first terminating in a single thin short
limb, while the second ends in a pair of slightly stouter limbs.
The appendages of the succeeding three segments contrast
strongly with the first two pairs; they terminate in a pair of
flattened subequal branches fringed with long hair, the outer
branch sickle-shaped, the inner lancet-like. On the inner
side of each inner limb is a short tooth-like process.

Two specimens, one a female measuring 14°8 millim. in
extreme length, the other 11 millim., were obtained from
burrows in the interior of water-logged mangrove-twigs at
Station 233, 185 fathoms.

Colour in life chalky white.

Family Eryontide,
PENTACHELES, Spence Bate.

Pentacheles sculptus, 8. 1. Smith.
Pentacheles sculptus, 8. I. Smith, Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. x. 1882-88,
pp. 23-31, pls. iii., iv.
Polycheles sculptus, Faxon, Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. vol. xviii. 1895,
p. 122, pl. C, fig. 2.
Five specimens (four males, one female) were obtained at
Stations 230 and 231, 834 and 836 fathoms respectively.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iii. 22

290 Major A. Alcock and Capt. A. R. S. Anderson on

From tip of rostrum to end of telson they vary from 119 to
74 millim.

All our specimens show the distinctive peculiarities not of
Faxon’s Pacific variety, but of the typical Atlantic species.
In shape and general appearance they resemble Pentacheles
phosphorus, but can at once be distinguished from this by
having two instead of one spine on the outer side of the basal
antennulary joint, by being armed with one spine instead of
two between the rostral spines and the pair of spines about
the centre of the gastric area, by having no spines on the
carapace posterior to the cervical groove and between the
median carina and the sublateral carina, and by the presence
of a procumbent spine on the first five instead of the first
four abdominal segments.

New to the Indian fauna.

Eryontcus, Spence Bate.
Eryonicus indicus, sp. n.

Closely resembling Hryonicus cecus, Bate (Faxon), from
which it differs in the following particulars:—the dorsal
median spines are arranged thus—2 (rostral), 1, 1, 2, 1, 1,
2,2, 1, 2; the anterior three groups of spines, exclusive of
the rostral, are considerably larger than those figured by
Faxon ; behind the orbit there are but three spinules on the
gastric region ; the branchial ridge bears 7, not 5 spinules ;
the last spine on the lateral carina is by far the largest of all
those on the animal; the 5 large spines on the lower of the
two ridges below the lateral carina are considerably smaller
than the last spine of the lateral carina, show no regular
diminution in size from the first to the last (indeed, the
middle one is the longest), and are both followed and preceded
by a row of denticles on the ridge; the dorsal row of spines
on the abdomen consists of one spine on the first, second,
fifth, and sixth segments and two spines on the third and
fourth segments, the spines of each pair being united by a
connecting longitudinal ridge, and the posterior spine of each
pair much exceeding the anterior in length ; on the proximal
end of the telson is one spine; only about the inner half of
the orbit is filled by the eye-stalk, between which and the
outer orbital margin is a wide gap crossed anteriorly by a
conical process of the eye-stalk, similar to that of Hryonicus
cecus, Which, however, does not quite reach the outer margin
of the orbit; the basal joint of the first antenna ends in a
long internal and a short external spine, and is not fringed

Indian Deep-sea Crustacea, 291

with hair on its inner margin; the second pair of abdominal
appendages bear on the inner terminal branch a single long
blunt process or stylamblis, and not a pair of processes.

One specimen, measuring 42 millim. from tip of rostrum
to end of telson, was obtained at Station 230, 824 fathoms.

There are very good grounds for believing that the
specimen came from a considerable depth.

Since writing the above, one of us has trawled a second
slightly larger specimen off Colombo in 480-428 fathoms.
The colours in life were :—carapace pale brown; abdomen
dirty white; swimmeret slightly tinged with pink; first and
second antenne, fingers of great cheliped, and second, third,
and fourth pairs of thoracic legs pale pink.

Family Stenopide.

? Ricuarpina, A. M.-Edw.
Richardina, A. Milne-Edwards, Recueil de Figures de Crustacés.

A little Crustacean, which was found inhabiting a Hexac-
tinellid sponge dredged at 498 fathoms in the Andaman Sea,
closely resembles, and may even perhaps be identical with,
the Richardina spinicincta figured by M. A. Milne-Edwards
on pl. viii. of the work above cited.

It is as closely as possible related to Stenopus and Steno-
pusculus, from which it seems to differ chiefly in the stouter
and more compact body, in the shorter and less lax ap-
pendages, in the reduction of the spinature of the body, and
in the complete absence of pigment from the eye.

? Richardina spongicola, sp. n.

The cephalothorax, which is of thinner texture than the
other parts, is short, broad, and tumid; the prominent poste-
rior edge of the cervical groove is armed with a row of pro-
cumbent spines, and a second concentric but shorter row of
spines surrounds the base of the rostrum; otherwise the
carapace is smooth.

The rostrum, which is nearly a third the length of the rest
of the carapace, has the dorsal edge serrated throughout and
the ventral edge serrated at the tip only.

The eyes, which are on short stoutish stalks, are quite
without pigment and have some spinules round their base
dorsally.

The antennal scale is falciform; its outer edge ends in a
spine, its inner convex edge is strongly ciliated.

The external maxillipeds are stout, a little longer than the
YO*

292 On Indian Deep-sea Crustacea.

first pair of legs, and nearly as long as the combined carapace
and rostrum; their ischium and merus are compressed and
somewhat broadened.

Except for a few spinules on the carpus of the great
cheliped the legs are smooth.

The first three pair of legs are truly chelate and the last
two pair are apparently so, since their small dactylus ends in
a pair of claws.

The first pair is slender. [The second pair is broken off
in our single specimen.] ‘he third pair is of Alphean
oddness, the left being slender and non-elongate, while the
right is nearly as long as the body without the telson and is
very massive, especially as regards the hand. The last two
pair have a three-joint carpus and a two-joint propodite.

The abdomen is perfectly smooth except for the telson,
which is longitudinally divided into two lobes by a deep
groove, the strong convexity of each groove being spiny.

The first pair of abdominal legs in the female are uni-
ramous, the last pair (swimmeret) have ‘he outer edge of the
outer lobe serrated.

The single specimen, which is an egg-laden female,
measures 26 millim. from the tip of the rostrum to the tip of
the telson.

The eggs are few and are of very large size—nearly
1°5 millim. in diameter after contraction in spirit.

Order STOMAPODA.

Squilla leptosquilla, Brooks.
Squilla leptosquilla, W.1. Brooks, ‘ Challenger’ Stomapoda, p. 30, pl. i.
figs. 1 & 2,

Three very fine specimens from the Andaman Sea, 185

and 870-419 fathoms. They undoubtedly came from the
depths.

Order AMPHIPODA.

Cystisoma spinosum (Fabr.), Stebbing.

Cystisoma spinosum, Stebbing, ‘Challenger’ Amphipoda, p. 1819,

pls. cliv.—clvi.

Two specimens from the Andaman Sea, 498 and 172-303
fathoms. Though they came up in the trawl they were
accompanied by such pelagic forms as Salpa, Pyrosoma, and
Firuloides, with which no doubt they were associated in life.

aii

On some new Species of Heterocera. 293

XLIV.—Descriptions of some new Species of Heterocera from
Tropical America. By Hersert Deuces, F.L.S. &e.

Fam. Lithosiide.

Eudesmia punctata, sp. n.

Male.—Head, thorax, and tegule yellow; antenne black ;
abdomen yellow, with a black line extending from the base
to the anus; the anal segment black; legs yellow. Pri-
maries brown, the veins near the base yellow ; a large yellow
spot at the end of the cell: secondaries chrome-yellow,
broadly bordered with black from the apex to the anal angle
and partly along the inner margin, where it is streaked with
yellow.

Expanse 1 inch,

Hab. Venezuela, Cucuta (Mus. Druce).

Josiodes toxaridia, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, and abdomen black, the
sides of the abdomen yellow near the base; legs black.
Primaries chrome-yellow, the costal margin, apex, outer
margin, and a fine line crossing the wing near the apex all
black : secondaries chrome-yellow, bordered with black at the
apex and outer margin as far as the anal angle.—Female
similar to the male, but with the black margins rather wider.

Expanse, ¢ ?, 1% inch.

flab. Ecuador, Intaj (Buckley, Mus. Druce).

mar A AEE

This species is allied to Josiodes myrrah, Cram.

Josiodes entella, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, and abdomen black, the
last three segments of the abdomen dark blue; a fine yellow
line on each side of the abdomen from the base to the anus;
legs bluish black. Primaries black, crossed beyond the
middle from the costal to the inner margin by a wide chrome-
yellow band, and an elongated spot close to the apex of the
same colour: secondaries deep black.

Expanse 1? inch.

Hab. British Guiana (Whitely, Mus. Druce).

Eudule donuca, sp. n.

Male.—Head, thorax, and abdomen yellow; antenne

294 Mr. H. Druce on some

black ; legs yellow. Primaries pale yellow, the apex almost
white, with three short black streaks on the white part; two
black dots on the costal margin, one at the end of the cell,
and there is a straight line below the cell : secondaries yellow ;
a small black dot at the end of the cell and a dusky streak
from the base between the cell and the inner margin; the
fringe of both wings black.

Expanse 17/5 inch.

flab. Ecuador, Sarayacu (Buckley, Mus. Druce).

This species is allied to Hudule tritonia, Druce.

Eudule lobiformis, sp. n.

Male.—Head, thorax, abdomen, and legs yellow ; antenne
black. Primaries semihyaline pale yellow, darkest at the
apex and outer margin; the costal margin folded over near
the apex, forming a small lobe: secondaries semihyaline pale
yellow.

Expanse 1 inch.

Hiab. Amazons, Maranham (Leech, Mus. Druce).

A specimen of this species is in the National Collection
from Panama, Chiriqui (Arce).

Fam. Cyllopodide.

Pheochlena graba, sp. 1.

Male.-—Head, antenne, thorax, tegule, and legs black,
the collar with yellow spots, the tegule edged with yellow;
abdomen black, the basal segments yellow, the underside
white. Primaries dark brown, the veins yellow; a large
heart-shaped spot below the cell near the base and a round
spot nearer the apex, both chrome-yellow: secondaries chrome-
yellow, broadly bordered with black.

Expanse 17 inch.

Hab. Peru, Rio Napo (Whitely, Mus. Druce).

A specimen of this species is in the National Museum.

Pheochlena amazonica, sp. n.

Male.—Head, collar, and abdomen yellow; antenne and
thorax black; tegule black, edged with yellow; abdomen
with a black line down the middle and one on each side; the
underside and legs yellowish white. Primaries dark brown,
the veins pale yellow; a large triangular-shaped pale yellow
spot close to the base and a small oval-shaped spot beyond

new Species of Heterocera. 295

the cell: secondaries yellow, the costal margin, apex, and
outer margin broadly black.

Expanse 1,4; inch.

flab, Amazons, Santarem (Leech, Mus. Druce).

This species is allied to P. solilucis, Butl.

Thyrgis ceron, sp. 0.

Male.— Head, antenne, tegule, thorax, abdomen, and legs
black ; the underside of the head yellow. Primaries black,
crossed from the middle of the costal margin to the anal
angle by a wide pale yellow band: secondaries black, the
apex bordered with yellow; the underside the same as above,

Expanse 2+ inches.

Hab. Colombia, Santa Martin, Llanos of Rio Meta (Child) ;
E. Peru (Whitely, Mus. Druce).

This species is allied to Thyrgis melitta, Cram.

Getta labana, sp. n.

Male, — The head, tegule, thorax, abdomen, and legs
brownish black ; the underside of the abdomen white. Pri-
maries black, crossed about the middle from the costal margin
to the anal angle by a wide cream-coloured band; secondaries
brownish black: the underside the same as above, excepting
that the secondaries have a large yellow spot at the apex.

Expanse 1} inch.

Hab. Ecuador, Sarayacu (Buckley, Mus. Druce).

Gretta (?) lysia, sp. n.

The head, antenne, tegule, thorax, end abdomen black,
the latter banded with white on the underside; underside of
the head, base of the palpi, and the anus yellow; a white
line down the middle of the thorax. Primaries brownish
black, the veins grey ; a white band crosses the wing beyond
the middle; the band tapers from the costal margin to a
point on the outer margin: secondaries black.

Expanse 1,45 inch.

Hab. Amazons, Ceara (Leech, Mus. Druce).

Getta ennia, sp. n.
Male.—Head, antenne, tegule, thorax, abdomen, and legs
dark brown. Primaries and secondaries dark brown; pri-
maries crossed beyond the middle from the costal margin te

296 Mr. H. Druce on some

the anal angle by a wide pale yellow band. Underside as
above.

Expanse 13 inch.

Hab. South Brazil (Mus. Druce).

Flavinia volumnia, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, abdomen, and legs black.
Primaries black; a wide band from the base along the inner
margin and one crossing the wing from the costal margin to
the anal angle both light yellow: secondaries light yellow ;
the costal margin, apex, outer and inner margin “edeed with
black ; a wide black line, becoming wider about the middle,
extends from the base to the outer margin.

Expanse 14 inch.

Hab. East Peru, Rio Napo ( Whitely, Mus. Druce).

Allied to Flavinia dichroa, Perty.

Flavinia Durnfordi, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, and abdomen black; the
tegule pale yellow; the underside of the abdomen yellowish
white ; legs pale brownish yellow. Primaries black; a small
yellow streak from the base partly along the inner margin;
a narrow yellow band at the end of the cell, partly crossing
the wing from the costal margin to near the anal angle, but
not reaching it: secondaries black, with two broad yellow
bands from the base to the outer margin, the first band close
to the inner margin, the second nearest the apex.—Female
very similar to the male.

Expanse 1 inch.

Hab. Buenos Ayres (Durnford, Mus. Druce).

Flavinia eion, sp. n.

Male-—Head and tegule yellow; antenne, thorax, and
abdomen above black ; the underside of the abdomen white ;
a fine yellow line on each side of the abdomen extending
from the base to the anus; the legs black. Primaries black,
the apex edged with white; a w vide yellow streak extends
from the base below the cell nearly to the anal angle; arather
broad yellow band crosses the wing beyond the middle:
secondaries yellow, the apex and ‘outer margin broadly
bordered with black; a submarginal black band extends
from the base to the apex; a wide black line extends from
the end of the cell to the middle of the outer margin: the
underside the same as the upperside.

Expanse 1} inch.

Hab. Bolivia (Mus. Druce).

~

new Species of Heterocera. 297

Flavinia velina, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, and the upperside of the
abdomen black, the sides of the abdomen yellow ; the under-
side white; the tegule yellow at the base; the legs greyish
white. Primaries yellow; the costal margin, apex, and
outer margin broadly banded with black; no black band
crossing the wing, as in /. postica, Walk.: secondaries bright
yellow, the apex and outer margins broadly bordered with
black.

Expanse 14 inch.

Hab. East Peru (Whitely, Mus. Druce).

Micropus ochra, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, and palpi black ; thorax and upper-
side of the abdomen black, with a central narrow yellow line
extending from the back of the head almost to the anus ; the
underside of the abdomen white. Primaries yellow, the
costal and inner margin edged with black, the apex and
outer margin broadly black: secondaries yellow, bordered
with black from the apex to the anal angle. Underside as
above.—Female very similar to the male.

Expanse 1} inch.

Hab. Venezuela (Mus. Druce).

Myonia choba, sp. n.

Male.—Head, anteune, thorax, tegule, and abdomen above
black, the underside of the latter white; a spot at the back
of the head, a row of spots down the middle of the abdomen,
and a line on each side all yellow; legs black above, whitish
on the underside. Primaries brownish black, with a round
yellow spot on the costal margin nearest the apex: second-
aries deep black, crossed about the middle from the costal to
the inner margin by a wide yellow band.—Female very similar
to the male, but with a yellow band on the primaries.

Expanse 1,45 inch.

Hab. Amazons, Santarem (Leech, Mus. Druce).

Myonia mitys, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, and abdomen black ;_ under-
side of the head yellow; tegule yellow, edged with black ; a
fine white line on each side of the abdomen; the underside
and legs white. Primaries black, the veins yellow; a yellow

298 Mr. H. Druce on some

band partly crosses the wing beyond the middle: secondaries
deep black, with a round yellow spot at the end of the cell.
Expanse 14 inch.
Hab. Amazons, Santarem (Leech, Mus. Druce).

Phintia tegyra, sp. n.

Female.—Head, thorax, abdomen, and legs black. Pri-
maries black, partly crossed beyond the middle from the
costal margin by a chrome-yellow band: secondaries white,
bordered with black.

Expanse 13 inch.

Hab. Ecuador (Whitely, Mus. Druee).

Devara Cardert, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, tegule, and abdomen
black; the underside of the abdomen and legs yellowish
white. Primaries black ; an elongated white streak from the
base nearly to the middle and a rather large crescent-shaped
white band at the end of the cell: secondaries white, bordered
with black from the apex to the anal angle.

Expanse 1} inch.

Hab. Interior of Colombia (Carder, Mus. Druce).

Devara (?) nasor, sp. 0.

Female.— Head, collar, tegule, thorax, abdomen, and legs
blackish brown ; antenne black ; tegule spotted with yellow.
Primaries brown, the veins yellow ; a zigzag yellowish-white
band crosses the wing about the middle from the costal
almost to the inner margin; a yellowish-white spot on the
outer margin near the apex: secondaries brownish white,
broadly bordered with dark brown, the inner margin broadly
shaded with brown.

Expanse 1? inch.

Hab. Antioqua, Fentino (Salmon, Mus. Druce).

Devara eos, sp. n.

Male.—Head, collar, tegule, thorax, abdomen, and legs
black. Primaries black; a streak at the base and four spots
at the end of the cell yellowish white: secondaries white,
very broadly bordered with black.

Expanse 1,5 inch.

Hab. Ecuador, Chiguinda (Buckley, Mus. Druce).

new Species of Heterocera. 299

Nelo pyrgion, sp. n.

Male.— Head, anteune, thorax, abdomen, and legs black.
Primaries black, crossed beyond the middle by a dark red
band glossed with dark blue: secondaries black: the under-
side of both wings similar to the upperside, but browner in
colour.

Expanse 1,45 inch.

flab, Ecuador, Balsapamba (Mus. Druce).

This species is allied to Nelo tolosa, Druce.

Nelo choba, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antennz, thorax, abdomen, and legs black ;
tegule red. Primaries black, shot with bright blue from the
base to beyond the middle; a large orange-red spot beyond
the cell, glossed with blue: secondaries black, glossed with
dark blue from the base to beyond the middle; underside of
both wings dark brown, the veins all black, and a large red
spot at the base of the secondaries.

Expanse 1,3; inch.

Hab. N. Peru (Krause, Mus. Druce).

Nelo racilia, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, tegule, thorax, abdomen, and legs
black, a reddish spot on the base of the tegule; the under-
side of the abdomen brownish white. Primaries dark brown,
with a large, almost central, orange-red spot, pointed at the
end of the cell: secondaries dark brown. Underside similar to
the upperside, but much paler in colour, and with all the veins
black.

Expanse 1 inch.

Hab. Colombia, Pacho, Tolima, Fusagusuga (Chapman,
Mus. Druce).

This species is allied to Nelo veliterna, Druce, and may be
the northern form of that insect.

Nelo diasia, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, tegule, abdomen, and legs
black. Primaries black, crossed about the middle from the
costal margin to the anal angle by a wide orange-yellow
band : secondaries blackish brown, the underside pale brown,
the veins darker.

Expanse 14 inch.

Hab. Bolivia (Garlepp, Mus. Druce).

300 Mr. H. Druce on some

Nelo pandia, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antennex, thorax, tegule, abdomen, and legs
dark brown. Primaries dark brown, with a large oval-shaped
orange-yellow spot at the end of the cell: secondaries dark
brown, the underside very similar to the upperside, but paler.

Expanse 1,4; inch.

Hab. Bolivia (Garlepp, Mus. Druce).

Nelo thyrea, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antennez, thorax, tegule, abdomen, and legs
black. Primaries bluish black, with a large oval white spot
at the end of the cell: underside similar to the upperside,
but the costal margin and the apex silver-grey, crossed by
the black veins: secondaries blue-black, the underside silvery
grey, with the veins all black.

Expanse 1,4, inch.

Hab. Bolivia (Garlepp, Mus. Druce).

Nelo hermea, sp. 0.

Male.—Head, antennz, thorax, tegule, abdomen, and legs
black. Primaries black, with a large oval-shaped chrome-
yellow spot beyond the band crossed with black veins:
secondaries deep black ; the underside greyish black, with all
the veins black.

Expanse 1? inch.

Hab. Ecuador, Balsapamba (Jus. Druce).

This species is allied to Nelo paterna, Druce.

Sangala superba, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, and tegule black ; abdo-
men above blue-black, the sides striped with bright red, the
underside black; legs black. Primaries dark glossy blue,
with a large bright red band crossing the wing at the end of
the cell from the costal margin almost to the anal angle; on
the underside the band is pale orange-colour: secondaries
glossy dark blue, the underside dark brown; all the veins
black ; the costal margin and a streak between each vein
bright red.

lixpanse 2 inches.

Hab. Colombia, Manaure (/. Simons, Mus. Druce).

new Species of Heterocera. 301

Scotura avara, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, abdomen, and legs black ;
front of head and tegule greyish ; a white line extends down
the middle of the abdomen from the base almost to the anus;
the underside white. Primaries black, the veins white from
the base to the middle ; a wide white band crosses the wing
about the middle, but does not quite reach the costal margin :
secondaries semihyaline white, broadly bordered with black
at the apex and round the outer margin. ‘The underside very
similar to the upperside, the secondaries with a white spot at
the apex.

Expanse 14 inch.

Hab, Keuador, Sarayacu (Buckley, Mus. Druce).

Fam. Dioptide.

Polypetes cistrina, sp. n.

Male.— Head and antenne black, underside of the head
yellow; thorax and tegule brown, the latter edged with
white; a yellow spot cn the base of the tegule; abdomen
black, grey at the base and white on the underside; legs
black. Primaries brown, the veins and a spot on the outer
margin near the apex yellow; a rather wide white band
partly crosses the wing from about the middle of the costal
margin: secondaries white, broadly bordered with black at
the apex and round the outer margin.

Ixpanse 1 inch.

Hab. Ecuador, Chiguinda (Buckley, Mus. Druce).

Polypetes mirma, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, tegule, abdomen, and legs
black, the underside of the abdomen white. Primaries from
the base to about the middle white, but slightly dusky close
to the base; the outer half of the wing black; a small streak
at the end of the cell and two small spots close to the apex
white: secondaries white, broadly bordered with black.

Expanse 1 inch.

Fab. Bolivia (Garlepp, Mus. Druce).

Astyochia dolens, sp. n.

Male.— Head, antenne, thorax, tegule, abdomen, and legs
black. Primaries semihyaline black, darkest along the costal
margin, at the end of the cell, and at the apex; a whitish

302 Mr. F. Chapman on Foraminifera

spot between the end of the cell and the apex: secondaries
semihyaline white, broadly bordered with black; the veins
all black.

Expanse 1 inch.

Hab. Bolivia (Garlepp, Mus. Druce).

Astyochia ithra, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, tegule, abdomen, and legs
black. Primaries black, slightly hyaline at the base; on the
underside the apex is grey: secondaries white, very broadly
bordered with black.

Expanse 1,1, inch.

Hab. Bolivia (Garlepp, Mus. Druce).

XLV.—Foraminifera from the “ Cambridge Greensand.”
By FREDERICK CHAPMAN, A.L.S., F.R.M.S.

Part II. *

Subfamily Noposarzwz (continued).
FRONDICULARIA, Defrance [1824].

Frondicularia tnversa, Reuss.

Frondicularia inversa, Reuss, 1845, Verstein. bshm. Kreidef. pt. i. p. 81,
pl. viii. figs. 15-19, pl. xiii. fig. 42; Chapman, 1894, Journ. R. Micr.
Soe. pp. 155, 156, pl. ii. fig. 8.

A well-known species in the Gault and Chalk. At Folke-
stone it was found only in zone x.
A few fragments from Swaffham,

Frondicularia lanceola, Reuss.

Frondicularia lanceola, Reuss, 1860, Sitzungsb, d. k. Ak. Wiss, Wien,
yol. xl. p. 198, pl. v. fig. 1; Chapman, 1894, Journ. R. Mier. Soe.
p. 157, pl. iii, fig. 15.

Two specimens, one of which is fragmentary, were found
at Swaffham.

Frondicularia Ungeri, Reuss.

Frondicularia Ungeri, Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d. k, Ak. Wiss. Wien,
vol. xlvi. p. 54, pl. iv. figs. ll a, 6; Chapman, 1894, Journ. R. Mier,
Soe. p. 157, pl. ii. fig. 16.

Two specimens from Swaffham.

* For Part I. see this Magazine for January 1899, pp. 48-66.

from the “ Cambridge Greensand.” 303

Frondicularia Parkert, Reuss.

Frondicularia Parkeri, Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
vol, xlvi. p. 91, pl. xii. fig. 7; Chapman, 1894, Journ. R. Micr.
Soe. p. 157, pl. iui. fig. 17.

Four good specimens of this species were found at Swaff-
ham, one of which bears upon its lateral surface the initial
chambers of Vitriwebbina Sollast,

Frondicularia guestphalica, Reuss.
Frondicularia guestphalica, Reuss, 1860, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss.
Wien, vol. xl. p. 195, pl. vi. fig. 2; Chapman, 1894, Journ, R. Micr.
Soc. p. 158, pl. iv. fig. 2.

Two specimens from Swaffham.

Frondicularia striga, sp.n. (Fig. 1.)

Lateral outline of test subovate, acuminate ; the oral end
more produced ; complanate, with the surface nearly even,
but relieved by two strong riblets running vertically down
the middle of the test and covering the oral terminations of

‘Fig. 1.

Frondicularia striga, sp.n. X 15.

each chamber. The margins of the chambers not marked
by very strong shell-thickening as in some species having
the same general outline. Edge of the test slightly grooved.
The shell-surface under a high power appears finely granu-
lated or rippled. Length of type specimen 1°9 millim. ;
breadth 1°4 millim.; thickness of edge *133 millim.

This species appears to be quite distinct from any pre-
viously figured. In outlineit somewhat resembles /. perovata,
Chapman *, but is not so regularly ovate, and the sutural
margins of the chambers are not incurved towards the aboral

* Journ. R, Mier, Soc. 1894, pp. 158, 159, pl. iv. figs. 5 a, b,

304 Mr. F, Chapman on Foraminifera

end. FF. Corda, Reuss *, is near to F, striga in its general
outline, but it bears no double riblet on the shell-surface.
These vertical costule are comparable with the same struc-
tures forming a marked feature in F. Fritschi, Perner f.
The latter species, however, belongs to the group with much
elongated tests, and I have never met with any intermediate
and broader specimens of 7. Fritschi than those figured in
the paper dealing with the Frondicularie from the Gault of
Folkestone under the name of /. pinneformis (=F. Fritschi,
Perner f).

The specimens recorded by G. R. Vine from the Cambridge
Greensand as “ Frondicularia, var. with two parallel longi-
tudinal ribs,” may either belong to this present species or to
F, Fritschi.

Three specimens of J’ stviga with fairly constant characters,
but all slightly broken, were found in the Cambridge Green-
sand of Swaffham.

Frondicularia Archiaciana, VOrbigny.
Yrondicularia Archiaciana, a’ Orbigny, 1840, Mém. Soc. géol. France,
vol. iv. p. 20, pl. i. figs. 54-36; Reuss, 1845, Verstein. bohm.
Kreidef. pt. i. p. 31, pl. xii. fig. 29; Chapman, 1894, Journ. R.
Micr. Soc. p. 155, pl. iii. fig. 6.
A broken specimen was found at Swaffham which bears
vertical striz on its lateral surfaces similar to those found in
the Gault of Folkestone and the Chalk of Bohemia.

FLABELLINA, d’Orbigny [1826].
Flabellina didyma (Berthelin).

Frondicularia didyma, Berthelin, 1880, Mém. Soe. géol. France, sér. 3,
vol. i. no. 5, p. G1, pl. ii. figs. 18 a, b.

Flabellina didyma (Berthelin), Chapman, 1894, Journ. R. Mier. Soe.
p. 159, pl. iv. fig. 7.

One specimen from Swaffham.

RHABDOGONIUM, Reuss [1860].

Rhabdogonium excavatum, Reuss.

Rhabdogonium excavatum, Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss.

Wien, vol. xlvi. p. 91, pl. xii. fig. 8; Chapman, 1894, Journ. R. Micr.
Soe. p. 160, pl. iv. figs. 9a, d.

* Verstein. bihm. Kreidef. 1845, pt. i. p. 31, pl. viii. figs. 26-28,
pl. xiii. fig. 41.

+ “ Foraminifery Ceského Cenomanu” (Pal. Bohemiz, no. 1), 1892,
p. 58, pl. vii. figs. 1 a—d.

t Journ, R. Micr, Soc, 1894, p. 156, pl. iii. figs. 9-11.

Jrom the “ Cambridge Greensand.” 305

In the Gault this species appears to be confined to the
uppermost zones. It is somewhat frequent at Swaffham.

Rhabdogonium excavatum, Reuss, var. exilis, nov.

(Fig. 2.)

This variety is distinguished from the typical R. excavatum
by the elongate form and extreme tenuity of its test. ‘The
primordial segment is separated from the rest of the shell by

Fig. 2.

Rhabdogonium excavatum, Reuss, var. exilis, nov. X 380.
a, lateral view ; 8, oral aspect.
a conspicuous constriction. Length *9 millim.; breadth at

the widest part of the oral extremity °3 millim.
The figured specimen was obtained from the Cambridge

Greensand of Swaffham.

MARGINULINA, d’Orbigny [1826].
Marginulina glabra, VOrbigny.

Marginulina glabra, d@’Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat. vol. vil. p. 259,
no. 6; Modéle, no. 55; Chapman, 1894, Journ. R. Micr. Soe. p. 160,
pl. iv. figs. lla, d.

Two specimens from the Greensand of Swaffham.

Maryinulina hamulus, Chapman.
Marginulina hamulus, Chapman, 1894, Journ. R. Micr. Soe. p. 161,
pl. iv. figs. 13a, 6.
Two specimens, in both of which the test does not so
rapidly increase in size as the specimens figured from the
Folkestone Gault, were found at Swaffham.

Marginulina linearis, Reuss.
Marginulina linearis, Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsb, d, k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
vol. xlvi. p. 60, pl. v. fig. 15; Chapman, 1894, Journ, R. Mier, Soc.
p. 161, pl. iv. fig. 14,
Rare at Swaffham.
Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iii.

306 Mr. F. Chapman on Foraminifera

Marginulina soluta, Reuss.
Marginulina soluta, Reuss, 1860, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
vol. xl. p. 206, pl. vii. fig. 4.

This species is easily recognized by the bulb-like initial
segment and the prominent tubular oral termination. This
form has not been met with up to the present in the Folke-
stone Gault. It was found by Reuss in the Chalk of West-
phalia.

Four specimens from the Greensand of Swaffham.

Marginulina equivoca, Reuss.
9g ,

Marginulina equivoca, Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
vol. xlvi. p. 60, pl. v. fig. 17; Chapman, 1894, Journ. R. Micr. Soc.
p- 162, pl. iv. fig. 20.

Three specimens, one of which has a greatly prolonged
tubular aperture, were found at Swaffham.

Marginulina striatocostata, Reuss.

Marginulina striatocostata, Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss.
Wien, vol. xlvi. p. 62, pl. vi. fig. 2; Chapman, 1894, Journ. R. Mier,
Soe. p. 163, pl. iv. fig. 21.

Two specimens were found at Swaffham.

Marginulina Jonest, Reuss.

Marginulina Jonesi, Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
vol, xlvi. p. 61, pl. v. fig. 19; Chapman, 1894, Journ. R. Mier. Soe.
p- 168, pl. iv. fig. 24.

One specimen from Swaffham.

VAGINULINA, d’Orbigny [1826].

Vaginulina recta, Reuss.

Vaginulina recta, Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
vol, xlvi. p. 48, pl. iii. figs. 14, 15; Chapman, 1894, Journ. R. Micr.
Soe. p. 422, pl. viii. figs. la, b.

This species is fairly common at Swaffham.

Vaginulina recta, Reuss, var. tenuistriata, Chapman.

Vaginulina recta, Reuss, var. tenuistriata, Chapman, 1894, Journ. R.
Micr. Soc. pp. 422, 428, pl. viii. fig. 2.

This variety is common at Swaffham.

Jrom the “ Cambridge Greensand.” 307

Vagtnulina truncata, Reuss.

Vaginulina truncata, Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
vol. xlvi. p. 47, pl. iii. fig. 9; Chapman, 1894, Journ. R. Mier. Soe.
pp. 423, 424, pl. viil. tigs. 5 a, d, 6.

It is difficult to define the limits of the type form of this
species, for it passes so insensibly into the robust variety with
the redundant shell-growth. Variations of V. truncata, in
which the later segments are Frondicularian, are met with in
the Cambridge Greensand, similar to those which were found
in the Gault of Folkestone *.

V. truncata is very common at Swaffham.

Vaginulina truncata, Reuss, var. robusta,
Berthelin & Chapman.

Vaginulina truncata, Reuss, “ var. trés robuste,” Berthelin, 1880, Mém.

Soe. géol. France, sér. 3, vol. i. no. 5, p. 40, pl. ii. figs. 4a, b.
Vaginulina truncata, Reuss, yar. robusta, Chapman, 1394, Journ, R.

Micr. Soc. pp. 424, 425, pl. vill. figs. 7 a, b.
This variety is equally abundant with the type form at

Swaffham.

Vaginulina truncata, var. eurynota, Reuss.

Vaginulina eurynota, Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss, Wien,

vol. xlvi. p. 90, pl. xii. fig. 9; Burrows, Sherborn, and Bailey, 1890,
Journ. R. Mier. Soc. p. 559, pl. x. fig. 9.

In the Gault series this curved form of Vaginulina was
found to graduate into what may be regarded as the type
form—V. truncata—and was included under that name in
the descriptive papers on the Folkestone Foraminifera. An
extremely good specimen of this variation was found in the
Cambridge Greensand of Swaffham, and is here regarded asa
variety ot V. truncata.

Vaginulina arguta, Reuss.

Vaginulina arguta, Reuss, 1860, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
yol. xl. p. 202, pl. vill. fig. 4; Chapman, 1894, Journ. R. Micr. Soc.
p. 425, pl. viii. figs. 9a, d.

One specimen from Swaffham.

Vaginulina striolata, Reuss.

Vaginulina striolata, Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d.k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
vol. xlvi. p. 46, pl. ii. fig. 7; Chapman, 1894, Journ. R, Mier. Soe.
pp. 425, 426, pl. viii. fig. 10,

This species was represented in the series from the Upper

* Cf. Journ. R. Micr. Soc. 1898, p. 14, pl. ii. fig. 18
23*

308 Mr. F. Chapman on Foraminifera

Gault at Folkestone by a single specimen, and it is also

unique in the collection from the Cambridge Greensand of
Swaffham.

Vaginulina comitina, Berthelin.

Vaginulina comitina, Berthelin, 1880, Mém. Soc. géol. France, sér. 3,
vol. i. no. 5, p. 38, pl. i. figs. 21 a-d; Chapman, 1894, Journ. R.
Micr. Soe. p. 426, pl. viii. fig. 11.

This species has previously been described from the Gault

of France and England, and it has also occurred in the Chalk
detritus of Charing, Kent. It is rare at Swaffham.

Vaginulina Biochet, Berthelin.

Vaginulina Biochei, Berthelin, 1880, Mém. Soc. géol. France, sér. 3,
vol. i, no. 5, p. 42, pl. ii. figs. 9a, 6; Chapman, 1894, Journ. R.
Micr. Soc. p. 427, pl. viii. figs. 14a, b.

This rare form was originally described from the French

Gault, and it has also been found in the Gault of Folkestone,

One specimen from the Cambridge Greensand at Swaffham.

CRISTELLARIA, Lamarck [1816].

Cristellaria linearis, Reuss.
Cristellaria linearis, Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
vol. xlvi. p. 66, pl. xii. figs. 1 a, 6; Chapman, 1894, Journ. R. Micr.
Soc. pp. 645, 646, pl. ix. figs. la, b.

Very rare at Swaffham.

Cristellaria parallela, Reuss.

Cristellaria parallela, Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
vol. xlvi. p. 67, pl. vii. figs. 1,2; Chapman, 1894, Journ, R. Mier.
Soc. p. 647, pl. ix. figs. 5 a, d.

This occurrence extends the range of the species upward,
being formerly known from Neocomian, Aptian, and Albian
beds, and only as high as zone v. at Folkestone.

Very rare at Swaffham.

Cristellaria cymboides, VOrbigny.

Cristellaria cymboides, @Orbigny, 1846, Foram. Foss. Vienne, p. 85,
l. iii. figs. 30, 31; Burrows, Sherborn, and Bailey, 1890, Journ,
. Micr. Soc. p. 560, pl. xi. fig. 6; Chapman, 1894, ibid. p. 647,

pl, ix. figs. 6a, 6.

One specimen from Swaffham.

From the “ Cambridge Greensand.” 309

Cristellaria crepidula (Fichtel & Moll).

2 aaa crepidula, Fichtel & Moll, 1798, Test. Micr. p. 107, pl. xix.

gs. g-t.

Cristellaria crepidula (Fichtel & Moll), d’Orbigny, 1839, Foram. Cuba,
p. 64, pl. vii. figs. 17, 18; Chapman, 1894, Journ. R. Micr. Soe.
p- 648, pl. ix. figs. 8a, 6.

One specimen from Swaffham.

Cristellaria gladius (Philippi).

Marginulina gladius, Philippi, 1843, Beitr. z. Kenntniss d. Tertiarf.
nordwest. Deutschl. p. 40, pl. i. fig. 37.

Cristellaria gladius (Philippi), Hantken, 1875, Mittheil. a. d. Jahrb. k.
ungar. geol. Anstalt, p. 51, pl. v. fig. 12 ; Chapman, 1894, Journ. R.
Mier. Soe. p. 649, pl. ix. figs. 11 a, d.

Two very typical specimens from Swaffham.

Cristellaria Bronni (Romer).

Planularia Bronni, Romer, 1841, Verstein. d. nordd. Kreidegeb. p. 97,
pl. xv. fig. 14.

Cristellaria Bronni (Romer), Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss.
Wien, vol. xlvi. p. 70, pl. vii. figs. 13 a, 6; Chapman, 1894, Journ.
R. Micr. Soc. pp. 649, 650, pl. ix. figs. 12 a, 6, 13a, b.

One slightly damaged specimen from Swaffham.

Cristellaria sulcifera, Reuss.

Cristellaria sulcifera, Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
vol. xlvi. pp. 74, 93, pl. viii. figs. 8a,6; Chapman, 1894, Journ. R.
Micr. Soe. pp. 650, 651, pl. x. figs. 2 a, d.

Rare at Swaffham.

Cristellaria triangularis, VOrbigny.
Cristellaria triangularis, V@Orbigny, 1840, Mém. Soe. géol. France,
sér. 1, vol. iv. p. 27, pl. ii. figs. 21, 22; Chapman, 1894, Journ. R.
Micr. Soc. p. 651, pl. x. figs. 3a, 6.

One characteristic specimen from Swaffham.

Cristellaria trunculata, Berthelin.
Cristellaria trunculata (pars), Berthelin, 1880, Mém. Soe. géol. France,
sér. 3, vol. i. no. 5, p. 53, pl. iii. figs. 27 a, 6; Chapman, 1894, Journ.
R. Micr. Soc. p. 651, pl. x. figs. 4a, b.

Rare at Swaffham.

510 Mr. F. Chapman on Foraminifera

Cristellaria oligostegia, Reuss.

Cristellaria oligostegia, Reuss, 1860, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
vol. xl. p. 213, pl. viii. fig. 8; Chapman, 1894, Journ. R. Micr. Soc.
pp. 651, 652, pl. x. figs. 5a, b

This species is somewhat rare at Swaffham.

Cristellaria scitula, Berthelin.

Cristellaria scitula, Berthelin, 1880, Mém. Soc. géol. France, sér. 3,
vol. i. no. 5, p. 53, pl. iii. figs. 3a-e; Chapman, 1894, Journ. R,
Micr, Soc. p. 652, pl. x. figs. 7 a, 6.

Very rare at Swaffham.

Cristellaria complanata, Reuss.

Cristellaria complanata, Reuss, 1845, Verstein. bohm. Kreidef. pt. i.
p. 33, pl. xiii. fig, 54; Chapman, 1894, Journ. R. Mier. Soc.
pp- 653, 654, pl. x. figs. 12 a, bd.

One very fine example from the Cambridge Greensand of

Swaffham.

Cristellaria turgidula, Reuss.

Cristellaria turgidula, Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
vol. xlvi. p. 73, pl. viii. figs. 4a, 6; Chapman, 1896, Journ. R. Micr.
Soe. pp. 1, 2, pl. i. figs. 1 a, b.

Very rare at Swaffham.

This record extends the range of the form upward, it

having been noticed previously in the various divisions of the
Albian stage.

Cristellaria circumcidanea, Berthelin.

Cristellaria circumcidanea, Berthelin, 1880, Mém. Soc. géol. France,
sér, 3, vol. i. no. 5, p. 52, pl. iil. figs. 1 a, 6; Chapman, 1896, Journ.
R. Mier. Soc. pp. 2, 3, pl. i. figs. 2 a, 6.

This species is common at Swaffham.

Cristellaria convergens, Bornemann.

Cristellaria convergens, Bornemann, 1855, Zeitschr. d. deutsch. geol.
Gesellsch. vol. vii. p. 327, pl. xili. figs. 16, 17 ; Chapman, 1896, Journ.
R. Micr. Soe. p. 4, pl. i. figs. 6 a, b.

One specimen from Swaffham.

Cristellaria gibba, d’Orbigny.
Cristellaria gibba, VOrbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat. vol. vii. p. 29
no. 17; Chapman, 1896, Journ. R. Micr. Soc. pp. 4, 5, pl.
figs. 7 a, b.

2)
“ee
1

This species is common at Swaffham,

From the “ Cambridge Greensand.” dll

Cristellaria rotulata (Lam.).

Lenticulites rotulata, Lamarck, 1804, Annales du Muséum, vol. v.
p- 188, no. 3; Tableau Encycl. et Méth. pl. cecelxvi. fig. 5.

Cristellaria rotulata (Lam.), d’Orbigny, 1840, Mém. Soc. géol. France,
sér. 1, vol. iv. p. 26, pl. ii. figs. 15-18; Chapman, 1896, Journ. R.
Micr, Soe. pp. 5, 6, pl. i. figs. 8 a, b.

This species was recorded by G. R. Vine from Cambridge.

It is common at Swaffham.

Cristellaria rotulata (Lam.), var. macrodiscus, Reuss.

Cristellaria macrodisca, Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss. Wien,
vol. xlvi. p. 78, pl. ix. figs. 5 a, b.

Cristellaria rotulata (Lam.), var. macrodiscus, Reuss, Chapman, 1896,
Journ, R. Micr. Soc. pp. 6, 7, pl. i. figs. 9a, b.

This variety is frequent at Swaffham,

Cristellaria gaultina, Berthelin.

Cristellaria gaultina, Berthelin, 1880, Mém. Soe. géol. France, sér. 3,
vol. i, no. 5, p. 49, pl. ii. figs. 15-19; Chapman, 1896, Journ. R.
Micr. Soe. pp. 7, 8, pl. i. figs. 10a, 6, 11.

This species ranges throughout the Gault, besides occurring
at several horizons above the Cenomanian. In the Cambridge
Greensand of Swaffham and elsewhere C. gaultina is exces-
sively common and attains to a great size, some specimens
being 3 millim. across the disk.

Cristellaria sternalis, Berthelin.

Cristellaria sternalis, Berthelin, 1880, Mém. Soc. géol. France, sér. 3,
vol. i. no. 5, p.54, pl. iii. figs. 2a, b; Chapman, 1896, Journ. R.
Micr. Soe. p. 8, pl. ii. figs. 1 a, 0.

This species does not attain to so large a size in the Cam-

bridge Greensand as in the Gault. It is frequent at
Swaffham.

Cristellaria diademata, Berthelin.
Cristellaria diademata, Berthelin, 1880, Mém. Soe. géol. France, sér, 3,
vol. i. no. 5, p. 51, pl. iii. figs. 4, 5, 12, & 18; Chapman, 1896,
Journ, R. Micr. Soe. p. 8, pl. u. figs. 2 a, 6.

One fine specimen from the Greensand of Swaffham.

312 Mr. F. Chapman on Foraminifera

Subfamily Porrmorpuryinz.
PoLYMORPHINA, d’Orbigny [1826].

Polymorphina lactea (Walker & Jacob), var. acuplacenta,
Jones & Chapman.
Polymorphina lactea (W. & J.), “ Fistulose form,” Chapman, 1896,
Journ. R. Micr. Soc. p. 9, pl. ii. fig. 4.
Polymorphina spp., var. acuplacenta, Jones & Chapman, 1896, Journ.
Linn. Soc., Zoology, vol. xxv. p. 502, figs. 6-9.

The apical outgrowths of this specimen particularly re-
semble those seen in fig. 8, p. 502 of Jones and Chapman’s
summary of the fistulose Polymorphine (tom. supra cit.).

One specimen from Swaffham.

Polymorphina gibba, VOrbigny, var. acuplacenta,
Jones & Chapman.
Polymorphina gibba, VOrbigny, “ Fistulose form,” Chapman, 1896,
Journ. R. Mier. Soe. p. 10, pl. ii. fig. 6.
Polymorphina gibba, VOrbigny, var. acuplacenta, Jones & Chapman,
1896, Journ. Linn. Soc., Zoology, vol. xxv. p. 502, figs. 6, 7.

The specimens, of which there are two in this series from
the Cambridge Greensand of Swaffham, are perhaps more
nearly comparable with fig. 6, p. 502 of Jones and Chapman’s
summary than with the Gault specimen.

Polymorphina gutta, d’Orbigny, var. diffusa,

Jones & Chapman.

Polymorphina gutta, VOrbigny, “ Fistulose form,’ Chapman, 1896,
Journ. R. Micr. Soe. pp. 10, 11, pl. ii. fig. 8.

Polymorphina spp., var. diffusa, Jones & Chapman, 1896, Journ. Linn.
Soc., Zoology, vol. xxv. p. 505, figs. 26-29,

Four specimens, all more or less resembling those from

the Folkestone Gault, were found at Swaffham.

Polymorphina fusiformis, Romer.
Polymorphina (Globulina) fusiformis, Romer, 1838, Neues Jahrb. fiir
Min. p. 386, pl. ili. fig. 87
Polymorphina fusiformis, Romer, Chapman, 1896, Journ. R. Micr. Soe.
p- 11, pl. ii. fig. 9.
Three specimens belonging to the type species were found
at Swaffham.

from the “ Cambridge Greensand.” 313

Polymorphina fusiformis, Romer, var. horrida, Reuss.
Polymorphina horrida, Wright, 1875, Rep. & Proc. Belf. Nat. Field-
Club for 1873-74, Appendix, 1875, p. 85, pl. iii. fig. 14.
Polymorphina fusiformis, Romer, “ Fistulose form,” Chapman, 1896,
Journ. R. Micr. Soc. pp. 11, 12, pl. ii. fig. 10.
Polymorphina fusiformis, Romer, var. horrida, Reuss, Jones & Chap-
man, 1896, Journ. Linn. Soc., Zoology, vol. xxv. p. 503, fig. 14.

The solitary specimen found at Swaffham more nearly
resembles the Chalk specimen found by Mr. Wright than
that figured from the Gault series. The original specimen of
von Reuss * belongs to the species P. gutta.

Polymorphina fusiformis, Romer, var. acuplacenta,

Jones & Chapman.

The variety here under consideration has apparently never
hitherto been found associated with the type species P. fus/-
formis. ‘The nearest figured form of outgrowth which the
specimens from the Cambridge Greensand resemble is that of
fig. 9, p. 502 of the summary of the fistulose Polymorphine
(op. cit.), although in that specimen the outgrowths are much
more produced.

Three specimens of P. fusiformis, var. acuplacenta, were
found at Swaffham.

Polymorphina sororia, Reuss, var. cuspidata, Brady.

Polymorphina sororia, Reuss, var. cuspidata, Brady, 1884, Chall. Rep.
vol. ix. p. 563, pl. lxxi. figs. 17-19, pl. Ixxii. fig. 4; Chapman, 1896,
Journ. R. Micr. Soe. p. 15, pl. ii. fig. 13.

This variety has been recorded from the Aptian of Guild-

ford, the Gault of Folkestone, and the Red Chalk of Speeton.

Only one specimen was found at Swaffham.

Polymorphina communis, VOrbigny.

Polymorphina (Guttulina) communis, V’Orbigny, 1826, Ann. Sci. Nat.
vol. vii. p. 206, pl. xii. figs. 1-4; Modéle, no. 62.

Polymorphina communis, VOrb., Chapman, 1896, Journ. R. Mier. Soc.
pp. 15, 14, pl. 11. fig. 15,

One specimen from Swaffham.

* “ Globulina horrida,” Reuss, 1845, Verstein. bohm. Kreidef. pt. ii.
p- 110, pl. xliii. fig, 14.

314 Mr. F. Chapman on Foraminifera

Subfamily Ramvzrriwz.
RAMULINA, Rupert Jones [1875].
Ramulina globulifera, Brady.

Ramulina globulifera, Brady, 1879, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci. vol. xix.
n. s. p. 58, pl. viii figs. 32,33; Chapman, 1896, Journ. R. Micr. Soc.
pp. 582, 583, pl. xii. figs. 3-6.
Numerous double and single segments of this species were
found at Swaffham.

Ramulina aculeata, Wright.
Ramulina aculeata, Wright, 1886, Proc. Belf. Nat. Field-Club, 1885-
86, Appendix ix. 1886, p. 331, pl. xxvii. fig. 11.
Lagena tuberculata, Perner, 1892, Ceska Ak. Cisare Frantiska Josefa,
Prague (Palzont. Bohemiz, no. 1), p. 56, pl. v. figs. 19 a, b.
Ramulina aculeata, Wright, Chapman, 1896, Journ. R. Micr. Soe.
pp- 583, 584, pl. xi. figs, 7-9.

This species is well known in nearly all washings from the
Cretaceous beds, and has occurred in the Cenomanian of
Bohemia. It is abundantly represented in the Cambridge
Greensand of Swaffham by slender stoloniferous fragments
and bulbous and bifurcated portions.

VITRIWEBBINA, Chapman [1892].
Vitriwebbina levis (Sollas).

Webbina levis, Solias, 1877, Geol. Mag. dec. ii. vol. iv. pp. 103, 104,
pl. vi. figs. 1-8.

Vitriwebbina levis (Sollas), Chapman, 1892, Geol. Mag. dec. iii. vol. viii.
p. 58, pl. ii. fig. 4; id. 1896, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. vol. xviii. p. 332,
tig.3; id. Journ. R. Micr. Soc. pp. 585, 586, pl. xii. fig. 12.

Vitrewebbina levis (Sollas), Bagg, 1898, Bull. U.S. Geol. Survey,
no, 88, p. 36, pl. ii. figs. 4a, d.

This form was originally described from the Cambridge
Greensand under the generic name Webbina as recorded b
Sollas and Vine. It has since been found in the Middle
Marl of New Jersey, in the Gault of Folkestone, and in the
lowest beds of the Chalk strata.

One specimen of Vitriwebbina levis attached to a glauco-
nitic fragment was found in the washings from Swaffham.

Vitriwebbina Sollasi, Chapman.
Vitriwebbina Sollasi, Chapman, 1892, Geol. Mag. dec. iii. vol. viii.
p. 53, pl. ii. figs. 1-3.
Vitrewebbina Sollasi, Chapman, Bagg, 1898, Bull. U.S. Geol. Survey,
no, 88, pp. 35, 36, pl. il. figs. 5a, b.

from the “ Cambridge Greensand.” 315

This species was first recorded from the Gault. It has
since been found in the Middle Marl of New Jersey and in
the lowest beds of the Chalk.

Vitriwebbina tuberculata (Sollas). (Fig. 3.)

Webbina tuberculata, Sollas, 1877, Geol. Mag. dec. ii. vol. iv. p. 104,
pl. vi. figs. 4-7 & 9. ‘ :

Trochammina irregularis (d’Orbigny), Perner, Ceské Ak. Cisare
Frantiska Josefa, Prague (Paleeont. Bohemiz, no. 1), p. 53, pl. ix.
figs. 1-6.

Vitriwebbina tuberculata (Sollas), Chapman, 1896, Ann. & Mag. Nat.
Hist. vol. xviii. p, 332, fig. 4; id. 1896, Journ. R. Mier. Soc. pp. 586,
587, pl. xiii. fig. 3.

By far the finest specimen of this form I have met with is

here figured from the Cambridge Greensand of Swaffham
(fig. 8). It is remarkable for having no less than ten

Fig. 3.

Vitriwebbina tuberculata (Sollas). x 15.
p=primordial segment.

segments, and by its completeness throws considerable light
on one of the methods of its growth. Vitriwebbina is more
usually found as a series of chambers of gradually increasing
size; but the specimen before us gives an instance of a
deviation from this general habit. The primordial segment
in this specimen immediately gives rise to a double series of
chambers of about equal dimensions extended laterally on
either side of the commencement. This specimen is attached
to a brown (?) fish-bone fragment.

Originally described from the Cambridge Greensand, this
species has since been found in the Gault of Merstham and
Folkestone and in the Cenomanian and Chalk of Bohemia.
Six specimens of Vétriwebbina tuberculata occur in this
present series from the Cambridge Greensand of Swaffham.

316 On Foraminifera from the “ Cambridge Greensand.”

Family Globigerinide.
GLOBIGERINA, d’Orbigny [1826].
Globigerina cretacea, d’Orbigny.
Globigerina cretacea, VOrbigny, 1840, Mém. Soe. géol. France, vol. iv.
p. 34, pl. iii. figs. 12-14; Chapman, 1896, Journ. R. Mier. Soc.
pp. 588, 589, pl. xii. figs. 5, 6.
This species was formerly recorded by Vine from the Cam-
bridge Greensand. It is very common at Swaffham.

Globigerina equilateralis, Brady.

Globigerina equilateralis, Brady, 1879, Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci. vol. xix.
n. s. p.7; id. 1884, Chall. Rep. vol. ix. p. 605, pl. Ixxx. figs. 18-21 ;
Chapman, 1896, Journ. R. Mier. Soc. p. 589, pl. xiii. fig. 7.

Rare at Swaffham.

Family Rotaliide.
Subfamily Roraruwz.
ANOMALINA, d’Orbigny [1826].

Anomalina complanata, Reuss.

Anomalina complanata, Reuss, 1851, Haidinger’s Naturw. Abhandl.
vol. iv. (1) p. 36, pl. iii. fig. 3; Chapman, 1893, Journ. R. Mier. Soc.
pp. 3, 4, pl. i. figs. 4 a—e.

Very rare at Swaffham.

Anomalina ammonoides (Reuss).

Rosalina ammonoides, Reuss, 1845, Verstein. bohm. Kreidef. pt. i.
p- 36, pl. xiii. fig. 66, pl. vill. fig. 53.

Anomalina ammonoides (Reuss), Brady, 1884, Chall. Rep. vol. ix.
p: 672, pl. xciv. figs. 2,3; Chapman, 1898, Journ. R. Mier. Soc.
pp. 4, 5, pl. i. figs. 5 a-e.

This species has been previously recorded from the Cam-

bridge Greensand by G. R. Vine. It is very abundant at
Swaffham.

Anomalina rudis (Reuss).
Rosalina rudis, Reuss, 1862, Sitzungsb. d. k. Ak. Wiss, Wien, vol. xlvi.
p- 87, pl. xi. figs. 7 a-c.
Anomatlina rudis (Reuss), Berthelin, 1880, Mém. Soc. géol. France,
sér, 3, vol. i. no. 5, p. 68, pl. iv. figs. 15 a-e; Chapman, 1898, Journ.
R. Micr. Soc. p. 5, pl. i. figs. 6 a-e.

Occasional at Swaffham.

On British Isopoda Chelifera. 317

RorauiA, Lamarck [1804].
Rotalia Soldanii (d’Orbigny), var. nitida, Reuss.

Rotalina nitida, Reuss, 1844, Geogn. Skizze Bohmen, vol. ii. pt. 1,
p- 214.

Placentula nitida (Reuss), Berthelin, 1880, Mém. Soc. géol. France,
sér. 3, vol. i. no. 5, p. 69, pl. iv. figs. 11 a-e.

Rotalia Soldanii (vOrb.), var. nitida, Reuss, Chapman, 1898, Journ. R.
Micr. Soe. pp. 9, 10, pl. ii. figs. 2 a-e.

Very common at Swaffham.

The types of the foregoing 138 species and vars. of the
Foraminifera described or referred to in these papers, and
also the figured Ostracoda, are now placed in the Wood-
wardian Museum at Cambridge.

XLVI.—British Isopoda Chelifera. By the Rev. Canon
ALM NORMANS MAY, DC bite beh:

Our knowledge of the group of Isopoda entitled by Sars
“‘ Chelitera,” and containing the two families Apseudide and
Tanaide, has been greatly extended of late years. With
respect to our own fauna no doubt many small species still
await discovery in our seas, and it is remarkable that as yet
no member of the genus T'yphlotanars has been met with,
although nine belong to the Norwegian fauna. Now,
however, when these minute forms have been so fully
illustrated by the publication of the classical work of Sars,
some of the species will probably be soon added to our fauna.
Bate and Westwood recorded seven British Isopoda Chelifera;
the number in this paper is twenty-three. The following
works have either been published since Bate and Westwood,
and have reference to species which are here enumerated, or,
if of earlier date, are necessitated by synonymy which is here
specially noticed; but many authors who are only once
mentioned are referred to in the text and not inserted in the
following list.

Selected List of Publications on Isopoda.

(1) Bare and Westwoop.—‘ History of British Sessile-eyed
Crustacea,’ vol. 1. 1863-9.

(2) Barrois (‘1'H.).—‘ Note préliminaire sur la Faune car-
cinologique des Acores.’ Lille, 1888.

Canon A. M. Norman on

Barrois (TH.).—‘ Catalogue des Crustacés marins re-
cueillis aux Acores.’ Lille, 1888.

Benepicr (JAMES E.).—“ The Arcturide of the U.S.
National Museum,” Proc. Biol. Soc. Washington,
vol. xii. 1898, p. 41.

Boas (J. E. V.).— Kleinere carcinologische Mittheil-
ungen. I, Eine neue Art der Gattung Apseudes,”
Zoolog. Jahrbiicher, 1866, p. 109.

Bo.rvar (J.).— Lista de la Collecién der Custdceos de
Espaiia y Portugal del Museo de Historia Naturali de
Madrid,” Anales Soc. Espafi. Hist. Nat. ser. 2, vol. i.
1892.

Bonnier (J ULES).—‘ Catalogue des Crustacés Malaco-
stracés recueillis dans la Baie de Concarneau,” Bull.
scient. du Départ. du Nord, sér. 2, x™° Année, 1887.

BONNIER (J ULES).—“ Résultats scientifiques de la Cam-
pagne du ‘ Caudan’ dans le Golfe de Gascogne: Edri-
ophthalmes,’”’ Annales de l’Univers. de Lyon, 1896.

BoucHARD-CHANTEREAUX.—‘ Catalogue des Crustacés
observés jusqu’d ce jour 4 l'état vivant dans le Bou-
lonnais.’ 1833.

Bourne (G. C.).—“ Report Trawling Cruise of
H.M.S. ‘ Research’ off S.W. Ireland,” Journ. Marine
Biol. Assoc. new ser. vol. 1. 1889, p. 306.

Bovatuius (C.).—‘ New Isopod from the Swedish
Arctic Expedition of 1883,” K. Svenska Vet.-Akad.
Handl. vol. x. 1885.

Bovauuius (C.).—“* New Isopod from the Coast of
Sweden,” K. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Hand. vol. x. 1885.

Bovauius (C.).—¢ Notes on the Family Asellide,”
K. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Hand]. vol. xi. 1866.

Bovatuius (C.).— “ New and _ imperfectly-known
Jsopoda. II.,” K. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Hand. vol. xi.
1866.

Carus (V.).—‘ Prodromus Faune Mediterranee,’ vol. i.
1884-5.

Cuaus (C.).—“ Ueber Apseudes Latreillii, Edw., und
die 'Tanaiden,” Arbeit. zool. Institut zu Wien, vol. v.
pt. 3, 1884, p. 319.

Craus (C.).—‘f Ueber Apseudes Latreillii, Edw., und
die Tanaiden. IJI.,” Arbeit. zool. Instit. zu Wien,
vol. vil. pt. 2, 1887, p. 189.

CoLpsTREAM (J.).— Structure and Habits of the
Limnoria terebrans, a minute Crustaceous Animal,
destructive of marine wooden erections, as piers, &c.,””

Edinb. New Phil. Journ. vol. xvi. 1834, p. 333,

British Isopoda Chelifera. 319

(19) De Buen (O.).—“ Materiales para la Fauna carcino-
logica de Espafia,’ Anales Soc. Espaii. Hist. Nat.
vol. xvi. 1887, p. 405.

(20) DeLace (Yves).— Contribution 4 I’étude de ? Appareil
circulatoire des Crustacés édriophthalmes marins,”
Archiv. de Zool. exp. et gén. vol. ix. 1881.

(21) Dourn (A.).—“ Untersuchungen iiber Bau und Ent-
wicklung der Arthropoden. Zur Kenntniss vom Bau
und der Entwicklung von Yanais,” Jenaische Zeit-
schrift, vol. v. 1870, p. 293.

(22) Doutirus (A.).—‘‘ Troisigme Campagne de |’ ‘ Hiron-
delle,’ 1887. Sur quelques Crustacés isopodes du
littoral des Acores,”’ Bull. Soc. Zool. de France,
vol. xiii. 1888.

(23) Douirus (A.).—“ Notes de Géographie zoologique sur
la distribution du Genre Ligia, Fabr.,”’ Feuille des
Jeunes Naturalistes,” sér. 3, 24° Année, 1893.

(24) Douurus (A.).—‘ Les Idoteida des cétes de France,”
Feuille des Jeunes Naturalistes, sér. 3, 25° Année,
1894-5 (two papers in numbers Nov. 1894 and Feb.
1895).

(25) Dotitrus (A.).—“ Note préliminaire sur les Tanaide
recueillis aux Acores pendant les Campagnes de
) * Hirondelle’ 1887-1888,” Bull. Soc. Zool. de France,
vol. xxi. 1897, p. 207.

(26) Doturus (A.).—“ Campagnes de la ‘ Melita,’ Tanaide
récoltés par M. Ed. Chevreux dans |’Atlantique et
dans la Méditerranée,” Mém. de la Soc. Zool. de
France, vol. xi. 1898, p. 35.

(27) Douurus (A.).—Campagnes du ‘ Travailleur’ et du
‘Talisman,’ Neotanais Kdwards?, sp. nov.,” Bull. du
Muséum d’Hist. Nat. 1898, no. 2, p. 77.

(28) Forsstranp (C.).—‘ Det arktisea Hafsomradets djur-
geografiska Begriinsning med Ledning af Skalkrif-
tornas (Crustacea Malacostraca) Uttredning.’ Upsala,
1886.

(29) Gourret (P.).—‘ Les Lemodipodes et les Isopodes du
Golfe de Marseille,” Ann. du Musée d’Hist. Nat. de
Marseille, Zoologie, vol. iv. 1891.

(30) GreBnitzky (N. A.).—‘ Crustacean Fauna of the Black
Sea’ (in Russian). 1873.

(31) Hansen (H. J.).—‘ Dijmphna-Togtets zoologisk-
botaniske Udbytte,’ 1886, p. 185.

(82) Hansen (H. J.).—“ Oversigt over det vestlige Grén-
lands Fauna af Malakostrake Havskrebsdyr,” Vidensk.
Meddel. fra den Naturh. Foren. 1 Kjébh. 1887.

320 Canon A. M. Norman on

(33) Hansen (H. J.).—‘ Cirolanide et Familiz nonnulle
propinque Musei Hauniensis.’ Kjébenhavn, 1890.

(34) Hansen (H. J.).—‘ Isopoden, Cumaceen und Stomato-
poden der Plankton-Expedition.’ 1895.

(35) Harcrer (O.).— Descriptions of new Genera and
Species of Isopoda from New England and adjacent
Regions,” Amer. Journ. Sci. & Art, vol. xv. 1878,

HOTS:

(36) eine (O.).—“ Notes on New England Isopoda,”’
Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. 1879, p. 157.

(37) Haraer (O.).—‘ Report Marine Isopoda of New
England and adjacent Waters,”’ Rep. U.S. Comm. Fish
and Fisheries, pt. vi. for 1878 (not published, | think,
until 1881), p. 297.

(38) Harcrer (O.).—“ Reports of Dredging East Coast of
United States, ‘ Blake,’ 1880: XXIII. Report on
the Isopoda,” Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. vol. xi. 1883,

ao 1?

(39) Wetrath (C.).—“ Carcinologische Beitriige zur Fauna
des adriatischen Meeres,”’ Verh. zool.-bot. Gesellsch.
Wien, 1866, p. 723.

(40) HerpMAN and others.—“ The Marine Zoology, Botany,
and Geology of the Irish Sea. Fourth and Final
Report of the Committee consisting of &c.”—including
Mr. A.O. WALKER. [This report gives complete lists
of the Crustacea recorded in many scattered papers of
Mr. Walker. It will suffice therefore to refer to this
for the fauna, except in cases where new species are
described.] Brit. Assoc. Rep. for 1886 (1887), p. 417.

(41) Hesse (E.).—‘ Mémoire sur les Pranizes et les Ancées.’
1864.

(42) Hesse (E.).— Mémoire sur des Crustacés rares ou
nouveaux des cétes de France: Article XXI. Mémoire
sur les Sphéromiens &c.,” Ann. des Sci. nat. sér. 5,
Zool, vol. xvii. 1872, p. 1.

(43) Hesse (E.).—“ Id. Art. XXIII. Pranizes et Ancées
nouveaux,” ibid. vol. xix. 1874.

(44) Hesse (E.).—“ Description @’un nouvel Ancée (Anceus
Congert),” Revue des Sei. nat. vol. iv. 1876.

(45) Horx (P.).—‘ Die zoologischen Ergebnisse der zwei
in den Jahren 1878 und 1879 ausgefiirhten Fahrten
des ‘ Willem Barents,’ 1881-2. Crustacea.

(46) Horx (P.).—“Schaaldieren van de Oosterschelde,”’
Tijdschr. Ned. Dierk. Vereen. 1884.

(47) Horx (P.).—“ Crustacea Neerlandica,” Tijdschr, Ned.
Dierk. Vereen. 1889. ;

British Isopoda Chelifera. 321

(48) Hoek (P.).—‘ Rapport der Commissie uit de Konink-
lijke Akademie van Wetenschappen, ZLimnoria lig-
norum. 1893.

(49) Horie (W. E.).—“ Deep-water Fauna of the Clyde
Sea-area,” Journ. Linn. Soc. vol. xx. 1889, p. 442.

(50) KaHuer (R.).—‘ Recherches sur la Faune marine des
Iles Anglo-Normandes.’ 1885.

(51) Ka@uuer (R.).—“ Description d’un Isopode nouveau le
Jeropsis brevicornis,” Ann. des Sci. nat., Zool. sér. 6,
Voltas 016

(52) Kroyer (H.).—“ Nye Arter af Slegten Tanais,” Natur-
hist. Tidssk. vol. iv. 1842-3, p. 167.

(53) Kroyer (H.).—Gaimard, ‘ Voyages en Scandinavie,
&e.’ Crustacea.

(54) Leach (W. E.).—Crustaceology,” Edinb. Encyel.
vol. vil. 1813-14, and Appendix, vol. vii. pp. 429-
437 (1814).

(55) Leaca (W. E.).— Tabular View of External Cha-
racters of Four Classes of Animals &c.,” Trans, Linn.
Soc. vol. xi. 1815, p. 306.

(56) Leacu (W. E ).—“ Annulosa,” Encyclop. Brit., Sup-
plement, 1816, p. 401.

(57) Leacu (W. E.).—‘ Crustacés,” Dict. des Sci. nat.
vol. xi. 1818, p. 69.

(58) LetcHmMaN (G.).—“ Beitriige zur Naturgeschichte der
Isopoden,” Bibliotheca Zoologica. Cassel, 1891.

(59) LitisEBorG (W.).—‘‘ Norges Crustaceer,’” (éfvers.
K. Vet.-Akad. Férhand. 1851, p. 19.

(60) Littsesore (W.).—‘ Hafs Crustaceer vid Kullaberg,”
(Efvers. K. Vet.-Akad. Férhand. 1852, p. 1.

(61) LintseBpora (W.).—‘ Bidrag till Kannedomen om de
inom Sverige och Norrige férekommende Crustaceen
af Isopodernas Underordnung och Tanaidernas Familj.’
Upsala, 1864.

(62) Lucas (H.).—‘ Observations sur quelques Espéces
nouvelles de Crustacés du Nord de l'Afrique,” Annales
Soc. Entom. de France, sér. 2, vol. vii. 1849,

p. 407.

(63) Lucas (H.).—‘ Histoire naturelle des Animaux arti-
culés de Algérie: Crustacés.’ 1845.

(64) Lirken (Cur.).— “Nogle Bemerkninger om de
Nordiske dga-Arter, samt om Afga-Slegtens rette
Begrendsning,’ Naturhist. Foren. Vidensk. Meddel.
1858.

(65) Lirken (Cur.).—“ Tilleg til ‘Nogle &.’ Om 4a
tridens, Leach, og A’ga rotundicauda, Lilljeborg, samt

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iii. 24

322

(72)

(73)

(74)

Canon A. M. Norman on

om Slegterne Acherusia og Afgacilla,” Naturhist.
Foren. Vidensk. Meddel. 1860.

MaitLtanp (R. T.).—‘ Naamlijst van Nederlandsche
Shaaldieren.’ Rotterdam, 1876.

Marruews (J. Duncan).—“* Alga crenulata, Liitken,”
Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. xx. 1887, p. 444.

MartzporFrF (C.).— Ueber die Farbung von Jdotea
tricuspidata,”’ Jenaische Zeitschr. vol. xvi. 1882, p. 1.

Max WEBER (Professor).—‘ Die Isopoden gesammelt
wihrend der Fahrten des ‘ Willem Barents’ in das
nordliche Eismeer in den Jahren 1880 und 1881,”
Bidragen tot de Dierkunde. Amsterdam, 1884.

MerInerT (FR.).—‘‘ Crustacea Isopoda, Amphipoda et
Decapoda Danie,” Naturhist. Tidssk. ser. 3, vol. x1.
1877, p. 57, and vol. xii. 1880, p. 465.

MEINERT (F'R.).—Crustacea Malacostraca in Petersen’s
“Det Videnskabelige Udbette kanonbaden ‘ Hauchs’
Togter in de Danske Have indenfor Skagen 1883-6.”
1889-90.

Merzcer (A.).—‘ Jahresbericht der Commission zur
wissenschaftlichen Untersuchung der deutschen Meere
in Kiel fiir die Jahre 1872-1878: Crustaceen.’ 1875.

Miers (EH. J.).—“ Report on the Crustacea collected
by the Naturalists of the Arctic Expedition in
1875-76,” Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xx.
1877.

Miers (E. J.).—‘ Small Collection of Crustacea made
by Edward Whymper, Hsq., chiefly in the N. Green-
land Seas,” Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool. vol. xv. 1880,
». OY.

Minas (Ei. J.).—“ Revision of the Idoteide, a Family
of Sessile-eyed Crustacea,” Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool.
vol. xvi. 1881, p. 1.

Mossin (J. R.).—‘ Ueber die Anilocera mediterranea,’
St. Petersburg, 1870.

Montacu (G.). — “ Description of several Marine
Animals found on the Coast of Devonshire,” Trans.
Linn. Soc. vol. vii. 1804, p. 61.

Norman (A. M.).—“ Report Dredging Expedition to
Dogger Bank and Coasts of Northumberland,” Trans.
Tyneside Nat. Field-Club, vol. v. 1863, p. 263.

Norman (A. M.).—‘ Report Deep-sea Dredging of
Coast of Northumberland and Durham : Crustacea,”
Nat. Hist. Trans. Northumb. and Durham, vol. i.
1865, p. 12.

Norman (A. M.).—“ Report Committee for Exploring

Lritish Isopoda Chelifera. 323

the Coasts of the Hebrides: Part 2,” Brit. Assoc. Rep.
for 1866 (1867), p. 193.

(81) Norman (A. M.).—“ On two Isopods belonging to the
Genera Ctrolana and Anilocra new to the British
Islands,” Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. ii. 1868,
p. 421.

(82) Norman (A. M.).—‘ Last Report Dredging among the
Shetland Isles,” Brit. Assoc. Rep. for 1868 (1869),

. 232.

(83) eau (A. M.).—“ Exploration of the Faroe Channel
in 1880 by H.M.S. ‘ Knight Errant’: Report on the
Crustacea,” Proc, Roy. Soc. Edinb. 1881-82, p. 46.

(84) Norman (A. M.).—“ Notes on the French Expedition
of ‘Le Travailleur’ in the Bay of Biscay,” Report
Brit. Assoc. for 1880-1881, p. 10, and printed sepa-
rately in a fuller form by Taylor and Francis, 1880.

(85) Norman (A. M.).—-“A Month on the Trondhjem
Fiord,” Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 6, vol. xii. 1893,
pp: 841 & 441, vol. xiii. 1894, pp. 112, 150, 268,
vol. xv. 1895, p. 476.

(86) NorMAN and SrTespinc.— Crustacea Isopoda of the
‘Lightning, ‘Porcupine, and ‘ Valorous’ Expe-
ditions,” Trans. Zool. Soc. vol. xu. 1886, p. 77.

(87) PRouUDHOMME DE Borre (A.).—“ Note sur les Crus-
tacés Isopodes de la Belgique,”” Comptes Rendus Soc.
Entom. de Belgique, April 1866.

(88) RatruKe (H.).—‘‘ Zur Fauna der Krym,” Mém. des
Sav. Etrang. vol. ii. 1837, p. 291.

(89) Raruke (H.).— Beitriige zur Fauna Norwegens,”
Acta Acad. Leopoldino-Caroline, vol. xx. 1843, p. 1.

(90) Ricuarpson (HARrRIET).—“ Descriptions of Four new
Species of ocinela, with a Synopsis of the Genus,”
Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc. vol. xxxvi. 1898, p. 8.

(91) Rogpertson (D.).—“ Contribution towards a Catalogue
of the Amphipoda and Isopoda of the Firth of Clyde,”
Glasgow, 1888 (separately), and Trans. Nat. Hist.
Soc. Glasgow, vol. 1. p. 9.

(92) Roxpertson (D.).—‘‘Second Contribution towards Cata-
logue of the Amphipoda and Isopoda of the Clyde and
West of Scotland,” Trans. Nat. Hist. Soc. Glasgow,
vol. ili. 1892, p. 199.

(93) Sars (G. O.).—“ Om en anomal Gruppe af Isopoden,”
Vidensk.-Selsk. Forhand. 1863.

(94) Sars (G. O.).—‘ Beretning om en i Sommeren 1865
foretagen zoologisk Reise ved Kysterne af Chris-
tianias og Christiansands Stifter.’ 1866. i

24

324 Canon A. M. Norman on

(95) Sars (G. O.). —“ Nye Dybvandscrustaceer fra Lo-
foten,”’ Vidensk.-Selsk. Forhand. 1869, p. 147.

(96) Sars (G. O.).—‘ Underségelser over Christiania-
fjordens Dybvandsfauna.’ 1869.

(97) Sars (G. O.).— “ Underségelser over Hardanger-
fjordens Fauna: I, Crustacea,’ Vidensk.-Selsk. For-
hand. 1871.

(98) Sars (G. O.).— Bidrag til Kundskaben om Dyrelivet
paa vore Hafbanker,” Vidensk.-Selsk. Forhand. 1872.

(99) Sars (G. O.).—“ Prodromus descriptionis Crustaceorum
et Pycnogonorum que in expeditione Norvegica anno
1876 observavit G. O. Sars,” Archiv for Math. og
Naturvid. Christiania, 1876.

(100) Sars (G. O.).—“ Crustacea et Pyenogonoidea nova in
itinere 277° et 34° Expeditionis Norvegize anno 1877-8
collecta,” Archiv for Math. og Naturvid. Christiania,
1880, p. 428.

(101) Sars (G. O.).—“ Revision af Gruppen Isopoda Cheli-
fera,” Archiv for Math. og Naturvid. 1880, p. 1.

(102) Sars (G. O.).—“ Oversigt af Norges Crustaceer med
forelobege Bemerkninger over de nya eller mindre
bekjendte Arter. I,” Vidensk.-Selsk. Forhand. 1882.

(103) Sars (G. O.).—“ Nye Bidrag til Kundskaben om Mid-
delhavets Invertebratfauna. ILI. Middelhavets Saxi-
poder (Isopoda Chelifera),” Archiv for Math. og
Naturvid. Christiania, 1886, p. 263.

(104) Sars (G.O.).—‘ Norwegian North Atlantic Expedition,
1876-1878,’ Crustacea, i. 1885, ii. 1886.

(105) Sars (G. O.).—‘ Account of the Crustacea of Norway,’
vol. ii. Isopoda, 1896-99.

(106) Sars (M.).—“ Beskrivelse af en ny Slegt og Art af
Isopoder, Munnopsis typica, Sars,’ Vidensk.-Selsk.
Forhand. 1863.

(107) Sars (M.).—“ Beretning om en 1 Sommeren 1859
foretagen zoologisk Reise ved Kyster af Romsdals
Amt,” Mag. for Naturvidens. 1861.

(108) Sars (M.).—‘ Bidrag til Kundskab til Christiania-
fjordens Fauna.’ 1868.

(109) ScuiépTe (J. C.). — “ Krebsdyrenes Sugemund,”
Naturhist. Tidssk. ser. 3, vol. iv. 1866, p. 169, vol. x.
1875, p. 211.

(110) Scuiopre (J. C.) and Mererr (F.).—“ Symbol ad
Monographiam Cymothoarum Crustaceorum Isopodum
Familie,” Naturhist. Tidssk. ser. 3, vols. xi., xiv.,
1879-84.

(111) Scorr (THomaAs).—“ Revised List of the Crustacea of

(112)

(113)

(114)

(115)

(116)

(117)
(118

SS

(119)

(120

~~

(121)

(122)

(123)

(124)

(125)
(126)

British Isopoda Chelifera. 325

the Firth of Forth,” Sixth Ann. Rep. Fishery Board

of Scotland, 1888, p. 235.

Scorr (THomaAs).—‘‘ Additions to the Fauna of the
Firth of Forth,” Eighth Ann. Rep. Fishery Board of
Scotland, 1890, p. 312.

Scorr (THomas).— Additions to the Fauna of the
Firth of Forth,’ Ninth Ann. Rep. Fishery Board of
Scotland, 1891, p. 300.

Scorr (THomAs).—‘“‘ Marine Fishes and Invertebrates

of Loch Fyne,” Fifteenth Ann. Rep. Fishery Board

of Scotland, 1897, p. 107.

Scorr (THomas).—‘ Some Additions to the Inver-
tebrate Fauna of Loch Fyne,” Sixteenth Ann. Rep.

Fishery Board of Scotland, 1898, p. 261.

Scorr (THomas).— Notes on some Scottish Marine

Isopods,” Annals of Scottish Nat. Hist., Oct. 1898,
ols: ;

ae (S. I.).— Review of the Marine Crustacea of

Labrador,” Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus. vol. vi. 1882, p. 223.

Sowrnsky (B.).— ‘Les Crustacées malacostraques
recueillis par deux Expéditions pour les explorations
des profondeurs de la Mer Noire en 1890-91.’ 1895
(in Russian),

Sowrnsky (B.).—‘ Les Crustacées supérieures (Mala-
costraca) de Bosphor : I. Amphipoda et Isopoda.’ 1897
(in Russian).

STEBBING (Rev. T. R. R.).—‘‘ On a new Species of
Arcturus (A. damnoniensis),” Ann. & Mag. Nat.
Hist. ser. 4, vol. xii.

STeEBBING (Rev. T. R. R.).—“A new Australian
Spheromid (Cyctura venosa), and Notes on Dynamene

rubra and viridis,” Journ. Linn. Soc. vol. xii. 1874,

p. 146.

STEBBING (Rev. T. R. R.).—“ Description of a new
Species of Sessile-eyed Crustacean, and other Notices,”
Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xvii. 1876,
hoe

ae (Rey. T. R. R.).— The Sessile-eyed Crus-
tacea of Devon,” Trans. Devonshire Assoc. Advance-
ment of Sci., Lit., & Art, 1874.

SrepBinc (Rey. T. R. R.).— Sessile-eyed Crustacea
of Devonshire, a Supplementary List,” Trans. Devon,
Assoc. Advance. of Sci., Lit., & Art, 1879.

STEBBING (Rev. T. R. R.).—“Sessile-eyed Crustacea,”
Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 6, vol. viii. 1891, p. 324,

STeBBING (Rey. T. R. R.).—‘COn the Isopod Genus

326 Canon A. M. Norman on

Leptochelia,’ Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 6, vol. xix.
1896, p. 156.

(127) Stevenson (D.).—‘ Notice of the Ravages of Lim-
noria terebrans in Creosoted Timber,” Proc. Roy.
Soc. Edinb. vol. iv. 1862.

(128) Srimpson (W.).—‘ Marine Invertebrates of Grand
Manan.’ 1853.

(129) Srossicu (M.).— Prospetto della Fauna del Mare
Adriatico: III, Crustacea,” Bollettino Trieste, vol. vi.
1881.

(130) Sruxpere (A.).—“Faunan pi och kring Novaja
Semlja,” ‘Vega’ Exped. Vetenskap. Arbeten, 1886.

(131) Syz (C. G.).—‘ Beitriige zur Anatomie und Histologie
von Jera marina.’ Kiel, 1887.

(132) 'THomson (C. WyVILLE).—‘ The Depths of the Sea.’
1873.

WALKER (A. O.}.—See Happon.

(133) Wa.ker (A. O.).—“ New Species of Edriophthalma
from the Irish Sea,” Journ. Linn. Soe., Zool. vol. xxvi.
1897, p. 226.

(134) Waker (A. O.).—“ Malacostraca from the West Coast
of Ireland,” Trans. Liverpool Biol. Soc. vol. xii. 1898,
paid:

(185) WALKER (A.O.) and Hornett (J.).—“ Report Schizo-
poda, Cumacea, Isopoda, and Amphipoda of the
Channel Isles,” Journ. Marine Zool. & Microsc.
vol. ii. 1896, p. 49.

(136) Wuite (A.).—‘ Popular History of British Crustacea.’
1857.

In the following Reports will be found the “ Stations” &e.
referred to under Had. and Distrib. :—

1. “ Preliminary Report of the Scientific Exploration of the
Deep Sea in H.M. Surveying-Vessel ‘ Porcupine’
during the Summer of 1869,” Proc. Roy. Soc. no. 121
(1870).

2. “Report of Deep-Sea Researches, July, August, and
September 1870, in H.M. Surveying-Ship ‘ Porcu-
pine,’”’ Proc. Roy. Soc. no. 125 (1870).

3. “The ‘ Valorous’ Expedition: Reports of Dr. Gwyn
Jeffreys and Dr. Carpenter,” Proc. Roy. Soc. vol. xxv.
no. 173 (1876).

British Isopoda Chelifera. 327

ISOPODA CHELIFERA.
Fam. I. Apseudide.
Genus 1. ApseuDES, Leach.

1, Apseudes talpa (Montagu).

1866. Apseudes talpa, Bate & Westwood, (1) vol. ii. p. 148.

1880. Apseudes talpa, G. O. Sars, (101) p. 10.

1886, Apseudes talpa, Norman & Stebbing, (86) p. 81.

1886. Apseudes talpa, G. O. Sars, (103) p. 267, pls. i, ii.

Hab, Guernsey, and among stones, the Fleet, Weymouth
(A. M. N.). Tidemark, Jersey (Sinel & Hornell, 135).
Among roots of Laminaria saccharina in 7 fath., near the
Tan Buoy, Cumbrae, N.B. (D. Robertson, 91). Montagu’s
specimen was taken at Salcombe; and Barlee procured it at
Plymouth.

Distrib. Off Capri, Bay of Naples (A. MW. N.); Sardinian
coast (Prof. Emery) ; Adriatic (Heller as “ Rhea Latreillii”) ;
Mus. Nor., Messina (G. O. Sars). The species recorded
under this name by Meinert from Denmark was subsequently
found by him to be A. spinosus.

2. Apseudes Latreillit (Milne-Edwards).

1866. Apseudes Latreillii, Bate & Westwood, (1) vol. ii. p. 153.

1880. Apseudes Latreillii, G. O. Sars, (101) p. 14.

1886. Apseudes Latreillii, Norman & Stebbing, (86) P: 82, pl. xvi.

1886. Apseudes Latreilit, G. O. Sars, (103) p. 290, pl. v.

Hab. Guernsey; Jersey; mouth of the Yealm, Devon
(A. M. N.). Moray Firth (7. Hdward in Mus. Nor.).
Plymouth (Biol. Lab.: in Mus. Nor.). Salcombe, Devon
(Stebbing, 124).

Distrib. Coast of France (H. Milne-Edwards) ; Naples
and Golelta (G. O. Sars).

This is not Apseudes Latreillii, Claus ; but appears to be
the hea Latreillii of Milne-Kdwards, and certainly the
Apseudes Latreillii of Bate and Westw., of G. O. Sars, and of
Norman and Stebbing. Professor Claus, in the exhaustive
memoirs (16 and 17) on the morphology and physiology of
Apseudes, named the Adriatic species which he was investi-
gating Apscudes Latreillii, M.-K:dwards. Immediately after
the publication of his first memoir, Mr. Stebbing and myself
(86, p. 133) pointed out that Claus’s species was not that
understood by A. Latredllii, and we named this new Adriatic
form Apseudes hastifrons; and Boas (5), arriving shortly
after at the same conclusion, named the same Adriatic form

328 Canon A. M. Norman on

A. Clausi. In the same year Professor G. O. Sars pub-
lished his work on the Mediterranean Isopoda Chelifera (103),
in which full illustrations were given of a Mediterranean
Apseudes, which he had previously characterized (101) under
the name A. acutifrons, G. O. Sars. Professor Claus, re-
plying to the criticisms of Boas on this and other points in
his second memoir (17), argued that the Adriatic form he
had described was the true Rhea Latreillii of Milne-Edwards,
and that it was the same species as A. acutifrons, G. O. Sars,
which latter name must become a synonym of the former,
while the 4. Latreilliz of Bate and Westwood, of Norman
and Stebbing, and of Sars must be renamed as A. Sarsit,
Claus. It is necessary, therefore, to carefully examine the
form described by Milne-Edwards. Rhaa Latreilliit, H.
Milne-Edwards, was twice figured by its describer, originally
in Annales des Sci. Nat. vol. xiii. 1828, p. 292, pl. xiii. a,
figs. 1-8, and then again in ‘Régne Animal Cuvier. Les
Crustacés,’ par Milne-Edwards, pl. Ixi. fig. 2. A com-
parison of these figures brings out some important points.
In both figures the hand of the second gnathopod is repre-
sented as armed with four spines and the wrist with one:
in the ‘ Annales’ fig. 2 represents a conspicuous rostrum,
and the last segment of the pleon is of considerable length,
as long as the three preceding segments; in the larger figure
which we find in the ‘Régne Animal’ the rostrum has the
proportions of that of Spence Bate’s Latrezllii, and the large
pleon-segment only equals the length of two preceding seg-
ments. ‘Taking these facts together, and the general details
of the figures as well as the description, it would seem that
M.-Edwards’s species cannot be A. acutifrons, Sars. First, as
regards the rostrum, the description “ extrémité antérieure
se prolonge sur la forme d’un rostre pointu et légérement
recourbée,’’ applies closely to Latredllii*, but scarcely to
acutifrons: the last segment of pleon is described as “ re-
marquable par sa longueur”’ ; it is represented in the ‘Annales’
as equal in length to the three preceding segments, but in
Cuvier as equal to only two—in the former case resemblin

that of acutifrons, in the latter that of Latretllit, The
fossorial second gnathopods are both described and figured as
having four spines on the margin of the hand and one on
the carpus: now acutifrons has four on the hand and two
on the carpus, six in all on these two joints; while Latreillit
has three spines on the hand and two on the carpus, five in all.

* Henceforward I shall use the term “ Latreiilii” for Latreillii, Bate
and Westwood.

British Isopoda Chelifera. 329

Thus M.-Edwards’s description and figure of this limb
does not accord with that of either of the species we are con-
sidering : if acutifrons, then one of the wrist-spines is omitted ;
if Latrellit, then one of the spines which really belonged to
the wrist has been attributed to the hand. The last appears
to be the more likely supposition. But it may be that the
specimen was an abnormal one, or that A. Latreillii of
Milne-Edwards was another species, and neither A. Latreillit
of Bate and Westwood nor A. acutifrons. That it is not the
latter species I think we may be satisfied, for Milne-Edwards,
who describes the spine-formed epimeral process of the first
segment of the pereon, could not have entirely omitted, both
in his illustration and in his description, the spine-processes
at the anterior corners of the cephalon or those on the sides
of the segments of the pereon, which are conspicuous in
acutifrons but absent in Latredllit.

Some uncertainty must remain as to whether Milne-
Edwards’s species is the same as that of Bate and Westwood;
but it seems desirable to retain the name for the latter form
until this use shall have been proved to be wrong by any
future discovery of an Apseudes which more closely accords
with the figures of Milne-Edwards and found on the French
coast.

The second point for consideration is what name the
Adriatic species described by Claus as A. Latredlli’, and sub-
sequently identified by him with A. acutifrons, G. O. Sars,
ought to bear. Unquestionably the form is remarkably near
to that described by Sars, and to this Claus would assign it
as a local variety. It differs, however, in some important
details, chiefly in the armature of the hand of the second
gnathopods. ‘This in A. acuéifrons is furnished with four
long acute spines, but in the Adriatic form with six such
spines. I have examined forty specimens of the former,
taken by myself at Naples, and six of the latter, given to me
by Professor Claus ; every Neapolitan example had the four
spines and each of the Adriatic specimens six. Now the
spines which are in this position I have found in all the
Apseudide examined by me to afford valuable specific
characters, and the number in each species to be remarkably
constant. ‘There are other minute differences between the
two forms; thus, the outer ramus of the uropods in A. acuti-
frons is two-jointed, but in the Adriatic form three-jointed.
These two forms, however, agree in a very important
character, and differ from other species referred to the genus
Apseudes, inasmuch as the eye-lobes, which are usually

330 Canon A. M. Norman on

separable from the cephalon, are here firmly connected to and
form a portion of it. The divergence of structure is so
remarkable that it appears to me that A. acutifrons and
A. hastifrons ought to be generically separated from their
allies ; and I would propose for them the name Apseudopsis.
The synonymy will be :—

(1) Apseudopsis acutifrons (G. O. Sars).

1880. Apseudes acutifrons, G. O. Sars, (101) p. 15.
1886. Apseudes acuiifrons, G. O. Sars, (103) p. 295, pl. vi.

(2) Apseudopsis hastifrons (Norman & Stebbing).

1884. Apseudes Latreillit, Claus, (16) p. 316, pls. i., ii.
1886. Apseudes hastifrons, Norman & Stebbing, (86) p. 133.
1886, Apseudes Clausi, Boas, (15) p. 109.

1887. Apseudes Latreillii, Claus, (17) p. 139, pls. i—-vii.

3. Apseudes hibernicus, Walker.

1897. Apseudes hibernicus, A. O. Walker, (133) p. 228, pl. xvii. figs. 2—
2d, pl. xviii. figs. 2e & 2f, and (184) p. 164 (name only).
Through the kindness of Dr. Scharff I have had an oppor-
tunity of examining two specimens of this species which are
preserved in the Natural History Museum of Dublin and are
referred to and identified with the species by Mr. Walker.
These Apseudes appear to me to approach nearest to A. tenui-
manus, G. O. Sars (103, pl. ui.), but the antennal filaments
are more numerously jointed, the sides of the segments of
the pereon are without the lateral and posterior projections,
and the telson is shorter.
Hab. Between tide-marks on Church Island, Valentia,
Ireland, where it was taken by Mr. F. W. Gamble.

A, Apseudes spinosus (M. Sars).

1864, Apseudes talpa, Lilljeborg, (61) p. 9.

1858. Rhoéa spinosa, M. Sars, “ Oversigt over de i den Norske-arktiske
Region forekommende Krebsdyr,’ Christ. Vid. Selsk. Forhand.
1858, p. 30.

1869, Apseudes talpa, G. O. Sars, (96) p. 45.

1877. Apseudes talpa, Meinert, (70) vol. xi. p. 85 (fide Meinert, (71)

. 125).

1880. A pseudes spinosus, G. O. Sars, (101) p, 11.

1886. Apseudes spinosus, Norman & Stebbing, (103) p. 85, pl. xvii.
fie. 1.

1895. Apseudes spinosus, G. O. Sars, (105) p. 7, pls. i. & ii.

1896. Apseudes Kehleri, Bonnier, (8) p. 562, pl. xxxi. figs. 1 a—n,

Hab. ‘ Porcupine’ Expedition, 1869, off S.S.W. Ireland,
725 fath. (Stat. 36, lat. 48° 50’ N., long. 11° 9’ W.).

British Isopoda Chelifera. 331

Distrib. On the Norwegian coast I have dredged it at
Drobak, near Christiania, and very abundantly near Lervig
in the Hardanger Fiord in 180 fath.; and I am indebted to
Herr I. Sparre Schneider for examples from Tromsé. Vadso,
East Finmark (G. O. Sars) ; Bohuslin, Sweden (Lilljeborg)
Denmark (Meinert) ; Bay of Biscay (Bonnier).

?

5. Apseudes simplicirostris, Norman & Stebbing.

1886. Apseudes simplicirostris, Norman & Stebbing, (86) p. 91, pl. xviii.
fig. 1.

The type and only known specimen of this marked form
was taken by the ‘ Porcupine,’ 1869 (Stat. 22, lat. 56° 8’ N.,
long. 13° 34’ W.), about 100 miles directly south of Rockall,
in 1263 fath.

6. Apseudes grossemanus, Norman.

1870. Apseudes grossimanus, Norman, Proc. Royal Soe. no. 125, p. 157
(no description).

1881. Apseudes grossimanus, Norman, (84) p. 10 (name only),

1886. Apseudes grossimanus, Norman & Stebbing, (86) p. 93, pl. xix.

Hab. ‘ Porcupine,’ 1869, off S.W. Ireland, in 90 fath.
(Stat. 6, lat. 52° 25’ N., long. 11° 40’ W.).

Distrib. ‘ Porcupine,’ 1870, off coast of Portugal, in
740 fath. (Stat. 17 a, lat. 39° 3’ N., long. 9° 39’ W.) ; and
off Sidi Terri, North African coast. I also saw it dredged
in the Bay of Biscay when with the ‘ Travailleur’ Expe-
dition in 1880.

Genus 2. SpHyrapus, Norman & Stebbing, 1886.

7. Sphyrapus malleolus, Norman & Stebbing.

1886. Sphyrapus malleolus, Norman & Stebbing, (86) p.98, pl. xxii,
figs. 2, 3.
1896. Sphyrapus malleolus, Bonnier, (8) p. 565, pl. xxxi. fig. 1,

Hab. ‘ Porcupine,’ 1869, at two stations (Stat. 22 and 24)
to the south of Rockall, in 109 and 1263 fath.

Distrib. ‘Porcupine,’ 1870, Stat. 17a, lat. 39° 39’ W.,
long. 9° 39’ W., in 740 fath., off the coast of Portugal;
‘ Valorous,’ 1875, Stat. 11, lat. 57° 11’ N., long. 37° 41’ W.,
south of Cape Farewell, Greenland, in 1450 fath. From the
‘Caudan’ Expedition Bonnier records it from the Bay of
Biscay in 650 and 1410 metres.

332 Canon A. M. Norman on

8. Sphyrapus tudes, Norman & Stebbing.
1886. Sphyrapus tudes, Norman & Stebbing, (86) p. 99, pl. xxii. fig. 1.

Hab. ‘ Porcupine,’ 1869, Stat. 23 a, lat. 56° 13! N., long.
14° 18’ W., to the south of Rockall, in 420 fath.

Fam. Il. Tanaide.
Genus 1. Tanats, M.-Edwards.

9. Tanats Cavolint’, H. M.-Edwards.

1828. Tanais Cavolinii, H. Milne-Edwards in Audouin & Milne-
Edwards’s Précis d’Entomologie, vol. i. pl. xxix. fig. 1.

1840. Tanais Cavoliniit, H. Milne-Eewards, Hist. Nat. des Crust.
vol. iii. p. 14], pl. xxxi. fig. 6.

1842. Tanais tomentosus, Kroyer, (52) p. 183, and Voyage en Scan-

dinavie &c. (1849 ?) pl. xxvii. figs. 2a-g.

18438. Crossurus vittatus, Rathke, (89) p. 39, pl. i. figs. 1-7.

1866. Tanais vittatus, Bate & Westwood, (1) vol. ii. p. 125.

1875. Tanais vittatus, Macdonald, Trans. Linn. Soc. ser. 2, vol. i.

(Zoology) p. 67, pl. xv.

1881. Tanais vittatus, Harger, (87) p. 418, pl. xiii. figs. 81, 82.

1896, Tanais tomentosus, G. O. Sars, (105) p. 12, pl. v.

1897. Tanais Cavolinii, A. Dollfus, (25) p. 207.

1898, Tanais Cavolinii, A. Dollfus, (26) p. 35.

Hab, Tide-marks among weeds, Farland Point, Cumbrae,
N.B., and Tobermory in the Isle of Mull (4. JZ. N.); May
Island, Firth of Forth, and Dunbar (Henderson). Bate &
Westwood record it from Berwick (Dr. Johnston) and Pol-
perro, Cornwall (Laughrin) ; Jersey (Kehler) ; Netley
Hospital Pier and Alum Bay, Isle of Wight (Macdonald).

Distrib. It is found on the coast of Norway (Rathke dc.) ;

Oresund (Kréyer) ; West France (Chevreux); Mediterranean,
in many places (Chevreux, fide Dollfus) ; Azores (Th. Bar-
rots) ; Greenland (Hansen).

M. A. Dollfus has described several closely allied species
from the Mediterranean—one with the uropods three-jointed,
which is the species of which the above are synonyms, the
true 7. Cavolinii of Milne-Edwards ; and three others which
agree in having the uropods four-jointed and differ from each
other in slight particulars. It is probable that the form
which Prof. G. O. Sars has described in his memoir on the
Mediterranean Isopoda Chelifera (103, pl. ix. figs. 1-3) is
referable to 7. Chevreuat, A. Dollfus. It differs from
T. Cavolinti (=T. vittatus) in having the body more slender
aud the uropods four-jointed.

This species may hereafter be found on our southern
coasts, and it is possible that the “ very slender form ” which

British Isopoda Chelifera. 333

the late Mr. D. Robertson sent to Spence Bate, which that
author at first thought a distinct species and named in MS,

T. hirticaudatus, may really have been that now known as
T. Chevreuxi.

10. Tanais Dulongii (Audouin).
1866. Tanais Dulongii, Bate & Westwood, (1) vol. ii. p. 129.

This species is at present unknown to me, and I am
unable to throw any light upon it.

Bate and Westwood write :— The only individuals which
we have seen were sent to us from Polperro by Mr. Laughrin.”
In the “ Last Report of Dredging among the Shetland Isles”
I recorded this species from “St. Magnus Bay, rare.” I
have now searched in vain in my collection for the specimens,
and can neither find it or any other Shetland form which
could have been confounded with it. I know that many of
my ‘T'anaide were years ago dried up, and this form was
probably among them.

Genus 2. LeprocHeia, Dana.

11. Leptochelia Savignii (Kroyer).
1842-3. Tanais Savignii, Kroyer, (52) p. 168, pl. i. figs. 1-12, ¢.
1842-3. Tunais Edwardsit, Kroyer, (52) p. 174, pl. ii. figs. 18-19, 2.
1866. Leptocheha Edwardsti, Bate & Westwood, (1) vol. ii. p. 134, g.
1881. Leptochelia alyicola, Harger, (87) p. 423 (meum exemplum illi

transmissum, nec Americz exempla).

1881. Paratanais Savigniz, Delage, (20) p. 134, pl. xi. figs. 1-8.
1880. Leptochelia Savignii, G. O. Sars, (101) p. 25.
1886. Leptochelia Savignit, G. O. Sars, (103) p. 326, pl. ix. figs. 4-8.
1898. Leptochelia Savignit, A. Dollfus, (26) p. 41 and woodcuts.

Hab. The specimens described by Bate and Westwood were
found by me among Zostera between tide-marks in Belgrave
Bay, Guernsey. Since the publication of that work it has
been recorded from Sark (Kehler) and Jersey (Sinel and
Flornell).

Distrib. | have procured it at Naples. Gourret records it
from Marseilles; Sars from Trieste, Spezia, Messina, and
Syracuse ; and Chevreux and Dollfus also from many places
in the Mediterranean, The former of these has proved its
range on the Atlantic coast from Brittany to Senegal.
Azores (Th. Barrois). Kréyer’s type specimens were from

Madeira.

334 Canon A. M. Norman on

12. Leptochelia dubia (Kroyer).

1842-3. Tanais dubius, Kroyer, (52) p. 178,
1878. Paratanais algicola, Harger, (3! Bp ay,
1879. Paratanais algicola, Harger, (3 Jb . 162
1870. Tanais Savignit, Dohrn, (21) p. 2 3, pls. x , Xii. figs. 6-19.

1881 (?). Leptochelia algicola, Harger, (37 p- 121, Me xii. ‘fig. 3, pl. xili.

figs, 83-86.

1880. Leptochelia dubia, G. O. Sars, (101) p. 26.

1886. Leptochelia dubia, G. O. Sars, (103) p. 317, pls. x., xi.

1898. Leptochelia algicola, A. Dollfus, (26) p. 44 and woodcuts.

Hab. Jersey; Birterbuy Bay, Ireland, 1874; Falmouth
Harbour, 1884 (A. M. N.); Valentia, Ireland, 14 fath., mud
(A. O. Walker).

Distrib. Mediterranean (Dohrn, Sars); on the Atlantic
coast it has been procured by Chevreux (fide Dollfus) from
Brittany to Senegal and Teneriffe. Harger has found it on
the N.E. coast of America. Kréyer’s types were from
Brazil, and Dollfus has rejected his name on account chiefly
of the distance of that locality ; but the range of the species
is known to be very extensive, and until the Brazilian
form is proved to be something different it is surely preferable
to retain Kroéyer’s name.

pl. ii. figs. 20-22
i.

Genus 3. ALAOTANAIS, Norman & Stebbing.

13. Alaotanais serratispinosus, Norman & Stebbing.
1886. Alaotanais serratospinosus, Norman & Stebbing, (86) p. 113,
pl. xxiii. fig. 2.

Hab. ‘ Porcupine,’ 1869, dredged in two places between
Ireland and Rockall (Stats, 19 and 30), in 1360 and
1380 fath.

Distrib. ‘Valorous, 1875, Stat. 15, lat. 56° 11’ N., long.
37° 41’ W., at the depth of 1450 fath.

14. Alaotanais levispinosus, Norman & Stebbing.

1886. Aluotanais levispinosus, Norman & Stebbing, (86) p. 114,

pl. xxiv. fig. 11.

Hab. The type and only known specimen was dredged by
the ‘ Porcupine,’ 1869, off Valentia, S. W. Ireland, in 370 fath.
(Stat. 1).

Genus 4. PARATANAIS, Dana.
15. Paratanais Batei, G. O. Sars.

1855. Tanais Savignii, Gosse, Manual Marine Zoology, vol. i. p. 137
(not 7. Savigni, Kroyer),

~

British Isopoda Chelifera. 335

1866. Paratanais forcipatus, Bate & Westwood, (1) vol. ii. p. 138 (not
Tanais forcipatus, Lilljeborg).
1880. Paratanais Batet, G. O. Sars, (101) p. 32.

1886. Paratanais Batei, G. O. Sars, (103) p. 338, pl. xiv. figs. 1-3.

1896. Paratanais Batei, G. O. Sars, (105) p. 16, pl. vii.

Hab. Falmouth Harbour, 1884, Plymouth, 1889 (A. JZ. N.),
It has been recorded from Sark (Kehler) ; tide-marks, Jersey
(Sinel and Hornell) ; Cumbrae, Firth of Clyde (D. Robertson) ;
Arran, N. B.; Loch Fyne and the Firth of Forth (7. Scott).
Bate and Westwood gave Banff (7. Edward).

Distrib. Spezia in the Mediterranean, in 6-10 fath. (G. O.
Sars) ; Saint-Jean-de-Luz, S.W. France (Dollfus) ; several
places in West Norway, at roots of Laminaria (G. O. Sars).

Genus 5. LeproGNnatuia, G. O. Sars.

16. Leptognathia longiremis (Lilljeborg).

1864. Tanais longiremis, Lilljeborg, (61) p. 19.

1876. Tanais islandicus, G. O. Sars, (99) p. 346.

1880. Leptognathia longiremis, G. O. Sars, (101) p. 41.

1885. Leptognathia longiremis, G. O. Sars, (104) p. 79, pl. vii.

fies. 17-28.

1896. Leptognathia longiremis, G. O. Sars, (105) p. 27, pl. xii.

1898. Leptognathia longiremis, T. Scott, (116) p. 220.

Hab. This species has been taken by Mr. Thomas Scott on
both sides of Scotland—on the west in Loch Fyne, on the east
in the Moray Firth and Firth of Forth.

Distrib. In Norway I have dredged it in the Hardanger
Fiord, off Lervig, in 150-180 fath. ; and in Kast Finmark in
110-125 fath. in the Varanger Fiord, and in Klosterelv Fiord
inshallow water. Other localities are :—off Reykjavik, Ice-
land (G. O. Sars), Denmark (JJecnert), Greenland (Hansen).

Hansen (31) describes and figures a Greenland Lepto-
gnathia which he considers to be L. longiremis of Lilljeborg,
but doubtfully refers to it the L. longiremis of Sars. The
Greenland form has the hand of the first gnathopod less
robust and without the characteristic serration of the outer
margin of the finger, and the uropods three-jointed, the first
joint markedly longer than the rest of the limb, the terminal
joint minute.

17. Leptognathia Lilljeborgi, Stebbing.

1891. Leptognathia Lilljeborgi, Stebbing, (125) p. 528, pl. xvi.
1898. Leptognathia Lilljeborgi, T. Scott, (116) p. 219.

Hab. The type specimens were found by Mr. Stebbing in

336 Canon A. M. Norman on

the sands at Lee and Woolacombe, North Devon. Mr. T,
Scott has met with it in several places in the Firth of Forth.

Mr. Scott writes of this species :—‘‘ Leptognathia Lillje-
borgi appears to be somewhat out of place among the species
of that genus described by Sars; these all have the ‘ supe-
rior antennz in the female distinctly 4-articulated,’ whereas
in this one the fourth joint is described as ‘ quite rudimentary.’
In the specimens from the Firth of Forth I have been unable
to satisfactorily make out a fourth joint; in one or two in-
stances, when there was the appearance of a fourth joint,
examination with a ‘higher’ objective showed that the
appearance was produced by the approximation of the bases
of the subterminal seta. For this reason I was inclined at
first to consider the species as a member of the genus T'yphlo-
tanais, the females of which have the superior antenne
3-articulate ; but as the general structure of the antenne in
the male and female, together with the form of the chele, do
not fit in well with either genus, it is perhaps better to leave
this Isopod where it is at present. In the female the first
joint of the superior antenne is long, but the other joints are
short, and the second appears to be hinged to the first joint,
for in some of my specimens the short end-joints bend over
at nearly right angles to the first, as if the antenne were
being used as a grasping-organ.”’

I have written to Mr. Stebbing to ask his present views as
to this species. With regard to the antenne he writes :—
“In the upper antenne the little fourth joint about which
Scott is doubtful is quite*distinct under a quarter-of-an-inch
power. It is a stumpy little articulus, not a triangle such as
could be represented by the meeting of two setules.” As
compared with L. longiremis “the differences are consider-
able. ‘The upper antenne, as Scott has noticed, are strikingly
unlike. The thumb of the first gnathopods and the tubercu-
lation of the fingers do not at all agree, and the last pereeopods
are also rather strikingly unlike. As to the uropods you will
notice that in my species the second joint of the inner ramus
is longer than the first, and the reverse in Sars’s figure. The
apical part of the last pleon-segment is a little differently
shaped in the two species, and in L. longicornis there is a
denticle on each side of which [I find not the slightest trace
in L. Lilljeborg:. The latter species in the female appears to
be much smaller than in the former. I incline to agree with
Scott that it looks very like a linking species between
Typhlotanais and Leptognathia.” (Stebbing, in Litt.)

British Isopoda Chelifera. 337

18. Leptognathia brevimana (Lilljeborg).

1864. Tanais brevimanus, Lilljeborg, (61) p. 22.

1880. Leptognathia brevimana, G. O. Sars, (101) p. 42.

1886. Leptognathia brevimana, G. O. Sars, (103) p. 350, pl. xv. figs. 7-13.

1896. Leptognathia brevimana, G. O. Sars, (105) p. 29, pl. xiii. fig. 3.

1898. Leptognathia brevimana, T. Scott, (116) p. 220.

Hab. Off Valentia, Ireland, 1870 (A. M. N.); Firth of
Forth (2. Scott) ; Moray Firth (7. Scott and F. G. Pearcey).

Distrib. Sars says that it occurs all along the coast of
Norway from Christiania Fiord to Vads6. In the Mediter-
ranean he procured it at Messina. Bohuslin, Sweden (Lid-
jeborg) ; coast of Denmark (Meznert) ; Brittany (Chevreua,
fide Dollfus).

19. Leptognathia rigida (Bate & Westwood).

1866. Paratanais rigidus, Bate & Westwood, (1) vol. ii. p. 141.

1880. Leptognathia rigida, G. O. Sars, (101) p. 45.

Hab. The type specimen described by Bate and Westwood
was dredged at the roots of Laminaria saccharina, near
Cumbrae in the Firth of Clyde, by the late Mr. D. Robertson,
in 7-8 fath. St. Magnus Bay, Shetland, 1867 (A. Jf N.):
so recorded (83); but I no longer have the specimen, and
thus cannot again determine it.

20. Leptognathia breviremis (Lilljeborg).
1864. Tanais breviremis, Lilljeborg, (6) p. 21.
1880. Leptognathia breviremis, G. O. Sars, (101) p. 42.
1896. Leptognathia breviremis, G. O. Sars, (105) p. 28, pl. xiii. fig. 1.
Hab. This species was found by me in Plymouth Harbour
in 1889. Loch Fyne, Firth of Forth, and Moray Firth
(7. Scott).
Distrib. Bohuslin, Sweden (Lilljeborg) ; Kattegat (Mei-
nert). In Christiania Fiord in 20-60 fath., and in several
laces in south and west of Norway, as far north as Kvalé

on the Nordland coast (G. O. Sars).

Genus 6, Tanaopsis, G. O. Sars.

21. Tanaopsis laticaudata, G. O. Sars.

1880, Leptognathia laticaudata, G. O. Sars, (101) p. 43.
1886. Leptognathia laticaudata, G. O. Sars, (108) p. 353, pl. xv.
figs. 14-17.
1896. Tanaopsis laticaudata, G. O. Sars, (105) p. 32, pl. xiv. fig. 1.
Hab. | took this species in some abundance in Birterbuy
Bay, West Ireland, in 1874, and subsequently near Cumbrae

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iii. 25

338 Canon A. M. Norman on

in the Firth of Clyde, where also it has been found by
Mr. D. Robertson. Gair Loch in Loch Fyne, Firth of Forth,
and Moray Firth (7. Scott).

Distrib. Naples and Messina, and in a few places on the
west of Norway in 6-20 fath. (@. O. Sars).

Genus 7. Stronay.ura, G. O. Sars.

22. Strongylura arctophylaz, Norman & Stebbing.

1886. Strongylura arctophylax, Norman & Stebbing, (86) p. 116, pl. xxiv.
fig. 3.

Hab. The type and only known specimen was procured _in
the ‘Porcupine’ dredgings of 1869 at Stat. 30, lat. 56° 24’ N.,
long. 11° 49’ W. (that is, between Ireland and Rockall),
in 1880 fath.

Genus 8, PsEUDOTANAIS, G. O. Sars.

23. Pseudotanais forcipatus (Lilljeborg).

1864, Tanais forcipatus, Lilljeborg, (61) p. 16.

1880. Pseudotanais forcipatus, G. O, Sars, (101) p. 46.

1896. Pseudotanais forcipatus, G. O. Sars, (105) p. 40, pl. xvii. fig. 1.

Hab. Tarbert Bank in Loch Fyne; Guillam Bank in
Moray Firth (7. Scott); Smith Bank, Moray Firth (/. G.
Pearcey, fide Scott).

Distrib. Klosterelv Fiord, East Finmark, which is close
upon the frontiers of Russia (A. 4/7. N.). Sars has found it
“along the whole Norwegian coast, as far north as Kvalé.”
Bohuslin, Sweden (Lilljeborg) ; Oresund, Denmark (Mer-
nert) .

‘Lhis is not Paratanais forcipatus, Bate and Westwood, for
which see under Paratanais Batei, G. O. Sars.

IT add a list of North-Atlantic and Arctic Chelifera, which
may prove useful to students, as supplying them with informa-
tion respecting our present knowledge of the northern species
of these Crustacea, and references where descriptions of them
may be found,

Isopoda Chelifera of North Atlantic and Arctic Oceans
not known in British Seas.

Apseudes uncidigitatus, Norman & Stebbing (86).—Mediterranean.
obtusifrons, Nor. & Stebb. (86)—Near Gibraltar.

British Isopoda Chelifera. 339

Apseudes echinatus, G. O. Sars (101, 103),= A. lunarifrons, Nor. &
Stebb. (86).— Mediterranean,

— gracilis, Nor. & Stebb. (86).—North Atlantic and Davis
Strait.

—— tenuvimanus, G. O. Sars (101, 103).— Mediterranean.

robustus, G. O, Sars (101, 103),—Mediterranean.

Apseudopsis acutifrons, G. O. Sars (101, 103).—Mediterranean.

hastifrons, Nor. & Stebb. (86, p. 133),= <A. Latreillai, Claus

(16, 17), =A. Claus, Boas (5).—Adriatic.

Purapseudes latifrons (Grube*), G. O. Sars (101, 103),—Mediter-
ranean and Adriatic.

Sphyrapus anomalus, G. O. Sars (96, 101, 105), Nor. & Stebb. (86).
—Norway and between Iceland and Jan Mayen; Kara Sea
(Hansen, 31).

serratus, G.O. Sars (101, 104).—Between Iceland and Norway
and near Spitsbergen,

Tanais Grimaldi, A. Dollfus (25).—Azores.

Chevreuxi, A. Dollfus (26)=?7. Cavolinii, G. O. Sars (101,
103), nee 7. Cavoliniit, M.-Edw.—Mediterranean and Adri-
atic (Heller).

testudinicola, A. Dollfus (26).— Mediterranean.

Heterotanais algiricus, A. Dollfus (26).—Mediterranean.

provincialis, A. Dollfus (26).— Mediterranean.

—— Orstedii (Kréyer) (52 +),= 7. curculio, Kriyer, ¢ (52),= 7. bal-
ticus, Fr. Muller, 9, and 7. rhynchites, Fr. Muller, ¢ $.—
Greifswalde, Prussia; Norway (G@. O. Sars, 101, 105) ; Baltic
and Sweden (Lilljeborg, 61); Kiel (Blanc) §.

anomalus, G.O. Sars (101, 103).—It was assigned as a second
form of the male of Zanais dubius by Dohrn (21).—Medi-
terranean.

limicola (Harger),=Leptochelia limicola, Harger (35, 37).—
N.E. America and Greenland (Hansen, 31).

Leptochelia neapolitana, G. O. Sars (101, 103).—Mediterranean.
rapax, Harger (36, 37).—N.E. America.

—— filum (Stimpson, 128), Harger (86, 37).—N.E. America.
corsica, A. Dollfus (26).—Mediterranean.

* Grube (A. E.), ‘Die Insel Lussin und ihre Meeresfauna,’ 1864,
p. 75. : hati : ee

+ Figured by Kroyer, inGaimard, Voyage en Scandinavie &c. pl. xxxi.
fir. 3, 9, pl. xxx. fig. 4 (7. curculio), 3.

¢ Fr. Miller, Archiv fiir Naturges., Jahr. 18, Bd. i. pp. 88, 89, pl. iv.

§ Blane (H.), “ Contributions a l'Hist. nat. des Asellotes Hétéropodes:
Observations faites sur la Tanais Orstedii,” Recueil Zoologique Suisse,
vol. i. pt. 2 (1884).

20"

340 On British Isopoda Chelifera.

Aiaotanais hastiger, Nor. & Stebb. (86).—Entrance to Davis Strait.
Paratanais atlanticus, A. Dollfus (25),—Azores.

Typhlotanais tenuimanus (Lilljeborg) (61), G. O. Sars (101, 105).—
Norway.

—— aquiremis (Lilljeborg) (61), G. O. Sars (101, 105),= Tanais
depressus, G. O. Sars (96).—Sweden (Lilljeborg); Norway
(Lilljeborg and Sars).

brevicornis (Lilljeborg) (61), G. O. Sars (101, 105).—Norway
(Lilljeborg and Sars) ; Denmark ( Meinert, 71).

—— finmarchicus, G, O. Sars (101, 105).—East Finmark.

— assimilis, G. O. Sars (101, 105).—Norway.

—— tenuicornis, G. O. Sars (101, 105).—Norway.

—— mucrocheles, G. O. Sars (101, 105).—Norway.

— cornutus, G. O. Sars (100, 101, 104, 105).—Between Beeren
Island and Finmark and Norway.

—— penicillatus, G. O. Sars (101, 105).—Norway.

—— messinensis, G. O. Sars (101, 105).—Mediterranean.
—— spiniventris, A. Dollfus (25).—Azores.

— Richardi, A. Dollfus (25).—Azores.

longimanus, A. Dollfus (25).—Azores,

Leptognathia filiformis (Lilljeborg) (61).—Sweden (G. O. Sars, 101,
105); Norway (Memert, 71); Denmark.
— mancea, G. O. Sars (101, 105).—Norway.
gracilis (Kroyer) (52), figured ‘ Voyage en Scandinavie &c.’
pl. xxxi. fig. 4.—Spitsbergen and Norway (J. Hansen, 31);
Kara Sea.

graciloides (Lilljeborg) (61).—Sweden.

ceca (Harger) (35, 36, 37).—N.E. America.
crassimana, A. Dollfus (26).—Brittany.

Pseudotanais macrocheles, G. O. Sars (101, 105).—Norway.
Lilijeborgii, G. O. Sars (101, 105).—Finmark,

— mediterraneus, G. O. Sars (101, 105),—Mediterranean.
—— affinis, Hansen (71).—Kara Sea.

crassicornis, Hansen (71).—Kara Sea.

Cryptocope abbreviata, G. O. Sars (94, 101, 105).—Norway.

voringu, G. O. Sars (94, 101, 104).—To the west of Norway
in the ocean.

arctica, Hansen (31, 32).—Kara Sea and Greenland.
Haplocope angusta, G. O. Sars (101, 105).—Norway.
2 abyssorum, A. Dollfus (25),—Azores.

On the Harvest-Mice of the Palearctic Region. 341

Strongylura cylindrica, G. O. Sars (101, 105).—Norway.

Anarthura simplex, G. O. Sars (101, 105).—Norway, West France
(A. Dollfus, 26).

Mesotanais dubius, A. Dollfus (25).— Azores.

Neotanais Edwardsi, A. Dollfus (27).—Bay of Biscay.

Tanaella ungucillata, Nor. & Stebb. (86).—Lat. 49° 7' N., long.
10° 57’ W., which is a little south of the British Area as
defined by me.

XLVII.—WNote on the Harvest-Mice of the Palearctic Region.
By G. E. H. BArrerr-HAmItron.

Very little is known of the variations in colour, size, or
proportions of the harvest-mice of different parts of the
Palearctic Region. It could, however, hardly be doubted
that some such variations exist in an animal which is distri-
buted over so wide an extent of country, occurring as it
does from Great Britain to the coast of China. Accordingly
we find that specimens in the British Museum collection from
North-western Fokien, Western Hungary, and England are
readily distinguishable from each other, and it is plain that
each of these series represents a distinct local race or sub-
species.

As regards nomenclature, the harvest-mouse was first
described by Pallas, who, in 1779, gave to it the name of
Mus minutus, but did not localize his type. As, however, he
alludes to Siberian specimens as differing from those of
which he writes under the heading of M. minutus, it seems
clear that this name must be used for the harvest-mice of
Continental Europe, and that all other names given to
European harvest-mice (except, as shown below, that of
M. messorius for the harvest-mouse of Great Britain) must
rank as synonyms of it until it can be shown that more than
one form of harvest-mouse exists in Continental Europe.

The name messorius of Kerr must stand for the British
form, while M. pygmeus of Milne-Edwards, from Eastern
Asia, is another subspecies. Lastly, I propose the name of
ussuricus for the Northern Siberian form, of which the
British Museum possesses a specimen from Ussuri in the
Coast Province of Kastern Siberia (no. 91. 6, 29. 1).

The following are the forms which may at present be
distinguished. ‘They may be conveniently regarded as sub-
species of Mus minutus.

342 Mr. G. E. H. Barrett-Hainilton on the

1. Mus minutus messorius *.
Mus messorius, Kerr, Animal Kingdom, p. 230 (1792).

Type locality. Hampshire, England.

Summer pelage orange-red above, brightest on the rump
and lighter on the sides, and always marked off by a clear
line of demarcation from the pure white of the under surface.
Winter pelage not so bright as that of summer. Colour of
underside and line of demarcation as in summer.

The following are the maximum, mean, and minimum
dimensions of fifteen males and nine females, all of which
were measured in the flesh, and which form part either of my
own or of the British Museum collection :—

Head and
body. Tail. Hind foot. Ear.
mm. mm. mm. mm.
Maximum.. 65 67 15 9
15 males jes serge es 591 57'1 14-2 81
Minimum .. 56 50 12 7
Maximum... 60 57 14°5 95
9 als Mean...... 56'8 53 13:9 8:3
Minimum.. 51 49 13 fh
It will be noted that the length of the tail is usually,
but by no means always, less than that of the head and

body.

Of the young, it is stated by Mr. J. H. Harting, from
observations on individuals born and kept in captivity
(‘Zoologist,’ Nov. 1895, pp. 420, 421), “that even when
almost as large as the old ones they were not nearly so red.
Indeed, until the beginning of December they resembled a
house-mouse in colour. About that time, however, they
began to change visibly, the hinder quarters from the root of
the tail upwards becoming rufous before any other portion of
the body.” A family of young harvest-mice set up in the
Tring Museum are, however, as bright as their parents in the
same case.

French specimens seem to agree in colour with those of
England, judging by the descriptions and figures of French

* This form, though not the typical one, is here put first because the
information at my disposal relating to it is fuller than in the case of
M. minutus, so that instead of comparing M. messorius with M. minutus,
as I should strictly do, I am forced to reverse the comparison.

As shown by Mr. Oldfield Thomas (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5) iv.
p. 347, 1879), Kerr’s use of the name messorius for the harvest-mouse of
England clearly antedates that of Shaw (Gen. Zool. vol. ii. pt. 1, p. 62,
1801), to whom the first use of the name is generally attributed in
books.

ieiiaciattidie aie zai

Dmattinitaedit

——

Harvest-Mice of the Palearctic Region. 343

writers (see Trouessart, ‘Les Petits Mammiféres de la
France,’ with a coloured plate of this species).

2. Mus minutus typicus.
Mus minutus, Pallas, Noy. Spec. pp. 96 & 345 (1779).

This name antedates all other names applied to European
harvest-mice, and of which I have given a list at the end of
this paper. ‘They are therefore synonyms of it as applied to
the whole of Europe. Should it be found, however, that
more than one subspecies of harvest-mouse exists in Europe,
this name must be restricted to that of the North, while the
other and later names must be applied to the various other
species according to the localities in which they occur.

Six examples from Western Hungary, collected in
August, 1893, are singularly unlike British specimens, as
they entirely lack the orange-red of the latter except on the
rump, and are instead of a light sepia-brown on the upper
surface, lighter on the sides, and shading to orange-red on
the rump. The under surface is, like that of the British
specimens, pure white, with a clearly marked line of demar-
cation separating the colours of the upper and lower surfaces.

The proportionate lengths of the feet and tail, so far as can
be ascertained from the dried skins, are similar to those of
M. messorius.

A specimen from Holstein (British Museum Collection,
no. 47. 4. 5. 2) appears to be intermediate in character
between those of Hungary and England, the whole of the
upper surface being rusty red; but the skin is an old one,
badly preserved and untrustworthy for comparison.

3. Mus minutus pygmeus.
Mus pygmeus, Milne-Edwards, Recherches Mamm. p. 291 & pl. xliii.
(1874).

Three specimens of this form from North-west Fokien
have recently been added to the British Museum collec-
tion through the kindness of the collector, Mr. J. de La
Touche. In the colour of the upperside these mice cannot be
distinguished from the Hungarian specimens, but the tail is
very much longer, the underside dirty white, and the line of
demarcation between the colours of the upper and under sides
not very clearly marked. ‘These specimens have only a
trace of the red rump of M. minutus. They were collected
at Kuatun, N.W. Fokien, in April 1898.

The dimensions, given in inches on two of the labels, and
converted into millimetres, are as follows :—

344 Mr. G. E. H. Barrett-Hamilton on the

Head and
body. Tail.
mm. mm.
6, 12th April, 1898. va<suek eats 55 76
(Unsexed), 27th April, 1898 ........ 58 61

showing that the length of the tail exceeds that of the body.

The dimensions of an adult female, one of Pere David's
specimens from Tibet, and now in the Paris Museum, were
found by Mr. Oldfield Thomas to be: head and body 56°5,
tail 57, hind foot 14, ear 7:2.

The subspecies was originally described by Milne- Edwards
from specimens collected by Pére David in the Province of
Sé-tchuan *, in Eastern Tibet.

4. Mus minutus ussuricus, subsp. n.

The type specimen was collected by Messrs. Dérries at
Ussuri, in the Coast Province of Eastern Siberia, and is
no. 91. 6. 29. 1 of the British Museum collection. In its
coloration it is far darker on the upper surface than Mus
minutus, and the red colour on the rump is far duller; as in
minutus, the dark colour of the upper surface becomes lighter
on the flanks, but, unlike mznutus, there is no distinct line of
demarcation and the white colour of the underside, instead of
being pure, is washed with dirty yellow. The specimen is
large and seems to about equal in size a house-mouse, Mus
musculus,

The dimensions of the dried skin are as follows :—

mm
Hond and body. Spare scakitens .amisk- 78
Tan) Anes aor oe ate, eetoete ee sic 62
A a bhatehtivoloynaaes ee eM aie Hine BING nto Ge 12

The cranial and dental characters are not distinctive from
those of other subspecies.

The description of Mus minutus flavus, as given by Kerr
(‘Animal Kingdom,’ p. 232, 1792), prevents me from iden-
tifying my new mouse with this form, which, according to
Kerr, ‘is elegantly yellowish coloured on the upper parts,
and pure white on the under parts of the body.” He adds
that it “Inhabits Siberiaa—This variety is exceedingly
beautiful.”

The subspecific identity of the mice to which the following
names were applied must for the present remain uncertain,

* At page 291 the province is called Sé-tchuan; under the plate it is
called Moupin.

Flarvest- Mice of the Palearctic Region. 345

until such time as specimens from the districts to which they
refer are available. There can be no doubt that they all have
reference to harvest-mice.

Mus campestris, Desmarest, Mamm., Suppl. p. 543 (1822)
[giving a name to the ‘ Mulot nain” of Geoffroy &
Cuvier ].

“ Mulot nain,” Geoffr. & Cuv. Mamm. xxxiii® & plate (Oct. 1821).
“Rat des Moissons,” op. cit. Ixiv? (Nov. 1830).
Mus pumilus, Geoftr. & Cuy. op. cit. Tab. Gén. et Méth. (1842).

France.

Mus minutus flavus, Kerr, Animal Kingd. p. 232 (1792).

‘‘ Inhabits Siberia ’’ (see above).

Mus soricinus, Hermann, Obs. Zool. i. p. 57 (1804).

Neighbourhood of Strasburg. Is figured by Shaw (Gen.
Zool. iv. 1, p. 133) with a very shrew-like appearance.

Mus pendulinus, Hermann, op. cit. p. 61 (1804).

Germany.

Mus parvulus, Hermann, op. evt. p. 62 (1804).

Strasburg, Germany.

Mus pratensis, Ockshay, Nov. Acta Leopold.-Carol., xv. 2,
p- 243 (1831).

Western Hungary. ‘The figure and description are those
of a harvest-mouse. This name antedates Mus arundinaceus
of Petenyi (vide infra).

Micromys agilis, Dehne, Hofléssnitz, p. 16 (1841),

Dresden, Germany.

Mus meridionalis, Costa, Ann. dell’ Accad. degl. Asp. Nat.
Nap. vol. ii. p. 33 (1844).

Naples, Italy. The description has been shown by
Dr. Forsyth Major (Atti Soc. Tosc. Sci. Nat. vol. ii. p. 129,
1884) to be based on a specimen of Mus minutus.

Mus arundinaceus (Petenyi), Chyzer, Rel. Pet. Termes-
Fuzetek N., p. 91 (1881).

Buda-Pesth and Western Hungary. The type has been
lost, but Mr. Oldfield Thomas has been informed, in a letter
from Dr. Julius Madardsz, that it was a harvest-mouse, a
conclusion to which I had already come in the ‘ Zoologist’
for May 1896, p 181.

346 South-Pacific Fishes of the Genus Callanthias.

XLVIII.—On the South-Pacific Fishes of the Genus
Callanthias. By G. A. BouLencer, F.R.S.

THE genus Callanthias was established by Lowe in 1839 for
a remarkable Perciform fish inhabiting the Mediterranean and
neighbouring parts of the Atlantic—C. peloritanus, Cocco.
A second species was discovered by Mr. Morton Allport off
the coast of Tasmania and described by Giinther in 1876
under the name of C. Allporté: one of the types is figured in
the first volume of the new ‘Catalogue of Fishes,’ pl. xv.,
and I can answer for the perfect accuracy of the figure, with
this restriction—that the tail-fin of the specimen is possibly
injured ; the absence of a filamentous prolongation of the outer
rays of the caudal is therefore a peculiarity which I shall
abstain from mentioning among its specific characters. A
third species, of which specimens were obtained near Juan
Fernandez by Dr. L. Plate, has been added quite recently by
Steindachner, under the name of C. Plated (‘ Fauna Chi-
lensis,’ Fische, p. 284, pl. xv.).

From the description and figure it is evident that C. Platet
differs from C. Allporti by the feebler dentition, the feebler
lower opercular spine, the much shorter dorsal and anal rays,
and the more slender caudal peduncle. In C. Allporti the
last dorsal spine measures # the length of the head and the
longest soft rays are fully as long as the head; the third
anal spine measures 3 the length of the head; the caudal
peduncle is as deep as long. In C. Platet the last spine is
little more than } the head, and the soft rays are not much
longer; the third anal spine is about 4} the head, and the
caudal peduncle is 14 as long as deep. ‘These characters
are certainly sufficient to justify the specific distinction of
the Tasmanian and Chilian fishes.

Almost simultaneously with Steindachner’s description
there appeared, in both 8vo and 4to editions, HE. R. Waite’s
Report on the Fishes collected off the coast of New South
Wales on H.M.C.S. ‘ Thetis’ (Sydney, 1898), in which is
figured, on plate il., under the name of Callanthias Allportt,
a fish which differs greatly from the true C. Allporti, and
seems to me to be identical with OC. Platet. Waite does not
describe the fish, only remarks :—‘Our specimens do not
wholly agree with the published descriptions of the species,
but critical comparisons are reserved for the more technical
treatise previously announced.” In view of this forthcoming
work | therefore wish to point out that the differences which
Mr. Waite appears to treat so lightly certainly indicate

On a new Theraphosid Spider from South America. 5417

specific diversity, and at the same time to draw attention to
the interesting probable fact of yet another Perciform fish
being common to the coasts of Eastern Australia and Chili,
like Gilbertia semicincta and Caprodon longimanus, which
were likewise obtained by both the ‘ Thetis’ and the Plate
expeditions.

At any rate, should, on direct comparison, the New South
Wales and Juan Fernandez specimens prove to be specifi-
cally distinct, which I doubt, these species would be more
nearly related to each other than to C. Allporti.

It is much to be desired that in future a closer comparison
be instituted between the fishes of the western and eastern
parts of the South Pacific than has hitherto been the case.

XLIX.—A new Stridulating Theraphosid Spider from South
America. By R. I. Pocock.

Up to the present time, with the exception of the Trinidad
Psalmopeus Cambridgii, the stridulating Theraphosid Spiders
have been recorded only from tropical Africa and the Oriental
Region. The species that I here record therefore is of
considerable interest, as being a genuine South-American
Theraphosid with a stridulating-organ lodged between the
coxe of the palp and of the first pair of legs. In position,
but not in structure, this organ resembles that of the tropical
African genera of Eumenophorine (Phoneyusa, Hystero-
erates, &c.). The organ, however, is much less specialized
than in these last and has not the same taxonomic importance,
being apparently only of generic value.

CITHAROSCELUS, gen. nov.

Belonging to Simon’s section Homceommatez of the sub-
- family Theraphosine (Aviculariine), and allied both to
Homaomma and Phrysxotrichus in size and spacing of the
eyes, differing from the latter in having the labium distally
covered with close-set spinules, and from both in possessing
a stridulating-organ lodged between the coxa of the palp and
that of the first leg. This organ consists of an irregular
cluster of about a dozen or more longer and shorter red,
pubescent, incrassate but apically pointed, nearly horizontal
bristles above the suture on the coxa of the first leg, and a
few similar but smaller bristles below the suture. On the
posterior side of the coxa of the palp there are about nine
similar bristles.

348 Ona new Theraphosid Spider from South America.

Citharoscelus Kochit, sp. n.
? Mygale rosea, Walck., C. Koch, Die Arachniden, ix. p. 59, fig. 728.

3 .—Colour. Carapace covered with a coating of silky
golden-red hairs; the long sete on the legs and abdomen foxy
red; ground-colour of legs olive-black, with two pale bands on
the femur, patella, and tibia, anda short median basal band on
protarsus ; tarsus of palp and of legs darker than the rest of
the appendage; coxe, sternum, and lower side of abdomen
velvety black.

Carapace longer than broad, its cephalic region compressed,
moderately high; its length less than patella and tibia of
fourth leg and less than those of second, a little greater than
protarsus of fourth ; its width equal to length of protarsus of
fourth and to patella, tibia, and tarsus of palp.

Legs 4,1, 2,3 in length; tibiae and protarsi of all the
legs spined, those of the posterior more strongly than those
of the anterior; tibial spurs of first leg like those of Home-
omma Stradlingi, Cambr., but with the outer spur shorter
and much less strongly curved; protarsus of this leg only
slightly arched at the base. Bulb of palpus narrowly
piriform, passing without constriction into the apical spine,
which distally is lightly curved and sinuous, and is strength-
ened externally by a strong spiral crest or keel.

?.—Resembling the male, but with much shorter legs ;
carapace as long as patella and tibia of first, longer than
those of fourth; legs 4, 1, 2, 3 in length.

Measurements in millimetres.— 8. Yotal length £0; length
of carapace 20, width 18; length of first leg 63, of second 59,
of third 56, of fourth 68; patella and tibia of first 23, of
fourth 22.

?. Total length 42; length of carapace 20°5, width 18°5;
length of first leg 54, of second 49, of third 46, of fourth 56.

Loe. Chili, Valparaiso.

The type and other specimens of this species, together with
examples of the equally large Theraphosid Paraphysa mant-
cata, Sim., were presented to the Museum by Col. Hayes
Sadler, late H.B.M. Consul at Valparaiso. Colonel Sadler
kindly furnished me with the following account of their
habits :—‘* With the exception of one specimen [of Paraphysa
manicata], which was obtained 20 miles 8. of Santiago, these
spiders were collected in the grounds at the back of the Hotel
Vina del Mar, 6 miles from Valparaiso, in January and
February. ‘They live in holes in the ground, which consists
of decomposed granite, or in crevices in the rock itself, the
site chosen being a steep dry slope.”

Paraphysa manicata has not ere this been recorded with

Miscellaneous. 549

certainty from a definite locality *, Simon’s example being
quoted merely as South American. oe 8

It appears to me highly probable that this spider—Cttha-
roscelus Kochii—is specifically identical with that which
Koch described and figured as Mygale rosea, Walck.; but
Mygale rosea of Walckenaer is, according to Simon, quite
another species, and has been made the type of the genus
Phryzotrichus.

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.

February 1st, 1899.—W. Whitaker, B.A., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.

The following communication was read :—

‘On Radiolaria in Chert from Chypon’s Farm, Mullion
District (Cornwall). By Dr. G. J. Hinde, F.R.S., F.G.S.

This paper describes the discovery of a bed of chert on the
mainland, similar to that already described from Mullion Island.
It was found in 1877 by Mr. Howard Fox at Chypon’s Farm.
Although detached blocks had been noticed in the fields, the rock
had not been previously observed in situ. The chert is interbedded
with clay-slates, and it is a dark massive rock much traversed by
quartz-veins ; in some parts of it the radiolaria are preserved in an
unusually perfect condition, showing their latticed structure and
spines very distinctly. The radiolaria for the most part are casts
only, without any definite bounding-walls, their outlines being
indicated by the dark material of the groundmass, while the
interior of the test has been infilled with clear silica, sometimes the
eryptocrystalline variety, at others fibrous chalcedony. In the
forms showing the structural details, these alone have been replaced
by the opaque substance, and are thus clearly defined against the
clear silica infilling the test. Eleven species are described, of which
ten are new, while one has been previously recognized in the cherts
of New South Wales.

MISCELLANEOUS.
S.E. Union of Scientific Societies.

We are informed by the Hon. General Secretary that the date of
the next Congress of the above, which will be held at Rochester,
has had to be altered to May 25th, 26th, and 27th, to suit the
convenience of the local Society.

* In the ‘ Biol. Centr.-Americana,’ Arachnida Araneida, vol. ii. p. 23,
Mr. F. Cambridge erroneously states that these specimens were from Peru.

350 Miscellaneous.

Revision of Amphipoda.
By the Rey. Tuomas R. R. Srepsrye, M.A., F.RS.

In the Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. for March 1899, at p. 241, a new
genus was defined for the reception of Corophium excavatum,
Thomson, but, by inadvertence, the name of the genus was omitted.
It is Paracorophium. On p. 239, 1. 15, for Darwinii (Bate) should
be read vartegatus, Leach.

This opportunity may be taken for announcing some other
changes which I consider necessary in the nomenclature of the
Amphipoda. Microdeutopus chelifer, Haswell, I propose to call
Microdeutopus Haswelli, and to transfer his Microdeutopus australis
to the genus Lemboides; the Autonoe longidigitans of Bonnier to
the genus Lembos: Meroides Thompson, Walker, Mera crassipes,
Haswell, Mara dentifera, Haswell, Mera Chiltoni, G. M. Thomson,
Paranenia longimanus, Chilton, and Podoceropsis palmata, Stebbing
and Robertson, all to the genus Gammaropsis. Leptocheirus pilosus,
Della Valle, seems to be distinct from the species so-named by
Zaddach, and may be distinguished as Leptocheirus Dellavallei.
Biancolina algicola, Della Valle, appears to be identical with
Amphithoé cuniculus, and will become Liancolina cuniculus. Mara
Haswelli, G. M. Thomson, should, I think, be placed in Haswell’s
genus Wyvillea, a genus about which, however, more precise infor-
mation is desirable. Podocerus dentew, Czerniayski, may, as Jassa
dentex, include in its synonymy Podocerus Herdmani, Walker, and
Podocerus odontonyx, Sars. The Siphonecetes typicus described
by Della Valle does not suit well with Kroyer’s species, and deserves
the independent title of Siphonacetes Dellavallet.

Dates of Charles d’Orbigny’s ¢ Dictionnaire Universel @ Histoire
Naturelle,” 1839-1849. By C. Davies Surrsorn and T. 8. Parmer.

Careful collation of five copies of this ‘ Dictionnaire’ shows that with
the exception of volume i. there was only one composition—that is
to say, if we take p. 100, for instance, the last word in every copy of
every volume is identical. There wasare-composition of volume i., for
one of us has examined an original copy in the U.S. Nat. Museum which
differs in that the ‘‘ Discours” is paged in roman (i—cexl) and p. 100
terminates with “ qui est,”’ two words towards the end of the article
“ Acrodon.” The other four copies of vol. i. which have been
examined by us are themselves alike, but differ in that they have a
new printer, some changes in authors, and a slightly different. title-
page. It is quite possible that there were reprints of some of the
other volumes as they were exhausted, but there is nothing to
show, so far as our researches go, that any re-setting of the type
took place in any volume but volume i.

Of the five sets examined, that of the U.S. Nat. Museum is the
most valuable, as, with the exception of vol. ii., it is apparently an
original issue. It belonged to Professor 8. F. Baird. The Zoolo-
gical Society’s copy shows what are probable reissues of the first
five volumes,

1

i)

3

Miscellaneous.

“(Conoyugy *[qtg “MaseyT) OFRT “xt ‘WoT oUBy ‘oog ‘un ur poystqnd sem soded s,Ajor |}

“4stL JXoU UL QO UOSTRIAT] 99

‘961 AY SY G 808J0'T'L “FST

“(SPST

MOF LOII9 UB St BFRT) E[g ‘d

‘SPT ‘A [z] ‘aq ‘[o98 ‘00g
TIME YF §99G 8109jJO'T'L “SPST

“a (@] “aa “J098

'G6G ‘dy
‘epg ‘dy
"199 ‘d a»

‘llpoz "dy

‘o®
“ce

‘eT9 ‘d ‘gpa
‘00g TMA

‘SPST
“LP8I
“LPBL
‘OFST

998 JOE “OFST

[eed 278
‘Lue | crsT
‘Luee | PPT
pave) erat
‘uve | ZPeT

‘A [093 ‘00g Tog [wer] TPR]

—

‘AVIOYINV oy} YA “ounpoa
poyejdmoo Jo oyep penjow

“

“ce

“ce
“
“a
“
“
6“
“c
“cr
“c
“ce

TTTAL
spus gg ‘d

{4so mb

GPS

Sst

SF8I
LEST
LP8I
OFS I
9FRI
CP8L
SPPSI
PPsI
SPsl
EPsl

[FSI

ee @ |

“SUIT FON 'S'

a

I

‘d ‘L|spx9 oor ‘d

‘

S GPR IOF AoLto 8,tozuLd B oq 0} s}sec5ns uLoqroYS siyy, §

‘JXO} UL SYMVUIAT OOS * ‘LE *[OA JO aNsst [eULSIIO UW f
"T 308 yqia Apgovxe spuodsortoo ‘[oa oy} yeyy soyworput ‘
“MOTPONPOAJUT OY} JOU “L OUINTOA Jo 7x97 OY, x

.: GPST 4 6P8I a LOST sodqne | GFST
. 6FSI SPST ff TORT “VN | GEST
. GFT ef SFT . LOST | -ot onbsnaq | GFRT
6PR1 ‘ ZFS TOST xneredg | GFT
. 6PSI ‘ L¥8T T98T (96T ‘4 | GEST
: GBFRT OFS 3 T98T noi | GFRT
: GFT 3 OFSI 4 198 saqtinbop | BFRT
> 1981 ; CFS [981 8e[ | 6FRT
is 6FRI ; SPST “4 LOST (‘@ “a) | 6F8T
GFRT OPT a LOST | S°1qeiquies | BFRT
; GFT ‘ GFRT - 198 snwUre, | BERT
4 6FR1 PFST es [981 Seplo- | GFST
is GFRT iY LPSI if LOSI * Sn0s | [9QT
TATA “OPR(T YF OT U(T UTA ‘OV B(T. ITM ‘OT R(T
‘dL J spa oot | ‘a LJ spueootd| -ai] spue oor ‘d | an

‘OINMOWS Wy

"dat "g"Q

"009 "1007

‘Adoo aTeppooary,

CH ‘'N) Wa

“AIBIQUT [BIOUL)
(H‘N) ‘Na

TOA

302

Miscellaneous.

We learn from Bull. Soc. géol. France, vols. xi.—xiy., and series 2,
vols. i. &c., that 71 parts were issued between February 1840 and
November 1845, that 12 parts went to a volume, and other detailed

particulars.

These dates must be used cautiously, as they represent

the dates of presentation to the Society, and, though in most cases
it is unlikely, they may be several months after publication.

We give on p. 351 the collation of the several copies we have ex-
amined and the actual dates of issue of the completed volumes.

The following are the dates of presentation of the livraisons to the
Geological Society of France, which can be verified by a reference to

the ‘ Bulletin’ of the Society :—

1. 17 Feb. 1840. ; 19.
2, No record. | 20.
3. No record. 21.
4, 16 Mar. 22,
5. 6 Apr. 23.
6. 15 June. 24.)
Ԥ 25.
8. > 2 Nov. 26. ‘
9. { OT. |
10. No record. 28. |
11. 21 Dee. 29.
12. 8 Nov. 1841.* | 30.
13. 1 Feb. 31.
14. 5 Apr. 52.
15 roe 33.
16 8 Noy. 34.
17. 6 Dee. 35.
18, 24 Jan. 1842. | 36. )

7 Feb. 1842.
21 Mar.

4 Apr.

16 May.

20 June.

5 Dec.

2 Jan. 1843.
6 Feb.

6 May.

17 Apr.

1 May.

5 June.

37. |

38. +6 Nov. 1843.
39. |

40. }

4]. 4 Dec.

42, 8 Jan. 1844.
43. No record.
44, 19 Feb.

45. 4 Mar.

46. 15 Apr.

47. 6 May.

48, 20 May.
49, )

50.

51. a

59. 74 Nov

53. |

54. J

18 Nov.1844.
16 Dec.

‘> 6 Jan. 1845.

17 Feb.
7 Apr.
5 May.

2, 19 May.

17 Nov.

From which it will be seen that the parts came out monthly, and
there is no doubt that the Ist livraison appeared in December

1839 and the 71st Jivraison in October 1845.

This accords both

with the accounts of previous bibliographers, who usually ascribe
the work to 1839-1849, and with the receipt of the livraisons by
Thus, according to the data, each

the French Geological Society.

volume should have been completed in parts by the December of the
year, and issued as a whole in the January following. Up to
livraison 72, the end of vol. vi., this was undoubtedly the case, but
there our record ceases, and there is plenty of evidence to show
that the remaining 78 livraisons (there were 150 in all) came out in
We therefore urge the advisability of adhering
to the dates of the completed volumes rather than to any speculative
Sets dated 1861 are merely re-issues with new

less than four years.

date of livraisons.
titlepages.

* No doubt omitted in due course by publisher, and supplied later by

request.

Ani. & Mag, Nat. Hist. 5. f VAM ME.

H W Burrows Photo S.B.Bolas «Co. Collotype

‘4
’ Le
ool
a
yee
. eh
(evs
4
4
%
7 ,
i
-
i<
4 7 =
tw Po?
NE vA &
= fp Sal's =
°
~*~

Ann: & Mag. Nat. ltist. S. 7 VollIPlX

Lig. l
xo

: 2 . . “
H.W.Burrows, Photo 5.B.Bolas « Co.,Collotype

tertiary loraminirera trom honeo & Sumatra,

An. & Mag. Nat. Hist. §.7 Vol MM PLAT.

1 bad

J.Green del et hth

Mintex r x
LRANA LARUTENSIS. 2.RAPPIA PHANTASTICA
3.PHYLLOBATES PRATTI. 4.DENDROBATES OPISTHOMELAS

Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hest. 8.7 Vel Ml. PL XM.

J. Green del et lith Mintern Bros i
1.MICROHYLA LEUCOSTIGMA.2.BUFO GRACILIPES
ona A PICTURATA, 4.HYLA OCELLIPERA

THE ANNALS

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

[SEVENTH SERIES, ]

Nos 27. REAY 1890:

L.—On the Cretaceous Fish Plethodus. By A. Smita
Woopwarp, F.L.S., of the British Museum (Natural
History).

[Plates XIII. & XIV.]

In his well-known work on the ‘Geology and Fossils of
Sussex ’ (1850) Frederic Dixon briefly described and figured
some remarkable crushing-teeth or dental plates from the
Sussex Chalk, to which he gave the name of Plethodus. He
compared them with Ptychodus, and referred them to the
Cestraciont sharks. Numerous specimens were subsequently
discovered both in the Chalk and Cambridge Greensand, a few
also in the Gault of Folkestone ; and when I was occupied
with a general survey of the English Cretaceous fish-fauna
in 1887 I prepared several sections to demonstrate their
microscopical structure. It was proved that beneath the
thick dense layer of vertical tubules of dentine observed by
Dixon there was an equally thick base of true bone with
numerous typical bone-lacune. The problematical fossils
could not therefore be retained any longer among the Elasmo-
branchii. They were referred to some undetermined bony
fish ; and one small specimen in the Willett Collection in the
Brighton Museum was mentioned as displaying the Plethodus-
plate “so placed in the midst of a skull as to suggest its
connexion with the pharyngeal bones” *. During the last

* A, 8. Woodward, “A Synopsis of the Vertebrate Fossils of the
English Chalk,” Proc. Geol. Assoc, vol. x. (1888) p. 331.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iii. 26

354 Mr. A. S. Woodward on the

twelve years I have searched in vain among English Creta-
ceous fish-remains for further evidence on the subject. The
time seems therefore to have arrived for describing the scanty
fragments of Plethodus, so far as they are known, in the hope
that this or allied genera may soon be more satisfactorily
elucidated by some of the collections of Cretaceous fish-
remains which are now being made in other parts of the
world.

The type specimen of Plethodus expansus*, now in the
Willett Collection, Brighton Museum, is part of the side of
a large dental plate probably resembling the original of
Pl. XIII. fig. 1 in size and shape. The slightly sinuous but
generally convex grinding-surface does not exhibit any
punctations, and consists of a thin, yellowish, opaque layer
covering the thick agglomeration of parallel vertical tubes of
dentine, which form the main mass of the plate. There is a
base, presumably of bone, beneath this mass, but it seems to
be comparatively thin. The lateral border of the plate is
somewhat truncated, and it may have borne a few blunt
tubercles, but this is not quite certain.

The specimen thus briefly described was obtained from the
Middle Chalk of Malling, Sussex ; but the dental plate most
closely resembling it in the British Museum (PI. XIII. fig. 1)
is one of a considerable series of more or less abraded examples
from the Cambridge Greensand. It is much battered and
also scratched by small boring organisms; but it is evidently
almost complete. It measures about 0°10 m. in length by
0-075 m. in maximum breadth, and is bilaterally symme-
trical, ‘Phe broader end is gently rounded, and three quarters
of the length of the plate in this direction rise to a gentle
median convexity. The other end tapers to a point, and its
oral face is concave. The grinding-surface of the tooth is
not punctate; its truncated lateral border is covered with
rather large obtuse tubercles, which are not coated with
ganoine or gano-dentine (fig. la). The bony base of the
dentai plate is almost completely obscured by matrix, but
where its lower face is exposed it exhibits very fine reticular
markings, the main lines being longitudinal, the numerous
less conspicuous cross-lines being at right angles to these.
This reticulation is still more distinct on a fragmentary
specimen from the Cambridge Greensand (Brit. Mus.
no. 85392).

* The type species, Dixon, op. cit. p. 366, pl. xxxiii. fig. 2. For the
loan of this and other specimens in the Brighton Museum I[ am indebted
foes kindness of Henry Willett, Esq., F.G.S,,and Edward Crane, Esq.,

Cretaceous Fish Plethodus. 355

The more abraded and imperfect specimens of the same
dental plate from the Cambridge Greensand (e. g. Brit. Mus.
no. P. 7274) exhibit a distinctly punctate crown, the puncta-
tions usually bordered by a raised rim. These evidently
depend upon the structure of the thin, opaque, superficial
layer of the tooth, but are only evident when the outermost
surface is destroyed.

The thick translucent layer of vertical dentine-tubules is
always distinct in broken sections of the plates; and when
the bony base is also preserved, this is seen to have a verti-
eally fibrous structure curiously resembling that of the
dentine, but much finer. Sometimes, indeed (e. g. Brit. Mus.
no. 89103), appearances have been mistaken to indicate two
dental plates, one resting on the other. The fibrous bony
base is, in fact, nearly as thick as the crown, and there is a
sharp plane of demarcation between these two parts, which
are sometimes not completely in contact, but exhibit a small
interposed cavity.

At the same horizons as these slightly convex leaf-shaped
dental plates there occur somewhat concave plates of similar
structure, which seem to represent the opposing dentition.
They are, indeed, commonly labelled Plethodus expansus in
collections. An imperfect specimen from the Lower Chalk
of Glynde in the Brighton Museum (Willett Coll. no. 152)
is broken across, exposing the characteristic dentine and basal
bone, while its abraded oral face is punctate. It appears as
if it had been bilaterally symmetrical, and from the middle of
one end of the base there projects part of a fibrous azygous
bony bar for an attachment of some kind. The bar is not
seen at the other end, where, however, there is some indica-
tion of a paired connexion with adjoining bones. A more
fragmentary specimen of the same plate with incomplete
border is shown of two thirds the natural size in Pl. XIII.
figs. 2,2a,26. ‘This was obtained from the Lower Chalk
ot Kent, and is now inthe British Museum. It is remarkably
concave and must have been originally about as broad as
long. Its oral face (fig. 2) is not punctate, but the marginal
area is covered irregularly with numerous shallow pits.
The truncated border (fig. 2 6) is tuberculated, as in the leaf-
shaped plates, and the median bony bar (p) at one end, noted
in the previous specimen, is especially well preserved, tiough
still incomplete. The form and direction of this bar are
shown in figs. 2, 26, while adjoining it on each side in a
nearly parallel plane there are remains of a comparatively
thin lamina of bone (z) of uncertain form. ‘The attached
face of the dental plate, so far as exposed, has the curious

26*

356 Mr. A. 8. Woodward on the

aspect shown in fig. 2a. The reticular lines already
described on the base of the leaf-shaped plates are here most
prominent in a transverse direction, and pass into a remark-
able cluster of vermiculating fibres on the median longitudinal
ridge. This ridge does not extend to the ends of the plate ;
and at the end opposite to that where the bony process
appears the ridge terminates at the apex of a bilaterally-
symmetrical triangular area, on which the reticular markings
exhibit chiefly a divergent fan-shaped arrangement. Another
imperfect abraded specimen of the same plate (Brit. Mus.
no. 39091), exposed from its aboral face, shows that the
terminal bony bar is a tolerably thin lamina directly con-
tinuous with the bony base and apparently similar to the
latter in texture (fig. 3).

There is much variation in the contour of the plates of
both kinds commonly referred to Plethodus expansus, but it
seems best at present not to separate them under distinctive
names. Perhaps the most striking variation is observed in
the convex plate from the Gault shown of two thirds the
natural size in Pl. XIII. fig. 4. Both ends of this fossil are
comparatively truncated and the sides are nearly parallel ;
but in general aspect it closely agrees with the typical form
from the Cambridge Greensand represented in Pl. XIII.
fig. 1.

Some small convex plates from the English Lower Chalk,
however, seem to be quite distinct from P. expansus, and it
is now proposed to describe them under the new specific name
of P. pentagon. ‘The type specimen (PI. XILL. fig. 5) from
the Lower Chalk of Burham, Kent, is imperfect at one angle,
where the section displays the dentinal structure characteristic
of the genus. The plate is longer than broad, pentagonal in
outline, pointed at one end, truncated and slightly excavated
at the other end. ‘The abraded oral face, with punctate
markings, is very gently convex and slightly curved upwards
at the two sharp angles bounding the truncated end. ‘Three
pits or depressions occur on the oral face near this end. The
steep lateral border is not tubereculated. A fragment of the
pointed end, also from Burham (PI. XIII. tig. 6), bears
numerous pits or depressions on the attenuated point. Much-
abraded specimens from the Lower Chalk of Dover (Brit.
Mus. no. 35874) and Lewes (Brit. Mus. no. P. 2693) are
only of interest as extending the known distribution of the
species.

The Lower Chalk also yields a concave dental plate
which might serve very well for the opposing dentition of
P. pentagon, though, as only detached specimens have been

Cretaceous Fish Plethodus. 357

discovered, its determination must still remain uncertain. ‘I'he
best plate of this form in the British Museum is shown of the
natural size in Pl. XIII. figs. 7, 7a. It is strongly arched
transversely, less so longitudinally, and a broken section at
one end shows the characteristic structure. The oral face is
not abraded, and is thus not punctate ; it is deeply pitted at
the lateral borders, which curve downwards to the coarsely
tuberculated margin.

It may be observed that a somewhat similar form of dental
we to be regarded as representing an allied species,

P. furcatus, is known from the Turonian of Bohemia fF.

A fourth form of dental plate referable to Plethodus is of
comparatively small size, only 0°021 m. in length and 0:013 m.
in maximum width. It is a unique specimen from the Lower
Chalk of Clayton, Sussex, now in the Brighton Museum
(Willett Coll. no. 153), and is described by Dixon under the
name of P, oblongus (op. cit. p. 366, pl. xxxu.* fig. 4). It
is gently rounded at its wider end, almost truncated at the
narrower end, and the whole of the oral face is gently convex.

This specimen is of great interest because it seems to be
closely similar to the rounded end of a thick dental plate
mingled with the remains of a small problematical skull trom
the same pit, also in the Brighton Museum (Willett Coll.
no. 154). In fact there can be little doubt that the latter
fossil is referable to Plethodus, whether its determination as
P. oblongus be right or wrong. ‘There is thus at last some
clue to the nature of the fish to which the dental plates under
consideration belong. Itis only strange that the first evidence
as to the characters of the skull should appear in connexion
with the smallest species, and not in association with the
larger plates, which must have been connected with a very
massive bony skeleton.

The imperfect skull in question is shown of the natural
size from both sides in Pl. XIV. figs. 1, la. The cranium
is much laterally compressed and about as deep as long, with
a very steep frontal profile. At first sight, indeed, it exhibits
much resemblance to that of the extinct Pycnodont fishes.
The cranial roof-bones have a peculiar fibrous and punctate
structure, aud some of the sutures between them are distin-
guishable on the right (fig. 1). At the postero-lateral angle
above the hyomandibular (Am.) the squamosal element is
distinct (sg.), but its upper limit posteriorly is not quite clear.
Adjoining the anterior half of its upper border there is a

+ Chimera fur cata, A, Fritsch, ‘ Reptilien und Fische der bohmischen

Kreideformation’ (1878), p. 16, woodcut. Referred to Plethodus by
A. S. Woodward, Proc, Geol. Assoc. vol. x. (1888) p. 33],

358 Mr. A. S. Woodward on the

transversely elongated narrow bone, tapering as it reaches”

the broken median crest of the cranium; and this may
probably be interpreted as a parietal (pa.) meeting its fellow
in the median line. ‘There may perhaps be a small supra-
occipital crest (#), but this is uncertain. In front of the
squamosal and supposed parietal only one bone can be
distinguished forming the rostral region, and this probably
consists of the pair of frontals fused with the mesethmoid.
Postero-laterally, where in contact with the hinder elements,
the bone exhibits radiating fibres like an ordinary frontal
membrane-bone (/r.), but further forwards it becomes finely
punctate and rugose. Two facettes on the border above the
position of the orbit are probably for the overlap of the two
membrane-bones noted in the next specimen. The upper
part of the frontal profile is compressed to a sharp edge, but
further down it displays a slight flattened concavity, while
the extremity of the snout is broken away. A small depres-
sion on the surface of the undoubted frontal bone seems to
represent a mucus-pit (m.). The basicranial axis, so far as
preserved (to the border of the hyomandibular), is straight
and parallel with the ridge of the cranial roof behind the
frontal angle. Its constitution is uncertain, but as a median
vertical lamina seems to extend from its upper face to meet
the excessively developed mesethmoidal plate (m.eth.), the
part preserved may possibly be a much-extended vomer (x)
like that of the Pyenodonts. It expands below the position
of the eye and forms a thickened plate, which is distinctly
concave on its oral face. ‘he fossil is unfortunately cracked
along the middle of this face, and the plate cannot be very
satistactorily studied; but it bears an extraordinary resem-
blance to the concave plates of P. expansus described above
(p. 855, Pl. XIII. fig. 2), while its aboral face, especially on
the left side (fig. 1a, w), exhibits the peculiar fine reticula-
tion already noted on the detached specimens. It must,
however, be admitted that the peculiar dentinal structure so
characteristic of Plethodus cannot be distinctly observed. Of
the mandibular suspensorium, the very deep and narrow
hyomandibular (Am.) is shown on each side, with a promi-
nence on its thickened hinder border for the suspension of
the operculum. The mandible (d) is rather fragmentary, but
shown on the right side to be comparatively short and deep,
implying a rather small gape. ‘The right dentary bears
minute, obtuse, styliform teeth on the border, apparently
arranged in more than one series, while part of the inner face
of the left dentary displays the surface of attachment for a
dense cluster of minute teeth (¢). Below the hinder end of

~ Tae

Cretaceous Fish Plethodus. 359

the mandible on the left side there is displayed one end of a
comparatively thick convex dental plate (h), which has pre-
cisely the aspect of that of Plethodus both outwardly and in
transverse section. It is not fixed upon bone, and may well
have belonged to the hyoid arch. On the left side the preoper-
culum (p.op.) is shown to be very large and widely expanded
at its angle. The operculum (op.) is only represented by a
fragment.

A second example of this type of skull, in some respects
more satisfactory, is preserved in the British Museum
(no. 49895). This fossil, from the Lower Chalk of Dorking,
Surrey, displays only the left side of the head, and is shown
of the natural size in Pl. XIV. fig. 2. The same form of
cranium is readily distinguishable; but the squamosal
element is imperfect, the lateral margin of the frontal region
is bounded by a postfrontal (pét./r.) and a prefontal (pr.fr.)
membrane-bone, while the mesethmoid terminates in front in
a thickened obtusely pointed rostrum (r.), which is orna-
mented with close reticulating ridges and lines of tubercles *.
There are also two small plates posteriorly (s.¢.) which may,
perhaps, be supratemporals. The frontal (fr.) exhibits the
mucus-pit (m.) as before, and it seems to cover only the hinder
part of the rostral region, though its apparent boundaries in
the fossil are probably deceptive and due to accidental cracks.
The mesethmoidal septum (m.eth.) is seen to meet a vertical
plate rising from the basicranial axis, and the latter exhibits
the same remarkable expansion as in the previous specimen.
At least this seems to be the case, for there is evidence of
crushing in this region, and a longitudinal ridge along the
supposed basicranial expansion is probably the fractured and
slightly displaced base of the vertical plate just mentioned.
In a plane distinctly external to the expansion there are
remains of the hyomandibular (Am.) and the pterygo-quadrate
arcade ; the metapterygoid (m.pt.), quadrate (qu.), and long
slender ectopterygoid with its minute teeth (ecpt.) being
readily distinguishable. Indeed, if the previous specimens
were unknown the expansion itself might readily be inter-
preted as entopterygoid, while the ridge upon it would be
considered as an accidentally crushed and displaced slender
parasphenoid. The maxilla (mz.) isa deep laminar bone,
finely tuberculated at its oral margin, which forms the greater
part of the upper border of the mouth. ‘The premaxille are

* It may be noted that this rostrum exhibits much resemblance to a
comparatively large tip of a snout from the Sussex Chalk, once pro-
visionally assigned to an Acipenseroid fish (A. 8. Woodward, Proc,
Geol. Assoc, vol. xi. 1889, p. 51, pl. i. fig. 6).

360 Mr. A. S. Woodward on the

unknown, but may be fused with the short ornamented
rostrum, which curves inwards to the mouth below and seems
to bear minute teeth. The mandible, as before, is shown to
be short and deep, the dentary (d.) forming by far the greater
part of the ramus. A fragment within the jaws may possibly
be part of the lower dental plate, but it is unusually pitted
and of doubtful nature. The operculum (op.) and the curved
anterior border of the preoperculum (p.op.) are also seen.

The evidence afforded by the two skulls now described is
thus very suggestive, but not quite conclusive as to the
relationships of the dental plates named Plethodus. It is
still necessary to demonstrate by microscopical sections that
the plates in this small form of skull are truly Plethodus. It
is also essential to obtain a clearer view of the basicranial
axis before definitely deciding upon the homologies of the
upper plate. Meantime, however, it seems almost certain
that the concave plate of Plethodus was part of the upper
dentition fixed to the basicranial axis, while the convex plate
belonged to the lower dentition and was supported by the
hyoid apparatus. The upper plate may have been part of
the parasphenoid—an arrangement common among fishes—
or it may have belonged to a much-extended vomer like that
of the extinct Pycnodonts.

‘There is only one difficulty in regarding the concave plate
of P. expansus as homologous with the upper plate in the
small form of skull now described, namely that the aboral
face is a little different. The median ridge in the known
specimens of P. expansus does not definitely rise into a
vertical plate, though this may have been comparatively
fragile and readily broken away; moreover, in the larger
plate the strongest lines in the fine reticulation on either side
of the median ridge are directed transversely, while those in
the original of Pl. XIV. fig. 2 are longitudinal. It is,
however, possible that accident in the first case and specific

difference in the other may account for the discrepancy. If
the homology prove to be well founded, it is likely that the
end of the plate connected with the ascending bar of bone
(Pl. XIV. fig. 2, ») is posterior.

Finally, assuming that the new type of skull now described
does really represent the genus Plethodus, it is still difficult
to hazard a suggestion as to the precise affinities of the fish.
The structure of the mandible shows that it is not a Pycno-
dont, while the apparent discovery of a hyoid or lingual
dentition opposed to the upper dentition of the mouth adds a
feature not previously known among Mesozoic fishes. The
dental arrangement, indeed, is most ‘closely similar to that of

Cretaceous Fish Plethodus. 361

some of the existing Osteoglosside, a family which was
already differentiated in the Eocene in North America
(Dapedoglossus) and probably also in Europe (Prychetus).
If the patches of minute teeth on the parasphenoid and basi-
hyal of the recent Arapaima were fused together into opposing
plates their structure would not be very different from that of
Plethodus. The disposition of the squamosal and parietal
bones in the Cretaceous fish limits comparisons to primitive
bony fishes such as the Osteoglosside, Elopide, and Albulide.
On the whole, I am inclined to think that Plethodus will
eventually prove to be most closely related to the first of
these families.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.

PLATE XIII.

Fig. 1. Plethodus expansus, Dixon; lower dental plate, oral face, two
thirds nat. size, and view of tuberculated rim (1 @), nat. size.—
Cambridge Greensand. [B.M. no. 55369. |

. Ditto; upper dental plate, oral face, aboral face (2a), and side
view of supposed posterior end (26), two thirds nat. size.—
L. Chalk; Kent. p, median bony process; 2, lateral bony
plate. [B.M. no. 38585. |

3. Ditto; upper dental plate, aboral face, two thirds nat. size.—

Ibid. [B.M. no. 39091. ]
Fiy. 4, Ditto (?); lower dental plate, oral face, two thirds nat. size.—
Gault; Folkestone. [B.M. no, P. 7.]
5. Plethodus pentagon, sp. n.; lower dental plate, oral face.—-
L. Chalk; Burham. [B.M. no. 41716 a. |
‘iy. 6, Ditto ; pointed end of plate, oral face.—Ibid. [B.M. no. 47947. ]
Fig. 7, Ditto (?) ; upper dental plate, oral face, and lateral aspect (7 @).
—English Chalk. [B.M. no. P. 5626. |

aed

ry
i)

bo

>|
S°
oO

a
=
Oo

PEATE XUV,

Fig. 1. Plethodus oblongus, Dixon (?); imperfect head, right and_ left
(1a) lateral aspects.—L. Chalk; Clayton. [Willett Coll,
Brighton Museum, no. 154. |

Ditto ; imperfect head, left lateral aspect.—L. Chalk; Dorking.
[B.M. no. 49895. |

ho

Fig.

d., dentary of mandible; ecpt., ectopterygoid ; fr., frontal ; 2, lower dental
plate (? basihyal) ; Am., hyomandibular ; m., mucus-pit; m.eth.,
mesethmoid; m.pt., metapterygoid; maz., maxilla; op., oper-
culum; p.op., preoperculum ; pa., parietal; pr.fr., prefrontal
plate; pt.fr., postfrontal plate ; gu., quadrate ; 7, rostrum; s.¢.,
supratemporals (?) ; sg., squamosal; ¢, inner mandibular teeth ;
u, upper dental plate ; x, supraoccipital (?).

B.M.=British Museum. Unless otherwise stated, the figures are
of the natural size.

362 Mr. W. F. Kirby on a

LI.—On a Collection of Odonata (Dragonflies) from
Panama. By W. F. Kirsy.

[Plate XV.]

In the course of last year I received a consignment of Odonata
for the Natural-History Museum from Mr. Charles H. Dolby-
Tyler, They were all taken by himself between April 1 and
May 15, 1898, at La Chorrera, about 20 miles north of Panama.
Accompanying them were short descriptions, “ taken in most
cases from two or three specimens while the insect was alive,
and jotted down in my note-book..... Among the un-
numbered duplicates you will find two, or possibly three,
species not included in the series.”

The numbers on the specimens run from 1 to 20; but as
the sexes of several species bore different numbers, the total
number of species (including those not numbered) is not more
than 21. Several of these are of considerable interest and
some appear to be new ; and hence I have thought it would be
useful to give a list of the whole, printing Mr. Dolby-Tyler’s
descriptions of the living insects exactly as I received them,
between inverted commas, and adding any remarks of my
own which seemed to be necessary. As usual, many more
males than females were collected.

The list of species is as follows :—

Libellulide. ZEschnide.
LIBELLULINE. GOMPHINZ.
Miathyria, Wrb. Gomphoides, De Selys.
marcella, De Selys. appendiculatus, A7zrd. (sp. n.).
Perithemis, Hagen. Cyclophylla, De Selys.
domitia, Dru. obscura, Aird. (sp. n.).
Trithemis, Brauer.
pulla, Burm. Agrionide.
Tyleri, Arb. (sp. n.).
Orthemis, Hagen. AGRIONIN&.
ferruginea, Fabr. Heterina, De Selys.

Dythemis, Hagen.
Broadwayi, Aird.
Macrothemis, Hagen.
vulgipes, Calv. (?)
Uracis, Ramb.
quadra, Ramb. (?). PSEUDOSTIGMATINA,
Lepthemis, Hagen.
vesiculosa, Labr.
Mesothemis, Hagen.
verbenata, Hagen.

occisa, De Selys.
caja, Drury (?).

C@NAGRIONINAE.

Mecistogaster, Ramb.
ornatus, Lamb.

Erythemis, Hagen. NoRMOSTIGMATINA.
peruviana, Ramb. Argia, Ramb.

Micrathyria, sirb. tinctipennis, De Selys.
Hagenii, Aur. orichaleea, De Selys.

Diplacodes, Kirb. pulla, De Selys.

minuscula, Hag.

Collection of Odonata from Panama. 363

Miathyria marcella.

Lrbellula marcella, De Selys, Ramon de la Sagra, Hist. Cuba, Ins. p. 452
(1857).

(3, no. 1.) “Apex of eye red, with a purple tint, the
remainder infuseated purple. Epicranium metallic purple.
Ante- and postelypeus olivaceous. Labrum fuscous. Dorsal
aspect of mesepisterna and notum bluish black.

“'Tergum of abdomen ochreous. Tergites 1-3 fuscons, 4-9
ochreous, edged with black. Median line black, growing
gradually broader from base up to the ninth tergite, where
the ochreous ground appears only as two lateral spots. Tenth
tergite and cercopoda black; tergites 4-8 with two fuscous
marks towards the apex of each tergite, these markings on
the ninth becoming merged into the median line.”

Three male specimens.

Perithemis domitia.
Libellula domitia, Dru. Il. Ex. Ent. ii. pl. xly. fig. 4 (1778).

(g, no. 3.) “ Apex of eye fuscous; middle third with a
faint purplish tint horizontally ; lower third from the epi-
cranial suture downwards, together with the clypeus and
labrum, olive-green. Epicranium yellowish green.

‘Dorsal aspect of mesepisterna and notum dark green,
faintly eneous.

“Abdominal tergites olive-green, marked diagonally to-
wards the outer edges with fuscous fasciz, bordered laterally
with light brown. Edges of tergites ochreous. Cercopoda
olive-green.”’

Six male specimens.

Trithemis pulla.
Libellula pulla, Burm, Handb. Ent. ii. p. 855, n. 41 (1839).

(¢ adult, no. 17.) ‘“‘ Apex of eye rufescent, balance cine-
reous. LEpicranium, clypeus, and labrum rufescent. Dorsal
aspect of mesepisterna bronzy green. Notum dark green.

“Tergum of abdomen rufescent. ‘Tergites 1-3 greenish,
4-8 with diagonal luteous markings from outer angle at base
of each tergite inclining towards the median line, 9-10 testa-
ceous. Cercopoda red.”

(3g semiadult, no. 4.) ‘‘ Eyes piceous, with dark crimson
apices. Epicranium, clypeus, and labrum crimson.

“Dorsal aspect of mesepisterna, notum, and abdominal
tergites dark crimson. Median line of tergum black. Edges

364 Mr. W. F. Kirby on a

of tergites black. Cercopoda dark crimson, tipped with
black.”

(?,no.10.) ‘ Apex of eye reddish brown, balance greyish
green. Hpicranium, clypeus, and labrum olivaceous. Dorsal
aspect of mesepisterna and notum olive-green,

“ Tergal aspect of abdomen rufo-flavescent, marked longi-
tudinally towards the outer edges of each tergite and near its
base with yellow. Median line and edges of tergites black.

Jercopoda tipped with black.”

Twelve specimens in all,

Trithemis Tyleri, sp.n. (Pl. XV. fig. 1.)

(g, no. 13.) “ Apex of eye piceous, balance bluish grey.
Postclypeus olivaceous. Epicranium, anteclypeus, and
labrum dark olivaceous generally.

“ Dorsal aspect of mesepisterna, notum, and abdominal
tergites 1-3 dark infumated green, 4-10 fuscous, bordered
with black. Cercopoda olivaceous.”’

Closely allied to 7. umbrata, Linn.; but in that species
the purplish-brown band lies between the nodus and the
stigma, whereas in 7’. Tyleri it extends from about the
triangle of the fore wings to halfway between the nodus and
the pterostigma, and the lower basal cell is slightly clouded
as far as the base. The hind wings are clouded from the
base to the outer level of the band of the fore wings, but the
basal part of the hind wings is paler than the rest of the
clouded portion, especially in the female.

Described from three males and two females.

Orihemis ferruginea.

Libellula ferruginea, Fabr. Syst. Ent. p. 423, n. 19 (1775).

(3, no. 14.) “ Apex of eye purplish, balance dark bluish.
Epicranium crimson, with a tinge of purple. Clypeus and
labrum rufescent.

‘‘ Dorsal aspect of mesepisterna and notum infumated purple.

“'Teroum of abdomen bright crimson.”

(¢, no. 16.) “ Apex of eye rufescent, balance grey.

“ Front olivaceous.

“ Dorsal aspect of mesepisterna fuscous, with a pale green
median line. Notum fuscous, with a pale green median line,
which extends to the fourth abdominal tergite, where it
becomes somewhat flavescent and constricted; it then narrows
down to the seventh, where it is scarcely perceptible. Ter-
gites 8-10 and cercopoda somewhat rufescent.”

Two males and two females sent.

otielliieeeats

Collection of Odonata from Panama. 365

Dythemis Broadwayt.
se iess Broadwayi, Kirb. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (6) xiv. p. 227
Pistia sterilis, Caly. (or Hagen ?), Proc. California Acad, (2) iv.
. 622, pl. xvi. figs. 52-55 (1895).
Dythemis velox (Hagen), var. sterilis, Calvy. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat.
Hist, xxviii. p. 310 (1898).

(3, no. 7.) “ Apex of eye red, balance greyish green. Epi-
cranium fulvous; clypeus and labrum olivaceous.

“ Dorsal aspect of mesepisterna green, with two darker-hued
metallic fasciz on either side of, separated from, and parallel
to the median line. Notum green, with black border.

“€ Abdomen black, with green markings, In tergite 2 the
markings occupy nearly all the surface, in 3-7 they are
acutely triangular and basal, running parallel to and on
either side of the median line ; they become nearly obliterated
on the eighth tergite. Cercopoda black.”

Two specimens.

I provisionally retain my name D. Broadway? for this
species or variety, for Hagen’s name of D. sterilis was in-
tended to replace tessellata, Ramb. (nec Burm.), from Buenos
Aires; and in the absence of specimens from that locality
agreeing with Rambur’s ¢essellata, and to which Hagen’s
name of sterilis is alone primarily applicable, I do not
care to apply it to specimens from widely different localities
without further evidence.

Macrothemis vulgipes (2).

Macrothemis vulgipes, Calvert, Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist. xxviii.
p. 320 (1898).

(¢@, no. 8.) “ Apex of eye reddish brown, bordered with
glaucous, lower portion olive-green. Epicranium fuscous
near suture at base of ocelli-bearing sclerite ; clypeus and
labrum olivaceous.

“Dorsal aspect of mesepisterna fuscous, with two green
fasciz running parallel to, separate from, and on either side
of the median line. Thorax fuscous, with green markings,

“Tergum of abdomen black. ‘Tergites 1-5 with lateral
longitudinal green markings, 7 with two green markings.”

‘I'wo specimens, agreeing with Prof. Calvert’s description,
except that the wings are clear hyaline, with no yellow tinge
except at the base, and that the double row of post-triangular
cells on the fore wings only increases to three on the hind
margin instead of to four; in one specimen, indeed, there is
only one row of these cells on the margin itself. On the fore
wings the arculus corresponds with the second antenodal

366 Mr. W. F. Kirby on a

cross-nervure on the fore wings, and rises considerably
beyond it on the hind wings.

It is quite possible that Mr. Dolby-Tyler’s insect may
be distinct from Jf. vulgipes, Calv., but I do not like to
separate them until the allied forms are better known.

Two specimens.

Uracis quadra (?).
Libellula quadra, Ramb. Ins. Névr. p. 31, pl. ii. fig. 5 e (1842).

(2, no. 12.) “Apices of eyes green, balance cinereous,
together with the epicranium, clypeus, and labrum, the last-
mentioned somewhat olivaceous.

“Dorsal aspect of mesepisterna black, with rugose flaves-
cent markings transversely. Notum grey. ‘Tergum of
abdomen deep fuscous, with somewhat flavous markings.

“Tips of wings fuliginous.”

Nine specimens in the collection, belonging to both sexes.
They agree fairly well with Rambur’s figure and description
of U. quadra, except that the triangle of the hind wings is
followed by only two rows of cells increasing, not three, as in
Rambur’s figure. It may be noted that the true U. quadra,
Ramb., is the type of his genus Uracts ; not ¢mbuta, Burm.,
which is a pertectly distinct species, with a pruinose blue
male. ‘The species which I here call U. quadra may be
known by the upper surface of the thorax being finely and
transversely striated with brown and black.

Lepthemis vesiculosa.
Libellula vesiculosa, Faby. Syst. Ent. p. 421. n. 7 (1775).

(g, no. 11.) “Eyes green, rufescent at apices, remainder
greyish. Vertex, ocelli-bearing sclerite, epicranium, clypeus,
and labrum verdant green.

“ Dorsal aspect of mesepisterna, notum, and abdominal
tergites 1-3 verdant green; tergites 4-7 green with black
apices, 8-10 black. Cercopoda green.

‘¢ Pterostigma green.”

One male specimen.

Mesothemis verbenata, (Pl. XV. fig. 2.)
Lepthemis verbenata, Hagen, Neur. N. Amer. p. 162 (1861).
(No. 5.) “Apex of eye rufescent, remaining portion grey
with a greenish tinge. LEpicranium, clypeus, and labrum
olivaceous.

“ Dorsal aspect of mesepisterna, notum, and abdominal
tergites 1-3 dull green, 3 to last olivaceous, with fulvous

Collection of Odonata from Panama. 367

markings, which become flavescent towards the outer edges ;
these last are black.

“ Teroites 8-9 somewhat rufescent. Median line black.”

There are seven males and one female in the collection, and
although one of the males bears the no. 5, the above descrip-
tion was probably taken from the female, to which it seems
to be much more applicable.

Lepthemis verbenata, Hagen, is usually considered to be a
mere synonym of Mesothemis attala, Selys; but, as far as I
can tell without actually examining Hagen’s types, the species
sent by Mr. Dolby-Tyler is the true verbenata and has every
appearance of a Lepthemis, especially as Hagen understood
that genus in 1861. It has all the most important structural
characters of J/. attala, which it much resembles, but the
abdomen is much longer and more slender, segments 4-7,
though slightly decreasing in length, being about four times
as long as broad, whereas they are less than twice as long as
broad in JZ. attala. The cross-nervures are also less by one
or two in verbenata, none of the specimens before me having
more than 14, and often only 13, antenodal cross-nervures on
the fore wings, while all our J/. attala have 15. The female
corresponds fairly with Hagen’s description of L. verbenata ;
the males are the dark form which he describes. The latter,
however, are not quite so dark as Hagen’s description might
imply, for the base of the mandibles and the sides of the
labrum are testaceous, and the femora are lined with red.

This is one of the most interesting species in the collection,

I have just heard from Prof. Calvert that he also regards
the two species as distinct.

Erythemis peruviana.
Libellula peruviana, Ramb, Ins. Névr. p. 81 (1842).

(g, no. 2.) “Eyes bluish black. Ocelli, epicranium,
clypeus, and labrum black.

Dorsal aspect of mesepisterna and notum dark blue, ap-
proaching black, this colour extending to the middle of the
third abdominal tergite. Apical half of third tergite, tergites
4-10, and cercopoda bright crimson,”

(¢, no. 15.) “ Kyes greyish. Hpicranium posteriorly dirty
white, bordered anteriorly with black. Clypeus and labrum
olivaceous.

Dorsal aspect of mesepisterna pale green, bordered late-
rally with fuscous. Notum pale green.

“'lergum of abdomen pale green, bordered laterally with
fulvous, and this exteriorly with ochreous.”

Four males and two females in the collection.

368 Mr. W. F. Kirby on a

Micrathyria Hagenit.

Dashes didyma, Hagen (nee De Selys), Neur. N. Amer. p. 165
1 ;
preentir ea Hagenii, Kirb. Cat. Neur, Odon. p. 41 (1890).

(gd, no. 6.) “ Eyes bright green, clouded with blue. Ocelli
black. Epicranium, clypeus, and labrum dirty white.

“ Dorsal aspect of mesepisterna bright green, with black
fascie. Notum bluish black.

“Pergites of abdomen black ; tergites 2-5 with interrupted
ereen markings extending from the base of each tergite over
two thirds of its length, and forming apparently two markings
on each side of the median line. ‘The apical half of these
markings becomes obliterated in the fifth, and in the sixth
there are traces only of their basal portions; seventh with
two oblong markings, concolorous with the others, occu-
pying two thirds of the surface from the base.”

Four males. The interalary portion of the thorax above
is pruinose. They may represent a local form of IZ. Hagenit.
On the fore wings there are only 8 antenodal cross-nervures
(the last not continuous) and 6-8 postnodals. The hinder
segments are considerably enlarged. In most points they
agree very well with Hagen’s description.

Diplacodes minuscula.

Libellula minuscula, Ramb. Ins. Névr. p. 115 (1842).

Diplax minuscula, Hag. Neur. N. Amer. p. 183 (1861).

(Immature 3g, no, 9.) “ Apex cf eye rufescent, remaining
portion green. Kpicranium fuscous, with a dark metallic
blue reflection. Clypeus olivaceous and labrum blackish
towards front.

* Dorsal aspect of mesepisterna and notum fulvous. Abdo-
minal tergites flavous, with black edges, and concolorous at
base and apex and on either side of median line, forming
two fenestra.

“ Cercopoda flavescent.”’

A single specimen only.

Gomphoitdes appendiculatus, sp.n. (Pl. XY. fig. 3.)

(g, no. 18.) “ Description lost.” ae

Long. corp. 50 millim.; exp. al. 71 millim.; long. pter.
4 millim.

Male.—Head and thorax reddish chocolate, head with the
occiput (2) (discoloured), a square spot in front of it between
the eyes; a transverse band before the frontal ocellus, the

Collection of Odonata from Panama, 369

sides of the face above the base of the mandibles, and the
lower mouth-parts black; borders of labrum and mandibles
black, two yellow dots on the labrum. Prothorax with a short
oblong yellow spot in the middle. Mesothorax with a yellow
collar, divided in the middle ; a transverse expanding yellow
median line, followed by a series of yellow spots between
the wings as far as the base of the abdomen, and a short
oblique yellow stripe on each side, followed by a yellow
spot opposite the base of each fore wing. A very broad
yellow stripe beneath each wing; metapectus with two
obliqne yellow stripes. Abdomen with the first six segments
with oblong yellow markings at their base on the sides: the
median line above is mostly yellow nearly to the extre-
mity, bordered with blackish on the sides and sutures; on
the seventh segment the yellow stripe is interrupted, being
followed by a detached spot; the last three segments are
expanded, dull vellow above, with the sides brown, and the
terminal carine black. Lateral appendages of second segment
yellow. Anal appendages as long as the last two segments,
yellow, black at the base and tips, curved inward; a small
black tooth on the upperside beyond the middle, and the
tips upcurved. Lower appendages brown, one fourth as long
as the others, diverging, slender, pointed; lowest appendage
broader, longer, directed obliquely downwards, and truncated
at the extremity. Legs black, femora yellowish below and
serrated. Wings hyaline: fore wings with 20 antenodal
cross-nervures and 11 or 12 postnodals; 2 supratriangular
nervules on all the wings; pterostigma brownish ochreous,
between black nervures; fore wings with the triangle of 2
or 3 cells, followed by two rows of cells, increasing, subtri-
angular space (lower triangle of De Selys) divided by a
nervure: hind wings with 13 or 14 antenodal and postnodal
cross-nervules, triangles traversed, followed by one row of
3 cells and then by several of 2, increasing; anal triangle of 4
cells; subtriangular space divided.

I suspect that this insect may be the male of @. bifaseciatus,
Hagen, described from ‘Tehuantepec, but cannot put them
together without authority.

One specimen only.

Cyclophylla obscura, sp. n. (Pl. XV. fig. 4.)

(?, 0.) No description.

Long. corp. 55 millim. ; exp. al.
4} millim,

Uniform dark reddish brown, inclusive of neuration ; sides

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iu. 27

~

76 millim. ; long. pter.

370 On a Collection of Odonata from Panama.

of mandibles and lower mouth-parts paler; tips of mandibles,
tibie, and tarsi black; seventh and eighth segments con-
siderably widened, the seventh, which is twice as long as the
eighth, gradually widened, nearly from the base; ninth and
tenth segments successively narrower, about as long as broad ;
anal appendages as long as the tenth segment, conical, por-
rected, pointed at the tips.

Wings hyaline; pterostigma ochreous yellow, between
black nervures, covering six or seven cells; one supratrian-
gular nervure on each wing: fore wings with 20-21 ante-
nodal and 13-14 postnodal cross-nervules ; triangle formed
of three cells, followed by one or two rows of three cells
and then several of two, increasing ; lower triangle traversed :
hind wings with 13-17 antenodals and 15-17 postnodals ;
triangle traversed ; lower triangle free.

One specimen.

Very few females of this genus have been described ; but

the present specimen does not seem to agree with any
described male.

Heterina oceisa.

Heterina occisa, De Selys, Syn. Cal. p. 44 (1853); Mon, Cal. p. 143
(1854).

One well-marked male, with no special number,

FHeterina caja (?).
? Libellula caja, Drury, Il. Ex. Ent. ii. pl. xlv. fig. 2 (1773).
Calopteryx caja, pt., Ramb. Ins. Névr. p. 226 (1842).

Heterina caja, De Selys, Syn. Cal. p. 32 (1853); Mon. Cal. p. 104
(1854).

Heterina hera, Hagen, De Selys, Zl. ce. p. 82 (1853) ; p. 106 (1854).

(g, no. 19.) ‘Eyes black, lower and outer portion grey.
Epicranium with a red fascia horizontally (transversely ?) in
front of ocelli, and separated from the anterior portion, which
is fulvous, by a black line. Postclypeus purplish black.
Anteclypeus olivaceous. Labrum grey. Scape of antenne
grey.

“ Dorsal aspect of mesepisterna crimson, divided by the
black median line. ‘Thorax and abdominal tergites 1-5
fuscous; fifth tergite much darker, and merging into the
colour of tergites 6-10 and cercopoda, which is dark green.”

A series of twenty-two specimens, males and females. If
this insect ultimately proves not to be the true HZ, caja, Dru.,

Hagen’s name of //. hera (omitted in my Catalogue) must be
adopted for it.

On Two new Moths from the Upper Niger. 371

Mecistogaster ornatus.
Mecistogaster ornatus, Ramb, Ins. Névr. p. 288 (1842).
One specimen only. No number attached.

Argia tinctipennis.
Argia tinctipennis, De Selys, Bull. Acad. Belg. (2) xx. p. 396 (1865).
Two males, without special number.

I find the name of this species is misprinted tractipennis in
my Catalogue of Odonata.

Argia orichalcea.

Argra orichalcea, De Selys, Bull. Acad. Belg. (2) xx. p. 408 (1865).
Agrion cupreum, var., Hag. Neur. N. Am. pp. 97, 312 (1861).

(3g, no. 20.) “ Front hemisphere of eye bright red ; apical
half posteriorly black, lower posterior half grey. Epicranium
fuscous. Clypeus brown-neous, same as dorsal aspect of
mesepisterna ; notum blue.

“Tergum of abdomen blue, with an annular black fascia at
the apex of each tergite. T'ergite 8 almost entirely black.”

Two males; and a very dark-coloured female, possibly not
belonging to the same species.

Argia pulla.
Argia pulla, De Selys, Bull, Acad. Belg. (2) xx. p. 410 (1865).
Four specimens, without special number.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XV.

Fig. 1. Trithemis Tyleri, sp. n., p. 364.

Fig. 2. Mesothemis verbenata, Hagen, p. 366.

Fig. 3. Gomphoides appendiculatus, sp. n., p. 368. a, 6, anal appendages.
Fig. 4. Cyclophylla obscura, sp. n., p. 369.

LII.—Deseriptions of Two new Moths collected by Dr. Christy
on the Upper Niger. By Emtry Mary SHARPE.

Family Saturniide.
Bunea Christy?, sp. n.
Allied to Bunea phedusa (Drury), but at once distin-
guished by the very large ocellus on the fore-wing, which is

similar to that on the hind-wing in markings and colour.
PY

372 On Two new Moths from the Upper Niger.

Primaries. General colour greyer than in B. phedusa, the
outline of the hind margin more distinctly curved; the basal
portion of the median nervure up to the first branch longer,
the bend of this portion of the wing being further from the
base ; the narrow brown line which crosses the discal area
from the apex curving more towards the posterior angle than
in the allied species, the violaceous shading only visible on
the outer margin of the brown discal line and only confined
to the apical area.

Secondaries. Similar to those of B. phedusa, the ocellus
being somewhat larger.

Underside. General aspect much greyer on both wings,
the dark brown patches situated at the end of the discoidal
cells deeper in colour and larger, and more distinctly outlined
with black; the outer margin of the primaries more concave
between the nervules; collar entirely white, whereas in the
allied form it is of the same colour as the wings.

Expanse 7:7 inches.

Hab. Jebba, Upper Niger, October 1898 (Dr. Cuthbert
Christy).

Nudaurelia jebbe, sp. n.

Nearest to Nudaurelia Rendalli, Rothschild (Novit. Zool.
iv. p. 182), from Zomba in Nyasaland, but distinguished by
the ground-colour being altogether of a more reddish tint.

Primaries. Shorter than in N. Rendalli, the outer margin
more convex, as is also the greyish discal line, which is
divided from the bind margin by a band of reddish brown,
the same colour being visible over the whole of the basal
area; a small transparent ocellus situated at the end of the
discoidal cell.

Secondaries. ‘The ground-colour similar to that of the
primaries ; the dark post-discal line, visible in NV. Rendall,
absent in this species, and the ocellus in the centre of the
wing twice the size of that in NV. Rendalli.

Underside, General colour brighter and deeper red, the
ocellus at the end of the discoidal cell on the primaries
distinctly outlined with black, the greyish discal line only
faintly indicated.

Secondartes. Similar to the primaries, the discocellular
spot represented by a very narrow transparent streak, the
dark markings from the upperside being only faintly indi-
cated ; the discal line is faintly visible.

Antenne black, collar white; while in N. Rendalli the
antenne are tawny brown and the collar ochraceous,

Expanse 3°5 inches.

On the Dismorphina of the New World. 373

Hab, Jebba, Upper Niger, October 1898 (Dr. Cuthbert
Christy).

1 have compared the types of these species with others in
the collections in the British Museum and at Tring, and both
the Hon. Walter Rothschild and Sir George Hampson agree
with me that the two species are new to science.

LUT.—A Revision of the Dismorphina of the New World,
with Descriptions of new Species. By ArtHur G. BUTLER,
nes HGS. cE.Z.0:,, occ.

Wuen I revised the genera of Pierine Butterflies in the
‘Cistula Entomologica’ (vol. i. pp. 33-58) I admitted two
genera of Dismorphina, viz. Dismorphia, with the upper
radial of the primaries emitted from the end of the discoidal
cell, and Moschoneura, with the same vein emitted from the
subcostal vein beyond the end of the cell. A careful study
of the neuration of all the species in the Museum series failed
to show any other difference in neuration which was abso-
lutely constant.

Under Moschoneura 1 placed the nehemia group, which
has since been separated under the name Pseudopieris by
the authors of the ‘ Biologia Centrali-Americana,’ I think
correctly, for although it has the neuration of Moschoneura, it
differs considerably in form of wing and is evidently not a
mimicking group.

The two other genera erected in the ‘ Biologia’ have less
claim to generic rank, inasmuch as they are based upon
neurational differences which are far from being constant.
Acmepteron is perhaps convenient as a division on account of
the peculiar form of the primaries; but Hnantia can only be
arbitrarily separated as a group or section of Dismorphia,
the position of the first subcostal branch of the primaries,
upon which its authors relied, being unfortunately very
variable, quite as much so as in the genus Huchloe; indeed,
I find it emitted both before and at the end of the cell in
examples of the same species, whilst in a closely allied species
it is emitted well beyond the end. Hven the Ithomeine
character of Dismorphia does not form a trenchant distinc-
tion, because several admitted forms of nantia have
Ithomeine females.

The following is an account of the species, most of which
are either in the general series or the Hewitson collection in
the Museum.

374 Dr. A. G. Butler on

Genus Pseupopieris, Godm. & Salv.

The species of this genus have the aspect of Pieris and are
robably the most ancient of the New-World Dismorphina.
They are all very closely related.

1. Pseudopieris equatorialis.

Leptalis equatorialis, Felder, Wien. ent. Monatschr. vy. p. 75 (1861).

Leptalis penia, Hopffer, Stett, ent. Zeit. 1874, p. 334.
is Cae (Felder) ; Pucartambo, Peru (Whitely). 6,

3, P. penta, hab.? Three examples. Ecuador. Coll.
Hewitson.

Our specimen is the wet phase=P. equatorialis, P. penia
is intermediate, and the examples from Ecuador in the
Hewitson series (mistaken for P. nehemia by Hewitson)
represent the dry phase.

2. Pseudopieris viridula.
Leptalis viridula, Felder, Wien. ent. Monatschr. v. p. 75 (1861).
“ Bogota”? (Felder). Pucartambo and Rio Napo: B. M.
Quito: coll. Hewitson.
The wet phase is unknown to me, but the intermediate we

have from the Rio Napo and the dry from Pucartambo and
(in the Hewitson series) from Quito.

3. Pseudopieris nehemia.
Pieris nehemia, Boisduyal, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 528 (1836),
Leptalis cydno, Doubleday, in Gray’s Zool. Mise. p. 75 (1842).

Mexico, Venezuela, and Rio Grande: B. M. Minas
Geraes and Rio Janeiro: coll. Hewitson.

I have not seen the wet phase, but Doubleday’s type from
Mexico represents the intermediate, and typical P. nehemia
from all our more southern localities the dry.

Genus Moscuoneura, Butler.

The species of, this genus are capital imitations of the
species of the Ithomeine genera Scada and Aeria.

1. Moschoneura methymna.
Pieris methymna, Godart, Enc. Méth, ix. p. 166 (1819).
Rio Janeiro. B. M. and coll, Hewitson,

the Dismorphina of the New World. 375

2. Moschoneura cyra.

Leptalis cyra, Doubleday, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. vol. xiv. p. 418
(1844).

Bahia. Type, B. M.

3. Moschoneura ela.

“ledges

Leptalis ela, Hewitson, Equat. Lep. p. 82 (1877).
Ecuador. Type, coll. Hewitson.

4. Moschoneura pintheus.

Papilio pintheus, Linneeus, Mus. Lud. Ulr. p. 258 (1764).

Papilio vocula, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iv. pl. eccliii. C, D (1782).

Leptalis amelina, Hopfter, Stett. ent. Zeit. 1874, p. 382.

Para and Tapajos. B. M. and coll. Hewitson.

I can discover no difference in Hopffer’s description to
warrant the separation of his species; but in the Hewitson
collection there is an imperfect example of an allied but appa-
rently very distinct species, unfortunately without locality.
It is more likely to be JZ. ewmelia, var.

5. Moschoneura eumelia.

Papilio eumelia, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iii, pl. eclxxx. D (1782).
Pieris enodia, Godart, Enc. Méth. ix. p. 166 (1819).

Ega. B.M.

oD

6. Moschoneura theaphina, sp. n.

Mimics Ithomia theraphia* and is allied to M. ithomia
(which probably mimics /. kusa). It can at once be distin-
guished by the unbroken character of the oblique, postmedian,
sulphur-tinted white band on the primaries, which in JZ, athomea
is represented by two unequal spots.

Expanse of wings 45-48 millim.

Keuador. Coll. Hewitson.

* This species and its allies have been referred to Scada, the type of
which is S. phyllodoce. In the latter species the lower radial of the pri-
maries is given off above the angle of the discocellulars; but this proves
to be an inconstant character. It, however, differs from the alethia
group in that the costal vein is bent downwards towards its distal end so
as almost to touch the subcostal, and the angle of the discocellulars of
these wings is considerably less pronounced. The types of Scada and
Heteroscada agree in structure, but fenella has nothing to do with
H. gazxoria; the name IHeteroscada thus becomes obsolete.

376 Dr. A. G. Butler on

7. Moschoneura tthomia.

Leptalis ithomia, Hewitson, Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 3, vol. vy. p. 562 (1867);
Exot. Butt. iv., Lep. pl. viii. fig. 49 (1870).

Ecuador. Type, coll. Hewitson.

DISMORPHIA.
Section Enanria, Hiibn.

If ‘the characters assigned to Hnantia were reliable it
would be of advantage to use them, as in the case of Pyrisitia
and Sphenogona (the characters of which are reliable), to
break up a somewhat unwieldy genus; but unfortunately
they vary not only in individuals of the same species, but to
a slight extent on the opposite wings of the same specimen.
For a section, the limits of which are somewhat uncertain,
the name may perhaps be used in a subgeneric sense.

Group I.

The “species,” so called, of this group are very closely
related, and, if bred, would probably have to be very greatly
reduced; they differ chiefly in the width and form of the
dark borders to the wings.

1. Dismorphia galanthis.
_Leptalis galanthis, Bates, Journ. Entom. i. p. 234 (1861).
Ega: B. M. Amazons and Ecuador: coll. Hewitson.

2. Dismorphia licinia.
Papilio licinia, Cramer, Pap. Exot. ii. pl. clit, E, F (1779).
Papilio phronima, Fabricius, Ent, Syst. iii. 1, p. 206 (1793).

Rio Janeiro: B. M. Cayenne and New Grenada: coll.

Hewitson.

3. Dismorphia lina.
Papilio lina, Herbst, Natursyst. Schmett. v. p. 75, pl. Ixxxix. figs, 3, 4
(1792).
Leptalis dilis, Boisduyal, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 427 (1836).
3, Brazil: B. M. 3 2, Rio Janeiro: coll. Hewitson.
1 have very little doubt that this is merely a seasonal
variety of the preceding species.

the Dismorphina of the New World. 377

4, Dismorphia mercenaria,
Leptalis mercenaria, Felder, Wien. ent. Monatschr. vy. p. 76 (1861 .

“ Venezuela” (Felder). Ecuador: coll. Hewitson.

This may possibly prove to be a wetter phase of D. ga-
lanthis.

5. Dismorphia limnorina.
Leptalis imnorina, Felder, Reise der Noy., Lep. ii. p. 189 (1865).

Rio Janeiro: B. M. Rio Janeiro and Espirito Santo:
coll. Hewitson.

6. Dismorphia aphrodite.
Leptalis aphrodite, Felder, Reise der Noy., Lep. ii. p. 189 (1865).
Brazil: B.M. Rio Janeiro and Ecuador: coll. Hewitson.

This and the three following will probably prove to be
varieties of one species.

7. Dismorphia tsodrita.
Leptalis isodrita, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 426 (1856).
Brazil (Bowsduval). 3 ¢, coll. Hewitson.

8. Dismorphia Kollari.

Leptalis Kollari, Lucas, Rey. et Mag. de Zool. 1852, p. 299.
Q. Dismorphia cretacea, Grose-Smith, Rhop. Exot. vol. ii,, Désm.
pl. i. figs. 4, 5 (1897).

3 3, Rio Janeiro. B. M.

9. Dismorphia acutipennis.

Enantia acutipennis, Butler, Entomologist, 1896, p. 26.
Dismorphia acutipennis, Grose-Smith & Kirby, Rhop. Exot. vol. ii.,
Dism. pl. iii. figs. 10, 11 (1897).

Trinidad (Hart). Type, B. M.

The acutely tipped primaries are badly shown in the illus-
tration.

10. Dismorphia marion.

Enantia marion, Godman & Salvin, Biol. Centr.-Am., Rhop. ii. p. 184
(1889).

?, Nicaragua. Coll. Hewitson.

Group II.

In my opinion the &. melite group will eventually be

378 Dr. A. G. Butler on

proved to consist of three variable species at most; but as
there is at present no possibility of being certain, I keep
them separate.

11. Dismorphia citrinella.
3. Leptalis citrinella, Felder, Wien. ent. Monatschr. y. p. 77 (1861).
Q. Leptalis flavia, Felder, l. c. p. 76 (1861).
“Venezuela” (Felder). Bogota: B. M. Ecuador: coll.
Hewitson.

12. Dismorphia albania.

Leptalis albania, Bates, Ent. Month. Mag. i. p. 6 (1864); Godman &
Salvin, Biol. Centr-Am., Rhop. p. 183, pl. Ixiv. figs. 27, 28, 3d,
pl. lxi. fig. 7 (1889).

Dismorphia amalia, Staudinger, Exot. Schmett. p. 26, “ D. cornelia,”
pl. xv. (1884).

3 3 2, Mexico: B. M. 6, hab.?: coll. Hewitson.

13. Dismorphia jethys.
Leptalis jethys, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 423 (1836).
Leptalis cornelia, Felder, Reise der Noy., Lep. ii. p. 140 (1865).
3 9, Mexico: B.M. ¢&, New Granada; ? ?, Mexico
and Nicaragua: B. M.
I believe the three preceding forms will prove to be varia-
tions of one species.

14, Dismorphia melite.
Papilio melite, Clerck, Icones, pl. xliy. fig. 5 (1764); Linnzeus, Syst.
Nat. i. 2, p. 755 (1767).

3 3 2 %, Rio Grande, Rio Janeiro, and Espiritu Santo:
B. M. New Granada, Rio Grande, and Rio Janeiro: coll.
Hewitson.

A male in the Museum from Theresopolis and a second in
the Hewitson collection seem to be intermediate between this

species and D. jethys.

15. Dismorphia theugenis.
Leptalis theugenis, Doubleday, Ann, & Maz. Nat. Hist. ser, 2, vol. i.
p- 124 (1848).

oo, Peru and Bolivia: type, B. M. Bolivia and

Ecuador: coll. Hewitson.

the Dismorphina of the New World. 379

Group ITT.

16. Dismorphia thermesia.
Pieris thermesia, Godart, Enc. Méth. ix. p. 164 (1819).
Leptalis thermesina, Hopfter, Stett. ent. Zeit. 1874, p. 333.

6322, Rio Janeiro, Rio Grande, Venezuela, and
Bogota: B. M. Rio Janeiro: coll. Hewitson.

Group IV.
17. Dismorphia critomedia.

3. Enantia critomedia, Hiibner, Zutr. exot. Schmett. figs. 795, 796
(1832).

3 ¢, Bogota: B.M. 9, New Granada; g 2 2, Bo-
livia: coll. Hewitson.

In the primaries of this species the first subcostal vein is
usually emitted a good distance before the end of the cell,
but occasionally only just before the end. In the type of the
genus (/. melite) it is either well before, at, or well beyond
the end of the cell.

18. Dismorphia crisia.
Q. Papilio crisia, Drury, Ill. exot. Ent. iii. pl. xxxvii. figs. 1, 2 (1782).
322, Brazil; § ¢, Espiritu Santo; type, B. M.
3 2 ¢, hab.?: coll. Hewitson.
In this species the first subcostal branch of the primaries
seems to be always emitted before the end of the cell. We
possess Drury’s original type of this butterfly.

19. Dismorphia fedora.
Leptalis fedora, Lucas, Rey. et Mag. de Zool. 1852, p. 298.
33629, Venezuela. B. M.

In this local representative of LD. crista the first subcostal
branch of the primaries is emitted either before or at the end
of the cell.

20. Dismorphia virgo.

Leptalis virgo, Bates, Ent. Month. Mag. i. p. 5 (1864); Godman &
Salvin, Biol. Centr.-Am., Rhop. ii. p. 184, pl. lx. figs. 14-16 (1889),

¢. Dismorphia lubina, Butler, Cist. Ent. i. p. 83 (1872); Lep. Exot.
p. 124, pl. xlvi. figs. 6, 7 (1875).

Q. Dismorphia lunina, Butler & Druce, Cist. Ent. i. p. 111 (1872) ;
Lep. Exot. p. 124, pl. xlvi. figs, 8, 9 (1873).

9, Chiriqui: B. M. 2g g, Costa Rica and Ecuador:

coll, Hewitson.

380 Dr. A. G. Butler on

In this species the first subcostal branch of the primaries is
usually emitted well beyond the end of the cell, rarely at the
end.

21. Dismorphia euryope.
Leptalis euryope, Lucas, Rey. et Mag. de Zool. 1852, p. 297 ; Godman
& Salvin, Biol. Centr.-Am., Rhop. ii. p. 186, pl. Ix. figs. 12,13
(1890).

3d, Mexico; ¢?, Colombia. B. M.

22. Dismorphia abilene.
2. Leptalis abilene, Hewitson, Exot. Butt. iv., Lept. vii. figs. 51 & 52
(as L. teresa, vide corrections) (1872).

3322, Ecuador. 9 type, coll. Hewitson.

In the Hewitson cabinet the males are separated from the
females and labelled ‘ ewryope”’; but they are quite distinct
from the insect figured by Hewitson (Exot. Butt. 11., Lep. ii.
fig. 17, 1858).

23. Dismorphia medora.
Leptalis medora, Doubleday, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. xiv. p. 420
(1844) ; Gen. Diurn. Lep. pl. v. fig. 4 (1847).
Leptalis casta, Kollar, Denkschr. Akad. Wiss. Wien, math.-nat. Cl. i.
p- 360, pl. xlv. figs. 9, 10 (1850).

Venezuela, Colombia, Bogota: type, B. M. Lcuador:
coll. Hewitson.

A variety (or possibly a local race) occurs also in Ecuador
in which the oblique yellow belt of the primaries is replaced
by a trifid bilobed oblique bar and a small transverse spot ;
of this form there is one example in the general series and
another in the Hewitson collection.

24, Dismorphia arcadia.

Leptalis arcadia, Felder, Wien. ent. Monatschr. vi. p. 410 (1862) ;
Reise der Nov., Lep. ii. p. 141, pl. xxii. figs. 1-5 (1865).
Leptalis idonia, Hewitson, Equat. Lep. p. 5 (1869); Exot. Butt. iv.,
Lep. pi. vii. figs. 44, 45 (1870).
Both varieties, Bogota: B. M. Hcuador: type, coll.
Hewitson.

25. Dismorphia lucilla, sp. n.
Leptalis arcadia, Hewitson, in coll.
Nearest to D. arcadia, var. tdonia; the yellow markings
on the upper surface of the male much richer in colour

the Dismorphina of the New World. 381

(gamboge rather than lemon-yellow) ; the spots representing
the band on the primaries much more widely divided ; the
band on the secondaries completely divided on the third median
branch and followed by a conical spot with its apex directed
towards the outer margin: on the under surface entirely
unlike D. arcadia, more nearly like D. medorilla; the
secondaries conspicuously blotched across the centre with
bright silvery patches.

Expanse of wings 58 millim.

The female is more like Felder’s figure of the female of
D. arcadia than the male is; it differs above in the streak-
like character of the submedian marking on the primaries, in
the orange suffusion of the oblique band beyond the cell, and
in the distinctly orange wash over the apical portion of the
yellow band on the secondaries; the fourth division of this
band is completely divided by a brown wedge-shaped bar
instead of enclosing a brown spot: the under surface some-
what resembles that sex of D. medorilla, but is altogether
more yellow, the oblique band of the primaries more orange,
and the secondaries conspicuously blotched with silver.

Expanse of wings 61 millim.

Ecuador. ‘Types, coll. Hewitson.

26. Dismorphia medorina.

Leptalis medorina, Hewitson, Ent. Month. Mag. xii. p. 9 (1875).
Dismorphia medorina, Grose-Smith & Kirby, Rhop, Exot. ii., Dism. i.
figs. 9-11 (1896).

Bolivia. Type, coll. Hewitson.

27. Dismorphia medorilla,

Leptalis medorilla, Hewitson, Equat. Lep. p. 81 (1877).
Dismorphia medorilla, Grose-Smith & Kirby, Rhop. Exot. ii., Dism, i.
figs. 4-6 (1896).

Ecuador. ‘Type, coll. Hewitson.

28. Dismorphia mirandola.

Leptalis mirandola, Hewitson, Ent. Month. Mag. xiv. p- 180 (1878).

Dismorphia discoloris, Weymer, Stett. ent. Zeit. ii. p. 292 (1890).

Dismorphia mirandola, Grose-Smith & Kirby, Rhop. Exot. ii. Dism.
i. figs. 7, 8 (1896).

Ecuador. Type, coll. Hewitson.

29. Dismorphia lua.

Leptalis lua, Hewitson, Equat. Lep. p. 5 (1869) ; Exot. Butt. iy,, Lep.
pl. vii. figs. 55, 54 (1870).

Ecuador. ‘Type, coll. Hewitson.

382 Dr. A. G. Butler on

30. Dismorphia hyposticta.

Leptalis hyposticta, Felder, Wien. ent. Monatschr. v. p. 77 (1861);
Reise der Noy., Lep. ii. p. 142, pl. xxii. figs. 7, 8 (1865).

9,“ Venezuela” (Felder). 3, Ecuador: coll. Hewitson.

Group V.

31, Dismorphia oreas.

Leptalis oreas, Salvin, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. vii. p. 416
(1871).

Enantia oreas, Godman & Salvin, Biol. Centr.-Amer., Rhop. p. 186,
pl. Ix. figs. 17, 18 (1890).

Veragua.
32. Dismorphia Lewyt.

&. Leptalis Lewy, Lucas, Rev. et Mag. de Zool. 1852, p. 296.

do. Leptalis nasua, Felder, Wien. ent. Monatschr. v. p. 76 (1861);
Reise der Nov., Lep. ii. p. 141, pl. xxii. figs. 4-6 (1865).

9. Leptalis Kadenit, Felder, Wien. ent. Monatschr. v. p. 77 (1861).

3 3, Bogota: B.M. 3 2 2, Bolivia: coll. Hewitson.

The females of this species and J). leonora vary so much
that it is difficult to believe them conspecific; yet inter-
mediates between the extremes exist.

33. Dismorphia leonora.

Leptalis leonora, Hewitson, Equat. Lep. p. 7 (1869) ; Exot. Butt. iv.,
Lep. pl. v. figs. 89-41 (1870).

@, Ecuador: B. M. 66 9 2, Ecuador: type, coll.
Hewitson.
34. Dismorphia Schausst.
Leptalis Schaussi, Dognin, Le Nat. 1891, p. 85.
?, Loja.
Does not this realize one’s ideas as to the female of
E. lycosura ?
35. Dismorphia lygdamis.

Leptalis lygdamis, Hewitson, Equat. Lep. p. 7 (1869) ; Exot. Butt. iv.,
Lep. pl. v. figs. 82-384 (1870).

$ 3 %, Ecuador. Type, coll. Hewitson.

36. Dismorphia lycosura.

Leptalis lycosura, Hewitson, Exot. Butt. 11, Lep. pl. iv. figs. 18, 20
* (1860),

Peru.

the Dismorphina of the New World. 383

I am not sure that the section for which the name Hnantia
was proposed ought not to end here, because at this point the
females begin to assume an Ithomeine or Acreine character ;
but as I desire to leave Hnantia as understood by its resusci-
tators (its limitations being purely arbitrary), the following
may be included :—

Group VI.

37, Dismorphia deione.

3. Leptalis deione, Hewitson, Ent. Month. Mag. vi. p. 63 (1869) ;
Exot. Butt. iv., Zep. pl. vi. figs. 37, 38 (1870).

2. Dismorphia hagaresa, Butler, Cist. Ent. i. p. 82 (1872); Lep. Exot.
p. 124, pl. xlvi. fig. 3 (1873).

3 $, Colombia: B. M. ¢¢ 2, Nicaragua: coll. Hew-

itson.

38. Dismorphia tapajona.

Q. Leptalis tapajona, Bates, Journ. Entom. i. p. 2381 (1861).
3. Leptalis zaela, Hewitson, Exot. Butt. ii., Lep. pl. iii. tig. 16 (1858).

3S YY, Heuador (type of D. zaela). Coll. Hewitson.

39. Dismorphia laja.
Q. Papilio laja, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iii. pl. eexxxii. C, D (1779).
“ Surinam ” (Cramer). 9%, Cayenne: coll. Hewitson.
The male of this species cannot differ very greatly from
that of D. tapajona.

40. Dismorphia teresa.
Leptalis teresa, Hewitson, Equat. Lep. p. 8 (1869); Exot. Butt. iv.,
Lep. pl. vii. figs. 50-52 (1870).
Leptalis pravidice, Hewitson, Trans. Ent. Soc. 1870, p. 153.

Eeuador. Types, coll. Hewitson.

41. Dismorphia hippotas.

Leptalis hippotas, Hewitson, Ent. Month. Mag. xii. p. 10 (1875).
Dismorphia hippotas, Grose-Smith & Kirby, Rhop. Exot. ii., Dism.
pl. iii. figs. 8, 9 (1897).

Ecuador. Type, coll. Hewitson.

42. Dismorphia melia.

3. Pieris melia, Godart, Enc. Méth. ix., Suppl. p. 814 (1823),
Q. Leptalis eumara, Doubleday, Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, vol. i.
p. 122 (1848).

384 Dr. A. G. Butler on

2. Leptahs acreoides, Hewitson, Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 2, vol. i. p. 99,
pl. xi. fig. 1 (1850).
a lad mimetica, Staudinger, Exot. Schmett. p. 25, pl. xv.

3 ?,Theresopolis; gg, Brazil: B.M. ¢ #2? 9 , Espi-
ritu Santo and Rio Janeiro; ¢, Minas Geraes: coll.
Hewitson.

The females vary a good deal in the colouring of the bands
across the primaries and the distinctness or otherwise of the
black veins.

43. Dismorphia lystanax.
Leptalis lysianax, Hewitson, Exot. Butt. ii., Lep. pl. iv. fig. 19 (1860).
¢, Upper Amazon. Type, coll. Hewitson.

44. Dismorphia tricolor,

Dismorphia tricolor, Grose-Smith & Kirby, Rhop. Exot. ii., Dism.
pl. ii. figs. 1, 2 (1897).

9, hab. ? .

This is a very good copy of a Eueides occurring in New
Granada.

We now come to the more typical species of Dismorphia.

Section DismorpHta, Hiibn.
Group VII.

45, Dismorphia carthesis.

Leptalis carthesis, Hewitson, Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 3, vol. vii. 1869,
p. 71; Exot. Butt. iv., Lep. pl. vi. figs. 35, 36 (1870),

Demerara. Type, coll. Hewitson.

46. Dismorphia avonia.

Leptalis avonia, Wewitson, Trans. Ent. Soe. ser. 3, vol. v. p. 563 (1867) ;
Exot. Butt. iv., Lep. pl. vii. figs. 46-48 (1870).

Quito. ‘l'ype, coll. Hewitson.

47. Dismorphia leuconia, sp. u.

Allied to the preceding species, but differing in the clear
greyish-white semihyaline spots on the apical half of the
primaries, the paler yellow discoidal streak of primaries and

the Dismorphina of the New World. 385

median belt of secondaries, the latter being broader and
shorter than in D. avonia.

Expanse of wings, ¢ 50 millim., 2 53 millim.

63, Ecuador: B. M. 9, Ecuador: type, coll.
Hewitson.

48. Dismorphia limonea, sp. n.

¢. Also allied to D. avonia, but considerably smaller ;
the whole of the markings on the primaries sulphur-yellow
(rather deeper than in LD. avonia), the discoidal streak
broader; the median belt on the secondaries rather deeper
yellow and of more even width, its outer edge being straight.

9. With all the yellow marks paler than in D. avonia;
the dark veining on the basal area of the primaries obsolete ;
the whitish costal streak on the secondaries regular, not
terminating in a lobe-like spot.

Expanse of wings, ¢ 39 millim., ? 43 millim.

¢ 2, Ecuador. ‘Type, coll. Hewitson.

The last three species are so evidently distinct to the eye
that it is annoying to discover how little difference in pattern
one is able to describe.

49, Dismorphia theonoe.

Leptalis theonoe, Hewitson, Exot. Butt. i., Eut. § Lep. pl. i. figs. 2, 5
(1852).

3, Tapajos: type, B. M. ¢ 2, Cayenne: coll. Hewitson.

50. Dismorphia melanoe.

Leptalis melanoe, Bates, Journ. Entom. i. p. 532 (1861); Trans, Ent.
Soe. xxiii. pl. lv. fig. 2 (1862).

3622, Sao Paulo. Coll. Hewitson.

51. Dismorphia Ribber.

Leptalis Ribbei, Godman & Salvin, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5,
vol. ii, p. 265 (1878).

Dismorphia Ribbei, iid. Biol. Centr.-Amer., Rhop., ii. p. 178, pl. Lxi.
fig. 4 (1890).

“ Chiriqui” (Godm. & Salv.). g $ & ¢, Colombia: B. M.

52. Dismorphia alterata, sp. n.

Colouring of the preceding species, but the male differs in
having a small cuneiform costal patch beyond the middle and

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. ii. 28

386 Dr. A. G. Butler on

an oblique dash rather larger than that of the female near the
outer margin; the female differs in having the band beyond
the middle of the primaries uninterrupted; both sexes show
hardly a trace of the reddish suffusion on the costa and apical
border of primaries below, but quite as much or more bright
orange on the secondaries.

Expanse of wings, ¢ 52 millim., 9 50 millim.

3 82, Colombia. Type, B. M.

53. Dismorphia fortunata.
d. Leptalis fortunata, Lucas, Ann. Soc. Ent. France, 1854, p. 55, pl. ills

fig. 1.

3. Leptalis antherize, Hewitson, Exot. Butt. ii., Lep. pl. iii. fig. 12
(1858).

¢. Leptalis argochloe, Bates, Trans. Linn. Soc. xxiii, pl. vi. fig. 6
(1862).

“ Mexico ” (Lucas). of 2, Nicaragua: coll. Hewitson.

54. Dismorphia leuconoe.
Leptalis leuconoe, Bates, Journ. Eutom. i. p. 2382 (1861) ; Trans. Linn
Soe. xxiii. pl. lvi. fig. 4 (1862).

Sitio Paulo. 2, coll. Hewitson.

55. Dismorphia erythroe.

Leptalis erythroe, Bates, Journ. Entom. i. p. 232 (1861) ; Trans. Linn.
Soc. xxiii. pl. lvi. figs. 1-8 (1862).

“ Sio Paulo.” g, Amazon: B.M. @ , coll. Hewitson.

Hewitson has a slight variety from Heuador.

56. Dismorphia flammula, nom. n.
Leptalis theonoe, var., Bates, Trans, Linn. Soe. xxiii. pl. lv. fig. 4 (1862),

9, Ega: B. M. Amazon: coll. Hewitson.

If this and the following are varieties, they must be
tolerably constant and frequent ones; but it appears to me
that whereas )). erythroe copies Leucothyris ilerdina, 1). flam-
mula more nearly resembles LHymenitis sarepta, and that
whereas D. fervida is a copy of Leucothyris priscilla, D. ly-
sinoe is stated by Bates himself to be “ quite unlike any
Ithomia found in the whole region,” and he regards it as a
mimic of Stalachtis Duvalit. It is hardly probable that mere
sports of the same species would be formed in imitation of
species belonging to different families or even different genera,

the Dismorphina of the New World. 387

57. Dismorphia fervida, nom. n.
Leptalis theonoe, var., Bates, Trans, Linn, Soe, xxiii. pl. ly, fig. 6 (1862),

595 Boa.) BoM.

58. Dismorphia lysinoe.
Leptalis lysinoe, Hewitson, Exot. Butt. i., Lut. § Lep. pl. i. figs. 3, 4
(1852).
3d2%, Hga: B. M. $99, Amazon: type, coll.

Hewitson.

59. Dismorphia lysinoides.

Q. Dismorphia lysinoides (as g), Staudinger, Exot. Schmett. p. 25,
pl. xv. (1884),

* Cauca” (Staudinger).

Very close to D. lysinoe, but with wider transparent areas
to the wings. If all the preceding species are to be regarded
(in the Batesian fashion) as varieties of D. theonoe, Staud-
inger’s species is hardly worthy to be called a sport; but I
cannot believe in such improbable variability in any species
unless it can be shown to have a seasonal value.

60. Dismorphia siloe.
Leptalis siloe, Hewitson, Exot. Butt. ii., Lep. pl. iii. fig, 14 (1858).
3, New Granada. ‘Type, coll. Hewitson.

The following species and others described with it were
incorrectly referred to in Grose-Smith and Kirby’s ‘ Rhopa-
locera Exotica’ as “ Butler, MS.” They had then been
published quite fifteen months,

61. Dismorphia nella.
Dismorphia nella, Butler, Entom. 1896, p. 26; Grose-Smith & Kirby,
Rhop. Exot, ii., Dism. pl. u1. figs. 6-8 (1897)
3, Bogota: type, B.M. ¢ 3 22, New Granada: coll.
Hewitson.

62. Dismorphia theucharila.

Leptalis theucharila, Doubleday, Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 2, vol. i.
p. 123 (1848) ; Hewitson, Exot. Butt. i., Hut. § Lep, pl. i. figs, 6-8
(1852).

3 2? 2, Venezuela: type, B. M. ¢ 9, coll. Hewitson,
28*

388 Dr. A. G. Butler on

Here follows a little group of species having somewhat the
colouring of the more typical forms of the section Hnantia,
but which I believe to be related to the D. theucharila and

D. rhetes groups, to which the outline of the wings apparently
allies it.

Group VIII.

63. Dismorphia pimpla.
Leptalis pimpla, Hopfter, Stett. ent. Zeit. 1874, p. 333.
3h 2 2, Bolivia. Coll. Hewitson.

64. Dismorphia lelew.

3. Leptalis lelexr, Hewitson, Equat. Lep. p. 6 (1869); Exot. Butt. iv.,
Lep. pi. v. fig. 24 (1870).

Q. Leptalis zathoe (L. lelex 2 in text), Hewitson, Exot. Butt. iv., Lep.
pl. v. fig. 25 (1870).

3 3 ¢, Ecuador. Type, coll. Hewitson.

65. Dismorphia proserpina.
Dismorphia proserpina, Grose-Smith & Kirby, Rhop. Exot. ii., Dism.
pl. iii. figs. 1-3 (1897).
“ Roraima ”’ (Grose-Smith). ¢ 3g ? ¢, not labelled: coll.

Hewitson.

The description of this species states that the lighter parts
of the wings are ‘ primrose-yellow ” ; this corresponds with
the examples in the Hewitson collection. ‘The figures repre-
sent these parts of the wings as milky whitish and the male
with a brown subcostal patch as in J). pallidula. Has the
wrong species been figured, or is the colouring defective ?

66. Dismorphia pallidula.

Dismorphia pallidula, Butler, P.Z. 8. 1874, p. 363 ; Godman & Salvin,
Biol. Centr.-Amer., Rhop. ii. p. 176, pl. lx. figs. 9-11 (1890).

3 ?, Colombia: B. M. , Costa Rica: coll. Hewitson.

67. Dismorphia othoe.

Leptalis othoe, Hewitson, Trans, Ent. Soc. ser. 3, vol. v. p. 562 (1867) ;
Exot. Butt. iv., Lep. pl. v. figs. 26-28 (1870).

6, Ecuador: B. M. oo 2 Y, coll. Hewitson.

the Dismorphina of the New World. 389

68. Dismorphia zathoe.

3. Leptalis zathoe, Hewitson, Exot. Butt. ii., Zep. pl. iii, fig. 15 (1858).
Leptalis core, Felder, Wien. ent. Monatschr. v. p. 77 (1861).

3, Bogota: type, B. M. 92, New Granada: coll.
Hewitson.

69. Dismorphia lysis.

Leptalis lysis, Hewitson, Equat. Lep. p. 6 (1869) ; Exot. Butt. iv., Zep.
pl. v. figs. 29-31 (1870).

3 6 2%, Heuador. Type, coll. Hewitson.

Group IX.

70. Dismorphia rhetes.
Leptals rhetes, Hewitson, Exot. Butt. ii., Lep. pl. ii. fig, 9 (1857).
“ Colombia ” (Botsduval).

The following seems extremely close to D. rhetes; but as
we only have a single example, it is impossible to say
whether or not it is absolutely constant to pattern :—

71. Dismorphia Hewitsoni.

Dismorphia Hewitsoni, Kirby, Trans. Ent. Soc. 1881, p. 355; Grose-
Smith & Kirby, Rhop. Exot. ii., Dism. pl. ii. figs. 9-11 (1897).

Ecuador. ¢ type, coll. Hewitson.

Group X.

72. Dismorphia orise.
Leptalis orise, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 415 (1836); Hewitson,
Exot. Butt. ii., Lep. pl. i. figs. 10, 11 (1857).

3g, Tapajos: B. M. ¢, Ecuador; ¢ ¢ ¢, not labelled:
coll, Hewitson.

73. Dismorphia sororna.
Dismorphia sororna, Butler, Cist. Ent. i. p. 82 (1872); Lep. Exot.
p. 122, pl. alvi. figs. 1, 2 (1873).

Costa Rica.
Allied to D. cordillera.

390 Dr. A. G. Butler on

74. Dismorphia myris.

Dismorphia myris, Godman & Salvin, Biol. Centr.-Amer., Rhop. ii.
p- 178 (1889).

Costa Rica and Panama.
Closely allied to 1). cordillera.

75. Dismorphia cordillera.

Leptatis cordillera, Felder,,Wien. ent. Monatschr. vi. p. 409 (1862) ;
Reise der Noy., Lep. ii. p. 145, pl. xxii. fig. 11 (1866).

3, Bogota: B. M. @, not labelled: coll. Hewitson.

76. Dismorphia larunda.

Leptalis larunda, Hewitson, Equat. Lep. p. 4 (1869); Exot. Butt. iv
Lep. pl. vi. figs. 42, 43 (1870).

& 38%, Ecuador. Type, coll. Hewitson.

Group XI.
77. Dismorphia discrepans.

¢. Dismorphia discrepans, Butler, Entom. 1896, p, 26.
¢, New Granada. Type, B. M.

Var. with yellow markings of primaries confluent.

3 2, New Granada. Coll. Hewitson.

78. Dismorphia rhomboidea.

3. Dismorphia rhomboidea, Butler, Entom. 1896, p. 27 ; Grose-Smith
& Kirby, Rhop. Exot. i1., Dism. pl. ii. figs. 8-5 (1897).

d, “Nauta” =H. Peru: type, B.M. 9, not labelled:
coll. Hewitson.

As already stated in the ‘ Entomologist,’ it is probable that
the female of this species and other unlabelled examples in the
Hewitson collection formed part of Buckley’s Ecuador series.

79, Dismorphia arsinoe.

Leptalis arsinoe, Felder, Reise der Noy., Lep. ii. p, 148, pl. xxii.
fivs. 9, 10 (1865).

6 2, New Granada. Coll. Hewitson.
80. Dismorphia amphione.

Papilio amphione, Cramer, Pap, Exot. iii, pl. eexxxii, E, F (1782).
6 ¢, Brazil: B. M. ¢, coll. Hewitson.

the Dismorphina of the New World. 391

81. Dismorphia beroe.
Leptalis beroe, Lucas, Rey. et Mag. de Zool. 1852, p. 295.

“ Bogota” (Lucas).
I have seen nothing which quite answers to the description
of this species.

82. Dismorphia egaena.
Leptalis egaena, Bates, Jown, Entom. i. p, 230 (1861); Trans. Linn.
Soe, xxiii. pl. lvi. fig. 7 (1862).
832 ¢,Hga: B.M. ¢ ¢ 2, Amazon: coll. Hewitson,

83. Dismorphia Broomee, sp. n.

&. Allied to D. egaena, but the longitudinal trifid streak
on the primaries divided by the median vein bright fiery
orange, more sharply defined than in D. amphione; the
oblique postmedian band bright yellow, washed in the centre
with bright orange, the discocellular black marking crescentic,
the last division of the band completely separated, forming an
elongated oval spot; the three subapical spots forming a
regular oblique series, smaller and more widely separated
from the postmedian band than in D. egaena, but less so than
in 1). amphione; the white patch on the secondaries purer
than in PD. egaena and the oblique belt from abdominal
margin bright fiery orange.

The female differs from that sex of JD. egaena in its alto-
gether brighter colouring (more like that of D. amphione), in
the narrower tawny-washed oblique band on the primaries,
with small discocellular black spot and divided terminal
yellow spot.

Expanse of wings, g 65 millim., ? 70 millim.

3 gS, Trinidad (Lady Broome and J. H. Hart); 8 3 2,
Venezuela (Vyson): B.M. 2 g, Caraccas: coll. Hewitson.

Local torm? ¢ 2 2, Ecuador: coll. Hewitson.

84, Dismorphia praxinoe.
Q. Leptalis praxinoe, Doubleday, Ann. & Mag, Nat, Hist. xiy. p. 419
(1844).
Leptalis amphithea, Felder, Reise der Nov., Lep. ii. p. 144 (1865),
Dismorphia arsinoides, Staudinger, Exot. Schmett. p. 25 (arsinoe), pl. xv.
(1884).
3 2%, Mexico (type); fg, Colombia: B. M. $2,

Nicaragua: coll. Hewitson.

392 Dr. A. G. Butler on

85. Dismorphia Perrensi.
Leptalis Perrensi, Gosse, Entom. xiii, p. 195 (1880).
3, Rio Grande: B. M. ¢ 6, not labelled: coll.

Hewitson.

86. Dismorphia astyocha.

Dismorphia astyocha, Hiibner, Zutr. exot. Schmett. figs. 485, 486
(1825).

33, Espiritu Santo, Brazil; ¢ 9, Organ Mountains,

Rio Janeiro: B. M. ¢ 2 9, Rio Janeiro: coll. Hewitson.

87. Dismorphia astynome.

Leptalis astynome, Dalman, Anal. Ent. p. 39 (1823). ;
Dismorphia polymela, Hiibner, Zutr. exot. Schmett. figs. 728, 724
(1832).

22, Brazil: B.M. 6 db 22, Rio Janeiro: coll. Hew-

itson.

Group XII.
88. Dismorphia eunoe.

Leptalis eunoe, Doubleday, Ann, & Mag. Nat. Hist. xiv. p. 419 (1844) ;
Gen. Diurn. Lep. pl. v. fig. 3 (1847).

9, Oaxaca, Mexico. Type, B. M.

89. Dismorphia cubana.
Leptalis cubana, Herrich-Schiiffer, Corresp.-Blatt zool.-mineral. Ver.
Regensb, xvi. p. 120 (1862).
Dismorphia cubana, Gundlach, Cont. Ent. Cubana, p. 81 (1881) ;
Grose-Smith & Karby, Rhop. Exot. ii., Dism. pl. i. figs. 1-8 (1896).
Leptalis spio, var. a, Boisduval, Sp. Gén, Lép. i. p. 421 (1836),

Cuba.

90. Dismorphia spio.
Pieris spio, Godart, Ene. Méth. ix, p. 167 (1819).
Leptalis spio, Hewitson, Exot. Butt. ii., Zep. pl. iv. figs, 21-23 (1860)

33 9,8St. Domingo. B. M.

Genus ACMEPTERON.

Although this genus was founded upon a secondary sexual
character which is not absolutely constant, it contains species
having an outline of wing differing to a certain extent from
anything else in the genus. The subcostal vein of the

the Dismorphina of the New World. 393

secondaries in the male more often than not emits its first
branch before or at the end of the cell, but not infrequently
the two branches fork from a short footstalk beyond the cell,
as in the female.

I have little doubt that this group of species branched off
‘rom Dismorphia as a development from D. nasua and allies,
which curiously approach it in coloration and somewhat in
outline of wing.

1. Acmepteron atthis.

@. Leptalis atthis, Doubleday, in Gray’s Zool. Misc. p. 75 (1842).

&. Very like A. nemesis, but without the yellow veins
and streaks on basal half of primaries; the yellow patch on
secondaries narrower, owing to the presence of a dark brown
dentate-sinuate border which extends along the outer margin
to the submedian vein.

Expanse of wings 67 millim.

icy, Wlexico. B. M:.

This is the species figured as Dismorphia nemesis by
Staudinger (Exot. Schmett. pl. xv.).

2. Acmepteron nemesis.

Pieris nemesis, Latreille, in Hombron & Bonpland’s Obs. Zool. ii. p. 78,
pl. xxxv. figs. 7, 8 (1811-19).

3d, Venezuela, Bogota, Colombia, Bolivia, EK. Peru:
B.M. oo 2 §, Ecuador: coll. Hewitson.

3. Acmepteron viridifascia.

Dismorphia viridifascia, Butler, Cist. Ent. i. p. 88 (1872) ; Lep. Exot.
p. 123, pl. xlvi. figs. 4, 5 (1873).

Costa Rica.

4, Acmepteron cinerascens.

Leptalis cinerascens, Salyin, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. vii.
p. 415 (1871).

Acmepteron cinerascens, Godman & Salvin, Biol, Centr.-Amer., Rhop.
ii. p. 180, pl. lx. fig. 8 (1889),

Costa Rica.

5, Acmepteron lala.

Acmepteron lala, Godman & Salvin, Biol. Centr.-Amer., Rhop. ii. p, 181,
pl. Lxiv. figs. 25, 26 (1889).

Guatemala.

394 Mr. A. O. Walker on

L1IV.—Podocerus and Jassa of Leach,
By ALFRED O. WALKER.

Mr. STEBBING’S unrivalled knowledge of the literature of the
Amphipoda and the careful accuracy of his work are so well
known that a corroboration of the conclusion he arrived at in
the paper in the March number of this Journal, viz. that the
true Podocerus of Leach is Platophium Darwinti (Bate), is
scarcely needed. Nevertheless, as the revolution in nomen-
clature caused by this discovery is so serious that persons
may be found who will object that something more is required
to support it than Milne-Edwards’s admittedly inaccurate
description and figures, I venture to offer the following
evidence. Having ascertained, by examination of Leach’s
type specimen last October, that Jassa pelagica, Leach, was
not the female of Podocerus falcatus (Mont.), but was (to use
G. O. Sars’s name) Janassa capillata (Rathke), I was led to
undertake an examination of the history of the genus Podo-
cerus, in which I have always taken a special interest. I was
of course not aware that Mr. Stebbing was doing the same.
I arrived substantially at the same conclusions as Mr, Steb-
bing, but, unlike him, was unable to identify Milne-Edwards’s
description and figure with any known Amphipod, as I could
uot suppose him to have invented the dorsal teeth on the
three segments. I therefore postponed the conclusion of a
paper I had written on the subject till I could again examine
the type specimens of Podocerus variegatus, Leach, at the
British Museum. This was delayed through a visit of six
weeks to the south of France, and it was only in passing
through London on my way home in the middle of March that
I was able to do so with the kind assistance of Mr. R. I.
Pocock. Neither he nor I then knew of Mr. Stebbing’s paper,
so that the opinion we both formed was absolutely unbiassed.

The type specimens, of which there are several, are either
pierced with a pin or gummed on a piece of card. There are
at least two species among them, one being apparently the
female or young of P. falcatus (Mont.). The other, however,
we liad no difficulty in deciding to be the species Milne-
Edwards intended to represent minus the dorsal teeth. The
antenne, fortunately, are nearly perfect, and though the first
gnathopods are either gone or hidden, yet the second gnatho-
pods, a first or second pereopod, and one or two of the last
perxopods still remain. Mr. Pocock and I agreed that these
corresponded with Platophium: but having Sars’s figure
of Latmatophilus (Platophium) tuberculatus (Bruz.) before us,

Podocerus and Jassa of Leach. 395

and supposing him to be right in uniting Cyrtophium Dar-
winwi, Bate, with that species, we were not satisfied with the
identity of the specimen. It seems, however, that Sars was in
error in uniting these two species; and when, on reaching
home a few days later, I had an opportunity of examining
specimens of C. Darwinii from the Devonshire coast, I had
vo longer any doubt of their identity with the British Museum
specimen. Itis therefore clear that Milne-Edwards’s P. varie-
gatus is Platophium Darwinit (Bate) ; and as it agrees in its
prominent eyes and the apparently nearly straight side of the
hand of the second gnathopods with Leach’s description much
more closely than does P. falcatus (Mont.) 2, the conclusion
arrived at by Mr. Stebbing seems irresistible.

As regards the question Mr. Stebbing raises, whether Jassa
falcata (Mont.) should be superseded by Jassa pulchella,
Leach, on the ground that the former species “‘remains....
indeterminate,” Iam “bold”? enough to say that I have no
doubt that Montagu’s species is the immature male of Leach’s
Jassa pulchella. As the author of Podocerus Herdmani
(P. odontonyx, G. O. Sars), I can hardly be suspected of a
bias in the direction of destroying that species; yet the expe-
rience gained since it was established has satisfied me that
neither size nor the depth of water at which a species may
have been taken are characters of any value. For instance,
the largest specimen of Jassa falcata (Mont.) in my collec-
tion {an adult male measuring 10 millim. in length) was
taken in 50 fathoms off Holyhead, while I have specimens of
the so-called P. Herdmani from quite shallow water. The
above large specimen has a distinct tooth on the dactylus, and
I have specimens with the tooth of various degrees of promi-
nence. The length of Montagu’s specimen is given as 5 lines
(say 10 millim.), but as he gives the length of Gammarus
locusta, Linn., in the same paper as 1 inch (25 millim.), which
is not only longer than the largest specimen I have from these
coasts, but also than the maximum size given by Sars
(20 millim.) for specimens from the Norway coast, it is quite
possible that he may have included the antenne in his measure-
ment. I will therefore conclude by expressing a hope that
the time-honoured specific name of falcata (Montagu) may
be spared to us in the general wreck of the Podoceride,

Colwyn Bay,
April 5, 1899.

396 M. P. de Grijs on the Faculty of

LV.—Notes on the Faculty of Changing Colour in Reptiles.
By P. pe Gris *.

Unpe_r the heading “ Briefliche Mitteilungen” in no. 9 of the
last annual volume of ‘ Der Zoologische Garten’ there appears
a communication from Dr. A. Hanau on the coloration of the
interstitial integument in T'ropidonotus ordinatus, var. sirtalis.
On reading the lines in question the thought involuntarily
occurred to me how little, after all, any observations are
capable of enlightening us as to the causes and efficacy of so
many phenomena in the animal kingdom. As the gentleman
referred to will undoubtedly have remarked, the question in
the case of 7’. ordinatus and all other species which have a
brightly coloured or marked interstitial integument is not of
a power of changing colour, but of fixed colours, which when
the body of the snake is not distended remain invisible owing
to the closely approximated scales. All the species of snakes
that I have hitherto observed possessed no trace of a power
of changing colour, such as is found in many other reptiles
and batrachians; | have never read that snakes possessing
the power of changing colour have been observed, and I think
that I shall not be wrong in absolutely denying to this order
the faculty of sudden alteration of hue. Now what can be
the reason that no single snake possesses the power of changing
colour? ‘To these animals, as protection against enemies or
for the purpose of stealing upon their prey, a change of colour
would in many cases be of just as great advantage as to many
Lacertilia. Leaving out of the question the poisonous snakes,
which are sufficiently protected from attacks by their bite,
there still remains the great multitude of non-poisonous
species, which have many enemies. It is true that many
non-poisonous snakes possess great activity and swiftness ;
but the same qualities are likewise shared by a large portion
of the Lacertilia which are able to change colour. I content
myself with having raised the question; it would be inter-
esting to bring about an exchange of opinions on the subject.
The fact that crocodiles and Chelonians are devoid of the
power of changing colour cannot reasonably create astonish-
ment; nature has furnished these creatures with sufficient
equipment for defence. But that among the snakes there
are no species at all with a more or less developed power of
changing colour is a fact that must attract our attention. We

#* Translated by E, E. Austen from ‘ Der Zoologische Garten,’ xl. Jahrg,
no. 2 (1899), pp. 49-55, ;

Changing Colour in Reptiles. 397

might well ask why it is that, in the strugele for existence, no
species of snake has been produced with a skin similar in
constitution to that of the Lacertilians which change their
hue. It may be that the constitution of the integumentary
coverings and of the skin itself is of such a kind that
a different arrangement of the pigment-cells cannot take
place. In order to decide the question it would be necessary
in the first place to determine what are the qualities in
respect of which the skin of reptiles which change their colour
differs fundamentally as regards anatomy from that of
those not endowed with this faculty. After that we might
perhaps hope to acquire information as to the reason why
a large number of lizards and all snakes are without the
power of changing colour.

In the Lacertilia the external constitution and covering of
the skin does not allow us to infer with certainty the posses-
sion of the power of changing colour. It is true that, gene-
rally speaking, it may be stated that lizards with a porous
integumentary covering (those that become wet if placed in
water) frequently possess the power of changing colour, and
that those with non-porous scales (from these water drips off
as from a greasy object) have none; but there are exceptions
to both categories. Most of the Lacertilia that change their
colour are distinguished by having small non-imbricated
scales ; but here also there are exceptions, and, on the con-
trary, many fine-scaled Lacertilia cannot change colour. It
is consequently impossible to set up any definite rules, and to
undertake a description of the coloration of Lacertilia based
upon spirit-specimens has therefore only a conditional value.
It is true that the Lacertilians which change colour generally
assume the same coloration in death, so that it is possible to
determine spirit-specimens. An attempt, however, to deter-
mine species of Anolis, for example, from descriptions of
colour alone would scarcely lead to a definite conclusion as to
the classification of a species.

The power of changing colour in Lacertilia differs greatly —
on the one hand as regards intensity and frequency, on the
other in respect of the purposes which it serves.

Whether, after all, in the case of Lacerta agilis, viridis,
and muralis we would regard as the faculty of changing
colour the regular alteration of hue in spring or at the
pairing-season of the species inhabiting temperate zones is a
question that may remain undecided; it is true that it does
not depend upon the will of the creatures themselves, but
neither can it be compared with the alteration of colour in
mammals and birds. At any rate I am of opinion that here

398 M. P. de Grijs on the Faculty of

also there ensues a movement of the pigment-cells, which
certainly is quite slow, but nevertheless analogous to that
which takes place in the creatures which are capable of
changing colour quickly. This view is supported by the
fact that also in the case of the Lacertilia which change their
colour in the course of quite a short space of time the will is
not always active, but, on the contrary, external influences
compel the animal to change its colour. A chameleon that
has been exposed for a time to great heat always becomes
bright yellow.

The intensity of the colour-change differs extremely in the
different species. In the first instance two groups can be
established :—

I. Ground-colour and marking alter equally in tone, but
the marking does not disappear.

II. Ground-colour and marking each alter in tone indepen-
dently of the other; spots may entirely disappear.

To the former group belongs, for instance, Humeces
Schneideri. Under the influence of heat this species always
appears quite bright greyish yellow, with bright yellowish-
red spots. In an unheated cage the animal assumes a dark
greyish-brown colour, and the spots appear brick-red. Of
the lizards that I have kept I also assign to this group
Tarentola annularis, which varies from blackish brown to
bright sand-colour, with constant marking; Uromastiz,
which likewise appears lighter under the influence of heat ;
Sceloporus undulatus, the upper surface of which assumes a
considerably brighter tone under the influence of the sun’s
rays; Crotaphytus collaris, a species which, when the tempe-
rature is low, appears dusky grey, while in heat the head
becomes almost white, the body bluish grey, the feet appear
shining bluish green, and the tail becomes bluish white, but
all markings composed of spots remain constant; besides
these there are Phrynosoma cornutum and Amphibolurus bar-
batus, both of which become brighter under the influence of
heat, various species of ground Agama (Agama mossambica
and A, stellio), as also Cachrya defensor, of which the body-
colour passes from blackish grey to light blue, while the
marking of spots remains unaltered.

To the second group belong, among others, Anolis, Agama
sanguinolenta and A. tnermis, Phrynocephalus, Iguana,
Calotes, and Chameleon. Chamaleon really forms a group
by itself, since its power of changing colour materially exceeds
that of all other species. In the species mentioned there con-
sequently takes place a double change of colour in a more or
less pronounced degree, in so far as ground-colour and spots

Changing Colour in Reptiles. 399

can each undergo a change of hue independently of the other.
Taking the body as a whole, the number of different colora-
tions which Chameleon, in particular, is able to assume
becomes in this way very large. Moreover, at least in Zguana,
Calotes, and Chameleon vulgaris (not in all varieties), the
spots may entirely disappear, which is never the case in the
species of the first group. It is, however, important to draw
attention to the fact that, so far as my experience extends, no
reptile that changes colour possesses the faculty of allowing
alterations to take place in the outlines of the spots. Since
the changes of tint recur with a certain regularity, it is after
continued observation very easy to determine that ground-
colour and spots always show precisely the same limitations so
long as the animals do not appear of one colour. If we have
once determined these limitations we shall find that no other
pattern is ever produced under all gradations of tint; the
spots always occur in precisely the same part of the body and
have the same size and outline. Besides the faculty of
changing its ground-colour and the colour of its spots inde-
pendently of each other, Chameleon also possesses the power
of producing another kind of marking. This marking con-
sists in the entire body of the animal appearing as if strewn
with numerous roundish black specks. he broad circle of the
eyelid is then seen to be coloured in radii. This coloration
only occurs when the animal is alarmed, and here also the
number and arrangement of the spots are, as I have convinced
myself, always the same.

It would lead us too far to give an enumeration of all
possible changes of colour in the different species. Observa-
tion shows, however, that they recur with a certain regularity,
and consequently must also have a definite object.

So far as it is possible to recognize this object, several
divisions can again be set up, according to which the power
of changing colour can be classified.

In the sense of the Darwinian theory, the power of changing
colour may have arisen, or, let us say, have been developed :—

I. For the purpose of protection against enemies.

II. As a means of absorbing or warding off heat.

III. Through sexual selection.

While in the case of some of the reptiles which change
colour only one of the objects named is to be recognized, in
others the change of hue fulfils two or even all of the purposes
referred to.

It is to be regarded as protective coloration when Agamzx
and Geckos assume the tint of the ground or bark go
precisely as scarcely to be distinguished from the surface on

400 M. P. de Grijs on the Faculty of

’

which they rest. The change of colour of the species of
Anolis undoubtedly serves these animals in the first place
for protection. ‘That the change of colour in Anolis is partly
spontaneous [ was able to determine with certainty from
specimens that I kept in captivity; for so long as I kept
various examples of A. principalis in a vivarium destitute of
plants it was only rarely and only under the influence of
sunshine that the animals assumed the splendid green colour.
Since, however, I have allowed the lizards to run about
freely in a glazed verandah full of plants they are almost con-
tinually green, and this even when the sky is overcast. The
change of colour in the chameleon also serves the almost
helpless animal preeminently for protection, for, as a Spanish
proverb has it, “a chameleon seen is a chameleon lost”!
It is an interesting fact that the power of changing colour in
Chameleon vulgaris has apparently adapted itself to the
localities whence the specimens are obtained. Examples .
from places poor in vegetation are unable to produce the
beautiful blue-green tints which are assumed by those coming
from districts in which plants abound. Some years ago I
received some extremely vividly coloured specimens of this
kind which I was at first inclined to regard as belonging to
a distinct species. 1 was not told where they had been found,
and no such specimens have since come under my notice.

The coloration of Jguana tuberculata is also protective. It
is true that in this species it is only variations from light and
dark green that are possible; markings consisting of spots
may either appear or disappear. The change of colour in
Iguana seems to be more pronounced in young than in old
animals; yet I have not sufficient experience as to this, since
it was only quite a young individual that I was able to observe
more closely.

That some species spontaneously utilize their power of
changing colour in order to absorb or to ward off heat is
perhaps of more subordinate importance. It is probably a
matter of general knowledge that in cool weather Chameleon
vulgaris becomes almost black on the side on which the
sun’s rays fall. If the same species be exposed to great heat
it becomes bright yellow. A specimen of Amphibolurus
barbatus that I have been keeping for a long time turns a
perfectly dark colour in the morning, when the first rays of
the sun fall into its cage ; at midday it is pale grey, and with
continuous sunshine the head is almost white. Most of the
Agamide and Iguanide, which inhabit the deserts and
steppes, become paler under great heat.

Of much greater importance, on the other hand, is the

Changing Colour in Reptiles. 401

change of colour that takes place in many lizards in the male
sex for the purpose of exercising an attraction over the females
at the pairing-season. ‘The occurrence in the Lacertilia of a
power of changing colour in this direction is already in itself
a proof of the higher development of these animals as com-
pared with the snakes. Among the Ophidia we find little
divergence in the colour of the sexes and in the shape of the
body, indeed, apart from the length of the tail, scarcely any
difference at all. In the Lacertilia, on the contrary, the
difference between the sexes is frequently very strongly
marked; I need only allude to the throat-sacs and crests.

Well-known examples of the power of changing colour
which have probably arisen through sexual selection are
afforded by Agama tnermis and Sceloporus undulatus. In
respect of the Darwinian theory these species are so much the
more interesting in that in them, simultaneously with the
colour-changing faculty, quite peculiar habitual movements
have been developed. In order to remain invisible to the
eyes of their enemies—probably in the majority of cases
birds—when looked at from above it was necessary that the
change of colour should be contined to the throat and sides of
the belly. Lest, however, the beauty of their wooers should
escape the glances of the females, the former had to adopt
their peculiar nodding and bobbing up and down movements,
in order to render their chief adornment visible. ‘The splendid
blue coloration of the throat and sides of the belly in Agama
inermis and Sceloporus undulatus is, moreover, not so much
spontaneous as dependent on the temperature. In the case of
Agama the blue colour disappears entirely in cool weather or
persists upon the throat only in the form of a_ blackish
marbling; in Sce/oporus during cold the blue passes into
black, but generally allows a blue metallic sheen to be
detected. I am not aware whether Chameleon arrays itself
in especially vivid colours at the breeding-season. I am
inclined to think, however, that the species employs its pecu-
liarly well-developed power of changing colour also as a
means of attracting the female sex ; and I[ do so because the
extremely quarrelsome males at once assume vivid colours on
catching sight of one another.

Our knowledge of colour-change in Lacertilia is probably
exceedingly small in comparison with that which has still to
be discovered. Most of the species which change colour are
small and delicate animals that never reach Kurope alive at
all. ‘That the large powerful species are less in need of a
protection derived from colour is evident ; they will therefore,
in the majority of cases, have fixed colours. Anyone who

Ann. & Mag. N, Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iii. 29

402 Mr. J. J. Quelch on the

looks through a collection of smaller lizards preserved in
alcohol will scarcely gain an idea of the splendour of colour
that many of the faded carcases may exhibit in life. At any
rate, for the purpose of an exhaustive study of Lacertilia the
observation of living material can be much less easily
dispensed with than in the case of the Ophidia. It would
therefore be desirable that such zoological gardens as seek to
advance science should direct their attention more than
hitherto to the importation of the first-mentioned animals.
With the commercial relations that Germany possesses a
successful result should not be difficult of attainment, and
should scarcely entail any considerable monetary sacrifice.

LVI.—The Poisonous Snakes of British Guiana.
By J. J. QuetcH, B.Sc. (Lond.), C.M.Z.5.*

Ir an ordinarily well-informed person be questioned as to the
abundance or paucity of poisonous snakes in the Colony, no
doubt the answer would deal rather with swarms than with a
few, with the implication not only of numbers of any one
particular kind, but also of many different species. And yet,
as a fact, there are only about eight well-marked different
species, of which two pit-vipers only are of such common
occurrence as to present some element of dread to general
travellers. In the open savannahs or cleared lands and on
the sparsely clumped sandy wastes the rattlesnake is likely
to be encountered, while in the forest itself or adjoining lands
the labarria (known variously in different districts as Jararaca
or Fer-de-lance) takes its place.

Of the remaining six species two are pit-vipers and four
coral-snakes ; but while, from their general size and character,
the pit-vipers and one of the coral-snakes are certainly to be
feared if met with, the other three seem to be usually alto-
gether inoffensive creatures, and, in fact, much less ready or
more disinclined to bite if irritated or handled than the gene-
rality of the common harmless snakes.

In using the term poisonous snakes it must be understood
to refer only to those special forms which, from the perfection
of the poison-apparatus, are able to cause serious injury or
death to man and other large mammals. Such are the vipers
and those members of the Colubrine division which bear

* From ‘Timehri: the Journal of the Royal Agricultural and Com-

mercial Society of British Guiana,’ vol. xii. part i., new ser. 1898,
pp. 26-86.

Poisonous Snakes of British Guiana. 403

anterior, grooved, or perforated fangs in connexion with the
poison-glands. ‘The members of a very large section of what
are commonly termed harmless snakes are, however, really
poisonous to a certain extent, possessing grooved posterior
fangs, the bite from which is capable of paralyzing or killing
the small prey on which they feed. On man this bite pro-
duces, at any rate in certain cases, an effect quite independent
of the mechanical injury. This the writer personally expe-
rienced in the case of the common species of Hrythrolamprus
(Z. esculapii= EH. venustissimus), as recorded in ‘ Timehri,’
vol. vi. new series (1892), p. 174. Three bites from the
snake were received on the first finger, the posterior fangs
being driven down deeply into the flesh each time, and after
a short interval very considerable swelling and severe pain
resulted, which was only relieved after about four hours,
though the place was tender for a much longer time.

A similar effect on man is certainly produced by the bite of
some Colubrine snakes which are destitute of grooved teeth.
This has been directly noted by the writer in the case of two
species with enlarged elongated posterior teeth, namely
Xenodon severus and Helicops angulutus, where the teeth were
driven deeply down into the flesh, and it would appear that
ill effect is only caused by a large wound of a great degree of
penetration admitting matter from the buccal glands, which
would be impossible in a bite of slight or only moderate
depth. An interesting relation between the two groups is
seen in forms of the common species of Hrythrolamprus, in
which certain specimens are destitute of the groove on the
posterior fangs.

The foregoing cases may serve to explain the peculiarity
of the very large number of instances in which persons have
been said to have been bitten by the common forest pit-viper
or labarria and have recovered, and the extreme simplicity of
the remedies used, such, for instance, as sugar and salt,
paraffin oil, onion poultice, external application of ammonia,
and other such substances, some of which may certainly be
efficacious in allaying pain and lessening inflammation, but
would have no real effect in dealing with a case of a lethal
dose of snake-poison, especially after the more or less long
intervals which usually elapse before such applications can be
made. In certain cases, no doubt, the snakes may have been
labarrias whose glands may not have been fully charged and
whose bite would therefore not inject sufficient poison to kill;
but in the great majority of cases it may be taken for granted
the snakes were really not deadly, though perhaps capable of
producing a certain amount of inflammation and more or less

29*

404 Mr. J. J. Quelch on the

severe pain by means of the enlarged posterior maxillary
teeth, whether grooved or not.

To those who have an exact knowledge of snake-structure
the matter is simple enough, but to the ordinary mind every
dark snake is likely to be a labarria; and whether the nature
of the fangs be rightly determined or not, the deadliness of
the serpent would be regarded as evident even before inflam-
mation and severe pain began.

In the case of the other common pit-viper, the rattlesnake,
there is no such doubtfulness of identification, the rattle
affording a certain means; and it is noteworthy that while
one seldom or never hears here of a case of recovery from the
bite of a rattlesnake unless some such certain method of
treatment as amputation of the part has been resorted to, the
reputed cases of recovery from the bite of the labarria are
as common as the remedies employed are inefficacious for the
purpose.

The species of rattlesnake (Crotalus terrificus) which is
found in the Colony is commonly distributed over tropical and
subtropical America, ranging from Texas and New Mexico
to Northern Argentine. Specimens vary somewhat in tint
and markings, at times being very dull-coloured and at others
quite bright and striking. The brown ground-colour is
usually marked on the neck by two black lines which pass
into aseries of dark rhombs with lighter centres along the
back, the whole being outlined by a series of yellow or paler
scales; and the scales are tuberculate and give a very rough
aspect to the skin. Owing to the peculiar markings the skins
are in great request for pouches, purses, belts, and other such
objects—neckties even being at times prepared from them.

A peculiar feature in these and the other American vipers
is the pit situated on each side of the face below and between
the nostril and the eye, and which has secured for them the
distinctive title of ‘ pit-vipers,” though its function is by no
means evident.

The most characteristic feature of the species is, of course,
the rattle, which, as is well known, is made up of a number
of separable three-lobed pieces, closely packed together and
interlocked by the incurving of the first lobe of each piece
over the second lobe of the preceding, which allows the free
movement of each, with the resulting shrill sound. Detailed
reference to the structure and development of the peculiarities
of this appendage is, however, unnecessary here, since in
vol. v. new series, 1891, of ‘Timehri’ the matter has been
already dealt with ; but it may be as well to point out that
the popular idea that a new ring is added each year, and

EEO

Poisonous Snakes of British Guiana. 405

that therefore the number of rings give the age of the snake,
is quite a mistaken one. Young rattlers are observed to
exuviate on an average about every two months, and adults
at times varying from three to five months under normally
healthy conditions. Moreover the rings observed on a rattle
vary entirely according to the number of pieces which have
been broken away by damage from contact with sticks, stones,
and other such objects. The older and more delicate pieces
invariably get broken off, and those that remain represent
only the harder and denser pieces which have been added
during the most recent exuviations. The number present
therefore is purely accidental.

As already mentioned, this is the commonest of the
venomous snakes in the cleared or savannah lands. They
will be found occasionally in cultivated fields, under or in the
houses of the settlements, or along the paths, and are more
frequently met with in open sandy and rocky ridges and
wastes than in the actual swamps. Open lands with low
scattered bushes are much more preferred than high forest,
where they are seldom if ever met with.

The species is much less secluded in its habits than the
generality of serpents, and will be more frequently observed
in exposed places in the daytime than other forms, though
the greater part of its activity is exercised at night, as is
customary in the group. Asa fact, much of the security of
man as against snake-bite is due to the nocturnal habits of
these creatures, owing to which they are not frequently
brought in contact with man in the retired places which they
seek out from daylight.

Little is known of the breeding-habits of these creatures.
From actual cases which have been under observation, it
seems likely that the number of young produced at one time
is about from twenty to thirty—twenty-three, twenty-four,
and twenty-two being the numbers in three cases.

The rattlesnake reaches a length of from 5 to 6 feet, and
the adult females are peculiarly stout.

In many of its characters the bushmaster or Coonoocooshi
(Lachesis mutus) closely resembles the rattlesnake. The
ground-tint, however, is reddish or maize-coloured, while the
rhombs, which are elongated and irregular, are of a deep
chocolate or purplish black. The tail is terminated by a
conical spine replacing the rattle, and its under surface is
covered with small scales instead of the ordinary posterior
shields. The gape is marked by a black streak, and the
shield above the eye (supraocular) is small and narrow com-
pared with the width of the head.

406 Mr. J. J. Quelch on the

This snake is certainly the giant among vipers, a specimen
14 feet in length having been taken in the Colony by Mr. John
Junor. Specimens.of from 8 to 12 feet are by no means
uncommon, especially in the higher districts of the north-
west, where they seem to be much more common than else-
where. It is certainly the species that is most feared locally,
being credited with the habit of attacking people whenever
met with. This, however, is not the case, for in the writer’s
experience they have always remained as though asleep, and
even on disturbance merely raised the head, darting out the
tongue, as all these pit-vipers do, unless the disturbance be of
a more or less violent kind. From the size to which it attains
the bushmaster is, however, justly entitled to the dreadful
reputation which it bears.

Under “ Occasional Notes”’ in a former number of ‘'Timehri’
an incident is narrated on the authority of Mr. Barnard, the
well-known American mining expert in the Colony, of one
of these snakes being observed to give out from its mouth,
after being severely wounded, a number of small young
specimens. Mr. Barnard asseverates that there was not, nor
could there have been, any possible mistake of the anus for
the mouth, the snake being directly observed in the water
when it was struck. Since then another incident of the same
kind has been observed by him, also in the Upper Mazaruni
districts, and, there being no mistake, these incidents would
seem to show that young vipers do at times take refuge in the
mouth of their parent, however unlikely it may appear.

The labarria (Lachesis atroa) includes not only theecommonly
known form which passes under this name in the Colony, but
also the fer-de-lance and the jararaca, which are evidently
but varieties of one and the same widely distributed species.

Like the bushmaster, they possess a terminal horny spine
and a black streak from the eye to the angle of the mouth;
but the underside of the tail bears no small scales replacing
the subcaudal shields, and the supraocular shield is large. The
head, too, is much more sharply pointed, with distinct raised
edges, the part anterior to the eye forming almost a neat
triangle, and the scales are imbricated, being more elongate
than tuberculate.

The colour of this species is very variable, ranging through
ervey, brown, reddish, and yellow, or a mixture of them. The
rhombs are sometimes represented, but always faintly so—
triangular spaces, outlined by paler or darker streaks, and
with the apices above, being the most common—or the body
may be simply spotted or slashed with lighter or darker tints.
The underside may be uniform, or spotted, or blotched and

MD DINE

Poisonous Snakes of British Guiana. 407

speckled. In very young specimens the end of the tail is
yellowish white from birth and the general marking is much
deeper and richer than in the adults.

Full-grown specimens reach a length of about 5 feet, the
females being much stouter in proportion than the males.
The number of young at a birth, from observed cases, appears
to range from twenty to thirty, as in the rattlesnake; but the
young labarrias are much smaller in proportion, corresponding
to the markedly thinner build of the body in the two species.

As already mentioned, this is the commonly distributed
forest- or bush-viper. Many harmless colubrine snakes and
some of the boas, which possess some resemblance to it in
markings, are frequently mistaken for it—mistakes that are
very likely to be confirmed in the mind of the observer by
the fact of the more or less severe pain and swelling which
temporarily follow the bite of many of the colubrines with
elongated and enlarged posterior teeth. One of these latter
(Helicops angulatus) goes by the common name of water-
labarria, and on this account bears an unjustly bad repu-
tation.

The three vipers above described are strictly terrestrial
forms, but the green labarria (Lachesis bilineatus) is an
arboreal species with prehensile tail. The body is uniformly
green or spotted and speckled with black, and is marked on
the outer scales with a yellow lateral line or series of spots.
The end of the tail is red.

This species, which reaches a length of from 3 to 4 feet,
does not appear to be common, or it well may be that it is not
frequently observed owing to its green colour; and there are
consequently but few cases of its being taken. Several
green and harmless colubrines, and even the green boa, are
generally mistaken for it, and they all appear to be designated
“narrot’’-snakes on account of their colour. The finely-
scaled head with raised anterior edges, the loreal pit, the

- viperine fangs, and the other crotaline characters, however,

will easily serve to distinguish it.

The remaining venomous species all belong to the genus
Elaps, which is the American representative of that section of
the Colubrina to which the cobra and the greater number of
the Eastern venomous serpents belong. In them the anterior
maxillary teeth are perforated fangs which are permanently
erect, the jaw not hinging on the skull as in the viperine
snakes.

As already stated, only one of these species, the largest
(Elaps surinamensis), is really to be dreaded; in the Colony
it goes by the common name “ Himeralli,” and attains a

408 On the Poisonous Snakes of British Guiana.

length of 6 feet. They are found along the waterside on the
great rivers and along the sheltered creeks, and are thus not
easily secured.

The species will readily be recognized by its red colour
and by the black and yellow rings, the black being arranged
in threes, with the central one very broad in comparison with
the other two, each set of three separated from the others by
a broad band of red, and each one ring of the set from the
next by a band of yellow. The red scales of the head also
are black-edged and give a very peculiar appearance to the
species,

Two other common species (Zlaps corallinus and Elaps
lemniscatus) will readily be recognized by the arrangement of
the black and red bands. In the latter the black rings are in
sets of three separated from each other by narrow yellow or
whitish spaces, and each set of three from the next set by red
bands, which are usually wider than the others.

In Elaps corallinus the black and red bands are more or
less regularly arranged, the black being edged with yellow,
and the red spotted with black. ‘These species reach a length
of 8 to 4 feet, H. lemniscatus being at times longer and com-
paratively thick.

They are both found in moist grassy places, more espe-
cially by the trenches and creeks and in swampy lands.
They pass usually under the common name of “ coral ’’-snakes,
and are frequently confounded with red and black banded
harmless species, such, for instance, as Lrythrolamprus
esculapit. In all the venomous species the eyes are very
small and can hardly be distinguished, while in the others
they are large and prominent; and this serves as a rough and
ready means for the identification of the two groups.

Though capable of inflicting severe injury, if not death, on
man, no case has ever come under the writer’s notice in which
such results have been experienced. Frequently these snakes
will be seen being carried about by children and others who
have not the faintest suspicion of the risk they run; and even
when irritated it is generally a difficult matter to get them to
open their mouths.

A fourth and rare small species (laps psyches) will at
times be met with. It may well be called the pigmy coral-
snake, since it seems never to exceed a length of about
13 teet. It will readily be recognized by the alternate black
and reddish-brown rings, which are separated by narrow
yellowish rings. The head, too, is black, and is marked on
each side by a small yellow spot. From the rareness of its

On new Species of Land-Shells. 409

oceurrence this form may practically be disregarded in the
enumeration of the venomous species.

It should be noted in connexion with these banded or coral-
snakes that a very great deal of variation characterizes the
greater number of species, and though they have been grouped
under many different names, it can hardly be doubted that
many of them will have eventually to be placed together.
The four here mentioned are definitely well-marked forms.

LVII. —Diagnoses of new Species of Land-Shells from the
Islands of Flores, Sumbawa, and Sumba. By EDGAR
A. SMITH.

Aritophanta sumbawana,

Testa depresse globosa, anguste umbilicata, dilute olivaceo-fuscescens,
zona indistincta pallida prope medium cincta, linea rufa ad peri-
pheriam ornata ; spira breviter conoidea, ad apicem obtusa;
anfractus sex, superiores parum convexiusculi, lineis incrementi
obliquis curvatis aliisque spiralibus minute grano-decussati,
ultimus levior, inflatus, subtus nitens, haud descendens ; aper-
tura obliqua, late iunata, intus albido-ceerulescens, linea rufa
dimidiata; peristoma tenue, margine columellari aibo, leviter
incrassato, ad insertionem expanso, reflexo, umbilicum semi-
obtegente.

Diam. maj. 43 millim., min. 34; alt. 27.

Hab. Sumbawa, 4000 feet.

Both the upper and lower surface of the body-whorl
exhibit faint spiral strie, which do not, however, produce
fine granulation as on the upper whorls. Closely allied to
Nanina arguta, Pfr., from Java, but more finely sculptured
and more rounded at the periphery and banded.

Tthysota peramena,

Testa depressa, inflata, anguste umbilicata, tenuis, pallide fusco-
olivacea, apicem versus purpureo-rufescens, circa medium anfr.
Le linea rufa cincta; spira convexa, brevis, obtusa; anfractus

54, lineis incrementi obliquis arcuatis, striisque spiralibus con-
Peatis subgranose cancellati, superiores vix convexiusculi, sub-
lente aperesuontes: ultimus magnus, inflatus, convexus, haud
descendens, circa umbilicum haud granulatus ; apertura obliqua,
latissime lunata, intus sordide Gemilesedesta in medio uni-zonata ;
peristoma tenue, m margine columellari prope insertionem reflexo
et dilatato, dilute corneo.

Diam. maj. 41 millim., min, 33; alt. 26.

Hab, South Flores, at 3600 feet.

410 On new Species of Land-Shells.

Only a single specimen obtained. Beneath the peripheral
red line the colour for a short space is darker than the rest
of the whorl, and just above it is a narrow and somewhat
pale zone. The fine granular sculpture extends over the
entire surface, with the exception of a small space around
the umbilicus.

Nesta carinocincta,

Testa depressa, orbicularis, carinata, imperforata, tenuis, cornea,
pellucida, polita ; spira depressa, ad apicem obtusissima ; anfr. 4,
celeriter crescentes, conyexiusculi, supra suturam concave im-
pressi, superiores tres spiraliter minute punctato-striati, striis
in anfr. ultimo sensim evanescentibus, ultimus ad peripheriam
fortiter carinatus, supra et infra carinam concavus et rugis
obliquis pancis hic illic instructus, antice haud descendens ; aper-
tura late oblique lunata, intus callo tenui nitente cxerulescente
induta; perist. tenuissimum, margine columellari ad_ inser-
tionem leviter incrassato, reflexo, albo.

Diam. maj. 25 millim., min. 20; alt. 14.

Hab. 8. Flores, at 3000 feet.

Distinguished by the flattish spire, carinate body-whorl,
thin texture, the fine punctate striation upon the spire, &c.,
and allied to X. Bocki (Smith), originally described as a
species of Helicarion.

Hemiplecta adolescens.

Testa imperforata, trochiformis, carinata, supra medium flavescens,
infra pallida, ad carinam linea fusco-nigra cincta, ad apicem
obtusa, nigrescens; anfractus 53, superiores tres convexi, se-
quentes minus convexi, oblique striati, ultimus ad peripheriam
acute carinatus, haud descendens; sutura carina marginata ;
apertura angulato-lunata; peristoma tenue, simplex, margine
columellari ad insertionem reflexo.

Diam. maj. 124 millim., min. 11; alt. 10.

Hab, Dongo Mountain, Sumbawa.
The generic position of this species is rather uncertain.
All the four specimens have a somewhat immature aspect.

Chloritis (Trichochloritis) conjecta.

‘Testa depressa, suborbicularis, late umbilicata, cornea, subpellucida,
incrementi lineis tenuibus striata, undique conspicue punctata ;
spira depressa, ad apicem obtusa ; anfractus 5, convexi, sutura
subprofunda sejuncti, ultimus antice valde descendens, pone aper-
turam constrictus, circa umbilicum obtuse angulatus; apertura
lunata, obliqua ; peristoma albidum, vel pallide rufescens, tenue,

=

On some new Species of Scorpions. 411

anguste expansum et reflexum, margine columellari ad inser-
tionem dilatato; umbilicus plus minus infundibuliformis.
Diam. maj. 16 millim., min. 13; alt. 9.

Hab. Sumba.

This species might be regarded as a variety of C. trans-
versalis, Mousson. It differs in being much more distantly
punctate, in the smaller aperture, in the contraction of the
Jast whorl behind the peristome, and the somewhat greater
angularity of the edge of the umbilicus.

Planispira albodentata.

Testa depressa, subglobosa, anguste umbilicata, fusca, lineis incre-
menti obliquis arcuatis et granulis remotis in seriebus quincun-
cialibus dispositis instructa ; spira brevis, convexa, obtusa; anfr.
4, convexiusculi, ultimus antice breviter descendens, pone labrum
paulo constrictus; apertura valde obliqua, intus pallide roseo-
purpurea; perist. expansum, et leviter refiexum, purpureo-
lilaceum, in medio marginis dextri albo subtuberculatum, margine
columellari pallido, dente albo intus instructo, late reflexo.

Diam. maj. 24 millim., min. 19; alt. 16.

Hab. South Flores, at 3600 feet.

The distant granules upon the surface, especially upon the
body-whorl, the distinct columellar toot', and the slight
nodule upon the outer lip are the principal features of this
species.

LVILI.—Deseriptions of some new Species of Scorpions.

By R. I. Pocock.

Genus OPISTHOPHTHALMUS, C. Koch.

Opisthophthalmus ecristatus, sp. 0.

3 .—Closely allied both to O. Wahlbergi and (, opinatus,
with the vesicle granular and the ocular tubercle in the middle
of the carapace.

Tarsi of third and fourth legs with a single row of 3 inferior
spines in addition to those on the lobes; protarsus of first and
second leg armed externally with 4 strong spines. ‘Tian-
gular area on carapace visible; interocular area granular in
its anterior half, the smooth portion reduced to a patch on each
side midway between the median eyes and the anterior border.
Last abdominal sternite and lower side of first caudal segment
with four strong smooth keels.

412 Mr. R. I. Pocock on some

Tail short, barely three times the length of carapace; the
third segment about as wide as long.

Hand not keeled, broad, completely covered above with
fine close-set granules.

Mandibles with three stridulating-bristles on the inner
surface of its basal segment.

Pectines with 25 teeth running right up to the base of the
edge of the shaft.

Measurements in millimetres.—Total length 75; length of
carapace 11, of tail 33.

Loc. ‘Transvaal. Specimen procured from Mr. O. E.
Janson.

Most nearly allied to O. opinatus as diagnosed by Kraepelin,
but apparently differing in the granulation of the ‘ Spiegel”
of the carapace, the carination of the last abdominal sternite
and of the first caudal seginent below, structure of hand,
spine-armature of posterior tarsi, &c.

Genus OPISTHACANTHUS, Pet.
Opisthacanthus fulvipes, sp. n.

Colour a tolerably uniform reddish brown, redder on the
chele, the crests of which, as well as the fingers, are nearly
black; legs and vesicle clear yellowish red.

Differs from the species common in the province of Natal,
which I believe to be identical with O. validus of Thorell, in
having the brachium and hands flatter and much less coarsely
sculptured, the reticulation being finer and more evidently
punctured ; the superior prominence on the anterior surface of
the brachium is also noticeably larger; the vesicle of the tail
is distinctly higher and the granulation much coarser, its
height being just about equal to the length of the carinate
portion of the lower surface of the first segment and ex-
ceeding the width of the latter (in valédus it is much less),
The pectines are much longer as compared with their basal
width than in validus. ‘The tarsus of the fourth leg is armed
below with 4 spines behind, 3 in front, one of the spines
being upon the inferior distal angle (in the Natal form,
validus, the lower side of the fourth tarsus is armed with 3
spines behind and 2 in front, with a bristle on the inferior
distal angle).

In the spine-armature of its feet and the colour of its legs
this species resembles the large Transvaal species which I
described as levipes, but which Kraepelin, wrongly I think,
identified with asper, Pet.*. O. fulvipes may be recognized,

* I suspect my Nyasa species rugiceps is in reality the same as asper,
Pet.

new Species of Scorpions. 413

however, by having the external surface of the femora of the
anal legs granular, only six or seven pectinal teeth, and the
high vesicle.

Measurements in millimetres.—Total length 71; length of
carapace 11, of tail 33; height of the vesicle 3-3; width of
first caudal segment 2°5; length of hand-back 9, of movable
digit 10; width of hand 7:8.

Loc. Basutoland (R. C. Wroughton).

Under O. validus I formerly (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (6)
xii, p. 318) included more than one species. OQ. asiaticus,
Keys., for example, which occurs at Port Elizabeth, is distinct
from the Natal species which I now think is va/idus,
Thorell; O. capensis, Thor., is also probably distinct, though
unknown to me.

Genus CHELOCTONUS, Poc.

Cheloctonus anthracinus, sp. n.

Allied to C. erassimanus, Poc., but black all over, except
the vesicle, which is ferruginous. The upperside of the
brachium and hand much more coarsely sculptured, orna-
mented with thick smooth ridges and scarcely visibly pune-
tured. In erasstmanus the integument of the hand and
brachium is densely punctured, the sculptaring forms a much
closer and finer reticulation of ridges, and the inner portion
of the upper surface of the hand is distinctly granular.

Measurements in millimetres.—Total length 54; length of
carapace 7°2, of tail 26, of hand-back 55, of movable
digit 7:2; width of hand 7.

Loc. Griqualand West (J. ff. Darling).

Genus Hemiscorpius, Pet.*

Hemiscorpius arabicus, sp. n.

Hemiscorpius lepturus, Pet., Pocock, Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool. xxy.
(1896) p. 316 (not /epturus, Pet.).

Colour. Dull olive-yellow on the trunk; vesicle clear
yellow ; legs testaceous; chelz reddish yellow ; digits black,
with pale tips.

Carapace longer than the first and second and than tive

* Mon. Ak. Wiss. Berlin, April 1861, p. 426. Peters subsequently cited
this genus as Hemiscorpion (op. cit. p. 511, May 1861). He described it
originally, however, as Hemscorpius, although in the editorial intro-
duction to his paper, for which the editur and not Peters must be held
responsible, it appears as Hemiscorpion. It is curious that Kraepelin, in
his ‘Revision,’ does not cite the original reference to the genus nor
Peters’s admirable figure of the species,

414 Mr. R. IT. Pocock on some

fifth caudal segment, punctured, weakly granular in the
hollows of the upper surface and at the sides; terga also
punctured.

Tat! about four times as long as the carapace ; second
segment a little longer than wide, fifth a little more than
twice as long as wide; superior and supero-lateral keels
strong and granular, the three inferior keels strong and
granular on the third, fourth, and fifth, weakly granular on
the first and second segments; the median keel obsolete on the
anterior half of the first segment; vesicle wider than the fifth
segment, smooth, punctured; aculeus long and normally
spiniform in its distal half.

Chele punctured; humerus with normal granular keels
above and in front; the upper and lower anterior crests on
brachium granular; hand flat above, with weak median
keel, strong but smooth external finger-keel; external keel
of hand-back strong and granular; movable finger longer
than carapace.

Genital operculum cordate, sulcate in front.

Pectinal teeth 10. .

3 .—Not very different from female, but rougher, with
close punctuation on the tergites and carapace; tail longer,
the carapace a little shorter than its first and second segments ;
hand a little wider, its width about equal to the length of the
land-back ; inner edge of the hand granular.

Genital operculum transversely oval, divided.

Pectinal teeth 13.

Measurements in millimetres.—@. Total length 85; cara-
pace 4°8, tail 18, movable digit 5.

&. Total length 32; carapace 4:5, tail 19.

Loc. Aden (4. W. Uates and Col. Yerbury).

1 formerly regarded the specimens here described as imma-
ture examples of J//. lepturus known from Bagdad. No
doubt, however, they are adult. The species may be recog-
nized at once from lepturus by having the aculeus normally
spiniform, and not short and subconical as described by
Kraepelin (JB. Hamb. xi. p. 111, 1894). The male of
lepturus, moreover, has the vesicle peculiarly modified and
elongate.

Genus Uropacus, Pet.

Urodacus macrurus, sp. 0.

3 .—Colour. Carapace deep ferruginous, tergites darker ;
legs, chelee, and tail paler yellowish red; fingers dark.
Cara pace as long as the first and one quarter of the second

lle

a

a

new Species of Scorpions. 415

caudal segment, as long as the fourth; median excision deep 3
frontal lobes quadrate ; interocular area smooth and polished ;
sides granular.

Terga closely granular ; sterna smooth.

Tail very long, a little more than six times as long as the
carapace; first segment almost or quite twice as long as wide,
fifth nearly five times as long as wide; the superior keels of
the first, second, and third segments gradually elevated
behind and ending in a small spiniform tooth.

Vesicle large, its width equal to that of the third segment,
its height equal to its width.

Chele: humerus granular above ; brachium smooth above
and behind, a few large scattered punctures behind ; a row of
S-9 pores kelow ; hand normally but not so strongly keeled
asin U. armatus, Poc., and U. nove-hollandie *, quite smooth
above externally and below; very weakly granular internally ;
about 12 pores along the underside of the keel.

Legs with femora weakly granular, patella smooth; pro-
tarsi of first and second with 5 external spines.

Pectinal teeth 17-18.

Measurements in millimetres.—Total length 94; length of
carapace 10, of tail 62, of its fifth segment 15.

Loc. Muldiva in North Queensland, g (Dr. Broom).

Differs from all the known species of the genus in the
ereat length of the tailin the male. ‘The nearest to it in this
respect is U. hoplurus +, Poc., from the East Murchison Gold
Field, West Australia, in which the tail is about five times
as long as the carapace. The two species also resemble each
other in the large size of the vesicle; but in other characters
they are very distinct. According to the table of the species
of the genus that I published in the paper cited below, the
species ranges itself under heading 0” alongside of U. nove-
hollandie, but, apart from the great length of the tail, may
be recognized by the posteriorly spiniform dorsal crests of this
organ, the large vesicle, &c.

This species is further of great interest inasmuch as it is
the first representative of the genus Urodacus that has been

* T learn from Prof. Kraepelin (in (¢tt.) that the specimens from Perth
in the British Museum which I formerly identified as U. nove-hollandie,
Pet., and which were, I believe, so named by Peters himself, are not
specitically identical with the specimens in the Berlin Museum described
under that name by this author. Probably manicatus, Thor., is their
correct title, but, pending the publication of Prof. Kraepelin’s latest con-
clusions on this point, I retain for them the term I have hitherto assigned
to them.

7+ Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (7) ii. p. 64 (1898). This paper contains
diagnoses of all the species of the genus known to me at that time,

416 Mr. R. I. Pocock on some

obtained in Queensland. Dr. Broom, who collected this
scorpion himself, also procured a specimen of what is perhaps
the female of the same species at Hill Grove, New South

Wales.

Genus CH&RILUS, Simon.
Cherilus agilis, sp. n.

9 .— Colour dark reddish brown, not distinctly variegated ;
vesicle, legs, and lower surface paler ; hands ferruginous, with
black keels and black digits.

Carapace with its anterior interocular area almost smooth,
weakly granular in front; the rest granular, longer than the
first and second and as long as the fifth caudal segment.

Terga closely granular, with a pair of posterior tubercles ;
the fourth with a pair of granular crests on each side.

Sterna smooth; third with a polished median posterior
triangular area; fifth with a short series of granules on each
side.

Tail about four times as long as carapace, slender ; first
segment a little wider than long, second a little Jonger than
wide, fourth nearly twice as long as wide, fifth more than three
times as long as wide: inferior keels of the first segment obso-
lete; of the second represented by a few granules; a little
more granular on the third; the rest of the keels strong and
coarsely granular; the median lateral represented by a few pos-
terior granules on the second, third, and fourth, extending over
two thirds of the lateral surface of the fifth segment ; upper
edges of the fifth rounded, granular, but not carinate, inferior
crest of the segment posteriorly bifid ; vesicle smooth, sparsely
punctured, a long oval in shape, not flattened below, as
wide as the second caudal segment; intercarinal spaces of tail
smooth, except the superior, which are weakly granular.

Chele long and slender ; humerus weakly granular above
and below; the crests granular; the upper and lower crests
bounding the anterior surface converging and fusing into
a single crest in the distal half of the anterior surface:
brachium longer than carapace, smooth, its posterior crests
smooth ; superior and inferior anterior crests granular, the
latter uniting distally with a strong granular crest on the lower
half of the anterior surface: hand long and narrow, the hand-
back almost twice as long as the width of the hand and
slightly longer than the carapace ; in addition to the two keels
which border the hand-back there are four strong keels, and
two weak keels, one on the outer surface of the hand and
the other on the inner surface ; the hand-back keels granular

new Species of Scorpions. 417

proximally, the keel along the inner edge of the upper sur-
face coarsely granular throughout, the rest of the keels
mostly smooth, though more or less granular proximally ;
intercarinal spaces also almost smooth; fingers long and
slender, the movable considerably exceeding the hand-back
and more than twice the width of the hand, furnished with
8 rows of teeth, and on the inner side of these some scattered
larger teeth.

Legs almost smooth externally ; femora weakly granular,
very long, patella of fourth as long as carapace.

Pectinal teeth 4.

Measurements in millimetres.—Total length 56; length of
carapace 7°5, tail 30, hand-back 8, movable digit 9-2;
width of hand 4:2.

Loe. ‘The Caves, Selangor in Malacca (H. N. Ridley).

Easily recognizable by its long and slender chelz and legs.
It is the only species of the genus known to me in which the
patella of the fourth leg is as long as the carapace.

Cherilus levimanus, sp. n.

Colour a tolerably uniform reddish black, not noticeably
variegated; hands paler than trunk; variegation of legs
indistinct, but more obvious than on the trunk.

Trunk moderately coarsely granular, interocular area
coarsely granular in front, more finely so behind; tubercle
more spherical than is usually the case, its anterior portion
not prolonged: terga with lateral granular crests; lateral
crests scarcely traceable on the fifth.

Sterna entirely smooth.

Tail nearly four times as long as the carapace, which
slightly exceeds the length of its first and second segments ;
upper surface of segments almost smooth ; the superior and
supero-lateral crests weakly granular: lower surface of first
segment finely shagreened, not crested ; of second also finely
shagreened, with scarcely traceable keels; of third with keels
still quite feeble, but weakly granular; of fourth with
granular keels; lateral surface of segments finely granular,
the inferior lateral crests distinct and weakly granular on all
the segments except the first : vesicle smooth, not globular,
elongate, its width a little excelling its height and equalling
width of fourth seginent.

Chele: humerus granular above and in front, its superior
and anterior keels also granular, smooth elsewhere; brachium
almost entirely smooth, its upper crest with only a few
granules, also a few on the lower edge of the anterior surface;

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. ill. 30

418 Mr. R. I. Pocock on some

hand of medium width, its width less than length of hand-
back and of movable digit, furnished with only five crests,
the middle of the three crests which normally run from the
immovable digit, as well as the median crest on the outer
half of the upper surface of the hand, obsolete; the two
internal (anterior) crests of the upper surface very weakly
granular, the external crest of the upper surface quite smooth;
the inner surface of the hand with a few granules near the
base of the fingers; for the rest the spaces between the keels
are quite smooth; movable digit longer than the hand-back
and just about equal to the length of the carapace, with about
eight rows of teeth.

Pectinal teeth 4.

Measurements in millimetres.—TYotal length 41; length of
carapace 6, of tail 22; width of hand 4:2; length of hand-
back 5, of movable digit 6.

Loc. Pulo Gaya, British North Borneo (S. S. Flower).

Most nearly related apparently to C. celebensis, Pocock
(Max Weber’s Zool. Ergebnisse ete. ii. p. 93, 1893), from
Celebes; but certainly differing in the following particulars :—
In ee/ebensis the ocular tubercle is prolonged anteriorly ; the
upperside of the tail between the crests is granular; the
normal keels on the hand are more strongly pronounced and.
more granular; the base of the immovable digit and the
adjacent area of the hand is strongly granular.

Cherilus rectimanus, sp. 0.

9 .—In size and colour much resembling C. celebensis, but
easily recognizable by the form of the hand. In celebensis
the hand is shorter, the inner edge is distinctly granular and
convexly rounded, and the median keel on the upper surface
is obsolete, while the remaining two keels are strong, the
area between them being nearly flat; the movable digit is
about as long as the hand-back. In rectémanus, on the
contrary, the hand is longer, its inner edge is very weakly
granular, straight, and parallel with the outer edge; the
median crest on the upper surface is as strong as the others,
although all are weak; the movable digit 1s shorter than
the length of the hand-back, which far exceeds the width
of the hand. The caudal crests in rectimanus are also stronger
and more strongly granular than in ce/ebensis.

$.—With much longer chele than the female; width of
the hand about half the length of the hand-back, length of
hand-back exceeding that of carapace ; brachium also longer
than carapace. In the female the brachium is shorter than
the carapace,

new Species of Scorpions. 419

Measurements in millimetres.— ?. Total length 24; length
of carapace 3°2, of tail 12; length of brachium 8, of hand-
back 3:5, of movable digit 3; width of hand 2-2,

g. Total length 20; length of carapace 3:2, of tail 11:5;
length of brachium 3-5, of hand-back 3 5, of movable digit 3 ;
width of hand 2.

Loc. Singapore (H. N. Ridley).

Cherilus variegatus, Simon, subsp. nigricolor, nov.

At once recognizable from the typical vardegatus by having
the dorsal surface, tail, legs, and palpi of a uniform dull
black, the sterna and coxal areas dull brown and not mottled
and variegated with yellow. The granulation of the dorsal
surface and tail is also less close, and the lower surface of
the first and second and often of the third caudal segments is
smooth, the keels being obsolete, at least on the first and
second. In variegatus the second and third segments are
granular and granularly carinate below.

Measurements in millimetres.— 2 . ‘Votal length 45; length
of carapace 5°8, of tail 21°5, of hand-back 4-2, of movable
digit 5:5; width of hand 5,

3. Total length 43; length of carapace 5-6, of tail 24, of
hand-back 5°5, of movable digit 5°5; width of hand 6:5.

Loc. Protjat in Hastern Java (type) and Kogok in Western
Java.

Several specimens of both sexes presented to the British
Museum by Prof. W. Kulezynski. We have representatives
of the typical form from ‘T'jibodas, Buitenzorg, and the Gede
Volcano.

Genus PARABUTHUS, Poe.

Parabuthus flavidus, sp. n.

Allied to P. capensis, Hempr. & Ehrenb. (= planicauda,
Poc.), but differing in having the ocular tubercle larger, and
the tail thinner and lower, with the four inferior keels on the
second and third segments much more strongly elevated
posteriorly, the upper surface of the first mesially and nor-
mally longitudinally excavated, and the lateral and inferior
intercarinal spaces of the tail sparsely and weakly granular ;
in planicauda the sides and lower surface of the tail are
closely and coarsely granular, and the upper surface of the
first is not excavated. It also differs from raudus of Simon
at least in having the inferior keels of the first caudal seg-
ment granular.

420 Bibliographical Notice.

Measurements in millimetres.—Total length 48; length of
earapace 5, of tail 27.

Loc. Tangs, in Bechuanaland.

A single female sent to the British Museum by Mr. H. A.
Spencer.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL NOTICE.

The Resources of the Sea ; as shown in Scientific Kaperiments to test
the effects of Trawling and of the closure of certain Areas off the
Scottish Shores. By W.C. M‘Inrosn, M.D., LL.D., F.R.S., &c.,
Professor of Natural History in the University of St. Andrews,
Director of the Museum and of the Gatty Marine Laboratory.
8vo, London, 1899. Pp. xvi, 248. Frontispiece, 16 plates, and
8 woodcuts; with Appendix of 32 Statistical Tables.

In this volume Professor M‘Intosh has accomplished a laborious but
certainly invidious task. Critically examining a complicated mass
of statistics published by the Fishery Board for Scotland in their
Annual Reports, mainly pertaining to the influence of beam-trawling,
he descants on the material in a broad light. ‘The subject at issue
resolves itsclf into somewhat as follows:—Has the twelve-years
abolition of trawling in extensive fishing-grounds in Scotland been
as productive of benefit to the fisheries as was anticipated when the
bye-law was enforced, April 1886? If not, wherefore continue it?
To the first query Prof. M‘Intosh gives a distinctly negative reply.
To the second, in substance, he strenuously submits that abolition of
the restriction to trawling may safely be adopted.

The Fishery Board officially recognizes * that closure of the Firth
of Forth, St. Andrews Bay, and Aberdeen Bay have proved failures
in so far as respects increase of fishes in those areas. Notwith-
standing, there has been no relaxation of their bye-laws affecting
the said inshore waters, though this course might be deemed in
consonance with their own conclusions. Furthermore, they shift
the basis of their previous argument of the trawlers’ destruction of
brood inshore to action on presumed but hitherto imperfectly known
spawning-grounds offshore in the Moray Firth (and Firth of Clyde).
These more recent investigations comprise several areas beyond the
three-mile limit, e. g. Smith Bank &e.

Meantime a considerable section of the fishing community and
those commercially interested naturally feel aggrieved t, and it
appears as if trawlers and liners are equally dissatisfied with the

* See 14th Ann. Rep. of the Fishery Board for Scotland for 1895
(1896): Conclusions, p. 12.

+ Witners the discussion and resolution re “ Fishing in the Moray
Firth,” Proceedings National Sea-Fisheries Protection Association, Con-
ference 1898.

Bibliographical Notice. 421

Board’s decision. Especially is this the case where foreign craft can
come and trawl] without let or hindrance—nay, dispose of their
eatch in the British ports, while the native population, by law, are
only allowed to look on despairingly.

Possibly the members of the Board may have been considerably
influenced by papers of their able scientific superintendent
Dr. T. Wemyss Fulton. In one * the ten years (1886-1895) experi-
ments are admirably summarized. From his point of view of the
statistical analysis a diminution, not increase, of the important
flat-fishes has occurred, which he suggests “may probably be
traced to the influence of beam-trawling in the open waters where
the fishes spawn.” As to the round fishes he expresses doubts.

Thus stands the question—one as interesting and instructive to
the biologist, as all-important alike to the fisherman, the merchant,
and the public generally.

In Prof. M‘Intosh’s Preface the following remark sets us won-
dering. He says: “It was hoped that opportunities would have
been afforded for repeating in 1898, on the same dates and, as far
as possible, under the circumstances, the experiments of 1884;
but the authorities did not appear to see either the way or the
importance of such an enterprise.” We may express regret that
this crucial test was not applied.

The author’s opening chapter is framed in the wide aspect of
science. His keynote may be said to be the cycle of interdepen-
dence between the lowly plant and animal life in the sea and its
fish-fauna. Add to this the surcharge of marine food, the enormous
fecundity of most food-fishes, their pelagic eggs scattered broadcast,
together with boundless regions unfished, which nevertheless supply
by replacement voids in the neighbouring areas where depletion may
have occurred. ‘These and other reasons conduce to his belief that
the predicated utter ruin of our sea-fisheries is not yet.

He contrasts man’s destructive influence among certain groups of
animals on the land, in the air, and in the water. Nor does he
mince the fact that the once hordes of Ungulata &c., even families
of birds, are a fast diminishing quantity by human agency, though
he points out that some sections of Mammals and Aves hold their
own, whilst many Insecta defy extirpation. Concerning freshwater
fishes, a sure decrease results by over-fishing unless artificial measures
are resorted to,

Except among seals, whales, and Sirenia, he holds that oceanic
life does not present the same chance of speedy extermination. He
brings forward the plenitude of the Plankton aliment, as regular as
the tides and as powerless to be arrested. As the Diatoms nourish
Foraminifera and Radiolarians, so they in turn are the prey of

* “Review of the Trawling Experiments of the ‘ Garland’ in the Firth
of Forth and St. Andrews Bay in the years 1886-95,” 14th Ann. Rep.
Fish. Board Scotland, pp. 128-149, pls. i., ii. Consult also his papers,
“The Distribution of Immature Sea-Fish, and their Capture by various
Modes of Fishing,” 8th Ann. Rep. F. B. 8. for 1889, and “On Over-
Fishing of the Sea and the Culture of Sea-Fish,” 10th Rep. for 1891.

422 Bibliographical Notice.

higher forms. Cilio-flagellates, Porifera, and Hydrozoa &c. literally
are exhaustless. Annelids and the groups of the minute Crusta-
ceans (Copepods &c.) so teem as to be far beyond the interference of
man. These, be it observed, are the standard food of the great
body of the inshore commercial fishes.

Of the slow-growing lobsters and edible crabs, however, signs of
diminution are not wanting. This applies to sedentary oysters and
some of the marketable mollusks; hence beneficially they have
received culture and legislative protection. But others of the
Mollusca, e. g. the free-swimming Cephalopods and Pteropods, or in
contrast many sunken Lamellibranchs (say Mactra and Scrobicu-
laria), continue to fruitfully multiply in spite of wholesale destruc-
tion, the former classes forming the nutriment of the great roaming
whales, the latter bivalves supplying the food of the ground-loving
plaice, dab, and flounder.

In another chapter the effects of trawling and of lining are dis-
cussed with respect to the surrounding Invertebrate fauna, to adult
and young fishes, and to the eggs. Likewise the results of the
changes in fishing-vessels and their gear and the conditions of the
East Coast fishers and fisheries generally. The substance of this
chapter has already appeared in the 12th Ann. Rep. F. B.S. for
1893 under “ Remarks on Trawling ”*; but it has been remodelled,
amended, added to, and, in fact, brought up to date. Indeed, what
has taken place in the statistical returns given between 1894 and
1897 inclusive constitutes an important section of it.

Passing on, Prof. M‘Intosh devotes Chapters III.-VI. to a close
criticism of the investigations on trawling experiments of the Board’s
steamer ‘Garland’ during 1886-1895, those in St. Andrews Bay,
the Firth of Forth, the Moray Firth, and the Firth of Clyde being
taken in sequence, ‘lhere follows in Chapter VII. his summary and
conclusions of the entire questions at issue.

Lastly there is an Appendix of thirty-two tables of statistics,
which we consider he has done wisely in thus separating from
the body of the text. In the latter, however, there are a few
scattered tabular data, rendering some points easier to be grasped
by the general reader. The work is further illustrated by sixteen
plates and eight woodcuts. Though some of these may seem
rather a side issue, others are graphic expositions of ways and
means prevalent among the Scotch east coast fishers and fisheries.
Altogether they materially help to lighten the volume, wherein
necessarily facts, opinions, and arguments bristle throughout.

The Scotch fisherfolks are well known to be an industrious,
thrifty, hard-working, and upright community ; but, judging from
the author's types, to an English eye they are no beauties.

We may remark that there is a decided want of a chart or sketch-
diagrams to represent the relative positions of the forty-three

* See also the author’s pamphlet, ‘A Brief Sketch of the Scottish
Fisheries, chiefly in their Scientific Aspects, during the decade 1882-
1892.’ 8vo, Dundee, 1892.

Bibliographical Notice. 423

observing stations, as it is puzzling to follow the recital of the
data thereon. We had to refer constantly to those contained in the
5th, 6th, 9th, and 14th Ann. Rep. F. B. 8.

Subsidiary short headings defining the year’s operations would
likewise have been advantageous to the reader. It is curious to
observe that the Professor throughout sticks to the original
Scottish “ Frith” (so pronounced north), whereas ‘“ Firth ” is the
recognized orthography among geographers, the Admiralty charts, &c.

Whatever the issue of this fisheries controversy, the writer of the
volume has given cogent reasons for his views. Something may bo
said on both sides. It has to be noted that the Board has without
intermission for a dozen years dunned the government for a trust-
worthy sea-going steamer. To their credit also they have carried
out quite a variety of valuable scientific researches—to wit, on sea-
fish, crustaceans and shell-fish, their food, breeding, hatching, bait,
North-Sea currents and fishing-grounds, besides physical observa-
tions, &c., wherein Prof. M‘Intosh and his pupils have contributed
a fair quota. On the other hand, their critic has been indebted for
their hundreds of pages of statistics for much of his data. Their
patent mistakes have been in jumping hastily at seeming conclusions
based on the superabundant year 1887 ; in ignoring the well-known
natural fluctuations of seasons’ fishings and weather influences ;
again, in not placing due weight on night-fishing and irregularity
of experiments during hot and cold months, thus being led astray in
contrasting the five yearly periods. Hence Prof. M‘Intosh quite
reasonably views the matter in a different light, and the every-day
experience of fishermen in a commercial sense lends him support.
The Board’s case is undermined by their own admission that the
areas of closure have not improved and that shore-spawning is not
the habit of the bulk of marketable fishes.

Moreover, in papers already referred to, Dr. Fulton himself says :—
«Simple prohibition merely of the landing or sale of the [immature]
fish may do more harm than good; regulation to be effective should
be exercised at the fishing-grounds or in connexion with the
fishing ; and when the difficulty of carrying out simple police regu-
lations is remembered, ?¢ is clear that this obstacle will be very great.”
[Precisely so! The italics are ours.] ‘In declining fisheries the
mere protection of immature individuals has not been effective ; it
has been found necessary to supplement restriction by artificial
cultivation.” All this, and other statements, appears to us amply to
justify Prof. M‘Intosh’s contentions.

Here also comes in the 3- and the 13-mile limit, awkward and
conflicting in several ways. As Mr. George Alward (of Grimsby)
observed at the Conference of the Nat. Sea-Fish. Assoc., 1898 :—«I
say it will be a sorry day when the people of England attempt to
extend territorial limits. There can be only one result, and that
would be that a line would be drawn down the centre of the
North Sea, and the nations on either side would claim their part.”
Our share would not be the best of the bargain. Nor would it abate
friction one jot, but rather give rise to international jealousies and:

424 Bibliographical Notice.

troubles, worse than the present condition of things, and this
without increasing the fish or alleviating the liner and trawlers’
grievances. Surely, then, Prof. M‘Intosh’s ‘fast cruisers and
search-lights ” are not altogether a phantom of his imagination.

The practical outcome of the extraordinary changes in vessels,
gear, &c. alone means intense competition. If our sea-fishermen
are hampered neither they nor the nation will benefit. However
plausible theoretical measures as a panacea may appear to be, they
cannot control human nature nor “ the resources of the sea.” Un-
fortunately a large majority of individuals are unable to follow the
intricacies of a highly complex problem, hinged on natural causes
with many unforeseen contingencies ; yet the public demand a cate-
gorical answer in reply, and judge alone by immediate results: nor
can their notions be prudently thrust aside. From the biologist’s
point of view it is to be hoped that the Board will rescind their
bye-law, while they continue to pursue the collateral researches
incident to the debated question.

We have no desire whatever to be one-sided in this controversy,
but the verdict of the scientist is at stake. Whether the Scotch
Fishery Board’s experiments have been faultlessly carried out or
otherwise, to the public generally they have not in these trial-
instances served to prove that the bivlogist’s views and tests are in-
fallible. The graceful, indeed ordinary, mode of procedure would be to
consent to alter the present vexatious restrictions, while, as already
hinted, further scientific researches proceed apace. Much stress is
laid on the extirpation or diminution of larger animals by man’s
agency ; but paleontology emphasizes the fact that without his
influence throughout ages the natural law has been change or
disappearance of whole tribes of animals, the biggest going first.
The law of supply and demand goes on unceasingly in commercial
matters, and this country supports free trade versus protection. Our
markets are already flooded with continental products, and are we
to fetter the energies of our fishers and capitalists ?

Fishermen are free men in every sense, and, though wedded to
old methods, are keenly alive, nay forced, to progress through
the rapid changes marking the last half-century. He will be a
Solomon indeed who can adjudicate and pacify groups of fishermen.
Why every fishery-station thinks its methods better than those of
its neighbours. No two of the English Sea-Fisheries Committees
legislate and act practically alike, and, as a climax, Scotland, with
her abolition of trawling within the 3-mile limit, has powers not
vyouchsafed England.

John Stuart Mill truly says: “In every department of common
affairs Practice long precedes Science ; systematic enquiry into the
modes of action of the powers of nature is the tardy product of a
long course of efforts to use those powers for practical ends.”
Biologists themselves must be agreed and their proofs undeniable
before they insist on forced measures. Prof. M‘Intosh’s ‘ Resources
of the Sea’ therefore comes opportunely, and much of his evidence
of the balance of nature and the constant recuperation of overfished

Geological Society. 425

areas seems, from our own knowledge, to hold good. Whether sea-
fish hatching will prove successful in the future time will show, but
the Dunbar Hatchery has not altogether been prosperous. Let us
hope the new hatchery at Nigg Bay, Aberdeen, will flourish, with
best wishes to its active promoter and superintendent.

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.

February 22nd, 1899.—W. Whitaker, B.A., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.

The following communication was read :—

‘Remarks on the Genera Ectomaria, Koken, and Hormotoma,
Salter; with Descriptions of the British Species.’ By Miss Jane
Donald.

This paper deals with some of the genera into which the family
of the Murchisoniidze has been divided, and confines itself to the
established genus Hormotoma, Salter, and the new genus Ectomaria,
Koken, which contain some of the oldest known species of elongated
gasteropoda. both forms are distinguished from the typical
Murchisonie by merely possessing a sinus in the outer lip, instead
of having a deep narrow slit with parallel edges; the lines of
growth also retreat towards, and advance from, the sinus more
obliquely. The Author prefers to separate the elongated shells
from the shorter Pleurotomariide, as Koken does, and to let the
former constitute the family Murchisoniide.

The genera are described, with two new species of Hetomaria and
two new varieties of Ectomaria pagoda, Salt. Six new species of
Hormotoma are also described, together with the species H. Salteri,
Ulnch & Scofield, H.? gracillima, Salt., H. cingulata, His., and
H. articulata, Sow. The species of Hctomaria are all derived from
the Cambrian and Ordovician rocks of Scotland, and the species of
Hormotoma from various beds, ranging from the Durness Limestone
to the Upper Ludlow rocks. An account of the distribution of the
genera over Europe and America is also given.

March 8th, 1899.—W. Whitaker, B.A., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.
The following communication was read :—

‘An Analysis of the Genus Micraster, as determined by rigid
Zonal Collecting, from the Zone of Rhynchonella Cuviert to that of
Micraster cor-anguinum. By Dr. A. W. Rowe, F.G.S.

The Author has endeavoured to show, by means of rigid zonal
collecting on a large scale, from the White Chalk of the Southern and

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iii. 31

426 Geological Society.

South-eastern coast-sections of England, that the genus Micraster is
one and the same form gradually evolving from the more simple to
the more complex. In doing this, he also contends that the genus
may be divided into definite groups, each or several of which are
absolutely diagnostic of the various Chalk zones, as defined by
Barrois. The conclusions arrived at point to the regular and con-
tinuous deposition of the White Chalk, and strikingly confirm the
general accuracy of Barrois’s zoning.

The paper gives a minute comparison and description of the
genus Micraster from a general point of view, and from that of a
group, and deals particularly with the essential details of the test of
the especial groups characteristic of each zone. ‘The Author claims
that, so far as Micraster is concerned, each zone is marked by a
definite facies of essential characters of the test, which are purely
horizonal, and that all species and varieties, however divergent they
may apparently be, occurring at any given horizon, are stamped with
the impress of these marked horizonal features.

The Author proves that, while in an isolated instance, one may
be unable to decide the horizon in the White Chalk whence a
specimen of Micraster was derived, in the ninety-nine other cases
the diagnostic features described by him point unerringly to the
exact horizon, and thus afford a valuable aid to stratigraphical
geology, especially as the essential zonal features of the test are
easily made out in the field.

The Author discusses the four groups into which the species of
Micraster in these zones may be placed, and describes in detail the
species in these groups.

The paper is illustrated by photographs, micro-photographs, and
lantern-slides.

April 12th, 1899.—W. Whitaker, B.A., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.

The following communications were read :—

1. ‘Fossils in the University Museum, Oxford: I. Silurian
Echinoidea and Ophiuroidea.’ By Prof. W. J. Sollas, M.A., LL.D.,
D.Se., F.R.S.

Attention is called to the correlation of structure and function in
the locomotive organs of Asterids, Ophiurids, and Echinids. In
the case of the two latter, movement depends on tension directed
along the tube-feet. In starfishes this tension is met by the dis-
position of the ambulacral ossicles in the form of an arch: in
urchins by a continuous tessellation of the surface, which would
only be weakened by arch-like interruptions. If, however, urchins
have been evolved from an Asterid stem, they may have originally
possessed arch-like ambulacral grooves, and the present plates
of the ambulacra may have been subsequently acquired. In
Paleodiscus feroe of the Lower Ludlow, Leintwardine, which
by the structure of the buccal armature is definitely shown to

Geological Society. 427

have been an Echinid, the ambulacra possess just such characters as
theory anticipates: an inner arch of poriferous ambulacral plates,
homologous with those of a starfish, is closed externally by a
series of paired plates, which represent the ambulacral series of
an urchin.

The undoubted Asteroid affinities of the urchin Jead to an
attempt to find homologies for the elements of ‘Aristotle’s Lantern’:
the pyramids are regarded as equivalent to the first pair of adambu-
lacral plates, the epiphyses to the corresponding pair of ambulacral
plates of the Echinoid series, and the teeth are compared to the
Asteroid odontophore, which has acquired a persistent root.

A new genus assigned to the Echinida is characterized by the
excessively numerous minute plates which form the interambulacra.
Reference is made to Echinocystis pomum, Wyv. Thomson; and to
a species of Protocidaris, Whidborne, from Lower Ludlow beds,
which seems to be identical with the type-species found in Devonian
rocks.

The results are given of a re-examination of the unique specimen
on which Dr. H. Woodward founded the genus Zucladia. The Author
agrees with Dr. Woodward in regarding the exposed surface of this
fossil as ventral; it bears the buccal armature and madreporite,
and gives origin to the arms. On slicing two of the arms, no
plates were exposed which it was possible to certainly identify
with vertebral ossicles. Some hollow casts, from the Lower Ludlow
of Leintwardine, which have hitherto been regarded as too problem-
atical for determination, are shown to represent an organism closely
allied to Hucladia, and are provisionally referred to that genus.
The number of arms in this new species is less than in the original
(E. Johnson), and they are more nearly equal in size. A new genus,
closely allied to Hucladia, is founded on a small, well-preserved
specimen from the Wenlock Limestone of Croft Farm. In this
the pairs of arms of each paired series are only two in number,
while in the new species of Eucladia at least four, and in E. Johs-
sont aS Imany as seven are present. Lucladia and the new genus
are regarded as aberrant Ophiurids, and are placed in a new order
as a group of the same value as the Euryale. They are defined
es Ophiurida possessing paired series of arms, covered externally
by imbricating plates, but devoid of ambulacral essicles. The buccal
armature is abnormal.

2. ‘ Note on the Oceurrence of Sponge-spicules in the Carboni-
ferous Limestone of Derbyshire.’ By Prof. W. J. Sollas, M.A.,
LL.D., D.Sc., F.R.S.

Remains of sponge-spicules are fairly abundant in a rock-slice
taken from a specimen obtained by Mr. H. H. Arnold-Bemrose from
Tissington cutting. They present themselves as sections through
long cylindrical rods, but the terminations are obscure and indefinite,
and the form cannot be referred with certainty to any recognized
order of Sponges. The spicules were doubtless originally siliceous,

428 Miscellaneous.

but they are now completely transformed into carbonate of lime.
Rhombohcedra of calcite appear to have completed their growth as
readily within the spicule as outside it, and the final result of the
corrosion is to entirely replace the opal of the spicule by a congeries
of minute crystals of calcite. As the erystals may have begun their
growth outside the spicule, the latter rarely preserves its charac-
teristie regular outlines. ‘he crystals being frequently bounded by
impurities of the limestone, the spicules are often as clearly defined
as corresponding structures in the Chalk.

MISCELLANEOUS.

A Note on the Date of the Parts of § Humboldt and Bonpland’s
Voyage: Observations de Zoologie.

Tuts book was issued in livraisons as follows :—

Vol ae divr: 1); pp. 1-46 (& 47, 48), 1805, forming pp. 1-25 of 2nd issue.

2, —104, 19 07, ss 26-64 s

3, —196, 1807, = 65-126

4, -295, 1809, 4 127-200 & 253-259 of
2nd issue.

5 & 6, 412, 1809, 5 261-297 & 201-252 &
298-309 of 2nd
issne.

A break then occurred until 1812, when livraison 7 was issued,
with the fcllowing ‘* Avis” on a loose slip of paper :—‘ Avec cette
Livraison, qui terminera le premier volume des Observations de
Zoologie et d’Anatomie comparée, on fournit aux Abonnés un
ilouveau texte pour la totalité de ce volume. On a cru deyoir faire
ce sacrifice, afin que cet ouvrage ressemblat, pour le caractére et le
papier, 4 toutes les autres parties du Voyage de M. de Humboldt.
Les Acquéreurs pourront faire relier ce volume; ils rendront tout
le texte des livraisons précédentes, donts il ne conserveront que les
planches.” Fortunately for nomenclature the British Museum
(Natural History) secured some years ago a parcel of odd parts,
which prove to be a complete set of the first issue ; these are
properly cared for, and are of considerable interest.

The completion of the work dates as follows :—

Livr. 7, pp. 805-368 (with reprint of pp. 1-412 of Ist issue, forming
pp. 1-809 of 2nd issue), 1812 (T.P. dated 1811).

Vol. IL, livr. 8, 1-64, 1813.
9, -96, 1813.
10, -144, 1817.
11, ) 54 1821.
12, | ~224; 1991.
13, 256, 1827.
14, -352, 1832 (T.P. dated 1833).

C. Davies SHERBORN
(‘ Index animalium ’).

Ann. ck. . Vag. Nat. Hist. §. 7. Vol IIT, Pl AT

J.Green. del. et lith.

=, een L. Mintern Bros imp
PLETHODUS

Ann. &. Vag.. Nat. Hist. S.7.Vol. HT. Pu. XN

fp pl fr pa
’ { Sq

him

Te yO} a4
J.breendel.et bth

Ann. & Mag .Nat. Weatasid. Voll Pu ae

J.Green del. et lth. Mintern Bros.imp.

THE ANNALS

AND

MAGAZINE OF NATURAL HISTORY.

(SEVENTH SERIES.]

No. 18. JUNE 1899.

LIX.—On some new or little-known Goniatites from the Car-
boniferous Limestone of Ireland. By G.C. Crick, F.G.S.,
of the British Museum (Natural History).

Most of the specimens described in the present paper are in
the collection of Dr. A. H. Foord, F.G.S., of Dublin, who
has already devoted much attention to the Cephalopoda from
the Carboniferous Limestone of Ireland; a few are in the
British Museum collection; some belong to the Geological
Survey of Ireland, and a few to the Museum of Science and
Art, Dublin. ‘To Dr. Foord, to the authorities of the Geolo-
gical Survey of Ireland and of the Museum of Science and
Art, Dublin, I am greatly indebted for the loan of the speci-
mens in their respective collections.

During a visit to the Museum of the Geological Survey of
Ireland 1 was fortunate enough to identify the type speci-
mens of de Koninck’s Goniatites [= Pericyclus} plicatilis and
G. [Brancoceras] ornatissimus. 1n order to tacilitate com-
parison, I have redescribed them in the same manner as
the other species which are described in the present paper.

The plan adopted for the descriptions of the species is that
given in the Introduction (pp. xviii and xix) to part iii. of the
€Catalogue of Fossil Cephalopoda in the British Museum

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iti. 32

430 Mr. G. C. Crick on some

(Natural History),’ with only a few alterations. The term
“ ymbilical zone’? * has been substituted for the somewhat
ambiguous expression “ inner area of whorl”; and since in
some species this zone slopes towards the centre of the umbilt-
cus, I have thought it advisable in the measurements of these
species to give the width of the umbilicus both at its margin
and at the suture of the shell. The term ‘ peristome” is
used for the margin of the aperture, and in describing the
aperture Prof. Hyatt’s terms have been adopted—“ crest” for
projecting parts and “sinus” for inflections of the outline ;
also the same author’s term “‘hyponomic sinus” for the ventral
sinus of the aperture and of the lines of growth, it being due
to the hyponome or motor organ, usually called the “ fleshy
funnel” in the recent Nautilus *.

Excepting figs. 6 and 15 and the drawings of the suture-
lines, I have to thank Dr. Foord tor the original drawings of
the illustrations accompanying this paper.

Pericyclus Foordi, sp.n. (Fig. 1.)

Sp. char. Shell discoidal, somewhat compressed and rather
widely umbilicated; greatest thickness at the margin of the
umbilicus, rather more than two fifths of the diameter of the
shell ; height of outer whorl a little more than three sevenths
of the diameter of the shell. Whorls eight or nine; inclusion
fully three fourths; umbilicus rather deep, displaying the
umbilical margins of all the inner whorls, about three tenths
of the diameter of the shell in width. Whorl semielliptical
in cross-section, a little higher than wide; indented to about
two fifths of its height by the preceding whorl; periphery
convex, imperfectly defined ; sides feebly convex ; umbilical
zone well-detined, sloping towards the umbilicus, and making
an obtuse angle with the sides, rather narrow. Body-
chamber not fully seen, but occupying at least one half of the
outer whorl; aperture not seen, but the peristome probably
(judging by the ornaments and the lines of growth) with a
feeble lateral crest at about the middle of the lateral area and
a deep and wide hyponomic sinus. Depth of chambers not
seen ; suture-line only imperfectly known. ‘Test ornamented
with fine, backwardly directed, and somewhat irregularly
spaced riblets, which form a rather low crest at about the

* See A. Hyatt, “ Phylogeny of an acquired Characteristic,’ Proc.
Amer. Philos. Soc. vol. xxxii. no. 148, pp. 422 et segg.; and “ Carbon-
iferous Cephalopods,” 4th Ann, Rep. Geol, Surv. Texas for 1892, pp. 380
et seqq. (1893).

new or little-known Goniatites from Ireland. 431

middle of the lateral area and a deep and wide hyponomic
sinus on the periphery, where some of them are thicker than
the rest and somewhat regularly placed. Up to a diameter

~— Gh fr
e)
VL

“ Ate
Eh
M 4

CAN; y
Hf

7

y

7

Pericyclus Foord?.—a, lateral view ; 6, peripheral view of thesame. Car-
boniferous Limestone: St. Doulagh’s, Co. Dublin, Ireland. Drawn
from an example in the cullection of Dr. A. H. Foord, F.G.S. About
three fifths natural size.

of about 56:0 millim. the test is ornamented with rather
coarse regularly placed ribs, which are separated by inter-
spaces a little wider than themselves and have the same
direction as the ornaments of the adult.

Dimensions.

(i.) (ii.)
Diameter of shell ........ -» 1065 mm. (1000) 49:0 mm. (100-0)
Width of umbilicus (at suture

POU semana en sist. OS 59 (30:0) ?
Width of umbilicus (at its

ENS Sar eee 422 1%, (39'4) 25:0 mm. (51-0)
Height of outer whorl ...... Lie as, (44:1)
Ditto above preceding whorl.. 28 ,, (26:2)
Thickness of shell .......... 46 ,, (43:1) 33:0 ,, (67-8)

As the larger specimen is broken transversely across I
32*

432 Mr. G. C. Crick on some

am able to give also the following measurements at different
diameters :-—

Diameter of shell .. 79°5mm.(100°0) 56-0 mm, (100°0) 40:0 mm. (100°0)
Width of umbilicus

(at suture of shell) 25°5 ,, (82°0) 21:0 ,, (37°5) 16:0 ,, (40°0)
Width of umbilicus

(at its margin) .. 83:5 ,, (421) 260 ,, (464) 220 ,, (55:0)
Height of outer

WHORL nonin ee
Ditto above preced-

ANY WDOR “sci pits

Thickness of shell ., 43:0 ,, (54:0) 835 ,, (59°) 295 ,, (73°7)

Remarks. I have seen only two examples of this species ;
they are both in the collection of Dr. A. H. Foord, F.G.S.,
of Dublin; their dimensions are given above. The larger
specimen is broken transversely across, so as to display the
inner whorls; the innermost whorls are much wider than
high, but as the shell grows the whorl increases in height
more rapidly than in width. This is very apparent from the
dimensions of the inner whorls that are given above.

I have much pleasure in naming the species after
Dr. A. H. Foord, who has already made known many new
Cephalopoda from the Carboniferous Limestone of Ireland.

Affinities and Differences. This species can be readily dis-
tinguished from Pericyclus trapezoidalis by its feeble
ornaments, its relatively more inflated whorls, and the sloping
umbilical zone of its whorls; and from Pericyclus rotuli-
formis * by its less distinct ornaments and the absence of
pronounced constrictions.

Horizon and Locality. Both specimens are from the Car-
boniferous Limestone of St. Doulagh’s, Co. Dublin, Treland.

Pericyclus trapezoidalis, sp. n. (Fig. 2.)

Sp. char. Discoidal, flattened, rather widely umbilicated ;
greatest thickness at the margin of the umbilicus, nearly four
elevenths of the diameter of the shell; height of outer whorl
about four elevenths of the diameter of the shell. Whorls
fairly numerous (exact number not known) ; inclusion rather
more than one half; umbilicus shallow, displaying the edges
of all the inner whorls, about three eighths of the diameter of
the shell in width, with subangular margin and nearly vertical
sides. Whorl subtrapezoidal in cross section, about as high
as wide; indented to about one fonrth of its height by the
preceding whorl; periphery narrowly convex, impertectly

* See infra, p. 484.

new or little-known Goniatites from Ireland. 433

defined; sides feebly convex, a little flattened near the
umbilicus, and becoming more flattened and convergent on.
the body-chamber; umbilical zone well defined, narrow,
almost perpendicular to the plane of symmetry of the shell.
Body-chamber occupying nearly a complete whorl ; aperture
not seen, but the peristome (judging by the lines of growth)
probably with a broad feeble lateral crest and a fairly deep

a
0g
bo

mi.
Ce ix

Pericyclus trapezoidahs.-—Lateral view of the type specimen, showing
the ornaments of the shell, as well as some of the septa of the earlier
portion of theouter whorl. Carboniferous Limestone: St. Doulagh’s,
Co. Dublin, Ireland. Drawn from an example in the collection of
Dr. A. H. Foord, F.G.S. About three fifths natural size.

hyponomic sinus. Depth of chambers not seen; suture-line
only imperfectly seen. ‘Test ornamented with narrow promi-
nent ribs, which pass obliquely backward from the umbilical
margin, cross the lateral area in a feeble anteriorly convex
curve, and form on the periphery a fairly deep and wide
(hyponomic) sinus; interspaces flat, nearly twice as wide as
the ribs; the whole surface of the ribs and interspaces (when
well preserved) with fine close-set lines of growth, especially
on the body-chamber. The outer whorl with numerous (nine
or ten) constrictions, following the course of the ornaments

434 Mr. G. C. Crick on some

of the test. ‘ Wrinkle-layer” composed of fine, regular,
close-set longitudinal lines.

Dimensions.
Drametar‘or sel yt i «aoe eer s oo 141 mm. (100:0)
Width of umbilicus (at suture of shell) 49, (847)
Width of umbilicus (at its margin).... 5S , (87h)
Heirht of onter whorl 25) sons os ve ol |, ‘(seu
Ditto above preceding whorl.......... about 30 ,, (21°2)
Thickness of outer whorl ............ 50 ,, (85-4)

Remarks. I have seen only one example of this species
—the type specimen—which is in the collection of Dr. A. H.
Foord, F.G.8., of Dublin.

An unsuccessful attempt has been made to display the
suture-line, the whorl having been ground away too deeply
to show the precise form of this important character.

The “ wrinkle-layer” is particularly well shown on the
first portion of the last whorl.

The trivial name trapezordalis refers to the form of the
transverse section of the whorl of the adult shell.

Affinities and Differences. This species can be readily dis-
tinguished from all the other species of Pericyclus from the
Carboniferous Limestone of Ireland that are known to me by
the flattened trapezoidal form of the cross-section of its whorls
and by their very distinct ornaments, which appear to be
continued quite to the aperture of the shell.

Horizon and Locality. Carboniferous Limestone: St. Dou-
lagh’s, Co. Dublin, Ireland.

Pericyclus rotuliformis, sp. n. (Fig. 3.)

Sp. char. Shell discoidal, somewhat compressed, rather
rapidly increasing, with a moderately wide umbilicus;
greatest thickness at the margin of the umbilicus, ranging
from about three eighths to about three sevenths of the
diameter of the shell; height of outer whorl ranging from
about two fifths to about three eighths of the diameter of the
shell. Whorls few (exact number unknown) ; inclusion two
thirds ; umbilicus shallow, with sloping sides and subangular
margin, ranging from a little less to a little more than one
third of the diameter of the shell in width, exposing the edges
of all the inner whorls. Whorl subcordate in cross-section, a
little higher than wide; indented to about one third of its
height by the preceding whorl; periphery narrowly convex,
imperfectly defined, continuous with the sides; sides feebly
convex, somewhat flattened; umbilical zone fairly well
defined, narrow, sloping towards the centre of the umbilicus

new or little-known Goniatites from Ireland. 435

and making an obtuse angle with the sides. Body-chamber
occupying rather more than an entire whorl; aperture not
seen, but peristome (judging by the ornaments of the test)
probably nearly straight on the lateral area and with a mode-
rately wide and deep hyponomic sinus, Chambers (? depth) ;
suture-line not seen. ‘Test ornamented with feeble riblets

Pericyclus rotulitormis—Lateral view of the type specimen, showing
ornaments and well-marked constrictions of test. Carboniferous Lime-
stone: St. Doulagh s, Co. Dublin, Ireland. Drawn from an example
in the collection of Dr. A. H. Foord, F.G.S. About three fifths
natural size. =

crossing the whorl obliquely backward as far as the margin of
the periphery, and then passing abruptly backward, becoming
somewhat coarser and more prominent, and forming on the
periphery a moderately wide and deep hyponomic sinus ; the
outer whorl with seven or eight constrictions extending from
the margin of the umbilicus and having a similar direction to
the ornaments of the test, these constrictions being faintly
indicated on the surface of the test, but well marked on
internal casts.

:
Dimensions.
;
: (i.) (ii.) (ini.) (iv.)
Diameter of shell ...... 8L mm. (109) 78 mm, (109) 2mm. (100) 73:5 mm, (100)
- Width of umbilicus (at
suture of shell)......... DA 435) (29:0) 2a108 45) (S051) ? 25 ,3 (34:0)
Width of umbilicus (at
EeSMOATPAN) ............ Zoe's; (ooo)? 200"; (ore) Tommie 0) Gl. * as Gis
Height of outer whorl... 325 ,, (40:1) 28 ,, (858) 17 ,, (40°4) 27°5-,, (87-4)
Ditto above preceding
SLOT), ~ = 727 Ce LO (243) ? 22 ,, (299)
Thickness of outer
bey. Ae coe 32 » (395) 30* ,, (884) 20mm; 476) 32 , (435)

* Approximately,

436 Mr. G. C. Crick on some

Remarks. The example in Dr. Foord’s collection that is
selected as the type specimen is figured in the accompanying
figure (fig. 3) and its dimensions are given above (i.). This
appears to be the usual form of the species and is the chief
basis of the above diagnosis. But besides this there is a
form so closely related that it is considered to be specifically
identical, in which the whorls are somewhat more inflated
(being a little wider than high) and the umbilicus relatively
wider than in the type specimen. ‘The dimensions of such an
example are also given above (iv.).

There are five examples of this species in Dr. Foord’s

collection, all from St. Doulagh’s, Co. Dublin, Ireland. There
are also two fragments (the locality of which is not recorded)
in the British Museum collection (nos. C. 255 a & b) that are
referred to this species with some doubt, especially the example
C. 2556. The specimen C. 255 a may have come from
St. Doulagh’s, but the matrix of the example C. 255 differs
somewhat from the usual matrix of the St. Doulagh’s
specimens.
_ Affinities and Differences. This species is easily distin-
guished from Per. trapezoidalis * by its feebler ornaments
and very pronounced constrictions, and from Per. Foordi t
by its less inflated whorls and the presence of constrictions.

Horizon and Locality. Carboniferous Limestone: St. Dou-
lagh’s, Co. Dublin, Ireland.

Pericyclus clanensis, sp. n. (Figs. 4, 5.)

Sp. char. Shell discoidal, somewhat compressed, rather
involute; greatest thickness at a short distance from the
edge of the umbilicus, rather more than four elevenths of the
diameter of the shell; height of outer whorl about three
sevenths of the diameter of the shell. Whorls few (? num-
ber) ; inclusion nearly two thirds ; umbilicus shallow, rather
more than one fourth of the diameter of the shell in width,
with rounded margin. Whorl semielliptical in cross-section,
somewhat higher than wide; indented to rather more than
one third of its height by the preceding whorl; periphery
broadly convex, imperfectly defined; sides feebly convex,
somewhat flattened near the umbilicus; umbilical zone
narrow, convex, nearly perpendicular to the plane of sym-
metry of the shell, but sloping a little towards the umbilicus,
Body-chamber occupying rather more than the last whorl;
aperture uot seen, but peristome (judging by the lines of

* See supra, p. 482, t See supra, p. 430.

-
i
.

new or little-known Goniatites from Ireland. 437

growth) probably with a feeble lateral crest and a broad and
deep hyponomic sinus. Chambers shallow ; suture-line as in

Pericyclus clanensis.— Lateral view of the type specimen. The specimen
has been rubbed down so much, that there are only very slight indi-
cations of the ornaments of the test; these are not shown in the
figure. Carboniferous Limestone: Clane, Co. Kildare, Ireland.
Drawn from an example in the Science and Art Museum, Dublin,
About three fifths natural size.

fig. 5. Test ornamented with coarse and rather irregular
lines of growth, which pass from the umbilicus obliquely
across the whorl, and at the margin of the periphery turn

Fig. 5.

t

Suture-line of Pericyclus clanensis.—Carboniferous Limestone: Clane,
Co. Kildare, Ireland. Drawn of the natural size from the type
specimen in the Science and Art Museum, Dublin,

abruptly backward, becoming somewhat more prominent and
forming on the periphery a deep and fairly wide hyponomic

438 Mr. G. C. Crick on some

sinus ; the outer whorl with a few slight constrictions parallel
to the lines of growth.

Dimensions.
Diameter of shell.c7o20 5 a3 eae we 117:5 mm. (100)
Width of umbilicus (at suture of shell) 31 » (20's)
Width of umbilicus (at its margin) .. 83°5 ,, (28°5)
Height of outer whorl .............. 49 ,, (417)
Ditto above preceding whorl ........ 32S,“ (27°2)
Thickness of outer whorl ............ about 44 » (37°4)

Remarks. The example on which the present species is
founded is in the Science and Art Museum, Dublin. It has
been labelled Goniatites Brownt, M‘Coy *, and there is just
the possibility of its having been the type specimen. As it
does not, however, agree either with M‘Coy’s figure or his
description, I have entirely disregarded the name it bears.
Since the example is from Clane, Co. Kildare, the name
Fer. clanensis is suggested for it.

Affinities and Differences. Compared with Pertcyclus rotu-
“itormis t and also Per. Batlyi this species has more inflated
whorls aud a much narrower umbilicus.

Horizon and Locality. Carboniferous Limestone: Clane,

Co. Kildare, Ireland.

Pericyclus Bailyi, sp. n. (Figs. 6, 7.)

’ Sp. char. Shell discoidal, somewhat compressed, rather
widely umbilicated ; greatest thickness almost close to the
umbilical margin, about four ninths of the diameter of the
shell; height of outer whorl about three sevenths of the
shell. Whorls about seven in number; inclusion three
fourths; umbilicus deep, with subangular margin, nearly
one third of the diameter of the shell in width. Whorl

* F. M‘Coy, Synopsis Carb. Foss. Ireland, p. 12, pl.iv. fig 17. M‘Coy’s
description of this species is as follows:—* Discoid, subglobose, sides
flattened; umbilicus large, acute-edged, exceeding one third the diameter
of the shell; surface smooth ; septa, dorsal lobe small, bitid; dorsal sinus
acute ; first lateral lobe slightly exceeding the dorsal in length, very wide,
rounded ; lateral sinus twice as long as the dorsal, acute, linguiform ;
second lateral lobe very wide, obtusely rounded,

“Fyom the G. striatus, Sow., which the species most resembles, it is.
distinguished internally by its much shorter and wider first lateral lobe ;
the same character distinguishes it from the G. sphericus, Sow., and
from both it is distinguished externally by its smooth surface, and from
all the species of the same form by the large size of the umbilicus.
Diameter 2 inches 2 lines, thickness 1 inch 1 line.”

+ See supra, p. 434.

new or little-known Goniatites from Ireland. 439

semielliptical in section, a little wider than high; indented
to about three eighths of its height by the preceding whorl ;
periphery rather broadly convex, imperfectly defined ; sides

Pericyclus Bailyi.—a, lateral view of the type specimen; , front view of
the same. Carboniferous Limestone: St. Doulagh’s, Co. Dublin,
Ireland. Drawn from an example in the British Museum Collection
[C. 298]. About three fifths natural size.

feebly convex, flattened near the umbilical margin ; umbilical
zone well detined, narrow, feebly convex, sloping towards the
centre of the umbilicus, and forming an obtuse angle with
the side. Body-chamber occupying the whole of the last
whorl; aperture not seen, but peristome (judging by the
lines of growth) probably almost straight on the lateral area
and with a deep and broad hyponomic sinus. Chambers
(? depth) ; suture-line as in fig. 7. Test ornamented with

Fig. 7.

4

Suture-line of Pericyclus BailyiimCarboniferous Limestone: St. Dou-
lagh’s, Co. Dublin, Ireland. Drawn of the natural size from an
example in the collection of Dr. A. H. Foord, F.G.S.

feeble somewhat irregularly spaced riblets, which in crossing
the whorl pass obliquely backward from the edge of the

440) Mr. G. C. Crick on some

umbilicus to near the edge of the periphery, where they are
bent abruptly backward and form on the periphery a deep
and wide hyponomic sinus; on the periphery the ornaments
are stronger and more regularly arranged, the ribs being
narrow and the interspaces a little wider than the ribs; at the
anterior end of the body-chamber the riblets almost dis-
appear both on the sides and on the periphery; the whole
surface also with very fine raised lines, having the same
direction as the riblets and crossing the inner area in a feeble
anteriorly convex curve. Wrinkle-layer” with minute
blunt tubercles, which have a tendency to arrange themselves
in transverse striae near the umbilical portion of the whorl,
while near the periphery they tend to dispose themselves in
longitudinal striae.

Dimensions.
(i.) (ii. (iii.) (iv.)
Diameter of shell...... 97 mm. (100) 80 mm. (100) 62°5mm.(100) 35 mm. (100)

Width of umbilicus
(at suture of shell). 80 ,, (80°9) 23° >, .@87). a7... CF Meee
Width of umbilicus
(at its margin) ...... 385 4, (62) 28. , (50) 21, 4836) 12) com

Height of cuter whorl 41 ,, (42:2) 32°55 ,, (406) 265 , (424) 14 ,, (400)

Ditto above preceding

whorl oe cos 26*,, (268) 24 ,, (800) 18* ,, (288) 105,, (30-0)

Thickness of outer

WOT. esan cu dseeres' 44*,, (45°53) 395 ,, (493) 315 ,, (504) 19 ,,

Remarks. Vhe present species is represented by four
examples, the dimensions of which are given above. Three
of these (ii., ill., and iv.) are in Dr. Foord’s collection, the
other (i.) is in the collection of the British Museum (no.C. 298),
Compared with the adult, young examples have relatively
wider whorls and a wider umbilicus in proportion to the
diameter of the shell ; they have also coarser ornaments. Up
to a diameter of about 22 millim. the riblets pass over the
margin of the umbilicus on to the umbilical zone of the whorl.

One of Dr. Foord’s specimens (example 11. referred to
above) shows the ‘ wrinkle-layer ”’ very clearly.

The example in the British Museum is labelled “ Gonda-
tites Brownii,’ apparently in Mr. Baily’s handwriting, but
the specimen agrees neither with M‘Coy’s figure nor with his
description of that species f.

For this species the name Pericyclus Bailyi is proposed,
after Mr. W. H. Baily, the late Paleeontologist of the Geolo-
gical Survey of Ireiand.

* Approximately. t See supra, p. 488, footnote.

new or little-known Goniatites from Ireland. 441

Affinities and Differences. The present species is somewhat
more inflated and more widely umbilicated than Perieyclus
clanensis * ; it is also more inflated than Pericyclus rotuli-
formis T, and lacks the constrictions characteristic of that
species.

Horizon and Locality. All the examples of this species
that I have seen are from St. Doulagh’s, Co. Dublin,
Ireland. Three of these are in Dr. Foord’s collection, and
one (the largest) is in the British Museum collection

(no. C. 298).

Pericyclus plicatilis, L. G. de Koninck, sp.

Gontatites plicatilis, L. G. de Koninck, “Sur quelques Céphalopodes
nouveaux du Calcaire carbonifére de l’Irlande,” Ann. Soe. géol. de
Belg. vol. ix., Mémoires, p. 55, pl. v. figs. 3 & 4 (erroneously stated
to be pl. vi. figs. 8 & 4 (1881)).

Sp. char. Shell subglobose, rather widely umbilicated ;
greatest thickness at the umbilical margin, about two thirds
of the diameter of the shell; height of outer whorl about
two fifths of the diameter of the shell. Whorls (? number) ;
inclusion five sixths ; umbilicus deep, with angular margin
and steep sides, about one third of the diameter of the shell
in width, exposing the angular edges of the inner whorls.
Whorl semilunate in cross-section, much wider than high ;
indented to about two thirds of its height by the preceding
whorl; periphery broadly convex, imperfectly defined, con-
tinuous with the sides; sides feebly convex ; umbilical zone
well defined, fairly wide, nearly perpendicular to the plane of
symmetry of the shell, but sloping a little towards the centre
of the umbilicus. Body-chamber apparently occupying
nearly the whole of the last whorl; aperture not seen, but
(judging by the direction of the growth-lines) the peristome
probably nearly straight on the lateral area, and with a ver
broad and fairly deep byponomic sinus. Chambers (? depth) ;
suture-line only partially seen. Test ornamented with narrow
prominent riblets, which pass from, the margin of the umbili-
cus in a nearly radial direction over about two thirds of the
lateral area, and then turn backward somewhat abruptly,
forming on the periphery a very broad and fairly deep hypo-
nomic sinus; the interspaces are somewhat wider than the
riblets ; the whole suriace with very fine growth-lines parallel
to the riblets.

Dimensions. Owing to the distortion of the specimen [

* See supra, p. 436. 7 See supra, p. 434,

442 Mr. G. C. Crick on some

give the dimensions at two diameters (A-B, C-D) as nearly
as possible at right angles to each other :—

A-B. C-D.

Diameter of shell .......,.... about 96 mm. (100) 74 mm. (100)
Width of umbilicus (at suture

OF SOIL F7.. Ete 325 ,, (838) 22 ,, (29°7)
Width of umbilicus (at its

PATON TA oh nas a Penick OL toe 40 , (416) 30 ,, (40°5)
Height of outer whorl........ about 33, (343) 381 ,, (41°8)
Ditto above preceding whorl . . 20» | (20S) 20 SS Crm
Thickness of outer whorl...... about 64 ,, (666) 53 , (71°6)

The dimensions given by De Koninck are :—longitudinal
diameter 85 millim.; transverse diameter 58 millim. ; diameter
of umbilicus 30 millim.; median height of aperture 21 millim.

Remarks. The only example of this species that I have
seen is De Koninck’s type specimen, which is in the collection
of the Geological Survey of Ireland. It is there labelled
“ Gontatites Wrighti?,” but this appears to be only a manu-
script name. There is, however, no doubt whatever about its
being the type specimen of De Koninck’s “ Goniatites pli-
catilis.” he locality of the specimen is not recorded on the
tablet to which it is fixed; but De Koninck says :—“ Un
certain combre [ste] de spécimens de cette espéce ont été
recueillis dans le caleaire de Kilmacan.” De Koninck’s
figure is somewhat restored, the specimen being of a more
elliptical form.

Affinities and Differences. The present species is clearly
allied to Per. subplicatilis, but that is a much less inflated
shell. From Per. Hauchecornet, Holzapfel*, it differs by
its coarser ornaments and its much more inflated whorls.

Horizon and Locality. Carboniierous Limestone: Kilma-

can, Ireland (fide de Koninck).

Pericyclus subplicatilis, sp. n. (Figs. 8, 9.)

Sp. char. Shell discoidal, somewhat compressed, mode-
rately widely umbilicated ; greatest thickness almost close to
the margin of the umbilicus, about two fifths of the diameter of
the shell; height of outer whorl about two fifths of the dia-
meter of the shell. Whorls six or seven; inclusion four fifths;
umbilicus rather deep, with subangular margin, exposing the
edges of the inner whorls, about three tenths of the diameter
of the shell in width. Whorl semielliptical in cross-section,

* “Die Cephalopoden-fiihrenden Kalke des unteren Carbon von
Erdbach-Breitscheid bei Herborn,” Pal. Abhandl., Dames & Kayser,
Ba. v. Heft 1, 1889, p. 36, pl. ii. figs. 8-11 (especially figs. 11 & 11 a),

HY Fae ee

new or little-I:nown Goniatites from Ireland. 443

about as high as wide; indented to about one fifth of its
height by the preceding whorl; periphery broadly convex,
imperfectly defined; sides feebly convex, somewhat flattened

Tig. 8.

= 7
ate 5
URE

TNC a
\ SUT

Pericyclus subplicatilis.—a, lateral view of the type specimen; }, peri-
pheral view of the earlier portion of the outer whorl of the same.
Carboniferous Limestone: St. Doulagh’s, Co. Dublin, Ireland.
Drawn from an example in the collection of Dr. A. H. Foord, F.G.S.
About three fifths natural size.

near the umbilical margin; umbilical zone narrow, well-
defined, nearly perpendicular to the plane of symmetry of the
shell. Body-chamber occupying the whole of the last whorl ;
aperture not seen, but (judging by the growth-lines and orna-

Fig. 9.

Pericyclus subplicatis.—Suture-line. Carboniferous Limestone: St. Dou-
lagh’s, Co. Dublin, Iveland. Drawn from an example in the collec-
tion of Dr. A. H. Foord, F.G.S. Natural size.

ments) the peristome probably nearly straight on the lateral
area, and with a deep and broad hyponomic sinus. Chambers
(? depth) ; suture-line as in fig. 9. Test ornamented with

444 Mr. G. C. Crick on some

feeble somewhat inequidistant ribs, which, arising at the
umbilical margin, pass thence obliquely backward as far as
the margin of the periphery, where they bend somewhat
abruptly backward, and form on the periphery a deep and
wide hyponomic sinus; on the periphery the ribs become
nearly equidistant, fairly coarse, and separated by interspaces
of about their own width; the ornaments gradually disappear
on the outer whorl, those on the lateral area disappearing
first, and the ribs on the periphery at about the middle of the
last whorl. The whole surface of the test with very fine
growth-lines.

Dimensions.
Diameter of shell); ....0ees. ones 113°5 mm.* (100)
Width of umbilicus (at suture of shell) BO) ayy eon)
Width of umbilicus (at its margin) .. 40,5. . (SEB
Height of outer whorl.....'.....6+..« 43°5 ,, (38°38)
Ditto above preceding whorl ........ about 35. —,,_~—s (80°8)
Thickness of outer whorl............ 44 ,, (38°7)

Remarks. I lave seen only two examples of the present
species ; they are both in the collection of Dr. A. H. Foord,
of Dublin. The larger of these is fairly well preserved and
is regarded as the type specimen (see fig. 8a, 0). The smaller
example has a very imperfect and somewhat distorted outer
whorl, but exhibits the sculpture of the shell at a diameter of
about 62 millim., and shows that the ribbing becomes obso-
lete on the body-chamber at a diameter of about 94 millim.
I have been able to display the suture-line in this specimen
where the diameter is about 51 millim., ¢. e. where the radius
of the shell is about 29 millim. (see fig. 9).

Affinities and Differences. Of the Irish Goniatites that are
known to me the sculpture of the present species (up to a
diameter of about 70 millim.) closely resembles that of
De Koninck’s Goniatites plicatilis +; but that is a very much
more inflated shell, and the umbilical zone of its outer whorl
is wider and more sloping than that of the present species. —
This species appears to be also related to Pericyclus clanensis f,

* This specimen has been broken across and the fissure filled with
calcite, so that the diameter of the shell and the height of the last whorl
appear to be greater than they really are; the diameter appears to be
122 millim. and the height of the outer whorl 55:5 millim,

+ L. G. de Koninck, * Sur quelques Céphalopodes nouveaux du Calcaire
carbonifére de l’Irlande,” Aun. Soc. géol. de Belg. vol. ix., Mémoires,
p- 55, pl. v. figs. 8 & 4 (erroneously stated to be pl. vi. figs. 5 & 4). See
supra, p. 441.

t See supra, p. 436,

i

new or little-known Goniatites from Ireland. 445

but its inner whorls are less inflated, its umbilicus wider, its
umbilical margin more prominent, and the umbilical zone of
its outer whorl wider than in that species.

Horizon and Locality. Both examples that I have seen
are from the Carboniferous Limestone of St. Doulagh’s,

Co. Dublin, Ireland.

Glyphioceras cordatum, sp.n. (Figs. 10, 11.)

Sp. char. Shell discoidal, inflated, rather narrowly umbili-
cated ; greatest thickness at a short distance from the umbilical
margin, a little more than one half of the diameter of theshell ;
height of outer whorl a little less than one half of the diameter
of the shell. Whorls (2? number) ; inclusion about five sixths ;
umbilicus deep, with angular margin and steep sides, about

Ziff
Ay

te
My

Glyphicceras cordatum.—4a, lateral view of the type specimen; the last
septum is seen near the commencement of the outer whorl. Carbon-
iferous Limestone: Little Island, Cork, Ireland. Drawn from an
example in the collection of Dr. A. H. Foord, F.G.S. About three

fifths natural size.

one fourth of the diameter of the shell in width. Whorl
cordate in cross section, a little wider than high; indented
to nearly one half of its height by the preceding whorl ;
periphery narrowly convex and imperfectly defined by an
obtuse ridge on each side, becoming acute near the aperture
of the sbell; sides feebly convex, with an obtuse ridge at

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser 7. Vol. iii. 33

446 Mr. G. C. Crick on some

about three fifths of the width of the side from the edge of
the umbilicus, that becomes obsolete on the anterior part of
the body-chamber; umbilical zone well defined, rather
narrow, nearly perpendicular to the plane of symmetry of the
shell. Body-chamber occupying the whole of the last whorl ;
aperture not seen, but (judging by the growth-lines of the
test) the peristome probably with a prominent lateral crest and
a deep and rather narrow hyponomic sinus. Chambers
rather shallow ; suture-line asin fig. 11. Test nearly smooth,

Fig. 11.

t er

Glyphioceras cordatum.—Suture-line drawn from the last septum of the
type specimen in the collection of Dr. A. H. Foord, F.G.S. _Carbon-
iferous Limestone: Little Island, Cork, Ireland. Natural size.

apparently with only growth-lines which have a nearly radial
direction on the inner portion of the lateral area and turn
somewhat abruptly backward on the outer portion so as to
form a deep and moderately wide hyponomic sinus on the
periphery ; internal cast nearly smooth.

Dimensions.
A-B. C-D.

Diameter of shell ........ 1165 mm. (100) 109°5 mm. (100)
Width of umbilicus (at su-

Bure /of SHON), EE te\b eet 26 - ,, (22°35) 245 ,, (22:3)
Width of umbilicus (at its

TATE), cay tLe esterases 285 ,, (244) 26. gs ee)
Height of outer whorl .... about5l‘5 ,, (442) about485 ,, (44-2)

Ditto above preceding whorl about27'5 ,, (23:6) about25 —,,_ (22°8)
Thickness of outer whorl .. 56 ~—,,_—« (48) 555 ,, (50°6)

Remarks. I have seen only two examples of this species.
They are both from Little Island, Cork, and in the collection
of Dr. A. H. Foord, of Dublin. As is usual with specimens
from this locality, both are distorted, the one (the dimensions
of which are given above) only slightly, but the other
so much that its measurements are not given, since they
would be misleading. There cannot, however, be any doubt
as to the specific identity of the specimens.

The trivial name has been suggested by the form of the
aperture of the shell.

Affinities and Differences. This species is evidently closely

new or little-known Goniatites from Ireland. 447

related to such forms as Glyphioceras reticulatum, J. Phillips,
sp.*, and Glyphioceras Davisi, Foord & Crick t, but from
the former it differs by its more inflated whorls, the form of
its umbilicus, and the nature of its suture-line, and from the
latter by its angular but not prominent umbilical margin and
the form of its suture-line.

Horizon and Locality. Both examples that are referred
to this species are from the Carboniferous Limestone of Little

Island, Cork, Ireland.

Glyphioceras corpulentum, sp.n. (Figs. 12, 13.)

Sp. char. Shell subglobose, umbilicated, rapidly in-
creasing ; greatest thickness at the umbilical margin, about
three fifths of the diameter of the shell; height of outer whorl
about three sevenths of the diameter of the shell. Whorls

Glyphioceras corpulentum.—a, lateral view of the type specimen ; 4, peri-
pheral view of the same, showing the longitudinal and transverse
ornaments of the test. Carboniferous Limestone: St. Doulagh’s,
Co. Dublin, Ireland. Drawn from an example in the collection of
Dr. A. H. Foord, F.G.S. About three fifths natural size.

few (? number) ; inclusion nearly complete; umbilicus deep,
with subangular margin and steep sides, about three tenths of

* J. Phillips, Geol. Yorks. pt. ii. 1836, p. 235, pl. xix. figs. 26-32.
See also A. H. Foord & G. C. Crick, Cat. Foss. Ceph. Brit. Mus. pt. iii.
1897, p. 193.

+ A. H. Foord & G. C. Crick, Cat. Foss. Ceph. Brit. Mus. pt. iii. 1897,
p. 198, fig. 95.

33*

448 Mr. G. C. Crick on some

the diameter of the shell in width. Whorl lunate in cross-
section, the height about three fourths of the width ; indented
to nearly one half of its height by the preceding whorl; peri-
phery broadly convex, imperfectly defined; sides convex ;
umbilical zone well defined, narrow, almost perpendicular to
the plane of symmetry of the shell. _Body-chamber occupying
nearly the whole of the last whorl; aperture not seen, but
(judging by the growth-lines) the peristome probably with
only a very feeble crest near the edge of the umbilicus, and
with a very wide and shallow hyponomic sinus. Chambers
shallow; suture-line as in fig. 13. ‘lest nearly smooth, with

Fig. 13.

r\/

Glyphioceras corpulentum.—Suture-line drawn from an example in the
collection of Dr, A. H. Foord, F.G.S. Carboniferous Limestone :
St. Doulagh’s, Co. Dublin, Ireland. Natural size.

fine subregular raised lines, which become more distinct in
the adult ; these pass obliquely backward from the umbilicus
as far as the margin of the periphery, where they assume a
nearly radial direction, and cross the periphery in a very wide
and shallow hyponomic sinus; in the adult the periphery
es eight or nine obscure rather widely spaced longitudinal
ines.

Dimensions.

: (i.) (ii.)
Diameter of shell .......... 64 mm. (100) 95 mm. (100)
Width of umbilicus (at suture

of shell carecwan Sorta 155 (24:2 22 23°
Width of umbilicus (at its (hs ps

MATQIN) ve. se eee sevens 21 ~=,, ~(82°8) 25 5, (268)
Height of outer whorl...... Df agg gh AoTd) 45 ,, (47°38)
Ditto above preceding whorl about 165 ,, (25°7) about 20 ,, (21:0)
Thickness of outer whorl.... 405 ,, (63:2) 58 ,, (61:0)

Remarks. The two examples of this species that I have
seen are in the collection of Dr. A. H. Foord. Their
dimensions are given above. The larger specimen (ii.) shows
the form of the inner whorls and is regarded as the type, the
smaller example (i.) exhibits the suture-line.

Affinities and Differences. This species can be readily
recognized by the nature of its ornaments and by the inflation
of its whorls.

new or little-known Goniatites from Ireland. 449

Horizon and Locality. Both examples known to me are
from the Carboniferous Limestone, St. Doulagh’s, Co. Dublin,
Treland.

Glyphioceras ellipsoidale, sp. n. (Fig. 14.)

Sp. char. Shell subglobose, somewhat compressed, nar-
rowly umbilicated ; greatest thickness at the margin of the
umbilicus, about four sevenths of the diameter of the shell ;
height of outer whorl about three sevenths of the diameter of
the shell. Whorls (?number) ; inclusion about two thirds ;
umbilicus deep, with subangular margin and nearly perpen-
dicular sides, about three elevenths of the diameter of the

Glyphioceras ellipsordale.—Lateral view of the type specimen in the collec-
tion of the Museum of Science and Art, Dublin. Carboniferous
Limestone: Kildare, Ireland. About three fifths natural size.

shell in width, exposing the edges of the inner whorls.
Whaorl semielliptical in cross-section, the height about three
fourths of the width; indented to nearly one third of its
height by the preceding whorl ; periphery broadly convex,
imperfectly defined, continuous with the sides ; sides convex,
a little flattened near the umbilicus ; umbilical zone narrow,
convex, nearly perpendicular to the plane of symmetry of the
shell. Body-chamber apparently occupying the whole of the
last whorl; peristome with a broad, feeble, lateral crest and
a wide and deep hyponomic sinus. Chambers (? depth) ;
suture-line not seen. ‘Test almost perfectly smooth, with
obscure growth-lines near the aperture.

450 Mr. G. C. Crick on some

Dimensions.

(i.) (ii.)
ee

_—_—

Diameter of shell .. 83 mm. (100) 70:5 mm. (100) 70°5 mm. (100)
Width of umbilicus

(atsuture of shell) 20 ,, (24:0) P 14. 53° (9)
Width of umbilicus

(at its margin).. 23°5 ,, (283) 17:5 mm. (248) 17 | 5 Gey
Height of outer

whorl ........ 36 , (483) 310 ,, (43°9) 31:5 ,, (44°6)
Ditto above _pre-

ceding whorl 20 hy, (S01) P 6, Ca
Thickness of outer

WEL cis aati 47 ,, (566) 43 mm. (60:9) 39°5 ,, (56)

Remarks. The type‘specimen of this species—the example
upon which the diagnosis given above has been chiefly based—
is in the collection of the Museum of Science and Art,
Dublin. The specimen is labelled ‘‘ Kildare,” and does not
appear to be at all crushed or distorted. The whole of the
outer whorl appears to be occupied by the body-chamber, so
that I have not been able to make out the form of the
suture-line. With some doubt I also refer to this species
an example in the British Museum collection (no. C, 294)
from the Carboniferous Limestone of Rathkeale, Co. Limerick ;
but, as will be seen from its dimensions given above (ii.), it
is somewhat more compressed than the type specimen, but
some of this compression may have been produced during
fossilization. De Koninck recognized three divisions of the
Carboniferous Limestone in Treland—upper, middle, and
lower; he referred the limestone at Rathkeale to the middle
division, whilst that at Kildare he placed in the upper
division.

Affinities and Differences. This species differs from Gly.
sphericum, Martin, sp.*, in being less inflated and more
umbilicated. Compared with Gy. crenistria, Phillips, sp.T,
it is more compressed, its ornaments are not crenulated, and
they form a much deeper hyponomic sinus. Its transverse
ornaments (or growth-lines), larger umbilicus, and more in-
flated shell at once distinguish this species from Gly. striatum f,
J. Sowerby, sp.

* Conchyliolithus Nautilites sphericus, W. Martin, Petrif. Derb. 1809,
p. 15, pl. vil. figs. 3, 4, & 5.

i Goniatites crenistria, J. Phillips, Geol. Yorks. pt. ii, 1836, p. 234,
pl. xix. figs. 7, 8, 9.

nF Ammonites str tatus, J. Sowerby, Min. Conch. vol. i. p. 115 (1814),
pl. liii. fig. 1.

new or little-known Goniatites from Ireland. 451

Horizon and Locality. Carboniferous Limestone : Kildare,
Ireland (? Rathkeale, Co. Limerick, Ireland).

Prolecanites Leesoni, sp. n. (Fig. 15.)

Sp. char. Shell discoidal, compressed, rather narrowly
umbilicated ; greatest thickness at the margin of the umbili-
cus, about one third of the diameter of the shell; height of
outer whorl about four ninths of the diameter of the shell.
Whorls (?number); inclusion three fourths; umbilicus
shallow, with subangular margin and sloping sides, about
two sevenths of the diameter of the shell in width. Whorl

Prolecanites Leesoni.—a, lateral view of the type specimen ; 4, front view
of the same. Carboniferous Limestone: Glenbane East, Limerick,
Treland. Drawn from an example in the collection of the Geological
Survey of Ireland, Dublin. About three fifths natural size.

subtrapezoidal in cross-section, its width about three fourths
of its height; indented to about two sevenths of its height by
the preceding whorl ; periphery somewhat imperfectly defined,
very feebly convex, somewhat flattened; umbilical zone
narrow, well defined, sloping towards the centre of the umbili-
cus. Body-chamber apparently occupying nearly the whole
of the last whorl; aperture not seen, but (judging by the
growth-lines) the peristome probably nearly straight on the
lateral area, and with a fairly wide and moderately deep
hyponomic sinus. Chambers (? depth) ; suture-line not seen.
Test nearly smooth, with subregular growth-lines, which

452 Mr. G. C. Crick on some

have anearly radial direction on the lateral area and form a
fairly wide and moderately deep hyponomic sinus on the
periphery; the body-chamber with obscure backwardly
curved riblets extending from the edge of the umbilicus over
about one third of the lateral area; the internal cast has on
the first fourth of the outer whorl two constrictions, which
arise at a short distance from the edge of the umbilicus and
cross the whorl parallel to the growth-lines.

Dimensions.
Shamoter7orabell \, Po ha. ces as nee ee eee ete 90 mm. (100)
Width of umbilicus (at suture of shell)...... 24 4 (26°6)
Width of umbilicus (at its margin) ........ 27-4, ~(80°0)
Height of outer whorl. .: «is axewees we as 405 ,, (45°0)
Ditto above preceding whorl .............. 28° ketene
Thickness of outer whorl ..........0.seeues 29°5 ,, (32°8)

Remarks. I have seen only one example of this species ;
it is in the collection of the Geological Survey of Ireland,
and I am greatly indebted to the authorities of the Survey
for the loan of the specimen. It is there labelled “‘ Gondatites
Leesoni,”’ but, so far as I know, no description of the species
has been published under this name. Unfortunately the
suture-line cannot be made out; but there is every reason to
believe that the species belongs to the genus Prolecanites.

Affinities and Differences. 'The present species can be
readily distinguished from both Prolecanites compressus,
J. Sowerby, sp.*, and Prolec. similis, Crick T, by the small-
ness of its umbilicus.

Horizon and Locality. Carboniferous Limestone: Glen-
bane East, Limerick, Ireland. ‘This is the same locality as
that which yielded the type specimen of L. G. de Koninck’s
Goniatites ornatissimus J.

* J. Sowerby, Min. Conch. vol. i. p. 84, pl. xxxviii., 1813 (Eilipsolites
compressus). See also Foord & Crick, ‘On the Identity of Elipsolites
compressus, J. Sowerby, with Ammonites Henslowi, J. Sowerby,” Geol.
Mag. dec. iv. vol. i. (1894), p. 11, pl. i.

+ G. C. Crick, Trans. Manchester Geol. Soc. vol. xxiii. pt. iii. 1895,
pp- 80-84, woodcut.

t L. G. de Koninck, “ Sur quelques Céphalopodes nouveaux du Cal-
caire carbonifére de I’Irlande,” Ann. Soe. géol. de Belg. vol. ix., Mémoires,
p. 55, pl. vi. figs. 3 & 4 (erroneously stated to be pl. v. figs. 3 & 4). See
also wfra, p. 453.

new or little-known Goniatites from Ireland. 453

Brancoceras ornatissimum, L. G. de Koninck, sp.

Goniatites ornatissimus, LL. G. de Koninck, “Sur quelques Céphalo-
podes nouveaux du Calcaire carbonifére de l’Irlande,” Ann. Soe. géol.
de Belg. vol. ix., Mémoires, p. 53, pl. vi. figs. 4 & 5 (erroneously
stated to be pl. v. figs. 4 & 5) (1881).

Sp. char. Shell somewhat ovoidal, compressed, with closed
umbilicus; greatest thickness at about one fourth of the
height of the whorl from the umbilicus, about seven tenths of
the diameter of the shell; height of outer whorl about three
fifths of the diameter of the shell. Whorls (? number) ; in-
clusion complete; umbilicus closed with shelly callus, in
centre of infundibuliform depression. Whorl oval or sub-
cordate in cross-section, rather wider than high ; indented to
about one half of its height by the preceding whorl ; peri-
phery narrowly convex, imperfectly defined; sides feebly
convex, convergent, their inner portion sloping towards the
umbilicus and forming an obtuse angle with the rest of the
side; no distinct umbilical zone. Body-chamber probably
occupying fully half a whorl; aperture not seen, but (judging
by the ornaments) the peristome probably with a broad
lateral crest and a deep and fairly wide hyponomic sinus.
Chambers (? depth) ; suture-line only imperfectly seen; ex-
ternal lobe narrow, with a single point, external saddle
rounded, fairly wide; lateral lobe with a single point, some-
what wider than the external lobe; lateral saddle very broad,
rounded, twice as wide as the external saddle. Test with
fine regular raised lines, which cross the lateral area of the
whorl in a bold orad-convex curve, and form on the periphery
a deep and fairly wide hyponomic sinus.

Dimensions.
Diameter of shell ...... EROS ee ae ee 68 mm. (100)
WiisbrotmOUliCUs Fs ectie css. aes es (closed)
Heirkt of outer whorl). io. 022.35 5. 41°5 mm, (61:0)
Ditto above preceding whorl .......... 23 ~,, (83°8)
Thickness of outer whorl............++ AT it ys (ODEN)

The dimensions given by De Koninck are :—longitudinal
diameter 70 millim.; transverse diameter 42 millim.; height
of aperture 40 millim.

Remarks. 1 have seen only one example of this species,
that is the type specimen which forms part of the collection
of the Geological Survey of Ireland; it bears the locality
“ Limerick, Glenbane K.”; but De Koninck says it came

454 Mr. T. Scott on Cytheridea castanea.

from Tomdeelys, Co. Limerick, Ireland. The specimen lacks
the body-chamber, the anterior end of the specimen being the
surface of the last septum. Although this septal surface is
incomplete, there is sufficient to show clearly that the species
belongs to the genus Brancoceras. This was the only
example known to De Koninck.

Affinities and Differences. The closed umbilicus, the wide
umbilical depression, the ornaments of the test, and the form
of the suture-line at once distinguish the present species both
from Glyphioceras striatum, J. Sowerby, sp., and Glyphio-
ceras crenistria, J. Phillips, sp.

LX.—WNote on the Occurrence of Cytheridea castanea, G. S.
Brady, in a Surface-deposit in the Vicinity of Buenos Ayres,
South America. By THomas Scort, F.L.S.

[Plate XVI.]

DarwIn, when describing the surface-geology of the Pampas
in his ‘Geological Observations on South America,’ alludes
to the occurrence of shell-bearing sand-dunes on the shores of
the Rio de la Plata and elsewhere in the province of La Plata.
Numbers of these dunes are to be found in the vicinity of
Buenos Ayres, especially towards the shores of the estuary of
the Plate. The dunes referred to are generally more or less
covered with vegetation, but in some instances, where the
vegetation is displaced, a shell-bed a few inches thick and of
a darker colour and firmer consistency than the sand is seen
to stretch across each of the dunes in a nearly horizontal
position. It is in this shell-bed that the Cythertdea was
obtained that forms the subject of this note.

Buenos Ayres, being an important seaport, is frequently
visited by ships trading to South America. My younger son,
Mr. John Scott, is a marine engineer, and his ship happened
to be at Buenos Ayres for several days during January last
year (1898). My son is interested in natural history, and,
being ashore, he took the opportunity to examine a few of
the sand-dunes in the vicinity of the harbour of Buenos Ayres
and also to collect a quantity of the material in which the
shells are embedded. In collecting this material he first
scraped away the surface-matter, then, digging well into the
shell-bed, removed what he considered to be a fair sample of
the material ; this he brought home on his return to England.
I made a careful examination of the material my son had
brought to me, and obtained from it a number of different
kinds of fossils; the most common species obtained was Azuara
labiata, d’Orb., a bivalve mollusk mentioned by Darwin as

Mr. T. Scott on Cytheridea castanea. 455

abundant in the sand-dunes near San Pedro on the River
Parana and in shell-beds at San Isidro. The remains of this
mollusk occurred mostly in the form of single valves or
portions of valves, only in a few instances were the specimens
complete, and in every case the valves of the more perfect
specimens were kept together only by the mud in which they
were embedded. Paludistrina, a small spiral univalve, was
also moderately frequent. ‘The remains of a small PBalanus
were occasionally observed, and one or two of the valves of
Azara had each a Balanus adhering to them. A few Fora-
minifera, seeds of plants, and some other things were also
noticed; but the most interesting of all the fossils obtained
was the Ostracod already referred to, viz. Cytheridea cas-
tanea, G. 8. Brady.

Cytheridea castanea was described and figured by Prof. Brady
in 1870 in ‘ Les Fonds de la Mer,’ vol. i. p. 117, pl. xiii.
figs. 19-21, pl. xiv. figs. 1, 2*. This Ostracod was dredged
by the Marquis de Folin in the Bay of Biscay and at Port
Said, and these two places are apparently the only localities
where the species has been obtained hitherto. Prof. Brady
very kindly examined a few of the Buenos Ayres specimens,
and is satisfied that they belong to the same species as his
Cytheridea castanea. J may mention, however, that in all
the specimens from Buenos Ayres which I have observed there
isa slight depression that extends obliquely across both valves
of the Ostracod, as shown by figures 2 and 3 (PI. XVI). In
some of the specimens the depression is scarcely so con-
spicuous as it isin others, and it is best seen when the light
strikes lengthways across the shell. Cytheridea castanea does
not appear to have previously been recorded from South
America even asa fossil; its occurrence in the shell-bed at
Buenos Ayres is therefore of interest, more especially as it
appears to be moderately frequent in the deposit. 1 have
obtained a considerable number of specimens in the sample of
the deposit which my son brought home, and, curiously, it was
the only Ostracod observed.

Prof. Rupert Jones, to whom I desire to express my
indebtedness for information concerning the fossil Entomo-
straca of South America, has published one or two papers in
which are described a number of forms that were obtained
during the excavations for a new railway in Bahiat. The

* See also the “ Mon. of the Mar. and Freshw. Ostrac. of the N. At-
lantic and N.W. Europe,” Trans. Roy. Dubl. Soe. vol. iv. ser. 2, p..175,
pl. xxi. figs. 3, 4 (1889). .

+ “Fossil Entom. from S. America,” Geol. Mag. dec. iv. vol. iv.
pp. 259-265 & 289-293, pls. ix., x. (1897).

456 Mr. C. Grave on the

species recorded by Prof. Jones include several Ostracoda,
but none of them appear to belong to the Cythertdea referred
to here. Moreover, the shell-bed in which this Ostracod
occurs is apparently referable to a later date than the deposit
in which the Bahia fossils were obtained that are described
by Prof. Jones.

The Azara is said to be still living in the estuary of the
Plata, and probably the Cytheridea may also be still living
there; for if the same conditions that were suitable to the
existence of the Azara when the bed in which they are now
found fossil was being formed were also congenial to the
Cytheridea, it is reasonable to suppose that the conditions
under which the mollusk is living now will also be favourable
to the existence of the Ostracod.

The figures on the annexed Plate XVI. represent (1) a
sketch (fig. 1), drawn from memory by Mr. John Scott, of
two of the dunes, to indicate approximately the position of the
shell-beds in which the fossils occur, and (2) two drawings
(figs. 2 and 3) by Mr. A. Scott, showing a lateral and a
dorsal view of the Ostracod, prepared from Buenos Ayres
specimens.

LXI.—Embryology of Ophiocoma echinata, Agassiz.
(Preliminary Note.) By C. Grave*.

THE conflicting results of previous investigators, and the need
of confirmation of some of the results obtained by them upon
Ophiurid development, seemed to warrant my undertaking a
new investigation of the subject; and by the advice of
Prof. W. K. Brooks it was made my principal object while
in Jamaica during the summer of 1897 to obtain a series of
embryological material extending at least from the segmen-
tation stages to the beginning of metamorphosis.

But when I arrived at Port Antonio on June 14th I found
that in no species at hand had the breeding-season begun
except with Ophiocoma Riisei, with which it was over, and
it was not until less than three weeks of the end of my stay
that the first ripe eggs were thrown by Ophiocoma echinata,
although ripe spermatozoa had been obtained every day for
more than a month.

In consequence of this the oldest plutei reared were but

* From the ‘Johns Hopkins University Circulars,’ November 1898,
pp. 6-7.

—_wes

Embryology of Ophiocoma echinata, Agassiz. 457

sixteen days old and showed no signs of metamorphosis, but
probably had reached their adult form and size.

The eggs, which were of an orange-red colour, after being
fertilized, threw about themselves a tough prickly egg-
membrane, which rendered preservation difficult until it was
burst and the larva had escaped.

At first the points and ridges of this chitinous egg-
membrane were quite high and regular, but soon were worn
down and became as shown in figure 1. Under the outer
egg-membrane is still another, very thin and closely applied
to the developing larva.

Segmentation was regular, and a blastula was formed,
consisting of cells of equal size or nearly so, and with a very
small segmentation-cavity. The long cylindrical cells com-
posing its walls before dividing flatten down and become as
nearly spherical as conditions will admit, as has been
described by Korschelt for sea-urchins and as is shown for
O. echinata in figure 1, which is a camera sketch of a section

of a blastula. The growing larva now bursts the chitinous
membrane which encloses it, crawls out, and swims about in
the water. It is somewhat elongated and swims in the
direction of the axis connecting the animal and vegetable
poles, the animal pole, which is slightly pointed, preceding.
As it moves from place to place it is continually revolving
on the long axis. At the time of hatching the mesenchyme
formation has just begun. It takes place by the rapid pro-
liferation of cells at the vegetable pole, no evidence being

458 Mr. C. Grave on the

found of its originating as two bands, and is continued
until the segmentation-cavity is quite crowded with cells.
Figure 2 is a camera sketch of a section of a larva at the
time of hatching, cutting it in the plane of the long axis,
showing the shape of the larva at this stage and the method
of mesenchyme formation.

The cilia did not show in the section, but those at the
animal pole are much longer than those over the rest of the
larva,

The gastrula-stage is formed several hours later by the
invagination of the vegetable pole. The cells composing the
invaginated tube or archenteron are all of about the same
shape and size, but a decided differentiation is to be noted
among the ectoderm cells. Those at the animal pole are
much elongated and vacuolated, thus forming a thickened
apical plate. The lateral walls, too, have each a thickened
area, while the cells of the ventral side are of a uniform
thickness, but much thicker than those composing the dorsal
surface of the larva, which are much flattened and thin.
Near the thickened lateral areas clumps of mesenchyme cells
collect and begin to secrete the larval skeleton. Beside
these, other mesenchyme cells take up the function probably
of support for the archenteron and other organs as they form.
At least in gastrule and older Jarvee long branching cells can
be seen in the segmentation-cavity connecting the archen-
teron with the ectoderm wall or with other mesenchyme cells,
or connecting two portions of the ectoderm. ‘The cells of the
supported parts to which the processes of the mesenchyme
cells attach take an active part in the formation of the
connecting fibre or strand, as part of their substance meets
and fuses with that sent out by the mesenchyme cell.

From the apex of the flattened archenteron a pair of
pouches grow out and are constricted off, one to the right, the
other to the left. Hach of these divides into two pouches of
about equal size, one of which remains in about its original
position, while the other migrates toward the blastophore and
takes up a position on the side of that part of the archenteron
which will later become the stomach. This is as Metschni-
koff described it and as Bury supposed must be the case; but,
contrary to what both the above investigators describe, I find
that the mght posterior pouch degenerates and disappears,
thus leaving a larva with a pouch on either side of the
cesophagus and one on the left side of the stomach. This
condition was noted in every pluteus observed, and hundreds
of them have been studied.

In confirmation of the phenomenon observed in Ophiurans

_ a ee

Embryology of Ophiocoma echinata, Agassiz. 459

by Metschnikoff and in starfish larvae by Brooks and Field, I
find that soon after their formation the two anterior pouches
both communicate with the exterior through pore-canals
which open on the dorsal surface of the larva.

At about the time of the formation of the pore-canals or a

Fig. 3.

little before, the larval mouth breaks through on the ventral
surface and there is formed the perfect bilaterally symmetrical
larva shown in fig. 3, which is the optical section of a larva

lying on its dorsal surface, the outlines having been made

with a camera lucida.
The pore-canals are not, as Bury describes, intracellular

460 On the Embryology of Ophiocoma echinata.

structures, but consist in an epithelium of flattened cells, as
is shown by figs. 4 and 5, which are camera drawings of
sections of two larve. Fig. 4 represents the seventeenth,
twenty-first, and twenty-fourth longitudinal sections of a
young larva, the seventeenth section passing through the edge
of the alimentary canal and left pore-canal, the twenty-first

Fig. 5.
ipe

being the median sagittal section and passing through the
mouth and anus, the twenty-fourth cutting the larva in the
plane of the right pore-canal. Fig. 5 is a transverse section

through the cesophagus of a slightly older larva cutting both
pore-canal openings.

ES ee ee ae ae ae ee ee oe a

On Insects from the Transvaal, 461

The abundance of apparently normal larve having two
pore-canals indicates that it is a normal condition of larva of
that stage, which, should it so prove to be, would probably
constitute a character of some phylogenetic importance. The
right pore-canal sooner or later disappears, but persists
slightly longer than the right posterior pouch, which is very
transient in its character.

With the exception of the arms, which become very long,
and the skeleton, which has been dissolved out, the pluteus,
after undergoing the above transformation, appears as shown
in fig. 6, which is the optical section of a young pluteus made
in the same manner as fig. 38, but in this case the pluteus is
lying on its ventral surface.

Explanation of letters in Figures.

a. Anus. oe. CXsophagus.

eb, Ciliated band. oem, Outer egg-membrane.
tem. Inner egg-membrane. rap. Right anterior pouch.
lap. Left anterior pouch. rpp. Right posterior pouch,
Ipc. Left pore-canal. rpc. Right pore-canal.
Ipp. Left posterior pouch, s. Stomach.

m. Mouth. sc. Segmentation-cavity.

me. Mesenchyme.

LXII.—Some apparently undescribed Insects from the
Transvaal. By W. L. DIsTant.

COLEOPTERA.
LONGICORNIA.
Fam. Cerambycida.

Merioneda africana, sp. n.

Black ; anterior and intermediate legs, basal non-dilated
portion of posterior femora, and the elytra (excluding apical
angles) ochraceous. Palpi, mandibles, and maxille brownish
ochraceous.

The antenne are somewhat obscurely pubescent and in-
wardly pilose. Head large, subquadrate, about as long as
broad, coarsely punctate. Pronotum about half as long again
as the head, sparingly but coarsely punctate, with a central
longitudinal linear incision and a large discal foveate impres-
sion, its lateral margins slightly convex and pilose. Scu-
tellum dull opaque black. lHlytra sparingly but coarsely

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iii. 34

462 Mr. W. L. Distant on

punctate, the lateral margins pilose, shorter than the abdo-
men, broadest at humeral angles, beyond which they are
distinctly emarginate, their apices narrow and subacute. Legs
pilose; femora with their apical areas very strongly globose,
especially those of the posterior femora, which are also
coarsely punctate. Body beneath greyishly pilose.

Long. 8-9 millim.

Hab. Transvaal, Lydenburg District.

I have placed this species provisionally in the Eastern
genus Merioneda, with which it generally agrees. It will
probably afford the characters for a new genus.

LEPIDOPTERA,
HETEROCERA.

Fam. Arctiade.
The following species of Pusiola has been kindly workeJ out

and described by Sir G. F. Hampson :—

Pusiola psectriphora, Hamps., sp. n.

¢. Antenne bipectinate, with short branches ending in
a bristle; fore wing with vein 11 very faint and almost
obsolete.

Orange-yellow ; palpi at tips and fore tibie tinged with
fuscous; abdomen greyish towards base. Fore wing with
the inner area very slightly tinged with fuscous : hind wing
rather paler orange-yellow.

Hab. Transvaal, Pretoria (Distant).

Exp. 36 millim.

Fam. Noctuide.
Eublemma plumbosa, sp. n.

Anterior wings and pronotum very pale plumbeous, greyish
towards base; head, antenna, anterior margin to pronotum,
costal margin and outer marginal fringe to anterior wings,
and abdomen golden yellow; posterior wings and base of
abdomen pale stramineous ; a small dark apical plumbeous
streak at apices of anterior wings. Anterior wings beneath
much darker than above; body beneath and legs golden
yellow.

Exp. wings 20 millim.

Hab. Transvaal, Pretoria (coll. Dist.). Mashunaland,
Salisbury (Brit. Mus.).

Insects from the Transvaal. 463

Fam. Hypsida.
Digama ostentata, sp. n.

Head, pronotum, and anterior wings plumbeous; abdomen
and posterior wings stramineous. Anterior wings crossed
beyond cell by a waved, narrow, macular, greyish fascia;
preceding this fascia are nine small black spots more or less
margined with greyish, situate four costal and basal, one
above centre and two above end of cell, onein centre and one
at end of cell. Anterior wings beneath paler than above,
few of the spots visible ; body beneath and legs pale plum-
beous ; sternum and abdomen with marginal rows of black
spots ; proboscis stramineous.

Exp. wings 35 millim.

Hab. Transvaal, Pretoria (coll. Dist.). Cape Colony,
Annshaw (Brit. Mus.).

Fam. Notodontida.
Hoplitis gigas, sp. n.

Head, antenna, and pronotum fuscous, lateral pronotal
margins broadly greyish white; abdomen ochraceous, base
uarrowly, a central narrow longitudinal fascia and the apex
broadly, fuscous. Body beneath and legs fuscous; lateral
segmental tufts to abdomen ochraceous,

Anterior wings dull greyish, much speckled with fuscous ;
costal margin, two narrow outer and inner marginal fasciz,
a broader waved inner marginal fascia, and the neuration
fuscous. These wings are greyish white near base and
brownish grey on disk and ona subapical spot. Posterior
wings greyish white, with a broad dark fuscous outer margin,
which is widest at apex and somewhat obsolete at anal angle,
Anterior wings beneath pale fuscous, with a streak beyond

- cell, an outer marginal series of spots, and a large spot near

centre of inner margin greyish white. Posterior wings
beneath generally as above, but with a short fuscous streak
above end of cell; bases of both wings narrowly ochraceous.
Exp. wings 85 millim. Long. body 33 millim,
Hiab. Transvaal, Lydenburg District.

Phalera lydenburgi, sp. n.

?. Body above brownish ochraceous, lateral margins of
the pronotum and base of abdomen greyish violaceous ; apical

area of abdomen banded with fuscous. Body beneath and
34%

464 On Insects from the Transvaal.

legs fuscous (abdomen sometimes paler), with a series of
marginal dark fuscous spots.

Anterior wings with the area beneath cell greyish ochra-
ceous, speckled with black, above cell fuscous brown; a
reniform spot at end of cell, which is castaneous, margined
with ochraceous; an ochraceous oblique streak extending
from apex to about the region of end of cell, outwardly
margined by a narrowed waved fuscous fascia; outer margin
with a series of elongated conical ochraceous spots, their
apices fuscous and greyish. Posterior wings pale fuscous,
basal area pale ochraceous; outer fringe ochraceous, with
brownish lines. Wings beneath pale fuscous, outer margins
and base of posterior wings as above.

Exp. wings 50-55 millim.

Hab. Transvaal, Lydenburg District (Pret. Mus. and coll.
Dist.).

Allied to P. ¢mitata, Druce.

Cerura spiritalis, sp. n.

Head greyish ochraceous, pronotum and base of abdomen
greyish white ; pronotum with the anterior margin greyish
ochraceous, followed by dark fuscous, posterior margin with
two dark fuscous tufts ; abdomen with apical two thirds dark
fuscous, speckled with greyish white. Body beneath greyish
white; head, antenne, tarsi, two spots to intermediate and
posterior tibie, and apex of abdomen dark fuscous.

Wings greyish white; anterior wings with a very small
rounded spot near base, an irregular spot in cell and one
above it on costal margin, three smaller subapical costal
spots, an outer submarginal fascia commencing beneath apex,
a large irregular spot on inner margin, and a series of small
outer marginal spots dark fuscous ; posterior wings with the
outer margin and a small spot near end of cell fuscous.
Wings beneath greyish white; both wings with a broad
outer marginal fuscous fascia and an elongate spot at end of
cells.

Exp. wings 53 millim.

Hab. Transvaal, Lydenburg District.

Fam. Lasiocampide.

Lebeda mustelina.

3 ¢. Body and anterior wings tawny, posterior wings
slightly roseate.

¢g. Anterior wings with three very obscure transverse

ee SPS Parra Tey re ya |< es

On some new Spectes of Heterocera. 465

lineate fascia, the two outer much waved; both wings with
a distinct paler marginal fringe inwardly darkly delineated.
?. Anterior wings with three distinct, oblique, lineate,
fuscous fascie, about equally separated; outer marginal fringe
as in male.
Exp. wings, ¢ 34, 9 50 millim.
eae Transvaal, Lydenburg District (Pret. Mus. and coll.
iat.).

In 1897 I described a new species of Taragama (T. mi-
rabilis) in which, having before me then only single male and
female specimens, I considered the sexes to widely diverge.
I have since been able to examine a male altogether agreeinz
with the female described, and it is thus evident there are two
distinct species.

Taragama mirabilis,

Taragama mirabilis g, Dist. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 6, vol. xx.
p. 208 (1897).

Transvaal, Lydenburg District (coll. Dist.).

Taragama cuprea, sp. n.
Taragama mirabilis 2, Dist. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 6, vol. xx.
p. 208 (1897).
Male resembling female ; posterior wings a little paler.
Exp. wings, ¢ 42 millim.
Hab. Transvaal, Lydenburg District (Pret. Mus.).

LXIII.—Descriptions of some new Species of Heterocera from
Tropical America, Africa, India, and the Eastern Islands.
By Herpert Druce, F.L.S. &e.

Fam. Arctiidae.

Metaxanthia vespiformis, sp. n.

Female.—Head, antennz, thorax, tegulz, the basal half of
the abdomen, and the legs all black; the anal half of the
abdomen chrome-yellow. Primaries smoky hyaline black,
darkest at the base and on the costal margin; the veins all
black: secondaries whitish hyaline, dusky at the apex and
round the outer margin to the anal angle ; the veins black.

Expanse 1,%5 inch.

Hab. Amazons, Villa Nova (Bates, in Mus. Oxford),

466 Mr. H. Druce on some

Evius sisenna, sp. 0.

Female.—The front of the head yellow; antenne, collar,
tegule, and thorax brown; abdomen red above; the anus,
underside, and legs pale yellow. Primaries reddish brown,
with three pale yellow spots on the costal margin, the first
nearest the base large, the second and third near the apex
quite small; a yellow spot on the outer margin about the
middle; the fringe yellow : secondaries red, broadly bordered
with blackish brown, the fringe yellow.

Expanse 1 inch.

Hab. Brazil, Espiritu Santo (Rogers, Mus. Oxford).

Zatrephes (?) istria, sp. n.

Female.—Head, collar, tegule, thorax, abdomen, and legs
red; palpi, the underside of the thorax, and abdomen white ;
antenna brown. Primaries reddish brown, with three rows
of reddish-yellow spots partly crossing the wing nearest the
base ; a wide dentated semihyaline yellow band crosses the
wing beyond the cell from the costal margin to the anal angle ;
the outer margin yellowish red; the fringe brown: second-
aries pink, semihyaline at the apex and partly along the costal
margin.

Eixpanse 1, inch.

Hab. Cayenne (Mus. Oxford).

Sallea unifascia, sp. 0.

Female.—Head, collar, and tegule pale brown; thorax and
abdomen above black, the sides, underside, and last three
segments of the abdomen chrome-yellow ; antennz black ;
legs pale brown. Primaries white, crossed beyond the middle
from the costal margin to the anal angle by a wide brown
band, the inner margin broadly bordered with brown from
the base to the anal angle: secondaries white, the inner
margin broadly bordered with dark brown.

Hab. Demerara (Mus. Caford).

Robinsonia flavomarginata, sp. n.

Female.—Head black, with four small white dots in front
and two behind; tegule white, edged with black ; thorax
chrome-yellow ; abdomen chrome-yellow on the upperside,
with a black band on each side extending from the base to
the anus, the underside white. Primaries brown, the costal
margin broadly bordered with chrome-yellow ; a wide white

new Species of Heterocera. 467

streak extends from the base along the inner margin almost
to the anal angle ; an oval-shaped white spot at the end of
the cell extending almost to the outer margin; a marginal
row of white spots from the apex to the anal angle: second-
aries white, the apex and outer margin clouded with blackish
brown.

Expanse 2 inches.

Hab, Colombia, Bogota (Aus. Oxford).

Phegoptera levis, sp. n.

Female.—Head, palpi, collar, tegule, thorax, and basal
half of the abdomen black, the anal half of the abdomen
chrome-yellow, with a black spot on the middle of each
segment; antenne and legs pale brown. Primaries pale
brown, dark brown at the base; three small tufts of bright
chrome-yellow scales close to the base; a wide dark brown
band crosses the wing almost to the inner margin; beyond
the cell a second band joining the first below the cell, forming
roughly a large V-shaped mark: secondaries dark brown;
the fringe of both wings brown.

Expanse 23 inches.

Hab. South Brazil (Rogers, Mus. Oxford).

Fam. Lithosiida.

Nodcozana xanthomela, sp. n.

Male.—Head yellow, antenne black; thorax and tegule
yellow; abdomen black, the anal tuft yellow; legs black.
Primaries bluish black, the basal half of the wing chrome-
yellow: secondaries black, the costal margin edged with
yellow from the base almost to the apex.

Expanse ? inch.

Hab. Amazons (Mus. Oxford).

Talara leucocera, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, and thorax pale fawn-colour;
abdomen pink; legs whitish fawn-colour. Primaries pale
fawn-colour, slightly darker near the apex: secondaries
pink.

Expanse 4/5 inch.

Hab. Brazil, Espiritu Santo (Rogers, Mus. Oxford).

Cyptonychia flaviceps, sp. n.
Male.—Head, thorax, and tegule pale yellowish white ;
antenne black ; the base of the thorax and abdomen black,

468 Mr. H. Druce on some

the anal segment yellowish: the underside of the head,
thorax, and legs black. Primaries and secondaries glossy
pale yellowish white.

Expanse 1} inch.

Hab. Mexico (Mus. Oxford).

Fam. Liparida.
Eloria grandis, sp. n.

Female.— Head yellow, antenne black, thorax and abdomen
brownish white, legs white. Primaries and secondaries semi-
hyaline sordid white; primaries with the costal margin edged
with brown, the apex broadly blackish brown.

Expanse 3 inches,

Hlab. Amazons (Mus. Druce).

This is the largest species in the genus.

Eloria meonia, sp. n.

Female.—Head, palpi, thorax, and tegule yellow ; antenne
black ; abdomen greyish white, yellowish on the underside ;
the legs black. Primaries and secondaries pale greyish
white, the veins all pale brown; the base of the primaries

pale yellow, the apex and part of the costal margin dusky.
Expanse 2 inches.

Hab. Guiana (Mus. Druce).

Xenosoma (?) lasea, sp. n.

Femole.— Head, antenne, thorax, and abdomen black, the
collar and each segment of the abdomen edged with pale
yellow; a yellow line on each side of the abdomen; legs
black. Primaries white from the base to about the middle,
then semihyaline black, the veins all black: secondaries
white, slightly dusky hyaline at the apex.

Expanse 2 inches.

Hab. W. Africa, Sierra Leone (Mus. Druce).

Aza eutelida, sp. n.

Male.—Uead, antenne, and thorax pale brown; abdomen
white; legs yellow. Primaries white, the costal and outer
margin edged with yellowish brown: secondaries white.

Expanse 1} inch.

Hab. Ecuador, Sarayacu (Buckley, Mus. Druce).

new Species of Heterocera. 469

Cypra (?) Forbest, sp. n.

Male.—Head, thorax, tegule, abdomen, and legs pale
yellow ; antennez black. Primaries semihyaline white,
yellowish at the base and partly along the costal margin,
which is edged with black : secondaries semihyaline white.

Expanse 2 inches,

Hab. New Guinea (Forbes); Fergusson Island (Meek,
Mus. Druce).

Antiphella vecontia, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, tegule, abdomen, and legs
pale yellow. Primaries and secondaries semihyaline yellowish
white: primaries, the costal margin edged with yellow, the
veins pale yellow; the fringes of both wings glossy yellowish
white.

Expanse 13 inch.

Hab. South Africa, Orange River (Mus. Druce).

Antiphella telesilla, sp. n.

Male.—Head, thorax, and abdomen brownish white ; an-
tenne and legs pale brown. Primaries and secondaries semi-
hyaline white: primaries slightly shaded with yellow at the
base, along the costal and outer margin; two small black
dots at the end of the cell; the fringe yellowish white.

Expanse 2 inches.

Hab, East Africa, Zanzibar (Mus. Druce).

Euproctis (?) mirma, sp. n.

Male.—Head, thorax, and tegule dark brown; abdomen
paler brown; antenne reddish brown; legs brown. Pri-
maries pale brownish fawn-colour; a small spot at the base,
one at the end of the cell, and two curved lines crossing the
wing from the costal to the inner margin, all black: second-
aries uniformly pale yellowish white.

Expanse 14 inch.

Hab. Timor (Forbes, Mus. Druce).

Euproctis titania, sp. n.
Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, tegule, abdomen, and legs

pale yellow. Primaries and secondaries pale yellow, the
primaries crossed from the costal to the inner margin by three

470 Mr. H. Druce on some

waved chrome-yellow bands.—Female similar to the male,
but darker in colour and without the bands on the primaries.
Expanse, g 1, 2 1445 inch.
Hab. Trobriand Island; Kiriwini (Meek, Mus. Druce).

Artazxa faventia, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, tegule, and legs dark
brown; abdomen black, the anal tuft white. Primaries
uniformly dark brown: secondaries bright chrome-yellow,
the base broadly black: the underside very similar to the
upperside.

Expanse 13 inch.

Hab. Fergusson Island (Meek, Mus. Druce).

Pantana eurygania, sp. n.

Male.— Head, antenne, thorax, tegule, abdomen, and legs
black. Primaries black ; a white spot at the end of the cell
and a large white spot below the cell extending to the inner
margin: secondaries white, the base blackish, the outer margin
broadly bordered with black from the apex almost to the anal
angle.

Expanse 14 inch.

Hab. Western China (Mus. Druce).

Ehanidophora agrippa, sp. n.

Male.—Head, thorax, tegule, and abdomen yellow ; palpi
and antenne black; legs black. Primaries fawn-colour, with
three large round yellow spots edged with black, the first in
the middle of the cell, the second and third at the end of the
cell one above the other ; ; the base and inner margin of the
wing streaked with yellow: secondaries chrome-yellow,
broadly bordered from the apex almost to the anal angle with
greyish fawn-colour; the fringe chrome-yellow.

Expanse 1? inch.

Hab. East Africa (Mus. Druce).

This species is closely allied to R. phedonia, Cram.

Dasychira viridis, sp. 0.

Male.—Head, thorax, and tegule brownish green; antenne
and palpi dark’ brown : abdomen and legs brown; the anus
pale brown. Primaries brown, thickly crossed from the costal
to the inner margin with pale green fine waved lines; the

new Species of Heterocera. 471

costal margin partly edged with white: secondaries uniformly
pale brown; the undersides of both wings pale brown.
Expanse CF inch.

Hab. Perak, 2000-3500 feet (Doherty, Mus. Druce).

Fam. Lasiocampide.
Odonestis Lidderdalii, sp. n.

Male.—Head, palpi, antenne, thorax, tegule, abdomen,
and legs dark brown. Primaries dark brown, irrorated with
greyish scales and crossed from the costal to the inner margin
by very faint waved brown lines: secondaries very dark

brown, the fringe reddish brown on the outer margin.
Expanse 2 inches.

Hab. Darjeeling (Lidderdale, Mus. Druce).

Odonestis Pryert, sp. n.

Male.—Head, collar, thorax, and tegule dark red-brown ;
antenne black; abdomen pale brown; legs reddish brown.
Primaries dark red-brown, crossed from the apex to the inner
margin close to the base by a dark red-brown line: second-
aries the same colour as the primaries, but rather paler.

Expanse 1? inch.

Hab. China, Hong Kong (Pryer, Mus. Druce).

Megalopyge mallas, sp. n.

Male.—Head, thorax, tegule, abdomen, and legs black-
brown; antenne brownish white. Primaries pale brown, the
costal margin from the base to the apex broadly white ; a
white line crosses the wing beyond the middle from the costal
to the inner margin: secondaries pale brown.

Expanse 1} inch.

Hab. South-east Brazil, Rio Janeiro (Mus. Druce).

Hydrias cloe, sp

Male.—Head, antenne, collar, ere thorax, abdomen,
and legs pale fawn-colour. Primaries pale fawn-colour,
crossed beyond the middle by a very fine white curved line
extending from the costal to the inner margin; a marginal
row of small white spots from the apex to the anal angle, the
last two brown: secondaries pale fawn-colour, with a mar-
ginal row of six semihyaline white spots, the first two small,
the third large, and the last three about equal size.

Expanse 1,5 inch.

Hab. Brazil, Sao Paulo (Mus. Druce).

472 Mr. H. Druce on some

Hydrias vocontia, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antennz, thorax, collar, tegule, abdomen,
and legs pale fawn-colour. Primaries pale fawn-colour,
crossed from the costal to the inner margin by five waved
paler fawn-coloured lines; the veins and a small spot at the
end of the cell white; two black spots on the apex and a
darker brown line close to the anal angle; the marginal line
white, edged with black; the fringe fawn-colour : second-
aries fawn-colour, the marginal line and the end of the veins
white, the fringe fawn-colour.

Expanse 13 inch.

Hab. Bolivia (Garlepp, Mus. Druce).

Hydrias gibea, sp. 0.

Male.—Head, antenne, and collar dark grey, almost
black ; thorax, abdomen, and legs greyish white. Primaries
grey, irrorated with black scales, the costal, apex, and outer
margin edged with pink ; a black spot at the end of the cell,
from which a pink line extends to the outer margin: second-
aries, the costal half of the wing grey, with pink margin, the
inner half pale brown.

Expanse 23‘; inches.
Hab. Venezuela (Mus. Druce).

Hydrias rages, sp. n.

Female,—Head, antennz, and front of the thorax pale fawn-
colour; thorax grey; abdomen and legs fawn-colour. Pri-
maries fawn-colour, irrorated with white scales and crossed
from the costal to the inner margin by three very indistinct
grey bands: secondaries pale brown, greyish at the apex and
round the outer margin.

Expanse 12 inch.
Hab. Amazons (Leech, Mus. Druce).

Hydrias pira, sp. n.

Female.—UHead, antenne, thorax, tegule, abdomen, and
legs reddish fawn-colour. Primaries dark reddish fawn-
colour, crossed from the costal to the inner margin by three
brownish-white zigzag lines (the first close to the base, the
second beyond the cell very indistinct, the third submarginal),
with some spots close to the apex; a brown streak extends
from the base to the end of the cell; the fringe alternately
fawn-colour and grey: secondaries reddish fawn-colour, with

——

new Species of Heterocera. 473

three brownish lines partly crossing the wing close to the
apex.

Expanse 2 inches.

Hab. Ecuador, Sarayacu (Buckley, Mus. Druce).

Hydrias ozora, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, tegule, abdomen, and legs
pale brown. Primaries pale brown, darkest at the base and
partly along the costal margin; a marginal row of dark
brown spots edged with white extends from the apex to the
anal angle: secondaries pinkish fawn-colour, shaded with
brown along the costal margin.

Expanse 12 inch.

flab. Ecuador, Sarayacu (Buckley, Mus. Druce).

Plegaptery# titia, sp. n.

Male.— Head, antenne, thorax, tegule, abdomen, and legs
dark reddish brown. Primaries and secondaries dark reddish
brown, palest on the outer margins of both wings; a round
black spot at the end of the cell and a greenish-brown spot
in the cell; both wings with a narrow black line extending
from the apex to the anal angle: underside bright reddish
yellow, with the spots and lines more distinct than on the
upperside.

Expanse 12 inch.

Hab. West Africa, Calabar (Jlus. Druce).

Taragama choba, sp. un.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, tegule, abdomen, and legs
very dark blackish brown, almost black. Primaries dark
reddish brown ; two white spots on the costal margin and a
white streak at the end of the cell: secondaries dark blackish
brown.

Expanse 1,3; inch.

Hiab. W. Africa, Lagos (Sir Alfred Moloney, Mus. Druce).

Taragama micha, sp. n.

Female.—Head, thorax, tegule, and legs reddish fawn-
colour; antenne black. Primaries pale greyish fawn-colour,
slightly reddish at the base, the apex urorated with black
scales: secondaries reddish fawn-colour, the outer margin
edged with black and grey spots.

Expanse 1? inch.

Hab. §. Atrica, Caffraria (Mus. Druce).

474 On some new Species of Heterocera.

Fam. Limacodide.
Paryphanta lacides, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, tegule, abdomen, and legs
pale cream-colour. Primaries pale cream-colour, crossed
from the costal to the inner margin by a number of fine
reddish-brown lines, those at the end of the cell being the
most distinct: secondaries the same colour as the primaries,
but rather darker and without any markings.—Female almost
identical with the male, but slightly darker and larger in size.

Expanse 1 inch.

flab. KE. Africa, Dar-es-Salem (Mus. Druce).

Narosa flaccidia, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, tegule, abdomen, and legs
dark brown. Primaries pale brown, from the base to the
middle very dark brown, edged with a whitish-brown line
beyond; a zigzag pale greyish line extends from the costal
to the inner margin; a marginal row of minute brown spots
from the apex to the anal angle: secondaries pale grey-
brown.

Expanse 1 inch.

Hab. Ki. Africa, Dar-es-Salem (Mus. Druce).

Miresa binea, sp. n.

Male.—Head, antenne, thorax, tegule, abdomen, and legs
pale fawn-colour. Primaries and secondaries pale fawn-
colour ; primaries crossed from the apex to the inner margin
close to the base with a fine brown line; a curved brown line
extends from the apex to the anal angle; a dark brown spot
at the end of the cell: secondaries, the outer margin spotted
with black.

Expanse 1} inch.

Hab, New Guinea, Port Moresby (Goldie, Mus. Druce).

Miresa aquila, sp. n.

Male.— Head, antenne, thorax, and tegule brown; abdomen
and legs fawn-colour. Primaries brownish fawn-colour; a
pale fawn-coloured band crosses the wing from the costal
margin to the anal angle, the outer side edged with black, the
apex darker brown, the fringe alternately dark brown and
fawn-colour: secondaries pale reddish fawn-colour.

Expanse | inch.

Hab. New Guinea, Port Moresby (Goldie, Mus. Druce).

On Orthoptera from the Transvaal &c. 475

LXIV.—Notes on a Collection of Gryllide, Stenopelmatide,
Gryllacride, and Hetrodide formed by Mr. W. L. Distant
in the Transvaal and other South- and East-African
Localities. By W. F. Kirsy, F.L.S., F.E.S., &c.

THE following list is preliminary to Mr. Distant’s compre-
hensive work on the Insects of the Transvaal, now in course
of preparation, and may be followed from time to time by
other lists of a similar character.

Two new species of Stenopelmatide are provisionally
referred to Carcinopsis; but they differ somewhat in the
structure of the head, and it is probable that many species of
the family remain to be discovered, which may necessitate a
revision of the generic characters.

ORTHOPTERA.

Gryllide.
GRYLLOTALPINGE.

Curtilla, Oken.
africana, Beauv.

GRYLLINA.
Brachytrypes, Serv.
membranaceus, Dru.
Acheta, Linn.
bimaculata, De Geer.
Gryllus, Linn.
domesticus, Linn.
burdigalensis, Latr.
posticus, Walk.
ignobilis, Walk.
melanocephalus, Sery., var.
Cophogryllus, Sauss.
Delalandii, Sauss.
Scupsipedus, Sauss.

marginatus, Afz. & Brann.

ENEOPTERIN4E.

Anandus, Sauss.
nigrosiynatus, Stal.

Stenopelmatide.

Carcinopsis, Brunn.
vittata, sp. 0.
punctulata, sp. 1.

Nasidius, Stal.
truncatifrons, Stal.

Gryllacride.

Gryllacris, Serv.
lyrata, n. Nn.
(=||alena, Brunn.)

Hetrodide.

Acanthoplus, Stal.
discoidalis, Walk.

Enyaliopsis, Karsch.
Petersit, Schaum.

Acanthoproctus, Karsch.
Howarthe, Kirb.

Gryllide.

GRYLLOTALPIN2.

Curtilla africana.
Gryllotalpa africana, Pal. de Beauv. Ins. Afr. Amér. p. 229, Orth.

pl. xx.c. fig. 6 (1805 ?).

4, Pretoria (Distant); 1, Barberton (Rendall) ; 3 (imma-
ture), Fort Johnston, Nyasaland (Rendall).

476 Mr. W. F. Kirby on

A common species throughout the warmer parts of the

Old World.

GRYLLINZ.

Brachytrypes membranaceus.
Gryllus membranaceus, Dru. Ill. Ex. Ent. ii. pl. xliii. fig. 2 (1778).
3, Fort Johnston, Nyasaland (P. Rendall) ; 1, Barberton
(Rendall) ; 1, Delagoa Bay (Junod).

A common and widely distributed African species.

Acheta bimaculata.
Gryllus bimaculatus, De Geer, Mém. Ins. iv. p. 521. n. 4, pl. xliii. fig. 4
(1773).
7, Pretoria (Distant) ; 2, Nyasaland (Rendall) ; 3, Bar-
berton (endall) ; and 1 without locality.
One or two of these specimens are immature.
A common species throughout the warmer parts of the

Old World.

Gryllus domesticus.
Gryllus domesticus, Linn. Syst. Nat. (ed. x.) i. p. 428, n. 20 (1758).
6, Fort Johnston, Nyasaland (Rendall).

Our familiar house-cricket ; a cosmopolitan species at the
present day.

Gryllus burdigalensis.

Gryllus burdigalensis, Latr. Hist. Nat. Crust. Ins. xii. p. 124. n. 3
(1804) ; Sauss. Mém. Soc. Généve, xxv. (1) p. 185 (1875).

4 92, Pretoria (Distant).

A variable and widely distributed species in the Mediter-
ranean region, Asia, and Africa. ‘There are also two immature
specimens from Pretoria which probably belong to the same
species.

Gryllus posticus.

Gryllus posticus, Walk. Cat. Derm. Salt. i. p. 30. n. 50 (1869).

Gryllus leucostomus, Sauss. Mém. Soc. Généve, xxy. p. 167 (1877).

Fort Johnston, Nyasaland (Rendall).

I think De Saussure is mistaken in referring this species
to G. leucostomus, Serv., and therefore preter to adopt
Walker’s name for it.

ea

Orthoptera from the Transvaal &e. 477

Gryllus ignobilis,
Gryllus ignobilis, Walk. Cat. Derm. Salt. i. p. 29. n. 47 (1869),

1, Fort Johnston, Nyasaland (Rendall); 1, Barberton
(Rendall).

Originally described from Natal. G. cgnobdilis, Sauss.,
from Java and Amboina, will require renaming.

Gryllus melanocephalus, var.
Gryllus melanocephalus, Serv. Ins. Orth. p, 342 (1839),
2, Nyasaland (P. Rendall).
A variable species, inhabiting Africa and the East Indies.

Cophogryllus Delalandit, var. (?).
Cophogryllus Delalandii, Sauss. Mém, Soc. Généve, xxv. p. 234, pl. xiii.
(18) fig. 2 (1877).
1, Brak Kloof, near Grahamstown.
Closely resembles Saussure’s description and figure, but
has six testaceous lines on the vertex, the two outer ones on
each side meeting at the eyes. ‘There is a black arch be-

tween the antenne over a testaceous space, separated from
the black vertex by a narrower testaceous arch.

Scapsipedus marginatus.

Acheta marginata, Afzel. & Brann. Achet. Guin. p, 25. n, 4, fig. 5a
(1804),

Scapsipedus marginatus, Sauss. Mém. Soc. Généve, xxv. p. 243 (1876).

Gryllus parallelus, Walk. Cat. Derm, Salt.i. p. 32. n. 53 (1869).

Gryllus diadematus, Gerst. Yon der Decken’s Reisen, ili. (2) p. 25, n. 37
(1873).

8, Pretoria (Distant).

A species inhabiting both East and West Africa.

E'NEOPTERINA»

Anandus nigrosignatus.
Rupilius nigrosignatus, Stal, Gifv. Vet.-Akad. Forh, 1876, (3) p. 66.
Anandus nigrosignatus, Sauss. Mém. Soc. Généve, xxv. p. 654 (1878).
1, Rustenburg (Krantz).
The markings of this species are not unlike those in

Saussure’s figure of his “apinopus platyceps, trom New
Caledonia.

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. iti. 35

478 Mr. W. F. Kirby on

‘Stenopelmatide,

Carcinopsis vittata.

. Long. corp. 31-40 millim.; pronoti 9-10 millim.; fem.
post. 17 millim.; tib. post. 23-26 millim. ; ovip. 15-19 millim.
_. Female.—Chestnut-brown, face varied with yellow; fasti-
gium of the vertex with a yellow spot on each side opposite
the base of the antenne, and two more at the extremity,
which is depressed, convergent, and truncated, separated from
the fastigium of the front by a slight suture; the middle
and sides of the face, as well as the antenne, palpi, and legs,
are mostly yellowish.

Pronotum with the deflexed lobes having the angles rounded
off and the lower border nearly straight. Abdomen with a
broad transverse black band occupying the hinder part of
each segment.

All the femora unarmed; front tibie with a middle and
terminal spine on the inner side above, but only the terminal
spine on the outer side; beneath, with a row of 5 strong
spines on each side. Middle tibiz with 4 spines above on
the outside and 3 on the inside; beneath, with 5 spines on
each side. Hind tibiz with a row of 7 spines on each side
above in addition to the terminal spines; beneath, with 3
slender spines before the terminal spines. Most of the spines
are very strong and tipped with black. The spines on the
four hind coxe are also strongly marked. Hind femora much
thickened ; ovipositor long, slender, upcurved.

‘lwo specimens from Barberton (P. Rendall).

Described from the larger specimen; the smaller one is
considerably paler in colour, inclining to reddish or yellowish
rather than reddish brown.

Probably allied to C. ornata, Brunn., from Madagascar ;
but that species is banded with black on the thorax and the
tibial spines are much smaller, as represented in the figure.

Carcinopsis punctulata.

Long. corp. 29 millim.; pronoti 7-9 millim.; fem. post.
18-20 millim.; tib. 15-18 millim. ; ovip. 10-15 millim.

Female.—Head, pronotum, and femora rufo-castaneous,
rest of legs and ovipositor darker, hind border of pronotum
and abdomen zneous brown.

Head above and pronotum nearly smooth; fastigium of
the vertex transversely wrinkled below, passing into the
fastigium of the front without interruption. Face thickly
punctured and blackish in the middle; cheeks reddish, with

Orthoptera from the Transvaal &e. 479

two strong converging carine; mouth-parts and tips of
mandibles mostly black. Pronotum with the angles of the
deflexed lobes rounded off, the lower edge nearly straight.

Abdomen thickly and closely punctured, especially on the
terminal segments.

Femora unarmed ; front tibiz with 2 spines above on the
inner side and with only the terminal one on the outer;
beneath, with 5 pairs of spines; middle tibie with 3 or 4
spines on each side above and 6 pairs below (inclusive of the
terminal ones) ; hind tibize with 7 spines on the outside and
8 on the inside (exclusive of the terminal spines) ; hind
femora considerably thickened and very deeply longitu-
dinally sulcated on the outer side.

1, near Eureka, Barberton (P. Rendall), type; 1, Zout-

pansberg (Kessner).
As usual, the larger specimen, which is here described, is

darker-coloured than the other.
This species may be allied to C. femoralis and C. fusca,
Brunn., but nothing is said of their being punctuated.

Nasidius truncatifrons,

Nasidius truncatifrons, Stil.
2, Barberton (Rendall) ; 1, Zomba, Nyasaland (Rendall).

Gryllacride.

Gryllacris lyrata, n. n.
Gryllacris alena, Brunner (nec Walker), Verh. zool.-bot. Ges, Wien,
XXXViil. p. 338 (1888).

1, Pretoria (Distant) ; 3 (immature), Barberton (P. Ren-
dall).
As this species requires renaming, I have taken the present
opportunity of doing so. It was described by Brunner from
Zanzibar, and the Natural History Museum possesses a pair
from Machuma, Taru Desert, British Hast Atrica, collected

by Mr. C. 8. Betton.
Hetrodidz.

Acanthoplus discoidalis.

Hetrodes discoidalis, Walk. Cat. Derm. Salt. B, M, ii. p. 280, n. 18
(1869).
1, Pretoria (Distant); 1, Zoutpansberg (Kassner).

These specimens agree with the paler mre described

480 Mr. O. P. Hay on
by Walker, except that they are of a reddish brown, reddish

on the thorax. The abdomen has a row of spines pointing
backwards on the median line and three rows of large black
oblong spots on the back and sides ; the median row macular,
the lateral rows partly connected behind, and each marked
rather behind its centre with a large reddish dot. On the
basal segments the black markings are more or less connected
at the base of the segments.

Enyaliopsis Petersit.
Hetrodes Petersii, Schaum, Ber. Ver. Akad. Berl. 1853, p. 777 ; Peters’s
Reise Mossamb. vy. p. 119, pl. vii. fig. 7 (1862).
1, Pretoria (Distant); 3, Barberton (Rendall); 2, Fort
Johnston, Nyasaland (Rendall) ; 1, Angola (Montero).
The frontal horn in some of these specimens is shorter and

broader than usual. There are two immature specimens
among them.

Acanthoproctus Howarthe.

Acanthoproctus Howarthe, Kirb, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (7) iii,
pp. 101, 145 (1899).

1, Brak Kloof, near Grahamstown.
The types were received from KE. Karoo, Cape Colony.

LX V.—On one little-known and one hitherto unknown
Species of Saurocephalus. By O. P. Hay *.

THE fish Saurccephalus lanciformis was first described and
named by Dr. Richard Harlan in 1824. This description
and the accompanying figures were reprinted in 1835 in the
same author’s ‘ Medical and Physical Researches’ $. The
specimen on which the genus and species were based had
been collected about twenty years previously, by Lewis and
Clark, at some locality probably in North-eastern Nebraska,
lt consisted of the greater portion of the left maxilla; but
was described by Harlan as belonging to the lower jaw. He
also regarded it as having belonged to a reptile allied to
Ichthyosaurus. Louis Agassiz first recognized the ichthyic

* From the ‘American Journal of Science,’ April 1899, pp. 299-304,
+ Journ. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad. (1) iii. pp. 831-337, pl. xii. figs. 1-5.
t Med. Phys. Res. pp. 362-366, pl., figs. 1-5.

Species of Saurocephalus. 481

nature of the remains* (although he confounded them with
an entirely distinct species) ; and his conclusions were cone
firmed by Richard Owen ft. Dr. Leidy ¢ corrected Agassiz’s
errors, and gave more accurate descriptions and figures of
the maxillary than had been furnished by Harlan.

No remains of Harlan’s species, other than the maxillary
referred to, have hitherto been described. Dr. E. W. Hil-
gard § has reported the species as occurring in the Vicksburg
group of the Eocene, but the identification was undoubtedly
erroneous. Dr. William Spillman || has also included this
species in his list of fossils belonging to the Tombigbee
greensand of the Cretaceous at Columbus, Miss. Although
this identification is less improbable than the former, we have
nothing to confirm its correctness.

Notwithstanding the scantiness of the material belonging
to the type species, our knowledge of the genus Sauroe
cephalus has been greatly increased through the descriptions
of closely related and more perfectly preserved species. For
this additional knowledge we are indebted to Cope and
Newton, and more recently to Alban Stewart, of the Uni-
versity of Kansas.

For some time I have had in my possession some remains
which on examination prove, in my judgment, to belong
to Harlan’s species. This material was collected for me in
the region of Butte Creek cafion, south of Wallace, Kan. ;
and the horizon is undoubtedly that of the Niobrara Creta-
ceous. My material consists of both the mandibles, the right
maxilla, the pterygo-palatine arch, and a few other bones.

The maxillary (fig. 1) is rather short and deep. The

Fig. 1.

portion belonging in front of the palatine condyle is missing;
but the condyle itself is present. The alveolar border is

* Poiss. Foss. v. p. 102. + Odontography, p. 180, pl. 55.
{ Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc. 1857, xi. pp: 91-95, pl. vi. figs. 8-11.
§ Report Geol. & Agric. M‘ssissippi, 1360, p. 142.

|| Op. cit. p. 389.

482 “Mr. O. P. Hay on

somewhat curved, and is occupied by compressed sharp-edged
teeth. Of these there are present twenty-eight; but if we
restore the bone, as we can safely do, I believe, by aid of
Stewart’s figures of S. dentatus *, we may conclude that there
were originally thirty-four teeth, possibly one or two less.
The root of the most anterior tooth has heen exposed by the
fracture, and its fang is seen to be distinctly faceted; so
that it presents just such an appearance as the tooth of
S. lanciformis tigured by Leidyt. ‘The roots of teeth situated
more posteriorly, whose fangs have been exposed by a tool,
are similarly faceted. Cope states { that S. lanciformis is
to be distinguished from his S. arapahovius by the lack of
facets on the roots of the teeth of the latter.

Leidy estimated that the maxilla in his hands had sup-
ported only twenty-six or twenty-eight teeth, and he was
probably correct. That maxilla, a larger one than the one
In my possession, seems to have been broken just behind the

alatine condyle. If now we take from Leidy’s drawing
the width of the bone at this point and apply it to the
alveolar border, we find that it includes ten teeth; the width
of my own specimen includes thirteen teeth. It is not im-
possible, however, that the specimen figured by Leidy had
been broken away some little distance behind the condyle.
At any rate, 1 do not believe that the difference of a few
teeth, other things being alike, would justify us in regarding
the specimens as belonging to different species.

As in the case of the original specimen, there is a shallow
groove running along the mesial surface of the maxilla,
about 5 millim. from the alveolar border, and from this groove
foramina, one for each tooth, enter the bone.

millim,
Depth of maxillary at palatine condyle ......... 38
Distance from anterior end of palatine condyle
to hinder end of maxillary

The right mandible is shown in fig. 2, five eighths the
natural size and showing the mesial surface. ‘The alveolar
border is straight and supports thirty-four teeth, of which
those occupying the middle of the border are the largest. In
general, they are larger than the teeth of the upper jaw.
The line which spans thirteen teeth in the maxilla spans ten
in the dentary. At the proximal end of the mandible there
must have been a process ot the dermarticulare, as in related

* Kan. Univ. Quart. vii. p. 25, pl. i. figs. 3a, 4a,
¥ Trans. Amer. Philos. Soc. xi. pl. vi. fig. 9.
} Cretaceous Vertebrata, p. 216.

Species of Saurocephalus. 483

forms; but in the specimen figured it is hidden by the over-
lying ceratohyal, which is not shown in the figure. At the
anterior end of the mesial face of the dentary there is found
a broad surface, rough with processes and pits, an indication
that the two dentaries were strongly bound together. The

extreme anterior end of each dentary is occupied by a surface
to which was evidently attached such a predentary as
Stewart has described as belonging to several related species.
A groove and a row of foramina are present on the median
face of the dentary.

millim.
Length of alveolar border ............ 112
Length of mandible from cotylus ... 130
Depth of mandible at last tooth ...... 56
Depth of mandible at symphysis... 34

Fig. 3 represents, five eighths the natural size, the pterygo-

palatine arch seen from within. A triangular piece is
missing from the anterior end, and the lower end of the

484 Mr. O. P. Hay on

ectopterygoid, pg, is defective. As I interpret the bones, the
arch is remarkable for the large size of the palatine, pa.
While the sutures which are represented in the figure are
very distinct, | am wholly unable to find one separating the
entopterygoid, ep, from the metapterygoid, mt.pg. On the
upper border of the arch, at the point indicated by the line s,
there appears to be an indication of a suture. If such it is,
it probably extends downwards to a point near the hinder
end of the palatine. The arrangement of the bones is quite
different from that found by myself in Xiphactinus *.

At the lower border of the anterior end of the palatine
there is a broad surface, v, which was probably in contact
with an articulating surface on the vomer. The notch seen
in the anterior end is occupied by another articulatory sur-
face, ma, for the anterior palatine condyle of the maxilla.
The anterior end of the upper border furnished an articulation,
pye, with the prefrontal, but this is elongated and rough, not
broad and smooth, as it is in Xiphactinus.

Anteriorly the palatine is thick and strong. On its outer
surface this portion is finely vermiculated above, while the
lower portion furnishes a concave articulation for the condyle
of the maxilla. The general appearance of this portion may
be seen from fig. 4, which represents the palatine of the next
species. Below the concave surface for the palatine condyle
of the maxilla there is seen a broad rough surface which
must have been applied to the inner face of the maxilla.
The greater portion of this is wanting in the specimen shown
in fig. 4. Its limits are indicated by the dotted line. On
the outer face of the metapterygoid, from the highest point
seen in fig. 3 there runs downward and backward a sharp
ridge which evidently bounded the orbit below. The portion
of the metapterygoid above and mesiad of this ridge formed
the floor of the orbit. This indicates that the orbit was
placed well backward. I find no satisfactory evidences of
the presence of teeth on the pterygoid and palatine bones.
If we add to the maxillary the probable antero-posterior
extent of the premaxillary, we shall find that it is approxi-
mately equal to the length of the lower jaw. Hence the
latter did not project beyond the upper jaw as it did in the
case of those species which Stewart has reterred to the genus
Saurodon,

Two characters seem to distinguish Saurodon from Sauro-
cephalus, viz.: the presence of notches, instead of foramina,
for the successional teeth and the projection of the lower

* Zoolog. Bull. ii. 1898, p. 39, fig. 7.

Species of Saurocephalus. 485

jaw beyond the snout of the fish. I have been inclined to
believe that the presence of these two characters is sufficient
to distinguish Saurodon as distinct. However, [ observe
in some specimens of this supposed genus that some of
the notches become closed into foramina; and we can easily
imagine all gradations between notches and foramina high
above the alveolar margin. Moreover, it is probable that
the other character will fail. Recently Mr. Stewart * has
published figures, without description, of remains which
he refers to Cope’s Saurodon phlebotomus. Mandible and
maxilla are shown. Measurements show that the maxilla,
without the premaxillary, is nearly as long as the alveolar
border of the mandible, so that it is almost certain that in
this species there was no projection of the dentary beyond
the snout. It seems probable, therefore, that Sawrodon must
be abandoned.

I present here (fig. 5) the right maxilla and the pre-
maxillary (fig. 4) of another species of Saurocephalus, which
1 regard as yet undescribed. It is especially distinguished
from described species by its elongated maxillary bone. ‘To

Fig. 5.

xX ZF

illustrate this, I compare it with Mr. Stewart’s S. dentatus,
which is itself a species with a rather long maxilla. In
S. dentatus the total length of the maxilla is 142 millim.,
its height at the palatine condyle 48°5 millim. My specimen
has the same height at the condyle; but the total length
is 172 millim., a difference of 30 millim., equal to 21 per
cent. of the shorter maxilla. My species, therefore, probably
had arelatively slender head and a larger mouth than had
S. dentatus.

In the maxilla figured I count alveoli for thirty-seven
teeth ; but in the maxilla of the other side, somewhat broken,

* Kan. Univ. Quart, vii. pl. xvi. figs. 4, 5.

486 On Species of Saurocephalus.

the teeth extend backward somewhat farther, so that there
must have been forty. At some time in the career of its
owner the right maxilla has been fractured obliquely across
its middle, and this accident has affected the neighbouring
teeth. One of these has thus become exposed nearly half-
way to the tip of the fang. ‘This exposure reveals the fact
that the fang is faceted, as it is in S. lanciformis. The
great length of the maxilla distinguishes this species from
both S. lanciformis and S. dentatus, and the facets on the
teeth distinguish it from Cope’s S. arapahovius. Mr. Stewart
has not described the condition of the fang of the teeth of
his S. dentatus.

In fig. 5 p.c. represents the palatine condyle; p.c.’ the
anterior palatine condyle which was applied to a surface like
that shown in fig. 3 at ma.

I propose to call the fish above described Saurocephalus
pamphagus*.

It has been supposed that the foramina, situated one
opposite each tooth and on the mesial face of the maxilla and
of the dentary, are for the transmission of nerves and vessels
to the teeth. Richard Owen t+ seems not to have so regarded
these foramina. He believed that they “ lead to the cavities
containing the germs of the successional teeth.” The latter
probably began their development in, or at the bottom of,
these foramina; but they soon passed more deeply into the
bone. In fig. 1 at ¢ there is found a developing tooth whose
tip is on a level with the row of foramina; but its root
extends high up into the bone. Nerves and vessels entering
the tooth by way of the foramina alluded to would have to
take a very tortuous course. ‘The functional tooth imme-
diately below the young tooth figured seems already to have
suffered some reduction of its fang.

The germs of the teeth of the Saurocephalide did not gain
a lodgment in the bones of the jaws in the same way that the
teeth of the higher vertebrates did. In the latter the fangs
were first planted in grooves in the dental borders of the
bones; and we must suppose that these grooves, at first
shallow, have, in successive generations, deepened and be-
come portioned off to form sockets. In the Saurocephalide
the teeth, developing originally on the dental border, have
gradually migrated away from this border, on the mesial face
of the supporting bones, and, by means of the foramina de-
scribed above, have made their way through the mesial wall

* Inde ruunt alii rapida velocius aura,
Pamphaguset ... » » »
Ovip, Met. Bk. iii. 1. 209.
+ Odontography, p. 131.

Mr. A. S. Woodward on Scapanorhynchus. 487

of the sockets. ‘The notches found in the species referred to
Saurodon show the earliest stages of this migration.

The distinguished paleo-ichthyologist, Mr. A. 8. Wood-
ward, has recently kindly called my attention to a suggestion
made by Prof. E. D. Cope that the Saurocephalide are
closely related to the Chirocentride, represented by the large
Chirocentrus dorab of the Chinese and Indian seas. I have
unfortunately had no opportunity to study a skeleton of
this fish; but, judging from the figures of the fish found
in Cuvier and Valenciennes, pl. 565, and in Day’s ‘ Fishes
of India,’ pl. clxvi. fig. 3, its external appearance must be
much like that of the extinct X¢phactinus. Nevertheless,
we have no intimations that the teeth of Chirocentrus are
fixed to the jaws in any way different from those of ordinary
fishes. The fixation of the teeth in sockets is an unusual
thing among fishes; and this character alone, it appears to
me, 1s sufficient to remove Xiphactinus and its allies from
the Chirocentride, although not necessarily to a great
distance. I suspect that the Saurocephalide will, when they
are better known, show distinctive characters in the vertebral
column also.

LXVI.—Note on Scapanorhynchus, a Cretaceous Shark
apparently surviving in Japanese Seas. By A. SMITH
Woopwarb, F.L.5.

In his paper on the Cretaceous fishes from Mount Lebanon
published twelve years ago *, the late James W. Davis gave
an unsatisfactory description and figure of a remarkable new
shark under the preoccupied generic name of Rhinognathus.
He pointed out some of its principal characters, and, notwith-
standing the demonstrated presence of an anal fin, placed the
fish in the family Spinacide. In 1889 f, after a detailed
study of the fine series of specimens in the British Museum,
the present writer published an amended definition of the
genus under the new name of Scapanorhynchus, placing it in
the family Lamnidee close to the well-known existing genus
Odontaspis. ‘The dentition was shown to be identical with
that of the latter genus; but other characters, such as the
slenderness of the fish, the peculiar elongation of the rostrum,

* J. W. Davis, “ On the Fossil Fishes of the Chalk of Mount Lebanon,
in Syria,” Trans. Roy. Dublin Soc. [2] vol. iii, (1887), p. 480, pl. xiv.
fig. 4.

+ A. S. Woodward, ‘Catalogue of Fossil Fishes in the British
Museum,’ part i. (1889), p.. 3d1,

488 Mr. A. 8. Woodward on Scapanorhynchus.

and the great extent of the anal fin, seemed to justify at
least its generic separation. At the same time it was
suggested that many so-called teeth of Odontaspis from the
Cretaceous formations of other parts of the world might
truly belong to Scapanorhynchus, and in that case would
indicate the very wide distribution of this shark in the seas
at the close of the Mesozoic era. It was also remarked that
while all the teeth in the two typical species from the Lebanon
seemed to bear a pair of lateral denticles, the hinder teeth
alone possessed these denticles in certain other species,
€. g., in Scapanorhynchus rhaphiodon from the European
Chalk *.

Within the last ten years nothing of importance has been
added to our knowledge of the Cretaceous Scapanorhynchus ;
but quite recently, in the present writer’s opinion, new in-
formation on the subject has come from an unexpected source,
A shark in all essential respects identical with the supposed
extinct genus in question has been described by Dr. D. S.
Jordan f from the deep sea off Yokohama, Japan. It was
obtained from a fisherman by Mr. Allen Owston, of Yokohama,
and presented by him to the Zoological Museum of the
University of Tokio. It was lent to Dr. Jordan for
description by Prof. Mitsukuri, and has received the new
generic and specific name, Mitsukurina Owstoni. The shark
is recognized by Dr. Jordan as more nearly related to
Odontaspis than to any other surviving genus; but, for
reasons not definitely formulated, it is considered to be the
type of a distinct family, Mitsukurinide.

The Lebanon fossils, of course, are marred by many
imperfections ; but it appears that, in all the generic characters
which can be compared, the living Mitsukurina agrees with
the Cretaceous Scapanorhynchus, Generic differences may
still be found, but they have yet to be pointed out. Like
that of the recent fish, the skeleton of the fossil may be
appropriately described as flexible. ‘The elongated rostrum
is identical in the two cases, only relatively longer in the
extinct species from Mount Lebanon. ‘The fossils naturally
do not exhibit the peculiar indentation between the mouth
and the rostrum. One specimen of Scapanorhynchus Lewisi
(Brit. Mus. no. 49474) clearly shows four branchial clefts
immediately in front of the pectoral fin, so that the fifth

* See especially figures by A. S. Woodward, “ Notes on the Sharks’
Teeth from British Cretaceous formations,’ Proc, Geol. Assoc. vol. xiii.
(1894), p. 196, pl. v. figs. 11-13,

+ D. S. Jordan, “ Description of a Species of Fish (Mitsukurina
Owstoni) from Japan, the gic of a Distinct Family of Lamnoid Sharks,”
Proc. California Acad. Sci. [3] Zool. vol. i. no, 6 (1898).

a

On some Cretaceous Clupeotd Fishes. 489

would doubtless be above the base of the pectorals, as recorded
by Jordan in Mitsukurina. Another specimen (Brit. Mus.
no. P. 4769) shows that the teeth in S. Lew7s? are about as
numerous as in Mitsukurina Owstoni, while, as in the latter
species, those at the mandibular symphysis are slightly
larger than those at the front of the upper jaw. All the
fins are known in the two fossil species from Mount Lebanon
except the anterior dorsal; and on comparing the figure of
such a specimen as B. M. no, P. 4020* with that of the
recent fish given by Jordan, it will be observed that the
differences in proportions are not of greater than specific
value. The arrangement of the basal cartilages of the fins,
so beautifully represented by Jordan, is unfortunately not
distinct in any of the Lebanon fossils; nor is there any clear
evidence of the claspers. The dense shagreen seems to be
similar in the recent and fossil forms.

The type specimen of Jlitsukurina Owstont measures
slightly more than a metre (42 inches) in length, and is
described as apparently young. ‘The known specimens of
Scapanorhynchus Lewisi cannot have attained a_ greater
length than 0°5 m., while the only complete specimen of
S. elongatus measures about 0°65 m. in length. Some of
the other species, however, represented in Cretaceous forma-
tions solely by their teeth, evidently attained considerably
larger dimensions, and must have been very much larger even
than the Japanese fish now captured. In Cretaceous seas it
was evidently a dominant type among the _predaceous
sharks,

LXVII.—WNote on some Cretaceous Clupeoid Fishes with Pecti-
nated Scales (Ctenothrissa and Pseudoberyx). By A.
SmirH Woopwarp, F.L.S.

A RECENT detailed study of the so-called Berycide of the
Cretaceous period has led to the recognition of several allies
of the herrings among them. ‘lhere is evidence of at least
two genera, whose ostevlogical characters necessitate their
reference to the tamily Clupeidee as detined in Dr. Giinther’s
British Museum Catalogue. Both are characterized by large
pectinated scales, like those of the existing Clupeoid genus
revoortia T ; but neither exhibits any ventral or dorsal ridge-

* A.S. Woodward, ‘Catal. Foss. Fishes B. M.’ part i, (1889), pl. xvii.
fig. 1.

+ Gill, Proc. Acad, Nat. Sci. Philad. 1861, p. 37; Jordan and Ever-

mann, “ Fishes of North and Middle America,’ bull, U.S. National
Museum, no. 47 (1896), p. 453.

490 Mr. A. S. Woodward on some

scales. The first genus has not hitherto been defined, and
may receive the new name of Ctenothrissa; the second has
already been described as Pseudoberyz.

CTENOTHRISSA, gen. nov.

Definition. Head large ; trunk deeply fusiform and laterally
compressed, but ventral border of abdomen flattened. Maxilla
robust and arched, with two large supramaxillary bones ;
mandible deep, a little prominent, and gape of mouth not
extending behind the middle of the large orbit ; minute teeth
on the margin of the jaws. Preoperculum only slightly
expanded ; operculum and suboperculum deep and narrow.
Vertebre from 30 to 40 in number, half being caudal. Pelvic
fins much enlarged and inserted far forwards; dorsal fin much
deepened, occupying about half of the back ; anal fin small;
caudal fin deeply cleft. Scales pectinated, large and regu-
larly arranged, none enlarged or thickened, and no dorsal or
ventral ridge-scales ; lateral line conspicuous.

Type. So-called Beryx vexillifer, Pictet, from Upper
Cretaceous, Hakel, Mount Lebanon.

The three best-known species are :—

(1) Ctenothrissa veuillifer, Pictet, sp.

Originally referred to Beryx by F. J. Pictet (Descript.
Poiss. Foss. Mt. Liban (1850), p. 8, pl. i. fig. 1). The
fine series of specimens of this species in the British Museum
clearly shows the Clupeoid head, which, indeed, is partly
represented in the restoration by Pictet and Humbert (Nouv.
Rech. Poiss. Foss. Mt. Liban (1866), pl. 11. fig. 3). The
premaxilla is very small and the loose arched maxilla rela-
tively large, with two supramaxillaries, as in Clupea, It is
quite clear that none of the fin-rays are spinous. The
largest specimens are about 0°07 m. in length, and the
specific characters may be briefly stated as follows :—
Length of head with opercular apparatus approximately
equal to the maximum depth of the trunk, and contained
about one and a half times in the length from the pectoral
arch to the base of the caudal fin. 380 vertebra. Pectoral
fins about half as long as the pelvic pair, which are inserted
beneath the former and comprise 8 stout rays, the foremost
only articulated distally, the others both divided and articu-
lated distally, the longest when adpressed to the trunk reaching
the anal fin; dorsal fin with 18 to 20 rays, the sixth longest ;
anal fin with 13 or 14 rays, opposite the hinder third of the
dorsal. Scales very finely pectinated. Known only from
the Upper Cretaceous of Hakel, Mount Lebanon.

Cretaceous Clupeoid Fishes. . 491

(2) Ctenothrissa radians, Ag., sp.

Originally referred to Beryx by Agassiz (Poiss. Foss.
vol. iv. pp. 4, 118, pl. xiv. d. fig. 7, pl. xiv.e. figs. 7-9).
Several specimens of this species in the British Museum
exhibit the typical Clupeoid head, one (no. P. 5699) being
especially well preserved and displaying the minute teeth
both on the maxilla and premaxilla. None of the fin-rays
are spinous, the appearance of a pelvic spine in the type
specimen, as described by Agassiz, being proved by other
specimens to be deceptive. The species attains a length of
about 0°25 m., and may be briefly defined thus :—Head with
opercular apparatus relatively smaller than in C. vevillifer,
and marked with a fine rugose ornament. About 40 ver-
tebree. Pelvic fins with 7 or 8 stout rays, which, when ad-
pressed to the trunk, extend to the anal fin; anal fin with at
least 12 rays, arising opposite the hinder end of the dorsal
fin. Scales very finely pectinated; lateral line extending
along the ninth series above that which forms the ventral
border of the flank. Common in the Lower Chalk of
England.

(3) Ctenothrissa microcephala, Ag., sp.

Originally referred to Beryx by Agassiz (tom. cit. pp. 4,
119, pl. xiv. 5. figs. 3-6, pl. xiv.c. fig. 10). As in the two
preceding species, so in this, the British Museum collection
demonstrates the presence of a Clupeoid head and the absence
of fin-spines. ‘This fish is rather elongated and attains a
length of about 0°15 m. The length of the head with oper-
cular apparatus equals the maximum depth of the trunk and
is contained about twice in the length from the pectoral arch
to the base of the caudal fin. Fins apparently as in C. ra-
dians, but the pelvic fins less elongated. Scales relatively
large and coarsely pectinated ; lateral line extending along
the fourth series above that which forms the ventral border
of the flank. Common in the Lower Chalk of England.

PSEUDOBERYX, Pictet and Humbert.
[Nouy. Rech. Poiss. Foss, Mt. Liban, 1866, p. 32.]

Definition. Head and opercular apparatus as in Cteno-
thrissa. Vertebre approximately 30 in number, halt being
caudal. Paired fins small, the pelvic pair inserted opposite
the dorsal, which is short-based and nearly median ; anal tin
smaller than the dorsal; caudal fin deeply cleft. Scales
pectinated, large and regularly arranged, none enlarged or
thickened, and no dorsal or ventral ridge-scales,

Type. Pseudoberyx syriacus, Pict. & Humb. (op. cit. p. 33,
pl. i. figs. 4-6).

492. Mr. T. D. A. Cockerell on new Species of Perdita.

The two species, P. syriacus and P. Botte, have already
been sufficiently well defined by Pictet and Humbert (op. cit.),
and an imperfectly defined larger species, P. grandis, is
described by J. W. Davis (Trans. Roy. Dublin Soe. [2]
vol. iii. (1887), p. 510, pl. xxvii. fig. 4). An examination of
the original specimen of P. longispina, Davis (loc. cit. p. 511,
pl. xxv. fig. 2), convinces me that it does not belong to this
genus, but is referable to an entirely distinct fish commonly
known as Clupea Botte, Pict. & Humb. Pseudoberyx has
hitherto been found only in the Upper Cretaceous of Hakel,
Mount Lebanon.

LXVIII.—Four new Bees of the Genus Perdita collected by
Dr. L. O. Howard in Mexico. By T. D. A. COCKERELL,
New Mexico Agricultural College.

Perdita Howard, sp. n.

? .—Length about 6 millim.

Bright lemon-yellow ; tips of mandibles darkened; frontal
fovea a black stripe; a narrow black line extending from
each lateral ocellus to the adjacent eye; abdomen with four
narrow entire black bands at the sutures between the seg-
ments; second abdominal segment with a longitudinal black
stripe on each extreme side; pleura without any black patch ;
tarsi more or less fuscous ; stigma faintly tinged with yel-
lowish ; nervures colourless ; marginal cell obliquely trun-
cate, its substigmatal and poststigmatal parts about equal
in length; second submarginal cell narrowed rather more
than half to marginal; third discoidal distinct. Head
ordinary ; lower part of face pellucid white; mesothorax
naked, a very narrow black line along its anterior margin ;
tegule colourless, transparent.

& .—Frontal fovea a black dot; no line from the ocelli to
the eyes; abdominal bands more obscure ; otherwise like the
female. Claws cleft.

Hab. S. José de Guaymas, Mexico, April 10, 1898 (Z. O.
Howard).

It is a pleasure to name this beautiful species after its well-
known and esteemed discoverer. P. Howardt, by its yellow
colour and the absence of a black patch on the pleura, comes
near to luteola, from which it is easily distinguished by
the abdominal bands. It is also a vernal species, whereas
luteola is autumnal. Seven specimens were obtained.

Perdita Ashmeadi, sp. n.
? .—Length about 43 millim.
Head and thorax shining dark olive-green; abdomen
flattened, very dark brown above, without marks, dull

17S ) oe ree fF eo eee ea eee

Mr. T. D. A. Cockerell on new Species of Perdita. 493

yellowish beneath; tubercles and face-marks cream-colour ;
legs yellow, tarsi brownish; a patch at end of hind femora,
hind tibiz, and tarsi brown. Head subquadrate, but not
particularly large, broader than long; clypeus low and broad ;
mandibles cream-colour, black at tips and reddish just before
tips; labrum and clypeus cream-colour, the latter with the
usual dots, and two longitudinal stripes vaguely indicated by
brownish stains ; supraclypeal mark present, produced above
for a short distance as a narrow stripe or line, separated
below from the clypeus by a distinct interval; dog-ear marks
present but extremely minute, not nearly touching the clypeus ;
lateral marks consisting of a broad stripe below, abruptly
narrowing just above the level of the antennal sockets to a
narrow stripe, which continues along the orbital margin as
far as the level of the middle ocellus ; scape with a yellow or
cream-coloured stripe beneath; flagellum very dark browa
above, somewhat paler beneath; face aud front without any
conspicuous pubescence; cheeks very thinly pubescent ;
front granular. Mesothorax very shiny, very thinly pubes-
cent, with a median furrow on its anterior half ; metathorax
bluer ; pleura wholly dark ; tegule transparent, with a cream-
coloured spot ; stigma pale brownish, with a darker margin ;
nervures brown, marginal cell obliquely truncate, appen-
diculate ; second submarginal narrowed about one half to
marginal, third discoidal distinct.

Var. a.—Hind border of prothorax yellow ; second abdo-
minal segment with a short transverse yellow stripe near the
base ; ventral surface of abdomen clear yellow.

Hab. 8. José de Guaymas, Mexico, April 10, 1898 (Z. O.
FTloward).

Named after the most active student of American Hymeno-
ptera. In my table of Perditain Bull. Denison Lab., P. Ash-

' meadi comes near to ¢ crasstceps, but it differs from that in

many particulars. ‘lhe var. a resembles rather tarda, but is
easily separated from it.
Perdita sonorensis, sp. n.

9 .—Length about 6 millim.

Black, with a metallic lustre and cream-coloared markings.
Head ordinary; front strongly eneous or dark olive-green,
with scattered distinct punctures; clypeus cocked-hat-shaped,
cream-coloured, with the usual black dots rather large, and
two median longitudinal black bars, very broad and slightly
coalescing ; labrum black ; mandibles ordinary, basal half
cream-colour, apical half rufous; face not very hairy; a
distinct linear groove running down from middle ocellus ; an-
tenne dark, flagellum light brown beneath; lateral face-marks
triangular, rapidly narrowing from a broad base to a point on

Ann. & Mag. N. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. i, 36

494 Mr. T. D. A. Cockerell on new Speedes of Perdita.

a level with the antennal sockets ; supraclypeal mark a trans-
verse band, more than twice as broad as long ; dog-ear marks

resent, separated by an interval from the lateral marks.

Jesothorax very shiny, with scattered punctures, greenish
and hairy in front, otherwise black and nearly nude; hind
margin of prothorax with an interrupted cream-coloured band ;
tubercles cream-coloured, with a dark spot ; metathorax dark
bluish, contrasting with the black scutellum and _postscu-
tellum ; tegule hyaline, with a cream-coloured spot; stigma
hyaline, with a brown margin; nervures brown; marginal
cell with the poststigmatal portion a little the longest; second
submarginal large, narrowing rather more than half to mar-
ginal ; third discoidal very distinct ; legs brown-black, anterior
knees and anterior tibia in front cream-colour; abdomen
black, with straight pale yellow bands, more or less inter-
rupted in the middle, at the extreme bases of segments 2 to 4,
and two spots representing a rudimentary band on the fifth
segment. Ventral surface dark.

Var. a.—Clypeus all black, except a minute mark at each
side adjacent to the lateral face-marks; fifth abdominal seg-
ment without spots.

Var. b.—Clypeus black, with the lateral corners cream-
coloured ; dog-ear marks mere specks; the three abdominal
bands reduced to inconspicuous widely separated pairs of
yellowish stripes.

Hab. S. José de Guaymas, Mexico, April 10, 1898 (LZ. 0.
TIoward). Four specimens.

Related to P. sewmaculata. In my table of Perdita in
Proce. Phil. Acad. 1896, it comes close to P. eaclamans, from
which it is separated by many characters. The var. 5 approxi-
mates to tarda, but is not really related to that insect.

Perdita Lucie, sp. n.

g.—Length about 4 millim.

Bright lemon-yellow, with dark markings. Head ordinary,
cheeks unarmed ; face nude, entirely yellow except the black
dots representing the frontal fovex ; cheeks yellow, sparsely
hairy ; vertex dark metallic green ; scape yellow, with a black
spot at the top behind; flagellum yellow beneath and blackish
above ; piothorax and sides and under part of thorax entirely
yellow; mesothorax practically nude, very shining dark
metallic olive-green, with the lateral margins narrowly yellow,
and a yellow patch near the hind margin; scutellum yellow,
with the sides dark; postscutellum similarly coloured ; meta-
thorax dark blue dorsally, yellow at sides; tegule hyaline ;
stigma hyaline, with a sepia-brown margin ; nervures light
brown ; marginal cell obliquely truncate, with its substigmatal
portion a little the longest; second submarginal narrowed

i

Geological Society. 495

about one half to marginal ; third discoidal indistinct; legs
entirely yellow except a brown stripe on the posterior tibia
and tarsus; abdomen yellow, with five broad entire dark
brown bands, or the fifth subobsolete, and the base of the first
segment dark ; venter entirely yellow. Claws cleft. Tips of
mandibles bright rufous.

Hab. 8. José de Guaymas, Mexico, April 10, 1898 (Z. O.
Lloward).

Named after Dr. Howard’s little daughter. This in my
tables comes near to P. Martini, but is easily distinguished by
the yellow sides of the thorax and the brown nervures. Seven
specimens. ‘There are sometimes two yellow spots on the
anterior half of the mesothorax.

Dr. Howard also collected at 8. José de Guaymas, on the
same day, examples of P. tarda, Ckll., var. P. salicis, Ckll.
(1 ¢), P. punctosignata, Ckll., and P. exclamuns, Ckll.(g 2).
Ife informs me that most, if not all, of the specimens of
Perdita from that locality were taken at the flowers of
mesquite (Prosopis giandulosu).

PROCEEDINGS OF LEARNED SOCIETIES.
GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY.

April 26th, 1899.—W. Whitaker, B.A., F.R.S.,
President, in the Chair.

The following communication was read :—

‘On three Species of Lamellibranchs from the Carboniferous
Rocks of Great Britain.’ By Wheelton Hind, M.D., B.S., F.R.C.S.,
EGS:

The first part of this paper describes a new species of Anthra-
comya Which occurs in the North Staffordshire and Manchester Coal-
fields at horizons higher than that characterized by A. Phillipsi.
The fossil is found at Etruria, Bradwell, Stoke-on-Trent, and
Fallowfield. It appears to indicate a special zone of shales and
Spirorbis-limestone about 300 feet below the Penkhull Sandstone,
and to be the only molluscan form known from the zone.

A new species of Carbonicola is next described, partly from
specimens previously supposed to be a gasteropod, a brachiopod, or
even a crustacean, and partly from better-preserved specimens
obtained from calcareous bands about 10 yards above the Bassey
Mine Ironstone in North Staffordshire. It appears to be the latest
species of this genus kuown, and to occur in higher beds than any
other species.

Lastly, a new species of Ctenodonta from Penton Linns (Dumfries-
shire) is described. It occurs in a marine shale below the highest
limestone of the locality, in beds referred to the horizon of the
Hurlet Limestone by the officers of the Geological Survey. The bed
contains gasteropods, crinoids, cephalopods, etc., with Productus
giganteus. The species has some resemblance to C. Halli, Barrois,

found in Spain.

496

IN DEX. to. VOLT:

ACANTHOPLUS, new species of, 142.
Acanthoproctus, new species of, 145.
Aclytia, new species of, 231.
Acronycta, new species of, 115.
Alcock, Major A., on Indian deep-sea
Crustacea, 1, 278.
Alpheus, new species of, 283.
Amphipods, remarks on, 237; re-
vision of, 350,
Anabas, new species of, 242.
Anderson, Capt. A. R. S., on Indian
deep-sea Crustacea, 1, 278.
Androcharta, new species of, 230,
Antiphella, new species cf, 469.
Aphractia, characters of the new
genus, 146.
Apseudes, note on species of, 327.
Arachnida, new, 89, 347, 411.
Arachnodromia, characters of the new
genus, 7.
Areas, new species of, 234.
Ariophanta, new species of, 409.
Artaxa, new species of, 470.
Arthropods, on the fusion between
the femur and trochanter in, 158.
Aspidiotus, new species of, 168,
Astyochia, new species of, 301.
Athyma, new species of, 104.
Austen, E. E., on the life-history
and systematic position of the
genus Xylmyia, 181.
Aza, new species of, 468.
Barrett-Hamilton, G. E. H., on the
water-voles of Bosnia and Western
Persia, 223 ; on the Sicilian species
of Eliomys and Glis, 226; on the
harvest-mice of the Palearctic
region, 541,
Batrachia, new, 273.
Beaumont, W. L, on Siriella ar-
mata and S frontalis, 151.
Belemnia, new species of, 232.
Benham, Prof. W. B., on Hutton’s
types of New Zealand earthworms,
136.
Benthesicymus, new species of, 282.

Benthochascon, characters of the new
genus, 10,

Books, new :—Haddon’s Study of
Man, 190; Trouessart’s Cata-
logus Mammalium, 193 ; Willey’s
Zoological Results, based on ma-
terial from New Britain, New
Guinea, &e., 264; Hampson’s
Catalogue of the Lepidoptera
Phalenz in the British Museum,
268 ; M‘Intosh’s Resources of the
Sea, 420.

Bordage, E., on the localization of
the regenerative surfaces in the
Phasmide, 117; on the fusion
between the femur and trochanter
in Arthropods, 158.

Borradaile, L. A., on the outeome of
a South-Sea voyage, 264.

Boulenger, G. A., on a specimen of
Lepidopus atlanticus from Ma-
deira, 180; on a new Osphro-
menoid fish, 242; on new Ba-
trachia, 273; on the South-Pacific
fishes of the genus Callanthias,
346.

Brancoceras ornatissimum, note on,
453.

Bufo, new species of, 276.

Bunea, new species of, 371.

Burr, M., on new species of Forficu-
laria, 162.

Butler, Dr, A. G., on the genus
Huphina, 201; on the Dismor-
phina of the New World, 373.

Caduga, new species of, 102.

Calastacus, new species of, 287,

Callanthias, on the 8.-Pacifie species
of, 346.

Callianassa, new species of, 288.

Calliploea, new species of, 103.

Calman, W. T., on the British Pan-
dalide, 27.

Camatopsis, characters of the new
genus, 13.

Carcinopsis, new species of, 478.

—

Ee

INDEX. 497

Catocala, new species of, 115.

Celebes, on the origin of the fauna
of, 121.

Cerura, new species of, 464.

Cheerilus, new species of, 416.

Chapman, F., on Foraminifera from
the Cambridge Greensand, 48,
302.

Cheloctonus, new species of, 413.

Chilton, Dr. C., on the sexual cha-
racters of Ligia oceanica, 197.

Chloritis, new species of, 410.

Chlorotocus gracilipes, new variety
of, 284.

Chrysomphalus, new species of, 169.

Cispia, new species of, 112.

Citharoscelus, characters of the new
genus, 347.

Clenora, characters of the new
genus, 109,

Coccide, new, 45, 168.

Cockerell, T. D. A., on Central-
American Coccide, 167; on four
new species of Perdita, 492.

Coleoptera, new, 178, 461.

Cosmia, new species of, 114.

Cosmosoma, new species of, 229.

Crick, G. C., on new or little-known
Goniatites from the Carboniferous
limestone of Ireland, 429.

Crostosoma, new species of, 229,

Crustacea, new, 1, 67, 241, 278.

Ctenopoma, new species of, 242.

Ctenothrissa, characters of the new
genus, 490,

Cyclophylla, new species of, 369.

Cypra, new species of, 409.

Cyptonychia, new species of, 467.

Cyrestis, new species of, 105,

Cy theridea castanea, on the occur-
rence of, at Buenos Ayres, 454,

Dasychira, new species of, 470,

David, Prof. T. W. E., on the paleo-
zoic radiolarian rocks of New
South Wales, 195.

Dendrobates, new species of, 275.

Dercas, new species of, 107.

Devara, new species of, 298.

Digama, new species of, 463.

Dismorphia, new species of, 380.

Dismorphina of the New World, re-
vision of the, 373.

Distant, W. L., on new Cicadas from
the Transvaal, 81; on new S.-
African insects, 178, 461.

Donald, Miss J., on the genera Fc-
tomaria and Hormotoma, 425.

D’Orbigny’s Dictionnaire Universel
d’Histoire Naturelle, dates of,
350.

Druce, H., on new species of Hete-
rocera, 228, 293, 465.

Earthworms, on Hutton’s types of
New Zealand, 136.

Eliomys, new species of, 226.

Eloria, new species of, 468,

Eryonicus, new species of, 290.

Esthema, new species of, 232.

Eublemma, new species of, 462.

Eucereon, new species of, 231.

Euchera, new species of, 111.

Euchromia, new species of, 230,

Eudesmia, new species of, 293.

Eudule, new species of, 293.

Euerythra, new species of, 235.

Euproctis, new species of, 469.

Eupterote, new species of, 108.

Evius, new species of, 466,

Exotrocha, new species of, 235.

Fishes collected during the Peary
Auxiliary Expedition, list of the,
214; new, 242, 356, 480; on some
Cretaceous clupeoid, with pecti-
nated scales, 489.

Flavinia, new species of, 296,

Foraminifera from the Cambridge
greensand, on, 48, 302; on tertiary,
from Borneo, 245.

Forficula, new species of, 165.

Forficularia, new species of, 162.

Frondicularia, new species of, 303.

Gamble, F. W., on Hippolyte fasci-
gera, 150,

Geological Society, proceedings of
the, 195, 270, 349, 425, 495.

Getta, new species of, 295.

Glis, new species of, 228.

Glyphioceras, new species of, 445.

Godman, F. D., on new species of
Napeogenes, 155,

Gomphoides, new species of, 368.

Goniatites from the Carboniferous
limestone of Ireland, on, 429.

Grammatodon, note on the genus, 47.

Grave, C., on the embryology of
Ophiocoma echinata, 456,

Green, E. E., on a new scale-insect,
45,

Griffin, L. E., on the tentacles of
Nautilus pompilius, 170.

Grijs, P. de, on the faculty of
changing colour in reptiles, 396,

Gryllacris, new species of, 479.

Haliporus, new species of, 230.

498

Haplophragmium, new species of,
62.

Harrisina, new species of, 232.

Hasora, new species of, 107.

Hay, O. P., on two species of Sauro-
cephalus, 480.

Helix Lowei, on a second recent
shell of, 79.

Hemiplecta, new species of, 410.

Hemiscorpius, new species of, 413.

Hercodera, new species of, 178.

Heron, F. A., on Papilio glycerion,
119.

Heteroptera, new, 177.

Hetrodidz, notes on the family, 97,
141, 479.

Hind, Dr. W., on lamellibranchs
from the Carboniferous rocks of
Great Britain, 495.

Hinde, Dr. G. J., on the Radiolaria
of New South Wales, 270; on
Radiolaria in chert from Cornwall,
349,

Hippolyte fascigera and H. gracilis,
observations on, 147.

Holland, R., on tertiary Foraminifera
from Borneo, 245.

Holmgqvist, O., on the fishes collected
during the Peary Auxiliary Expe-
dition, 214.

Holophzea, new species of, 230.

Holt, E. W. L., on Siriella armata
and S. frontalis, 151.

Homola, new species of, 5.

Homoptera, new, 45, 81, 168.

Hoplitis, new species of, 463.

Horvath, Dr. G., on a new species of
Gerridide, 177.

Humboldt and Bonpland’s Voyage :
Observations de Zoologie, dates of,
428.

Huphina, revision of the genus, 201 ;
new species of, 208.

Hydrias, new species of, 471.

Hygrotrechus, new species of, 177.

Hyla, new species of, 276,

Hymenoptera, new, 492.

Hypolamprus, new species of, 116.

Hypsophrys, new species of, 6.

Huza, new species of, 116.

Isopoda, on Madeiran, 66; British,
70, 317.

Jassa, notes on the genus, 237, 394.

Josoides, new species of, 293.

Kirby, W. F., on the family Hetro-
did, 97, 141; ona collection of
Odonata from Panama, 362; on

INDEX.

Orthoptera from the Transvaal &c.,
475,

Lebeda, new species of, 464.

Leiosoma, new species of, 236.

Leipsuropus, characters of the new
genus, 241.

Lenodora, new species of, 113.

Lepidoptera, new, 102, 179, 208, 228,
243, 293, 871, 375, 462, 465.

Lepidopus atlanticus, note on a speci-
men of, 180,

Leptognathia Lilljeborgi, note on,
335,

Lichtenstein’s Catalogus rerum natu-
ralium, note on, 272.

Ligia oceanica, on the sexual cha-
racters of, 197.

Lituola, new species of, 54.

Loncheres, new species of, 153.

Lucasius, new species of, 67.

Mammalia, new, 40, 44, 152, 225,
226, 344.

Marmosa, new species of, 42, 44.

Megalopyge, new species of, 471.

Merionceda, new species of, 4ti1.

Metaxanthia, new species of, 465.

Microhyla, new species of, 275.

Microjassa, characters of the new
genus, 240.

Micropus, new species of, 297,

Microtus, new subspecies of, 225.

Mimeusemia, new species of, 112.

Miresa, new species of, 474.

Mitsukurina Owstoni, note on,
488.

Mollusea, new, 409, 429.

Moschoneura, new species of, 375.

Munida, new species of, 18.

Munidopsis, new species of, 19.

Mus minutus, note on the subspecies
of, 342.

Myonia, new species of, 297.

Napata, new species of, 250,

Napeogenes, new species of, 155.

Narosa, new species of, 110, 474.

Nautilus pompilius, on the tentacles
of, 170.

Nectomys, new species of, 41.

Nelo, new species of, 299.

Neptis, new species of, 245.

Newton, E. T., on the remains of
Amia from the Isle of Wight, and
on a Megalosauroid jaw from
Bridgend, 271.

Newton, R. B., on tertiary Forami-
nifera from Borneo, 245.

Nodozana, new species of, 467.

len i, ee ee a es

INDEX. 499

Norman, Canon A. M., on the land
Isopoda of Madeira, 66 ; on British
laud Isopoda, 70, 317 ; op arecent
shell of Helix Lowei, 79.

Nudaurelia, new species of, 372.

Nummulites javanus, notes on, 252.

Odonata from Panama, on, 362,

Odonestis, new species of, 471.

Ophiocoma echinata, on the embryo-
logy of, 456.

Opisthacanthus, new species of, 412.

Opisthocosmia, new species of, 164.

Opisthophthalmus, new species of,
411.

Orbitoides, new species of, 257.

Ormiscodes, new species of, 235.

Orthoptera, new, 142, 162, 478.

Oryzomys, new species of, 152.

Oxyprosopus, new species of, 178.

Palmer, T.S., dates of D’Orbigny’s
Dictionnaire Universel d’ Histoire
Naturelle, 350.

Pandalide, on the British, 27.

Pandalina, characters of the new
genus, 37.

Pantana, new species of, 470.

Papilio glycerion, note on, 119.

Parabuthus, new species of, 419,

Paracorophium, characters of thenew
genus, 241, 350.

Parajassa, definition of the new
genus, 240,

Paralomis, new species of, 15.

Parapenzeus, new species of, 279.

Paryphanta, new species of, 474.

Penoa, new species of, 103.

Peramys, new species of, 154.

Perdita, new species of, 492.

Pericopis, new species of, 253.

Pericyclus, new species of, 430.

Perizea, new species of, 236,

Peripatus, remarks on a new species
of, 264,

Phegoptera, new species of, 233,
467.

Pheochlena, new species of, 294.

Phalera, new species of, 463.

Phasmide, on the regenerative sur-
faces in the, 117.

Phintia, new species of, 298.

Pheenicoprocta, new species of, 228.

Phyllobates, new species of, 274.

Pilumnoplax, new species of, 11.

Pinnoteres, new species of, 14.

Pittman, E. F., on the palozoic
radiolarian rocks of New South
Wales, 195,

Planema, new species of, 244.
Planispira, new species of, 411.
Platypleura, new species of, 81.
Plegapteryx, new species of, 473.
Plesionika, new species of, 285.
Plethodus, note on the Cretaceous
fish, 353 ; new species of, 356.

Pocock, R. I., on the genus Peeci-
lotheria, 82; on a new Thera-
phosid spider, 347 ; on new species
of scorpions, 411.

Podocerus, notes on the genus, 237,
394.

Peecilotheria, remarks on the genus,
82; new species of, 89.

Polypzetes, new species of, 301.

Polyptychus, new species of, 179.

Pontocaris, new species of, 282.

Precis, new species of, 103.

Procris, new species of, 231.

Prolecanites, new species of, 451.

Pseudomya, new species of, 230.

Ptisciana, new species of, 114.

Ptychogaster, new species of, 23.

Pusiola, new species of, 462.

Pygidicrana, new species of, 163.

Pylocheles, new species of, 14.

Quelch, J.J., on the poisonous snakes
of British Guiana, 402.

Rana, new species of, 273.

Rappia, new species of, 274.

Reptiles, on the faculty of changing
colour in, 396.

Rhabdogonium
variety of, 305.

Rhanidophora, new species of, 470.

Rhysota, new species of, 409.

Richardina, new species of, 291.

Robinsonia, new species of, 466.

Rowe, Dr. A. W., on the genus
Micraster, 425,

Sallea, new species of, 466.

Sangala, new species of, 300.

Sarcinodes, new species of, 110.

Saurocephalus, new species of, 480.

Scapanorhynchus, note on, 487.

Sciurus, new subspecies of, 40.

Scorpions, new, 411.

Scott, T., on the occurrence of Cythe-
ridea castanea at Buenos Ayres,
454.

Scotura, new species of, 301.

Sharpe, Miss E. M., on two new
butterflies from Nandi, 243; on
new moths from the Niger, 371.

Sherborn, C. D., on Lichtenstein’s
Catalogus rerum naturalium, 272 ;

excavatum, new

500

dates of D’Orbigny’s Dictionnaire
Universel d’Histoire Naturelle,
350; dates of Humboldt and Bonp-
land’s Voyage: Observations de
Zoologie, 428.

Siphoneecetes, new species of, 241.

Siriella armata and S. frontalis,
observations on, 151,

Smith, E. A., on new land-shells
from Flores &c., 409.

Snakes, on the poisonous, of British
Guiana, 402.

Sollas, Prof. W. J., on Silurian
Kchinoidea and Ophiuroidea, 426 ;
on the occurrence of sponge-spi-
cules in the carboniferous lime-
stone of Derbyshire, 427.

South-Eastern Union of Scientific
Societies, date of meeting of, 349.

Spilarctia, new species of, 234.

Stauropus, new species of, 110.

Stebbing, Rey. T. R. R., on the true
Podocerus and some new genera
of Amphipods, 237; revision of
Amphipoda, 350.

Subula, remarks on the generic name,
182.

Swinhoe, Col. C., on new Oriental
Lepidoptera, 102.

Tajuria, new species of, 106.

Talara, new species of, 467.

Taragama, new species of, 465, 473.

Textularia, new species of, 56.

Thomas, O., on small mammals from
Peru, 40; on a new species of

INDEX.

Marmosa, 44; on new mammals
from 8. America, 152.

Thosea, new species of, 111.

Thyrgis, new species of, 295.

Tibicen, new species of, 82.

Topomesa, new species of, 111.

Trachycarcinus, new species of, 8.

Trithemis, new species of, 364,

Urodacus, new species of, 414.

Uroptychus, new species of, 25.

Vitriwebbina tuberculata, note on,
315.

Walker, A. O., on Hippolyte _fasci-
gera and H. gracilis, 147; on
Podocerus and Jassa of Leach,
394,

Walkeriana, new species of, 45.

Weber, Prof. M., on the origin of
the fauna of Celebes, 121.

Woods, H., on the genus Gramma-
todon, 47.

Woodward, A. Smith, on the Cre-
taceous fish Plethodus, 353; on
Scapanorhynchus, 487; on some
Cretaceous clupeoid fishes with
pectinated scales, 489.

Xenosoma, new species of, 468.

Xesta, new species of, 410,

Xylomyia, on the life-history and
systematic position of the genus,
181.

Zatrephes, new species of, 466,

Zethes, new species of, 115.

Zygzena, new species of, 231.

END OF THE THIRD VOLUME.

PRINTED BY TAYLOR AND FRANCIS,
RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET.

nav. & Mag. Nat. Hist. §.7 Vol ML PU. XVI.

[eT > LT.

AS Site bab °° A\\\ j \
/ / ede ih / ea a ee ei, at ye 4) iidd
ih Wily kg Mie Hh MTEL Ti nT |

e hie
aoa +
9 89

89s 8

Fig.1,J.S.del. Mintern Bros. lth.
Figs.2,3,A.S .del.ad-mnat.

i: Af ; mh a A
an ah ' n r ]
ie . hy Uhr Oi
Baie deeety Meee
Ns we Gk re
Ga) 2 pak ,
on

‘

Wit

ir

fi ?

BINDING SECT. JUL 2 - 1968

QH The Annals and magazine of
a natural history

PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY

PDD ERD Mua DAE SAME OR NET CNTR SRE se pi vie Bs mE

OOS ray Se Oe

er eth OWT SE EW

ON TENET,
an te

rok ee ee a tee
ahaa tint th a a ed
a WN Seer URN Yen EES

FN OS TE etry me I 5 gE Ae N

oe
ey

Vee

é ae
FO ERIN. 29 CW Phe
OBE PRUE RL ETE A BY ON ery

a

aes

~ So ses 9 Me ke Spas
prAna hatte Aa Real 8 a
ROP RERTE COS OS AU ene

vuv A
Py VA hed a) haw
Mer 09 8 Ve

ave! *) RE ON me
ee ee rok patent ta tae +4 Res echoes Ute
ts him aieand | a pikes tk ai pha ams ohh. ok hohe hes oe Mee amie a hate

Pr We Wer yee :
yee Tee Bear me BAC NS we Rl ee Sede
Se NS IT te PN ey

SPO